MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM BRISBANE VOLUME 35 1 JUNE 1994 PART 1 CONTENTS PART 1 (issued 1 June 1994) BABA, K. Deep-Sea galatheid crustaceans (Anomura; Galatheidae) collected by the "Cidaris I" Expedition off central Queensland, Australia... 2... eet ee Ihm neues \ CLIFFORD, H.T. & CARNEY, L.G. A non-destructive technique for determining the shapes in situ of permincralized ѕеейз.............. 23 COOK, А.С. A septate gastropod from the Silurian Bungonia Limestone, New South УУаїез-.,.......‚...,.„.... 27 COUPER, P.J., COV ACEVICH, J.A. & LETHBRIDGE, P.J. Carlia parrhasius, а new Queensland skink а... ec aaa казак 31 DAVIE, P.J.F. Revision of Neosarmatium Seréne and Soh (Crustacea: Brachyura: Sesarminae) with descriptions of к Т-А ааа pie at ale esi) a e telat weed set en АЛИГИ ГИ КИИР 35 DAVIES, V.T. The huntsman spiders Hetéropoda Latreille and Yiinthi gen.nov. (Araneae: Heteropodidae) in Australia 75 GUO, Z. & CHOY, S.C. Caridina pedicultrata, а new freshwater atyid shrimp (Caridea: Atyidae) from Hunan Province, China 123 HUNT, G.S. Solenozetes gallonae sp.nov., first record of the family Plasmobatidae in Austrajia (Acari: Oribatida) . 129 KOHOUT, RJ. New synonymy of three Australian ants (Formicidae: Formicinae: Polyrhachis) .........-........ 135 KOHOUT, RJ, Polyrhachis lama, a new ant from the Tibctan plateau (Formicidae: Еогтісіпае).................. 137 LIMPUS, C.J., COUPER, P.J. & READ, M.A, The Green Turtle, Chelonia mydas, in Queensland: population structure in a warm temperate еер ated. eiu qe ally т Flop pte Oe A alle ofa! Bebe aj mat EE СЕ. depen medie di 139 MCcALLAN, L.A.W. John Gilbert's missing months. ааа ааа ааа ааа hae n 155 McKENZIE, E.D. & PRENTICE, S.A. The first underground mains for electricity supply in Brisbane ................................ 181 NGOC-HO, N. Notes on some Indo-Pacific Upogebiidae with descriptions of four new species (Crustacea; Thalassinidea).. 2.02... essere mmm 193 PATERSON, К.А. An annotated list of recent additions to the cetacean collection in the Queensland Museus.......... 217 ROTH, L.M. New Queensland cockroaches of Macrocerca Hanitsch and Periplaneta Burmeister (Blattidae)... . . . 225 SHORT, J.W. A new species of freshwater crab (Sundathelphusidae) from Cape York Peninsula. ...,............ 235 STANISIC, J. An ecologic and biogeographic study of a new Tertiary land snail from mideastern Queensland (Pulmonata; Caryodidac).... 0.2... ce eet ee I e amr Ri rne 241 THWAITES, A.J. & WILLIAMS, L.E. The summer whiting fishery in southeast Queensland ............. bé ts beh teed Cate eei tine 249 VOLK, Р, Catalogue of meteorites, tektites and associated material in the Queensland Museum. .............. 255 WALKER, J.A., КОСО, D. & ROSE, Н.А. Nine new species of Geoscapheinae (Blattodea; Blaberidae) from Ашзїгайа...................... 263 WHITTINGTON I.D. & LAST, Р.К. Himantura fai Jordan & Seale (ундай орев, Dasyatididae) from Heron Island and its monogenean parasite fauna... 2. eee tence treet be teenies 285 (continued ) CONTENTS (continued) NOTES COOK, A.G. & TURNER, S. Middle Devonian scolecodonts from north Queensland .......... 0. ccc cect ааа 22 COUPER, P.J., COVACEVICH, J.A. & MORITZ, С. Designation of the type species of Saltuarius, and other data on the репи$......................... 26 INGRAM, GJ. The holotype of Mocoa spectabilis De Vis 1988 ......... cece eee eee eh ene 34 IRWIN, S. Notes on behaviour and diet of Varanus teriae Sprackland, 1991............................... 128 LINDENMAYER, Р.В. & VIGGERS, K.L. Northem range limits of the long nosed potoroo, Potorous tridactylus ........................... 180 PATERSON, R.A. Unusual humpback whale sightings at Cape Moreton ........................................ 224 ROBERTS, L. New data on Cryptoblepharus fuhni, a poorly known skink from Queensland ..................... 234 WILLIAMS, S. The importance of riparian habitats to vertebrate assemblages in north Queensland woodlands........ 248 PART 2 (issued 25 July 1994) RAVEN, R.J. Mygalomorph spiders of the Barychelidae in Australia and the western Расїйс.................... 291 DEEP-SEA GALATHEID CRUSTACEANS (ANOMURA: GALATHEIDAE) COLLECTED BY THE ‘CIDARIS I’ EXPEDITION OFF CENTRAL QUEENSLAND, AUSTRALIA КЕШЛ ВАВА Baba, К. 1994 06 01: Deep-sea galatheid crustaceans (Anomura: Galatheidac) collected by the ‘Cidaris I’ Expedition off central Queensland, Australia. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1): 1-21. Brisbane, ISSN 0079-8835. A collection of deepsea galatheid crustaceans obtained by the *Cidaris I’ Expedition off the Central Queensland Shelf contains 20 species, five of which are described as new: Bathymunida inermis, Munida alia, M. declivis, M. rubridigitalis, and Munidopsis cidaris. Galathea inconspicua Henderson, 1885 is recorded for the first time since the unique male holotype taken by the ‘Challenger’ off Banda Island. The ranges of 13 species are extended. (Crustacea, Anomura, Galatheidae, deepsea, Australia, Indo-West Pacific. К, Baba, Faculty of Education, Kumanwto University, 2-40-1 Kurokami, Kumamoto 860, Japan; 21 October 1993. Tn 1986, under the research project “The deep- sea benthos off the Great Barrier Reef Shelf and adjacent Coral Sea", 113 deepsea stations were worked by the ‘Cidaris Г (Dr M. Pichon, Cruise Leader). Crustaceans from the samples obtained have been studied by Bruce (1989, 1990), Cros- nier (1988), Macpherson (1990), Richer de For- ges & Guinot (1990) and Poore & Bardsley (1992). The present material comprises 112 specimens in 24 lots taken from 15 stations in depths ranging between 296 and 1609m. They are divided among 20 species of the Galatheidae. Twenty-two species of the Galatheidae have hitherto been known from Australia (Stimpson, 1858; Haswell, 1882a, 1882b; Miers, 1884; Henderson, 1885, 1888; Whitelegge, 1900; Grant & McCulloch, 1906; Balss, 1921; McNeill, 1926, 1968; Hale, 1927; Boone, 1935; Lewinsohn, 1967; Haig, 1973, 1974; Baba, 1986). Many of these are shallow-water inhabitants, and thc deep- sea forms (occurring in transitional depths) are represented by only five species: four of Munida and one of Galarhea. There is no previous record for the deepsea Munidopsis from Australia. Among the 20 species reported herein, 18 are recorded for the first time from Australia, includ- ing five new species (one of Bathymunida, three of Munida, one of Munidopsis). No chirostylids are included in the collection, although six (one Chirostylus, one Eumunida and four Uroptychus) are known to occur in Australian waters (Hender- son, 1888; Haig, 1974; Baba, 1986; de Saint Laurent & Macpherson, 1990). Measurements are shown in parentheses under the heading of 'Material Examined', indicating the postorbital carapace length. The material is deposited in the Queensland Museum, Brisbane (QM). SYSTEMATICS Bathymunida Balss, 1914 Bathymunida inermis sp. nov. (Fig. 1) MATERIAL EXAMINED Ноготүрє: ovig. 9 (3.0mm), QMW 19702, Sta, 42-2 (17°21.77'S, 146°48.52'Е), 303-296m, sledge, 15 May 1986. PARATYPES: Sume data as holotype, 8 д (2.6-3.9mm), 10 ovig. 9(3,3-3.7mm), 3 9 (2.7-3.8mm), QMW19701. ETYMOLOGY From the Latin inermis (unarmed) alluding to the lack of spines on the dorsal surface of the carapace. DESCRIPTION OF HOLOTYPE Carapace, excluding rostrum, about 1,5 times as wide as long; dorsal surface convex from side to side, unarmed, transverse ridges as figured; cervical groove distinct, its dorsal midpoint slightly posterior to midlength of postorbital carapace length; in profile, gastric region moderately inflated, preceded by distinct depres- sion, cardiac region medially elevated, border between branchial and cardiac regions also elevated. Lateral margins posteriorly divergent to point somewhat posterior to anterior cervical groove, convergent posteriorly from this point. Anterolateral spine well developed, directed 2 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 1. Bathymunida inermis sp. nov. A-G, ovigeous female holotype; H, male paratype (carapace length, 3.5mm). A, carapace and abdomen, dorsal view; B, same, lateral view, tailfan omitted; C, anterolateral part of cephalothorax, showing antennular and antennal peduncles, ventral view; D, endopod of left third maxilliped, lateral view; E, sternal plastron; F, right cheliped, dorsal view; G, right first walking leg, lateral view; H, right cheliped, dorsal view.Scales = 1mm. straight forward, overreaching supraocular spine, diac region and anterior part of branchial lateral followed by small process directly behind it; margin. branchial lateral margin behind cervical groove Rostrum overreaching end of cornea, much with a few reduced spines and crenulations; long wider than supraocular spines; directed slightly fine setae sparse on anterior median part of car- upward, moderately compressed laterally, ending DEEP SEA GALATHEIDS 3 in blunt tip, dorsally with fine tubercles, mid- laterally ridged, Supraocular spines very short, 0.15 times as long as, and, not distantly remote trom rostrum. Transverse ridges on abdominal segments as illustrated; second through fourth segments each with 4 short blunt spines on anterior ridge. Eyes dilated, depressed, with fringe of long setae near base af cornea. Basal segment of antennule relatively short, with denticular spines on distal half of mesial and lateral margins, distolateral margin with dor- soventrally bifid spines somewhat longer than distomesial one. Antennal peduncles partly visible in dorsal view. placed beneath anterolateral spine of carapace; first segment with ventral distomesial margin produced into spine not longer than second segment, second segment with distomesial and distolateral spines, former acute and shorter, latter directed straight forward, ending in blunt tip. Third maxillipeds typical of genus, ischium clongate, flexor margin with stout distal spine. extensor margin with | or 2 small distal spines: merus short, flexor margin with sharp median spine, extensor margin with well- clay d dis- tal spine accompanied proximally by a few den- ticular crenulations, Sternal plastron as illustrated. Chelipeds similar, 2.3 limes as long as postor- bital carapace length; mesially provided with fine plumose setae, dorsally and ventrally with scale- like granulate ridges. Merus equally wide as car- pus, but much wider than chela (distal 2 segments), terminally armed with well- developed mesial, somewhat smaller dorsal, and very small blunt lateral spines, dorsally with small spines roughly in row, Carpus with 2 mesial marginal spines; distal one terminal in position, as wide as proximal, but short, ending in blunt tip; proximal one at midlengtb, acute. Propodus 0.76 limes as wide as carpus, 2.2 times as long as wide, unarmed. Fingers 0.8 times as long as palm, not gaping, distally sharp, curved and crossed. Walking legs relatively slender, with irides- cent, fine plumose setae along exlensor margins except for distal segment; first walking leg reach- ing midlength of dactylus of cheliped. Meri similar on first and second walking legs but longer on first, extensor margin with line of short inclined spines on first and second walking legs (terminal one prominent on first leg, small on second leg), unarmed on third leg; flexor margin with short terminal spinc followed proximally by denticles on first 2 legs, no terminal spine on third leg. Carpus having extensor margin with blunt distal spine, paralleling row of a few denticles or denticular processes om dorsolateral surface. Propodus 0.84 times as long as dactylus on first leg, equally long on second and third legs, exten- sor margin with a few denticles on first and second legs, flexor margin with slender distal spine distinct on first and second legs, absent on third. Dactylus slender, curved as figured, exten- sor margin with relatively long coarse setae, flexor margin smooth, with sparse setae proximally. VARIATION AND DIFFERENCES BETWEEN SEXES All paratypes agree with the holotype, except far ane ovigerous female having cheliped carpus with additional spine proximal to midmesial mar- ginal spine. Males differ from females in having cheliped carpus and propodus both relatively long and slender, especially in large males (length-width ratios of carpus 1.7-2.4 in females, 2,6-2.9 in small males (2,6-2. 7mm), 7.2 or 8.0 in large males (3.6- 3.7mm); those of us 2.0- 3.1 in females, 4.3-7.6 in small males, 13.4 in large males); propodus and fingers much nar- rower than carpus. Chelipeds 2.3-2,4 times as long as postorbital carapace length in small males and all females, 3.5 times longer in large intact malc. First walking leg fully reaching end of cheliped in ovigerous females, terminating at dis- tal end of carpus in large males, but in small maics ranging from reaching end of propodus to almost midlength of finger. REMARKS Six species of Bathymunida are known to date: B. aspinirostris Khodkina, 1981, from Norfolk Island Ridge in 51m; B. belssi Van Dam, 1938, from Seram Sea in 118; B. brevirostris (Yokoya, 1933), from Japan in 105-106m (Baba, 1970: 59); B. longipes Van Dam, 1938, from Bali Sca ncar Kangean Group and Sulu Archipelago in 100-140m; B. polae Balss, 1914, from the Red Sca and Madagascar in 150-255т (Baba, 1990: 952); and В, quadratirestrata Melin, 1939, from the Bonin Islandsin 128- 183m., Baba (1990; 952) suggested that B. polae and B. balssi muy be identical. Several important characters separate В, m. mis from all other species of Bothvmunida: 1, strong dorsal spines on the carapace (on the gastric and cardiac regions in particular) are ab- sent; 2, the supraocular spines are much closer to the very stout rostral spine; 3, the transverse ridges on Ihe carapace are more distinct; 4, the 4 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM chela is much narrower than the us and merus, These characters (only except for the last) do not fit the definition of the genus given by Balss (1914). However, due to the large number of shared characters unique to Bathymunida, the present species is provisionally placed in this genus. These are: the orbital margin is so strongly concave that the orbit is largely visible in a dorsal view; the second, third and fourth abdominal tergites bear 4, 2. 2 spines on the anterior ridge: the third thoracic stemtite is anteriorly strongly produced, with the entire posterior margin usual- ly contiguous with the anterior margin of the following sternite; distal two segments of the endepod of the third maxilliped, and even the merus, are reduced in size; the dactyli of the walking legs are slender and nearly smooth without spines on the flexor margin. Bathymunida will be revised in a series of studies on New Caledonian material now in progress. The longer chelipeds displayed by large males may not be aberrant, because examples of this are also known in B. polae (see Baba, 1990: 952). Galathea Fabricius, 1793 Galathea pubescens Stimpson, 1858 Galathea pubescens Stimpson, 1858: 252; Baha, 1988: 76 (synonymy and references). MATERIAL EXAMINED Sta. 42-2 (17°21.77'5, 146°48.52'Е), 303-296m, sledge, 15 May 1986: 1 d (3.4mm), OMW19703. REMARKS This specimen has a less spinose and less setosc carapace, as noted earlier for some specimens from the Philippines (Baba, 1988: 76) as well as from the East China Sea (Baba, 1988: 77). This is one of the few species of Galathea that are found in the deepsea. RANGE Previously known from Japan, East China Sea. Philippines, Western Australia and Zanzibar, in 40-494 im. Recorded for the first time from eastem Australia. Galathea inconspicua Henderson, 1885 (Fig. 2) Galathea inconspicua Henderson, 1885: 408; 1888: 122, pl, 12, fig, 2, MATERIAL EXAMINED Sta. 42-2 [17°21.77" S, 146°48.52'Е), 303-296m, sledge, 15 May 1986, 1 ovig. $(5.0mm), QMW 19704, DESCRIPTION Carapace, excluding rostrum, 1.2 times as long as wide, dorsal surface with distinct setiferous ridges as illustrated; 8 small spines on epigastric region and 2 spines on each lateral protogastric region. Lateral margins slightly convex, with 9 spines on each side; 2 in front of cervical groove; first anterolateral (preceded by 2 small spines mesial to it); second small, with accompanying spinules (1 dorsal and 3 or 4 ventral to it, ventral- most somewhat larger); third to ninth behind cer- vical groove; fifth, sixth and ninth very small. Rostrum very narrowed distally, length fully more than half that of remaining carapace; lateral teeth anteriorly diminishing in size, anteriormost situated somewhat anterior to midlength of rostrum. Pterygostomian flap lacking spine on surface and anterior margin. Orbit sharply delimited laterally by small anterolaterally directed spine, ventrolateral mar- gin with line of 3 or 4 small teeth. Eyes somewhat depressed and elongate, mesial and lateral margins slightly convex, eyestalks with fringe of short setae near cornea. Second and third abdominal segments each with 4 transverse ridges. Antennular basal segment with very reduced mesial terminal spine, well-developed lateral ter- minal spine, stronger dorsal spine and a few very small lateral marginal spines proximal to dorsal one; terminal segment with tuft of pronounced setae on distodorsal margin, Antennal peduncle having first segment with well- developed dis- toventràl process ending in sharp point reaching nearly to end of second segment, second segment with distolateral spine much longer than dis- tomesial spine; third segment with distomesial and distolateral spines, both very small, latter rather dorsal in position. Ischium of third maxilliped with well- developed spine on flexor distal margin and small one on extensor distal margin, mesial ridge with 20 or 21 denticles. Merus with 3 spines on flexor margin; proximal one well developed, situated about at midlength; distal onc distinctly smaller than proximal one, terminal in position; median onc very small, somewhat proximal to midpoint between these; extensor margin with small spine at distal end, DEEP SEA GALATHEIDS 5 200 SA uid SAL FIG. 2. Galathea inconspicua Henderson, ovigerous female from Station 42-2, A, carapace and anterior abdominal segments, dorsal view; B, anterolateral part of cephalothorax, showing antennular and antennal peduncles, ventral view; C, endopod of right third maxilliped, lateral view; D, anterior part of sternum; E, left cheliped, dorsal view; F, left first walking leg, lateral view; G, distal two segments of same, lateral view. Scales = Imm. Anterior part of sternum as figured; third thoracic sternite roughly quadrangular; fourth thoracic sternite 3.] times as wide as preceding, relatively long, width 1.9 times length of anterolateral margin. Chelipeds slender, fully more than 5 times as long as carapace excluding rostrum; sparsely provided with fine setae. Spination in dorsal view as illustrated; 4 rows of spines (2 dorsal, | lateral, 1 mesial) on merus, carpus and propodus, mesial 6 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM terminal spine on menus much pronounced. Car- pus 6 times as long às wide, more than half length of merus, bearing no prominent spines but some- what larger distal one on mesial margin. Propodus distally somewhat wider, slightly longer than carpus, 6 times as long as wide. Fingers three-fourths as long as palm, somewhat gaping proximally, distally fitting to each other (when closed) with a few intermeshing teeth; opposable margins with line of tubercles on distal two- thirds, proximally with pronounced basal process. Ventral surface of cheliped with 2 rows of spines on merus, scattered spinules on carpus and palm, and larger distoventral spine on carpus. Walking legs also slender and sparsely setose, First walking leg overreaching end of merus but barely reaching midlength of carpus of cheliped. Meri posteriorly diminishing in size; extensor margin with 14, 13,9 spines on first, second, third walking legs, respectively; flexor margin with 7 Or B spines, terminal of these much larger. Carpus with raw of 7 small extensor marginal spines paralleling another row of small spines on lateral face. Propodus about 1] limes as long as wide, slightly more than twice as long as dactylus, extensor margin with 5 or 6 small spines on proximal half on first and second legs, nearly none on third, flexor margin with 10 or 1 ! slender spines (excluding distomesial) on first, 9 or 11 on second, 10 on third. Dactylus ending in sharply curved claw preceded by 9 or 10 rather erect teeth decreasing in size proximally, each tooth with comeous setae arising from its base. Epipods present on chelipeds, absent from walking legs. REMARKS This specimen is referred without doubt to G. inconspiceua, the identification verified by €x- amination of the male holotype in the collection of the Natural History Museum, London (BM1888:33), The holotype is now in poor con- dition, lacking all pereopods. The зріпапоп of the carapace illustrated by Henderson (1888: pl, 12, fig. 2) 15 not correct; the epigastric row of 6 spines in the holotype is somewhat more posterior in position, accom- panving a lateral protogastric spine posterior and lateral to lateral extremity of this row, and the lateral marginal spines are rather distinct, anly lacking the hindmost (eighth) as in the present specimen; there are some minor discrepancies between the type and the present specimen: in the type the carapace is wider, the length-width ratio (excluding the rostrum) being 1.08; the merus of the third maxilliped on the right side (detached and missing on the left) bearing three spines as described by Henderson (the median one being prominent). The presence of epipods on the chelipeds, the spinose anterior gastric region, the basal antennular segment having a reduced dis- tomesial spine, and the carpus of the cheliped lacking prominent mesial marginal spines, link the species strongly to G, albatrossae Baba, 1988 from the Philippines and the Ryukyus (Baba, 1988:65; 1989:128). The latter, however, has the carapace with fewer lateral marginal spines, the triangular rostrum distally not strongly narrowed, the chelipeds shorter relative to the carapace, the walking legs having fewer flexor marginal spines on the propodus (at most four) and dactylus (six), and the anterior part of the sternum longer relative to width (the fourth thoracic sternite being 2.7 times as wide as the preceding sternite, its width 2.8 times the length of its lateral margin), The full description provided above will com- plement the brevity of the previous descriptions of the type material by Henderson (1885, 1888), RANGE Off Banda Island and eastern Australia, in 296- 659m. This is the first record for the species since that of the unique holetype from ‘Challenger’ Station 194. Munida Leach, 1820 Munida alia sp. nov. (Fig. 3) MATERIAL EXAMINED HoLorvPE: ovig. ?(9.2mm). ОМА 19705, Sta. 52-2 (18°04, 16'S, 147717, 17 E), 490-512m, beam trawl, L8 May 1986. ETYMOLOGY From the Latin alius (another), alluding tò the other species of a group centered around Munida lieteracantha. DESCRIFTION OF HOLOTYPE Carapace 1.09 times as long as wide, when measured from level! between mesial bases of right and left anterolateral spines to midpoint of posterier margin of carapace. Dorsal surface moderately convex from side to side, with rela- tively numerous striae as illustrated, sparsely provided with coarse setae, on anterior half in particular, cervical groove distinct, anterior bifurcation with iridescent setae al end (оп lateral margin of carapace). Epigastric region with 10 DEEP SEA GALATHEIDS 7 FIG. 3. Munida alia sp. nov., ovigerous female holotype. A, dorsal view, left appendages omitted; B, anterolateral part of cephalothorax, showing antennular and antennal peduncles, ventral view; C, endopod of left third maxiiliped, lateral view; D, sternal plastron; E, distal segments of right first walking leg, lateral view. Scales = Imm. 8 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM spines in 5 pairs, second from mesial pair situated directly behind supraocular spines, accompany- ing small spine at its lateral base. Lateral protogastric spine distinct, preceded by small spine slightly anterior and lateral to it. No other spinulation elsewhere on dorsal surface. Lateral margins slightly convex, anterolateral spine sharp and prominent, directed forward and some- what laterad, barely reaching sinus between rostrum and supraocular spine, followed hy a few denticular spines and 1 small spine slightly anterior to midpoint between first spine and anterior cervical groove; 5 subequal spines on anterior branchial margin behind anterior cervi- val groove. Front margin slightly oblique. Rostrum spiniform, nearly horizontal but slightly upcurved distally, length 0.4 that of remaining carapace, about 3 times that of supraocular spine. Supraocular spines moderate- ly remote from rostral spine, somewhat divergent anteriorly. Abdominal segments strigose, second and third segments each with 6 transverse ridges, first and fourth ridges elevated, latter preceded by distinct groove or trough. Eyes dilated, cornea 0.3 times as wide as carapace; eyestalk with fringe of short setae near cortea, Basal segment of antennule elongate, length (exclusive of spines) 2.2 times its greatest width; 2 terminal spines subequal in size, Antennal peduncle having first segment with strong ventral distomesial spinc reaching end of next segment; second segment with well-developed distomesial and distolateral spines, former distinctly over- reaching end of peduncle, accompanied by small extra spine proximal to it, latter ending at mid- length nf ultimate peduncular segment. Endopod of third maxilliped relatively slender, Ischium with prominent spine on flexor distal margin, unarmed on extensor margin: mesial ridge with 25 or 26 denticles. Merus with 2 flexor marginal spines, proximal one very strong, situated about 1/3 from proximal end, distal one small and terminal; no spine on extensor margin. Distal 2 segments relatively slender. Stemal plastron as illustrated, with a few striae on fourth thoracic sternite, Third thoracic sternite laterally expanded, 4.5 times us wide as Jong, anterior margin sinuous, provided with Fine blunt denticles, Following sternite twice as long as preceding, with relatively wide anterior margin, not triangular. Chelipeds similar, relatively stout, length 3 times that of carapace (excluding rostrum), sur- face with fine squamiform ridges, and both trides- cent, and fine plumose setae, particularlv on mesial face, Spination as figured. Merus with another row of 4 ventromesial spines; 3 prominent mesial marginal spines, particularly distalmost. Carpus with 3 small ventromesial and ] distoventral spines, all invisible in dorsal view, Propodus moderately depressed, somewhat nar- rower than merus, more than twice as long as wide, nearly equal in length to movable finger. lateral marginal spines somewhat dorsal in posi- tion, dorsal surface with median row of spines, mesial margin with row of 3 spines paralleling another row of 4 distinct and a few small spines somewhat dorsal in position. Fingers distally curving, crossing when closed, somewhat gaping in proximal half; movable finger having mesial margin with 1 well-developed proximal and 1 small sublerminal spine interspersed by a few small spines; fixed finger wilh line of 5 lateral marginal spines continued onto propodus, distal 2 nearer to each other, distalmost subterminal. Walking legs relatively short, with squamiform ridges on surface and both iridescent and fine plumase setae on mesial face except for dactylus with coarse setae; first walking leg reaching to midlength of cheliped propodus. Merus with row of 11 or 12 extensor marginal spines and another line of 6 or 7 flexor marginal spines on first and second walking legs, these spines diminishing in size proximally; terminal spines pronounced, flexor marginal terminal larger, proximal 4 or 5 extensor marginal spines very small and some- what lateral in position; on third walking leg, extensor margin with 4 small spines on proximal half, flexor margin with a few spines and den- cles. Carpus with 4 (on first), 3 (on second), and l (on third) spines on extensor margin, in addition to one at distal end of flexor margin, Propodus less than twice, but more than 1.5 times, length of dactylus. fully 6 times as long as high, flexor margin produced into spine on distal corner, with 11 movable slender spines, Dactylus ending in curved corneous spine, flexor margin convex, with 10 (on first), 9 (оп second), В (on third) slender spines, each arising from low process, but distalmost of these present at base of corncous toe. REMARKS Lack of granules on the seventh thoracic ster- nite, subequal terminal spines on the antennular basal segment, and lack of the extensor distal marginal spine on the merus of the third maxi- lliped link the species to Munida semoni DEEP SEA GALATHEIDS 9 Ortmann, 1894, М. oritea Macpherson & Baba, 1993 and M. striola Macpherson & Baba, 1993. The new species differs from the last two species in the less strigose sternal plastron and the dis- tomesial spine of the basal antennal segment not distinctly overreaching the second antennal seg- ment. Another close relative, M. semoni, is char- acterized by a row of spines on the second abdominal segment, and absence of the extra spine on the mesial margin of the second segment of the antennal peduncle, both the obvious dif- ferences from the new species. Munida curvirostris Henderson, 1885 Munida curvirostris Henderson, |885: 412. Munida militaris var. curvirostris Henderson, 1888: 139, pl. 3: figs. 7, 7A, 7B. Munida andamanica Alcock, 1894: 32]. MATERIAL EXAMINED Sia. 51-2 (18^03.85'S, 147719,50' E), 689-704m, sledge, 18 May 1986, 2 2(10.2, 12.5mm), 2 ovig. 9 (10.2, 13.4mm), 1 2(6.2mm), QMW 19706, REMARKS As noted by Baba & Macpherson (1991:538), Munida andamanica Alcock, 1894, a well- known species in the Indo-West Pacific, should be merged with M. curvirostris Henderson, 1885. RANGE Indo-West Pacific from east African coast eastward and northward ta Japan, in 141-1,360m; see Baba (1988:86) for distribution. Munida declivis sp. nov. (Fig. 4) MATERIAL EXAMINED HOLOTYPE 2(7.6mm), QMW19708,Sta. 42-2 (17°2).77°S, 146?48,52'E), 303-296m, sledge, 15 May 1986. PARATYPES: Same data as holotype, 9 à (6.4-4,.2mm), 1 9(7.4mm). 5 spec. (sex indet, 5.7-4.1mm), QMW 19707; Sta. 46-3 (17°55.38'S, 147*00.96' E), 295-309m, beam trawl, 16 May 1986, | d (4.3mm), 1 spec. (sex indet., 2.7mm). QMW 19709, ETYMOLOGY From the Latin declivis (sloping, inclined) referring ta the very oblique front margin. DESCRIPTION OF HOLOTYPE Carapace elongate, 1.3 times as long as wide when measured in midline from level between mesial bases of anterolateral spines to posterior margin of carapace. Transverse ridges as figured, cervical groove distinct. Epigastric region with row of 10 spines in 5 pairs, median pair small, mesial second pair directly behind supraocular Spines prominent, other pairs gradually diminish- ing in size laterally, lateral protogastric and postcervical spines small but distinct. Lateral margins subparallel, bearing 8 spines, anterior 3 in front of, and remaining 5 behind, cervical groove; first anterolateral, largest, somewhat mesial to level of third to eighth, second spinc small, third smaller than first, placed at midpoint between anterolateral spine and anterior cervical groove, following 5 spines on anterior branchial region, subequal. No spine on posterior transverse ridge. Front margin strongly oblique. Rostral spine 0.4 times as long as remaining carapace, slightly arched in lateral view, with small tubercles dorsally. Supraocular spines directed somewhat dorsad, subparallel to rostral spine, moderately remote from rostrum, and bare- ly reaching its midlength. Second abdominal segment with 3 transverse ridges, first (anterior) ridge with В spines, second ridge interrupted, third ridge uninterrupted, preceded by distinct groove. Third abdominal segment unarmed. Basal segment of antennule elongate, dis- tomesial spine distinctly shorter than distolateral, proximal lateral spine small, median lateral spine elongate, directed anterodorsad. Antennal peduncle having first segment with ventral dis- tomesial spine sharp, moderate-sized, not reach- ing end of second segment; second segment with distomesial and distolateral spines both well developed, subequal in size; third segment un- armed. Ischium of third maxilliped with well- developed spine on flexor distal margin and very small one on extensor dista] margin, mesial ridge with 22 or 23 denticles. Merus relatively less setase, flexor margin with 2 spines, distal one terminal and small, proximal one prominent, slightly proximal to midlength, extensor margin unarmed. Stemal plastron barely strigose. Third thoracie sternite short, about 5 times as wide as long; fourth thoracic sternite triangular in shape, width 2.3 times that of preceding sternite. Chelipeds unequal; right one shorter, presumably regenerated, with somewhat 10 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 4. Munida declivis sp. nov., female holotype, A, carapace and abdomen, dorsal view; B, anterolateral part of cephalothorax, showing antennular and antennal peduncles, ventral view; C, endopod of right third maxilliped, lateral view; D, sternal plastron; E, left cheliped, dorsal view; F, right first walking leg, lateral view; С, distal part of same, lateral view. Scales = Imm. pronounced spination. Left cheliped 4.6 times as long as postorbital carapace length, with chela somewhat depressed; laterally with fine plumose setae, mesially with both iridescent and plumose setae; ventral surface granulate; dorsally armed with 4 rows of spines on merus, carpus and propodus (2 dorsal and 1 mesial, 1 lateral); another ventral row of smaller spines near mesial margin on merus and propodus. Merus relatively long, slightly shorter than chela (propodus and fingers combined). Carpus 2.8 times as long as wide, 0.66 times as long as propodus. Propodus DEEP SEA GALATHEIDS 11 4.4 times as long as wide. Fingers 0.89 times as long as propodus, slightly gaping proximally, distally ending in strongly curved, crossing claws; movable finger having mesial margin with 3 spines (proximal pronounced, distal terminal, median at 2/3 from proximal end), accompanying 1 dorsal and 1 ventral row of smaller spines, each row situated near mesial margin; fixed finger with row of lateral spines continued onto propodus, Walking legs slender, dorsally with both fine plumose and iridescent setae. First walking leg reaching end of cheliped carpus. Merus with spines on flexor and extensor margins on first and second walking legs, distalmost of latter prominent but falling short of end of carpus, spination on third leg rather reduced. Carpi of first and second walking legs each with well- developed spine on extensor and flexor distal margins and additional smaller one about at mid- length of extensor margin, that of third walking leg with small spine on extensor distal margin. Propodus. 1.2 times as long as dactyli on first walking leg, equally long on second and third, flexor margin with 10, 9, 2 or 3 slender spines on first, second and third leg respectively. Dactylus slender, slightly curving, ending in corneous tip on first 2 legs; somewhat stouter, more strongly curved, ending in strong claw on third leg; flexor margin with 4 nr 5 very fine denticles each with short corneous setae, distalmost seta present at point 0.36 frorn distal end. VARIATION Supraocular spines usually subparallel, rarely somewhat convergent anteriorly, length 0.24- 0.36 (average, 0.29) times that of rostral spine. Epigastric spines numbering mostly 8 (4 pairs); in younger specimens median and lateralmost pairs obsolete. Number of spines on second ab- dominal segment usually 8, rarely 7, 6, 5 or 4, fewest number only in younger specimens. Flexor margins of propodi of walking legs with usually 7 or 8 spines, occasionally 6, rarely 6 or 9 on first and second walking legs, 3 or 4 on third. Dactyli of first and second walking legs with 4 or 5, rarely 6 small spines, ultimate one rather dis- tant from toe end (at least 1/4 of length), that of third walking leg with usually 4, rarely 3 very small spines, present in proximal half. Males with 2 pairs of gonopods. REMARKS The strongly oblique front margin, elongate carapace, and slender walking legs, characteristic of Munida declivis, are also possessed by М. kuboi Yanagita, 1943. The new species is readily distinguished from that species by the lack of dorsal spines on the third abdominal segment anu the much shorter and very spinose chelipeds. Munida eminens Baba, 1988 Munida eminens Baba, 1988; 95, fip. 35, MATERIAL EXAMINED Sta. 13-4 (17*45.99'S, 148°39.09°E), 964-958m, beam trawl, 9 May 1986, 1 ?(12.8mm), OMW 19710. REMARKS Munida eminens may be characterized by the following combination of characters: the carapace hearing four lateral marginal spines be- hind the anterior bifurcation of the cervical groove; the antennal peduncle having the first segment with an extremely long distomesial spine directed straight forward, only slightly fall- ing short of the end of the rostral spine; the third thoracic sternite short and strongly expanded laterally; and the dactyli of the walking legs depressed, falciform and proportionately wide. The present specimen is not intact, having no abdomen and chelipeds. Lack of the posterior cardiac spine as well as the hindmost of the three posicervical spines displayed by this specimen may be considered as variation. RANGE Previously known from the Philippines in Palawan Passage and off southeastern Luzon, in 564-686m. The range 1s now extended to eastern Australia. Munida heteracantha Ortmann, | 892 Мипійа heieracantha Ortmann, 1892: 255, pl. 11: figs. 12, 12i, 12k; Macpherson & Baba, 1993: 393, fig 6. Munida exigua Baba, 1988: 98, fig. 36. MATERIAL EXAMINED Sta. 42-2 (17721,7778, 146°48.52'Е), 303-296m, sledge, 15 May 1986, 1 d (4, 8mm), QMW19717. REMARKS The type material of M. hereracantha now in the collection of the Musée Zoologique, Stras- bourg, has been redescribed by Macpherson & Baba (1993:393) and M. exigua Baba, 1988, was synonymized with this species. 12 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM The present specimen has been found in a lot from Station 42-2 in which M. declivis new species is included (see above). RANGE Previously known from the Philippines, In- donesia, off Hong Kong, and Sagàmi Bay, Japan, in 68-222m. Recorded from eastern Australia for the first time. ?Munida incerta Henderson, 1888 Munida incerta Henderson, 1888: 130, pl. 13: figs. 4, 4a; Baba, 1988: 106 (synonymy and references), MATERIAL EXAMINED Sta. 47-2 (17°51.76'S, 147°07.95'B), 503-497, sledge, 16 Мау 1986, 2 ovig. 9(19.6, 21.2mm), QMW 19718. REMARKS This identification is provisional, for the specimens have a red spot on the distal portion of the propodus of the walking legs, which is at variance with the color illustration of Munida incerta provided by Miyake (1982: pl. 49, fig. 5) and Baba in Baba et al. (1986: fig. 121), There are no distinct morphological differences between these specimens and previous descriptions. How- ever, available male specimens taken outside the Great Barrier Reef off Bowen, Queensland, and off Taiwan which likewise bear such red color spots, have a pronounced outward process on the anterior lateral expansion of the telson. This process is absent in specimens from the vicinity of the Kei Islands, the type locality of M. incerta, in the. collection of the Copenhagen Museum, as well as in those reported by Miyake (1982) and Baba in Baba et а]. (1986) (Baba, unpubl.). This fact suggests the existence of another species closely related to M. incerta. Further investiga- tion of these differences will be reported else- where, but the present females are not sufficient for clarification of the problem. Munida leviantennata Baba, 1988 (Fig, 5) Munida leviantennata Baba, 1988:111, figs. 41, 42. MATERIAL EXAMINED Sta. 43-2 (17°34.58'5, 146*53.21'E), 458-500m, sledge, 15 May 1986, 1 d (id.Smm). QMW19719; Sta. 52-2 (18?04.16'S, 147°17.17'Е), 490-312m, beam trawl, 18 May 1986, 1 d (12.1mm), QMW 19720. REMARKS The supraocular spines which were broken in the unique female holotype and which were speculated to be very close to the rostrum (Baba, 1988: 111), are rather remote from it; they are more or less divergent anterolaterally and more than two-thirds the length of the rostral spine. Two pairs of gonopods are present in the male. RANGE Previously known only from the Molucca Sea off west coast of Halmahera, in 485m. Munida magniantennulata Baba & Türkay, Munida magnianrennulata Baba & Türkay, 1992: 205, figs, 2, 3; Baba & de Saint Laurent, 1992: 326. MATERIAL EXAMINED Sta. 20-4 (17?45.04' S, 147?48.14'E), 1,228-1,223m, beam trawl, 10 May 1986, 1 9(7.5:m), QMW19721; Sta. 35-3 (16°50.83'5, 147*^10.61 E), 1,607-1,609m, sledge. 14 May 1986, | © (5.0mm): QMW 19722. REMARKS This species has recently been described from active thermal vent areas in the Lau Basin in 1750-2003m (Baba & Türkay, 1992:205; Baba & de Saint Laurent, 1992:326). As its name sug- gests, this species has an unusually large anten- nular basal segment that, spines excluded, overreaches the midlength of the rostral spine, and exceeds the cornea by more than the full length of the eyestalk and cornea. The following characters seen in this material from non-active thermal vent areas differ from the type but may be within the limit of variation; four distinct epigastric spines, the lateral two smaller; chelipeds more spinose with relatively strong spines, the palm bearing a distinct dorsal row and the fixed fingers bearing one or two additional lateral marginal spines on the larger specimen; the second abdominal segment bears two or four dorsal spines, and the following segment bears a distinct transverse groove preceded by an elevated anterior ridge. The larger specimen from Station 20-4 bears an externa and a few scars of rhizocephalan parasites. DEEP SEA GALATHEIDS 13 t Nu! Mov E Via MR ча а Р, ne WR, ! Ay № TW LA gual d ud TY чаш y FIG. 5. Munida leviantennata Baba, 1988. A, C, D, male from Sta. 43-2; B, male from Sta. 52-2, A, anterior part of carapace; B, same; C, dactylus of second walking leg, lateral view; D, dactylus of third walking leg, lateral view. Scales = Imm. RANGE Previously known from the Lau Basin, in 1750- 2003m. Munida microps Alcock, 1894 Munida microps Alcock, 1894: 326; Baba, 1988: 122 (references and synonymy). MATERIAL EXAMINED Sta. 1-3 (18°07.87'S, 147735.7' E), 956-969m, sledge, 6 May 1986, | spec. (sex indet., 5.8mm), QMW 19723; Sta. 14-1 (17°49,45'5, 148°39.51'Е), 990-1,006m, beam trawl, 8 May 1986, 1 G(14.9mm), QMW19724. REMARKS In the larger specimen, eyes are somewhat larger than noted in earlier descriptions, but other specific characters are as diagnosed by Baba (1988:122). Two spines on the third abdominal segment are present às reported for the ‘Albatross’ specimen (Baba, 1988:122). The branchial spines directly behind the middle of the anterior bifurcation of the cervical groove is bare- ly discernible in the smaller specimen. RANGE Previously known from the Arabian Sea, Mal- dives, off Colombo, Andaman Sea, Sulawesi and southeastern Australia off Green Cape, New South Wales; in 686- 1,234m. Munida pilosimanus Baba, 1969 Munida pilosimanus Baba, 1969: 26, figs. 8, 9; Baba, in Baba et al., 1986: 173, 291, fig. 123; Baba, 1988: 123. MATERIAL EXAMINED Sta. 52-2 (18°04.16'5, 147°17.17'Е), 490-512m, beam trawl, 18 May 1986, 1 2 (30.2тт), QMW 19725. REMARKS Lateral protogastric spines are absent, but this specimen is undoubtedly referred to M. pilosimanus. No additional characters of sig- nificance were noted. RANGE Previously known from the Sulu Archipelago, Kyushu-Palau Ridge, Okinawa Trough and Tosa Bay, in 250-582m. Munida rubridigitalis sp. nov, (Fig. 6) MATERIAL EXAMINED HoLorvpPE: d(10.6mm), QMW19726,Sta. 47-2 (17°51.76°'5, 147°07.95'Е), 503-497m, sledge, 16 May 1986. PARATYPES. Same dala as holotype, 2 d(10.0- 12.7mm), 3 ovig. 9(10.9-12.1mm), 1 9(9.5mm), 1 spec. (sex indet., 10.0mm), QMW 19727. 14 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 6. Munida rubridigitalis sp. nov., male holotype. A, dorsal view, left appendages omitted; B, anterolateral part of cephalothorax, showing antennular and antennal peduncles, ventral view; C, endopod of left third maxilliped, lateral view; D, sternal plastron; E, distal segments of right first walking leg, lateral view. Scales = lmm., ETYMOLOGY From the Latin ruber (red) and digitalis (per- taining to a finger), alluding to the reddish tips of the cheliped fingers, a character that separates the species from its close relative M. compressa Baba, 1988. DESCRIPTION OF HOLOTYPE Carapace, when measured from point level with mesial bases of left and right anterolateral spines to midpoint of posterior margin, slightly wider than long, dorsally arched from side to side, with numerous transverse ridges as figured, DEEP SEA GALATHEIDS 15 median transverse ridge behind midcervical groove somewhat elevated. Cervical groove dis- tinct. Epigastric region preceded by distinct depression, bearing row of 6 spines in 3 pairs, mesial pair small, subequal to Jateral pair in size, median pair directly behind supraocular spines pronounced. No other spinulation elsewhere on carapace, Lateral margin somewhat convex medially, beanng 7 spines: 2 зп front of, and 5 behind, anterior bifurcation of cervical groove; first anterolateral, largest, 2 very small denticles behind; second spine smaller than first; third to seventh subequal, placed on anterior branchial region, Front margin somewhat oblique. Rostral spine considerably compressed lateral- ly, relatively high dorsoventrally, upcurved to abou} 30°, length about half that of remaining carapace and about four-fifths distance between its base and midcervical groove. Supraocular spines relatively stout, subparallel, 0.4 times as long as rostral spine; elevated as high as rostral spine bul tip somewhat depressed, Abdominal segments with numerous striae; second segment dorsally with 7 ridges, anterior first ridge well elevated, with 8 spines of small size, fourth ridge preceded by distinct groove; third segment with 9 striae, fifth stria preceded by groove. Eyes dilated, 0.25 times as wide as carapace excluding spines, eyestalks with fringe of short setae near cornea, Basal segment of antennule, exclusive of spines, nearly reaching end of cornea; 2 terminal spines subequal in size. First (proximal) segment of antennal pedunele produced into short stout spine at ventral distomesial margin, second seg- ment also produced on distomesial and dis- tolateral margins into sharp spines (distomesial one reaching end of peduncle), with extra small spine at midpoint of mesial margin, third and fourth segments unarmed, Third maxilliped having ischium with small spine on flexor distal margin, mesial ridge with 28 denticles. Merus distally narrowed, flexor margin with 2 spines, distal one terminal and smaller, proximal one situated at midlength of margin, prominent, accompanying very small spine distal to its base, extensor margin unarmed. Distal 2 segments slender. Sternal plastron as figured, hearing scale-like ridges. Third thoracic sternite with bilobed anterior margin, 3.6 times as wide as long, Fourth thoracic stermite 2.3 times as long as preceding sternit, anterior margin rounded, its median por- tion contiguous to that of posterior margin of third thoracic stemite. Seventh thoracic stemite Jack- ing granules. Chelipeds similar, relatively massive, granu- late on surface, marginally provided with beth iridescent and short fine plumose setae somewhal thicker on mesial margins of merus. Merus with anterior end nòt reaching tip of rostrum, with 4 terminal spines: dorsomesial spine strong, ac- companied by small spine proximal to it; dorsal spine pronounced bul smaller than dorsomesial, followed proximally by 7 other dorsal spines in row near lateral margin; lateral spine smaller, subequal to ventromesial, accompanied proximally by smaller spine: another distal spine middorsally, somewhat proximal to level of ter- minal spines. Carpus relatively short, somewhat longer than wide, spinalion as figured, distal second of mesial marginal spines prominent, Propodus moderately depressed, barely 1.5 times as long as carpus, 1.4 times as long as wide, lateral margin convex with 5 spines, distal one pronounced, remaining 4 very small; mesial mar- gin with row of 4 or 5 small spines, those on right cheliped somewhat dorsal; dorsal surface proximally with small spine somewhat lateral to midline only on left cheliped. Fingers about as long as propodus, distally strongly curving, cross- ing when closed, opposable margins not gaping, lined with denticles, fixed finger having lateral margin with small subterminal and another small proximal one. movable finger unarmed on mesial margin. Walking legs relatively stout, posteriorly diminishing in size, covered with squamiform ridges particularly distinct on meri, mesially with both finc plumose and iridescent setae thick on meri, carpi and proximal half of propodi. First walking leg fully reaching juncture between propodus and movable finger of cheliped. Merus with 11 or 12 extensor marginal spines on first and second walking legs, terminal one strong; 1 strong terminal and ] or 2 small accompanying spinules on third walking leg; flexor margin with terminal spinc about as large as extensor terminal on anterior 2 legs, somewhat smaller on third, Carpus having extensor margin with strong distal spine followed proximally by smaller spine and 3-6 denticles. Propodus 6 (first walking leg), 8 (second), 7 (third) times as long as high, 14 (first), 1.6 (second), 1.5 (third) times as long ats dactylus, fiexor margin with 8 relatively short comcous spines, Dactylus distally sharpened and curved, more distinctly so on third walking leg, extensor margin with rather ЇЇ long setae on ene third length proximal 10 coxneous toc. Пехог 16 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM margin with 8 (on first and second) or 7 (on third) low processes each with seta-like inclined short spines, unarmed on distal fourth, Epipods absent from all pereopods. COLOUR IN PRESERVATIVE Reddish on distal part of rostrum and distal half of fingers of cheliped. VARIATION Three pairs of epigastric spines usually present, occasionally accompanied by a few small spines or tubercular processes laterally, Lateral protogastric spines present or absent, Number of spines on second abdominal tergum varying be- tween 8 and 11 (mostly 8). Merus of cheliped with or without spine proximal to prominent ter- minal dorsomesial one; another spine proximal to terminal ventromesial one often absent. Number of propodal flexor marginal spines varying from 7 to 11 (mostly 9) on first walking leg, 8 or 9 on second, mostly 8, often 9, rarely 7 on third. REMARKS Munida rubridigitaris is most closely related to M. compressa Baba, 1988, a species distributed from the Molucca Sea, South China Sea from off southwestern Luzon, north to off southwestern Formosa and Tosa Bay, 180-545m (Baba, 1988:91), in particular, the compressed rostrum with a red distal mark and the short chelipeds with pronounced terminal spines on the merus. The differences between the two species are very slight, but I believe that the combination of the following characters is sufficient to differentiate them: the transverse ridges on the carapace and abdominal segments in M. rubridigilalis are dis- tinctly more numerous (seven and nine ridges on the second and third abdominal segment, respec- tively) and rather weakly elevated, while in M. compressa they are fewer (in particular, the second and third abdominal segments have only 3 ridges each) and major striae on the carapace are rather elevated; the propodi of the walking legs have 5 or 6 slender spines in M. compressa, 8 or 9 in M. rubridigitalis; the cheliped fingers are reddish on the distal half in M. rubridigitalis, whitish over their whole length in M. compressa; the pterygostomian flap has a reddish patch directly below the linea anomurica in M. com- pressa (Baba, unpubl.), none in M, rubridigitalis. Munida squamosa Henderson, 1885 Munida squamosa Henderson, 1885: 409; Yanagita, 1943: 18; Macpherson, 1993: 425. MATERIAL EXAMINED Sta, 47-2 (17?51,76'8, 147707.95 E), 503-497m, sledge, 16 May 1986, 13 d (11.2-14.8mm), 11 ovig. 2(11.3-14.7mm), 3 9 (9.5-9.7mm), QMW 19711. REMARKS According to Macpherson (1993: 425), M. sguamosa is characterized by the prominent car- diac spine, presence of a spine on the distomesial margin of the second segment of the antennal peduncle, and short and stout dactyli of the walk- ing legs, all to mention the obvious differences from M. analoga Macpherson, 1993, from the Philippines and Indonesia. The 'Albatross' materal of M. sguamosa identified by Baba (1988:133) was merged with M. analoga (Mac- pherson, 1993: 424). RANGE Previously known from the Admiralty Islands and Japan in 275-360m. The known range is now extended to eastern Australia. Munidopsis Whiteaves, 1874 Munidopsis cidaris sp. nov. (Fig. 7) MATERIAL EXAMINED HortorvPE 3(11.6mm), ОМҸ 19712, Sta, 25-1 (17*18.73'S, 147°37.20°E), 1.128-1,178m, heam trawl, 11 May 1986. ETYMOLOGY The specific name 15 a noun in apposition from the Greek kidaris, referring 1o the name of this expedition. DESCRIPTION OF HOLOTYPE Carapace, excluding rostrum, slightly longer than wide, narrowed posteriorly, moderately ar- ched transversely, greatest width between anterior branchial regions, cervical groove dis- tinct. Gastric region lacking dorsal spines, with scale-like rugae moderately elevated; moderately inflated metagastric area of reverse triangle- shape defined by shallow groove arising from near junction of anterior and posterior bifurca- tions of cervical groove. Hepatic and anterior branchial regions separated by anterior cervical groove, provided dorsally with tubercles; each DEEP SEA GALATHEIDS 17 FIG. 7. Munidopsis cidaris sp. nov., male holotype. A, carapace and abdomen, dorsal view; В, same, lateral view; C, telson and right uropod; D, anterolateral part of cephalothorax, showing antennular and antennal peduncles, ventral view; E, endopod of left third maxilliped, lateral view; F, sternal plastron, posterior portion omitted; G, left cheliped, dorsal view; Н, distal segments of right first walking leg, lateral view. Scales = Imm. 18 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM margin lobe-like, separated by notch correspond- ing to cervical groove, anterior lobe (hepatic) with blunt short anterolateral spine. End of posterior bifurcation of cervical groove bordering anterior and posterior branchial regions, as figured. Posterior half of carapace with larger scalc-like ridges more distinctly elevated than those on gastric region; cardiac region well elevated anteriorly but sloping down posteriorly, with transverse ridge considerably raised in profile from level directly anterior 1o it, Front margin slightly oblique, convex directly behind insertion of antennal peduncle, Rostrum short, roughly iniangular, basally wide, 0.27 times as long as remaining carapace; nearly horizontal. dorsally weakly carinate, en- ding in rounded tip. Eyes small, immovable, reaching to about mid- length of rostrum, comeas rounded; eyestalks short without any processes. Abdominal segments rather smooth, second and third segments each with anterior and posterior transverse ridges, both well elevated; fourth segment with anterior ridge only, fifth segment without ridges, sixth segment without distinct lobes on posterior margin. Telson divided into 8 plates, midlateral plate fringed with stiff setae. Basal segmentof antennule elongate, more nar- rowed proximally than distally, with distodorsal spine of modcrate size; lateral margin markedly inflated; distomesial portion. produced but not spiniform; ventral terminal margin denticulate and strongly sloping. Antennal peduncle un- armed, first (proximal) segment with very short blunt process on ventral distomesial margin; second segment narrowed proximally. Tschium of third maxilliped with small spine on flexor distal margin; mesial ridge with 24 den- ticles. Merus distinctly longer than ischium when measured in midlateral line, lateral face widest at midlength, flexor margin with 4 or 5 distally diminishing spines on distal half. Third thoracic sternite strongly narrowed posteriorly, width slightly less than half that of following sterile, anterior margin sinuous, greatest width 3 times greatest length, Fourth thoracic stemite subtriangular, with anteriorly Iruncate margin contiguous to posterior margin of preceding sternite. Chelipeds unequal in length, left one longer and wider; length 2.5 (left) or 2.1 (right) times that of carapace excluding rostrum; finely granulate, sparsely provided with short setae; somewhat depressed distally. Merus with distomesial mar- gin bluntly produced. Carpus as long as movable finger. Propodus 1.8 times as long as wide, 1.26 (left) or 1.08 (right) times as long as movable finger; mesial margin nearly straight, lateral mar- gin convex. Fingers slightly gaping on left, not gaping on right, ventrally spooned, opposable margins lined with denticles, medially strongly convex on fixed finger. somewhat concave on movable finger; distally incurved to cross cach other when closed. Walking legs relatively slender, finely granu- late, nonspinose on surface, gradually diminish- ing in length; first walking leg ending at about middle of movable finger of cheliped, Merus with lateral face flattish, extensor margin crested with rounded ridge continued into carpus, flexor distal margin with minute process. Propodus about 8 times as long as wide, 1.5 times length of dac- tylus, flexor margin with small distal spine. Dac- tylus slender, strongly curving, distally spiniform, flexor margin nearly smooth, with i few very small eminences discernible under high тарп!їїсапоп. Epipods present on chelipeds and following two pairs of walking legs. REMARKS The carapace bearing scale-like, elevated tubercles, well-defined regions, weak lateral mar- ginal spines, the second and third abdominal seg- ments unarmed but with two elevated transverse ridges, and the chelipeds lacking distinct spines, link the species то M, hemingi Alcock & Ander- son, 1899, obtained by the "Investigator! from the Travancore [Kelara] coast in 787m (Alcock & Anderson, 1899:19; Alcock, 1901:251). The ‘Investigator’ species, however, has the carapace broader behind than in front, and bears distinct epigastric spines; the eyes are slightly movable, and have a very small papilliform spine at the mesial angle of the eyestalk; the cheliped has a distomesial spine on the carpus; and the four pairs of pereopods bear epipods. These characters all serve to separate it from M. cidaris. Munidopsis rostrata (A. Milne Edwards, 1880) Galacantha rostrata A. Milne Edwuürds, 1880: 52, Galacantha rostrata; Chace, 1942: 75 (synonymy and references); Baba, 1988: 161. DEEP SEA GALATHEIDS 19 MATERIAL EXAMINED Sta. 32-2 (17205.89'5, 147°11.85°E), 1,539-1,517m, beam trawl, 13 May 1986, 4 ovig. 9(15.7-18.0mm), 1 2 (13.7mm), QMW 19713. RANGE This widespread species occurs in the Indo- Pacific, Atlantic and Southern Oceans, in 1,650- 3,294m. See Chace (1942:76) and Baba (1988:162) for distribution. Munidopsis trachynotus (Anderson, 1896) Galacantha trachynotus Anderson, 1896: 100. Munidopsis trachynotus: Baba, 1988: 171 (synonymy and references). MATERIAL EXAMINED Sta, 30-4 (17*19.12' S, 147?11.20' E), 1,403-1,385m, beam trawl, 12 May 1986, 1 2 (25.7mm), QM W 19714, RANGE Previously known from the Arabian Sea and Sulawesi, in 1,380-1,893m, Munidopsis valdiviae (Doflein & Balss, 1913) Galacantha valdiviae Doflein & Balss, 1913; 147, fig, 15, pl. 16: fig. 2. Munidopsis valdiviae: Baba, 1982: 112, pl. 1: fig. 1; 1988: 173, fig. 71. MATERIAL EXAMINED Sta, 13-1 (17°58.49'S, 148°38.40°B), 1,040-1,059m, beam trawl, 8 May 1986, 1 G(19.6mm), QMW 19715. REMARKS In this specimen, the two epigastric spines which are usually very small, are absent. RANGE Previously known from east Africa off southern Somali Republic, Molucca Sea off northwestern Sulawesi, Palawan Passage, and Japan, in 1,120- 1,644m. The range is now extended to north- eastern Australia. Paramunida Baba, 1988 Paramunida scabra (Henderson, 1885) Munida scabra Henderson, 1885: 409. Paramunida scabra: Baba, 1988: 180 (synonymy and references); 1990:968, fig. 15A. MATERIAL EXAMINED Sta. 47-2 (17?51.76'S, 147°07.95'Еу, 503-497m, sledge, 16 May 1986, 4 с (&.1-9.9пут), б ovig. 9 (7.2- 8.2mm), OMW19716, REMARKS The antennal peduncles are as described and illustrated for Paramunida tricarinata from Madagascar, not as in the female syntype of P. scabra (see Baba, 1990:986, fig. 15), but the gastric spination is typical of the species, having a median spine only. RANGE Previously known from the Malay Archipelago including the Kei Islands, northern Borneo and Philippines, off Hong Kong, off southwestern Taiwan, East China Sea, and Japan, in 70- 1,630m. The range is now extended south te off northeastern Australia. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I thank Dr. Michel Pichon, cruise leader of the *Cidaris l’ Expedition and deputy director of the Australian Institute of Marine Science, Dr. Peter Arnold, a curator at the Museum of Tropical Queensland, Townsville, and Frank Hoedt, then research officer with the project, for making the specimens available for study. The holotype of Galathea inconspicua Henderson in the collec- tion of the Natural History Museum, London, was made available on loan through Paul F. Clark to whom Lexpress my appreciation. The manuscript benefited from reviews hy Peter J.F. Davie of the Queensland Museum, Gary C.B, Poore of the Museum of Victoria, Melbourne, and an anonymous reviewer, and from discussion with Enrique Macpherson of the Instituto de Ciencias del Mar, Barcelona and Michéle de Saint Laurent of the Muséum national d'Histoire naturelle, Paris. Pertinent background data were made available by Peter Davie. LITERATURE CITED ALCOCK, А. 1894. Natural history notes from Н.М. Indian marine survey steamer ‘Investigator’. commander R.F. Hoskyn, R.N., late command- ing. - Series Tl, No. 1. On the results of the deep-sea dredging during the season 1890-9] (continued). Annals and Magazine of Natural History (6)13: 321-334. ALCOCK, A, & ANDERSON, A.R.S. 1899. Natural history notes from H.M. Royal Indian marine survey ship Investigator, commander T.H. 20 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Heming. R.N., commanding. - Series Ш, No. 2. An account of the deep-sea Crustacea dredged! during the surveying season of 1897-98, Annals and Magazine of Natural Histary (7)3; 1-27, ANDERSON, A.R.S, 1896, Natural history notes from the К.1,М,5. steamer ‘Investigator’. Ser. 11, No. 21. An account of the deep-sea Crustacea col- lected during the season 1894-95, Journal af the Asiatic Society of Bengal 65(11:2): 88-106. BABA, K. 1969, Four new genera with their repre- sentatives and six new species of the Galatheidae in the collection of the zoological laboratory, Kyushu University, with redefinition of the genus Galathea, OHMU, Occasional Papers of the Zoological Laboratory, Faculty of Agriculture, Kyushu University 201): 1-32. 1970. Redescription of Bathymunida brevirosiris (Yokoya, 1933) (Crustacea, Decapoda, Galatheidae). Memoirs of the Faculty of Educa- tion, Kumamoto University, Section | (Natural Science) 18; 59-62, 1982, Deep-sea galatheidean Crustacea (Decapoda, Anomura) taken by the R/V Sove-Maru in Japanese waters, Ш. Family Galatheidae, Bulletin of the National Science Museum, Tokyo, series A (Zoology) &(3): 103-118. 1986. Two new anomuran Crustacea (Decapoda! Anomura) from north-west Australia, The Beagle 301): 1-5. 1988. Chirostylid and galatheid crustaceans (Decapoda’ Anomura) of the * Albatross' Philip- pine Expedition, 1907-1910. Researches on Crustacea, Special Number 2: у, 1-203. 1989, Anomuran crustaceans ohtained by dredging from Oshima Strait, Amami-Oshima of the Ryukyu Islands. Memoirs of the National Science Museum 22: 127-134, 1990. Chirostylid and galatheid crustaccans of Madagascar (Decapoda: Anomura), Bulletin du Muséum national d'Histoire naturelle, Paris (4) section A, (1989) ] (4): 921-975, BABA, К. HAYASHI, K, & TORIYAMA, M. 1986, Decapod crustaceans from continental shelf and slope around Japan. (Japan Fisheries Resource Conservation Association. Tokyo). BABA, К. & MACPHERSON, E. 1991. Reexaminu- tion of the type material of Munida miliraris Henderson. [S85 (Crustacea: Decapoda: Galatheidac), with the selection of a lectotype Proceedings of the Biological Society of Washington, 103); 538-544, BABA, K. & SAINT LAURENT, M. DE. 1992. Chirostylid and galatheid crustaceans (Decapoda. Anomura} from active thermal vent areas in the southwest Pacific. Scientia marina 56(4): 321-332. BABA, К. & TÜRKAY, M. 1992. Munida magnian- tennulara, а new deepsea decapod crustacenn from active thermal vent arcas of Valu-Fa-Ridge in the Lau Basin, SW-Pacific (Anomura: Galatheidae). Senckenbergiana maritima 22(3/6): 203-210. BALSS, H. 1914, Uber einige interessante decapoden der ‘Pola’ -Expeditionen in das Rote Meer. An- zeiger der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissen- schaften, Mathematisch-Natur-wissenshaftliche Klasse 51(9): 133-139, 1921. Results of Dr. Е, Mjóberg's Swedish scientific expeditions to Australia 1910-13, XXIX, Stomatopoda, Macrura, Paguridea und Galatheidea, Kungliga Svenska Vetenskap- sakademiens Handlingar 61(10); 2-24. BOONE, L, 1935, Scientific results of the world cruise of the yacht ‘Alva’ 1931, William К. Vanderbilt, commanding. Crustacea and Echinodermata, Bulletin of the Vanderbilt Marine Museum. Hun- tington, New York б; 1-264. BRUCE, А.Ј., 1989, Two mantis shrimps new lo the Australian launa (Crustacea: Stomatopoda: Bathysquillidac). The Beagle 5 (1988): 87-95. 19%). Periclimenes franklini sp. nov., a new deep sea shrimp from the Coral Sea (Crustacea; Decapoda; Palaemonidae), The Beagle 7( 1); 55- 64, CHACE, F.A., Jr. 1942, The anomuran Crustacea. |, Galatheidea. Reports on the scientific results of the Atlantis expeditions to the West Indies, under the joint auspices of the University of Havana and Harvard University, Torreia 11: 1-106, CROSNIER, A, 1988, Contribution a l'étude des gen- res Haliporus Bate 1881 et Gordonella Tirmizi 1960 (Crustacea Decapoda Penaeoidea). Desenption Че deux espéces nouvelles. Bulletin du Muséum national d'Histoire naturelle, Paris (4) 10(A): 563-601. DOFLEIN, F, & BALSS. Н. 1913. Die galatheiden der Deutschen Tiefsee- Expedition, Wissen- schaftliche Ergebmsse der Deutschen Tiefsec- Expedition auf dem dampler ‘Valdivia’ 1898-1899, Jena 20: 125-184. FABRICIUS, J.C. 1793, “Entomologia systematica emendata et aucta secundum Classes, ordines, genera, species ajectis synonymis, locis, obser- vationibus, descriptionibus", Volume 2. Hafniae. GRANT, F.E. & McCULLOCH, A.R. 1906, On а collection of Crustacea from the Port Curtis dis- trict, Queensland. The Proceedings of the Lin- nean Society of New South Wales 31; 2-53. HAIG, J- 1973. Galatheidea (Crustacea, Decapoda, Anomura) collected by the FS, Endeavour, means of the Australian Museum 28(14); 269- э 1974. The anomuran crabs of Western Australia: their distribution in the Indian Ocean and ad- jacent seas, Journal of the Marine Biological Association of India 14(2): 443-451. HALE, H,M, 1927, ‘The crustaceans of South Australia’, Part 1. (Government Printer: Adelaide). HASWELL, М.А. 1882a. Description of same new species of Australian Decapoda. The Proceedings DEEP SEA GALATHEIDS 21 of the Linnean Society of New South Wales 6: 750-763, 1882b. ‘Catalogue of the Australian stalk and ses- sile-cyed Crustacea’. (Australian Museum: Syd- ney). HENDERSON, J.R. 1885. Diagnoses of the new 8 ecies of Galatheidea collected during the llenger- Expedition. Annals and Magazine of Natural History (5) 16: 407-421. 1888, Report on the Anomura Collected by H.M.S Challenger during the Years 1873-76. Report on the Scientific Results of the Voyage of H.M.S. Challenger During the Years 1873-76, Zoology 27: 1-221. KHODKINA, I, V, 1981, A contribution to the fauna of the family Galatheidae (Decapoda) of the south- west Pacific. Zoologicheskii Zhurnal 60(8); 1261-1264, LEACH, W.E. 1820. Galatéadées. Dictionnaire des Sciences Naturelles, Paris 18; 48-56, LEWINSOHN, C, 1967, Beitrag zur kenntnis und verbreitung von Galathea australiensis Stimpson, 1858, (Crustacea Decapoda, Anomura, Galatheidae) nebst beschreibung eines neolypus, Zoologische Mededelingen, Leiden 42(18). MACPHERSON, E. 1990. Crustacea Decapoda: on a collection of Nephropidae from the Indian Ocean and Western Pacific. In, Crosnier, A. (ed.), Résultats des campagnes MUSORSTOM, Volume 6, Mémoires du Muséum national d’- Histoire naturelle, Paris (A) 145: 289-328. 1993, Crustacea Decapoda; Species of the genus Munida Leach, 1820 (Galatheidae) collected during the MUSORSTOM and CORINDON cruises in the Philippines and Indonesia, In Cros- nier, A., (ed.), ‘Résultats des Campagnes MUSORSTOM', Volume 10. Memoires du Muséum. national d'Histoire naturelle, Paris, Zoologie 157; 381-420. MACPHERSON, E, & BABA, К. 1993, Crustacea Decapoda: Munida japonica Stimpson, 1858, and related species (Galatheidae). In Crosnier, A., (edi), ‘Résultats des Campagnes MUSORSTOM', Volume 10. Memoires du Muséum national d'Histoire naturelle, Paris, Zoologie 157: 381-420. McNEILL, F.A, 1926, The biology of North-West islet, Capricorn Group. Australian Zoologist 4(5): 299-318. 1968, Crustacea, Decapoda & Stomatopoda, -Scien- üc Reports of the Great Barrier Reef Expedition 1928-29, British Museum 7(1): 1-98, MELIN, б. 1939. Paguriden und galataheiden von Prof. Dr. Sixten Bocks Expedition nach den Bonin-Inseln 1914, Kungliga Svenska Vetenskapsakademiens Handlinger (3) 18(2):1- 119 MIERS, LE. 1884, Crustacea, Pp, 178-322, 513-575 in ‘Report un the zoological collections made in the Indo-Pacific Ocean during the voyage of sll a 'А]еп` 1881-2”, (British Museum: Lön- оп). MILNE EDWARDS, А. 1880. Reports on the results of dredging under the supervision of Alexander Agassiz, in the Gulf of Mexico and in the Carib- bean Sea, etc. VIII. Etudes préliminaires sur les Crustacés. Bulletin of the Museum of Сотрага- live Zoology al Harvard College, in Cambridge 801): 1-68, MIYAKE, S, 1982, Japanese crustacean decapods and stomatopods n colar’. Vol. 1. Macrura, Anomura and Stomatopoda, Hoikusha: Osaka. ORTMANN, А. 1894, Crustaceen, Pp, 3-80, In Semon, R, (ed.), ‘Zoologische forschungsreisen їп Australien und dem Malayischen Archipel’. Denkschriften der medizinisch-naturwissen- schaftlschen Gesellschaft zu Jena 8. POORE, G.C.B, & BARDSLEY, T.M, 1992 Austrarcturellidae (Crustacea: Isopoda. Val- vilera). а new family from Australasia, Inver- tebrate Taxonomy 6: 843-908. RICHER DE FORGES, B. & GUINOT, D, 1990. А new Cyrtomaia: C. griffini from Australia (Crus- (асса: Decapoda: Brachyura), Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 28(2)! 523-530, SAINT LAURENT, M. DE & MACPHERSON, 1990, Les especes atlantiqnes du genre Eumurt ida Smith, 1883 (Crustacea! Decapoda: Chiros- tylidae), Journal of Natural History, 24(3); 647- 666. STIMPSON, W. 1858. Prodromus descriptionis animalium evertebratorum, quae in Expeditione ad Occanum Pacificum Septentrionalem a Republica Federata missa, Cadwaladaro Ringgold et Johanne Rodgers Ducibus, obser- vavitet descripsit. Pars VH. Crustacea Anomura. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia 10: 225-252. VAN DAM, AJ. |938, Die gattung Bathymunida Balss. Zoologischer Anzeiger 121: 194-202 WHITEAYVES, J.F. 1874. On recent deep-sea dredging operations in the Gulf of St, Lawrence, American Journal of Science (3) 7: 210-219, WHITELEGGE, T. 1900, Crustacea Part 1. Scientific results of the trawling expedilion of H.M.C.S, Thetis, off the coast of New South Wales, in February and March, 1898. Australian Museum, Sydney, Memoir 4:133-199, YANAGITA, I, 1943. Revision of Munida, a genus of decapod crustaceans found in Japanese walers Bulletin of the Biogcographical Society ot Japan 13; 13-32, YOKOYA, Y. 1933, On the distribution of decapod crystaceans inhabiting the continents! shell around Japan, chiefly based upon the malerials collected by S.S, Soyo-Maru during the years 1923-1930, Journal of the College of Agriculture, Tokyo Imperial University 12/1): 1-226 22 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM MIDDLE DEVONIAN SCOLECODONTS FROM NORTH QUEENSLAND, Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1): 22. 1994:-Scolecodonts were recovered from limestones of the Middle Devonian Burdekin Formation, Fan- ning River Group collected at Horseshoe Bend, DU 424 104; Dotswood 1:100 000 topographic sheet. Terminology follows Sylvester (1959). Abbreviations: L-left, R-right, M-maxilla, UV- upper view, IV. lower (under) view. Most material is left in open nomenclature given its paucity and fragmentary nature. Class POLYCHAETA Arabellites Hinde, 1879 emend Sylvester, 1959 Arabellites hendersoni sp. nov. (Fig.1F,G) Erymology. For R. A. Henderson, James Cook University. Material. Holotype, QMF2751 L Description. Elongate LMI; prominent offset hook; dentary occupies mid 1/3 of upper side, with 5 small, closely spaced sharp denticles posteriorly inclined. Fossa 1/3 of upper side, margin broken, with thin flange. A saddle from the posterior end of the hook becomes more prominent outward-anteriorly. Remarks. Similar to A. conspicuous Eller, 1961 (M. Devonian, Dundee Lst,, Michigan) but with only 5 denticles and dentary notrextending to posterior margin. Fossa smaller and denticles fewer than A. hamiltonensis (Stauffer) (Sylvester, 1959) from the Late Devonian-Early Carboniferous Snyder Creek and Choüteau Fmns., Missouri. Arabellites sp. (Fig.1C) Material. QMF27516. Description. Small LMI or II; prominent fang, separated from 7 large, posteriorly inclined denticles. Bight strongly erescen- lic outer anterior margin tight. Remarks. Lack of upper surface detail prevents assignment. Staurocephalites Hinde, 1879 Staurocephalites sp. a (Fig.1B) Material. QMF27515. Description. Elongate, large (0.6mm) LMII fragment; 7 sharp denticles posteriorly deflected and shortening; probable flange on long fossa. Remarks. Fossa and sloped denticles indicate genus bul species cannot he identified. Staurocephalites sp. b (Fig.1D) Material. QMF27514, Description. Fragmentary, 0.9mm, LMIT; 8 inclined, shorten- ing denticles on an abraded jaw; fossa long, margin broken. Remarks. Its fragmentary nature prevents specific assignment. It is a larger form than Sraurocephalites sp. а. Staurocephalites sp. c (Fig. 1E) Material, QMF27513. Description. Large (0.9mm) elongate RMII; long fossa, stour fang; 11 moderately spaced, inclined, posteriorly shortening denticles; first large, third slightly more inclined. Remarks. Denticle inclination and the long fossa indicate the genus, but it is not specifically identifiable. Ildraites Eller, 1936 lidraites sp. (Fig. LA) Material. QMF27512. Description. Large, RMU c.1,0mm long, 0.55mm wide at midpoint. Inner margin near straight; outer anterior margin moderately convex; bight large, erescentic; fossa large with thin flange, Fang stout, slightly larger than denticles, which are well-spaced, inclined and evenly sized up to denticle 6 then becoming smaller posteriorly. Remarks. Close tod. bowenensis Eller, 1941 but a smaller gap between fang апа denticle 1, inner margin not curved; outer margin straight. Literature Cited Eller, E.R. 1941. Scolecodonts from the Windom, Middle Devonian, of western New York, Annals Camegie Museum 28: 323-341. 1961. Scolecodonts from well samples of the Dundee, Devonian of Michigan. Annals Carnegie Museum 36; 29-47. Sylvester, К. К. 1959. Scolecodonis from central Missouri. Journal of Paleontology 33: 33-49. Alex G. Cook & Susan Turner, Queensland Museum, P.O. Box 3300, South Brisbane, Queensland 4101, Australia; ] Decem- ber 1993. FIG. 1. A, Hdraites sp., UV; B, Staurocephalites sp. a, IV; C, Arabellites sp., LMI or Tl, oblique view; D, Stauracephalites sp. b, LIV; E, Staurocephalites sp. e, UV (oblique); FG, Arabellites hendersoni sp. nov. F UVY (oblique); G, IV.Scaále: A-C = 200ym; D,E = 320jm; F.G = 400и. A NON-DESTRUCTIVE TECHNIQUE FOR DETERMINING THE SHAPES IN S/TU OF PERMINERALIZED SEEDS H.T. CLIFFORD AND L.G. CARNEY Clifford, H.T. & Camey, L.G. 1994 06 01: A non-destructive technique for determining the shapes in situ of permineralized seeds. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1):23-25. Brisbane. ISSN 0079-8835. The usefulness of ultrasonography for determining the shapes of embedded permineralized seeds is demonstrated. [ ]Permineralized seeds, ultrasonics. H.T. Clifford, Queensland Museum, PO Box 3300, South Brisbane, Queensland 4101, Australia; L.G. Carney, Queensland University of Technology, GPO Box 2434, Brisbane, Queensland 4001, Australia; 10 November 1993. Outlines of probable peltasperm seeds whose testas are intact but whose contents have been replaced by chalcedony are sometimes exposed on the cut surfaces of ‘forest floor’, a silicified Mesozoic peat-like material occurring as small boulders scattered on the soil surface or in creck beds in the Miles-Chinchilla-Wandoan region of SE Queensland, As the seeds are rare a non- destructive means of determining their shape was sought. An ultrasonic technique used in op- tometry to explore the axial dimensions of the eye and the distance between ocular tissues, was employed to determine whether the embedded testa would provide a sufficiently distinct bound- ary surface for detection by sound waves. ait ЕЗ L FL n i wee J A L EN. = » n " А а ai TA FIG. 1. Transverse section of a cluster of permincralized seeds exposed on the cut surface of QMF31911, x5. MATERIAL AND METHODS A slab of ‘forest floor’ with seed outlines ex- posed on its surface (Fig.1) was mounted on a horizontal stage above which was an ultrasonic probe. When the probe is placed in contact with each seed, sound waves penetrate the medium and are returned from acoustically reflective boundaries. The elapsed reflection time allows distance within the medium to be established. Velocity of the sound waves in chalcedony was assumed to be similar to that in crystalline quartz, namely, 5720m/s (Kaye & Laby,1973). In other applications, this technique has been shown to be ultrasonography was performed at 0.5mm intervals along traverses ' Q.1mm apart, and disposed at right © angles to the long axis of the seed outline. The data Ss were logged and | transformed into images imposed on a three dimen- $ sional Imm grid using the Micro- soft Excel graphics soft- ware. To check тһе reliability of the technique a ' section was made through one of the seeds at right angles both to the 24 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM -1 2 meridian Depth (mm) 2 -2mm -3 А -2 32mm Depth (mm) -3 2 meridian „тт -4 0 > 4 6 8 10 +2mm meridian C Longitudinal axis (mm) FIG. 2. Three dimensional ultrasonographs of a partial seed whose outline is exposed on the surface of a slab cut from a boulder of permineralized “forest floor". A,B, oblique-lateral views ; C, surface view. SHAPES OF IN SITU PERMINERALIZED SEEDS 25 B FIG. 3. Shape of the partial seed of Fig. 2 as seen in transverse section 7, to the right along the longitudinal axis. A, outline of testa on surface; B, outline of seed as indicated by the position of the acoustic reflecting boundaries as given in Fig. 2С. plane of its exposed surface and its longitudinal axis. The shape of the embedded portion of the seed was thereby revealed. RESULTS Three views of a partial seed determined by this method (Fig.2) may be compared with the real shape by comparing individual traverses (Fig. 3). DISCUSSIONS Close correspondence between the predicted and observed shape of the embedded seed inves- tigated confirms the capacity of ultrasonography to distinguish boundaries between fossil seeds and the matrix in which they are embedded. The technique merits further investigation to deter- mine whether ultrasonography is applicable to the study of other permineralized fossils. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS We acknowledge with pleasure the technical assistance of Chris Beck for making the measure- ments, the Department of Earth Sciences, Univer- sity of Queensland for sectioning the seed, Natalie Camilleri for redrawing the diagrams and the Queensland Museum Photography Section for the photograph. The specimen was provided by Graham Dawes of Miles. LITERATURE CITED KAYE, G.W.C. & LABY, T.H. 1973. ‘Tables of physi- cal and chemical constants’. (Longman: Lon- don). RUDNICKA, A.R., STEELE, C.F., CRABB, О.Р. & EDGAR, D.F. 1992. Repeatability, reproducibility and intersession variability of the Allergen Humphrey ultrasonic biometer. Acta Opthalmologica 70: 327-334, 26 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM DESIGNATION OF THE TYPE SPECIES OF SAL- TUARIUS, AND OTHER DATA ON THE GENUS. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1): 26. 1994 :- The large leaf-tailed geckos of eastern Australia’s rainforests originally assigned to Phyllurus, have been transferred to Saltuarius (Couper et al., 1993). Saltuarius now includes S. cornutus (Ogilby, 1892), S. salebrosus (Covacevich, 1975), S. swaini (Wells & Wellington, 1985) and S. occultus Couper, Covacevich & Moritz, 1993. In our detailed description and diagnosis of Saltuarius, we omitted to designate à type species. Sa/tuarius cornutus (Ogilby, 1892) is here designated as the type species of this genus. When our review and elaboration of the description of 5. swaini were completed, three Australian Museum specimens (R92122, R98333, R110510) stood apart from our sample because of what appeared to be anomalous colour patterns. Recent advice (С. Shea, in litt., 16 March, 1994) has enabled us to correct collection data for two of these specimens, and confirm that of the third. The colour and pattern of this specimen (R92122 from a eucalypt-granite locality) are those of forms more frequently associated with rainforest. Table 1 summarizes supposed and actual collection localities and our colour and pattern descriptions of S. swaini from ‘rainforest’ and 'eucalypt-granite' localities in northern New South Wales and southern Queensland. From these dala, we conclude that what we described (Couper et al., 1993) as the ‘eucalypt-granite’ colour form of 5. swaini 15 confined to the Stanthorpe-New England Plateau area, and does not occur in rainforest. Acknowledgements Dr H.G. Cogger of the Australian Museum drew our atten- tion to our omitting to designate a type species for Saltuarius. Dr G. Ingram of the Queensland Museum commented on this note constructively. We are grateful for their advice. Literature Cited Couper, P.J., Covacevich, J.A. & Moritz, C. 1993. A review of the leaf-tailed geckos endemic to eastern Australia: a new genus, four new species, and other new data. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 34: 95-124. P.J. Couper, J.A. Covacevich, Queensland Museum, PO Box 3300, South Brisbane, Queensland 4101, Ausiralia; C. Moritz, Zoology Department, University of Queensland, Queensland 4072, Australia; 26 February 1994. TABLE 1. Register entries vs actual collection localities for three S. swaini specimens, with their colour forms. R921 i = RN NW Amiens, SEQ (eucalypt-granite) Mt Warning, NENSW | (rainforest) — Australian] AM register entry: Actual co collection locality | locality Colour “and pattern [Colour form (Couper e et Museum Couper et al., 1993 (Couper et al., 1993) al., 1993) тер. no. km NW Amiens, SEQ|6km NW Amiens, SEQ | ‘gray-mid dark brown’ dires | (eucalypt-granite) Mt Warning, NENSW| ‘lichen-like’ (rainforest) 15km NW Amiens, SEQ] 'heavily-blotched' *eucalypt-granite* | (eucalypt-granite) р *The 'gray-mid dark brown’ colour form is uncommon in *eucalypt-granite' areas, but is one of two dominant colour morphs in rainforests. A SEPTATE GASTROPOD FROM THE SILURIAN BUNGONIA LIMESTONE, NEW SOUTH WALES ALEX G. COOK Cook, A.G, 1994 06 01: A septate gastropod from the Silurian Bungonia Limestone, New South Wales. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1); 27-30. Brisbane. ISSN 0079-8835. Michelia bauerae sp. nov., is a high-spired, extensively septate gastropod from the Late Silurian, lower Bungonia Limestone, Bungonia Caves, New South Wales. Extensive septa- tion is confirmed within the Murchisoniidae. Septation is related to reduction in body volume, and avoidance of detrimental effects from apical breakage.[Michelia, Gastropoda, Mur- chisoniidae, septa, Silurian, Bungonia. Alex G. Cook, Queensland Museum, Р.О, Box 3300, South Brisbane, Queensland 4101, Australia; 1 December 1993. Septation is rare in high-spired gastropods but is more common in low-spired and discoidal forms particularly of the Euomphaloidea. Nine specimens of Michelia bauerae sp. nov, from the Bungonia Limestone confirm septation in thc Murchisoniidae. The Bungonia Limestone crops out 150km SW of Sydney, where it forms the basal Siluro- Devonian assemblage of the Wollondilly Tract in the Bungonia area, Carr et al. (1980) divided the Bungonia Limestone into upper, middle and lower limestone units separated by upper and lower shale members. Bauer (1993) reinterpreted the stratigraphy and provided a more detailed facies analysis. Gastropods, bivalves and stromatoporoids were recovered from Flying Fortress Cave, part of the Bungonia Caves system; locality B17 of Bauer (1993) in lower limestone unit of Carr et al. (1980). The faunule occurs in shallow water, moderate to high energy, subtidal deposits (Carr et 31,1980; Bauer,1993) of late Ludlovian age (Carr, Jones & Wright,1980; Carr et al.,1980; Jones et al,,1981). I have herein used whorl profile to mean the cross sectional shape of the whorl (sensu Rohr, 1980). All material is lodged with the Queensland Museum (QMF). SYSTEMATIC PALAEONTOLOGY Phylum MOLLUSCA Class GASTROPODA Cuvier, 1797 Superfamily MURCHISONIOIDEA Koken,1897 Family MURCHISONIIDAE Koken, 1 897 Michelia Roemer, 1854 Michelia Roemer, 1854: 73 (not sighted); Knight, 1937. 710; Knight,1941: 194; Knight et al.,1960; 1292; Tassell, 1976: 14, Vetotuba Etheridge Jr., 1890: 62. TYPE SPECIES Michelia cylindrica Roemer, from the Middle Devonian of Germany: by subsequent designa- tion of Knight (1937:710). DIAGNOSIS Large, high-spired, many-whorled, narrowly phaneromphalus gastroped with deep V-shaped sinus in outer lip. Whorl surface gently arched between shallow sutures, nearly flat (Knight 1941), REMARKS Knight et al. (1960) synonymised Coelocaulus Oehlert,1887 with its synonyms Vetoruba Etheridge Jr., and Coelidium Clarke & Ruedemann,1903 (Knight,1941,1944) with Michelia, Roemer,1854. Knight et al. (1960) questionably synonymised Melissosia Clarke. Tassell (1976) accepted these synonymies and assigned the type species of Vetotuba to Michelia. Rohr (1980) differed with Knight et al. (1960) separating Coelocaulus on views expressed by Ulrich & Scofield (1897). If Rohr's (1980) view is maintained, and Knight's (1944) opinion also accepted then Vetotuba cannot be placed within Michelia. Knight (1941: pl. 453), however, stated that Oehlert's (1887) figures overemphasise the boundaries of the selenizone, and that topotype material he illustrates shows only a weak selenizone. Type and topolype material of Coelocaulus (Knight,1941) does not demonstrate 28 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. |. Michelia bauerae sp. nov. A, paratype, QMF25726, apical whorls, x3; B, holotype, QMF25723, x1; С, paratype, QMF25747, worn, abraded, showing prominent septa, x1; D, paratype, QMF25722, side view, x1. the flattened base typical of Michelia and Vetotuba. Thus I maintain synonymy of Verotuba with Michelia and separate Coelacaulus from Michelia on the basis of basal profile- Michelia bauerae sp. nov. (Fig. 1) DIAGNOSIS Very large, cyrtoconoid, narrowly phanerom- phalous gastropod with flattened whorl surface between slightly impressed sutures. MATERIAL EXAMINED HOLOTYPE: QMF25723. PARATYPES: QMF25722,25724—25727,25141,29314. AGE AND OCCURRENCE Late Silurian (Ludlovian), Flying Fortress Cave, Bungonia Caves, Bungonia, New South Wales; lower Bungonia Limestone. DESCRIPTION High-spired, slightly cyrtoconoid shell, very large, up to 100mm (Table 1), width up to 52mm. Narrowly phaneromphalus with rounded, flat- tened base. Apical angle c.40°, apices missing from all specimens. Whorl surface flattened be- tween slightly impressed sutures; sutural slope approximately 15°, Subovate to rounded rectan- gular whorl profile. Growth lines known only from ОМЕ293 14. upon which 3 poorly preserved fine collabral lines are inclined opposedly on whorl surfaces strongly suggesting angular, V- SEPTATE SILURIAN GASTROPOD 29 TABLE 1. Shell parameters for material of M. bawerae Sp. nov. [fa Jw JA мм] gem ы өр | — Омғ25723 100 |52 |42 [1 |4 |274223 | d pesos x p] Әмтзэто7 n 1s je a [7 [ssas —] = = € height (mm); W = maximum width (mm); А = apical angle (^) ; M = missing whorls (estimated); No, = whorl number; S = septal spacings (mm).* = disrupted. shaped sinus, First 4—7 whorls extensively parti- tioned with thin, moderately arcuate, variably- spaced septa (Table 1). REMARKS The cyrtoconoid form, narrow persistent um- bilicus and sinus allies the species to Michelia Roemer. M. bauerae has a flatter whorl surface than the type species (Knight.1941: pl.42, fig.1) and it is much larger. M. brazeri (Etheridge Jr.) has similar whor] surfaces, but the Bungonia species is approximately twice the size, and does mot express the obvious pseudoselenizone. M. darwini (de Koninck) is a smaller form. De Koninck's (1876) type has ал obvious flattened profile, and narrow umbilicus and a more equi- dimensional whorl profile (Tassell,1976,1982) compared to the horizontally clongate aperture of М. bauerae. ETYMOLOGY For Julie Anne Bauer who collected and donated the material. SEPTATION According to Yochelson (1971) extensive sep- tation is restricted to the Euomphalidac, but ex- tensive septation is now known within Omphalocirridac(Linsicy,1978). Loxonematidae, Pleurotomarioidea (Yochel- son;1971, pers. comm.) and Murchisoniidac (herein). It has been noted (Cook,1993) that sep- tation is most common within discoidal, discoidal open-coiled, and low nondiscoidal forms. Micromphalus turris Knight, 1945 and Fletcher- viewia septata Cook, 1993 are high-spired excep- tions and Straparollus (Euomphalus) hoffmani Linsley & Yochelson, 1973 is а medjum-spired form. Varying opinions of septa are that they |, add strength to the shell (Yochelson,1971): 2, eliminate the need to maintain elongate body mass (Yochelson.1971: Linsley & Yochelson, 1973; Cook,1993); and 3, allow for abandonment of early whorls and early whorl breakage without detnment (Morris & Cleevely, 1981: Caok, 1993). Yochelson(1971) suggested that septation related to the need for sessile forms to redistribute cal- cium carbonate. Extensive septation Js present within the first 4—7 whorls of this taxon. Spacing of septation within М, bauerae is variable according to whorl position, and within each whorl (Table 1); earlier whorls commonly show more widely spaced septa, but in later whorls septa are closer together. These limited data show that partitioning did not result in incremental body volume ог body length change at a constant rate, Irregular spacing of partitions within septate gastropods has been noted (Yochelson,1971). The primary role of septa in M. bauerae is perceived lo be body shortening, albeit spas- modic, and avoidance of detrimental effects of apical breakage. The thin septa relative to the thick shell suggest little need for strengthening and no advantage through increased weight in the upper shell, Shell growth in gastropods 1s episodic (Linsley & Javidpour, 1980), and this may be reflected in seplal spacing with uneven spacing showing changes in the ability to secrete shell, a response to vitality fluctuations. Given the high energy environment interpreted for the taxon's occur- rence, changes in vitality could be expected, This suggests external control, related to seasonal or other fitness fluctuations given that shell seere- tion costs considerable energy (Wilbur & Saleud- din, 1983). Linsley & Javidpour (1980) speculated that build-up of calcium salts within the mantle prior to episodes af growth, necessitates rapid secre- lion of large sheets of carbonate. During periods less conducive to shell formation, calcium salt build-ups within the mantle, acquired through active ion uptake (Linsley & Javidpour,1980), could have subordinately been reduced hy secre- tion of thin septa allowing body shortening and calcium salt reduction without extensive fitness loss, ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Peter Jell, Mary Wade, Ralph Molnar and John Stanisic are thanked for discussions and en- 30 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM couragement. Julie Bauer and Tony Wright are thanked for provision of material, information on unpublished work in the area and bringing the material to my attention. Thanks goto QM library and photography sections. LITERATURE CITED BAUER, J, А. 1993, "The palaeoenvironment of the limestone at Bungonia, New South Wales, Australia’. B.Sc. (Hons) thesis, University of Wollongong, CARR, Р, F., JONES, B. G., & WRIGHT, A, J. 1980. Dating of rocks from thee Bungonia District, New South Wales. Proceedings of the Linncan Society of New South Wales 104(2): 111—117. CARR, Р. F., JONES, B. G., KANTSLER, А. J., MOORE, P. S. & COOK, A. С. 1980. The geol- ogy of the Bungonia District, New South Wales, Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales 104(4); 229-224, CLARKE, J. M. & RUEDEMANN, R. 1903, Geulph Fauna in the state of New York, New York State Museum Memoir 5:3-195 COOK, А. С. 1993, Flercherviewin septata: а new high spired, septate gastropod from the Devonian of north Queensland. Journal of Paleontology 67(5): 816-821. ETHERIDGE Jr., R. 1890, Descriptions of Upper Silurian fossils from the Lilydale Limestone, Upper Yarra District, Victoria, Records of the Australian Museum 1(3); 60-67 JONES, B. G., CARR, P. F, & WRIGHT, A. J. 1981 Silurian and carly Devonian Geochronology- 3 reappraisal, wilh new evidence from the Bun- gonia Limestone, Alcheringa 5(3-4): 197-207, KNIGHT, J. B. 1937, Genotype designations and new names for invalid hornonyms among Paleozoic gastropod genera. Journal of Paleontology 11(8):709—714 1941. Paleozoic gastropod genotypes. Special Papers, Geological Society of America 32: 1— 406. 1944, Paleozoic Gastropoda, Pp. 432-479, In Shimer, Н, W. & Schrock, В, R, (eds), “Index fossils of North America’, (John Wiley & Sons: New York). 1945. Some new genera of Paleozoic Gastropoda. Journal of Paleontology 19:573—587. KNIGHT, J. B., COX, L. R., KEEN, R. L., BATTEN, E, L, YOCHELSON, Б. L. & ROBERTSON, К, 1960 Systematic descriptions, Pp. 169-310. In Moore, R. C. (ed.), ‘Treatise on Invertebrate Paleontolngy, Pt. 1, Mollusca 1'. (Geological Society of America and University of Kansas Press: Lawrence). КОКЕМ, E 1897 Die Gastropoden des baltische Un- tersilurs. Bulletin de l'Academie Imperiale des Sciences de St.- Petersbourg 7(2): 97-214. KONINCK, L. G. DE. 1876. Translated us 1898 Descriptions of the Palaeozoic Fossils of New South Wales (Australia) Memoirs of the Geologi- cal Survey of New south Wales. Palaeontology 6: 1-298, LINSLEY, R. M. 1978. The Omphalocirridae: А new family of Palaeozoic Gastropoda which exhibits sexual dimorphism. Memoirs of the National Museum of Victoria 39: 33-54 LINSLEY, R. M. & JAVIDPOUR, M. 1980. Episodic Growth in Gastropoda. Malacologia 20( 1): 153— 160, LINSLEY, R. M. & YOCHELSON, E. L. 1973. Devonian carrier shells (Euomphalidae) trom North America and Germany, United States Geological Survey Professional Paper 824: 1— 27. MORRIS, N. J. & CLEEVELY, R.J. 1981. Phaneron- tinus cristatus (Phillips) and the nature of the euomphalacean gastropods. Bulletin of the British Museum of Natural History (Geology) 35 (3): 195—212. OEHLERT, D. P. 1888 Descriptions de quelques espéeces dévoniennes du department de la mayenne. Bulletin Société études des Sciences Angers 1887. 65—120. ROHR, D. M, 1980, Ordovician-Devonian Gastropoda from the Klamath Mountains, California, Palacontographica АЫ: A. 171 (4-6): 141—199. TASSELL, C. B. 1976. A revision of the gastropod fauna of the Lilydale Limestone (Early Devonian) of Victoria. Memoirs of the National Museum of Victoria 37; 1-21. 1982, Gastropods from the Early Devonian “Recep- taculites” Limestone, Taemas, New South Wales, Records of the Queen Victoria Museum 77: 1—59. ULRICH, E. О. & SCOFIELD, W. Н, 1897, The Lower Silurian Gastropoda of Minnesota. Pp 831-1081 In Ulrich, E. O., Scofield, W. H., Clarke, J. М. & Winchell, №, W. (eds), ‘Geology of Minnesota, Volume 3, Part 3. Paleontology’. (Geological and Natural History Survey of Minnesota). WILBUR, K. M. & SALEUDDIN, A. 5. M. 1983. Shell formation. Pp 235-287, In Saleuddin, A. S. M. & Wilbur, К. M. (eds), “Тһе Mollusca, Volume 4: Physiology, Part 1'. (Academic Press: New York). YOCHELSON, E. L. 1971 A new Upper Devonian gastropod and its bearing on open coiling and septation. Smithsonian Contributions to Paleobiology 3: 221-711 CARLIA PARRHASIUS, A NEW QUEENSLAND SKINK Р.) COUPER, J.A. COVACEVICH AND P.J. LETHBRIDGE Couper, P.J., Covacevich, J.A. & Lethbridge, P.J, 1994 06 01: Carlia parrhasius, a пем Queensland skink. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1): 31-33. Brisbane. ISSN 0079- 8835. Carlia parrhasius sp.nov. is described from the Glennie Tableland, an isolated sandstone block on NE Cape York Peninsula, it is distinguished from its congeners by bold brown/black and white body stripes, combined with a fire-red tail. O Scincidae, Carlia parrhasius, Cape York Peninsula, sandstone, Morethia. P.J. Couper & J.A. Covacevich, Queensland Museum, PO Box 3300, South Brisbane, Queensland 4 101, Australia; P.J. Lethbridge, Department of Environmeni and Heritage, PO Box 2066, Cairns, Queensland 4870, Ausrralia; 15 December 1993. Skinks of the genus Carlia are well known in Australia, especially in the NE, where they are conspicuous for their large populations and high species diversity, Twenty-one species are recog- nised (Ingram & Covacevich,1989). Colour and pattern are important in distinguishing the species, because there is considerable overlap in many scale characters. Most known Carlia spp. are some shade of brown and have an array of distinct spots, dashes or stripes by which most can be distinguished readily. Male breeding colours are sometimes especially distinct (Ingram & Covacevich,1980,1989). Our new four fingered Carlia may be distinguished in form and size from other Australian genera of four-fingered skinks, except Lygisaurus. It is excluded from Lygisaurus by its high supradigital scale count on the fourth toe (210). All Lvgisaurus species have <10 supradigital scales on the fourth toe. The colour and pattern of the new skink are both holdly distinct amongst Carlia, and highly con- vergent with five- fingered Morerhia, which has а fused lower eyelid (vs the moveable eyelid in Carlia). The new species has a brown/black and white striped body with a fire-red tail. Field and first-level] laboratory examinations suggested as- signment to Morethia. Abbreviations used are: Queensland Museum QM; far northeastern Queensland, FNEQ; snout- vent length, SVL, SYSTEMATICS Carlia parrhasius sp. nov. (Figs 1,2) MATERIAL EXAMINED HOLOTYPE: QMJ57868, Azure Creek, at 140+20m, Glennie Tableland, Cape York Peninsula, 12° 21.96'S, 142° 56.71 E, +250m, FNEQ, P.J. Lethbridge & J.W. Winter, 25 Apr 1993, PARATYPES; QMJS7867, 0М157869, 24 Apr 1993. Other collection details as for holotype. DIAGNOSIS Body black and white striped with fire-red tail is aunique colour pattern in Carlia. Dorsal scales with weak carinations made up of a series of points, and long, acute ear lobules are shared with 2 (of 3) species restricted to rock habitats (C. rimula, C. scirtetis) which also have distinct colour patterns (Ingram & Covacevich, 1989). but bear no resemblance to C. parrhasius. DESCRIPTION Holotype. SVL 27.4mm. Lengths (% SVL). Tail 77.0% (damaged), forelimb 30.6%, hindlimb 40.7%, head length 23.5%, head width 14.9%, axilla-groin 46,1%. Prefrontals large, moderately spaced. Frontal elongate, 1.4 times as long as wide. Internasal and frontal scales in contact. Frontoparietals fused forming a single shield. Interparietal free. Parietal scales in broad contact behind the interparictal. Enlarged nuchal scales 2, Nuchal scales in con- tact with the posterior edge of the parietals 4. Supralabials 7, fifth largest and below eye. In- fralabials 6—7. Presuboculars 2. Loreals 2, Supra- oculars 4, first two in contact with frontal. Supra ciliaries 7. Lower eyelid movable. Transparent palpebral disc occupying more than half the lower eyelid. One primary temporal. Secondary temporals 2, upper largest and overlapping lower, Ear aperture round, much smaller than palpebral disc and surrounded by long acute lobules. Postmental in contact with first 2 infralabjals, Midbody scale rows 28. Paravertebrals 49. Mid-dorsal scales with. smoothly curved le P FIG. 1, Holotype of Carlia parrhasiws sp. NOV., ОМ)57868 (G. Cranitch). posterior edges; dorsal and lateral scales with weak carnations, broken up into a series of smaller points. Digits on forelimb 4. Digits on hindlimb 5. Subdigital lamellae (fourth toe) 27, smooth. Plantar scales rounded. Supradigital scales (fourth toe) 12. Brown/black ground colour broken by silvery- white longitudinal stripes (midlateral, dor- solateral and vertebral). The midlateral and dorsolateral stripes run from the sides of the head to the base of the tail, broadening posteriorly to the hindlimbs, The vertebral stripe is shorter, beginning on the nape and running slightly beyond the hindlimbs. Head coppery-brown. Limbs mid-brown, speckled with white, Tail un- patterned along most of its length, and flushed with red. Venter, silvery-white. Paratypes. SVL 26.2-33.5mm. Lengths (% SVL). Tail 149.6% (regenerated)—195.8% (original), forelimb 29.7-30.8%, hindlimb 39.1- 40.9%, head length 21.7-24.4%, head width 14.0-16.2%. Prefrontals large, moderately to widely spaced. Internasal and frontal scales in moderate to broad contact. Supralabials 6-7, usually 7. Infralabials 6. Midbody scale rows 27-28. Subdigital lamellae (fourth toe) 26—27. Supradigital scales (fourth toe) 11. QMJS7867 similar to holotype in pattern and colour. QMJ57869 has а mid-brown ground colour and less clearly defined stripes and a midlateral stripe which is only just discernible. Its tail is mid- brown, lacking any red. HABITAT The Glennie Tableland is a sandstone plateau (Fig. 3) of the Mesozoic Gilbert River Formation (Willmott & Powell,1977), 60km NW of the Lockhart Aboriginal Community. The plateau is c.20km N-S and 10km at its widest point. The main escarpment faces east, rising from the coas- tal plain to nearly 300m, with a less pronounced escarpment on the western side, where the 2 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 2. Carlia parrhasius sp. nov., QMJS7869, Dorsal and lateral views of head, tableland falls to the inland rolling downs at about 140m. Deeply incised valleys radiate out from the plateau and drainage is mainly into the Olive River. Sandstone cliffs, usually in а 2-3 terraces, with cliffs upto 15m in height, line the incised valleys, particularly along the N and E sides of the plateau. The predominant vegetation is grassy eucalypt woodland, with numerous patches (the largest of about 50ha) of mesophyll vine forest at the heads of the deeply incised valleys. Small patches of windswept low heath occur on the summit, The plateau is the best developed sandstone cliff habitat north of the ‘Quinkan Country’ in the Laura district. С. parrhasius was collected on large sandstone fragments at the base of the cliffs and the talus slope below them. Vegetation was grassy eucalypt woodland, canopy height c.15m, with dominant trees including Darwin Stringybark (Eucalyptus tetradonta), a bloodwood (E. cf. hylandii) and Cooktown Ironwood (Erythroph- leum chlorostachys). The understorey contained scattered Bushman's Clothes Peg (Grevillea glauca) and an Acacia (Acacia cf. crassicarpa). Ground cover was of medium- dense grass, up to 1-5т tall, on rocky ground. ETYMOLOGY For the Greek artist, Parrhasius, a master of deception through his work. A NEW QUEENSLAND SKINK 33 FIG. 3. Habitat of Carlia parrhasius, Glennie Tableland. Cape York Peninsula (J. Winter). REMARKS The holotype and paratype 2 (QMJ57867) share the same bold colour and pattern; the larger paratype д (QMJ57869) is basically brown (vs black), possibly due to age or preservation. We suggest from these meagre data, that the pattern in C. parrhasius may be a juvenile character. Black and white striped bodies and red tails are seen in Ctenotus spp. (C. decaneurus, C. leae, C. striaticeps, some C. taeniolatus), M. ruficauda, M. storri; and some Proablepharus kinghorni. One striking foreign example is Lygosoma punctata, from Sri Lanka (da Silva, pers.comm). Red tails have been observed in the males of several Carlia spp. during the breeding season and in some species of Lygisaurus. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The Glennie Tableland was selected for survey in the Cape York Peninsula Land Use Strategy by John Winter, who was also co-collector of the type specimens. Mr Fred Sebulla allowed the survey team access to the Glennie Tableland. Gary Cranitch and Bruce Cowell prepared the photographs. Keith McDonald and Glen Ingram provided helpful comments on the manuscript. LITERATURE CITED INGRAM, G.J. & COVACEVICH, J.A. 1980. Two new lygosomine skinks endemic to Cape York Peninsula. Pp. 45—48. In Bailey, A, & Stevens, N.C. (eds), 'Contemporary Cape York Peninsula'. (Royal Society of Queensland: Bris- bane). 1989. Revision of the genus Carlia (Reptilia, Scin- cidae) in Australia with comments on Carlia bicarinata of New Guinea. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 27(2): 443—490. WILLMOTT, М.Е. & POWELL, B.S. 1977. Cape Weymouth - 1:250,000 Geological Series. Australian Bureau of Mineral Resources ex- planatory notes SD/54-4. 34 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM THE HOLOTYPE OF MOCOA SPECTABILIS DE VIS, 1888. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1): 34. 1994:- In a review of the skinks of the Saproscincus challengert complex in southeastern Austraha, Sadlier et al. (1993) claimed that Mocoa spectabilis de Vis, 1888 was a senior synonym of Lampropholis basiliscus Ingram & Rawlinson, 1981, and thus the available name for the taxon. This was based on their identification of the "lectotype' of Mocoa spectabilis (Queensland Museum specimen QMJ19743), which was declared by Wells & Wellington (1985). Sadlier et al. (1993) also identified the 'paralectotypés' as follows: QMJ255 and QMJ19742 = Saproscincus basiliscus, QMJ244 = 5, galli Wells & Wellington, 1985, I do not disagree with the identifications of Sadlier et al. (1993), However, 1 disagree that QMJ255 and QMJ19742-3 were part of a type series for Mocoa spectabilis: 1 assert there was only a holotype, QMJ244, Firstly, de Vis's (1888: 819-820) description of Mocoa speciabilis was only of one specimen: multiple specimens were not mentioned. Thal is, there was a holotype, not syn- types. Secondly, as Covacevich (1971) noted, the measure- ments of QMJ244 fit those in de Vis's description. For example, de Vis's measurements and scale counts were as follows (with mine in brackets): pair of nuchals (pair), 7 supraciliaries (7), 22 midbody rows (22), fourth toe lamellae 20-24 (22-26), total length 134mm (134), head length 10.5 (10), body 42 (41), fore limb 10.5 (12), hind limb 18 (18) and tail 81.5 (83). This is nearly an exact fit and their is little doubt that this was the specimen de Vis (1888) had, and thus his holotype. Finally, QMJ244 is also listed as ‘Type’ in the Queensland Museum's register. Wells & Wellington (1985) and Sadlier et al. (1993) did not say why they accepted syntypes for Mocoa spectabilis. However, 1 assume they — and Cogger et al. (1983) — were following Covacevich (1971) in her list of herpetological lype-specimens in the Queensland Museum. Covacevich (1971) listed QMJ255 and QMJ19742-3 with QMJ244, as syntypes but did not give her reasons for the decision under the entry for Mocoa spectabilis. However, she did give her criteria for determination of type status in the introduction, one of which was 'Notation in the register indicating that the specimen is à “Type” (or "co-type", "syn- type", etc.)'. QMJ255 was listed as ‘Co-types’ (originally 3 specimens: 2 re-registered as QMJ 19742-3) inthe Queensland Museum register on 27 August, 1912, and it would have been for this reason that she accepted these specimens as syntypes. However, this is the only evidence and it is not adequate. Arücle 72(b)(vii) of the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature states that "The mere citation of "Type" or equivalent expression, in a list of types, or in a catalogue of a museum, or on a label is not to be construed alone as evidence that a specimen is or is fixed as any of the kinds of types referred to in this Chapter’. In summary, de Vis (1888) described Mocoa spectabilis from a single specimen, a holotype, which is QMJ244, The specimens of S. basiliscus (QMJ255 and QMI19742-3) were not his type material and the recent leciotype designation of QMIJ19743 by Wells & Wellington (1985) is invalid, Thus Mocoa spectabilis is à senior synonym of the taxon previously known as Saproscincus galli Wells & Wellington, 1985 and S. spectabilis (de Vis, 1888) the valid name for the taxon. Also, S. basiliscus (Ingram & Rawlinson, 1981) remains valid. Acknowledgement thank Peter Jell and Robert Raven, Queensland Museum, for reading the manuscript and Mr E.P. Wixted for advice on Latin. Literature Cited Cogger, H.G., Cameron, E.E. & Cogger, H.M. 1983. Am- phibia and Reptilia. Zoological Catalogue of Australia 1: 1-313. Covacevich, J. 1971. Amphibian and reptile type-specimens in the Queensland Museum. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 16: 49-67, De Vis, C.W. 1988. A contribution to the herpetology of Queensland. Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales (2)2: 811-826. Ingram, G.J. & Rawlinson, P. 1981. Five new species of skinks (genus Lampropholis) from Queensland and New South Wales. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 20: 311-317. Sadlier, R.A., Colgan, D.J. & Shea, G.M. 1993, Taxonomy and distribution of the scincid lizard Saproscincus chal- lengeri and related species in southeastern Australia. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 34; 139-158, Wells, R.W & Wellington, C.R, 1985. A classification of the Amphibia and Reptilia of Australia. Australian Journal of Herpetology Supplementary Series 1: 1-61. G.J. Ingram, Queensland Museum, PO Box 3300, South Bris- bane, Qucensland 4101, Australia; 17 March 1994, REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM SERENE AND SOH (CRUSTACEA: BRACHYURA: SESARMINAE) WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF TWO NEW SPECIES Р.Ј.Е. DAVIE Davie, PJP. 1994 06 01, Revision of Neosarmatium Serene and Soh (Crustacea: Brachyura: Sesarminae) with descriptions of two new species. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35017; 35-74, Brisbane, ISSN 0079-8835. Neosarmuativm Serene & Soh, 1970, is revised and re-diagnosed. Crabs of this genus are primarily characterised by a deeply vaulted, sub-quadrate, carapace, with the anterolateral margins with 0-2 teeth behind the exorbital angles; the upper surface of the palm of the chelipeds is without pectinate crests and usually defined anteriorly by a swollen longitudinal ridge; the outer surface of the palm usually with a median longitudinal row and the dorsal surface of the dactyl often bearing spines or blunt teeth; the legs are of medium length, flattened, and broad. Twelve Neosarmarium species are recognised as valid, including two new species: N. fourmanoiri Seréne, 1973, №. indicum (A. Milne Edwards. 1868), N. inerme (De Man, 1887), N. integrum (A. Milne Edwards, 1873), №. laeve (A. Milne Edwards, 1869), N, malabaricum (Henderson, 1893), N. meinerti (De Man, 1887), N, punctatum (А. Milne Edwards. 1873), № ronendifrens (A, Milne Edwards, 1869), N. sinirhi (Н. Milne Edwards, 1853), М, spinicarpus sp. nov, and N, trispinosum sp. nov, Records of Neosarmatium indicum, №, punctarum and №, malabaricum have been confused, and the identities of these species have now been clarified after examination of the type specimens. The identity of N. Iacve (A. Milne Edwards, 1869) as a senior synonym for N. aeguifrons (Rathbun, 1914) and М, ambeonensis Scréne & Moosa, 1971, is clarified for the first time. N. biroi (Nobili, 1905) is considered a junior synonym of №. integrum (A. Milne Edwards, 1873). Neosarmatium irispinosum sp, nov. has long been confused with N. smithi, from which it can be easily separated by the shape and position of the teeth on the upper margin of the dactyl of the male cheliped. All records of №. smithi from the coast of Queensland, including published ecological studies, refer to М, trispinosum sp. nov. Lectotypes are designated for Neosar- matium indicum (A. Milne Edwards, 1868), N, їпётте (De Man, 1887), N. integrum (A, Milne Edwards, 1873), and N. punctatum (A. Milne Edwards, 1873).[ ]Crustacea, Brachyura, Grapsidae, Sesarminae, Neasarmatium, mangroves, Indo-West Pacific, new species, PJE. Davie, Queensland Museum, Р.О. Box 3300, South Brisbane, Queensland 4101, Australia; 31 January 1994, Crabs of the genus Neosarmatium are among the largest of the intertidal mangrove sesarmines, The species that have so far been studied are primarily herbivorous, and along with other scsarmines, appear to be responsible for consum- ing a large percentage of the annual leaf fall of mangrove forests (Robertson & Daniel, 1989; Robertson, 1991; Smith et al., 1991). The present paper is the third (see Davie, 1992, 1993) in a projected series of works intended to revise the genus Sesarma s.l. and clarify and correct some of the problems that have arisen from Serene & Soh's somewhat premature 1970 paper diagnosing 10 new genera, and 3 new sub- genera. Neosarmatium was diagnosed by Seréne & Soh (1970), to include a number of Indo-West Pacific species previously included in Sesarma (Sesar- ma) or Sarmatium Dana. Davie (1992) has revised Sarmatium and clearly defined its generic limits. Six of the species that were placed in Sarmatium by Tesch (1917): S. integrum A, Milne Edwards, 1873, 5, inermis De Man, 1897, S. indicum A. Milne Edwards, 1868, S. punctatum A, Milne Edwards, 1873, S. biroi Nobili, 1905 (= integrum) and S. fryatti Tesch, 1917 (zrotun- difrons A, Milne Edwards, 1869) are now all included in Neosarmatium. I have given references to non-taxonomic papers concerning some species, This listing is not meant to be exhaustive. It is primarily provided in an attempt to clarify cases where such authors have wrongly identified their study animals; and secondarily as an introduction to other biological studies. While I have provided a full new description for most species, in several cases I have provided only a diagnosis because comprehensive and/or recent descriptions are available. The descriptions for this paper were prepared 36 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM using the DELTA computer system for gencrat- ing taxonomic descriptions (Dallwitz & Paine, 1986). Measurements given in the text are of the carapace breadth (measured at the widest point) followed by length, Leg segments were measured їп а straight line to give maximum dorsal length and so are not always the maximum possible length. The exact limits of the width of the posterior margin of the curapace are also some- times difficult to determine and in this work they were defined by the point at which the lateral carapace suture meets the posterior margin. Gonopod terminology follows that of Sakai & Yatsuzuka (1979), _ ABBREVIATIONS USED: c.b., carapace breadth; Ck, Creek; BMNH, British Museum (Natural History); MNHN, Muséum national d'Histoire naturelle, Paris; ZRC, Zoological Reference Col- lection, Department of Zoology, National University of Singapore; NNM, National Natural History Museum, Leiden; NT, Northern Ter- ritóry, Australia; ppt, parts per thousand; QLD, Queensland, Australia (ME.QLD = mid-eastem Queensland; NE,QLD = north-eastern Queensland ctc.); QMW, Queensland Museum, Brisbane; SMF, Senckenberg Museum, Frankfurt; USNM, National Museum of Natural History, Washington; Z.D.U.Q., Zoology Department University of Queensland; ZMG, Zoological Museum of Goetingen (collection now housed at SMF); ZMH, Zoologisches In- stitut und Zoologisches Museum, Universitat Hamburg; ZMK, Zoological Muscum, Univer- sity of Copenhagen, SYSTEMATICS Neosarmatium Serene & Soh, 1970 Metagrapsus: A. Milne Edwards, 1873: 306; De Man, 1880: 31; Kingsley, 1880: 212 [not Metagrapsus Н. Milne Edwards, 1853: 188]. Neosarmatlum Scréne & Soh, 1970: 397. 4015; Sakai, 1976: 665. TYPE SPECIES Sesarma smili Н. Milne Edwards, 1853, by original designation; gender is neuter. DIAGNOSIS Carapace sub-quadrate; greatest width behind exorbital angles; breadth greater than length, Carapace deeply vaulted: slightly convex lateral- ly. Regions moderately well defined. Anterolateral margins with 0-2 teeth behind ex- orbital angle. Front moderately ta strongly deflexed; with broad median concavity. Post- frontal lobes distinct. Orbital hiatus open. Basal segment of antennal peduncle with well developed outer tongue-like lobe. Inter-anten- nular septum relatively narrow. Pterygostomian region with well developed rcticulation of inter- crossing lines of setac. Third maxilliped merus and ischium subequal; merus longer than wide, outer margin convex; ischium sub-triangular; palp articulating near outer distal margin of merus; exopod narrow, reaching about half length vf merus, Chelipeds subequal, large and robust; merus usually with distinct subdistal spine on posterior border; carpus with inner angle slightly produced; upper surface of palm usually, but not always, defined anteriorly by swollen lon- gitudinal ridge; without pectinate crests; puter surface of palm punctate, naked, usually with median longitudinal row, without ventral ridge. Dorsal surface of dactyl usually bearing spines. Fingers pointed; curved slightly inwards; wide gape between cutting. margins in adult males. Legs medium length, flattened, broad, Dactyli stout and slightly recurved; terminating in acule chitinous tip. Merus anterior margin with acute sub-distal spine; unarmed terminally, Carpus with accessory carinae on upper surface. Propedus with an accessory carina on interior proximal portion of upper surface. Merus of last leg smooth, meri of other legs with scattering of small distally directed prickles, Male abdomen often remarkably elongate; relatively narrow; third segment widest; first segment broad, cover- ing entire width of sternum between 4th pereiopads, G1 long, reaching just past suture between sternites 3 and 4; moderately stout to slender, curved; apical process present, corneous, strongly produced, straight; gonopore terminal; seta short, simple, lying around corneous tip and apical part of stem obscuring structural detail. G2 short, evenly tapering, slightly Twisted, apically rounded. Neosarmatium species recognised as valid in this paper: N. fourmanoiri Serene, 1973, N, in- dicum (A. Milne Edwards, 1868), N, inerme (De Man, 1887), N. integrum (A. Milne Edwards, 1873), N. laeve (A. Milne Edwards, 1869), N. malabaricum (Henderson, 1393), №, meinerti (De Man, 1887), N. punctatum (A, Milne Edwards, 1873), N. rotundifrons (A. Milne Edwards, 1869), N. smithi (H. Milne Edwards, 1853), N. xpinicarpius sp. nov. and №. trispinosunr sp. nov. REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM 37 KEY TO THE SPECIES OF NEOSARMATIUM (Although the key relies heavily on male claw characters, the female chelae usually show the same features, albeit much less obviously, and can therefore usually also be identified. Features enclosed in ‘[ ]` are included as extra, specific diagnostic characters), 1. Side of carapace without anterolateral teeth separated by a deep notch from the rest of the margin, a single anterolateral tooth may be present as an angular projection [Exorbi- tal breadth sub-cqual to length of carapace. Outer surface of palm of cheliped punctate; inner surface with a low granular crest, Colour: purple, chelipeds, pereiopods and edges of carapace reddish. Male unknown.] .. 22s Integrum (A. Milne Edwards, 1873) Side of carapace with one or two anterolateral teeth (second usually reduced to an angular projection) .................2 2, Dactyl of male cheliped with strong chitinous teeth on dorsal margin ,..........3 Dactyl of male cheliped either without strong chitinous teeth on dorsal margin, or bearing small, sharp, chitinous spinules only .......9 3, Dactyl of male cheliped with 2 teeth on dor- sal ihargit s eene tool VeL asd 4 Dactyl of male cheliped with 3-5 teeth on dorsal margin | i 4. Inner surface of palm without a strongly raised, granular, vertical crest (4-5 granules may be prominent on large males but are not raised onto a crest); outer surface of male chela with a protruding basal shelf on fixed finger below gape ETT М. indicum (A, Milne Edwards, 1868) Inner surface of palm with a strongly raised, granular, vertical crest; male chela normal in form, not having a protruding basal shelf on fixed finger helow раре............... 5 5. Distal tooth on upper surface of dactyl placed close to middle; upper surface of palm of cheliped with a strong longitudinal nm marking its outer edge; carapace 1.15-1,25 times longer than Wide ................... ЛЕ М. malabaricum (Henderson, 1893) Distal tooth on upper surface of dactyl placed clearly less than half-way lo the tip: longitudinal rim present on upper surface of palm of cheliped but not strongly differen- tiated; carapace 1.25-1.35 times longer than МАДА 534. 6 22503. 122, 8.95 IG в. Ф. заз -. «4 N, punctatum (A. Milne Edwards, 1873) 6. Dactyl of male cheliped with 3 teeth on dor- sa] margin [carapace length c. 1.1 times breadth; strong vertical crest on inside of chela; sixth segment of male abdomen strongly elongated] ..................... 7 Dactyl of male cheliped with 4-5 teeth on dorsal margin 7. Dactylar teeth truncate, spaced evenly over proximal Баі, 0... ee eee ee eee B qu. smithi (H. Milne Edwards, 1853) Dactylar teeth acute, set close together over proximal two-fifths ..,.. irispinosum sp. nov. 8. Carapace sub-quadrate, maximum carapace width between tips of first anterolateral teeth; 4 evenly spaced, dactylar tubercles; frontal margin without strong median con- cavity, median and lateral postfrontal lobes of similar width, and not swollen; small species ...... laeve (A. Milne Edwards, 1869) Carapace with lateral margins markedly con- vex anterolaterally, maximum carapace width behind tips of first anterolateral teeth; 4 dactylar tubercles; frontal margin with à strong median concavity; median postfron- tal lobes wider than laterals, and strongly swollen; large species ................-.... ЧК то, rolundifrons (A, Milne Edwards, 1869) 9, Dactyl of cheliped smooth, unarmed [walk- ing legs relatively slender, length of merus of third walking leg 2.6-2.7 times width; male first pleopod short, with distal portion not strongly narrowing, and not much twisted]: fs. аа eee I ad DR ГЛ 10 Dactyl of cheliped armed with small, sharp, chitinous spinules 0: П 10. Inner angle of carpus of chehped unarmed; inner face of palm with vertical row of granules behind gape JO oT Ar oor ETS inerme (De Man, 1887) Inner angle of carpus of cheliped armed with acute granular projection; inner face of palm with a patch of granules ventrally but not ex- tending às à vertical row behind gape ы ДУЛ inni minim spinicarpus sp. nov. 11. Male chela c.1.7 times longer than high; 38 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 1. Male first gonopods (setae removed except for A). A, B, Neosarmatium laeve (A. Milne Edwards) [specimen figured is the holotype of N. aequifrons (Rathbun)]; C, D, N. inerme (De Man), ZMH4080; E, F, М. indicum (A. Milne Edwards), ZRC1989.3670; С, Н, №. malabaricum (Henderson), MNHN-B10461. lower margin evenly convex; dactylar spinules evenly spaced in a single row, and extending only to about half length of dac- tyl; vertical granular row on inside of chela strongly developed . Male chela c.1.8 times longer than high; lower margin straight behind fixed finger; dactylar spinules more numerous, not con- fined to a single row, and extending almost to tip of dactyl; vertical granular row on in- side of chela lower than in №. meinerti . ... . .. 399 S0 £206 2 hee fourmanoiri Seréne, 1973 39 REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM FIG. 2. Male first gonopods (setae removed). A, В, N. rotundifrons (A. Milne Edwards) [specimen figured is the holotype of N. fryatti (Tesch)]; C, D, №. fourmanoiri Seréne, holotype, MNHN-B 10459; Е, Е, G, №. meinerti (De Man), MNHN-B16735; Н, 1, N. trispinosum sp. nov., MNHN unreg., New Caledonia (41.2 x 36.4 mm); J, K, N. smithi (Н. Milne Edwards), QMW8861. ? Sesarma Meinerti: Nobili, 1907: 405 [not Sesarma Neosarmatium fourmanoiri Seréne, 1973 meinerti De Man, 1887]. (Figs 2C, D; 3; 16) Sesarma meinerti: McCulloch, 1913: 322-23. Sesarma tetragona: A. Milne Edwards, 1873: 304, pl. Neosarmatium fourmanoiri Ѕетёпе, 1973: 126-129, pl.3 A-C. 16, fig, 4 {not Cancer tetragona Fabricius, 1798: 341]. 40 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM TERUEL ER UU E LLL EU EE UE LEUR LEEREN ELLA EATER £A saaw АТАТЫН ОТЕ ТЕЕ FIG. 3. Neosarmatium fourmanoiri Serène, 1973, d, QMW4598. A, dorsal view; B, frontal view: C, ventral view, Scale line in mm. REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM MW TYPE INFORMATION Holotype, MNHN-B10459, Type locality: New Caledonia, | ' MATERIAL EXAMINED HoLoryre: MNHN-B10459, d (38.3 x 31.7mm), New Caledonia, R. Serene, 4.9.1971. OTHER MATERIAL: NEW CALEDONIA: QMW- 19558, d (44.1 x 36,6mm), Pam, north New Caledonia, mangroves, 27.2,1992, J. Menon. VANUATU: MNHN unreg, d (38.9 x 3],6тт), RhizophoralXylocarpus mangroves, in lagoon by Banana Plantation, R. Serene, 10.10.1971; MNHN unreg, (Ser&ne coll.), ? (36.0 x 28,0mm), Port Stanley, tidal edge at high water, Rhizophora/Ceriops interface, А.б. Marshall, 2.10.1971, INDONESIA; NNMD170, б (35.0 x 29,2mm), Sula Senana, E. of Sulawesi; NNMDI69, 9 (26.2 х 21.2mm), Sulawesi: NNMD1539, & (41.4 x 35. 4mm), Ӯ (38,1 x 32,0mm), Pacific. Ocean [Museum Godeffroy 1887]; NNMD40838, 49 (30,9 x 24,6; 30.4 x 29.0; 34.9 х 38.0; 35.5 x 28. 3mm), from burrows among trees just behind beach, Holtekang, southern part of Humboldt Bay, near Buaji River, northeastern coast of Irian Jaya, New Guinea, L.B. Holthuis, 12.11.1954, AUSTRALIA: OMW8843, 205 (33,1 x 26.5; 30.4 x 24,7mm), Port Stewart, NE.OLD, 14"'04' S, [43°41 E, B. Campbell, night collected; SMF unreg., 9 (29.0 x 225mm), d (37,9 x 29.4 mm), upper edge of bank under stones and logs, Smith Creek, Cairns, NB.OLD, M. Türkay, 5.6.1980; OMW8841, 3 (38.5 х 31,0mm), 9 (30.0 x 23.4mm), Cairns side of Yorkey's Knob, NE.QLD, 5 ppt, 16749'S, 14543'E, 14.1.1965, В. Campbell; QMW8844, d (36.8 x 29.5mm), Barron River, NE.QLD, 16'52'5, 145 427 E, Z.D.U.Q.; QMWNSRAO, 4d. (27,7 х 21,4 - 354 x 29,0mm), 5? (27.1 x 21.5 - 29,8 x 23.3mm), Airport Swamp, Cairns, NE.QLD, 16°53'S, 145 4S E, Z.D,.U.Q,; QMWI1123, (dried varnished spec). Barron Beach, via Cairns, NE.OLD, 16°55'S, 14546 E; OMWRSS42, d (33.9 x 26.5mm), Trinity Inlet, Cairns, NE.QLD, 16'58'5, 14547 E, 5.12.1975, Austrahan Littoral Society; QMWA598, d (34.7 x 29.3mm), nth end of Admiralty Is., Trinity Inlet, Cairns, NE.QLD, 16'58'8, 145°47.0 E, Jan. 1975, M. Graham, found in entrance to burrows in Blady Grass onthe edge of a terrestrial ridge amongst the open (4-5m) Xylocarpus, Ceriops, Lumnitzerà racemosa and L. literea mangroves; QMW8879, © (31.1 x 23.7mm), Road то Lucinda, near Ingam. NE.QLD, 18°32'S, 146°2'E; QMWRBA4S, d (43.5 x 34,5mm), Townsville, NE.QLD, 19°16'S, 146'49'E, Z.D.U.Q.; QMW12901, 1 d, mangroves behind Gap Bench, Lindeman Is, ME.QLD, 20 27'S, 149"02" Е. 25.3.1987, P.Davic, J.Shart; QMW12902, 14. mangroves behind Gap Beach, Lindeman Is., ME.QLD, 20'27'S, 14902 E, 27,3.1987, P.Davie. J.Short. DESCRIPTION Carapace. c.1.2 times broader than long. Fron- lo-orbita] width c.l.l times carapace length. Depth c.0,7 times carapace width. Cardiac region distincr, Lateral margins slightly convergent posteriorly: slightly convex, or straight, Anterolateral margins with à single epibranchial tooth. Exorbital angle triangular and sharp. Anterolateral tooth triangular and sharp; similar im size to exorbital angle. Front с.0.55 limes carapace width; c,0.6 times fronto-orbital width; pre-orbitul concavity present; lateral margins parallel and convex, Post-frontal lobes with clumps of stout setae meeting over frontal furrow, and each with fringe of prominent dark setae. Short ridge medially on first epibranchial tooth. Branchial ridges prominent, first follows from typical position of second epibranchial tooth, relatively long; second arising just short of lateral margin; other ridges also arise near lateral mar- gin; lust ridge long, curved over base of last leg. Posterior margin с.0.4 times carapace width. Carapace surface smooth, shining, punctate; wrinkled postenorly. Seftsetac arranged sparsely an branchial lines and in short rows over entire surface; longest and most conspicuous over anterior half, almost lost on intestinal region. Upper orbital border smooth, slightly oblique; moderately convex mesrally; inner angle rounded. Lower orbital border straight; evenly granular. Inter-antennular septum ¢,0.3 times width of front. Third maxilliped, Suture between merus and ischium obliquely sloping inward, Ischium inner margin smooth. Exopod narrow, barely visible in frontal view; c.0.5 times width of ischium. Chelipeds. Merus with posterior border bearing minute granular striations; without distinct sub- distal spine; lower border granulate; anterior bor- der tuberculate, tubercles larger in proximal half; carpus with inner angle not produced; inner mar- gin granular, rectangular facet more-or-less defined by two granular ridges; males (but not females) lacking brush of stiff sctac on ventro- proxrmal end of this facet characteristic of other species: granules present on inner face of carpus just below inner angle; outer margin striated. Upper surface of palm not defined anteriorly by a longitudinal ridge, Outer surface of palm naked, microscopically granular, punctate, without median longitudinal row. Inner surface of palm minutely granular; wrth a low vertical һат of 42 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM small granules. Immovable finger rounded on outer surface; moderately long, length cutting edge c.0.46 times length propodus. Ventral bor- der of chela straight, or slightly convex. Dorsal surface of dactyl minutely granular. Fingers with lips, comeous, toothed, intermeshing: curved in- wards: a moderate gape between cutting margins. Walking legs, Second pair the longest, c.1.7 times maximum carapace width. Merus of third leg c.2.3 times as long as wide. Carpus c.2.3 times as long as wide, Propodus c.2.1 times as long as wide. Dactyli about equal to length of propodi. Meri of legs 1-3 with scattering of small distally directed prickles, arranged on transverse crests in upper part. Meri generally without setae except for some longer bristles ventrally: carpi and propodi bear a thick fur of soft setae on anterior and postenor margins, most extensive on the first two patrs where the setae also cover most of the ventral face of these segments, but reduced to 2 sparse, narrow, vestige on last pair: setae continue onto dactyli in narrow rows, Male abdomen. Segment 1 narrow, ¢.0,9 times width segment 3. Width segment 3 c,4.2 times length. Segment 6 elongated, 1.1 times wider than long. Telson much shorter than segment 6: slightly shorter or subequal ta segment 5; c. 1.3 times longer than wide; evenly rounded. Gonopods. GI inner-dorsal margin straight and distally curved inward. Dorsal surface of stem flattened; completely calcified. Palp present, poorly developed, not separated from stem, large, narrow, rounded, calcified. Outer dorsal margin of stem convex. Distal part of the stem broad. Apical process present, comeous, moderately produced, straight. Gonopore terminal. Setae long and displaced around apex, obscuring struc- tural detail. G2 short, straight, narrow, evenly tapering, slightly twisted. COLOUR The carapace and walking legs are a dark violet brown, nearly black. The chelipeds are a uniform bright dark red or (rarely) dark purplish. REMARKS Neosarmatium fourmanoiri bears a very close resemblance to N. meinerti. The main differences are: 1, The chelae of N. fourmanoiri are propor- tionately not as high, the mean length to height ratio being 1.81 compared to 1.70 in М, meinerti although there is some overlap between in- dividual specimens; 2. The gape between the fingers of adult male N. fourmanoiri is compara- uvely much less than in N. meinerti; 3. The ver- tical crest on the inside of the palm of N, meinerti has a single even row of comparatively much larger tubercles; 4. The chitinous tubercles on the superior margin of the finger in N. fourmanoiri are fine, and form a broad band which extends almost to the tip. In N. meinerti they are coarser. uniform in size, evenly spaced in a single row. and only extend over the proximal half, 5. On the male chelae of N. faurmanoiri the outer edge of the articulation joint with the dactyl is oblique, and continues onto the cutting margin in a long smooth shallow continuous arc; in №, meinerti the edge of the joint is much more vertical and meets the fixed finger in a more angular fashion; 6. On the male chelae of N. fourmanoiri the lower bor- der of the palm is more-or-less straight behind the fixed finger, whereas in N. meinerti it is evenly convex; 7. The carpus of the male cheliped of N. fourmanoiri lacks a brush of stiff setae below the inner proximal end of the rectangular facer, 8, The hirsute areas of the carapace are relatively denser in N. fourmanoiri than in N- meinerti; 9. Live colouration is different (see Descriptions). The abdominal segments and the first male pleopod show no appreciable differences. Female specimens of both species are difficult to distinguish. The most useful characters seem to be the development of the granular row on the inside of the palm of the chela (stronger in №. meinerti) and the dactylar tubercles which are more numerous on №. fourmanoiri and continue most of the way to the tip, whereas on №, meinerti they finish about half way down. HABITAT From estuaries or mangrove swamps in large burrows (about 5ст diameter). Occurs in a variety of micro-habitats and mangrove forest types - among Sesuvium near H.W.S.; in open, well above H.W.S.; in entrance to burrows in Blady Grass on the edge of a terrestrial ridge amongst open (4-5m) Xylocarpus, Ceriops, Lum- nitzera racemosa and L. littarea mangroves; in wet Rhizophora zone mangroves behind sandy beach; tidal edge at high water, Rhizophora/Ceriops interface; upper edge of bank under stones and logs. The burrows extend through firm mud or even hard earth for about 1m to the water table. Recorded salinities cover a wide range from «1 ppt L.W.N. (21 ppt in stag- nant pools) at Ross Ck., to >33 ppt m a ditch beside the road to Lucinda. REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM 43 FIG. 4. Neosarmatium indicum (A. Milne Edwards, 1868), д, ZRC1975, 6.30.15. A, dorsal view: B, chela; C, sternum and male abdomen. Scale line in mm. DISTRIBUTION New Caledonia (Seréne, 1973); from Linde- man Is., ME.QLD, to Port Stewart, Princess Charlotte Bay, NE.QLD; Vanuatu; northeastern coast of Irian Jaya, New Guinea, to Sulawesi, Indonesia (present records), Nobili’s (1907) record of N. meinerti (no discussion or figure provided) from Apia, Samoa is probably also N. fourmanoiri. Neosarmatium indicum (A. Milne Edwards, 1868) (Figs 1E, F; 4; 17) Metagrapsus indicus A. Milne Edwards, 18686; 174, pl. 26, figs 1-5. ? Sesarma indica: Heller, 1865: 64 (in part, probably the specimens from the Nicobars refer to valid N. indicum) [not Sesarma indica H. Milne Edwards, 1837 (=Tiomanium indicum)]. Metagrapsus punctatus: De Man, 1880: 31. Sarmatium indicum: Kingsley, 1880: 350 (no new specimen); De Man, 1887: 660 (no new specimen); 1892: 350; Tesch, 1917: 220. 44 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Sarmatium punctatum, Tesch, 1917: 221; 1918; 115. ? Sarmatium punctatum: Urita, 1926: 20; Sakai, 1924: 325, Sesarma (Sarmatium) punctata, Tweedic, 1940; 109, 1950b: 353, Sesarma punctata: Tweedie, 19502: 94. Neosarmatium punctatum: Soh, 1978: 10, pl. 3b, TYPE INFORMATION Lectotype, here designated, MNHN-B10927. Type locality: Celebes (= Sulawesi), Indonesia. MATERIAL EXAMINED L&croTYPE: MNHN-B10927, 4 (25,9 x 20,9 mm), Celebes, Indonesia, М. Riedel. OTHER MATERIAL: INDONESIA: NNMDIR7, 2 (26.6 x 20,9mm), Padang, W. Sumatera [specimen examined by De Man (1880) and Tesch (1917) and identified as — puncratum]. MALAYSIA; ZRCI965.8.3.38-39. 2 d (16.2 x 13.0; 19.3 x 151 mm), Labuan, Sabah, coll. 1938; ZRC1964,9.8.14-19_ d, 59 (not measured), Pulau Aor, M.W, F. Tweedie, 1950; ZRC1970.2.20.2. J (not measured), Pulau Tioman, К. Romimohtarto, 1968; ZRCI99].351], 9 (not measured), Tckck Bav, Pulau Tioman, P. Ng. 23.6.1983. SINGAPORE: ZRC1989 3670, d (22.8 x 18.1mm), Sungei Buloh mangroves, Singepare, P.K.L. Ng, 1986, HONG KONG: 28С1975, 6.30.15, d (24,3 x 19,9 mm), Tai Tam. Hong Kong Island, C.L. Soh. 12.6.1975. DESCRIPTION Carapace. c.1.2-1,3 times broader than long (mean 1.25). Fronto-orbital width с,1.1 times carapace length. Depth c.0.7-0.75 limes carapace width. Cardiac region distinct. Lateral margins slightly convergent posteriorly; slightly concave, with one anterolateral tooth behind the exorbital angle; second reduced to an angular projection only. Exorbital angle and first anterolateral tooth triangular and sharp; similar in size. Front c.0.52- 0.55 times carapace width; c.0.59-0.64 times fronto-orbital width; moderately deflexed; weak- ly bilobed, almost straight; lateral angles obtuse, blunt. Post-frontal lobes without clumps of setae Short ridge medially on first epibranchial tooth, Branchial ridges prominent; first relatively long; second arising from near lateral margin; 2-3 others also arise just inside lateral margin; last one forms strong ridge curving over base of last legs. Posterior margin c.0.47-0.51 times carapace width. Carapace surface smooth, shining, and minutely punctate, Setae arranged in scattered tufts on branchial lines, otherwise confined to posterolateral corners. Upperorbital border even- ly microscopically granular. Lower orbital border straight; evenly granular. Inter-antennular sep- tum ¢.0.31-0.36 times width of front. Third maxilliped. Merus c.0.9 times length of ischium, Suture between merus and ischium obli- quely sloping inward. Ischium inner margin smooth or microscopically granular, Chelipeds. Merus with posterior border minutely granulate; with blunt subdistal projec- tion: lower border granulate, with small, trian- gular, subdistal spine; anterior border coarsely granulate but smooth on distal third; carpus with inner angle and inner margin granular, a secon- dary ventral granular ridge bearing a short row of long setae proximally; tubercles present on inner face of carpus just below inner angle; outer mar- gin with granular striations. Upper surface of palm defined anteriorly by a swollen longitudinal ridge. Outer surface of palm coarsely punctate, naked; without median longitudinal row. Inner surface of palm sparsely granular; with vertical row of 4-5 prominent granules behind gape, and 2-4 granules obliquely behind base of fixed finger, Immovable finger slightly flattened on outer surface; basally produced outward forming a prominent, clongate, triangular shelf over proximal three-quarters of finger, obliquely slop- ing vulward, Length cutting edge ¢.0.41-0,44 times length propodus. Ventral border of chela convex. Dorsal surface of dactyl bearing 2 large, bluntly pointed, chitinous tipped tubercles on su- perior inner margin, similar size and shape, one medial, one near proximal end. Fingers pointed, lower finger with tip notched such that dactyi intermeshes; curved inwards; à moderate gape between cutting margins. Walking legs. First three pairs all of similar length, с.1.5 times maximum carapace width. Merus of third leg c.1.8-2 times as long as wide. Carpus c.1.85-2.2 times as long as wide. Propodus c.1,4- 1.65 times às long as wide, Dac- tyli c. 1-L.2 times length of propodus. Carpi and propodi bear a short felt of setae on their upper halves, coverage less extensive on last legs; con- tinues in thin rows onto dactyli. Male abdomen. Width segment 3 c,4,3-4,6 times length. Segment 6 not elongated; 1.5-1.6 times wider than long. Telson slightly shorter than segment 6; 1.1-1.2 times longer than wide: evenly rounded. Gonopods. G1 long, slender, curved. Inner-dor- sal margin straight. Dorsal surface of stem flat- tened; completely calcified. Palp poorly developed, not separated from stem, large, rounded, calcitied. Outer dorsal margin of stem REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM 45 convex, Distal part of the stem narrow, Apical process corneous, strongly produced, straight. Gonopore terminal. Setae long, simple, lie around distal part of stem as for other species. G2 short, twisted. Sternum. Sternum anterior to telson densely setose, setae continuing on the ischia of third maxillipeds. COLOUR "In life the carapace is dark purplish brown, irregularly marked with light brown near the posterior border. The legs are light brown with dark spots and the chelae bright red’ (Tweedie, 1940: 109). “In colour this species much resembles Sesarma bidens ... the walking legs arc, however, mottled with much larger and rounded reddish-violet blotches’ (Tesch, 1918: 115, as Sarmatium punctatum). ‘The chelae are bright red all over, the carpus and merus are red with dorsal patches of purple, and the carapace and legs are a dull purplish brown’ (P. Ng, in litt). A colour photograph of the specimen ZRC1991_351 has been published (Ng, 1986). REMARKS The dry specimen that 1 have designated the lectotype was not noted as a type in the Paris Museum, but it did have a label identifying it as coming from the Celebes, and collected by M. Riedel. It is the only specimen now in the Paris Museum that could be the type, however it also does not agree with the size nf the specimen given by A. Milne Edwards (27 x 26 mm) which I consider to be in error as both the figure and all other specimens examined are considerably more broad than long. The possibility therefore must exist that A. Milne Edwards had several specimens at his disposal and that the specimen still existing is not the one specifically mentioned by А. Milne Edwards (1868). Because of this | am following ICZN Article 74b which notes that in cases where no original holotype was desig- nated, and the amount of syntype material 15 uncertain, that a lectotype should be designated. Neosarmatium indicum, N. punctatum and N. malabaricum have been very confused. and it is difficult to separate the records with certainty without examining all the material, А. indicum, although close to the latter two species, 15 very casily separated on the form of the claw, with its protruding basal shelf on the fixed finger of the cheliped of the male; and the lack of a strong tubercular vertical ridge on the inner face of the palm of the cheliped. It seems certain then that all the material identified by Tweedie (1940, 1950 a,b} as №. punctata is referable to №. indicum as the specimens of his examined for this study are all N. indicum. He stated in his 1940 paper that he identified his specimens from sketches of the type made by Dr I. Gordon, but these must not have shown the characteristic chela shape clearly. Sol's (1978) record of №. punctarum from Hong Kong was examined and it is certainly №. in- dicum., This 15 thus the northern-most confirmed record of any of these three species. There is an obscure record of N. punctatum from Kagoshima Prefecture in southern Japan, by Urita (1926) and recited in Sakai (1934) but not mentioned in Sakai's (1976) “Crabs of Japan and the adjacent seas’, and therefore its status must remain in doubt. Thallwitz (1891) recorded N. punctatum from Manado in northem Celebes (Sulawesi) which is the type locality for №. indicum. He particularly noted the row of granules on the inside of the alm of the cheliped which is a characteristic of . punctatum, and this suggests that his iden- tification was correct, however there is still some doubt as one large male of №. indicum examined (NNMD187) hasa distinct row of granules on the inner face of the palm which, although not nearly as strong as on N. punctatum, may have been what Thallwitz described, HABITAT ‘In deep holes in the banks of a small stream near its entry into the sea and could only be collected at night; even then they were wary and difficult to catch’ (Tweedie, 1940: 109). From a brackish swamp (Tweedie, -1950b). ‘In a fesh- water stream not subjected to any tidal influence and without real mangroves about. It looked typi- cally freshwater’ (Р. Ng. in litt.) DISTRIBUTION Only confirmed from the following localities. Celebes (Sulawesi) (type locality: A. Milne Ed- wards, 1868b) - Aor and Tioman Islands. Malaysia, South China Sea (Tweedie, 1940; present record) - Labuan, Sabah, Borneo (Tweedie, 1950a) - Hong Kong (Soh, 1978; present identification) - Singapore (present record) - Padang on the southwestern coast of Sumatera, Indian Ocean (Tesch, 1917, 1918, as 5, punctamim). 46 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 5. Neosarmatium inerme (De Man, 1887), с, ZMH4080. A, dorsal view; B, chela; C, sternum and male abdomen. Scale line in mm. Neosarmatium inerme (De Man, 1887) (Figs ІС, D; 5; 15А, C, E; 16) Sarmatium inerme De Man, 1887: 660, 687; Tesch, 1917: 221. Neosarmatium inermis: Seréne & Soh, 1970: 398, 405. TYPE INFORMATION Lectotype, here designated, d (20.6 x 17.9 mm), MNHN-B3629; paralectotype, д (20.6 x 18.9 mm), same registration. Type locality: Paulo [zPulau] Condor [now Con Son], Vietnam. MATERIAL EXAMINED SYNTYPES: MNHN-B3629, 24 (20.6 x 17.9; 20.6 x 18.9 mm), Con Son, Vietnam, South China Sea. OTHER MATERIAL: ZMH-K4080, 89 (17.5 x 14.2; 16.9 x 13.6; 17.8 x 14.5mm; 17.7 x 14.7; 19.1 x 15.5; 18.6 x 15.1; 20.3 x 16.4mm), 35 (13.9 x 11.8; 18.5 x 15.0mm; one unmeasured), Saigon River, Saigon, Vietnam, Capt. W. Schwinghammer, 18.10.1908. REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM 47 DESCRIPTION Carapace. 1.1-1.24 (mean 1.22) times broader than long. Fronto-orbital width с.1-1.1 times carapace length. Depth c.0,75-0.8 times carapace width in adults, less in small specimens. Cardiac region distinct. Lateral margins subparallel or shghtly divergent; almost straight, or slightly concave. Anterolateral margins with two teeth behind the exorbital angle. Exorbital angle and first anterolateral tooth triangular and pointed; similar in size. Second anterolateral tooth blunt; much smaller than first. Front с.0.5 times carapace width: 0.53-0.59 times fronto-orbital width (mean 0.56); moderately deflexed; with deep. broad median emargination; lateral mar- gins slightly diverging posteriorly. Post-frontal lobes without clumps of setae, Ridge medially on first anterolateral tooth, Branchial ridges more- or-less prominent; first follows from posterior edge of last epibranchial tooth, relatively short; followed by a series of short broken granular striations, except for last which forms strong ridge continuing over base of last legs. Posterior margin c.0.5 times carapace width (one specimen aberrant at 0,6). Carapace surface smooth, shin- ing. punctate; setae arranged sparsely on branchial lines, mainly confined to posterolateral branchial regions. Upper orbital border evenly, minutely, granular. Lower orbital border straight; evenly granular. Inter-antennular septum c.0.29- 0,33 times width of front. Third maxilliped. Suture between merus and ischium obliquely sloping slightly inward. 1s- chium inner margin smooth or microscopically granular. Chelipeds. Merus with posterior border minutely finely striated: with blunt subdistal projection; lower border granulate, without sub- distal spine; anterior border coarsely granulate, but smooth on distal third; carpus with inner angle rounded and granulate; inner margin granular, a secondary ventral granular ridge bearmg a short row of long setae proximally; tubercles present on inner face of carpus just below inner angle; outer margin stated. Upper surface of palm sometimes with a longitudinal ridge slightly indi- cated; otherwise smooth. Outer surface of palm smooth, naked, with minute smooth flat granules; with more-or-less discernible median lon- gitudinal row. Inner surface of palm granular mesially; with a vertical row of larger granules. but not elevated into a crest. Immovable finger founded on outer surface; moderately long, length cutting edge c.0.43-0.44 (times length propodus. Ventral border of chela straight to slightly convex. Dorsal surface of dactyl smooth, rounded, Fingers pointed, lower finger notched behind tip so that dactyl intermeshes, curved in- wards, a moderate gape between cutting margins, Walking legs. Second and third pairs sub-equal and slightly longer than others, с.1.8 times max- imum carapace width. Merus of third lez с,2.6- 2.7 times as long as wide, Carpus с.2.3-2,7 times as long as wide. Propodus c.2-2.5 times as tong as Wide. Dactyli c. 1-I.] times length of propodus. Upper margins of meri granular, sometimes with some sharp spinules; posterior margins finely granular. Carpi and propodi bear a short felt of setae on upper and lower faces, more-or-less. covering anterior face of first two pairs, less so on last two pairs. Male abdomen. Male abdomen not remarkably elongate; moderately broad; segment 3 the widest, first three segments of similar width, Width segment 3 c.5.1-5.5 times length. Segment 6 not elongated, 1.75-1.85 times wider than long, Telson longer than preceding segments; 1.1-1.15 times longer than wide; evenly rounded. Gonopods. Gl moderately stout, shghtly curved. Inner-dorsal margin slightly curved. Dor- sal surface of stem flattened; completely cal- cified. Palp absent, position indicated by a slight expansion of inner dorsal margin. Outer dorsal margin of stem moderately convex. Distal part of the stem broad, Gl apical process cornenus; moderately produced; straight. Gonopore ter- minal. Setae long: feathered. G2 short, slender, tapering, moderately twisted. Sternum. Sternum anterior to telson densely setose, setae continuing on the ischia of third maxillipeds. REMARKS Neosarmatium inerme and the closely related N. spinicarpus sp. nov. are aberrant within Neosarmatium by having more slender walking, legs and by the much shorter, stockier male first pleopod, which has the distal portion short, not strongly narrowed, and only slightly twisted coni- pared with other Neosarmatium species. These characters are possibly sufficient to warrant removal from Neosarmatium but as the allied genera remain to be revised no action is being taken ar this time. HABITAT Not recorded. DISTRIBUTION Known from Con Son (type locality), and 48 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 6. Neosarmatium integrum (А. Milne Edwards, 1873). A-C, paralectotype 9 (34.6mm carapace breadth); D, lectotype $. A, dorsal view; B, frontal margin; C, right chela D, left chela. Saigon, Vietnam, South China Sea (present Sarmatium integrum: De Man, 1887: 660; Tesch, record). 1917: 221. Sarmatium birói Nobili, 1905: 498-501, text-fig. 2; Neosarmatium integrum (A. Milne Edwards, Tesch, 1917: 213-214 (no specimen). | 1873) Neosarmatium biroi: Ѕетёпе & Soh, 1970: 398, 406 (in (Figs 6, 7, 18) list); Forró & Müller, 1985: 78, figs 4-8. Y Neosarmatium integrum: Seréne & Soh, 1970: 398, Metagrapsus integer A. Milne Edwards, 1873: 309, pl. 405. 17, fig. 3. REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM 49 FIG. 7. Neosarmatium integrum (A. Milne Edwards, 1873), 2, holotype of Neosarmatium biroi (Nobili, 1905). A, dorsal view; B, left cheliped; C, frontal margin; D, ventral view. TYPE INFORMATION Lectotype here designated, ? (39.0 x 30.8 mm), paralectotype, 9 (34.6 x 27.5 mm), MNHN-B3628, Type locality; New Caledonia. N. biroi: Holotype, Hungarian Natural History Museum, Budapest. Hungary. Type locality: Stephansort, Astrolabe Bay, NE Papua New Guinea. MATERIAL EXAMINED Types: MNHN-B3628, 2 9 (34.6 x 27.5; 39.0 x 30.8 mm), New Caledonia, coll. M. Balansa. The larger female corresponds to the measurements given by A. Milne Edwards (1873) and is designated the lectotype. OTHER MATERIAL: QMW]19557, 9 (31.7 x 25.7 mm), Nggela Is., Solomon Islands, 17.12.1976. DESCRIPTION Carapace. c.1.25 times broader than long. Fronto-orbital width c.1.06 times carapace length. Depth c.0.7 times carapace width. Lateral margins slightly convergent posteriorly; sinuous. Anterolateral margins regularly convex; without teeth, but typical position of first tooth slightly indicated. Exorbital angle triangular. Front c.0.45 times carapace width: c.0.54 times fronto-orbital width; lateral angles obtuse; lateral margins diverging posteriorly. Post-frontal lobes distinct; median lobes distinctly broader than laterals; laterals distinctly separated from inner orbital margin. Branchial ridges moderately prominent; first arising from position where Jast epibranchial tooth should be, relatively Jong; second arising from near lateral margin. Posterior margin c.0.45-0.5 times carapace width. Carapace surface smooth, shining. punctate, without marked setation. Upper orbital border smooth; straight and oblique. Lower orbi- tal border straight; evenly granular. Inter-anten- nular septum moderately narrow, c.0.3 times width of front. Third maxilliped. Suture between merus and 50 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM ischium horizontal. Accurate measurements not possible on dry types. Chelipeds. Merus with posterior border minutely striated; without distinct subdistal spine, lower border granulate; anterior border coarsely granulate mesially; carpus with inner angle granular; inner margin granular, with a secondary ventral granular ridge bearing tuft of long setae proximally: granules present on inner face of carpus just below inner angle: outer mar- gin striated. Upper surface of palm not defined anteriorly by a longitudinal ridge. Outer surface of palm punctate, naked; usually with median longitudinal row, Inner surface of palm with low granular vertical crest and patch of granules ventro-proximally, otherwise smooth. Immov- able finger slightly flattened on outer surface; moderately long. Length cutting edge c.0.5 times length propodus, Ventral border of chela straight. Dorsal surface of dactyl tuberculate; on female appear to be 4 or 5 forwardly directed tubercles over proximal three-fifths of inner dorsal margin, largest proximally, evenly spaced, with chitinous tips on distal tubercles - these could be expected to be stronger and more prominent on males. Fingers pointed; curved slightly inwards; narrow gape between cutting margins (probable that males would have larger gape). Walking legs. Second pair slightly the longest; c. 1.6 times maximum carapace width. Merus of third leg c.2.4-2.5 times as long as wide. Carpus c.2.4-2.7 times as long as wide. Propodus c.2.3- 2.5 times as long as wide. Dactyli c.0.9-1.0 times length of propodus. Carpi and propodi bear a short felt of setae on anterior surfaces and on ventral faces of first three pairs; restricted to a thin band on anterior surface of fourth pair; felt ex- tends onto and encircles dactyli in 6 thin lines. COLOUR Purple, with the borders of the carapace, the chelipeds, and the walking legs becoming reddish (A. Milne Edwards, 1873). REMARKS This species is easily distinguished by the lack of strongly defined epibranchial teeth. The first epibranchial tooth is only slightly indicated on the lectotype and paralectotype, is small but visible on the specimen from the Solomon Is- lands, and is better developed on the holotype of N. biroi but still lacks the fissure in the anterolateral margin that is typical of other species. The distinct first epibranchial tooth seems to be the major character that separates N. biroi from N. integrum, however às there ate so few specimens available, and the specimen from the Solomon Islands is intermediate in develop- ment 1 am inclined to believe that this character is subject to some individual variation. Despite the fact that all specimens are female and there- fore do not show strong chela features, there seems to be no differences in shape or dentition nf the chelae between N. biroi and N. integrum. Nobili (1905) described the meri of legs 1-3, of M. biroi, as having the distal third of their posterior border minutely denticulate, and on the Solomon Islands specimen there are also a few small denticles distally on legs 1 and 2. It is still possible that N. biroi will prove to be a valid species, however I do not believe it can be reliab- ly separated from N. integrum at this time, and feel that until a good series of male and female specimens are available from several localities, it is best to place it into the synonymy of №. in- fegrum. The holotype of N. biroi is a poorly preserved dry female with disarticulated limbs (Forró & Müller, 1985), and therefore it could not be loaned for study. The photographs of the holotype are published here through the kindness of Dr László Forró. The male is so far not known. HABITAT In the mangrove forest (A. Milne Edwards, 1873). DISTRIBUTION New Caledonia (type locality of N. integrum); Solomon Islands (present record); northern coast of Papua New Guinea (WN. biroi). Neosarmatium laeve (A, Milne Edwards, (Figs 1A, B; 8; 17) Sesarma laeve A, Milne Edwards, 1869: 27. Sesarma laevis: De Man, 1887: 649; 1892: 333 (note on type-specimen in the description of Sesarma moeschi). Sesarma (Sesarma) aequifrons Rathbun, 1914: 76; Tesch, 1917: 128. Sesarma (Sesarma) laevis: Tesch, 1917: 164. Neosesarma laevis: Seréne & Soh, 1970: 395, 405. Neosesarma aequifrons: Seréne & Soh, 1970: 395, 405 (in list). Neosarmatium aequifrans:Seréne, 1977b: 758-59, figs 62-64; Haig, 1984: 127. REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM un FIG. 8. Neosarmatium laeve (A. Milne Edwards, 1869). A, B, holotype of N. aequifrons (Rathbun, 1914); C-E, holotype of N. laeve. A, C, D, dorsal views; B, right chela; E, left chela. 52 MEMOIRS OF T'HE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Neosarmutium ambonensis Seréne & Mousa, 1971:12, pl. 5C, D. TYPE INFORMATION N. laeve: holotype, MNHN-3964, Paris. Type locality: Aru Island, southeastern Indonesia, N. aequifrons: holotype, USNM45754, Washington. Type locality: Pangaman River, Port Colton, Busuanga Island, Philippines, М. ambonensis: holotype, Institute of Marine Research of Indonesia, Djakarta. Type locality: Ambon, Indonesia. MATERIAL EXAMINED USNM45754, N. aequif/rons holotype д (11.4 x 9.0 mm), paratype 9 (10.7 x 8.3mm), Pangaman River, Port Colton, Busuanga Island, Philippines, 15.12.1908, U.S, Bureau of Fisheries, Albatross Philippine Expedi- ton of 1907-09; QMW 19555, 2 d (10.9 x 87; 11.3 x 9, Imm), Nggela Is., Solomon Islands, 17.9.1976. DIAGNOSIS (Modified alter Seréne & Moosa, 1971). Carapace smooth and punctate, с.1.25 times broader than long. Lateral margins sub-parallel, or slightly convergent; a single prominent epi- branchial tooth, second reduced to a trace. Frontal border nearly straight, almost two-thirds carapace width; postfrontal lobes faintly indi- cated. Posterior border straight and narrower than front. Maximum carapace width across epi- branchial teeth. Inner surface of palm of malc cheliped with prominent vertical granular crest; outer edge of upper border of palm with finely granular longitudinal rim; superior margin of dactyl with 4 low, distally directed, tubercles, a moderate gape between fingers of mature males. Meri of walking legs broad, anterior borders con- vex, with acute subdistal spine; short transverse striue; carpi and propodi with dense covering of short setae above lateral accessory carinae. Male abdomen with telson as long as broad at basc; segment6 slightly shorter than telson, and exactly twice as broad (at base) as long. REMARKS Although I have not examined the types of №. ambonensis and №. laeve, I have little doubt of the correctness of the new synonymy presented here. Serene (1977) recognised that N. ambonensis and N. uequifrons were synonyms, Serene & Soh (1970) had placed №. aequifrons, and tentatively, the poorly known N. Гаете, into their new genus Neosesarma. The differences in dentition of the dactyl of the cheliped between Neosarmaltium and Neosesarma are enough however to exclude N. laeve from the latter genus. Comparisons of the photographs of the holotypes of N. aequifrons (Fig. 8A, В), N. laeve (Fig. 8C-E), and N. am- bonensis (Ѕетёпе & Moosa, 1971, pl. 5 C, D) show no points of difference. Unfortunately the type of N. laeve is immature, and the diagnostic chela characters are not clear; this has no doubt been the cause of its uncertain taxonomic posi- lion, The close geographical proximity of the respective type localities further supports the synonymy presented here. This is one of the smallest of the species of Neosarmatium. Itis unusual in the genus by being relatively quadrate, with the anterolateral mar- gins not markedly convex, and the carapace being not as deep as in other species. In all other major Xr agis however, their seems no cause to exclude it from the genus. It can be separated from its congenors using the characters presented in the key. HABITAT Not recorded. DISTRIBUTION From Busuanga Is., in the Philippines, south to Ambon and Aru Islands, in eastern. Indonesia; Solomon Islands (present record); and in the In- dian Ocean, from Mahé, Seychelles (Serene, 1977Ь). Neosarmatium malabaricum (Henderson, 1893) (Figs IG, Н; 9A, B; 17) Sesarma indica: Heller, 1865: 64 (in part, the specimens from Ceylon) [Not Sexarma indicum Н. Milne Edwards, 1837 (= Tlomanium indicum)]. Sarmatium indicum malabaricum Henderson, 1893: 393, pl. 36, fig, 17; Tesch, 1917: 220 (no specimen). Sarmatium punctatum: Thallwitz, 1891: 41, not seen |? = № indicum = not Metagrapsus punctatus A, Milne Edwards, 1873 = Neosarmatium punctatum], 7 Sarmatium indicum: Nobili, 1903: 23. Sesarma (Sarmatium) punctatum: Pilkai, 1951: 37 |? = №. indicum), Neosarmatium indicum malabaricum Serene & Soh, 1970: 398, 405 (in list). Neosarmatium malabaricum: Serénc, 1975: 4-13, pls 1, 2, ЗА, B. TYPE INFORMATION Lectolype, BMNHI892.7.15.242, designated REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM 53 FIG. 9. Neosarmatium malabaricum (Henderson, 1893), 5 syntype, BMNH1892.7.15.242-5, A, dorsal view; В, frontal view. Scale line in mm. Seréne (1975). Type locality: Cochin, Malabar 24.3mm), 2 (26.7 x 22.0mm), Colombo, Sri Lanka, R. Coast of India. Seréne, 12.10.1972. MATERIAL EXAMINED DESCRIPTION MNHN-B10461, 1 d (22.5 x 19.0mm), mangrove near Carapace. c.1.2 times broader than long. Fron- Pegasus Reef Hotel, Colombo, Sri Lanka, R. Seréne, to-orbital width c.1.1 times carapace length. 11.10.1972; MNHN unreg., 6 d (21.5 x 18.1; 227 x Depth c.0.75 times carapace width. Cardiac 18.8; 23.8 x 19.3; 26.2 x 21.5; 29.7 x 24.3; 309 х region distinct; Lateral margins subparallel; 54 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM slightly concave. Exorbital angle triangular and sharp. First anterolateral tooth triangular and blunt; similar in size to exorbital angle. Second anterolateral tooth an angular projection only. Front c.0.6 times fronto-orbital width: strongly vertically deflexed, not visible from above; with shallow median emargination; lateral angles bluntly acute; slight pre-orbital concavity; lateral margins concave, Post-frontal lobes without clumps of setae, Epi-branchial ridges гип inwards from each anterolateral tooth; short ridge medial- ly on first'epibranchial tooth, Branchial ridges prominent, first follows from posterior edge of last epibranchial tooth; relatively short; others arise just inside lateral margin: a strong ridge curving over base of last leg, Posterior margin c.0.45 times carapace width. Carapace surface smooth, shining, punctate, Setae arranged sparse- ly on branchial lines. Upper orbital border smooth to microscopically granular. Lower orbital border straight; evenly granular, Inter-antennular sep- tum c.0.36 times width of front. Third maxilliped. Suture between merus and ischium horizontal. Ischium inner margin smooth. Exopod narrow, not much visible in fron- tal view; 0.4-0.5 times width of ischium. Chelipeds, Merus with posterior border with minute granular striations; lower border granu- late; anterior border convex coarsely granulate; carpus with inner angle granular: inner margin unarmed; а secondary ventral granular ridge bearing a short row of long setae proximally; tubercles present on inner face of carpus just below inner angle; outer margin striated, Upper surface of palm defined anteriorly by a swollen longitudinal ridge: posteriorly by uneven granular rim with some larger granules distally. Outer surface of palm naked, punctate proximo- ventrally, with short oblique granular striations; with indistinct median longitudinal row. Inner surface of palm sparsely granular; with a strongly raised granular vertical crest, and à secondary, lower, oblique granular crest running onto base of fixed finger. Immovable finger rounded on outer surface; moderately long, length cutting edge c.0.47 times length propodus. Ventral bor- der of chela straight below fixed finger. Dorsal surface of dactyl bearing 2 large, acute, chihinous lipped tubercles on superior inner margin, similar size and shape, one medial, one proximal. Fingers pointed, lower finger with tip notched, such that dactyl3s intermeshing; curved slightly inwards; а wide gape between cutting margins. Walking legs. First three pairs all of similar length, second slightly the longer. с.1.6 times maximum carapace width, Merus of third leg c.2.] times as long as wide. Carpus c.2.1 times as long as wide. Propodus c.1.7 times as long as wide. Dactyli about equal to length of propodi, or slightly longer than propodi. Carpi and p i bear a short felt of setae on both dorsal and ventral surfaces of legs 1-3, above the accessory carinae on the carpi and almost encircling the propodi distally; this felt only on dorsal surface of fourth leg; felt continues in thin rows onto the dactyli. Male abdomen. Width segment 3 c.4 times length. Segment 6 slightly elongated, c.1.6 times wider than long. Telson subequal to segment 6, both longer than preceding segments; c. 1.] times longer than wide; evenly rounded. Gonopods, G1 relatively slender, Inner-dorsal margin distally curved inward. Dorsal surface of stem Flattened; completely calcified. Palp poorly developed, not separated from stem, large, паг- row, rounded, calcified. Outer dorsal margin of stem straight. Distal part of the stem narrow. Apical process cornenus, strongly produced, straight. Gonopore terminal, Setae long, simple, lie along apical process and on palp obscuring structural detail, G2 short; evenly curved, twisted, COLOUR ‘Live specimens are dark brown with a violet tinge, especially on the carapace’ (Pillai, 1951: REMARKS The present specimen was compared with photographs of the holotype in the British Museum. They are identical, See remarks under N. indicum for discussion of points of separation from that species and from М, punctatum. HABITAT Seréne (1975) noted that in Sri Lanka it is similar to N. meinerti 3n that it lives in the rear- ward mangrove zone around the houses, and in the grass platform around the coconut trees; also they dig deep holes but do not construct mounds, Pinto (1984) observed that it was erepuscular, colonised the drier soils, and made T-shaped bur- rows which bifurcate shortly after their origin. Around the Vembanad Lake, in Southern India, Pillai (1951, as Sesarma punctatum) ѕам\ that it shuws а preference for muddy regions where it burrows in loose dark mud close to the waterline, DISTRIBUTION Cochin. Malabar Coast, India (type locality): REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM |o ee T Cz j 55 FIG. 10. Neosarmatium meinerti (De Man, 1887), d, AMP11213. A, dorsal view; B, frontal view; C, ventral view of abdomen and sternum. Scale line in mm. 56 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Ceylon (Ѕегёле 1975; and present record). Also almost certainly from the Vembanad Lake, Southern India (Pillai, 1951); Seychelles (Nobili, 1903); Nicobars (Heller, 1865). Neosarmatium meinerti (De Man, 1887) (Figs 2E-G; 10; 16) Sesarma tetragona: Н. Milne Edwards, 1837: 73; 1853; 184-185; Krauss, 1843: 44; Hilgendorf, 1869: 90, pl. 3, fig. 3d; 1879: 809, A. Milne Edwards, 18681; 71; Hoffmann, 1874: 23; Lenz & Richters, 1881: 425; Henderson, 1893: 392 |not Cancer teiragona Fabricius, 1798: 341]. Sesarma africana? Bianconi, 1869: 341 [fide Hilgen- dorf, 1879; 809; Tesch, 1917: 171]. Sesarma. teiragonum; Miers, 1879: 490; Stebbing, 1910: 321; 1917а. 438; 1917b: 10. Sesarma rotundifrons: De Man, 1880: 24 [not Sesarma rotindifrons A. Milne Edwards, 1869], Sesarma meinerti De Man, 1887: 648, 668-69; Pfeffer, 1839: 31; Bürger, 1893: 617; Ortmann, 18942: 720; 1 894b: 56; Alcock, 1900: 417; Doflein, 1904: 130: Lenz, 1905- 372; Gravier, 1920: 472; Cou, 1930: 679-92, nl. 1; Horikawa, 1940; 30; Lin, 1949: 30; Fourmaapir, 1953: 89; 1954: 5; Haig, 1984: 127. Sesarma (Sesurma) meinerti: Tesch, 1917: 171-174, 246. Chace, 1942: 201, 1953: 441; Miyake, 1938: 108; Barnard, 1950: 125-26, fig. 25e-f; Crosnier, 1965: 61, figs 81, 90, 9], 96, 103, Sesarma (Episesarma) meinerti; De Man, 1895: 166. Sesarma (Sarmalium) meinerti: De Man, 1929, fig. 4 {in part). Neosarmatium meinerti: Serenc & Soh, 1970: 398, 406 lin fist); Seréne, 1973; 127-129, pl. 4 A-C; 1977; 51, Dai et al., 1986: 496, fig. 280, pl. 70(3); Dai & Yang. 1991: 543-44, fig, 280, pl. 7003) TYPE INFORMATION Holotype unidentifiable (see Remarks). Type locality: [sie de France (= Mauritius). MATERIAL EXAMINED SOUTH AFRICA: QMW8835, 33 (41.3 x 35.7; 42.2 x 16.2: 45.7 x 39,0mm). 12 (30.5 x 256mm), 7.5.1964, W. Macnae; QMWNKR877, 26 (46.7 x 38.1: 37,5 x 327mm), 7,8,1964, W. Macnac; QMWR878, 5 5,2 9 (27.0 x 22.2 - 42.3 x 357mm), South Africa, 7.8 1964, W. Маспае, MADAGASCAR: MNHN- B16735, 23 (42,8 x 34,8; 402 х 33.4mm), 3. nvig, 9 (34.4 x 28.9; 37.9 x 31.4; 38.9 x 32.3mm), Nosy-Be, A. Crosnier. MAURITIUS: NNMI7503, 8 (27.1 x 22.4mm), Fort Barkly, Port Louis, Mauritius, C, Michel, Feb. 1960. AUSTRALIA: ZMH Unreg., 2d (35.0 x 29.0; 39.5 x 33, 3mm), Crab Creck, 14 miles east of Broome, W. Australia, G. Hartman, 11.9,1975; AMP11213, 8 (38.2 x 32.7mm), 9 (40.2 x 33.2mm), Melville Bay and Cape Amhem arca, NT, no date or collector information; QMW9077, d (46.2 x 37.9mm), Nungbalgarri Ck., 10 km upstream Rolling Bay, NT, 11759'S, 133'59'E, Aug. 1975, D. Grace, Ceriops forest, mudfloor, caught in pipe trap; QMW9076, & 145.2 x 38,5mm), Ngandauda Ck., Boucaut Bay, NT, 12°05°S, 134'43'E, 8.9.1975, D. Grace, 20.5 kms upstream, west bank, Avicennia forest, mudfloor, hur- rows; QMW9074, с (42.9 x 361mm), Hutchinson Strait, Buckingham Bay, NT, 12°15'S, 135°19'E, 24,Sep.1975, D. Grace, upper reaches Ck. A., Ceriops thicket, burrows; QMW9075, 29 (47.5 x 39,6; 39.8 x 33.3mm), Glyde R., Buckingham Вау, NT, 12°17'S, 135°02'E. 14.9.1975, D. Grace, 5 kms upstream, east bank = Avicennia/Ceriops mudfloor, burrows; QMW9072, 24 (43,0 x 37.2; 44,0 x 37.0mm), Glyde River, Buckingham Bay, NT, 12"S, 135°E, 12.9.1975, D, Grace, 15 kms upstream, west bank, Avicen- пішСегіорх mudfloor, burrows; QMW9073, 9 (43,3 x 35,5mm), Glyde River, Buckingham Bay, NT, 12'2|'S, 135°02°E, 14.9.1975, D. Grace, 30 km upstream, cast bank, Brugiera/ Ceriops forest, burrows, QMWS8837, d (48.4 x 41.6mm), Buckingham River, NT, 12°31'$, 135'43' E, 29.9.1975, burrow in mud- bank helow Ceriops; QMWBS36, d (44.9 x 38.4mm), Mornington Island, NT, 16°36'S, 139'21 E, Dec. 1976, J. Covacevich; МТМ Unreg., д (38.4mm e.b.), Stn HC/4, MacArthur R., Gulf of Carpentaria, R. Han- ley, NTM Cr Unreg,, ? (40.0mm c.b.), Stn PC/TS, MacArthur R., Gulf of Carpentaria, R. Hanley. DIAGNOSIS Carapace smooth, shining, punctate, bearing short setae in tufts; c. 1.2 (1,5- 1.23) times broader than long. Lateral margins slightly convergent posteriorly; а single prominent epibranchial tooth, second tooth present but reduced to a trace; greatest carapace width between middle of first epibranchial teeth. Frontal border slightly sinuous with a shallow median concavity, ap- roximately half carapace width; postfrontal obes strongly indicated. Posterior border straight, width variable, usually less than frontal width in males, but may be subequal or wider in females, Merus of cheliped without subdistal tooth developed on posterior margin, Inner sur- face of palm of male cheliped with a vertical crest consisting of a single row of large tubercles; outer surface without sub-median, horizontal crest; outer edge of upper border of palm without ob- vious longitudinal rim; ventral border of chela broadly convex; superior margin of dactyl with a single row of uniform sized, evenly spaced, REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM 51 chitinous tubercles; a broad gape between fingers of mature males. Men of walking legs broad (merus of third pair c.2.5 times longer than wide), anterior borders slightly convex, with acute sub- distal spine. dorsal face with short transverse striae; carpi and propodi with dense covering of short setae around superior margin, Male ab- domen narrow; telson slightly longer than broad ut base; segment 6 elongated, c.1.6 times longer we telson. and c.1.] times broader (at base) than ong. COLOUR 'S. meinerti is an extremely handsome beast. Above, the carapace 15 dark purple anteriorly, passing into a beautiful deep violet posteriorly, and having the anterior and lateral margins nar- rowly bordered with orange; the under surfaces are mauve and ochre, The walking legs are purple dorsally, with an orange spot around the hinge- like articulations between the joints, and pale yellow beneath. ... The proximal joints [of the chelipeds] are pale yellow, the merus bright orange, the wide and conspicuous carpus and the proximal region of the propodus and dactylus being a brilliant red, intermediate in tone between vermilion and orange. Beneath the chelipeds are yellow’ (Cott, 1950: 682-83). It appears that the intensity and predominant colour of this species changes through its range, In the Northern Territory, Australia, | have found two colour morphs living sympatrically. The 'orange form' has predominantly orange chelipeds, with the palm being orange over the proximal half, fading to yellow distally, the fingers being mainly yellow; the carapace has a reddish-orange undertone, and reddish-orange anterolateral margins, The ‘yellow form’ has the chelipeds a uniform dirty pale yellow; the carapace is steel-gray but with a yellowish under- tone, the yellow being predominant on the anterolateral margin. REMARKS De Man named this species without seeing specimens. He realised that the record of Sesarma tetragona of H. Milne Edwards (1853) from Isle de France, was wrongly identified and repre- sented an undescribed taxon. Unfortunately there is now no indication in the collections of the MNHN, Paris, which specimens had been ex- amined by H. Milne Edwards, or even if they still exist (D. Guinot, in litt). One bottle containing three females (MNHN-B10887) 15 labelled 'Sesarma Meinerti de Man vu par M. de Man, 10 juin 1890 Tle de France’; but this is after De Man had published his new name, and there is no other indication that this was the H, Milne Edwards’ material. 1 have considered designating a ncotype, however there is currently no confusion over the identity of №. meiner and the stability of nomenclature is not threatened. Under these circumstances according to Article 75(b) of the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature (Third Edition, 1985) the designation of a neotype would be invalid, This is probably the best known and best studied of the Neosarmarium species, and along with N. smirhi, the most widely distributed. Barly reports recorded this species from the south- western Pacific, from easter Australia and New Caledonia. but Seréne (1973) realised that these specimens differed in a number of consistent features from typical А, meinerti and described а pew species N. fourmanoiri to accept them. The characters that separate these two species are given under "Remarks! for A. fourmianoiri. HABITAT AND BIOLOGY Cott (1930) and Hogue & Bright (1971) have written accounts of the ecology and natural his- тогу of №. meinertt in South Africa and Kenya respectively. ‘Lives on the higher and drier ground adjoining the mangrove ditches ... а low lying area covered with coarse grass and inter- sected by tidal mangrove creeks, and being about 6-8 fect above the mud level of the ditches’ (Cott, 1930; 680), Bright & Hogue (1972; 7) record 'Sandy-clay areas and higher, drier, muddy banks associated with estuaries and mangroves', In the Northern Territory it lives in the rearward-most mangrove zone, з very dry area, inundated by high spring tides only. ‘Burrows are well developed and most com- mon in areas where there js dry, relatively hard mud. The burrows are deep and usually extend to the water table, Often the mouth of the burrow has a hood built of mud excavated while enlarg- ing the tunnel or cleaning out. These crabs are retiring, remaining at the mouth of the burrow. and only leave to forage at night. They apparently feed primarily on plant material, but also act as scavengers Where they occur in high density- There is no indication of colonialism in areas of high density’ (Bright & Hogue, 1972: 7-8). Larval stages have heen described by Pereyra Lago (1989). There are five larval stages and development takes an average of 25 days at 24°C and in 35 ppt. salinity. 58 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 11. Neosarmatium punctatum (A. Milne Edwards, DISTRIBUTION Only key references given. Mauntius (type locality, H. Milne Edwards, 1853); Madagascar (Crosnier, 1965); South Africa (Barnard, 1955); Aldabra (Haig, 1984); Seychelles (Serene, 1977a); East Africa (A. Milne Edwards, 1868; Ortmann, 1894); India (Alcock, 1900); An- damans (Alcock, 1900); Indonesia (De Man, 1895); northwestern Australia, and the Gulf of Carpentaria (present records); Philippines (Bürger, 1893); Saipan, Marianas, Micronesia (Miyake, 1938); Taiwan (Horikawa, 1940; Lin, 1949; Dai & Yang, 1991). Neosarmatium punctatum (A. Milne Edwards, 1873) (Figs 11; 17) Metagrapsus punctatus A, Milne Edwards, 1873; 308, pl. 17, fig. 2. Sarmatium punctatum: De Man, 1887: 660 (no new specimens). ? Sarmatium punctatum: Urita, 1926: 20; Sakai, 1934: 325 |? =N. indicum]. TYPE INFORMATION Lectotype (here designated), б (31.0 x 24.6 1873). Dorsal view of d holotype. mm), MNHN-B3630. Type locality: New Caledonia. MATERIAL EXAMINED SyNTYPES: MNHN-B3630, 19 (30.8 x 23,0mm) 248 (31.0 x 24.6; 35.4 x 26.3mm), New Caledonia, M. Balansa, no date. OTHER MATERIAL: QMW 19897, ¢ (28.9 x 22.6mm), in garden at Anse Vata, Noumea, C. Henin, Feb. 1993, DESCRIPTION Carapace. c.1.25-1.35 times broader than long. Fronto-orbital width c.1.05-1.1 times carapace length. Depth c.0.7 times carapace width. Cardiac region distinct. Lateral margins slightly conver- gent posteriorly; sinuous. Anterolateral margins with single, forwardly directed, epibranchial tooth, triangular and blunt; similar in size to ex- orbita] angle; with second small epibranchial projection. Exorbital angle triangular and sharp. Front c.0.5 times carapace width; c.0.6 times fronto-orbital width; lateral angles bluntly acute; small pre-orbital concavity present; lateral mar- gins concave. Lateral post-frontal lobes distinctly but narrowly separated from orbital margin. Post- frontal lobes without clumps of setae. Single sharp lateral ridge running from obliquely behind last anterolateral tooth to outer edge of posterior REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM 39 margin; first branchial ridge follows from posterior edge of epibranchial projection, reta- lively long; second ansing trom just short of lateral margin; third arising from lateral margin. Posterior margin c,0.5 times carapace width. Carapace surface smooth and shining, punctate; wrinkled posteriorly; without obvious setation. Upper orbital border smooth, but minutely granular laterally. Lower orbital border straight; evenly granular. Basal segment of antennal peduncle with outer tongue short, bearing thick fringe of setae on ventral edge. Inter-antennular septum c.0.4 times width of front. Third maxilliped. Suture between тегиз and ischium sloping slightly obliquely inward. Ex- ород narrow, not obvious in frontal view, reaches slightly less than half length of merus. Chelipeds. Merus with posterior border minutely granulate; with blunt projection; lower border granulate; anterior border tuberculate mesially and proximally, convex; carpus with inner angle granular; inner margin granular, with secondary ventral, microscopically granular ndge bearing tuft of long setac proximally; granules present on inner face of carpus just below inner angle; outer margin striated. Upper surface of palm defined anteriorly by an indistinct longitudinal ridge. Outer surface of palm naked, punctate. granular medio-ventrally; with median longitudinal row. Inner surface of palm mamly smooth; with strongly raised granular vertical crest and with short row of 3-5 large granules obliquely at base of fixed finger. Immovable finger slightly flattened on outer surface; moderately long. Length culling edge c.0.45 times length propodus. Ventral border of chela convex. Dorsal surface of dacty| smooth, rounded, but bearing 2 strong blunt spines on inner margin, proximal one smaller, c.one-fifth length from base, distal one larger and placed just short of halfway; tipped with chitin; female chela with spines less prominent. Fingers pointed, but with narrow spooning; curved inwards; a wide gape between cutting margins. Walking legs. Third pair slightly the longest, с.1.4 times maximum carapace width, Merus of third leg c.2.2 times as long as wide. Carpus c.2.1-2.3 times as long as wide. Propodus c. 1,9-2 times as long as wide. Dactyli c.0.9-1,0 times length of propodus, Dactyli stout and slightly recurved. Carpi and propodi bear a short felt of setae on both dorsal and ventral surfaces of legs 1-3, above the accessory carinae on the carpi, and almost encircling the propodi distally; only on dorsal surface of 4th leg; felt continues in thick rows onto the dactyli; also present on extreme distal end of upper margin of meri of legs 1+ and on sub-distal spine, Mule abdomen, Male abdomen moderately broad; segment 1 the widest (segments 1-3 sul» equal). Segment 1 covers entire width of sternuny between 4th peretopods; narrow. Segments 3-5 tapering (tapering strongly from 3-4, then moderately), Width segment 3 c.4.4 times length. Segment 6 elongated (moderately); 1.6 times wider than long. Telson not longer than preceding segments (sub-equal to segment б}; 1.1 Times longer than wide; evenly rounded. Gonepods. Could not be extracted from dry type specimens, and abdomen apd gonopods missing from spirit specimen, COLOUR ‘Sa couleur est d'un violet fonce devenant rougeatre sur les pattes (А. Milne Edwards, 1873: 309). REMARKS АП three type specimens must he considered &yntypes, butas the smaller male, 31.0 x 24.6mim, corresponds to the size of the only specimen mentioned by A. Milne Edwards (1873) itis here designated as the lectotype; the other two specimens become paralectotypes, The only records for this species which can be relied on at this time are those of the type series and one recent specimen from New Caledonia, Otherwise the records must be considered to be confused between M. punctatum and its very closely related sister-species №, malabaricum from the eastern Indian Ocean, Henderson (1893) erected Sarmatium malabaricum as a subspecies of N. indicum after being told by A. Milne Ed- wards that his specimens were referable to 5, indicum not S. punctatum as Henderson had at first supposed. It 15 clear that while Milne Ed- wards was correct in realising that Henderson's specimens were not S, punctatum, he erred im thinking they were like S. indicum. The present examination of the type material of N. punctatum with specimens of N. malabaricum from Ceylon, and photographs of the lectotype (designated by Seréne, 1975), reveal that the species are ex- tremely close, They can only be separated by: 1, on malabaricum the distal tooth on the upper surface of the dactyl of the cheliped is placed very close to the middle; while on N. punctatum it is clearly less than half way to the tip; 2, the upper surface of the palm of the cheliped has a very strong longitudinal rim marking its outer edge on 60 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 12. Neosarmatium rotundifrons (A. Milne Edwards, 1869), d holotype of N. fryatti (Tesch, 1917). A, dorsal view; B, chela; C, abdomen and sternum, Scale line in mm. malabaricum, but this rim is much less distinct on punctatum; 3, М. malabaricum is c.1.16-1.22 times broader than long, compared with 1.26- 1.35 for the type series of N. punctatum. This last character is usually quite conservative within other species of this genus and is independent of size except for very small specimens. These two species are very similar but I believe the differences are significant enough to maintain them as separate species. It is also interesting to note that these two species also conform to the pattern of some other Neosarmatium and Sar- matium species of having closely related sister species in the south-western Pacific Ocean e.g. N. meinerti and N. fourmanoiri; N. smithi and N. trispinosum sp. nov. (see Figs 16, 18). The dis- tributional boundaries and/or overlap zones be- tween N. malabaricum and N. punctatum still remain to be properly resolved. Henderson (1893) used a number of characters to separate S. malabaricum from specimens of S. punctatumin the British Museum which had been REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM 61 collected from the Indo-Malayan region and ear- lier identified by E.J. Miers. It is clear however that Miers also had misidentified his material and that they were really specimens of S. indicum that Henderson was comparing with his specimens. Seréne (1975) similarly thought that the specimens from Indo-Malaya that he and Tweedie had seen in the Zoological Reference Collection, Singapore, were S. punctatum whereas in fact they too are N. indicum. This is why he erroneously restated the differences al- ready listed by Henderson to separate N. malabaricum from N. punctatum. HABITAT Habitat information was not recorded for thc type specimens; the most recent cxample was collected dead from a garden in Anse Vata, a suburb of Noumea. DISTRIBUTION Only definitely known from the type locality, New Caledonia. Possible records from Indonesia, and Japan, more likely refer to №, indicum. Neosarmatium rotundifrons (A. Milnc Edwards, 1869) (Figs 2A, B; 12; 18) Sesarma rotundifrons A, Milne Edwards, 1869: 30; De Man, 1887: 648 (no specimen); Tesch, 1917: 198, 230, 246 (no specimen). Sesarma (Sarmatium) rotundifrons: De Man, 1929: 111, fig. 3, 4a, 4b. Sarmatium fryatti Tesch, 1917: 216-220, figs 6-8. Sesarma meinerti: De Man, 1887: 648, 668-69, in part, (fide De Man, 1929). ? Sesarma (Episesarma) meinerti: De Man, 1895: 166 (in part: three females only). Neosarmarium roiundifrons: Seréne & Soh, 1970: 398: 406 (in list). TYPE INFORMATION N. rotundifrons: holotype, ZMH-K4195. Type locality: Upolu, Samoa. N. fryatti: holotype, NNM-1955. Type locality; Nias, off the western coast of Sumatera, In- donesia. MATERIAL EXAMINED HOLOTYPE: ZMH-K4195, ? (34.3x 27.1 mm), Upolu, Samoa (Museum Godefroy No, 2361), OTHER MATERIAL: Holotype of S. fryatti, NNM-1955, c (32.6 x 25.3mm), Nias, E.E.W. Schröder, 1908. DIAGNOSIS Carapace smooth and shining, finely pitted, bearing short setae in small tufts; c. 1.2-1.3 times broader than long. Lateral margins sinuous; a single prominent epibranchial tooth, second tooth present but reduced io a trace; greatest carapace width across second epibranchial teeth. Frontal border strongly sinuous with a deep median con- cavity, less than half (c.0.45) carapace width; postfrontal lobes strongly indicated. Posterior border straight, width subequal to front. Merus of cheliped without subdistal tooth developed on posterior margin. Inner surface of palm of male cheliped with prominent vertical granular crest; Outer surface with short, prominent, sub-median, transverse crest; outer edge of upper border of palm without obvious longitudinal rim; superior margin of dactyl with 4-5 distally directed spines, evenly spaced over the proximal half; a broad gape between fingers of mature males. Меп of walking legs broad (merus of third pair c.2.5 times longer than wide), anterior borders only slightly convex, with acute subdistal spine, dorsal face with short transverse striae; carpi and propodi with dense covering of short setae around superior margin. Male abdomen narrow; telson slightly longer than broad at base; segment 6 longer than telson, and c.1.3 times broader (at base) than long REMARKS De Man (1929) compared the type material of Sarmatium fryatti with the holotype of Sesarma ratundifrons and was the First to establish that these two species were synonymous. | have also re-examined the two holotypes and agree with De Man. When Tesch described S. fryatri in 1917, he had not seen specimens of Sesarma rotundifrons A. Milne Edwards, and it had still not at that time been figured. He believed it to belong to Sesarma (Sesarma) not to Sarmatium, and for this reason he failed to compare it with his new species of Sarmatium which he naturally thought to be un- described, The type of №. fryatti is used Бете to illustrate the male morphology of N. rotundifrons for the first time, DISTRIBUTION Upolu, Samoa (A. Milne Edwards, 1869); In- donesia: Nias, off west coast of Sumatera; Java; Obi Is., Moluccas (Tesch, 1917, às W, frvyani) 62 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Neosarmatium m (H. Milne Edwards, 1853 (Figs 2], К; 13; 18) Sesarma smithi Н. Milne Edwards, 1853: 187; Hof- fmann, 1874: 24; De Man, 1887: 652-653; Bürger. 1893: 618, pl. 21, fig. 2; Ortmann, 1894b; 722; Haig, 1984; 128, Sesarma smirhi: A, Milne Edwards, 1854: 149, pl. 9, fig. 2: A. Milne Edwards, 18683; 71; De Man, 1880: 29; Kingsley. L880: 217. Sesarma (Sesarma) smithi: Rathbun, 1910: 328: Miyake, 1936: 497, pl. 35, figs 1, 2: Sakai, 1939: GRA. Sesarma (Sesarma) smithii, Tesch, 1917: 199-200, Barnard, 1950: 124; Crosnier, 1965 [in part]: 59, pl. 4, fig. 2 [not figs 74, 79, 86, 102 «7 N. trispinasum]. Sesarma (Sarmatium) smithii; Tweedie, 1936: 68. Sesarma oceanica: Chhapgar, 1957: 58, pl. 16, figs d-g [not 5, oceanica De Man, 1889 = Pseudesesgraa roiuncdatun |. Neosarmatium smithi: Serene & Soh, 1971); 398, 405, pl. 5A, B; Sakai, 1976: 665-666, text-fig. 364, Hirata et al, 1988. 26, colour plate; Dai ef al, 1986: 496, fig. 279(3), pl. 70(2); Dai & Yang, 1991: 543, lig. 279(3), pl. 70(2). TYPE INFORMATION Holotype, MNHN-B3962. Type locality: Port Natal, South Africa. MATERIAL EXAMINED HororvrE; MNHN-B3962, 9 (37.1 x 33.1mm), Port Natal, South Africa. OTHER MATERIAL: SOUTH AFRICA:QMW8861,2d (30.0 x 27,9; 36.2 x 34.0mm). 9 (35.8 x 33.3mm}, Inhaca Island, Aug. 1963, W. Macnac. MADAGAS- CAR: MNHN-B16764, 9 (29.6 x 27.8mm), Nosy Be, A. Crosnier, c, 1964, ZANZIBAR: MNHN-B3685, & (dry), (35.6 x 32.6mm), M. Grandidier. MALAYSIA: QMWSB65, 4 (37.3 x 3.0mm), Kuala Selangor, A. Sasekumar, 1979. PHILIPPINES: NNM32716, 9, Maribago, Mactan Island, near Cebu, coll. Gomez, 1979; ZMG628, 59 (29.0 - 32.8mm), 4d (25.8 - 30.0mm), Manila, Luzon, 3'24'N, 101 12'E, C. Semper, April 1860 - Nov. 1861. DESCRIPTION Carapace. c.1.1 times broader than long. Fron- to-orbital width c.0.95 times carapace length. Depth c.0.8-0.85 times carapace width. Lateral margins slightly convergent posteriorly; sinuous. Anterolateral margins with two forwardly directed teeth behind the exorbital angle; exorbi- tal angle sharp and outer margin straight; first anterolateral tooth triangular; larger than exorbi- tal angle; second anterolateral tooth blunt, minute but obvious. Front c.0.45 times carapace width; с.0.5- 0.6 times fronto-orbital width; lateral mar- gins slightly concave, lateral angles obtuse. Post- frontal lobes distinct, laterals c.half width of medians, poorly separated from orbit. Branchial ndges prominent; first follows from posterior edge of last epibranchial tooth; relatively long; Second arising from lateral margin; third arising from, or just short of, lateral margin. Posterior margin c.0.45 times carapace width. Carapace surface smooth, shining, punctate; setae 1n short тийз on anterior halfand posteriorly in rows along branchial lines. Upper orbital border evenly, fine- ly, granular; oblique, slightly sinuous; inner angle rounded. Lower orbital border straight; evenly granular. Inner orbital] tooth minutely granular. Inter-antennular septum c.0.3 times width of front. Third maxilliped. Suture between merus and ischium horizontal. Ischium sub-triangular; inner margin smooth, Exopod narrow, not much visible in frontal view, reaching about half length of merus; c.0.4 times width of ischium. Chelipeds. Merus with posterior border minutely granulate and faintly striated; with dis- tinct subdistal spine; lower border minutely granulate; anterior border with small granules ог tubercles mesially on outer edge of lip; carpus with innerangle armed with a few sharp granules; inner margin unarmed except for a row of granules, and a tuft of long setae proximally on secondary ventral ridge of inner margin; granules present ой inner face of carpus just below inner angle; outer margin with granular striations, Upper surface of palm defined anteriorly by a swollen longitudinal ridge, Outer surface of palm naked; with a median longitudinal row. Inner surface of palm smooth except for strongly raised granular vertical crest continuing obliquely for about two-thirds of fixed finger. Immovable finger slightly flattened on outer surface; moderately long. Length cutting edge c,0.5 times length propodus. Ventral border of chela slightly convex, coarsely granular posterior to fixed finger. Dorsal surface of dactyl bearing a small blunt proximal tubercle on inner edge. followed by a large, truncate, chitinous tooth, followed by a smaller tooth of similar form, all three evenly separated over proximal half; otherwise smooth. Walking legs. Second and third pairs sub-equal and longer than others. Longest leg c.1.7 times maximum carapace width. Merus of third leg c.2.2-2.5 times as long as wide. Carpus c.2.3-2.5 REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM 63 FIG. 13. Neosarmatium smithi (Н. Milne Edwards, 1853), d, QMW8861. A, dorsal view; B, chela; C, abdomen and sternum. Scale line in mm. times as long as wide. Propodus c.2.2-2.4 times as long as wide. Dactyli c.0.8-0.9 times length of propodus. Male abdomen. Width segment 3 c.3.2-4.0 times length. Segment 6 elongated, longest, length and width subequal. Telson not longerthan preceding segments, sub-equal to segment 5; 1.3- 1.5 times longer than wide; evenly rounded. Gonopods. Gl inner-dorsal margin straight. Dorsal surface of stem flattened, concave; com- pletely calcified. Palp present, poorly developed, not separated from stem, large, narrow, rounded, calcified. Outer dorsal margin of stem convex. Distal part of the stem narrow. Apical process present, corneous, strongly produced, straight. Gonopore terminal. Setae present, short, simple, lie around corneous tip and apical part of stem obscuring structural detail. G2 short, evenly tapering, slightly twisted, apically rounded. COLOUR Dorsal carapace, legs, and merus and carpus of chelipeds, dark purple; outer face of chela and fingers bright red, but with dark dorsal dactylar teeth. 64 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM REMARKS This widespread species has been wrongly identified in the south-western Pacific region, where it is replaced by a sister species Neosar- matium trispinosum sp. nov. In part, this has been caused by the fact that the holotype is a female. and the arrangement of the spines on the superior border of the dactyl of the cheliped is unclear. On N. smithi the dorsal surface of dacty] bears a small blunt proximal tubercle on the inner edge, fol- lowed by a large, truncate, chitinous tooth, and then a smaller tooth of similar form, all three evenly separated over proximal half. On М. trispinosum however, there are also three teeth but they take the form of large, acute, conical, chitinous spines, set close together in proximal two-fifths, the smallest being near the articulation as in N. smithi, but itis the third, most distal tooth, that is the largest. Even though these spines are vestigial in the female, traces of them can be found on careful examination, and therefore this 15 still a good character for discriminating be- tween the species using a specimen of either sex. - Ecological studies referring to this species by Giddins et al. (1986), Neilson et al. (1986), Neil- son & Richards (1989) are all actually referring to W. inispinosum sp. nov. HABITAT Mangroves (Rathbun, 1910; Crosnier, 1965), Pinto (1984) noted that they live in complex burrows that have the entrance protruding above the soil surface as a hollow cylinder reinforced by mangrove roots; they actively built these ‘castles’ after rains when the burrows were flooded. He found them to be mainly nocturnal. DISTRIBUTION Southem Africa and Madagascar - Port Natal (Н. Milne Edwards, 1853); Nossi-Faly (near Madagascar) (De Man, 1880); Madagascar (Crosnier, 1965); Aldabra (Haig, 1984). India - Bombay (Chhapgar, 1957 as Sesarma oceanica). Sri Lanka (Pinto, 1984). S.E. Asia - Lem Ngob, Thailand (Rathbun, 1910); Singapore (Tweedie, 1936); Malaysia. Philippines (present records); Haman Is., China (Dai & Yang, 1991); extending as far north as Okinawa, Ryukyu, Japan (Sakai, 1976; Hirata et al., 1988). Neosarmatium trispinosum sp. nov. (Figs 2H, I; 14; 18) Sesarma smithii: ^. Milne Edwards, 1873; 305; De Man, 1889: 426; 1890: 94: McCulloch, 1913: 322, Sesarma (Episesarma) smithi: Nobili, 1899: 267. Sesarma (Neosarmatium) sp-: Davie, 1982: 207, MATERIAL EXAMINED HOLOTYPE: QMW5143, 8 (31.3 х 29.2mm), Serpen- tine Ck, Moreton Bay, SE QLD., 27*24'S, 153'07.0 E. Mangroves, on sandy substrate, 11.8.1972, B. Campbell, PaRATYPES: MNHN unreg. d. (41.2 x 36.4mm). New Caledonia. [5 pleopod figured]; QMW19556, 3 © (22,9 x 20,2; 30.8 x 28,3; 39,0 x 35, тт), mangroves ar Pam, northern New Caledonia, 27.2.1992, J-L. Menou; SMF1937, 24 (38.5 x 36.4; 42.3 x 38.6mm), Fiji; NNM743, 9 (24.7 x 21,7mm), d (24,8 x 21.9mm), Omgeuine Base G, Hollandia, New Guinea, G. Van Hout; MNHN unreg. (Ѕегёпе colin), d (31.6 x 28,4mm), Vanuatu, R. Seréne, 10.10.1971; SMF unreg., 9 (31.2 x 36.9mm), д (34.6 x 31.6mm), Cape Ferguson, near A.LM.S., south of Townsville, NE. QLD, mangroves, М. Türkay, 11.6.1980; QMW9137, б (25.9 х 3.2 mm), Annie River, NE.QLD, 14°25'S, 14334" E, 20.5.1973, В. Campbell, small creek near jetty (Loc 4); QMWRRO64, 5 (31,5 x 282mm), En- denvour River, Cooktown, NE.QLD, 15728'8, 14515" E; QMW8876, С (16.4 x 14.2mm). Barron River, near Cairns, NE.QLD, 16°52°5, 145°42'E; QMNW8S72, d. (36.1 x 33.8mm), Сайт, NE.QLD, 16°55'S, 145'46" E, 5.3.1962; QMWSST7S. d (133 x 11.7mm), Johnstone R., nr Flying Fish Point, nr Innis- fail, NE.QLD, 17738, 146'5'E; QMWSS66. c (28,7 x 25,9mm). on road to Lucinda (near Ingham), NE.QLD, 18'32'S, 1452" E, 20.3.1962, W. MacNae; QMWS8871,. d (33.7 х 31.0mm), Ross Creek, Townsville, NE.QLD, 19'16'S, 146°49°E, OMW8869, 9 (27.9 x 24,6mm), South Townsville Inlet, NE.QLD, 19717'S, 146°5"E; QMW8976, 2 9 (31.0 x 28.6; 32.2 x 28.8mm), 2 d. (31.7 x 28.8: 31.0 x 298mm} Chonda Bay, Hinchinbrook Island, off Townsville, NE.QLD, 19°17'S, 147'03'F, I. Kneipp; QMWSE70, d (32,7 x 29.7mm), Bassett Creek, Mack- ay. ME.QLD, 21'(16'S, 149" 11'E; QMWB838, 2 (34.4 x 31,6mm), Deepwater Bend, South Pine River, SE.QLD. 27'2'5, 153°E, 1.3.1950, С. Davis; OMWSE39, д (30.3 x 27,5mm), Deepwater Bend, South Pine River, SE.QLD, 27°2'S, 153" E, 26.3.1950, С, Davis; QMW8862, d (33.6 x 30, 5mm), Fishermen Island, Brisbane River, SE.QLD. 27°23'S, 153°1'Е, Nov. 1964, B. Campbell; QMW8863, g (34.0 x 3. 5mm), Brisbane River, SE.QLD, 27°23'S, 153°1'E, 1964, B. Campbell; QMW8867, d (34.4 x 30.7mm), Fisherman Island, Brisbane River, SE.QLD, 27°23'S, 153°1°E, Nov. 1964, B. Campbell; QMW8868, d (33.3 x 30.3mm), Fisherman Island, Brisbane River, SE.QLD, 2723'S, 153°1"E; QMW8873, 9 (31.2 x 28.0mm), Fisherman Island, Brisbane River, SE.QLD, REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM 65 ПТО) FIG. 14. Neosarmatium trispinosum sp. nov., 8 holotype ,ОМҰ5143. A, dorsal view; B, frontal view; C, ventral view. Scale line in mm. 66 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 212XS, 153°1'Е; QMW8874, 9 (22.8 X 207mm), Fisherman Istand, Brisbane River, SE.QLD, 27°23'S, 153" UE, 16.10.1958, B. Campbell, large (75mm) bur- rows in mud, H.W.S. OMER MATERIAL; MNHN-B16763, $ (33,6 x 30.4mm), labe] states ‘Provenance inconnue”, DESCRIPTION Carapace. c-1.1 times broader than long. Fron- to-orbital width c.0,95 times carapace length. Depth c.0.8 times carapace width. Cardiac region indistinct. Lateral margins slightly convergent posteriorly; sinuous. Anterolateral margins. with two forwardly directed teeth behind the exorbital angle, Exorbital angle sharp and outer margin straight. First anterolateral tooth blunt; larger than exorbital angle. Second anterolateral tooth minute, blunt. Front c.0.45 times carapace width; с.0.55 times fronto-orbital width; lateral angles obtuse; with slight, small, pre-orhital concavity; lateral margins slightly concave. Lateral post- frontal lobes very narrow, not as swollen as medians. Branchial ridges prominent: first fol- lows from posterior edge of last epibranchial tooth; relatively long; second arising from lateral margin; third arising from, or just short of, lateral margin. Posterior margin c.0.45 times carapace width. Carapace surface smooth, shining, punctate. Setae in short tufts on anterior half and posteriorly in rows along branchial lines. Upper orbital border evenly finely granular, Lower or- bital border straight; evenly granular. Inter-an- lennular septum c,0,3 times width of front, Third maxilliped. Suture between merus and ischium horizontal. [schium sub-tnangular; inner margin smooth. Exopod narrow, not much visible in frontal view, reaching about a half length of merus; c.0.3 times width of ischium. Chelipeds, Merus with posterior border minutely granulate and faintly striated; with dis- tinct, small, subdistal spine; lower border granu- Jate; anterior border smooth; carpus with inner angle slightly produced. armed with a few sharp granules; inner margin unarmed, а tuft of long setae proximally on secondary ventral ridge of inner margin; granules present on inner face of carpus just below inner angle; outer margin with sparse granular striations. Upper surface of palm defined anteriorly by swollen longitudinal ridge. Outer surface of palm, naked, punctate, with median longitudinal row. Inner surface of paltn mainly smooth; with a strongly raised granular vertical crest, continuing obliquely for about 2/3 of fixed finger. Immovable finger slightly flat- tened on outer surface; moderately long; length cutting edge c.0.5 times length propodus. Ventral border of chela slightly convex; coarsely granular posterior to fixed finger. Dorsal surface of dactyl bearing 3 large acute chitinous spines set close together in proximal two-fifths, forwardly directed, comical, smallest near articulation, largest distally; otherwise smooth. Fingers painted; curved slightly inwards; a wide gape between cutting margins. Walking legs. Second pair slightly the longest. с.1.6 times maximum carapace width. Merus of third leg c.2.3 times as long as wide, Carpiis c.2,5 limes as long as wide. Propodus c.2.2 times as long as wide, Dactyli c.0.9 times length of propodus. Short setae in fringing rows and on accessory cannae. Male abdomen. Segment 1 c.0.95 times width segment 3. Width segment 3 c.3.6 times length. Segment 6 the longest, length and width sube- qual, Telson c.1.3 times longer than wide; evenly rounded. Gonopods. G1 inner-dorsal margin straight. Dorsal surface of stem concave; completely cal- cified. Palp present, poorly developed, not separated from stem, large, narrow, rounded, cal- cified. Outer dorsal margin of stern convex. Distal part of stem narrow. Apical process corneous, strongly produced, straight. Gonopore terminal. Setae present, short, simple; lie around comeous tip and apical part of stem obscuring structural detail. G2 short, evenly tapering, slightly twisted, apically rounded. COLOUR Dersal carapace, legs, and merus and carpus of chelipeds, dark reddish chocolate; outer face of chela and fingers bright red, but with fingers becoming creamy yellow distally, REMARKS The closest relative of this species ts Neesar- matium smithi (Н. Milne Edwards), with which it has been wrongly identified in the past. The most distinctive feature distinguishing N. trispinosum from М. smithi is the shape and arrangement of spines on the dactyl of the male cheliped (as discussed under N. smrithi)- On N. trispinosum the three spines are acute, and placed close together in the proximal two-thirds; whereas in №, smithi they are truncate, and spaced out over the proximal half. The label of the male specimen MNHN- B16763, states ‘Provenance inconnue”. This was the specimen that was illustrated by Crosnier (1965: figs 74, 79, 86, 102) as representing a REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM 67 FIG. 15. A, С, E, Neosarmatium inerme (De Man, 1887), 5, 2МН-К4080 (18.5 mm c.b.); B, D, Е, Neosarmatium spinicarpus sp. nov., holotype. A, B, Frontal view showing shape and size of postfrontal lobes; C, D, right chela, frontal view; E, F, dorsal view of carpus and palm. Scale line = 2mm Madagascan specimen of Neosarmatium smithi (A. Crosnier pers. comm.). It is extremely close to М. trispinosum sp. nov. and І consider it to be an abberant specimen of this species which has simply lost the smallest, most proximal spine on the dactyl of the cheliped. It is more than likely that the species was collected in New Caledonia, or in nearby French controlled territories in the Western Pacific. HABITAT Neosarmatium trispinosum builds large char- 68 MEMDIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM acteristic mounds at the entrance to its burrow. In southeast Queensland it occurs from the mid- to upper-intertidal zones, amongst Avicenanía and Ceriops. Around Townsville, north Queensland, *Neosarmatium smithi [= №. trispinosum] ... is the dominant crustacean in the Ceriops tagal australis zone of mangroves ... 3.] m above chart datum, and is infrequently immersed. The crab emerges from its burrow at night to remove litter from the surface of the mud...' (Giddins et al., 1986: 147). This species is a major leaf consumer, with vegetable matter comprising over 90% of its diet; 1t carries leaves into its burrow where they зге allowed to age and decay prior to consump- tion (Giddins et al, 1986; Neilson et al., 1986; Neilson & Richards, 1989). DISTRIBUTION From the Brisbane River north to the Annie River, Cape York, in eastern Australia; New Caledonia (A. Milne Edwards, 1873); Vanuatu (present record); New Guinea (Nobili, 1899 & present record); Fiji (De Man, 1889). Neosarmatium spinicarpus sp, nov. (Figs 15B, D, Р; 16) Sesarma (Sarmarwm) (тегиз: Tweedie, 1940; 109; 195ПЬ: 353. MATERIAL EXAMINED HoLorvPE: ZRCI964.9.3,500, 4 (15.0 x 12.3mm), Stambak, Saribas, Sarawak, Borneo, L.K. Charles, 1952, PARATYPE: ZRC1964,.9.3.501, d (17.4 x 14.4mim), data as for holotype, OTHER MATERIAL: ZRCI964.0,3 502, а (1U.5 x 8.6mm), Kuching, Sarawak, Вотсо, M.W F. Tweedic, 1950; ZRC1964.9.3.504, 8 (9.7 x 8.2mm) Sedil: River, Johore, Malaysia, M.W.F Tweedie, 1950. DIAGNOSIS This species 15 extremely similar to N. inerme with which it agrees in overall description and appearance, except for the following differences. I, inner angle of carpus of cheliped marked by acute granular projection (cf. Fig. 15E, F), 2, outer medioventral portion of palm of cheliped with slightly more prominent transverse ridge and more prominent rounded granules below it (cf, Fig. 15C, D). 3, inner face of palm with cluster of rounded granules behind base of fixed finger, but not extending as vertical granular row behind gape as on N. inerme. 4, cutting margin of fixed finger bears two uneven granular teeth proximally, the inner-most (on very edge of joint) is lacking in N. inerme (cf. Fig. 15C, D). 5, median frontal lobes of carapace are considerably more swollen, and separated by a broad U-shaped channel; lateral lobes are subacute, topped with a few small granules, and followed posteriorly by aswollen lobe. In N. inerme the median lobes are low, and close together, being separated by a shallow V-shaped incision; the lateral lobes are low and smooth, topped with 1-2 stiff, short setae, and not followed postenorly by an obvious swell- ing (cf. Fig. 15A, B). REMARKS Neither of the type specimens have fully mature chelipeds 1.е. there is not yet a significant gape formed, and the fingers are relatively slender, both of which are characteristics of young males. The degree of granulation and the prominence of the inner angle of the carpus аге characters that can vary with maturity, however the largest male was larger than comparative specimens of the closely related N, inerme and the large series of specimens of N. inerme were very consistent in the characters that [have used to separate the new species. No clear differences however could be seen in the male gonopods. The two smaller males examined, one from Sarawak and one from Johore, Malaysia, do not have a strongly acute projection on the inner angle of the carpus, and have very little granulation generally, but they still have very undeveloped chelac. They are con- sidered too juvenile to identify with certainly as either М. inerme or N. spinicarpus, and therefore are excluded from the type series, and the record from Malaysia should be considered tentative. HABITAT Tweedie (1940: 109) recorded whatis probably this species (under the name Sesarma inermis) "from among nipah palms beside the river Sedili.’ DISTRIBUTION Known with certainty only from Sarawak; probable records from Malaysia (see Remarks). ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS 1 am indebted to Dr Alain Crosnier of ORSTOM for obtaining funding for me to under- take this study, and for his encouragement; and the Board of Trustees of the Quecnsland Museum for support and travel assistance, A large part of the work was undertaken while at the Laboratoire de Zoologie (Arthropodes), Muséum national d'- REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM 69 Æ AE 7 Sa s ee RN = — NU E Е гас -— = ud Б > <=; € = Neosarmatium inerme PE i “yé Ж = Neosarmatium spinicarpus __ 7 C ^ y ©) = Neosarmatium fourmanoiri — a К і . " . c - Ж = Neosarmatium meinerti TD 7 \ | i ar А “ы rod oy Жао о © ee » UU a © © E A TA j M c vA, 2 NM. №, р) » FIG. 16. Map showing the distribution of Neosarmatium inerme, N. spinicarpus, N. fourmanoiri and N. meinerti. Symbols are intended to show the major distribution records, and therefore it has not been attempted to show every confirmed record, especially when these are closely adjacent. Fai FT UR mee = aA . RE mam oam кс с> d ae a= = ү 5 M eel € = Neosarmatium punctatum ra CÓ д2 5 РД x * = Neosarmatium malabaricum S Ip L © = Neosarmatium indicum d * = Neosarmatium laeve 5 ‘ 72 7 Vv | СЩ : »" Ы CR Osee > b Pes af „уо Ж 6 7, * * “Же. } 7 EN С 2 PR "V 9 C SS з A [ o» QU 4 X ew n "s 0 zx N Ф os \ ИЕ i Le d m | 5 Co 5 e FIG. 17. Map showing the distribution of Neosarmatium punctatum, N. malabaricum, N. indicum and N. laeve. 70 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM к Раа aE ос а шге А po |, tj Ra € - Neosarmatium integrum Ert M M 3a кч p Ж = Neosarmatium smithi = Мм. là ` Эм hi © = Neosarmatium frispinosum —— wg 4 ў" L x * = Neosarmalium rotundifrons $ ес үс FIG. 18. Map showing the distribution of Neosarmatium integrum, №. smithi, N. trispinosum and №. rotundifrons. Histoire Naturelle, Paris, under a grant from the Institut française de Recherche Scientifique pour le Développement en Coopération (ORSTOM). Dr Daniéle Guinot kindly arranged the loan of comparative specimens, and searched the MNHN for the type of №. meinerti. Dr Charles Fransen of the Nationaal Natuurhistorisch Museum, Leiden, and Dr Michael Türkay of the Forschungsinstitut Senckenberg, Frankfurt, and Mrs C.M. Yang of the Zoological Reference Collection, National University of Singapore, are all sincerely thanked for their generosity and kindness whilst I was visiting their laboratories and for the loan of specimens. Dr László Forró of the Hungarian Natural History Museum, Budapest, very gra- ciously sent me negatives of N. biroi. John Short of the QM, and Jacques Rebiére of the MNHN, Paris, are thanked for their assistance with photography and help with preparation of plates. M. Maurice Gaillard executed the excellent 1]- lustrations of male gonopods. Bob Domrow again graciously advised me on nomenclatural matters. Ray Manning of the USNM, and Peter Ng of the University of Singapore, refereed the manuscript and their careful reading and suggestions have greatly improved the final version. I thank finally my wife Kathleen for her loying support and practical assistance with compiling the manuscript. LITERATURE CITED ALCOCK, A. 1900. Materials for a Carcinological Fauna of India. No, 6, The Brachyura Catametopa, or Grapsoidea. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal 69 (Pt. 2 No. 3); 279- 456. BARNARD, K.H. 1950. Descriptive Catalogue of South African Decapod Crustacea (Crabs and Shrimps). Annals of the South African Museum 38: 1-837. BIANCONI, J. 1869. Specimina zoologica Mossam- bicana. Memorie della Reala Accademie delle Scienze dell'Istituto di Bologna. Classe di Scienze Fisiche (2)9: 205-210. BRIGHT, D.B. & HOGUE, C.L. 1972. A synopsis of the burrowing land crabs of the world and list of their symbionts and burrow associates, Los An- geles County Natural History Museum, Con- tributions in Science 220: 1-58. BURGER, О, 1893. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Gat- tung Sesarma. Zoologische Jahrbücher Ab- leilung für Systematik 7: 613-632. CHACE, F.A. 1942. Scientific results of a fourth ex- pedition to forested areas in eastern Africa. Ш. Decapod Crustacea. Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoólogy, Harvard 91(3): 183-233. 1953. Zoological results of a fifth expedition to East Africa. VI. Decapod Crustacea. Builetin of the Museum of Comparative Zoólogy, Harvard 110: 425-443. CHHAPGAR, В.Е, 1957. On the marine crabs (Decapoda; Brachyura) of Bombay State. Part IT. REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM 7\ Journal of the Bombay Natural History Society 54(3): 503-549. COTT, Н.В. 1930. The Zoological Society's Expedi- tion to the Zambesi, 1927: No. 2. Observations on the natural history of the land-crab Sexarma meinerti, from Beira, with special reference to the theory of waming colours. Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London 1929: 679-692, CROSNIER, А. 1965. Crustacés Décapodes, Grap- sidae et Ocypodidae. Faune de Madagascar. In- stitut de Recherche Scientifique, Tananarive ХУШ: 1-143. DAI, A. & YANG, 5. 1991. ‘Crabs of the China Seas’ (China Ocean Press: Beijing). DAI, A., YANG, S., SONG, Y., & CHEN, С. 1986. "Crabs of the China Seas" (China Ocean Press: Beijing) [In Chinese]. DALLWITZ, М.Ј. & PAINE, T. A. 1986. User's guide to the DELTA system. A general system for processing taxonomic descriptions. Third edi- tion. Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organisation, Australia. Division of Entomology Report 13: 1-106. DAVIE, P.J.F. 1982. A preliminary checklist of Brachyura (Crustacea: Decapoda) associated with Australian mangrove forests. Operculum 5(4); 204-207. 1992, Revision of Sarmatium Dana (Crustacea: Brachyura: Sesarminac) with descriptions of three new species. Memoirs of the Queensland Muscum 32(1): 79-97. 1993. A new species of sesarmine crab (Brachyura: Grapsidae) from Japan and Taiwan, previous known as Sesarma erythodacyla Hess, 1865. Crustacean Research 22: 65-74. DOFLEIN, F. 1904. 'Brachyura', Vol. 6, Wis- senschaftliche Ergebnisse der Deutschen Tiefsec Expedition аз dem Dampfer "Valdivia", 1898- 1899 (Gustav Fischer: Jena). FABRICIUS, J.C. 1798. ‘Supplementum En- tomologiae Systematicac’ ( Hafniae). FORRÓ, L. & MÜLLER, Р. 1985. An annotated list of Decapoda material collected by 1., BIRO in New Guinea, Miscellanea Zoologica Hungarica 3: 77- 80, FOURMANOIR, Р. 1953. Notes sur la faune de la mangrove dans |a région de Majunga: Crabes. пе, Poissons. Naturaliste Malgache 5(1); 87-92. 1954. Crabes de la cóle ouest de Madagascar [Enumeration et Observations ecologiques sur une quarantaine d'especes de Decapodes Brachyoures de |a Zone intercotidale et sub- cotidale de Madagascar. Naturaliste Malgache 6(1-2): 1-16. GIDDINS, RL., LUCAS, J.S., NEILSON, MJ. & RICHARDS, G.N. 1986. Feeding ecology of the mangrove crab Neosarmatium smithi (Crustacea: Decapoda: Sesarmidac). Marine Ecology - s Series 33; 147-155. GRAVIER, С, 1920, Sur unc collection de Cnistacés recueillis à Madagascar, par M. le Lieutenant Decary. Bulletin du Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris 26(5): 376-383. 465-472. HAIG, J, 1977, Land and freshwater crabs of the Seychelles and neighbouring islands, Pp, 123- 139. In Stoddart, D.R. (ed.), ‘Biogeography аги! ecology of the Seychelles Islands”. (W. Junk: The Hague). HELLER, C. 1865. Crustaceen. [n Reise der @sterreichischen Егеғаие "Novarra" um dye Erdre, in den Jahren 1857, 1858, 1859, unter den Befehlen des Commodore B. von Wüllerstorf- Urbair. Zoologie 2(3): 1-280. HENDERSON, J.R. 1893. A Contribution to Indian Carcinology. Transactions of the Linnacan Society, London, Ser. 2, 5(10): 325-458. HILGENDORF, Е. 1869, Crustaceen, In, C. von der Decken, Reisen in Ost-Afrika in den fahren 1859-1865. (Heidelberg-Leipzig). 3(1): 69-114. 1879. Die. von Hm. W. Peters in Mocambique gesammelten Crustaceen. Monatsberichte der Deutschen. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin 1878 (1879): 782-852. HIRATA, Y.. NAKASONE, Y. & SHOKITA, S. 1988, ‘Okinawan decapods and shells in color’, Revised ed., (Fudokisha Publishing Co. Lidl.: Naha City, Okinawa). HOFFMANN, С.К. 1874. Crustacés et Echinodermes de Madagascar et de l'ile de la Réunion. In Pollen, F.PL & Van Dam, D C. (eds), “Recherches fir 1а Fauna de Madagascar et de ses dépendances, рап 5, (EJ. Brill: Leiden). HOGUE, C.L. & BRIGHT, D.B, 1971, Observations on the biology of land crabs and their burrow associates on the Kenya coast Los Angeles County Natural History Museum, Contributions in Science 210: 1-10. HORIKAWA, Y. 1940, On crahs in Taiwan. Science in Taiwan 8(1): 21-31, KINGSLEY, 1.5. 1880. Carcinological Notes, No. 4. Synopsis of the Grapsidae. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia 32 187-224, KRAUSS, Е. 1843. 'Die Sidafrikanischen Crustaceen, Eine zusammenstellung aller bekannten Malacostraca, Bemerkungen über deren Leber- weise und geographische Verbreitung. nebst Ве- schrerbung und Abbildung mehrer neuen Arten (Stuttgart: E. Scheizerbart'sche Verlagsbuch- handlung). LENZ, H. 1905. Ostafrikanische Dekapoden und Stomatopoden. Gesammelt von Herrn Prof. Dr.A. Vaelizkow. Pp. 341-392. In Voeltzkow, A. (exl), “Wissenschafiliche Ergebnisse der Reisen an Madapaskar und Ostafrika in den Jahren 1889- 95. Vol. OL Abhandlungen hrsg. von der Senckenbergischen Naturforschenden Gesellschaft, Frankfurt a.M 27' LENZ. Н, & RICHTERS, Е, 1881. Beitrag zur Krus- taceenfauna von Madagascar, Abhandlungen hrsp. von der Senckenbergischen Naturforschen- 72 MEMOIRS DF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM det Gesellschaft, Frankfurt a.M 12: 421-428 |1- 8]. LIN, C.C. 1949. A catalogue of brachyurous Crustacea of Taiwan, Quarterly Journal of the Taiwan Museum 2(1): 10-33, MAN, J.G, DE 1880, On some species of the genus Sesarme Say and Cardisoma Law. Notes from the Leyden Museum 2(5): 21-36. 1887. Uebersicht der Indo-pacifischen Arten der Gattung Sesarma Say nebst einer Kritik der von W. Hess und E. Nauck in den Jahren 1865 und 1880 beschnebenen Decapaden, Zoologische Jahrbücher, Jena. (Abteilung für Systematik) 2: 639-689, 1889. Über einige neue oder seltene indopacifische Brachyuren. Zoologische Jahrbücher, Jena. (Ab- teilung für Systematik) 4: 409-552, 1890. Carcinological studies in the Leyden Museum. No 4, Notes from the Leyden Museum 12(13): 49-126. 1892, Decapoden des Indischen Archipels. Pp. 265- 527, In Weber, M. (ed.), ‘Zoologische Ergebnisse einer Reiser in Nierderlandisch Ost-Indien, 2”. 1895. Bericht über dic von herrn Schilfscapitiin Storm zu Atjeh, an den westlichen Küsten von Malakka, Borneo und Celebes sowie in der Java- See gesammelten Decapoden und Stomatopoden (Part 2). Zoologische Jahrbücher, Jena. (Ab- teilung für Systematik) 9; 75-218, 1929, Papers from Dr. Th. Mortensen's Pacific Ex- pedition 1914-1916. T, On a small collection of Decapoda, one of which, a Crangon, caught by the Danish Pacific Expedition at the Jolo Islands, is new to science. Videnskabelige Meddelelser fra Dansk Naturhistorisk Forening i Kobchayn 87: 105-134, MCCULLOCH, A.R. 1913. Studies in Australian Crustacea. No. 3, Records of the Australian Museum 9: 320-353. MIERS, EJ. 1379. Crustacea. The collections from Rodriguez. In ‘An account of the petrological. hatafical and zoological collections made in Kerguelen's Land and Rodriguez during the tran- sit of Venus Expeditions, carried ош by order of her Mayesty's Government in the Years 1874- 75°, Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London 165: 485-96, [1-12]. MILNE EDWARDS, А. 1868a, Description de quelques Crustacés nouveaux provenant des voyages de M. Alfred Grandidier à Zanzibar et à Madagascar, Nouvelles Archives du Muséum d'- Histoire Naturelle, Paris 4: 69-92. 1868b. Etudes zoologiques sur quelques Crustacés des iles Celebes provenant ..., envoi de M, Riedel, Nouvelles Archives du Muséum d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris 4: 173-185. 1869, Notes sur quelques nouvelles espéces du genre Sesarma (SAY). Nouvelles Archives du Muséum d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris 5; 25-31, 1873, Recherches sur la faune carcinologique de la Nouvelle-Calédonie. Deuxiéme Partie. Groupe des Cyclometopes Neptuniens, Nouvelles Ar- chives du Muséum d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris 9: 155-332. MILNE EDWARDS, Н, 1837. Histoire naturelle des Crustacés, comprenant l'anatomie, la physiologie et la classification de ces animaux. Volume 2, Atlas [1834, 1837, 1840]. (Paris). 1853. Mémoires sur la famille des Ocypodiens, suite, Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Paris Series 3 (Zoology), 20: 163-228, pls 6-11, A continuation of H. Milne Edwards, 1852, and reprinted with it in the undated Mélanges Car- cinologiques pp. 129-196. 1854, Notes sur quelques Crustacés nouveaux ou peu connus conservés dans la collection du Muséum d'Histoire naturelle. Archives du Muséum d'Histoire naturelle (Paris) 7: 145-192. MIYAKE, S. 1936. Report on the Brachyura of Riukiu Island collected by the Yaéyama Expeditions during the years 1932-1934, I. Notes ой a new and some rare crabs from Inomote-Shima. An- notationes Zoologicae Japonenses, Tokyo 15: 494-505, 1938. Notes on Decapod Crustacean collected by Prof, Teiso Esaki from Micronesia. Annotationes Zoologicac Japonenses, Tokyo 17(2): 107-112. NEILSON, М.Ј. & RICHARDS, G.N. 1989. Chemical composition of degrading mangrove leaf litter and changes produced by mangrove crab Neosar- mium smithi (Crustacea: Decapoda: Sesar- midae), Journal of Chemical Ecology 15(4); 1267-1283, NEILSON, M.J,, GIDDINS, R.L. & RICHARDS, GN, 1986, Effects of tannins on the palatability of mangrove leaves to the tropical sesamminid crah Neosarmatium smithi, Marine Ecology — Progress Series 34: 185-186. NG. P.KLL, & CHONG, S.S.C. 1986. The freshwater crabs and prawns of Pulau Tioman. Nature Malaysigina, Kuala Lumpur 11(3); 26-31, NOBILI, G. 1899, Contribuziani alla cognoscenza della Fauna Carcinologica della Papuasia, delle Molucche e dell’ Australia. Annali del Museo civico di storia naturale di Genova (2) 20: 230- 282. 1901. Crostacei di Pondichéry, Mahé, Bombay &c. Bollettino dei musei di zoologia e di anatomia comparata della R, Università di Torino 1 (452): 1-24, 1905, Decapodi e Isopodi della Nuova Guinea Tedesca, racolti dal Sign, L. Віго, Annales his- torico-Nalurales Musei Nationalis Hungarici. Budapest 3: 480-507, 1907, Richerche sui Crostacei della Polinesia, Decapodi, Stomatopodi, Anisopodi e Isopodi. Memorie della (Reale) Accademia delle Scienze di Torino Ser. 2, 57: 351-430 (1-80). ORTMANN, А. 14944. Crustaccen, In. Semon, R., ‘Zoologische Forshungreisen in Australien und dem Malayischen Archipel’. Denkschriften der REVISION OF NEOSARMATIUM 73 Medizinisch-Naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft zu Jena 8(1); 1-80. 1894b. Abtheilung: Brachyura (Brachyura genuina Boas), Ш. Unterabtheilung: Cancroidea, 2, Sec- lion: Cancrinea, 2. Gruppe: Catometopa, Die Decapoden-Krebse des Strassburger Muscums, mit besonderer Berücksichtigung der von Herrn Dr. Döderlein bei Japan und bei den Liu-Kiu-In- seln gesammelien und zur Zeit im Strassburger Museum aufbewahrten Formen, УШ. Theil Zoologische Jahrbücher, Abtheilung für Sys- lematik, Geographie und Biologie der Thiere 7: 683-772, PEREYRA LAGO, R. 1989. The larval development of the red mangrove crab Sesarma meinerti de Man (Brachyura: Grapsidae) reared in the laboratory. South African Journal of Zoology 24(3): 199-211. PFEFFER, G. 1889, Übersicht der von Herm Dr. Franz Stuhlmann an Agypten, auf Sansibar und dem gegenüberliegenden Festlande gesammelten Reptilien, Amphibien, Fische, Mollusken und Krebse. Mitteilungen aus dem Naturhistorischen Museum in Hamburg 6: 28-35. PILLAT, МК, 195], Decapoda (Brachyora) from Travancore. Bulletin of the Central Research In- stitute, University of Travancore, Series C Natural Sciences 2(1); 1-46. PINTO, M.L. 1984. Some ecological aspects of a com- munity of mangrove crabs occuring within the islets of Negombo Lagoon (Sri Lanka). Pp. 311- 330. In Soepadmo, E.. Rao, A.N. and Macintosh. D.J. (eds), "Proceedings of Ihe Asian Symposium on Mangrove Environment Research and Management, Kuala Lumpur 25-29 August 1980" (University of Malaya & UNESCO: Kuala Lumpur). RATHBUN, М.Ј. 1910, The Danish Expedition lo Siam 1899-1900, V. Brachyura, Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes, Selskabs Skrifter- Kjobenhavn 7(4); 301-68 (1-68), 1914, Scientific results of the Philippine Cruise of the Fishenes Steamer “Albatross”, 1907-1910. No. 31. New species of crabs of the families Grapsidac and Ocypodidac. Proceedings of the Чалей States National Museum, Washington 47; 69-85. ROBERTSON, A.J, 1991. Plant animal interactions and the structure and function of mangrove forest ecosystems. Australian Journal of Ecology 16: 433-443, ROBERTSON, А.І. & DANIEL, Р.А. 1989. The in- fluence of crabs on litter processing in high inter- tidal mangrove forests in tropical Australia, Occologia 34; 640-646, SAKAI, К. & YATSUZUKA, К. 1979, Notes on some Japanese and Chinese Helice with Helice (Helicana) n. subgen., including Helice (Helicang) japonica n, sp. (Crustacea: Decapoda). Senckenbergiana Biologica 60(5/6): 393-411. SAKAT, T, 1934. Brachyura from the coast of Kyushu, Japan. Scsence Reports of the Tokyo Bunrika Daigaku. Tokyo Sect. B., 1(25): 281-330, 1939. ‘Studies on the Crabs of Japan, IV. Brachyg- natha, Brachyrhyncha’ (Yokendo; Tokyo). 1976, “Crabs. of Japan and the Adjacent Seas” (Kodansha: Tokyo). SERENE, R, 1973. Notes sur quelques espèces de Brachyoures de Nouvelle-Calédonie, Cahiers du Pacifique 17: 119-161, 1975, Rediscovery of Neosarmatium Malabaeicum (Henderson, 1893) and Chiromanties Darwiner- sis Campbell, 1967. Spolia Zeylanica 350141): 1-16, 19779. Crustacés Hippidés сі Brachyoures des Ues Séchelles (27 parue). Revue de Zoulogie africaine 91(1): 45-68, 1977b. Crustacés Hippidés ct Brachyoures des ies Séchelles (17 partic). Revue de Zoologie africaine 01(3): 748-765, SERENE, R. & MOOSA, K. 1971. New and few known species of Brachyura from Ambon Marine Research in Indonesia 11: 1-18, SERENE, R, & SOH, C.L, 1970. New Indo-Pacific genera allied to Sesarma SAY 1817 (Brachyura, Decapüuda, Crustacea). Treubia 27(4): 387-416, 1971, On the species of Sarmatiunr DANA, 1851 (Decapoda, Brachyura}, Crustaceans 21(3); 237- 40 SMITH Ш, T.J, BOTO, K,G,, FRUSHER, S.D, & GIDDINS, RL. 1991, Keystone species and mangrove forest dynamics: the influence of bur- rowing by crabs on sojl nutrient status and forest productivity. Estuarine, Coastal and Marine Scienve 33; 419-432, | SOH, CL, 1978, On a collection of ѕеѕогтіпе crabs (Decapoda, Brachyura, Grapsidac) from Hong Kong. Memoirs of the Hong Kong Natural His- tory Society 13: 9-22. STEBBING, T.R.R. 1910. General catalogue of South African Crustacea (Part V of South African Crus- tacea, for the Marine Investigations in South Alrica). Annals of the South African Museum 6(4): 281-594. 1917а The Malacostraca of Durban Bay, Annals of the Durban Museum 1(5): 435-30, 1917h, The Malacostraca of Natal. Annals of the Durban Museum 2(1); 1-33. TESCH, 21, 1917, Synopsis of the genera Sesarma, Metasesarmu, and Clistocoeloma with à key 10 Ihe determination of the Indo-Pacific species. Zoilosische Mededeclingen. Leiden 3(2-3): 127-260. 1918, The Decapoda Brachyura of the Siboga-Ex- pedition. I, Hymenosomidae, Retroplumidac, Ocypodidae, Grapsidae, and Gecarcinidae., Siboga-Expeditic, Leiden Monograph 39c: l- 148, THALLWITZ, J, 189]. Decapoden-Studien in- sbesondere hasirt auf A.B.Mcyer's Sammlingen im Ostindischen Archipel, nebst einer aufzahling 74 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM der Decapoden und Stomatopoden des Dresdener Museums. Abhandlungen und Berichte des Kóniglischen Zoologischen und Anthropologisch-Ethnographischen Museums zu Dresden 1890-91(3): 1-55. TWEEDIE, M.W.F. 1936. On the crabs of the family Grapsidae in the collection of the Raffles Museum. Bulletin of the Raffles Museum, Sin- gapore 12: 44-70. 1940. New and interesting Malaysian species of Sesarma and Utica (Crustacea, Brachyura). Bul- letin of the Raffles Museum, Singapore 16: 88- 113. 1950a. A collection of crabs from Aor Island, South China Sea. Bulletin of the Raffles Museum, Sin- gapore 21: 83-96. 1950b. Grapsoid crabs from Labuan and Sarawak. Sarawak Museum Journal 5(2): 338-369. URITA, T. 1926. A checklist of Brachyura found in Kagoshima Prefecture, Japan. (Tsingtao: The Tsingtao Times). THE HUNTSMAN SPIDERS HETEROPODA LATREILLE AND YIINTHI GEN.NOV. (ARANEAE : HETEROPODIDAE) IN AUSTRALIA VALERIE TODD DAVIES Davies V. Todd, 1994 06 01: The huntsman spiders Heteropoda Latreille and Yilrthi gen.nov. (Araneae : Heteropodidae) in Australia. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1); 75-122, Brisbane, ISSN 0079-8835. Thirty-eight Heteropoda species are described, thirty-wo for the first time. Cosmopolitan Н. venatoria (Linnaeus) is described briefly and figured. Where possible the others are placed in one of five species groups. In order of description the procera group contains H, procera (L. Koch), Н. longipes (L. Koch) and H. binhaburra sp.nov. H. gordonensis sp.nov, 18 unassigned to a group. The bellendenker group includes new species, H. bellendenker and Н. mossman. The jugulans group comprises H. jugidans (L: Koch) and the following new species, Н. alta, Н. hillerae, Н. cooki, Н. nagarigoon, Н. holoventrls, Н, vespersa, H. warrumbungle, H. distincta, H. eurgella and Н. conwayensis. The cervina group comprises new species H. толгоеї, Н, goonaneman. Н. spurgeon, Н, bulburin, Н. acuta, Н. cervina (L.Koch) and further new species H. willungea, H. rundle, Н. monteithi, Н. crediton, Н. silvatica and H. coeloola. Н. raveni sp.nov. 15 unassigned to а group. The /iermiris group contains new species H. marillana, H, spenceri, Н. hermitis (Hogg) comb.nov., and further new species Н, cavernicola, Н. renibulbis, H. kalbarri and Н. grooteeylandt.Yiinthi gen.nov. is described with eight species in two groups. The spatAulü group contains Y. /усойех (Thorell) comb.noy., and new species Y. spathula, Y. chillagoe, Y. molloyensis and. Y. anzsesorum, The kadada group comprises the new species, Y, акаси, Y. gallonae and Y. torresiana.H. keyserlingi Hoge is а Junior synonym of H. cervina (L. Koch, 1875). Olius hernilixis iransferred to Heterepada thus O. hermitis = Н. hermitis (Hogg, 1914) comb. nov. H, fusciventris Chrysanthus is a junior synonym of H. Ivcodes Thorell = Yunrhi lveodes (Thorell, 1881) comb. nov. [| Araneae, Australian Heteropadidae, new taxa, Valerie Tadd Davies, Queensland Museum, PO Box 3300, South Brisbane, Queensland 3101, Australia; 7 May 1993. Heteropoda is very widespread with over 100 species (Roewer, 1954; Brignoli, 1983; Platnick, 1989). It is one of several heteropodid genera occurring in the Indo- Australian region; recently Hirst has published revisions of Pediana (1989), Isopeda (1990), Holconia (199 1a), Eodelena and Zachria (1991b) in Australia, Since the Australian species of Heteropoda were first described they have been revised by Simon (1880), Hogg (1902), and some by Jarvi (1912, 1914). Simon placed Sarores Sundevall into synonymy with Heteropoda and resolved the confusion that resulted from Koch (1875) describing Olios species in Hereropoda. Hogg revised the Australian heteropodids (sparassids) and described a new species, H. keyserlingi. The spiders are large and fast moving and are common throughout coastal and near coastal areas of the northern half of Australia. In Queensland they achieve some notoriety as they are often found in suburban houses. Their bite is of minor conse- quence, possibly leading to local or mild general symptoms in the bitten person. Throughout Australia, most Heteropoda species are found in temperate und tropical rainforests, however И. cervina is found in drier vine thickets as well and Н. jugulans is widely distributed in sclerophyll eucalypt forests; the “herwtitis’ species group is found in Western Australia and across northern Australia. The introduced species, Н. venatoria, is found along the northern and eastern coasts and on islands of the Great Barrier Reef. Arising from this study a new heteropodid genus, Yiinthi is recognised. Maps (Figs 18-20) show the distribu- tion of species so far as this 1s known, An index to species 15 given on p. 122. Rockhampton has been recorded as a locality for Heteropoda nobilis (Koch) and its junior synonym, Н. suspiciosa (Koch). d Sarotes nobilis Koch, ?holotype in ZMH (Rack, 1961) has been examined. Measurements and structure concur with the original description of {тот Upolu, Samoa. From files at ZMH the reverse side of the label with this spider indicated it was from Rockhampton (Godeffroy No.11009). As Rack (loc.cit.) suggests this is almost certainly a 76 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM mistake, 2 Saroies suspiciosus, Koch "syntype (ZMH) is without registration number or locality. Tt is the same species as © Sarores suspiciosus Koch from Upolu, Samoa in ZMB (No, 27010) and itis likely these are Koch's syntypes. Refer- ence to Rockhampton as a second locality by Koch (1875: 666) is regarded as a mistaken locality. The abdominal pattem and the epigynal structure of Н. nobilis are different from that found in any Australian Heteropoda sp. From the illustrations of H. sartrix (L. Koch, 1865) it ap- pears not to belong in Heteropoda. H. mindip- tanensis Chrysanthus, H. rubra Chrysanthus, H. afriventris Chrysanthus, Н. erythra Chrysanthus and H. saroroides Јагуі from Irian Jaya and Papua New Guinea have been examined; none has been found in Australia. MATERIALS AND METHODS Most of the material is lodged in the Queensland Museum (QM). For this study ‘mideastern’ Queensland is that area between latitudes 20°-25°S. ‘northeastern’ Queensland is to its north and ‘southeastern’ Queensland to its south; the Great Dividing Range roughly forms the western boundary of these arcas, All measure- ments are in millimetres and are based ироп ocular eyepiece measurements. Epigyni were ex- cised and cleared in lactic acid. A numeral preceding ¥ or ó in the lists of paratypes indicates more than one specimen, c.g. 2d, 29 indicates 2 males and 2 females. In notating spines, the number on femora, patellae and tibiae is always given in the same order - prolateral, dorsal, retrolateral and ventral (present only on tibiae and metatarsi); numbers only are given without punctuation, e.g. tibiae 1П 2026. Characters given in the generic diagnoses are for the most part not repeated in the species deserip- tions. Size classes. Female spiders are all large rang- ing between 8.0-25.0mm. Within this range the relatively small (8.0-13.9), medium (14.0-19,9) and large (20.0+) females are distinguished. Males of a species are usually smaller and may vary greatly in size. ABBREVIATIONS USED COLLECTORS: AE. Australian New Zealand Schools Exploration Society; AR, А. Rozefelds; CH, C. Horseman; DC, D. Cook; DJ, D. Joffe: DY, D. Yeates; EWQM, Earthwatch - Queensland Museum expedition; ОЛ, G.J. In- gram; GBM, G.B. Monteith; GT, G. Thompson; GVC, G.V. Czechura; HJ, Н. Janetzki; ЈС, J. Covacevich; JG, J. Gallon; KRM, K.R. Mc- Donald; LR, L. Roberts; NH, N. Hall; MG, M. Gray; PF, P. Filewood; RK, R. Kohout; RIM, RJ. McKay; RJR, R.J. Raven;;, RM, К. Monroe; SRM, S.R. Montcith: SVD, S. Van Dyck; VED, V.E. Davies. MORPHOLOGY: AL, abdomen length; AW. ab- domen width; CL, carapace length; CW, carapace width. ALE, anterior lateral eyes; AME, anterior median eyes; PLE, posterior lateral eyes, PME, posterior median eyes; MOQ, median ocular quadrangle; AR, anterior row: PR, posterior row. ALS, anterior (lateral) spinnerets; PMS, (posterior) median spinnerets; PLS, posterior (lateral) spinnerets. See text for abbreviations on scanning micrographs. Abbreviations for museums are given in the “Acknowledgements” section. SYSTEMATICS Family HETEROPODIDAE (SPARASSIDAE AUCT.) The heteropodids. commonly known as ‘huntsman spiders” are claw-tufted, 2-clawed spiders without cribellum or colulus. Most are laterigrade and the second pair of legs is the longest. The soft trilobate membrane distally on all metatarsi is the synapomorphy for the group; see Levy (1989: Fig. 1) for illustration. Metatarsi and tarsi with dense scopulae; tarsal claws pec- tinate in a single row; Ẹ palp with claw. Two rows of four eyes which reflect torch-light at night; the tapetum is covered with uniform pores in Heteropoda and Holconia. Chelicerae free with 2 rows of marginal teeth. Subfamily HETEROPODINAE Космет (1954) included two Australian genera, Heteropoda and — Pandercetes in the Heteropodinae; Hirst (1989) added Keilira. In all of these the embolus 1s uncoiled and the epigynum lacks a sclerotized rim. These charac- ters distinguish them from the Australian Eusparassinae (Holconia, Isopeda, Isopodella, Beregama, | Typostola, Zachria) and the Deleninae (Delena and Neosparassus) in which the embolus is in a stack of coils and the epigynum has a sclerotized lateral rim. Brignoli (1983) listed the Heteropodidae alphabetically as he was “unable to decide on the value of the traditionally accepted subfamilies”. Platnick NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS 77 FIG. 1. 2 A. jagulans, Brisbane. (1989) also lists the heteropodids alphabetically. Pandercetes is a grey-green tree-dwelling spider from northern Queensland rainforest and is easily distinguished from Heteropoda and Yiinthi gen.nov. by its colour and the lateral fringes of hair on the legs. Keilira is a small speckled spider from SE South Australia and SE Victoria, also easily distinguished from Hereropoda and Yiinthi gen.nov. Heteropoda and Yiinthi gen.nov. have а char- acteristic and similar colour pattern (Fig. 1). Cephalic region orange-brown with darker brown laterally and in eye region. Thoracic region orange-brown, а broad light-coloured band posteriorly which may extend laterally; small dark areas marginally, slightly anterior to each leg position; dark patch at anterior end of fovea and large dark crescent-shaped area around posterior end of fovea that spreads forwards to a variable extent; usually 4 pairs of dark lines radiating towards legs. Chelicerae brown with 3 longitudinal bands of hair. Legs brown, femora light coloured, tibiae orange-brown, metatarsi and tarsi often dark brown. Dorsal abdomen with 3 pairs of dark spots and broad open W or chevron of dark hair posteriorly; venter pattern variable, Carapace а little longer than wide, broadly pear- shaped. Thoracic region of carapace higher than cephalic region in females; regions usually level in males. Chelicerae with 3 teeth on promargin - middle tooth largest - and 4 teeth on retromargin with proximal tooth the smallest; a cluster of denticles (Fig. 3C) inside promarginals. Endites longer than wide with serrula; labium about as wide as от wider than long; sterium about as wide as long. Both rows of eyes recurved (with one exception); eye group about twice as wide as long; MOQ longer than wide, sometimes barely so. Median eyes smaller than laterals; AME smal- lest, closer to ALE than each other; PME closer to each other than to PLE. Clypeus usually about x2 AME (Fig. 11С), Second pair of legs always longest; first pair of legs usually second longest, though sometimes fourth pair is equal to or slight- ly longer than first. Tegulum of д palp varies in shape; embolus long; conductor membraneous, long; without median apophysis; d tibial apophysis well developed without dorsal ele- ment. Epigvnum consists of external lateral lobes and a median septum that varies in shape; internal insemination ducts arise (at gonopores) on either 7 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM side of septum and lead to spermathecae; short fertilization ducts connect with the uterus. MAIN TAXONOMIC CHARACTERS Ventral abdominal pattern, The trapezoid area between the epigastnc furrow and spinnerets may be pale, mottled but show no definable pattern, or have a constant darker pattern relieved by pale lines or lines of pale spots. Male palp. Shape of the tegulum, presence or absence of а tegular process and direction in which it points are considered. Origin of the embolus on the tegulum may be antero-, mid- or postero-retrolateral; embolus may be filiform or thick and have a flagellum. Origin and length of the tegular flange is diagnostic for some species, Conductor may taper to а роті or be spoon- shaped distally. Presence and position of "tooth" on tibial apophysis is noted. Epigynum. Insemination ducts may be narrow, wide, coiled or bag-like; if coiled the number of coils is usually diagnostic. When counting coils the looped apex formed by the duct before it runs back through the coils to the spermatheca is not counted. KEY TO GENERA © insemination ducts coil forward ane (oc- casionally reduced to 1A) or more times, fold back to run through centre of coil(s) to spermathecae. д embolus Jong and filiform а ig. ia ii oe аре: Heteropoda 9 wide short insemination ducts; loosely looped elongate spermathecac. ¢ long thick embolic structure with pars pendula and sub-terminal flagellum ............. Yiinthi Heteropoda Latreille, 1804 Heteropoda Latrielle, 1804: 135; Simon, 1880. 267: Hogg, 1902: 416; Jarvi, 1914: 197 [пес Koch, 1874, 1876]. Sarores Sundevall, 1833: 28 (type species Araneq regia Fabr.); C.L. Koch, 1837: 27; L. Koch, 1874: 494; L. Koch, 1876: 659; synonymy by Simon, 1880: 267. Ocypete C.L. Koch, 1836: 40 (type species Microm- mata setulosa Perty, 1833 = Н. venuloria), synonymy by Simon, 1880: 267, Ethilla Simon, 1874, p.267 (type species Elhilla variegata Simon, 1874); synonymy by Simon, 1880: 267. TYPE SPECIES Aranea venatoria Linnaeus by subsequent designation of Thorell (1870). DIAGNOSIS (Australian spp.) Thick membraneous conductor arises prolaterally on proximal tegulum and tapers to a point; it twists sa that inner edge becomes outer edge distally. Embolus, long and filiform arises retrolaterally on distal tegulum and curves down, across and forward to lic on outer edge of con- ductor. In most species insemination ducts coil forward one or more times then fold back to run through centres of coils to spermathecac. DESCRIPTION Dorsal abdomen with 3 pairs of dark spots and broad open W of dark hair posteriorly. Legs laterigrade, 2143 or 21=43. Scopulae on all metatarsi and tarsi. Tarsi short, less than a third as long as metatarsi, Spines usually present on femora, patellae, tibiae and metatarsi; none on tarsi. Femora I-II] almost always have 3 prolateral, 2 dorsal and 3 retrolateral spines (ab- breviated to°323° throughout), femora IV usually have only 1 retrolateral spine (321). Patellac I-IV have 1 prolateral, 0 dorsal, | retrolateral (101), occasionally a spine is absent. Tibial spines show more variation; in males there are 2 prolateral, 2 or 3 dorsal, 2 retrolateral and 6 (in pairs) ventral spines (22(3)26); in females there are usually 2 prolateral, 0 or 2 dorsal, 2 retrolateral and 6 ventral spines (20(2)26). Metatarsal spines are many and variable. Many trichobothria (Fig. 3A) in two lateral groups on proximal tibiae, dorsal and retrolateral metatarsi, and in 2-3 irregular, distally diverging rows on tarsi. Small tarsal organ (Fig. 3B) far forward on retrolateral face of tarsus near base of claw, Male palp (Fig. 2A-C, E-M). Sub-tegulum saucer-shaped. Proximal tegulum flat with prolateral flange, distal tegulum (referred to as "tegulum") bulbous with or without posterior prolateral process (tegular process). Membraneous conductor long and tapering to a point. Embolus, long and filiform, occasionally rounded or bifid al tip. Insemination ducts with between half a coil and seven coils before enter- ing spermathecae_ Spinnerets of Н. jugulans (Fig. 3D-1). ALS broader but shorter than PLS. ALS have two major ampullate gland spigots (Map) and many piriform spigots (pi) arranged in 2 groups, In the female the PMS have three anteromedian spigots (Fig. 3F-H), two of which are absent in the male NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS 79 embolus conductor tegular flange flagellum embolus median haematodocha sub-tegulum basal haematodocha conductor o ~ embolus | —- sperm duct K FIG . 2. A, Heteropoda venatoria; B, Н. procera; С, Н. jugulans; D, Yiinthi spathula; E, H. venatoria; F, Н. procera; G, Н. longipes; Н, Н. mossman; 1, H, bellendenker; J, Н. renibulbis; К, Н. jugulans; L, Н. cervina; M, Н. marillana. A-M, d palps (A-D, expanded; E-M, bulbs showing origin of embolus and course of sperm duct). 80 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM FIG. 3. Heteropoda jugulans. A, bothrium; B, tarsal organ; C, denticles between cheliceral teeth; D, 9 spinneret field; E, anterior spinnerets; F-H, median spinnerets; I, posterior spinnerets. NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS 81 and are presumably cylindrical gland spigots (cyl). The third spigot is also present in the д and is regarded as the minor ampullate gland spigot (map); a scar (? tartipore) is also present in this area in the male. An enlarged posterior spigot in the may also be a cylindrical gland, Other spigots varying in size are regarded as aciniform spigots; in the male these are uniform in size. The PLS have many aciniform spigots. KEY TO AUSTRALIAN HETEROPODA SPP. 1, Lateral lobes of $ epigynum closely apposed (Fig. 4A). д tegulum almost twice as long as wide; tapering posteriorly (Fig. 2B) ....... ПЕЕ ОЛИС ЕСИНЕ АТРО eigen venatoria Lateral lobes of 9 epigynum separated hy median septum (Figs 4L,6C). d tegulum OlherWis& rerni tte prete er 2 r2 ‚ 9 median septum flat or rounded; insemina- tion duct with 15-3 coils (Fig. 4D). d em- bolus arising posteriorly on tegulum (Fig. AE) 432. 8. Meet rete pen ze be I hallo li 3 9 median septum with longitudinal ridge (at least anteriorly) (Fig. 13G); insemination duct with 4 ог 314-7 coils. d embolus aris- ing anteriorly or antero-retrolaterally on tegulum (Fig. 2/)...................—... 31 3. 9 median septum short with narrow neck region (usually in concavity) broadening to transverse bar posteriorly (Fig. 4H). d without tegular process or postero-prolateral tegular bulge (Fig. 2G); short prolateral tegular panir about half as me as tegulum (Fig. 2B) . 610531 esr a dd ? medium septum long, шше: -like with slight narrowing of neck (not in concavity) (Fig. 6С). д with tegular process (Fig. 6E) or bulge postero-prolaterally (Fig. 9E) some- times reduced (Fig. 10A); long prolateral tegular flange almost as long as tégulum (Eig. ЖЕУ iab Бено ањ 9 4. Medium-large. ? insemination duct less than 1 coil. d tegular flange arising posteriorly and extending forward to half-way up tegulum; embolus tapering to tip; tibial apophysis tapering to point (Fig. 4E) ...... procera group- uui eevelener es tape tiia t nat d 5 Small-medium. 9 insemination duct Из-11% coils. d tegular flange arising mid-laterally and extending to anterior end of tegulum; 6. embolus with rounded or branched tip; tibial apophysis, flat distal blade (Fig. TB) .,...., 1 . 9 median septum evident (Fig. 4C\H). & tibial apophysis long, slender. No dorsal spines on d tibiae IV. ............. procera 9 median septum evident or barely so. & tibial apophysis short, stout. Two-3 dorsal spineson d tibiae IV ................... 6 Neck of median septum barely evident (Fig. AF). d tibial apophysis tapering to point (Fig. SF), Two dorsal spines d tibiae H1 ..... Qd Set hee eibi rn: longipes Neck of median septum clearly evident (Fig. AL), d tibial apophysis ending bluntly (Fig. 5H). Three dorsal spines ¢ tibiae III . I d. LAUR VA i-i scire Ae E rd bitinibufr . Medium size. Trapezoid area of venter brown with 2 pale paramedian stripes. 9 in- semination duct with l^ coil. Tegular flange normal width; embolus bifid (Fig. 4P); tibial apophysis without marked heel ............ а sate дєр ө Б Чї PS AZ gordonensis Small, Venter mottled, ? insemination duct 1-14 coils. Tegular flange broad giving ear- shaped appearance (Fig. 2H); embolus with rounded tip; tibial apophysis anvil-shaped with proximal heel (Fig. 7B), flat distal Жай „тз реле Е И Йе! ЖҮРҮ ө | bellendenker group oo. iiie ee eh . 9 insemination duct with one coil. d sperm duct with one main tegular loop before entering embolus (Fig. 21), tibial apophysis up-tumed attip .............. bellendenker 9 insemination duct with 110 coils. д sperm duct with second small loop before entering embolus (Fig. 2H); tibial apophysis down- тей аі tp. ЫЛ. eee mossman . 9 median septum clearly shorter than lateral lobes. d tibial apophysis without tooth... , jugulans groüp «i.e nn 10 9 median septum almost as long as or longer than lateral lobes (Fig. 11D). d tibial apophysis with tooth (Fig. 11Р) ......... . cervina group s: oroia acedda dhot 10. Trapezoid area of venter with dark V pattern (Fig. 6B). 9 insemination duct with 2-3 coils. д tegular process pointed in posterior direction (Fig. 2K) ...-.-..--e-eseee reel l 82 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM Trapezoid area of venter, pale, mottled (oc- casionally with V pattern) or dark with pat- tern of light spots. 2 insemination duct with less than 2 coils. d tegular process pointed in posterior or prolateral direction, blunt or reduced". с.а ыча kt Б enm te 12 11. 9 insemination duct with 2 coils (Fig. 6D). .,. АНИ ОНИ ИНИЛЕРИНЕ TT PRI Jugulans 9 insemination duct with 3 coils (Fig. 61) .... 12. Trapezoid area of venter pale or mottled ...13 Trapezoid area of venter dark with lwo pale longitudinal bands .... .. ааа. 18 13. Trapezoid area mottled. 3 tegular process pointed or low rounded prolateral bulge ...14 Trapezoid area pale. б tegular process, а postero-prolateral bulge or reduced .. ... 16 14. Medium size. Venter mottled with darker V pattern posteriorly, 2 insemination duct one coil. & tegular process pointing posteriorly (Big TH) t,o be 5, oe ten ee ants hillerae Medium-large. Venter without V pattern, © insemination duct. d tegulum with blunt process or rounded prolateral bulge 1-114 CGE 1355.47 0133: Ur tit Eso rur o 15. Large. 9 insemination ducts 1-114 coils, d tegular process directed ventro-prolaterally . . . verter ҮЛЕК ҮЛТҮ -. cooki Medium. insemination ducts one coil. d low rounded postero-prolateral tegular bulge (Fig. 9B) ..........-.... nagarigoon 16. 9 insemination duct 4 coil. 3 tegular process reduced to tiny prolateral bump (Fig. 9C); tibial apophysis distally bifurcate TPIS, SDD, mejne ne ao Ee hhi: pna holoventris $ insemination duct 115 coils (Fig. 8G). $ rounded postero-prolateral tegular bulge (Fig. 9E); tibial apophysis pointed ......., 17 17. Medium. Two dorsal spines d tibiae HL IV... . ::5 08 2 ARTE nr s , vespersa Large. Three dorsal spines d tibiae Ш, IV (9 unknown) ..............warrumbungle 18. Trapezoid area of venter with 2 pale ir- regular longitudinal bands (Fig. 8K). 9 in- semination duct with 115 coils. d tegular process pointed in ventro-prolateral direc- поп (Fig. 9G) ..............-... distincta Trapezoid area of venter with 2 pale stripes or lines of spots. 9 insemination duct with l^-] coil. & tegulum with or without rounded prolateral bulge 19, Trapezoid area with 2 short, thick median stripes. Sternum patterned (Fig. 8N). d tibia TH with | dorsal spine; rounded prolateral tegular bulge (Fig. 91). 2 neck of median septum narrow; insemination duct with 1 toll. (itia a ít eit tri eungella Trapezoid area with 2 lines of 2-7 white spots (Fig. 8Q). Sternum unpatterned. à tibia HIE with 2 dorsal spines: without tegular bulge (Fig. ТОА). ® neck of median septum gradually widening. triangular in shape: in- semination duct with 4 coil . CONWAVensis . д without pointed tegular process, with slight round bulge on postero-prolateral tegulum (Fig. 10C) (9 unknown) .......-.. ла Ross ga iai EIS, .monroel d with pointed tegular process ,..,...... 21 . 2 median septum almost as long as lateral lobes (Fig. SR); insemination duct with 1 coil. d tegular process pointing prolaterally (Fig. 10E); tibial apophysis broad, sharply truncated with marginal tooth on posterior corner (Fig. LOR). ............, goonaneman ? median septum as long as or longer than lateral lobes; insemination duct with 4-3 coils, d tegular process pointing prolateral- ly or posteriorly; tibial apophysis rounded distally with central or sub-marginal tooth ... Trapezoid arca of venter dark with two lon- gitudinal pale stripes or lines of spots. .... 25 ‚ 2 insemination duct 14 coils (Fig. 8U) (d nuknowb) : 21:51: 040305 ka spurgeon 9 insemination duct less than 1 coil ...... 24 . 2 median septum extending to lateral lobes; insemination duct loose 34 coil (Fig. 8W). d libial apophysis distally bifid with tooth on posterior branch (Fig. 10H) ........:..:. 9 median septum extending beyond lateral lobes; insemination duct tight V coil (Fig. 11B). d tibial apophysis rounded distally 26, 29. 30, 31. NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS with sub-dista] tooth on posterior edge (Fig. Юз. ioci dee М-ы irm lenire ert e acuta . d tegular apophysis pointed in ventro- prolateral direction; tibial apophysis with large central tooth (Fig. 11Р) ............ 26 & tegular apophysis pointed in posterior direction; tibial apophysis with smaller posterior, sub-marginal tooth (Fig. 121). .. 29 Large. 2 insemination duct with 1-1/2 coils. d tibia IIT, 3(2) dorsal spines. Embolus reaching three-quarter length of conductor ... Small-medium. 9 insemination duct with 2- 3 coils. d tibia IIT, 2 dorsal spines, Embolus reaching almost to end of conductor . 9 median septum width: length, 1:3; insemi- nation duct with 11/2 coils, tight apical fold (Tig. LIEY аар eet ee А cervina 9 median septum width: length, 1:2; insemi- nation duct with 1 coil, loose apical fold (Fig. 11H) . ., Willunga . 9 insemination duct with 2 coils (Fig. 11J) . SJARiIThirfsieiiflisdgt.1irt3. rangle 9 insemination duct with 3 coils (Fig. 11L) . iiliakiadiaiiagiaólaiiqdiafi e monteithi Large. ? median septum extending 10 lateral lobes; insemination duct 3 coils (Fig. 11Q). Sperm duct with small coil before entering embolus. ar горай beats i creditor Medium size. ? median septum extending beyond lateral lobes; insemination duct with less than 3 coils. Sperm duct without coil before entering embolus ...............40 9 insemination duct with 2 loose coils and tight apical fold (Fig. 117). £ tegulum about as wide as long ............. silvatica 9 insemination duct with | coil and loose apical fold (Fig. 11N). д tegulum visibly longer than wide (Fig. 14А) ....... cooloola Clypeus more than X 2 AME (Fig. 13C). MOQ as wide as long. Legs 2413, 9 insemi- nation ducts l^ coil (Ó unknown) .... raveni Clypeus less than X 2 AME. MOQ slightly longer than wide. Legs 2143 or 21243. 9 in- semination ducts 315-7 coils ............. hermitis @тойр................,..,.-.32 32. Small, round, distal tegulum (Fig. 13F); 33. tibial apophysis forming about 45° angle with axis of cymbium; distal hook on posterior edge of apophysis (9 unknown) ... . sls н pa At s eii ne dre marillana Kidney-shaped, oval tegulum (Fig. 14C); tibial apophysis forming smaller angle with axis of cymbium, without hook on apopliysis: эгели: gani lers tid ә ә 9 median septum with short broad anterior ridge; insemination duct with 314 coils ... 34 9 median septum with longer ridge reaching at least half-way (Fig. 15А); insemination duct with 5 or more coils ............... 36 . 9 median septum heart-shaped narrowing postenorly (Fig. 13D) (d unknown) ........ «e 2 «je elfe ew foe wee ele wwe cate v alle o ta spenceri 9 median septum not heart-shaped, as wide or wider posteriorly ...................35 . 9 median septum as long as lateral lobes (Fig. 33D. 1..a 2:314 hermitis 9 median septum shorter than lateral lobes (Fig. 13G) (d unknown) ....... cavernicola 36. Ridge on median septum running about half length of septum; 6-7 coils in insemination BUCIE dheri shite а dgh renibulbis Ridge on median septum running length of septum; 5 coils in insemination ducts .....37 37. Median septum broadening in middle, shorter than lateral lobes (Fig. 15А)(& un- КИЕМ x... aluit dmm. ee Ie t kalbarri Median septum more or less parallel-sided, longer than lateral lobes (Fig. 15C)(d un- Kiwi) exiiqriaiis eter xe grooreeylandt Heteropoda venatoria (Linnaeus, 1767) (Figs 2A,E; 4A,B; 5A,B; 18) Aranea venatoria Linnaeus, 1767: 1035. Aranea regia Fabricius, 1793: 408. Heteropoda venatoria: Latreille, 1804: 135; Simon, 1880: 268; Bonnet, 1957: 2196. Micrommata setulosa Perty, 1833: 195. Olios leucosius Walckenaer, 1837: 566. MATERIAL EXAMINED Spiders from Brisbane, Rockhampton, Townsville, Heron L, North West Islet, Thursday I., (Queensland); Balmoral (New South Wales); Darwin (Northern Ter- 83 84 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM a ЕРАНИ ah ай " ү H i E FIG. 4. A,B, Heteropoda venatoria; C-E, H-K, H. procera (C,D paratype; H, I, Brisbane; J,K, Gibraltar Ra.); FG, Н. longipes, L,M, Н. binnaburra; N-P, H. gordonensis; Q-R, Н. bellendenker, S-T, Н. mossman. A-D, F-O, Q-T, external and internal epigyna; E, d palp; P, d embolus. NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS 85 гипгу); Cocos Keeling Is and Christmas I (Indian Ocean). DIAGNOSIS Large spiders. Dorsal abdomen with dark medial band anteriorly; venter yellow-brown without pattern or with 2 fine paramedial brown lines. Clypeus with marked band of white hairs. Cymbium of male usually with spine on prolateral edge of alveolus. Tegulum twice as long as wide; embolus filiform; sheath-like con- ductor arising on distal half of prolateral tegulum, prolateral flange of tegulum broad and short, unattached to tegulum distally; tibial apophysis short, distally indented (Fig. 5A,B). Lateral lobes of epigynum touching medially; insemination ducts coiled dorsally (rather than anteriorly) with 114 coils (Fig. 4A,B). DESCRIPTION Male: Carapace length about 8mm, Spination: femora I-H 323, III 333, IV 331; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae I, П 2326, IIT, IV 2226, Female: Carapace length about 10mm. Spina- tion femora I, 11322, 1333, ТУ 331; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae 1-TV 2026. DISTRIBUTION Pantropical; in coastal areas of Australia and on Great Barrier Reef islands (Fig. 18). REMARKS Further figures of H. venatoria are given in Chrysanthus (1965). Details of synonymy are given in Bonnet (1957) and Roewer (1954). THE PROCERA GROUP Medium to large spiders, Venter pale or with posterior mottling. MOQ longer than wide; clypeus a little longer than AME. Three dorsal spines on femora UT and IV. Smooth, rounded tegulum without process or bulge; short wide prolateral tegular flange about half as long as tegulum; tibial apophysis smooth, without Чоо", Short 2 median septum with narrow to barely evident anterior region, broadening to transverse bar; insemination ducts less than one coil. Heteropoda procera (L. Koch), H. fongipes (L. Koch), Н, binnaburra sp.nov. Heteropoda procera (L, Koch, 1867) (Figs 2B,F; 4C-E, H-K; 5C,D; 19A) Oeypete procera L, Koch, 1867: 205. Sarotes procerus; L. Koch, 1875: 660, 667. Heteropoda procera: Simon, 1880: 270; Hogg, 1902: 416. TYPE MATERIAL Ocypete procera. The holotype & from Brisbane, was not Jocated in the Naturhistorisches Museum, Vienna. However the d Sarotes procerus, as re-described by Koch (1875), which has almost identical measure- ments to those ascribed to the holotype was examined: d, Bowen, BMNH1915.3.5.6467. This locality is questioned (see later remarks) and the specimen is regarded as the probable holotype from Brisbane. 9 Ocypete procera paratype, Brisbane, Godeffrov No. 2262, ZMH. OTHER MATERIAL EXAMINED Southeastern Queensland: д, Brisbane, QMD15015; 9, Mt Archer, Kilcoy, QMS15095; с, Gold Ck, Brookfield, QMS15073; ©, Hidden Valley Plantation, Beerwah, QMS15096; d, Teviot Brook, QMS15049; 2 d, Casey Ck via Imbil, QMS15102; ¢, Booloumba Ck, QMS15098; d, Boyce Reserve, Toowoomba, 0М515104: 9, QMS15100; 2, Eumundi, QMS15053. 2, Bunya Mts National Park, QMS 15 106; 20 d, 19 9, Dandabah, Bunya Mts National Park, ОМ515110; Z, Closebum, QMS15052; 2, Cooloola, 0М515099; 2 9, Kilcoy Ck, QMS15094; 2 d, $, Daves Ck Country, Lamington National Park, QMS15109, 3, O'Reillys, QMS15045, ?, Mt Glorious, QMS15060; 2, QMS15088; 8, QMS15086; d, OMSISSO04. 9. Mt Tamborine, QMS21001; 3, QMS15050; 3, North Stradbroke Is, Point Lookout, 0М515090; c, Slipping Sands, QMS15047; 3, Con- ondale Range, QMS15051: д Cunninghams Gap, QMS15048. Mideastern Queensland: 9, Kroormbit Tops State Forest, QMS15093; d, 9, Beauty Spot, QMS15078, 9. Three Moon Ck, 0М515071; d, QMS15072; 3d, Beauty Spot, QMS15092: 8, 9, QMS15083; ©, QMS§15055; 9, QMS15070, 8, QMS15054; 2, Kroombit Crossing, QMS15079, d, Bulburin State Forest, QMS15075. New South Wales: 9. Gibraltar Ra., QMS15076. DIAGNOSIS Medium to large. Trapezoid area of venter pale without mottling. Tegulum almost as wide as long; tibial apophysis smooth, slender, Anterior median septum of epigynum narrow, clearly evi- dent. 86 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM 2, = = © UM in - D E - ш Г - in > = © © a E Е - FIG. 5. A,B, Heteropoda venatoria, C,D, Н. procera; E,F, Н. longipes, G,H, Н. binnaburra; 1, Н. gordonensis. A-I, d. palps and tibial apophyses. NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS 87 DESCRIPTION Male (presumed holotype): CL 8.0, CW 7.6, AL 9.0, AW 5.3. Spination: femora I, II 323, III 333, IV 331, patellae 1-Ш 101, IV 001; tibiae I, II 2326, Ш 2226, IV 2026. d palp (Figs 4E; 5C.D). Variation: Dorsal tibial spines on males from Kroombit Tops were erratic IIT 2(3), IV 1(2). Female (paratype): CL 9.2, CW 8.3, AL 12.7, AW 8.0. Spination: femora 1, П 323, Ш 333, IV 331; patellae I, П 101, IH 001, IV 000; tibiae I, IH, IV 2026, H 2126. Epigynum (Fig. 4C,D,H,1): insemination duct with half a coil. Variation: depth of the transverse bar of the median septum varied between females from different localities. Those from the Gibraltar Range, N.S.W. (Fig. 4J, K) may warrant à new species when the & is described. REMARKS Originally Koch (1867) described a male and female from Brisbane. In redescribing the species, Koch (1875) did not assign his male or female to a specific locality. The male, described before the female, is presumed to be from Bowen, the first locality that Koch (1875) mentioned, Measurements of the male given by Koch (1867, holotype) and Koch (1875, given in brackets) agree remarkably closely: CL, 8(8); leg I, 44(44); leg П, 50(50); leg Ш, 38(37.5); leg IV, 37(38); they also agree fairly closely with measurements (by RJR) of palp and legs of the presumed holotype (8.08, 41.83, 49.97, 36.66, 39.95). The spination of the femora, patellae and tibiae, agrec exactly with that described by Koch (1867). Therefore, it is presumed that the BMNH male is the holotype and that the locality label in the vial is incorrect; it should be Brisbane. This view is supported by the absence of H. procera in collec- tions north of Bulburin State Forest, 24?31'8, 151°29°E (Fig. 19A). Heteropoda longipes (L. Koch, 1875) (Figs 2G; 4F,G; 5E,F; 18) Sarotes longipes L. Koch, 1875: 659, 660. Hereropoda longipes: Simon, 1880: 269; Strand, 1907: 464. TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE d, Sydney, New South Wales, Koch coll. BMNHI915.3.5.6463. Koch (1875: 662) stated that his material came from the Bradley Collection. OTHER MATERIAL New South Wales: d, 9, Lindfield, Sydney, AMKS15769; 9, Bondi, Sydney. AMKS15762; d, Clifton Gardens, Sydney, AMKS15764; 9, Lon- gueville, AMKS15765; 29,5, O'Sullivan's Gap, SAMAN1990328-30; 2, Camboyne Cave, KSS-C4, AMKS803; 3. Camai Bat Cave, KS5, 80km W of Kempsey, AMKS804; d, Kiwarrak State Forest nr Taree, AMKS6308; 9, Watagan State Forest nr Mor- risset, AMKS8957; d, MacGrath 1, Myall Lakes, AMKS15763; d, Upper Missabotti nr Bowraville, AMKS16299; 3, Avoca, AMKS19620. DIAGNOSIS Pale venter with posterior mottling. Tegulum slightly wider than long; tibial apophysis short, stout with curved tapered tip (Fig. SE.F). Anterior median septum of epigynum barely evident. leav- ing only transverse bar (Fig. 4F,G). DESCRIPTION Male (Lindfield): CL 8.0, CW 7.8, AL 8.8, AW 6.3, Holotype: CL 7.5, AL 8.0. Spination: femora I, П 323, ПІ 333, IV 331: patellae І-І 101, IV 000; tibiae 1-11 22(3)26, IV 2126. Female (Lindfield): CL 8.3, CW 7.5, AL 10.0, AW 6.0, Spination: femora 1, 11 323, 11 333, IV 331; patellae 1-1 101, IV 100; tibiae I, IV 2026; T, IIT 2126. Epigynum: insemination duct less than one сон. REMARKS Strand's (1907) male H. longipes was in the Stuttgart Collections that were destroyed. Heteropoda binnaburra sp.nov. (Figs 4L,M; 5G,H; 19A) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: d, Binna Burra, Lamington Nal. Pk, southeastern Queensland, 28"]2'S, 153°117Е, 27 30.11.1976, RJR. VED, QMS 15074. PARATYPES: Southeastern Queensland: Lamingten National Park: 9, Binna Burra, 27-30.11.1976, RJR, VED, QMS13077; 2 d, same data, QMS15062; 3 ¥, 0М821002: 2 9, QMS15061: 2 d, Nagarigoon, 8.iv.1976, RJR, VED, M. Bishop, QMS15064. 3 7, same data, QMS15065; 3 9, QMS15063; 2 2, QMS15043; d, O'Reilly's, 28°1475, 153"08'E, 1.х1.1989, RJR, QMSI6519; 2, Mt Hobwee, 8.1v.1976, RJR, VED, QMS15085; 2, Binna Burra, 18.v,1983, D. Court, QMS15082. Mt Tamborine: 2, viii, 1974, VED, QMS15059; Z, 10.vii.1974, VED, QMS15087, à, Rathdowney, 28°13'S, 152°52°E, xi1.1975, C. Corben, QMS 15044, 9 , The Head, Killar- 88 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM ney, 21718 S, 151°26'Е, iii-iv.1975, СВМ. SRM, QMS15057. Northern New South Wales: с, Stotts 1., Tweed R., 28°16"S, 153°30°E, 17-19.xi.1978, JC, GVC, RJR, QMS15081; д 9, Richmond Ra. State Forest, 28°27°S, 152°20'E, 17-18.iv,1976, RJR, QMS15067; d, Whian Whian State Forest, 28°38'S, 153°19’E, 9-12.ix.1976, RJR, QMS15046; 9, Cherry Tree, Malanganec, 28°54'S, 152°43°E, GBM, QMS15058; 9, Victoria Park via Alstonville, 28°50'S, 153°26'E, 26.viii.1974-23.iii,1975, GBM, SRM, QMS15105; 2, Brindle Ck, Wiangarie State Forest, 28?38'S, 152"58'E, 27.xii.1974-23.ii1.1975, GBM, SRM, QMS15108. OTHER MATERIAL Northern New Sonth Wales: 2, Bruxner Pk, Orara East State Forest, Coffs Harbour, SAMAN 1990334; 9, Brunswick Heads, SAMAN 1990335. ETYMOLOGY From the type locality, Binna Burra, Lamington National Park, DIAGNOSIS Large. Trapezoid area of venter pale. Three dorsal spines on d tibiae IH. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 9.2, CW 8.4. AL 10.0, AW 6.2. Spination: femora 1, П 323, HI 333, IV 331; patellae LII 101, IV 001; tibiae І-Ш 2326, IV 22(1)26, д palp: tibial apophysis short, thick with bulge on anterior edge, blunt tip (Fig. 5G,H). Female; CL 10.0, CW 9.5, AL 14.4, AW 9.0. Spination: femora I, I] 323, III 332, IV 33]; patellae 1-ПІ 101, IV 000; tibiae 1-1 2126, IV 20(1)26, Epigynum: insemination duct with about half a coil (Fig. 4L, M). AN UNASSIGNED SPECIES Heteropoda gordonensis sp.nov. (Figs 4N-P; 51; 19A) TYPE MATERIAL. HOLOTYPE: б, Gordon Ck, Iron Range, northeastern Queensland, 12?44'S, 143" V7 E, 24-30, vi, 1976, VED, RJR, РЕ, 9М515191. PARATYPES: ©, same data as holotype, 0М515192; 85,79, QMS14815; d, 9, Leo Ck nr Coen, 13°33’S, 143°28'Е, 1-17.viii,1978, СУС, SVD, QMS14812; 54,59. LeoCk nr Coen, 26.vii. 1976, PF, QMS14814; 2d, Rocky Scrub, Leo Ck Rd, 17.11.1979, KRM, QMS14813. ETYMOLOGY From the type locality, Gordon Creek, Iron Range. DIAGNOSIS Small-medium size. Trapezoid area pale brown with 2 pale paramedial stripes. Tegulum longer than wide, without process; flange arising mid- prolaterally; embolus tapering with short blunt sub-distal branch (Fig. 4P); conductor broad with short stalk. Tibial apophysis flat, scythe-like. Very short, wide insemination ducts. Clypeus à little longer than AME. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 6.3, CW 5.8, AL 5.8, AW 3.5. Legs 2143. Spination: femora I-ITI 323, IEY 321; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae I, 112326, Ш 2226, IEV 21(2)26. & palp (Fig. 51). Female: CL 6.8, CW 6,1, AL 7,7, AW 5.1. Spination: femora I-III 323, IV 321; patellae 1-ТУ 001; tibiae I-IV 2026. Epigynum: median seplum with deep transverse bar, much shorter than lateral lobes (Fig. 4N,O). THE BELLENDENKER GROUP Small spiders. Venter mottled, legs 2413. MOQ slightly longer than wide. Clypeus a little longer than AME, Broad tegular flange giving ear- shaped appearance; without tegular process, Em- bolus arising postero-retrolaterally, long, filiform, thickening slightly distally to knob-like tip, Anvil-shaped tibial apophysis. Epigynum with short median septum broadening to transverse bar; insemination ducts with 1-11 coils Heteropoda bellendenker sp.nov., Н. mossman sp.nov, Heteropoda bellendenker sp.nov. (Figs 21; 4Q,R; 7A,B,J; 19А) ТҮРЕ MATERIAL HororvPE. d, Mt Bellenden Ker, northeastern Queensland, 17°16'S, 145?5] E, 500m, 1-7 xi.1981, EWOM, QMS15193. PARATYPES: Mt Bellenden Ker: 9, 1054m, 25- 31x. 1981, VED, EWOM, QMS14707; 4, 500m, 17- 24.%.1981, EWOM, QMS14727; 3 d, 1054m, 17-24.х.1981, EWQM, QMSI4718; 2, d, 25- 31.3.1981, VED, EWQM, QMS14708; Other localities: 9. Emerald Ck, Lamb Ra., 17"03'S, 145°32'E, 11.x.1982, GBM, DY, GT, QMS14711;3 е, Mt Edith, 17°06’S, 145°37’E, 11,x.1982, GBM, NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS 89 FIG. 6. A-G, Heteropoda jugulans; H,l, H. alta; J,K, H. hillerae; L,M, Н. cooki. A, dorsal view; B, ventral abdomen; C,D, H-M,external and internal epigyna; Е, $ palp; F,G, embolus and conductor. 90 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM DY, GT, QMS14704; ?, Mt Edith, 1050m, 12 x. 1982, GBM, DY, GT, QMS14716;3 2, Malaan State Forest, 17°36°S, 145?36'E, 20-24.iv,1978, VED, RJR, QMS14712; 6 d, 2 9, Major's Mountain, 17^38'S, 145?32'E, 14-20.iv.1978, VED, RJR, QMS14079; d, 2 $, Mt Fisher, 17°33'S, 145°33'Е, 27-29.iv.1982, GBM, DY, DC,QMS14713; 4, Boulder Ck, via Tully, 17752'S, 145^55'E, 500-600m, 24-27.х,1983, СВМ, DY, СТ, QMS14710. All in northeastern Queensland. ETYMOLOGY From the type locality, Mt Bellenden Ker. DIAGNOSIS Small. Tibial apophysis with upturned tip; sperm duct with single loop (as seen on tegulum, Fig. 21), ? insemination ducts with one coil. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 4.9, CW 4.4, AL 5.2, AW 3.1. Dorsal abdomen with red-brown mottling with dark shoulder patches and W posteriorly. Spination: femora 1-11 323, JY 321; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae I, П 2326, Ш, IV 2226. & palp (Fig. 7A.B): embolus with knob-like tip (Fig. 7J); broad tegular flange giving ear-like appearance, tibial apophysis slender, curving anvil-shaped with thin, flat upturned tip. Female: CL 5.4, CW 4.8, AL 5.4, AW 3,1, Colour: generally darker and less distinctly pat- terned than male. Spination: femora I-II 323, IV 321; patellae 1-1У 001; tibiae I-IV 2026. Epigynum (Fig. 40,8): short, median septum, indeed posteriorly; insemination duct with one coil. REMARKS H. bellendenkeris found in higher altitude rain- forests of northeastern Queensland, As wellas the listed localities it has been collected from the Cardwell (17?48'S, 145"38' E) and Kirrama Ran- ges (18°06'S, 145°51°E) and from Mt Graham (18?24^ S, 145"52 E), Heteropoda mossman sp.nov. (Figs 2H; 48,1; 7C,D; 19A) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: d , Bluff Track. 5-10 km W of Mossman, north Queensland, 16°28'S, 145"23'E, 760m, 20.xii, 1989-15.1. 1990, GBM, GT, AE, QMS21004. PARATYPES: ©, З same dala QMS21005;3 d', 1000m, OMS21006; d, 480m, QMS21009; 2 4, 360m, QMS21010; 9, 250m, 0М821011. d; Creck Camp, near McLeod, Windsor Tableland, 16^ 15*S, 145?05 E, 26-27.xii. 1980, AE, QMS14717; ?, North Bell Peak, 17°05'S, 145"53'B, 15-16.1х.1981, GBM, DC, QMS 14719; 3, Windsor Tableland, NNW of Mt Car- bine, 25-26.1у.1982, GBM, DY, DC, QMS14705; d, 2 9, Mt Hartley, c. 490m, 6.xi.1974, JC, DJ, VED, QMS14706; $, Home Rule nr Helenvale, 15°42'S, 145?13'E, 5.xi.1974, DJ, VED, QMS14715: d, Mt. Finnigan, 15?49'S, 145?17'S, 980-1130m, 9.xi.1974, LR, JC, KRM, VED, QMS14714; Mt Finnigan, 14.х11.90-17.1.1991, QM/AE: 9, 940m, QMS21013; 9, 1060m, QMS21014; d, Thornton Pk, 16?05'S, 145^23' E, xi.1975, MG, AMKSS267. All in north- eastern Queensland. ETYMOLOGY From the type locality, Mossman, DIAGNOSIS Small. Tibial apophysis with flat obtuse tip slightly down-tumed; a second small loop in sperm duct before entering embolus (Fig. 2H). ? insemination ducts with 112 coils, DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 4.0, CW 3.6, AL 4.2, AW 2,4, Colour: similar to H. bellendenker, Spina- tion: femora 1-Ш 323, IV 321; patellae 1 101, ПТУ 001; tibiae IIV 2326, 3 palp (Fig. 7C,D): tegulum similar to H. bellendenker; ubial apophysis slender, flat with slightly down-turned blunt tip. Female: CL 4.9, CW 4.4, AL 6.3, AW 44. Dorsal abdomen darker than male, closely mot- ued. Venter mottled with dark У posteriorly, Spination: femora 1-11 323, IV 321; patellae I-IV 001; tibiae 1-11 2026, IV 2126. Epigynum (Fig. 4S, T): similar to Н. bellendenker but 11» coils in insemination ducts. THE JUGULANS GROUP Small-large. Venter pattern variable. MOQ longer than wide. d tegulum longer than wide; tegular flange as long as tegulum. Tegular process pointed, rounded or reduced. Tibial apophysis without ‘tooth’. 9 median septum of epigynum tongue-like shorter than lateral lobes. Insemination ducts with 14-3 coils. Heteropoda jugulans (L. Koch) and the follow- ing new species, H. alra, Н. hillerae, Н. cooki, Н. nagarigoon, Н. holoventris, H. vespersa, Н. war- rumbungle, H. distincta, H. eungella and H. con- wayensis. NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS 91 + co © m m © © m a М © © = = =ч mm2OGkU 232E1 8828706 HA imm200kU 550Е1 0009700 HHI BkU 63GEi 8029700 Н FIG. 7. A,B, J, Heteropoda bellendenker; C,D, Н. mosssman; E, Н. Jugulans; F,G, Н. alta; НІ, H. hillerae. А-1, d palps and tibial apophyses; J, tip of embolus. 92 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM Heteropoda jugulans (L. Koch, 1876) (Figs 1: 2C,K; 3A-I; 6A-G; 7E; 18) Sarees jugulans L. Koch, 1876: 852. Heteropoda jugulans; Simon, 1880: 269; Hogg, 1992: 416; Rainbow; 1911: 240, TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: d , Peak Downs, mid-eastern Queensland 22°56'5, 148"05' E, ZMH (Godeffroy No, 14635). PARATYPE: d, Peak Downs, BMNH15.3.5.6462, Godeffroy collection. OTHER MATERIAL Southeastern Queensland: Brisbane, 2, Mt Gravatt, QMS14844; 2, Banyo, QMS14849; 2 d, Fig Tree Pocket, ОМ514877; d, QMS14846; 3 d. Alderley, QMS14876; 2 d, The Gap, QMS14847; 2, Mt Coot- tha, QM5 14893. Mideastern Queensland: 2 $, Brandy Ck, QMS 14848; 9, Mt Dryander, AMKS7356. North- eastern Queensland: d, Shiptons Flat, QMS21018; 3 d, 11 9, QMS21019; 9?, d, Cape Tribulation, 0М514046; 9, Townsville, SAMANI990341; $, Hinchinbrook l., AMKS19551. DIAGNOSIS Large. Venter pale brown with darker V pat- tern, sometimes indistinct in males. Tegulum with postenorly directed acute process; tibial apophysis broad with slightly hooked tip posteriorly. Epigynum with tongue-like median septum shorter than lateral lobes; insemination duct with 2 coils. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 9.3, CW 8.4, AL 9.5, AW 5.5. Venter pale with narrow faint brown V. Spination: femora 1-Ш 323, IV 321; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae I, IV 2226, IL Ш 2326. & palp (Figs 65-8: 7E). The paratype is a little smaller with similar spination. In d д from Brisbane and other localities dorsal spination of tibiae IV varies from 2-3. Female (Brisbane, Fig. 6A,B): CL 11.7, CW 10.4, AL 15.0, AW 9.6. Venter light brown with darker V pattern, Spination: femora 1-1П 323, IV 321; patellae Т-ТУ 101, tibiae 1, П 2026, III 2126, IV 2226. Epigynum (Fig, 6C.D): insemination duct with 2 coils. REMARKS H. jugulans has been collected from coastal forests and wet sclerophyll forests from Brisbane to Shiptons Flat, north Queensland (Fig.18), No fresh material has been collected from the type locality, Peak Downs, which is much changed through mining and grazing. Heteropoda alta sp.nov. (Figs 6H,I; 7F,G; 19B) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: d, Mt Molloy, north Queensland, 16^41'S, 145°20°E, 1974, P. & Е. Little, QMS21021. PaRATYPES: 2, Bakers Blue Mt., 800-1000m, 17km W of Mt Molloy, 30.хії,1989-9.1.90, AE, QMS21022; 2, same data, QMS21023; d, juvs, Mt Molloy, 1974, P. & Е. Little; QMS21024; 2, Boonjee, 17°24'S, 145°44'E, 700m, 8.xii.1988, GBM, GT, QMS15267: 2, Douglas Ck, Lamb Ra., 17?06'5, 145°30°E, 700m, 12.x.1982, GBM, DY, GT, QMS14914; 9, Broad- water Pk, 35km NW Ingham, 18"39'S, 146" I0' E, 60m, 16.xii. (986, GBM, GT, S. Hamlet, QMS15268; 2, 3km S Mt Spurgeon, 16?26'S, 145^12"E, 1 100m, 20- 21.xii. 1988, GBM, GT, QMS15257; 9? , Devils Thumb Track, 16?27'S, 145*16'E, 100-600m, 26.xi:.1989, AE, QMS21025; 9, Tully, 17°57'S, 145"55'E, 17.v,1968, J. Cann, AMKS19526; 4, 2, Herberton, 17?23'S, 1435?23' E, 1951, J.G. Brooks, АМК 19527; 9, Babinda, 17°21°S, 145?56 E, J.G, Brooks, 1951, AMKS19536; 2, Mt Surprise, Undara, Michaels Cave, 18?09'S, 144"]9"E, 16.1.1989, Е.С. Howarth, AMKS22430; 9, Kuranda, 16°49'S, 145°38'E, 15.11.1950, A,N. Burns, VMK-3004; 2 2, Longland Gap, Atherton-Herberton Rd, ix.1950, J.G. Brooks, VMK-3005-3006. All in northeastern Queensland. ETYMOLOGY From the Latin altus meaning high, referring to the high altitude. DIAGNOSIS Trapezoid area of venter with marked, dark V pattern. Medium septum of epigynum slightly мивка than lateral lobes: insemination ducts with 3 coils. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 10.2, CW 9.0, AL 9.9, AW 5.0. Dorsal abdomen pale brown with usual pattern. Spination: similar to H. jugulans. д palp (Fig. 7F,G) very like Н, jugulans. Female: CL 10.4, CW 8.7, AL 13.8, AW 10.0. Trapezoid area of venter outlined in darker V band leaving pale central region. Spination: Similar to H. jugulans. Epigynum (Fig. 6H,I): 1nsemination ducts longer than H. jugulans with 3 coils, Variation: mottling was sometimes present between the dark V on venter. NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS 93 Heteropoda hillerae sp.nov. (Figs 6J,K; 7Н.]; 19B} TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: d , Mt Glorious, southeastern Queensland, 27?2( 8, 152743" E, 29.x:89, К, Hiller, QMS21026, PARATYPES: 9, Mt Glorious, 4.v.89, K. Hiller, QMS6905; Ф, Mt Nebo, 27?23'S, 152°47°E, 14.11.1978, A. Hiller. QMS15035; $, Mt Nebo, 15.у111.1990, M.S. Harvey. T. Churchill, WAM?93/1757; 2, Mt Nebo, 10.1х.1973, C. Wallace, QMS15037; 9, Mt Tenison Woods, 762m, 12.xi.1975-27.1.1976 GBM, SRM, QMSIS030; 9, Neurum Ck, Mt Mee, 27°02'5, 192°42°E, 20.i.- 26.11.1978, GBM, QMS15024; ? , Glenview, 26°46'S, 153?03'E, 15,iv-27.ix,1978 GBM, SRM, QMS15028; 9. Upper Neurum Ck, 31.x.78-1341,1979, GBM, SRM, QMS15025; 9, Neurum Ck, Mt Mee, 26.vi- 30.x.1978, GBM, QMS15040. All in southeastern Qveensland. ETYMOLOGY For Katie Hiller, the collector of the holotype. DIAGNOSIS Medium size. Dorsal abdomen hirsute, well marked pattern; mottled venter with darker ir- regular V pattern posteriorly. Bluntly pointed tegular process. 9. insemination ducts with one coil. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): C] 7.7, CW 6.7, AL 7.5, AW 4.2. Spination: femora 1-11 323, ТУ 321; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae 1-Ш 2326, IV 2226. & palp (Fig. TH,D): tegular process pointing posteriorly; tibjal apophysis tapering to curved tip. Female: CL 7.9, CW 7.3, AL 8.0, AW 53. Trapezoid area of venter moitled, darker V pat- tern. Spination: femora 1-1 323, IV 321; patellae 1, HI, IV 001, 11101; tibiae 2026, I-IV 20(1)26, Epigynum (Fig. 6J,K). Heteropoda cooki sp. nov. (Figs 6L,M; 9A; 19B) TvPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: d, Mt Bellenden Ker. northeastern Queensland, 17°12°S, 145°51'E, 1560m, 10.vi, 1980, GBM, QMS15164. PARATYPES: 9, Mt Bellenden Ker, 1560m, 17- 24.x.1981, EWQM, QMS15163; d, TV station, Mt Bellenden Ker, 1560m, 25-31,x.1981, ЕМОМ, QMS15162; 2, South Peak summit, Mt Bartle-Frere, 17?24'S, 145°49'Е, 1620m, 6-8.xi.1981, EWQM, QMS15165; d, Massey Ra; 1250m, 17"16'8, 145"49'E, 9-11.x.1991, GBM, DC, HJ, QMS21027; d, Mt Fisher, 17°37 5, 145?33'E, 1000-1200m. 5.у.1983, GBM, DY, 0М515167; 3 9. Mt Fisher, 1050-1100m, 27-29,1у.1982, GMB, DY, DC. QMS15166; d, 39, Mt Spurgeon, 16°26'5, 145^ 13 E. 1250-1300m, 15-20.xi.199], GBM, DC, HJ, LR. QMS21028; 9, Mt Spurgeon, 16722'S, 145?13'b, 1200-1250m, 17-19.x.1991, GBM, DC, HJ, LR, QMS21029. All in northeastern Queensland. ETYMOLOGY For Douglas Cook, a collector of many spiders from high altitudes. DIAGNOSIS Large. Venter pale with mottled pattern, Tegulum longer than wide with blunt process directed ventro-prolaterally. Epigynum with short median septum: insemination ducts with 11^ coils. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 8.9, CW 7.7, AL9.2, AW 5.5, Spination: femora HIH 323, IV 321; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae I-IV 2326. d palp (Fig. 9A): tibial apophysis broad, tapering to curved tip. Female: CL 11.4, CW 10.2, AL 14.6, AW 10.0, Spination: femora I-I 323, IV 321; patellae 1-11 101, IV 100; tibiae I-IV 2226. Epigynum (Fig. 6L, M); short, spade-like median septum; insemi- nation ducts with 11^ coils. REMARKS Н. cooki has been found only at altitudes of 1000m or more in northeastern Queensland. Heteropoda nagarigoon sp.nov. (Figs 8A-C; 9B; 19C) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: d , Nagarigoon, Lamington National Park, southeastern Queensland, 28°19°S, 153°0S’B, 1.iv.1976, NH, VED, QMS15200. PARATYPES: Lamington National Park: Nagarigoon (same data), $, QMS15201; 2 4,6 $. QMS14833; 2 5,6 9,514831; 8. 8.1v.1976, NH, VED, QOMS14828; ?, Ballunjui Falls track, 4.iv.1976, M. Bishop, NH, QMS14830; 2 d, 4 9, Binna Burra, 27-30.1)1.1976, VED, RJR, QMS 14829; 5, 13,vi. 1971, М, Archer, E. Jeffreys, WAM88/1956. Other localities: 3 d. Mi Tamborine, 27°55'S, 153"10'E, southeastern Queensland, 10.vii.1974, VED, C.L. Wilton, RIR, QMS14832. New South Wales: d, near Mt Warning, 28?24'S, 153°16'E, 3.xii. 1974, RJR, QMS15039; Ф, 94 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM Whian Мап State Forest, 28"38'S, 153"]9'E, 9- 12.ix,1976, RIR, QMS15026. ETYMOLOGY From the type locality Nagarigoon, Lamington National Park. DIAGNOSIS Medium size. Venter mottled with ill-defined trapezoid area (Fig. 8C). Tegulum produced into low rounded postero-prolateral bulge. Elongate ubial apophysis, tapering, curved at tip. Median septum of epigynum with narrow neck, broaden- ing posteriorly; insemination duct with one coil. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 7.8, CW 6.7, AL 7.5, AW 3.0. Venter yellow-brown with irregular brown mottling. Spination: femora 1, 11 323, Ш 322, IV 321; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae I-IV 2226. 5 palp (Fig. 9B). Variation: in other males dorsal spines varied on tibiae ШІ, IV, 2(3). Female: CL 8.5, CW 7.8, AL 9,8, AW 5.8, Spination: femora I, M 323; 10 322; IV 321; patellae I-IV 001; tibiae I-I 2026, IV 2226, Epigynum (Fig. 8A,B). Variation: dorsal spina- tion of tibiae HI varied O(1) and IV 2(1). REMARKS Although males of H. nagarigoon have no marked prolateral tegular process, the low rounded projection in this area suggests it belongs in the jugulans group of species. The long narrow prolateral flange on the proximal tegulum sup- ports this view. Heteropoda holoventris sp.nov. (Figs 8D.E; 9C.D; I9C) TvPE MATERIAL HoLorYPE: d, Mt Bellenden Ker, northeastern Queensland 17"16'S, 145°51 E, 500m, 17-24.x.1981, EWOM, ОМ515181. PARATYPES: Mt Bellenden Ker 9, same data, QMS15182; 3 9, 1-7.х1.1981, QMS14825; 2 9, 17- 24.x.1981, EWQM, QMS15237; d, Twelve Mile Scrub. via Helenvale, 22-27.xi.1975, VED, RM, QMS14816; d, near Palmerston National Park, 22.1.1975, RJR, QMS 14823; 2 2, Mt Finlay, 15°49°5, 145?21'E, 29 xi.-4.xii.1975, VED, RM, ОМ$14818; 9. Malaan State Forest, 17°36'S, 145^36'E, 20- 24.iv.1978, УЕР, RJR, QMS14817; 3 2, Home Rule, nr Helenvale, 15°42'S, 145°13°B, 5.xii.1974, JC, DJ, VED, QMS14819; ? , Boulder Ck, via Tully, 17°52'S, 145*55' E, 500-600m, 24-27.x,1983, GBM, DY, GT, QMS14822; Ф, Yungaburra, 17°16'S, 145"35'E, 700m, 8.xii.1988, GBM, GT, QMS15265; 9, Fritz Ck, 157518, 145727 E, xii.1975, MG, AMKS8172. All in northeastern Queensland. ETYMOLOGY From a combination of the Greek holo- mean- ing whole and the Latin venter meaning belly, referring to the pale uniform trapezoid area of the venter. DIAGNOSIS Large. Venter brown with distinct pale, cream- coloured trapezoid area. Small prolateral tegular process; short tibial apophysis, bifurcate tip, longer curved posterior fork. Median septum shorterthan lateral lobes; insemination ducts with Và coil. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 10.9, CW 9.5, AL 10.5, AW 5.4. Spination; femora I-III 323, IV 321(2); patellae I-IV 101; tibiae 1-ПІ 2326, IV 2336. 5 palp (Fig. 9C,D) Female: CL 10.3, CW 8.5, AL 11.3, AW 7.1. Spination: femora and patellae as in с; tibiae I, 11 2026, 11 20(1)26, IV 22(1)26. Epigynum (Fig. 8D,E). Heteropoda vespersa sp.nov. (Figs 8F.G; 9E,F; 19B) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: 3, 4.5-Skm W of Cape Tribulation, north- eastern Queensland, 16°05'S, 145?29"E, 780m, 27 ix.- 7.x,1982, GBM, DY, GT, QMS15198, PARATYPES: 9, Thornton Peak, 16°10'S, 145"23'E, x1.1975, MG, AMKS8260; d, Cape Tribulation, 780m, 27.ix.-7.x.1982, GBM, DY, GT, QMS15169; 3, same dala, QMS15168, All in northeastern Queensland. ETYMOLOGY From the Latin vesper meaning evening, refer- ring to when the spider is active. DIAGNOSIS Medium size. Trapezoid area of venter pale. Tegulum with rounded prolateral bulge; tibial apophysis tapering to curved tip. Median septum shorter than lateral lobes; insemination duct with 1 V^ coils. NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS 95 FIG. 8. A-C, Heteropoda nagarigoon; D,E, Н. holoventris; F,G, Н, vespersa; Н, Н. warrumbungle; I-K, H. distincta; L-N, Н. eungella, О-О, Н. conwayensis; R,S, Н. goonaneman; T,U, Н. spurgeon; V-X, Н. bulburin. A,B,D-G,1,J,L,M,.O,P.R-W, epigyna; C, K,N,Q.X, ventral abdomen; Н, & palp. 96 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM = = el! e N = - 2 e = ш E N a > х о © Е] Е Е ” FIG. 9. A, Heteropoda cooki, В, Н. nagarigoon; C-D, Н. holoventris; E,F, Н, vespersa; С.Н, Н. distincta; 1,J, H. eungella. A-J, 3 palps and tibial apophyses. NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS 97 DESCRIPTION Nr deme роу CL 6.4, CW 5.9, AL 6.6, AW pezoid area pallid but not so Man prs as H. holoventris. Spination: femora I, П 323, III 33(2)3, ГУ 331; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae I, П 2326; III, IV 2226. & palp (Fig. E,F Female: CL 9.5, CW 8.6, AL 9.5, AW 5.3. Spination: femora 1-1 323, IV 33(4)1; patellae LIV 101; tibiae I 2026, 11 20(1)6, Ш 22(1)26, IV 2326. Epigynum (Fig. 8F,G). Heteropoda warrumbungle sp.nov. (Figs 8H; 18) TYPE MATERIAL НО1.ОТҮРЕ: б, Wallumburrawang Ck, Warrumbungle Ranges, New South Wales, 31?34 S, 148"56' E, 29 iv. 1988, D. Hirst, S&MAN1990327. ETYMOLOGY From the Warrumbungle Ranges, DIAGNOSIS Large spider with barred legs, tegular process rounded projection, tibial apophysis tapering to point. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CI. 9.8, CW 8.5, AL 10.6, AW 5.6. Colour: trapezoid area of venter pale with slight mottling. Black spots on legs giving stripey appearance. Spination: femora 1-Ш 3 2 3, IV 32 1; patellae I-IV, 1 0 1; tibiae I-IV 2 32 6. d palp (Fig. 8H). The female 1s unknown. Heteropoda distincta sp.nov. (Figs 8I-K; 9G,H; 19B) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: d , Nagarigoon, Lamington National Park, south-eastern Queensland, 28°19°5, 153°05°Б, Liv.1976, NH, VED, QMS15203. PARATYPES Lamington National Park: 9, Nagarigoon, same data as holotype, QM815204; 4 ©, Liv.1976, NH. VED, QMS14777; 2 d, 1-R.iv.1976, M. Bishop, NH, VED QMS14782; 6 9, 1-8.1v.1976, VED, QMS14779; 2 d, 2 9, Ballanjui Falls track, 4.iv.1976, M. Bishop, NH, QMS14773; d, Binna Burra, 27-30.ji1.1976, VED, RJR, QMS14781; d, Springbrook, 5.xii.1971, B. Baldwin, QMS14780; d, Mt Cainbable, 28°05'S, 153°05'Е, 28.ix.1975- 31.1.1976, GBM, SRM, QMS14801; 2 2, 13.v1,1971, M. Archer, E. Jeffreys, WAM88/1956,7, Southeastern Queensland: 9 Beechmont, 28?08'8, 153? 12" E, 26.х.- 14.xii.1974, GBM, SRM, QMS14795; 9, 22iii.- 25.v.1975, GBM, SRM, QMS14783. Mt Tamborine, 277558, 153" 10 E: 9,26.x.-14.xii.1974, GBM, SRM, QMS14792; 9, 14.xii.1974-22.iii.1975, GBM, SRM, QMS14794; d 9, 27.vi.1980, N. Clyde Coleman, VED, RJR, 0М514775, 3 ®, Numinbah Valley, 28°08'S, 153014" E, 26.xii.1978-vi.1979, GBM, SRM, 0М514788; 9, Sarabah National Park, 281075. 153°07'Е, 27.xi.1976-23.1.1977. 120m, GBM, SRM. QMS14786; 9 same data, QMS14787; 9, d, Canungra Ck, 27^58'S, 153°09'E, 120m, 13.viii- 2.xii.1977, GBM, SRM, QMS14797; 9, 4, Burleigh Headland, 28"05'S, 153?27'E, 14.xii.1974- 22.14.1975, GBM. SRM, QMS14799. New South Wales: б, 2 9, Rotary Park, Lismore, 28°49°S_ 153°16'E, 16.xi.-26.xii.1974, GBM, SRM, QMS14796; Stotts I., Tweed R., 28°16'S, 153°30"E: 3 9, 17-19.х1.1978, СУС, JC, RJR, SVD, QMS14776; d, same data, QMS15032; 2 9, QMS15034. 4 d, ?, Мап Whian State Forest, 28?38'S, 153?]9'E, 9- 12.ix.1976, RJR, QMS14772; $, Richmond Gap via Grevillea, 28°27°S, 152°50"E, 1978-9, GBM, SRM, QMS15023. DIAGNOSIS Medium size. Venter with dark trapezoid area with two thick irregular longitudinal pale lines (Fig. 8K). Tegulum with bluntly pointed ventro- prolateral process; tibial apophysis long, tapering with curved tip. Median septum shorter than lateral lobes; insemination duct with 114 coils. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype); CL 6.3, CW 5.6, AL 6.0, AW 4.1. Clear epigastrial pattem of 2 pale, irregular longitudinal bands on red-brown base. Spination: femora 1-1 323, IV 321; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae I, П, IV 2326, П 2426. д palp (Fig. 9G,H): tegular process, sub-acute, ventrally directed with secondary "peak'. Variation: @ 4 paratypes with 3 dorsal spines on tibiae HI. Female: CL 7.5, CW 6.7, AL 7.2, AW 49. Spinaton: femora І-Ш 323, IV 321; patellae 1-IV 101; tibiae 1, П 2026, Ш 21(0)26, IV 2226, Epigynum (Fig. 8I-J). REMARKS H. distincta differs from sympatric H. nagarigoon in the pattern on epigastrium, its dis- tinct venter pattern (though this is not always clear in newly moulted specimens) and the sub- acute tegular process. 98 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM FIG. 10. A,B, Heteropoda conwayensis; C,D, Н. monroei; E,F, Н. goonaneman; G,H, Н. bulburin; I, Н. acuta. A-I, d palps and tibial apophyses. NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS 99 Heteropoda eungella sp.nov. (Figs 8L-N; 917; 19A) TYPE MATERIAL НОГ ОТҮРЕ: 3, Mt William, Eungella National Park, mideastern Queensland, 21%01°5, 148°36'Е, 17- 24.11.1975, MG, CH, AMKS7379. PARATYPE: Ẹ , Creek bank near school-house, Eungel- ła National Park, mideastern Queensland, 13.11.1986, RJR, JG, QMS21031. ETYMOLOGY From the type locality, Eungella National Park. DIAGNOSIS Medium size. Sternum with pattern (Fig, 8N). Venter black, with pale lateral lines of spots/stripes and two short thick paramedial stripes. Tegulum rounded prolaterally, long tegular flange. Median septum narrow, broaden- ing suddenly io transverse bar, insemination ducts with one coil, DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 7.0, CW 6.2, AL 6.5, AW 3.9. Spination: femora I 32(3)3, II, III 323, IV 321; patella, 1, HT, TV 001, П 101; tibiae I, H 2326, Ш 2126, IV 2226. d palp (Fig. 91,J): tibial apophysis tapering to incurved tip. Female: CL 7.3, CW 6.5, AL 8.5, AW 4.8. Spination: femora 1-1 323, IV 321; patellae Т-ТУ (01; tibiae I-IV 2026. Epigynum (Fig. 8L,M). REMARKS This species is known only from rainforests at about 1000m at Eungella, mideastern Queensland. Heteropoda conwayensis sp.nov, (Figs 80-Q; 10A.B; 19A) TYPE MATERİAL НОГОТҮРЕ: $ „Саре Hillsborough National Park, mid- eastern Queensland, 20°54'S, 149?03'E, 5.1.1975, KRM, QMS15189. PARATYPES: 9, same data QMS15190; 2 9, QMS14764. 2 9 Brandy Ck, 20°20'S, 148?38' E, 21- 26.iv.1975, RM, VED, QMS14763. 2 9, d Conway National Park, 20721'S, 148°48'E, 22.1.1975, KRM, QMS14765; 2 9,13.1,1975, КЕМ, 514766. 9, іп Іор, Mt Dryander, 20°15°S, 148"32'E, 21-26.iv.1975, MG, CH, AMKS7355. АЙ in mideastern Queensland. ETYMOLOGY From the locality, Conway National Park. DIAGNOSIS Small. Sternum without pattern. Venter with dark trapezoid area delimited by pale lateral bands (Fig. 8Q); two sub-central lines of 2-7 white tufts of setae. Long tegular flange, no tegular process. Median septum short, gradually broadening to thick transverse bar; insemination ducts with 1^ coil. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 5.7, CW 5.3, AL 5.5, AW 3.3. Colour: venter with dark shield, extending beyond the trapezoid area. Spination: femora 1-11 323, IV 321; patellae I-HTOO 1, IV 101; tibiae I-IV 2226, 8 palp (Fig. 10A,B): long tapering tibial apophysis with curved tip. Female: CL 6.2, CW 5.7, AL 7.1, AW 4.6. Colour pattern: similar to male but less distinct. Spination: femora I, 1 323, ПІ 322(3), TV 321; patellae I-II 000, IV 001; tibiae I 1026, П, Ш 2026, IV 20(1)26. Epigynum (Fig. 8O,P). REMARKS H. conwayensis appears to be a coastal rain- forest species. It may be distinguished from H. eungella by venter and sternal patterns and by shorter insemination ducts in female. THE CERVINA GROUP Small-large. MOQ longer than wide. Venter pattern variable. Tegulum longer than wide (exc. H. monroei), tegular flange as long as tegulum. Pointed tegular process (exc. H. monroei). Tibial apophysis with ‘tooth’. ? median septum of epigynum tongue-like, as long as or more usually longer than lateral lobes. Insemination ducts with 10-3 coils. Heteropoda cervina (L. Koch) and the follow- ing new species, H. monroei, H. goonaneman, H. spurgeon, H. bulburin, H. acuta, H. willunga, H. rundle, H. monteithi, H. crediton, H. silvatica and H. cooloola. Heteropoda monroei sp.nov. (Figs 10C,D; 18) TYPE MATERIAL HoLoTvPE: d, Homevale, mid-eastern Queensland, 21°27'S, 148°32'Е, campsite, 1-7.iv.1975, VED, RM, QMS15175. ETYMOLOGY For Ronald Monroe, co-collector of the holotype, 100 DIAGNOSIS Small. Tegulum wider than long with postero- prolateral bulge without pointed tegular process; tibial apophysis with large thorn-like ‘tooth’. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 6.3, CW 5.8, AL 7.0, AW 4.0. Colour: slight mottling on venter, short, dark V posteriorly. Spination: femora 1-Ш 323, IV 321; patellae 1, Ш, TV 101, П 001; tibiae HIH 2226, IV 22(1)26. d palp (Fig. 10C,D): ratio of cymbium length: length from anterior rim of al- veolus to tip is 1:0.6. The female is unknown. REMARKS H. monroei is placed in the cervina group be- cause of the tooth on tibial apophysis, It is the only species in the group without a pointed tegular process. Heteropoda goonaneman sp.nov. (Figs SR,S; 10Е,Е; 19C) TYPE MATERIAL HoLoTYPE: 5, Mt Goonaneman, via Childers, southeastern Queensland, 25"26'8, 152"08'E, 670m, 3-6.xi.1980, VED, RJR, QMS15185, PARATYPES; ©, @, Amamoor Ck, 267228, 152?37' E, 29.х1.1975-29.11.1976, GBM, SRM, ОМ514809; d, Casey Ck, via Imbil, 10.viii.-9.xi.1974, GBM, SRM, ОМ514811; d. $9, Cold Ck, via Imbil, 9.xi.- 31.x1i.1974, GBM, SRM, QMS14810; 9, Mt Goonaneman, 3-4.xi.1980, VED, RJR, QMS15186, 3 d, 5 9, same data QMS152i4: 9, 13.х11.1976- 31.1.1977, GBM, SRM, QMS14808; 9, Brooyar State Forest, 26°01°5, 152?24' E, 17.iv.1982, AR, D. Sinclair, QMS14806; 9, 23.viii.1975-29.11.1976, 457m, GBM, SRM, QMS14721; ?, Mt Bauple, 25°47°S, 152934" E, 26, viii-9.xii.19716, GBM, SRM, QMS 14720. All in southeastern Queensland. ETYMOLOGY From the type locality, Mt Goonaneman. DIAGNOSIS Large. Venter without discernible pattern. Short ventro-prolateral tegular process: tibial apophysis broad, truncated with tooth on posterior comer. Medium septum almost as long as lateral lobes; insemination duct with one coil. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 8.3, CW 7.8, AL 8.9, AW 5.1. Colour; faint brown mottling. Spination: MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM femora 1-11 323, IV 321; patellae 1-11 101, IV 001; tibiae 1 3326, II, ПІ 2326, ГУ 2226. д palp (Fig. 10E,F). Female: CL 10.6, CW 9.1, AL 15.1, AW 9.7. Spination: femora I, II 323, ТП 322, IV 321; patellae I, H, ТУ 001, III 101; tibiae I 2026, I-IV 2126. Epigynum (Fig. 8R.S). Heteropoda spurgeon sp.nov. (Figs 8T,U; 19C) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: 9, 4km NNE Mt Spurgeon, north Queensland, 16°24°8, 145?13'E, 15-20.х.1991, 1250- 1300m, GBM, DC, HJ, LR, QMS21032. PARATYPES: 9, 2km SE Mt Spurgeon via Mt Carbine, 16?26'S, 145°13°E, 1100m, 20-21.xii.1988, GBM, GT, QMS16532; 9, Pauls Luck, Platypus Ck, 13km W Mossman, 16°27'S, 145°15'B, 1100m, 1-2.i.1990, AE, QMS21033; 9, 2km ESE Mossman Bluff, 16°27'S, 145°17°E, 1000m, 17-19.xii.1988, GBM, GT, QMS15266; 2, Mt Formartine South, 1647 S, 145°38'E, 700m, 23-24.xi.1990, GBM, GT, QMS21034. All in northeastern Queensland. ETYMOLOGY From the type Jocality Mt Spurgeon. DIAGNOSIS Large. Trapezoid area of venter pale brown with posterior mottling. Median septum of epigynum broad, as long as lateral lobes, rounded distally. DESCRIPTION Female (holotype): CL 9.6, CW 8.6, AL 12.0, AW 8.4. Colour: short pale cardiac stripe, paired dark abdominal spots faint, posterior dark W- shaped patch of hair. Spination: femora 1-1 323, IV 321; patellae 1-10 101, IV 000; tibiae LTV 2026. Epigynum (Fig. 8T,U): median septum as long as lateral lobes: insemination duct with UA coils. Variation: abdominal pattern clear in paratypes. The male is unknown. Heteropoda bulburin sp.nov. (Figs 8V-X; 10G,H; 19C) TYPE MATERIAL HoLorYPE: d, Bulburin State Forest, mid-eastern Queensland, 24°31'S, 151729'E, complex notophyll rainforest with Araucaria emergents, 17-24,111.1975, RK, VED, QMS 14724. NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS PARATYPES: Bulburin State Forest: 2, same data as holotype QMS21035; 9, QMS14722; d, QMS14726; 9, 25-8,111.1977, RJR, VED, QMS14725; 9, 17- 24,111,1975, MG, CH, AMKS6779. ETYMOLOGY From the type locality, Bulburin State Forest. DIAGNOSIS Large. Trapezoid area of venter pale and mot- tled (Fig. 8X), Tegular process directed prolaterally. Tibial apophysis indented at tip with tooth on shorter posterior fork. Insemination ducts with 10 coil. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL. 9.7, CW 8.5, AL 10.0, AW 5.9. Colour: trapezoid area defined by pale lateral lines. Spination: femora 1-Ш 323, IV 321; patellae I-IV, 101; tibiae 1-1П 2326, IV 2226. d palp (Fig. 10G,H). Female: CL 10.4, CW 9.2, AL 12.7, AW 8.8. Spination: femora I-II] 323, IV 321; patellae I, П 001, Ш, IV 101; tibiae I-II 2126, IV 2226. Epigynum (Fig. 8V,W): broad median septum level with posterior edge of lateral lobes. REMARKS Н. bulburin ìs closely allied to Н, goonaneman from which it may be distinguished by the distal indentation of 5 tibial apophysis and shorter 9 insemination ducts, Heteropoda acuta sp.nov. (Figs 11 A-C; 101; 19C) TYPE MATERIAL HoLoTvrE: d, Wallaby Ck, near Helenvale, north: eastern Queensland, 15?44'S, 145°15'Е. 15.xi. 1974, JC, KRM, DJ, VED, ОМ515183, PARATYPES: 9. same data as holotype, QMS15184; d. 6 9. Wallaby and Granite СК», 11.xi.1974, JC, KRM, DJ, VED, QMS14695; 2 4, QMS14696; 2, JC, T. Tebble, VED, QMS14697. Mt Bellenden Ker, 17? 16'S, 145°51°Б: 5, 1054m, 17-24.x.1981, EWQM, QMS14701;2 9, 500m, 17-24.x.1981, EWQM, VED, QMS14700; 2. 9, Mt Finnigan, 15°49°S, 145^17'E, 850-1100m, 19-22.iv.1982, GBM, DY, DC, QMS14702; d , same data, QMS14703; 3, 9, Twelve Mile Scrub, 15°48’S, 145? 19' E, 22-27.xi.1975, VED, RM, ОМ514698; 3 9, Mt Finlay, 15°49°S, 145?21' E, 20 xi.-4.xii.1975, VED, RM, QMS14698. All in north- eastern Queensland. 101 ETYMOLOGY From the Latin acutus meaning pointed, refer- ring to the sharply pointed tegular process, DIAGNOSIS Large. Venter slightly mottled. Tegular process pointing prolaterally; tibial apophysis rounded distally with sub-distal tooth on posterior edge, Median septum narrowed distally extending beyond lateral lobes; insemination duct tight 1^ coil, DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 7.9, CW 7.1, AL 7.9, AW 5.1. Spination: femora 1-1 323, IV 3(4)21; patel- lae І, II, 101, TH, IV 001; tibiae 1-1П 2326, IV 2226. 3 palp (Fig. 101). Female: CL 11.1, CW 9.8, AL 11.9, AW 7,9, Colour: less distinct than in male. Spination: femora I-H 323, IV 321; patellae I, 11001, HT, TY 000; tibiae I-IV 2026. Epigynum (Fig. 11A,B): long broad median septum ending їп а knob, REMARKS The long median septum distinguishes H. acuta from females of other species (Н. holoventris, Н, cooki) in this area and the toothed tibial apophysis distinguishes it from other males, Heteropoda cervina (L. Koch, 1875) (Figs 2L; 11D-F; 12A,B; 19B) Sarotes cervinus Koch, 1875: 673; 1876: 854. Heteropoda cervina; Simon, 1880; 270; Hogg, 1902; 416; Jarvi, 1914: 76, 200. Heteropoda keyserlingi Hogg, 1902; 418 - new synonymy, TYPE MATERIAL LECTOTYPE: d, Peak Downs, 22°56'S, 148" 05" E, mideastern Queensland, Amalie Dietrich, ZMH - here designated, PARALECTOTYPES: 2 9, Peak Downs, BMNH 1890.7,1.3095, 3096; 2 9, d, Bowen, 20°01'S, 148"15'E, mideastern Queensland, BMNH 6457- 6459, Koch Coll; 9, Rockhampton, 23°22'S, 150?32'E, midcastern Queensland, ZMH (Godellroy No, 11010). OTHER MATERIAL 2 9 syntypes of Hereropodakeyserlingi, Peak Downs, BMNH; 2 d, Yeppoon, QDPI Ar378;3 2, Homevale, nr Nebo, 9М514728; d, Rockhampton, QMS21036; 102 9. Emu Park, Rockhampton, QMS14730. All in mideastern Queensland. DIAGNOSIS Medium-large size, Venter with dark trapezoid area with two pale converging lines. Tegulum with pointed ventro-prolateral tegular process; long, paddle-shaped tibial apophysis with a mound on central anterior edge; a triangular thorn-like fold ('tooth') centrally (Fig. 12A,B). Median septum of epigynum extending beyond lateral lobes, terminally rounded, length:width, 1:0.3; insemination ducts with 144 coils. DESCRIPTION Male (leciotype): CL 8.0, CW 7.3, AL 7.9, AW 4.3. This matches in size the male described and illustrated in Koch (1875), Colour; abdominal pattern faded, venter with black trapezoid area with poorly defined pale converging lines. Spina- tion: femora I, П 323, Ш 322, IV 321; patellae I-IV 101; ubiae I-IV 2326. 4 palp (Fig. 11F): embolus not reaching end of conductor. Female (paralectotype): CL 8.0, AL 6.6, AL 11.2, AW 7.5. Colour: faded, similar to male. Spination: femora I, II 323, III 322, IV 321: patellae I. П, IV 101, Ш 001; tibiae 1-1 2026, ГУ 2226. Epigynum (Fig. 11D;E). Variation: ? from Bowen has a tighter apical fold in insemination ducts and variable tibial spination. 39 from Homevale are larger and have 2 dorsal spines on tibiae Ш, REMARKS The type locality, Peak Downs is much changed with depletion of Forest habitat due to mining (including smelting) and latterly grazing. No fresh material has been collected from here, 29 syntypes, Sarotes cervinus Koch, Port Mack- ау, ZMB (Godeffroy No.3453) are considered to be H. crediton sp.nov. Heteropoda cervina s closely related to H. willunga sp.nov. and H. rundle sp.nov. Heteropoda willunga sp.nov. (Figs 11G,H; 12C; 19B) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: d , Forty Mile Scrub, 18?05'S, 144?53' E, SW of Mt Garnet, northeastern Queensland, 9- 14,iv.1978, VED, RJR, QM QMS15239. PARATYPES: 2 d , same data as holotype, QMS15170; 9 , same data as holotype, QMS 15240, MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM ETYMOLOGY From willunga, an Aboriginal word meaning ‘dry vine scrub’. DIAGNOSIS e, Trapezoid area with two converging lines of closely spaced pale dots. Tegulum with prolaterally directed process; tibial apophysis with large medial tooth. Broad median septum; ratio of length: width is 1:0.4; insemination ducts with one coil. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 8.2, CW 8.1, AL 9.2, AW 4.9. Colour: venter with brown trapezoid area and 2 lines of pale dots, Spination: femora: T-I, 323, IV 321; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae I-II 2326, IV 2226. d palp (Fig. 12C) very like Н. cervina. Female: CL 9.6, CW 8.7, AL 11.7, AW 7.7. Spination: femora I-111 323, IV 321; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae Т 2026, П, IV 2126, III 2226. Epigynum (Fig. 1 LG,H). REMARKS H. willunga may be distinguished from H. cer- vina by the broader median septum and one coil, rather than 1/4 coils, in the insemination duct. Heteropoda rundle sp. nov. (Figs 111.7; 12D; I9B) ТҮРЕ MATERIAL HoLotyrr: d, Rundle Range, mideastern Queensland, 23?40'S, 151°00°E, 24-3 iii, 1975, VED, RK, 0М514738, PARATYPES: Mideastern Queensland: 9 , same data as holotype, QMS21000; 2 d, QMS21185; Kroombit Tops, 24°22'5, 151700'E: 2 9, 2 4, 14.xii. 1983, К. Leggat, QMS14729; 2 9?, 22-26.i1,1982, RJR, QMS14735; 8, 9-19.xii.1983, VED, JG, QMS14753; 9, 3-4,11,1984, GBM, DY, C. Hagan, QMS14740; d, 13-18.xií.1983, VED, JG, QMS14752; 9, 9- 19.xii.1983, GBM, GT, QMS14733; 9, Bulburin Plateau, 24°31'S, 151?29'E, 5.x-30.xii.1974, GBM, SRM, QMS14736. Southeastern Queensland: d, Coalstoun Lakes, 25?37'S, 151°53°Е, 25km SW Big- genden, 26.11-5,1х.1977, GBM, SRM, QMS14739; 2 3, Burnett Ra., 15km NE Tansey, 26°03°S, 152703 E, 1976-77, GBM, SRM, QMSI4744; d. same data, QMS14747; 2 4, Gallangowan, 26°26'S, 152°17°E, 26.iii-16.vi.1975, GBM, SRM, QMS14750, ETYMOLOGY From the type locality, Rundle Range. NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS DIAGNOSIS Medium size. Tegulum with prolaterally directed process; tibial apophysis with central tooth, Tip of median septum rounded but not knob-like: insemination ducts with 2 coils. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 7.2, CW 6.7, AL 7.5, AW 4.4. Colour: venter like H. cervina. Spination: femora 1-Ш 323, IV 321; patellae I-IV 001: tibiae I, 0 2326, Ш, IV 2226. 4 palp (Fig. 12D); em- bolus reaching almost to end of conductor. Female: CL 7.8, CW 7.3, AL 9.6, AW 6,3. Spination: femora I-1TI 323. HI 321: patellae І-Ш 001, IV 101; tibiae I-III 2026; IV 2226. Epigynum (Fig. 111.7). REMARKS H. rundle is closely related to H. cervina but may be distinguished by 2 (rather than 3) dorsal spines on & tibiae Ш, IV, The tip of the median septum is not knoblike as in cervina and insemi- nation ducts have 2 rather than 1 coils, Heteropoda monteithi sp.nov. (Figs 11K,L; 12F,G; 19C) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: $, Yandaburra, 125km SW Springsure, central Queensland, 24°42°S, 147°30°E, 7.v.1976, C. Fearnley, QMS15177. PARATYPES: 9, Mt Moffat Nat. Pk, central Queensland, 25°01°S, 147°57'E, Mahogany Forest, 1000m, 11-12.xii.1987, GBM, GT, DY, QMS14472; ? same data, QMS14478; 9, same locality, 12.x11,1987, DY, QMS14474; 3, Lake Nuga Nuga, nr Rolleston, central Queensland, 25"01'S, 148°42'Е, 10.v.1978, KMD, QMS15176. ETYMOLOGY For Geoffrey Monteith, whose collections from mountain tops in Queensland figure prominently 3n this revision. DIAGNOSIS Medium size. Tegulum almost as wide as long, pointed postero-prolateral process; tooth on tibial apophysis forward of posterior edge; proximal mound on anterior edge. Medjan septum longer than lateral lobes; insemination duct with 3 coils. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 7.3, CW 6.4, AL 7.9, AW 4.4. Colour: trapezoid area of venter brown, paler 1n centre, slight evidence of 2 pale lines of dots. darker V postenorly. Spination: femora І, H 323, Ш 322, ТУ 321; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae LIV 2226. 8 palp (Fig. 12F,G). Female: CL 7.3. CW 6.7, AL 7.5, AW 45, Colour: trapezoid area of venter dark brown; twa lines of pale spots merging anteriorly to give pale centra] region. Spination: femora I. II 323, Ш 322, IY 321; patellae I-IITOO1. IV 101; tibiae I-II 2026, IV 21(2)26. Epigynum (Fig. 11K,L). Heteropoda crediton sp.nov. (Figs 11 P-R; 12H,I; 19C) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: d, Crediton, mideastern Queensland, 21°13'S, 148°33°E, complex notophyll vine forest, 14-21 ,iv.1975, RK, VED, QMS15208. PARATYPES: 9, same data as holotype, QMS15209; 9. 8, QMS14916; 4, QMSI5211;4 4, 2, Homevale, 21?27 8, 148?32'" E, riverine forest, 1-7.iv.1975, RK, VED, QMS15210; d , Dalrymple Heights, nr Eungella, 21^08'S, 148?30'E, 1000m, 7-14.1%,1975, MG, CH, AMKS7341; 3 d, Dairymple Heights, 7-14.iv.1975, MG, CH, AMKS7340; 2 d, 4 ©, Finch Hatton, 21?07'S, 148°38'Е, 7-14.iv.1975, RK, VED, 0М515213; d, same data, QMS14919; $, Eungella National Park, 21°10'S, 148"24'E, 2.11.1975, KRM, QMS14915; 2 9, Bungeila National Park, 3,111.1975, KRM, QMS14912; 2 4, Broken River, Eungella Na- tional Park, 21°12'S, 148°33'Е, 4-5.ix.1988, IG, T. Churchill, QMS13849; 9, Dalrymple Hgts, 21°08S, 148?30'E, iii-iv.1975, MG, CH, AMKS0294; 3 3, same data, AMKS7340; &, AMKS7341, All in mid- eastern Queensland. ETYMOLOGY From the type locality, Crediton. DIAGNOSIS Large. Venter with brown trapezoid area with two pale stripes (Fig. 116), sometimes indistinct. Long tegular process pointing posteriorly; tibial apophysis rounded with sub-apical posterior tooth, sperm duct with small coil before entering embolus. Median septum as long as lateral lobes: insemination ducts with 3 coils. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype). CL 9.8, CW 9,2, AL 10.0, AW 5.4. Colour: light brown venter, darker trapezoid area with two pale stripes. Spination: femora I-M 323, IV 321; patellae LIV 101; tibiae I, II, TV 2226, Ш 2326. 3 palp (Fig. 12H,D). Female: CL 10.0, CW 9.6, AL 13.1, AW 8.1. Colour: similar to male. Spination: femora I-II 104 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM FIG. 11. A-C, Heteropoda acuta; D-F, H. cervina (F, lectotype); G,H, H. willunga; 1.1, Н. rundle; KL, Н. monteithi; M-O, Н. cooloola; P-R, Н. crediton; S-U, Н. silvatica. A,B,D,E,G-N,P,Q,S,T, epigyna: C, eyes from front; F, д palp; O,R,U, ventral abdomen. NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS 105 HMO - © ` = - © © іюе200 ку 232E1 ism208kU 5600EI 0012/91 HHO FIG. 12. А,В, Heteropoda cervina; С, Н. willunga; D, Н. rundle; E, Н. silvatica; F,G, Н. monteithi; НЛ, Н. crediton, А-1, д palps and tibial apophyses. 323, IV 321; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae I, П 2026, III 2126, IV 2226. Epigynum (Fig. 11Р,0). REMARKS 2 9 syntypes of Sarotes cervinus Koch, Port Mackay, ZMB (Godeffroy No. 3453) are con- sidered to be H. crediton. Heteropoda silvatica sp.nov. (Figs 118-0; 12E; 19C) TYPE MATERIAL HoLorvpE: d, Gold Creek Reservoir, Brookficld, southeastern Queensland, 27?27'S, 152°52"E, com- plex notophyll vine forest with Araucaria emergents, 30.x.-14.xi. 1980, VED, RJR; QMS15127. PARATYPES: 9, Gold Creek Reservoir, Brookfield, 224.81, VED, RJR, QMS15128; d, Upper Brookfield, 27°29'S, 152252" E, 5.x.-11.xi.1981, RJR, QMS15131; 2, Upper Brookfield, 28.x1.-11.x11.1980, VED, RJR, QMS15130; 5, Mt Nebo. 2792375, 152^47 E, 2.xii.1979, Gl, QMS15132; $, Brookfield, 110m, 9.х1.1975-27,11.1976, GBM, SRM, QMS15134; ©, Kenmore, Brisbane, viii.1971, J. Hodge, QM815129; 9. Mt Nebo, 19.xii.1972, D. Dale, QMS15133; d. Flinton Hill via Ipswich, 27?31'S, 152°44'B, 120m, 9.xi.1975-27.1.1976, GBM, SRM, QMS15138: d, Casey Ck via Imbil, 26"28'S, 152^4Y'E, 27 iii- 16.у1.1975, GBM, SRM, QMS15136: 2 9, d. Elgin Vale, 30km NE Nanango, 26°27'5, 152? T2" E, 610m, 17.x-12.xii.1976, GBM, SRM, QMS15140; 2, Elgin Vale, 26.11-28.х.1977, СВМ, SRM, QMS15137; 9. Deer Reserve via Kilcoy, 26°57°S, 152°34'E, 19.ix,1974-11.1.1975, 457m, GBM, SRM, QMS14751; $, Neorum Valley, 27°02'S, 152^42'E, GBM, SRM, QMS14741; d, Yarraman State Forest, 26?51'S, 151°59°E, 4.vii, 1982, AR, QMS14745; 9, Camira, Brisbane, 3.iv.90, RJR, QMS12537, All in southeastern Queensland. ETYMOLOGY From the Latin silva, meaning forest, referring lo the forest habitat, DIAGNOSIS Medium size. Tegulum about as wide as long; process pointing posteriorly; tibial apophysis rounded with tooth inside posterior margin. Median septum longer than lateral lobes; insemi- вт ducts with twe loose coils and tight apical old. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 6.5, CW 6.1, AL 6.3, AW 4.3. Colour: venter pale brown, mottled; MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM trapezoid area brown-black with series of small pale spots forming two lines (Fig. 11U). Spina- tion: femora 1-1 323, IV 321; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae I-IV 2326. д palp (Fig. 12E). Variation: males from Imbil, Nanango and Elgin Vale have two dorsal spines on tibiae III, IV. Female: CL 6.5, CW 6.1, AL 9.6, AW 5.4. Spination: femora І, П 323, II] 322, IV 321; patellae I-III 001, TV 101; tibiae 1-Ш 2026. IV 2226, Epigynum (Fig. 11S,T). Heteropoda cooloola sp.nov. (Figs 11M-O; 14А,В; 19B) TYPE MATERIAL НоготүрЕ: d, Searys Scrub. Cooloola National Park, southeastern Queensland, 26"08'S, 153°03'E, in com- plex notophyll rainforest on sand, 3-8.5.1976, VED, RJR, QMS15206, PARATYPES: 9, 9М515207; ©, Searys Scrub, Cooloola National Park, 3-8.ii.1976, VED, RJR, 0М514762; 3, Fraser 1, 25°33°S, 152°59°E, 19,x.1977, T, Schaeffer, QMS14760; 2 9, Camp Milo, Cooloola National Park, 3-8,1.1976, VED, RJR, QMS14759; d, Teewah Ck, Cooloola, 13.vir.1973, RJR, QMS14761. All in southeastern Queensland. ETYMOLOGY From the type locality, Cooloola National Park. DIAGNOSIS Medium size. Venter with well defined trapezoid area with two pale lines (Fig, 110), Tegulum longer than wide; tegular process acute, pointing ventro-posteriorly. Median septum longer than lateral lobes; insemination ducts with one coil and loose apical fold. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 7.7, CW 6.6, AL 7.2, AW 4.4. Spination: femora 1-11 323, TEV 321(2); patellae I-IV 101; tibiae HIE 2326, IV 2226. д palp (Fig. 14A,B): tibial apophysis broad, spathu- late, mound on anterior edge and tooth midway on posterior margin. Female: CL 7.2, CW 6.2. AL 11.9, AW 8.0. Spination: femora I-ITI 323, IV 321; patellae I, П, IV 101, III 001; tibiae I, IT 2026, TII 20(1)26, IV 22226. Epigynum (Fig, 1 1 M,N). NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS AN UNASSIGNED SPECIES Heteropoda raveni sp.nov. (Figs 13A-C; 19C) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: 9, Gordon Ck, Iron Ra., northeastern Queensland, 12°44'S, 143°17°E, 24-30.vi.1976, RJR, VED, QMS14805. PARATYPES: 3 9, same data, QMS21187; 9, Iron Ra., 1-17.viii.1978, GVC, SVD, QMS14804. ETYMOLOGY For Robert Raven, my colleague and co-collec- tor of many spiders. DIAGNOSIS Large with dark cross-bars on legs. Pale venter. MOO as wide as long. Clypeus more than x2 AME (Fig. 13C) cf. H. acuta (Fig. 14 C). Narrow ridge to halfway down median septum; insemina- tion ducts 4 coil. DESCRIPTION Female (holotype): CL 11.3, CW 10.0, AL 12.3, AW 7.5. Eyes: both rows recurved from top - AR straight from front, Legs: 2413. Spination: femora IIH 323, IV 331; patellae I-H 001, IV 101; ubiae Т, П 2026, III 2126, 1V 2226. Epigynum (Fig. 13A,B): pale, lightly sclerotized insemination duct with half a coil; spermathecae without obvious prolateral bulge (cf. hermitiy group). Variation: dorsal tibial spination of IIT, TY was variable in other fernales. The male is unknown. REMARKS Н. raveni resembles the hermiitis group in having a ridge on the median septum. However along with other differences the structure of the internal epigynum is so different from the many coils. of the hermitis group, that raveni is unas- signed to 4 group; the discovery of a male may resolve its placement. THE HERMITIS GROUP Medium-sized to large spiders. Pattern on dor- sal abdomen not always clearly defined, venter pale. Legs, 2143 or 21243. MOQ slightly longer than wide, Embolus arising anteriorly or mid- retrolaterally on tegulum, almost encircling it to he on outside of conductor. Longitudinal ridge on median septum of epigynum; 312-7 coils in in- semination duct; lobed spermathecae. 107 Heteropoda hermitis (Hogg) and the following new species, Н. marillana, H. spenceri, H. caver- nicola, Н. renibulbis, Н. kalbarri, and Н. groateeylandi, Heteropoda marillana sp.nov. (Figs 2M; I3F; 18) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: d, Marillana Station, Western Australia, 22°38'S, 119724'E, 15.vii.1964, A.M. Douglas, WAM88/1948. ETYMOLOGY From the type locality, Marillana Station. DIAGNOSIS The front row of eyes 1s slightly procurved. Tibial apophysis with tapering hook on posterior edge. DESCRIPTION Male: CL 8.8, CW 8.0, AL 9.4, AW 5.6. Eyes: AME:ALE:PME:PLE is 20:45:30:50. AME small, on mound, AR slightly procurved from top, strongly procurved from front, PR recurved. Clypeus more than x2 AME, Leg spination: femora I-I 323, IV 321; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae 1-11 2326, IV 22(3)26. $ palp (Fig. 13F): ratio of cymbium length: cymbial tip is 1:0.6; tegulum rounded; tegular flange retrolateral, Embolus very long, filiform, arising anteriorly and encir- cling tegulum. Tibial apophysis rectangular with distal tapering hook on posterior edge. The female is uriknown. REMARKS H. marillana is the only species that has a slightly procurved anterior row of eyes. The small AME on a tubercle probably result in the slight procurvature of the AR and longer than usual clypeus. Heteropoda spenceri sp.nov. (Figs 13D,E; 18) TYPE MATERIAL HoLoTYPE: 9, Barrow Ck, Northern Territory, 21737'S, 133753" E, 1902, Spencer and Gillen Expedi- tion, VMK-3003. ETYMOLOGY For Sir Baldwin Spencer who led the expedi- lion during which this spider was collected, 108 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM FIG. 13. A-C, Heteropoda raveni; D,E, Н. spenceri; F, Н. marillana; С.Н, Н. cavernicola; LJ, H. hermitis; K-N, H. renibulbis (K,L, Aurukun, Queensland; M,N, Alligator R., Northern Territory). A,B,D,E,G-N, epigyna; C, eyes from front; F, $ palp. NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS DIAGNOSIS Medium size. Median septum of epigynum heart-shaped narrowing posteriorly, as long as lateral lobes. DESCRIPTION Female: CL 8.0, CW 7.4, AL 9.4, AW 6.2. Spination: femora and patellae as in marillana, tibiae I-IV 2226. Epigynum (Fig. 13D,E): ridge on median septum is broad and short, poorly delineated. Insemination ducts with 3l^ coils. spermathecae with antero-prolateral lobe. The male is unknown. Heteropoda hermitis (Hogg) comb. nov. (Figs 13LJ; 14C,D: 18) (Оох hermitis Hogg, 1914: 85, TYPE MATERIAL SYNTYPES: 3 juvenile ? Ф Olios hermitis, Hermite 1., Montebello Islands, Western Australia, 20°28"S, 115?31'E, not examined, OTHER MATERIAL Western Australia: $, Barrow 1., 2046 5, 115?24^ E, 10.11.1977, Н. Heatwole, W.H, Butler, WAMSS&/1940; 9 Lowendal L, 20°39'S, 1 15?34E, iii.1985, W.R. But- ler, WAM88/1947: 4 Woodstock Stn, 21°36'S, 118958" E, 2.v. 1988, J. Dell, WAM90/1170. DIAGNOSIS Large. Embolus arising antero-retrolaterally giving tegulum a kidney shape. Median septum of epigynum rounded distally; insemination duct with 314 coils. DESCRIPTION Male: CL 7.8, CW 7.0, AL 7.5, AW 4.5. Eyes: AR slightly recurved, PR recurved. Ratio AME:ALR:PME:PLE is 22:33:25:36. Legs: 21-43, Spination: femora I-11 323, IV 321; patel- lac I-IV 101; tibiae I-IV 2226. Long setae on metatarsus II, & palp (Fig. 14C,D): ratios of cymbium length: cymbial tip is 1:0.4. Long, tapering conductor, tegular flange short. Tibial apophysis directed forwards tapering to a point, almost parallel to axis of cymbium. Female: CL 10.7, CW 9.4, AL 11.2, AW 7.0. Eyes and leg spination similarto male. Epigynum (Fig. 131,J): broad, rounded median septum, as long as lateral lobes; insemination ducts with 314 coils, spermathecae bilobed. Heteropoda cavernicola sp.nov. (Figs 13G.H; 18) TYPE MATERIAL. HOLOTYPE: ? , Napier Range, entrance chamber of Old Napier Cave, Western Australia, 17?14' S, 124"4]'E, 9.vii, 1966, A.M. Douglas, G.W. Kendrick, WAM74/119. ETYMOLOGY From the Latin caverna meaning a cave, DIAGNOSIS Large. Median septum of epigynum oval, shorter than Lateral lobes, insemination ducts with 3V5 coils, DESCRIPTION Female: CL9.6, CW 8,6, AL 10.5, AW 6.6. Leg spination: several legs are missing, tibiae TIT, IV 2226, similar to H. hermitis. Epigynum (Fig. 13G,H): median septum shorter than lateral lobes otherwise like H. hermitis with 314 coils in in- semination ducts and bilobed spermathecae. The male is unknown. Heteropoda renibulbis sp.nov, (Figs 2); 13K-N; 14E,F; 18) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: d, West Alligator R. mouth, Northern Territory, 12715 S, 132" 16 E, 22-24.vii.1979, GBM, DC, QMS15235. PARATYPES: Northern Territory: d, Gorge NE of Mt Gilruth, 13°02°S, 133"05 E, 10-13.vii.1979, GBM, DC, QMS15119; 9, Kemp Airstrip (rainforest) 12234'S, 131719'E, 24-25.vii,1979, GBM, DC, QMS15120,2 $, Kemp Airstrip, 15-16.xi.1979, RJR, 0М515114; d, North Point, Kapalga, 12^36'8, 132°25'E, 19,vii.1979, GBM, DC, QMSIS113; 4, Radon СК, 14-16.х.1979, GBM, DC, QMS15121; 9, Radon Ck, 14.xi.1979, RJR, QMS15122; d, South Alligator Inn, 7-9.vii.1979, GBM, DC, QMS15111; 2 Ф. same locality, x1,1979, RJR, QMS15112; 5, West Alligator Е. mouth, 12°15°S, 132°15°Е, 20- 22.vii.1979, GBM, DC, QMS15117; 2, same locality, 22-24ү1і.1979, GBM, DC, QMS15236; 4 9, West Alligator Mouth, xi.1979, RJR, QMS15116; 9, Dar- win, 12°27°S, 130^15'E, 22.viii.1963, Е. Cosmos, WAMS8/1959; 9, Darwin, 1969, A.D. Smith, WAM88/1960; 9, 5, Kakadu, 17.viii.1980, Н, Par- naby, AMKS19553; 9, same data, AMKS20471; 9, Daly R., G.C, Chapman, А.Е. Shaw, 1913, VMK3007, Western Australia: 2 9, Wotjulum Mission, via Derby, 17?19'S, 123°38’E, x.1955, A. Douglas, WAM88/927, 110 58/928; Northeastern Queensland: 9, Aurukun, 13°21°S, 141?44'S, Cape York Peninsula, xi.1978, GJI, QMS15241; 2 9, Aurukun, xi.1978, СЛ, QMS15115; d, Normanby Stn. via Cooktown, 11.1985, D. Bell, QMS15123. Torres Strait: 9, Horn L, 10°37°S, 142? 17 E, 24-271. 1975, RIR, QMS15125; 9. Badu T., 10?07'S, 142°07°E, 20.х11.1976, Н. Heat- wole et al., QMS15124. OTHER MATERIAL 9 (fragments), rainforest site 11/1, SW Osborne 1., 14?23'S, 125?57'E, vi.1988, B.Y. Main, BYM 1988/K759. ETYMOLOGY From the Latin ren meaning kidney and bulbis meaning swelling, referring to the kidney-shaped tegulum of the ¢ palp- DIAGNOSIS Large. Elongate cymbium. Kidney-shaped tegulum; embolus arising antero-retrolaterally; tegular flange short, broad, postero-retrolateral. Median septum of epigynum longer thàn wide, ridge running about half length of septum, in- semination ducts with 6-7 coils. DESCRIPTION Male: CL 11.3, CW 10.4, AL 12.2, AW 6.2. Legs 2143. Spination: femora I-III 323, IV 321, patellae I-IV 101, tibiae 1-11 2226, Ш, IV 2126. d palp (Fig. 14E,F): ratio of length of cymbium: cymbial tip is 1:0.5; tibial apophysis broad, blunt- ly pointed, almost parallel to axis of cymbium. Female: CL 11.5, CW 10.6, AL 15.5, AW 9.7. Spination: similar to male without dorsal spines on tibiae Т, П 2026. Epigynum (Fig. 13K-N): median septum as long as lateral lobes; 1nsemina- tion ducts with 614 coils. REMARKS The females from Aurukun differ in having 6 coils in insemination ducts; the male from Cape York Peninsula is similar to renibulbis. Females from the Torres Strait vary from 5-7 coils in insemination ducts; no males have been collected from these localities. Heteropoda kalbarri sp.nov. (Figs 15A,B; 18) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: 9, Kalbarri National Park, Western Australia, 27°48'S, 114?28'E, 12-17.1.1969, Kalbarri Survey, МАМ88/1945. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM PaRATYPE: 2 Wal-Arne Pool, Westem Australia, 25°47°S, 115°58'E, 7.v.1989, D. Knowles, WAM90/827. ETYMOLOGY From the type locality, Kalbarri National Park. DIAGNOSIS Large. Median septum of epigynum broaden- ing in middle. DESCRIPTION Female: CL 12.5, CW 11.0. Abdomen damaged. Spination: femora 1-Ш 323, IV 322; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae I, П 2026, III, IV 2226. Epigynum (Fig. 15A,B): longitudinal ridge along length of median septum, insemination ducts with 5 coils, spermathecae bi-lobed. The male is unknown. Heteropoda grooteeylandt sp.nov. (Figs 13H; 15C; 18) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: 9, Groote Eylandt, Gulf of Carpentaria, Northern Territory, 14^06' S, 136°28'E, 4.1.1929, Rey, Warren, AMKS19630. ETYMOLOGY From the type locality, Groote Bylandt. DIAGNOSIS Large. Median septum of epigynum longer than lateral lobes; ridge running length of septum. DESCRIPTION Female: CL 13.1, CW 10.7, AL 14.0, AW 8.0. Spination: femora I-III 323, IV 321; patellae I-IV 101, tibiae I-H 2026; ТУ 2126. Epigynum (Fig. 15C,D): median septum truncated with ridge run- ning almost length of septum; insemination ducts with 5 coils; spermathecae roughly tri-lobed. The male is unknown. Yiinthi gen.nov. ETYMOLOGY Yiinthiis the Aboriginal word for a large brown ground-living spider in the Lochhart region of Cape York Peninsula, northern Queensland. The genus is feminine, TYPE SPECIES Yiinthi spathula sp.nov. NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS i11 DIAGNOSIS lion on anterior edge (Fig. 14H). Epigynal Carapace with pale cephalic region, in some fossae inverted pear-shape (Fig. 156) ....... females limited to a pale line from foveatoeye vr een emen lycodes group. Dorsal abdomen with pale, cardiac region. MOQ slightly longer than wide. Postero- 4. Medium size. Long embolic flagellum; post- retrolateral area of d cymbium usually extended flagellar embolus curved and pointed (Fig. posteriorly and slightly concave ventrally. Long, 15M). 9 insemination duct with small dor- thick embolic structure with ‘pars pendula’ and sal lobe (Fig. 4D) ............ ‚.. Sparhula sub-terminal flagellum (sec arrow in Fig. 14G). Large. Short embolic flagellum; post-flagel- Conductor arising mid-prolaterally, spoon- lar embolus straight, blunt (Fig. 17C). 9 in- shaped distally, Without tegular process. Tibial semination duct with large dorsal lobe (Fig. apophysis digitiform, with or without projection Ur P Ыы mein iela rioba plela plola ploert pletteh chillagoe on anterior edge. Wide short 9 insemination ducts; loosely looped, elongate spermathecae. 5. Large. Post-flagellar portion of embolus very short (Fig. 17K). d tibial apophysis with DESCRIPTION small pointed process on anterior edge. General colour pattern similar to Heteropoda. Three dorsal spines on d tibiae ( 9 not Thoracic region of carapace pale orange-brown О yet tk ge cor f molloyensis centrally, darker laterally. Dark crescent-shaped Small. Post-flagellum portion of embolus area around posterior end of fovea; pale band short, pointed (Fig. 17G). d tibial posterior to this. Three pairs of dark spots with apophysis with pointed spur on anterior chevron-shaped posterior marking (cf. broad W edge (Fig, Hia Two dorsal spines on d marking of Hereropoda). Venter with or without tibiae . i^ oe .anzsesorum pattern. Legs laterigrade, 2143, 21-43 or 2413. Scopula on all metatarsi amd tarsi, thinning — 6. Thick, smooth, tapering $ embolus with proximally on metatarsi HI, ТУ, long tapering spiral flagellum (Fig. 16E). 2 median septum with short transverse bar KEY TO YIINTHI SPP. (Fig. 171). T Lae -kakadu Very broad embolus with short, steaight 1. Small, medium or large spiders. Brown flagellum; pars pendula well-developed trapezoid area of venter with two pale bands (Fig. 161). 9 median septum with broad laterally and two pale lines paramedially. transverse bar. anchor- EO isi I7M,O) . Simple entrance to $ insemination ducts eee cee sss Renee 1 ТИРЕНЕ spathula group . : ZEE 2 7. 2 insemination ducts with lateral lobe (Fig. Small, Trapezuid ai area uae itn, Ad pale, ЖИН ог VIN i оро ЛҮҮ" gallonae without monling. Chitinous intucking at ? insemination duct withont lateral lobe entrance to 9 insemination ducts (Fig. 17]... (Fig. 17P) (G not known) ........ torresiana Kakadu groüp .......................‹ 6 THE SPATHULA GROUP 2. д embolus with obvious pars pendula (Fig. 151): post-flagellar portion curved, pointed Medium to large spiders. Venter with brown or blunt. ? median septum long with small trapezoid area with two pale bands laterally and transverse bar ....... ed two discontinuous lines para-medially. Projec- d embolus with reduced pars pendula (Fig. tion on anterior edge of d tibial apophysis. 17K); post-flagellar portion short, straight; Epigynum without chitinous intucking at pointed. ? median septum, short, with deep gonopores. tongue-like bar .................. brated Yiinthi spathula sp.nov., Y. lycodes (Thorell), and the new species Y. chillagoe, Y. molloyensiy, 3. Pre-flagellar embolus smooth-edged (Fig. and Y. anzsesorum. 15M). Tibial apophysis with pointed projec- tion on anterior edge. Epigynal fossae oval Yiinthi lycodes (Thorell, 1881) comb.nov. in shape (Fig. ISK) oo... cee ee ness 4 (Figs 14G,H; 15E-J; 20) Pre-flagellar embolus with sinuous, flanged edge. Tibial apophysis with rounded projec- Heteropoda lycades Thorell, 1881: 282,697. 112 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM ЫЗ + N © © а ш © [21 wi 2 M r1 © w Е Е Z FIG. 14. A,B, Heteropoda cooloola; C,D, Н, hermitis; E,F, H. renibulbus; G,H, Yiinthi lycodes; (G, arrow to flagellum); I,J, Y. spathula. A-J, 3 palps and tibial apophyses. NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS 113 FIG. 15. A,B, Heteropoda kalbarri; C,D, Н. grooteeylandr, E-J, Yiinthi lycodes; K-N, Y. spathula. A-D,G,H,K,L, epigyna; E, dorsal; F, ventral abdomen; I,J, M,N, emboli and conductors. 114 Heteropoda fusciventris Chrysanthus, 1965; 366, figs, 52-58, 65 - new synonymy. TvPE MATERIAL SyNTYPES: d, 2 juv., Somerset, Cape York, 10745'S, 142?35'E, L.M. D'Albertis, MCG. OTHER MATERIAL Holotype 9, allotype, d, 5 9, 8 d, Merauke, Irian Jaya, 8°30°S, 140°22°E, 1956/1957, Br. Monulf, RMNH (types of Heteropoda fusciventris); d, Lock- erhie Scrub, QMS14992; 2 9 , same data, 0М5 15000; d, 4 juv. QMS14989; d, Lake Boronto, QMS14984; 9. Bamaga, QM 14991: ©, Bamaga, QMS12493; ©, Jardine R., QMS15002; 2, Dulhunty R.. QMS14988; 6 9, campsite Gordon Ck, Iron Ra., QMS14974; 39, 34,QMS14975;2 9, QMS21194; с, 5 „Ітоп Rä., prey of Poecilolhomisus speciosus, QMSIS143, 1 d, Portland Roads, 9М814994; 2 2, Weatherstation Ck, QMS15003; d, Silver Plains, QMSI5004: 9, Cape Flattery, QMS21190; 9 , Cooktown, QMS14987; 3 d, 5 9, Mt Cook, QMS14990; 1 2, 8 ©, egg sac, same dala, QMS14979: 2, Amos Bay, QMS14998; 2 2, QMS14985; Home Rule: QMS14983; 2 3, 2 9, QMS14986; 4,5 9, QMS14980; 9 3,5 9, Shiptons Flat, QMS14977; 4 d, 6 2, Gap Ck, Twelve Mile Scrub. QMS 14981. Allin northern Queensland. DIAGNOSIS Medium-sized spiders. Pre-flagellar portion of & embolus sinuous; embolic tip almost straight; tibial apophysis with rounded projection on anterior edge. Inverted pear-shaped fossae on either side of 9 median septum. DESCRIPTION Male (syntype): CL 8.00, CS 6.7, AL 7.3, AW 4.7. Colour: carapace faded (Fig. 15E); abdomen dorsally brown with lighter-coloured median band; venter (Fig. 15Е) brown, with dark brown trapezoid area with two converging white lines enclosed by light lateral bands; epigastric region with brown rectangular area and two elongate oval white areas. Spination: femora 1-111 323, IV 321; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae 1-Ш 2226, IV 2126. d palp (Figs 14G,H; 151,J): postero-retrolateral area of cymbium hollowed with rounded lateral projection. Tegulum a little longer than wide: distal spoon-shaped region of conductor with concavity facing cymbium. Tibial apophysis with rounded projection on anterior edge. Female: CL 8.5, CS 8.1, AL 10.9, AW 6.3. Spination: femora I-II 323, ШУУ 321; patellae I-IV 001; tibiae I-IV 2026. Epigynum (Fig 15G,H): Long, narrow median septum, inverted MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM pear-shaped fossae; wide insemination ducts with lobe at junction of S-shaped spermathecae. The females vary in size. REMARKS Y. lycodes is widely distributed in North Queensland and is sympatric with Y. spathula at Iron Ra. It also occurs in Irian Jaya. Yiinthi spathula sp.nov. (Figs 2D; 141,7; 15К-М; 20) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: d, Gordon Ck, Iron Range, northeastern Queensland, 12?44'S, 143?17' E, 23-30.vi.1976, VED, RIR. QMS15187. PARATYPES: Iron Range: $, Gordon Ck, QMS15188, 15 8,25 ?,23-30.v1.1976, VED, RIR, QMS14973; 2 9, egg sac, 24.vi.1976, VED, RJR, QMSI5144; 9. 28.vi.1976, RJR, QMS15146; d, 1-17.viii, 1978, СУС, SVD. 0М515141. ©, Lamond Hill, summit, 12°43°S, 143"18'E, VED, RIR, QMS15145; 9 4, VED, RJR, QMS15142; ?, Claudie К, х1.1913- 11.1914, J-A. Kershaw, VM. ETYMOLOGY From the Latin spatha meaning a spoon, refer- ring to the spoon-shaped conductor of the 3 palp- DIAGNOSIS Medium-sized. Pre-flagellar portion of em- bolus smooth-edged; embolic tip curved; tibial apophysis with pointed projection on anterior edge, Oval-shaped fossae on either side of 9 median septum. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 7.6, CW 6.6, AL 6.9, AW 4.3. Spination: femora 1-1 323, ТЕУ 321; patel- lae LIY 101; tibiae 1-Ш 2226, IEV 2126. 4 palp (Figs 141,J; 15M,N): postero-retrolateral area of cymbium, flattened with small triangular projec- tion laterally. Female: CL 8.45, CW 7.4, AL 10.6, AW 7.7. Spination: femora I-III 323, IV 321; patellae I-IV 001: tibiae I-II 2026, IV 2126. Epigynum (Fig. I5K,L): long narrow median septum, oval fossae; wide insemination ducts with dorsal lobe at junc- tion with looped, sac-like spermathecae, The females vary in size. REMARKS Y. spathula has been collected only from mesophyll vine forest from Iron Ra. in far north- eastern Queensland. The shapes of ? fossae and NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS 115 888076 imm199kU 850Е1 FIG. 16. A,B,G,H, Yiinthi chillagoe; C.D, Y. molloyensis (flagellum broken); E,F, Y. kakadu; 1,1, Y. gallonae. A-F,LJ, d palps and tibial apophyses; С, tip of embolus and conductor; Н, tip of embolus. 116 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM FIG. 17. A-D, Yiinthi chillagoe; E-H, Y. anzsesorum; I,J, Y. kakadu; K,L, Y. molloyensis; M,N, Y. gallonae; O,P, Y. torresiana. A,B,E,F,1,J,M-P, epigyna; C,D,K,L, emboli and conductors; G,H, 5 palp and tibial apophysis. NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS pre-flagellar embolus distinguish it from X. lycodes. Yiinthi chillagoe sp.nov. (Figs 16A,B,G,H; 17A-D; 20) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: d, Donna Cave, Chillagoe, north Queensland, 17°09°S, 144°31'E, 4.vii.1984, F.D. Stone, F.G. Howarth, QMS14754. PARATYPES: Chillagoe limestone caves: 9, Markham Tower, Surprise Packet Cave, 30,у1,1984. F.G. Howarth, QMS14757; d, Suicide Tower, Christmas Pot Cave, 29.y1,1984, F.D, Stone, QMS14758; 9, Royal Arch Cave, 2.vii, 1984, F.D. Stone, QMS14755; 9, Spring Cave, 28.vi, 1984, F.G. Howarth, QMS14756; 3, 18.vii. 1978, R. Mascord, AMKS4131; $. same data, AMKS4132. ETYMOLOGY From Chillagoe, the type locality. DIAGNOSIS Large. Pre-flagellar portion of embolus smooth-edged, short flagellum, digitiform post- flagellar region. Tibial apophysis with pointed spur-like projection on anterior edge. Median septum broadening posteriorly to form transverse bar. Very wide insemination ducts with large dorsal lobes. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 11.9, CW 11.5, AL 10.8, AW 6.9. Spination: femora І-Ш 323, 1У 321(2): patellae LII 001, Til, TV 101; tibiae I, П 2026, IH, ТУ 2226. д palp (Figs 16A,B,G,H; 17C,D): hairy cymbium, postero-retrolateral extension with large low rounded lateral projection. Female: CL 12.7, CW 11.2, AL 11.5, AW 9.2. Spination: femora 1-1 323, IV 321; patellae I. 11 001, III, IV 101; tibiae I, И 2026, IN, IV 2226. Epigynum (Fig. 17A,B). Yiinthi molloyensis sp.nov. (Figs 16C,D; 17K,L; 20) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: 2, Mt Molloy, northeastern Queensland, 16°41'S, 145720 E, (exact locality unknown) ix.1969, F. Little, QMS15238, ETYMOLOGY From Mt Molloy, the type locality, 117 DIAGNOSIS Large. Embolus smooth with long fine flagel- lum; very short, straight post-flagellar embolic up. Tibial apophysis with small pointed projec- tion on anterior edge. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 9.4, CW 8.1, AL 9.8, AW 6.0. Spination: femora I-III 323, IV 321; patellae LIV 101; tibiae I-IV 2326. d palp (Figs 16C,D; 17K,L): postero-retrolateral area of cymbium hollowed without lateral projection. Tegulum al- most as wide as long. The female is unknown. REMARKS Y. mollovensis differs from other Yiinthi spp. by having 3 dorsal spines on З tibiae. Yiinthi anzsesorum sp.nov. (Figs 17E-H; 20) TYPE MATERIAL HororvPE: d, Hann Tableland, 13km W of Marecba, north. Queensland, 17°00’S, 145?17'E, 2.xii.1088- 17.1.1989, R. Storey, G. Dickinson, ex malaise trap, QDPI Ar1425, QMS21196. PARATYPES: 9, same data as holotype, QMS21197; 9, creek camp nr McLeod, Windsor Tableland, 16?14' S. 145702" E, 26-7.xii. 1980, AE, QMS15197. ETYMOLOGY From the acronym, ANZSES for the Australian and New Zealand Schools Exploration Society, the collectors. DIAGNOSIS Small, Embolus smooth with long tapering flagellum; post-flagellar portion short, pointed. Membrancous conductor, broadening slightly to sinuous boat-shape, pointed distally. Tibial apophysis tapering to curved tip; pointed process on anterior edge. Median septum barely apparent; lateral lobes converging giving a key-hole ap- pearance to epigynum. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 5,0, CW 4.6, AL 5.0, AW 3.8. Legs 21243. Spination: leg 1 missing; femora TL, TH 323, IV 321; patellae I-IV 101; tibiae IT, 1112226, IV, 2126. d palp (Fig. 17G,H): tegulum as wide as long, cymbium without postero- retrolateral extension. Female: CL 5.0, CW 4.4, AL 7.2, AW 5.3. Spination: femora 1-1 323, IV 321; patellae I, П, 118 IV 000, III 001; tibiae 1 1026, II-IV 2026. Epigynum (Fig. 17E,F). THE KAKADU GROUP Small spiders. Legs 21=43 or 2413. Venter without pattern or pale with some mottling. Without projection on anterior edge of d tibial apophysis. Epigynum with chitinous intuckings at gonopores. Yiinthi kakadu sp.nov., Y. gallonae sp.nov., Y. torresiana Sp.nov. Yiinthi kakadu sp.nov. (Figs 16E,F; 171,J; 20) TYPE MATERIAL HOLOTYPE: d, Radon Ck, Mt Brockman, Kakadu National Park, Northern Territory, 12955, 132^53' E, 14.х1.1979, RJR, QMS15195. PARATYPES: Northern Territory: 9, same data as holotype, QM 515196; 9, Radon Ck, open forest, 14.xi.1979, QMS 14834; 3 4,2 9, South Alligator Inn, 12°40’S, 132°30’E, 7-9.xi.1979, RJR, QMS14836; 4 3,2 9, West Alligator R. mouth, 12?11'S, 132?16' E, MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM 10-12.xi.1979, RJR, QMS14837. 9, same data, QMS14835. Western Australia: 9, Walcott Inlet, 16?23'S, 124?29'E, 18.vi.1988, B.Y. Main, BYM 88/K1051; 2 9? , Misery Spring, Old Lissadell Hmstd, 16°41'S, 128°33'Е, 23.x.1971, RJM, WAM88/1967- 8. ETYMOLOGY From the Kadadu National Park, the locality of the holotype and many of the paratypes. DIAGNOSIS Small. Venter without pattern. Thick smooth, tapering embolus with long tapering spiral flagel- lum, post flagellar embolus very short. Pale chitinous intuckings form dorsal flanges round openings to insemination ducts. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CL 5.8, CW 5.2, AL 6.9, AW 4.7. Legs 21=43. Spination: femora I-III 323, IV 321; patellae I-IV, 101; tibiae I, II 2226, IIT, IV 2126. d palp (Fig. I6E,F): postero-retrolateral cymbium, hollowed without lateral projection. Posterior portion of tibial apophysis pointed. mw ow E Hh 1 х AUS : 4» | / yor < A 4 БҸ J Ф (4&1 bw у ГА БИ _ Э. mZ Є > | / Ы, * Y. | 1 ( ) " ( > che \ M M | Y 5 x Р | / ) M i + ө E e й \, № ш c^ - / 4 / -+ Н. cavernicola SU c» | А H. orooteeylandt Ane | C] H. hermitis КА % | _) . Iu ans “> H. renibulbi И Y Н. kalbarrd j X e reet Ж Н. spenceri ЕТТУ КИН d frets o Н, venatoria Жж Н. marillana 4 Н Чате нні Жз HT moneda !.. warrumbungle Fig. 18. Distribution of Heteropoda spp. in Australia. NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS . bellendenker binnaburra conwayensls eungella gordonensis . mossman . procera IIIIIII ж mec v Mo ec I IIITIIIII 119 = & alta A Н. acuta . cervina H. bulburin . cooloola BS [. H. crediton distincta ; €» Н, goonaneman . hillerae Q H. holaventris cook i Н. monteithi . rundle - H. nagarigoon vespersa 1 H i . Willunga 492301 €: << <~~<~~<~< anzsesorum chillagoe gallonae kakadu lycodes molloyensis spathula torresiana ^ SED p= y ү, m Е; de gt РА E " / 4 У “Re “а "o ET Fig. 20. Distribution of Yiinthi spp. in northern Australia. 120 Female: CL 5.8, Cw 5.2, AL 6.7, AW 4.2. Spination: femora I-III 323, TV 321; patellae T, IT, ТУ 001, III 101; tibial I-IV 2026. Epigynum (Fig. 171,7): lateral lobes converging; 9 median sep- tum with short transverse bar. Yiinthi gallonae sp. nov. (Figs 161,7; 17M,N; 20) TYPE MATERIAL. HororvPE d, Bamaga, northern Queensland, 10°53'S, 142°24'Е, 8.xii. 1986, JG, QMS21200. Paratyres: 9, Lockerbie Scrub, Cape York, 9.х11.1986, JG, $13019; & (freshly moulted), Locker- bie Scrub, 28.viii. 1985, M. Bennie, QMS 15007. Torres Strait: 2 8, Horn 1, 10°37'S, 1422] 7' E, 2-8.xii. 1986, JG, QMS12363; 2 4, 9, Yorke Is, 9"44'S, 145"25' E, 27-28.xi.1986, JG, 0М521201; 5 9, same data, QMS12436; 9? , Yorke Is. 13.vii. 1974, Н. Heatwole, E. Cameron, QMS15148; d, 2 9, Yam 1., 9°53'5, 142745" E, 28.xi-2.xii.1986, JG, QMS12421. ETYMOLOGY In honour of the late Julie-Ann Gallon, collec- tor of the holotype. DIAGNOSIS Small. Venter pale with mottling, embolus very broad; with short straight flagellum; pars pendula well developed with antenor sclerotized ridge. Conductor, broadly stalked, deep jug-shape dis- tally. Pale chitinous intuckings round openings to 9 insemination ducts; median septum anchor- shaped. DESCRIPTION Male (holotype): CI 5.6, CW 5.2, AL 5.8, AW 3.8, Legs: 2413. Spination: femora I, 11 323, ПІ 313, IV 321; patellae 1-1 101, IV 001; tibiae І, H 2226, 11 22(1)26, IV 2126. d palp (Fig. 161.7): postero-retrolateral cymbium hollowed ventral- ly. Tibial apophysis stout, digiuform, inwardly curved tip. Female: CL 4.6, CW 4.2, AL 5.1, AW 3.3. Pale venter with red-brown mottling. Legs 2413. Spination: femora 1-1 323, IV 321; patellae I-11I 000, IV 001; tibiae 1 1026, H, 11 2026, IV 2126. Epigynum (Fig. 17M,N): median septum anchor- shaped; insemination ducts with small lateral lobes. MEMOIRS OF THE.QUEENSLAND MUSUEM Yiinthi torresiana sp.nov. (Figs 170, P; 20) TYPE MATERIAL | НО1.ОТҮРЕ: $9. Moa I., Torres Strait, 10°11°5, 142?16'E, along fresh water creek, savannah wood- Тапа, 23.11.1975, E. Cameron, QMS15199. PARATYPES: 2 9, same data as holotype, QMS15147; wole, E, Cameron, QMS15149. ETYMOLOGY From Torres Strait, general locality of the is- lands, DIAGNOSIS Small. 2 median septum anchor-shaped; chitinous intuckings al gonopores; insemination ducts without lateral lobes. DESCRIPTION Female (holotype): CL 5.4, CW 4.9, AL 7.1, AW 4.8. Venter mottled with pale trapezoid area. Legs 2413. Spination: femora I-II 323, TV 321: patella 1 000, II-TV 001; tibiae I 1026, H-IV 2026. Epigynum (Fig. 17O,P). The male is unknown. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Тат grateful to the following curators for loans of material: Dr G. Rack and Dr Н. Dastych, Zoologisches Institut und Museum, Hamburg (ZMH); Mr P.D. Hillyard and Mr F. Wanless, British Museum of Natural History, London (BM); Dr L. van der Hammen, Rijksmuseum уап Natuurlijke Historie Leiden (RMNH), Dr M. Moritz, Zoologisches Museum der Humboldt Universitat Berlin (ZMB); Drs L. Capocaccia and б. Arbocco, Museo Civico di Stona Naturale, Genova (MCG); Dr M. Gray, Australian Museum, Sydney (AM); Dr D. Lee and D. Hirst, South Australian Museum, Adelaide (SAMA); Dr M. Harvey, Western Australian Museum (WAM); Dr A. Neboiss, Museum of Victoria, (VM) Dr A. Wells, Northern Territory (NTM); М5 J. Grimshaw, Department of Primary In- dustry, Entomology Collections, Brisbane (QDPI) and Dr B.Y. Main, University of Western Australia (BYM). 1 am grateful for the support of the Interim Council of the Australian Biological Resources Study which funded the survey of rainforests during which many of the spiders were collected. Thanks alsa to Earthwatch and the NEW AUSTRALIAN HUNTSMAN SPIDERS 121 Centre for Field Research, Boston, Mass. U.S.A. for supporting the expedition to Bellenden Ker. This project owes much to many people. It was begun in collaboration with Dr R.J. Raven in 1977 and Тат indebted to him for early descrip- tions, measurements, drawings and scanning electron micrographs. Sybil Monteith and Clare Bremner contributed illustrations and Chris Lambkin helped with the lay-out of figures. David Nebauer assembled the maps from the locality data. Recent scanning micrographs were taken by Don Gowanlock of the Electron Micro- scope Centre of the University of Queensland. Dr J. Coddington demonstrated how best to see the tapetum of freshly killed Heteropoda jugulans and Holconia immanis. The Rev. D.A, Thompson of Nungalinya College, Darwin gave me the in- formation on the Aboriginal word, 'yiinthi'. The Board of Trustees and the Directorate nf the Queensland Museum have been very supportive, especially in the final phase of the work, My thanks to many members of staff, particularly Peta Woodgate who saw the manuscript through all but its final stages and Jennifer Mahoney who saw it to completion. LITERATURE CITED BONNET, P. 1957. 'Bibliographia Araneorum'. Vol. 2; 1925-3026. (Douladoure: Toulouse), BRIGNOLI, Р.М. 1983. “А catalogue of the Araneac". (Manchester University Press: Manchester, UK). CHRYSANTHUS, P. 1965. Spiders from South New Guinea VII. Nova Guinea 34: 345-369. HIRST, D.B. 1989. A revision of the genus Pediana Simon (Heteropodidae : Araneac) in Australia. Records of the South Australian Museum 23(2): 113-126. 1990. A review of the genus Jsopeda L. Koch (Heteropodidae: Arancae) m Australasia with descriptions of two new genera. Records of the South Australian Museum 24(1): 11-26. 1991s. Revision of Australian species of the genus Holconia Thorell (Heteropodidae: Araneae). Records of the South Australian Museum 24(2): 91-109. 1991b, Revision of the Australian genus Eodelena Hogg and Zachria L. Koch (Heteropodidae: Araneae). Records of the South. Australian Museum 25(1): 1-17. HOGG, H.R. 1902. On the Australasian spiders of the subfamily Sparassinae, Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London 1902(2): 414-466. 1914, Spiders from the Montebello Islands. Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London 1914: 49-92. JARVI, T.H. 1912. Das vaginalsystem der sparassiden. I. Eine morphologische, systematische und zoogeographische studie über eine Spinnen- familie. Allgemeiner Teil, Annales Academiae Scientiarum Fennicae 4: 1-13]. 1914. Das vaginalsystem der sparassiden 11. Bine morphologische, systematiche und zoogeographische studie über eine spinnen- familie. Spezieller Teil. Annales Academiac scientiarum fennicae 4: 118-235. KOCH, L. 1867. Beschreibungen neuer Arachniden und Myriapoden. Verhandlungen der Zoologisch -Botanischen Gesellschaft in Wien 17: 373-250. 1875. ‘Die Arachniden Australiens, nach der Natur beschricben und abgebildet. pp. 577-740, (Bauer und Raspe- Nürnberg). 1876. ‘Die Arachniden Australiens, nach der natur beschrieben und abgebildet. pp, 741-888. (Bauer and Raspe: Nürnberg). LATREILLE, Р.А. 1804, Tableau méthodique des In- seetes, Dictionnaire (Nouveau) Histoire Naturelle 24: 131-36. LEVY, С. 1989. The family of hunisman spiders in Israel With annotations on spiders of the Middle: East (Araneae: Sparassidae), Journal of Zoology, London 217(1): 127-176. PLATNICK, N.I. 1989, ‘Advances in spider taxonomy 1981-1987'. (Manchester University Press: Manchester UK). RACK, G. 1961. Die entomologischen sammlungen des Zoologischen Staatsinstituts und Zoologis- chen Museums Hamburg. Mitlerlungen aus dem Hamburgischen Zoologischen Museum und In- stitut 59: 1-60. ROEWER, С.Е, 1954. ‘Katalog der Araneae von 1758 bis 1940, bzw 1954". Vol, 2a. (Institut Royal des Sciences Naturelles de Belgique: Bruxelles). SIMON, E. 1880. Revision de la famille des Sparas- sidae (Arachnides). Actes de la Société Linnéenne de Bordeaux 34: 223-351. STRAND, E. 1907. Spinnen des Zoologischen Instituts in Tübingen (aus dem Kgl. Naturalienkabinett an Stuttgart). Zoologisches Jahrbücher. Abteilung für Systematik 24; 391-468. THORELL, T. 1881. Studi sui Ragni Malesi e Papuan, Part ill. Ragm del’ Austro-Malesia e del Capo York, conservati ncl Museo Civico di Storia Naturale di Genova. Annali del Museo Civico di Stona Naturale di Genova 17: vii-xxvii, 1-720. 122 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSUEM INDEX TO SPECIES Heteropoda Latreille ACUE SPOV veces Soe a rers e 101 monteithi ѕр.поу. .................. 103 ülla роу. о. С I get 92 mossmansp.nov. .................... 90 bellendenker sp.nov. ................ 88 nagarigoon Sp.NOV. .................. 93 binnaburra 5р.поу................... 87 procera (L. Косһ)................... 85 bulburin sp.nov. ................... 100 raveni Sp.nOV. .................... 107 cavernicolasp.nov. ................ 109 renibulbis sp.nov. ................. 109 cervina (L. Koch) .................. 101 rundlesp.nov. .................... 102 conwayensis $р.поу. ................. 99 silvaticasp.nov. .................. 106 cookisp.nov. ...................... 93 spenceri SPMOV. .................. 107 cooloola sp.nov. ................... 106 Spurgeon Sp.NOV. .................. 100 crediton sp.nov. ................... 103 venatoria (Linnaeus) ................. 83 distincta sp.nov. .................... 97 VeSpersa Sp.hnOV. ra cruel Rm ors sent 94 eungella sp.nov. .................... 99 warrumbunglesp.nov. ............... 97 goonanemansp.nov. ............... 100 willunga sp.nov. .................. 102 gordonensis sp.:nOov. ................. 88 grooteeylandt ѕр.поу. ............... 110 Yiinthi gen.nov. hermitis (Hogg) comb.nov. .......... 109 anzsesorum SP.NOV. ................ 117 hillerae spinóv. siue Lr err nhe 93 chillagoe ѕр.поу. .................. 117 holoventris 8р.поу................... 94 gallonae sp.nov. .................. 120 jugulans (L. Косһ).................. 92 kakadu sp.nov. ................... 118 kalbarrisp.nov. ................... 110 lycodes (Thorell) comb.nov. ......... 111 longipessp.nov. .................... 87 molloyensis 5р.пОу................. 117 marillana sp.nov. .................. 107 spathulasp.nov. .................. 114 mohroei Sp:hov, .................... 99 torresiana Sp.hOV. ................. 120 CARIDINA PEDICULTRATA, A NEW FRESHWATER ATYID SHRIMP (CARIDEA:ATYIDAE) FROM HUNAN PROVINCE, CHINA ZHAOLIANG GUO AND SATISH C. CHOY Guo, Z. & Choy, S.C. 1994 06 01: Caridina pedicultrata, à new freshwater alyid shrimp (Candea:Atyidae) from Hunan Province, China. Memoirs of lhe Queensland Museum 35(1): 123-127. Brisbane. ISSN 0079-8835, А new freshwater atyid shrimp, Caridina pedicultrata from high elevation (800m) in Honan Province, China is described, It has a long, non-tapered endopod on the first male pleopad, well developed and trapezoidal appendix masculina which is almost as long as the endopod and bearing relatively short hamate setae, distinctive pereiopod shape, spination and seg- mental ratios, shape and spination of the posteriortelsonic margin and large eggs. Ten species of Caridina and one of Neocaridina are now known from Hunan Province, Г) Crustacea, Aryidae, Caridina pedicultrata, new species, Hunan Province, China. Zhaoliang Guo, Departmeni of Animal Sciences and Fishery, Hunan Agricultural College, Changsha 410128, China; Satish C. Choy. Crustacea Section, Queensland Museum, PO Box 3300, South Brisbane, Queensland 4001, Australia; 31 January 1994. The ten known species of atyid shrimps from Hunan Province, China are Caridina ablepsia Guo, Jiang & Zhang,1992, С, baojingensis Guo, He & Bai,1992, C. glossopoda Liang, Guo & Gao,1993, C. hofendopoda Shen,1948, С, hunanensis Liang 1993. C. lanceifrons, Yu, 1938, C. lima Liang, Guo & Gao,1993, C. longispina Guo, He, Xu & Gui,1992, C. spinosa Liang, 1964 and Neocaridina denticulata de Haan, 1844. On 15th August 1997, numerous specimens of a new atyid shrimp were collected from a small freshwater stream near Huaihua City, Hunan (c. 27°40'N, 110°11°E) by Zhaoliang Guo. The col- lection site is in a col (altitude c.800m) of Xuefeng Mountain, with rice fields nearby. The stream has a rocky bed, is 1-2m wide and 0,2- 1. Im deep. The primary type specimens are in the collection of the Hunan Agricultural College (HAC). Some male and female paratypes are deposited in the Queensland Museum(QMW),. SYSTEMATICS Family ATYIDAE Caridina H. Milne Edwards, | 837 Caridina pedicultrata sp.nov. (Figs 1,2) MATERIAL EXAMINED HoLotyre: | adult male, total length (TL) 15.7mm. post- orbital carapace length (CL) 4.6mm, pre-orbital rostral length (RL) 0.79mm. ALLOTYPE: 1 ovigerous female, TL 18.7mm, CL 4.3mm, RL 1,0mm, PARATYPES: HAC, 5 9,5 d; QMWI9898,2 9,2 d DESCRIPTION Body. Small, slender, subcylindrical; males up to 17,7mm TL, females up to 21.4mm TL. Rostrum (Fig.1A,B). Short and rather high, 0,13-0.21 of CL: reaching or extending beyond tip of eyes; either convex or straight, tip often slightly curved downwards; setose and typically unarmed or somelimes with 1-3 dorsal teeth and 1 ventral tooth placed distally: lateral carina dividing rostrum into two unequal parts. continu- ing posteriorly to orbital margin. Eyes (Fig. HL A,B), Small, on short ocular peduncle; cornea globular, well developed. Carapace (Fig. 1А). Rough, surface covered with microspinules; branchiostegal groove eon- spicuous. Pterygostomian angle broadly rounded, Slightly produced anteriorly, Antennal spine below lower orbital angle, short but strong. Antennule (Fig,1A,B). Stylocerite 0.79 length of basal segment; second segment about 0.45 length of basal antennular segment and about 1.1 times as long as third segment; all segments with plumose setae (setal terminology after Felgen- hauer, 1992). Flagella long, simple. Antenna (Fig. 1A). Scaphocerite reaching tip of antennular peduncle; outer margin straight, asetose, ending in strong subapical spine; proximal lamella and interior margin with plumose setae. Mandibles, maxillula. maxilla. first and second maxillipeds and branchial formula. Typical for genus, as described for other species (Choy & Ng,1991: Choy, 1992). Third maxilliped (Fig.1C). Reaching beyond tip of scaphocerite; basal segment of endopod MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 1. Caridina pedicultrata sp. nov. A, holotype male; B, paratype male. A, cephalothorax; B, rostral and antennular region; C, third maxilliped; D, first pereiopod; E, second pereiopod; F, third pereiopod; С, datae of third pereiopod; H, fifth pereiopod; 1, dactylus of fifth pereiopod. Scales: A- FH=1 Отт; G.I = 0.4m about 5.2 times as long as broad, with few hamate setae on distal outer margin. Penultimate segment about 6.6 times as long as broad and about 0.87 length of basal segment. Distal segment about 0.87 length of penultimate segment, ending in large claw- like apical hamate seta surrounded by simple and pappose setae, behind which there are about 8-11 smaller hamate setae on distal third of posterior margin; proximally a clump of serrate and pappose setae. Exopod reaching about 0.5 of penultimate endopod segment, distal margin with plumose setae. First pereiopod (Fig.1D). Reaching about tip of eye. Chela 2.0—2.5 times as long as wide, about 1.0-1.3 times length of carpus; movable finger about 3.1—4.4 times as long as wide, 1.0-1.6 times length of palm; setal brushes well developed. Carpus attached to chela ventrally, excavated disto- dorsally, 1.7-2.1 times as long as wide, shorter than chela, about 0.83-1.02 length of merus. Ischium about 0.38—0.51 length of merus. Second pereiopod (Fig.1E). Reaching beyond tip of scaphocerite, more slender and longer than first pereiopod. Chela 2.7-3.6 times as long as broad, about 0.67—0.96 length of carpus, movable finger about 4.0—4.8 times as long as wide and 1.5-1.7 times length of palm; setal brushes well developed. Carpus slightly excavated distally, 4.5—6.0 times as long as broad, much longer than chela, about same length as merus. Ischium about 0.30—0.43 length of merus. Third pereiopod (Fig.1F,G). Reaching base of dactylus, about 0.25 of propodus reaching distal scaphocerite. Dactylus 2.2—2.9 times as long as wide, ending in prominent claw-like hamate seta, FRESHWATER SHRIMP FROM HUNAN, CHINA FIG. 2. Caridina pedicultrata sp. nov. A, B, first pleopod of male; C, second pleopod of male: D-F, dorso-posterior region of telson, Scales: A-C = 0.5mm; D-F = 0.4mm, behind which posterior margin bears 4-6 shorter hamate setae, reducing in size proximally. Propodus 8.2-9.7 times as long as wide, 4.8-5.2 times length of dactylus, posterior margin bearing numerous small hamate setae. Carpus about 0.67- 0.85 length of propodus, well developed distal projection, posterior and lateral surface with hamate setae. Merus about 1.5-1.9 times as long as carpus, slightly bowed, with few hamate setae along posterior margin. Ischium about 0.33 length of propodus, twice that of basis. Fourth pereiopod. Similar to third. Fifth pereiopod (Fig.1H,I). Reaching middle of second segment of antennular peduncle. Dactylus 2.9-3.8 times as long as wide, ending in claw-like apical hamate seta, bearing comb-like row of 42-54 hamate setae on posterior margin. Propodus 7.9—10.7 times as long as wide, 3.8-5.8 times length of dactylus, bearing numerous short hamate setae on posterior margin. Carpus about 0.42-0.57 length of propodus, bearing distal projection and distal hamate seta. Merus distinct- ly shorter but wider than propodus, with 2—3 large hamate setae. Ischium about twice length of basis, with simple and pappose setae. First pleopod (Fig.2A,B). Endopod in male compressed, ovate, a little wider proximally, very long, about 0.82 length of exopod, about 3.7 times as long as wide, extreme portion slightly bent, inner border usually concave at distal 0.4, but almost straight in some specimens, outer border noticeably convex at middle, slightly concave at distal 0.3, both with marginal spine-like simple seta. Appendix interna well developed, arising from sub-distal endopod, reaching beyond its tip. Second pleopod (Fig.2C). Endopod in males about 0.71 length of exopod. Appendix mas- culina arising from base of endopod, trapezoidal, 126 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM TABLE |. Length (L) and width (W), in mm, of pereiopod segments of primary (уре specimens ol Curidina pedicultrata sp, nov, P1-P5, pereiopods 1-5. P3 0.22 0.49 = 051 | very long, about same length as endopod, bearing many stont hamate setae on inner and distal parts. Appendix interna arising from about mid-appen- dix masculina, very short and coarse, with many retinaculae distally. Abdomen. Well developed, rotund, glabrous; sixth abdominal segment 0.32-0.39 CL. Telson (Fig.2D,F). 0.39-0.46 CL, distinctly longer than sixth abdominal segment, tapering posteriorly, ending in rounded margin with sharp, thin median hamate seta in some specimens, dor- sal surface with 5—6 pairs of stout hamate setae including pair at posterolateral angles. Posterior margin with 2-3 pairs of intermediate plumose setae, middle one usually thinnest and shortest, all distinctly shorter than lateral pair. Uropods distinctly longer than telson, diaeresis on exopod bearing 19—22 hamate setae. Ege size. Eggs with well developed embryos measuring 0.69—1.12 by 1.18- 1.40mm. Live colouration. All specimens light greenish blue, 0.15 221 ETYMOLOGY From the trapezoidal, foot-like shape (pedicule = ‘foot-stalk’) of the appendix masculina of second male pleopod. It is | used as a noun in apposition. C2L/C2W REMARKS This species closely resembles | Caridina bamaensis Liang & Yan,1983 | (from Guangxi) and C. brevispina Liang & Y un,1986 (from Guizhou) but differs from those 2 species in the lateral carina | Dactytus | | Caps — | Mems — | — wi wor bw Г Пы. ГУ HOLOTYPE MALE | PI | 060 | ois | 100 | 049 | 093 | 044 | 0.91 | 029 | 029 | 021 | | P2 | 078 | 021 | 116 | 042 | 179 | 032 | 157 | 029 | 0.59 | 029 | | 053 | 016 | 199 | 022 | 1.11 | | 160 | ALLOTYPE FEMALE #1 | Pe ee Dear bers ae ТИ 0.22 0.29 Spinules on diaresis am/ai 0.53 0.49 0.32 0.27 0.31 0.27 “and some Teeth ona undo straighter moram more slender first pereiopod, broader dactylus and longer propodus of the third pereiopod and the more trapezoidal shaped, long appendix mas- culina of the second male pleopod (Table 2), The unique character of this species is the very long and trapezoidal shaped appendix masculina on the second male pleopod. No other atyid shrimp is known to have this. Its shape could be intermediate to the lanceolate one of known Caridina and the ovate one of Neocaridina. The shape of the endopod of the first male pleopod is also different from other Caridina and Neocaridina, but resembling the former. How- ever, at this stage, we do not feel that the separa- tion of this species into a new genus is warranted, The large size of the eggs of C. pedicultrata TABLE 2. Comparison of some morphometric characters of Caridina pedicultrata sp. noy., C. bamaensis and C. brevispina. am/ai, ratio of appendix masculina and appendix interna lengths on second male pleopod; C |, carpus of first pereiopod; C2, carpus of second pereiopod; D3, dactylus of third pereiopod; P3, propodus of third pereiopod; L, length; W, width. C. C. С, pedicultrata |bamaensis — |brevispina FRESHWATER SHRIMP FROM HUNAN, CHINA suggests highly abbreviated or direct develop- ment. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS We wish to thank Mr Jin Tieyou for assistance in sampling. We are grateful to Professor Liang Xiangqiu for providing advice during this study and critically reading the draft manuscript. LITERATURE CITED CHOY, S.C. 1992. Caridina bruneiana, a new species of freshwater shrimp (Decapoda, Caridea, Atyidae) from Negara Brunei Darussalam, Bor- neo. Zoologica Scripta 21: 49-55. CHOY, S.C. & NG, P.K.L. 1991. A new species of freshwater atyid shrimp, Caridina temasek (Decapoda, Caridea, Atyidae) from Singapore. Raffles Bulletin of Zoology 39(2): 265-277. DE HAAN, W. 1833-1850. Crustacea. Pp. 1-243. Inde Seibold, Р.Е. (ed.), ‘Fauna Japonica’. (E.J. Brill: Leiden). FELGENHAUER, В.Е. 1992. External anatomy and integumentary structures. Pp. 7—43. In Harrison, F.W. & Humes, A.G. (eds), ‘Microscopic anatomy of invertebrates. Vol. 10’. (Wiley-Liss: New York). GUO, Z.L., HE, S.L. & BAI, H.Q. 1992, A new species 127 of Caridina from Hunan, China (Decapoda, Atyidae). Journal of the Hunan Agricultural Col- lege 18 (suppl.): 609—612. GUO, Z.L., HE, S.L., XU, M.J. & GUI, Q.M. 1992. A new species of Caridina from Hunan, China (Decapoda, Atyidae). Journal of Hunan Agricul- tural College 18 (suppl.): 717—720. GUO, Z.L., JIANG, Н. & ZHANG, M.S. 1992. A new species of Caridina from Hunan, China (Decapoda, Atyidae). Sichuan Journal of Zool- ogy 11(2): 4-6, LIANG, X.Q., GUO, Z.L. & GAO, J. 1993. Study on Caridina from Hunan, China, Journal of the Shanghai Fisheries University 2(1): 41-47. LIANG, X. О. & YAN, S.L. 1983. A new species of Caridina (Crustacea, Decapoda) from Guangxi, China. Acta Zootaxonomica Sinica 8(3): 252— 254. 1986. Study on Caridina (Decapoda, Caridea) from Guizhou Province, China. Oceanologia Lim- nologia Sinica (suppl. 1986): 197—206. SHEN, C.J. 1948. On three new species of Caridina from Southwest China. Contribution to the In- stitute of Zoological National Academy of Peip- ing 4(3): 119-125. YU, S.C. 1938. Study on the Chinese Caridina with description of five new species. Bulletin Fan Memorial Institute of Biology (Zoology) 8(3): 275-310. SOLENOZETES GALLONAE SP. NOV., FIRST RECORD OF THE PLASMOBATIDAE IN AUSTRALIA (ACARI: ORIBATIDA) GLENN S, HUNT Hunt, G.S, 1994 06 01: Solenazetes gallanae sp. nov., first record of the family Plasmobatidae in Australia (Acari: Oribatida), Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 3501): 129-134, Brisbane. ISSN 0079-8835. Solenozetes gallonae sp. nov. is described from rainforest 1n Queensland, Australia, and a rediagnosis given for Solenozetes Grandjean, 1932 (Plasmobatidac). The status and distribu- tion of other species in the genus are summarised and generic level characters analysed. Ll Acari, Oribatidu, Playmobatidae, Solenozetes, Australia, rainforest, Glenn S. Hunt, Division of Invertebrate Zoology, Australian Museum, PO Box A285, Sydney South, New South Wales 2000, Australia; 15 June 1993. The Plasmobatidae Grandjean, 1961 is a small group of oribatid mites with a mostly tropical- subtropical distribution extending from the Oriental Region and western Pacific to the east- ern Palaearctic and Neotropical Regions. They inhabit litter, moss and epiphytes on tree trunks. Together with the Hermanniellidae, they con- stitute the superfamily Hermannielloidea, a taxon characterised by distinctive lateral tubes which bear the pore of the lateral opisthosomal glands (gla in Fig. 1D). Adult Plasmobatidae carry the exuviae (“scalps”) of the larva and of three nym- phal instars (Fig.1 A,B) which obscure the incon- icuous notogastral setae. They are readily distinguished from the Hermannicllidae which carry a tightly appressed and inconspicuous tritonymphal scalp which bears conspicuous setae. The gnathosoma of the Plasmobatidae is characterised by an elongate subcapitulum abave which lie the elongate chelicerae. Definitions of both families are given by Grandjean (1962). The Plasmobatidae comprises three genera, Plasmobates Grandjean,1929, Solenozetes Grandjean,1932 and Orbiculobates Grandjean. 1961, which may be distinguished by the key in Balogh & Balogh (1988,1992). Generic level characters are analysed below with insights provided hy Sefenozetes gallonae sp, nov. The occurrence of this species in Australia 15 an im- portant addition to the known distribution of the family. MATERIALS AND METHODS In gencral, terminology follows Balogh & Balogh (1992), and Grandjean (1961) and Norton (1977) for leg chaetotaxy, The shapes of setae and surface ornamentation follaw Mahunka & Zom- heri (1985), Measurements are in micrometres, those for body length were made ventrally from the up of the rostrum to the rear of the scalps. A Cambridge Stereoscan 120 was used for SEM. Repositories for type material are AM, Australian Museum, Sydney; ANIC, Australian National Insect Collection, Canberra: QM, Queensland Museum, South Brisbane. CHARACTER ANALYSIS AT GENERIC LEVEL Scalps. Grandjean (1932) erected Solenozetes as. he considered the type species, Plasmobates cribratus Grandjean, 1929 from Venezuela, pos- sessed only a tritonymphal scalp. In his 1961 paper, however, he regarded this as an error (scalps can fall off) and questioned the separate status of Solenozetes. He nevertheless retained the genus, without giving a clear rediagnosis. Apart from an anterior indentation which charac- lerises the Orbiculabates tritonymphal scalp (Grandjean, 1961), scalp morphology appears to be useful only at the species level. Shape of lateral tubes. Balogh (1972) used this as a key character to distinguish Plasmobates from Solenozetes and was followed, rather tenta- tively, by Mahunka (1983) when describing $. Jlagellifer from Mexico, This key character was abandoned by Balogh & Balogh (1988; 1992) and appears to be of value only at the species level. Number of genital setae and presence/absence of aggenital setae. Balogh & Balogh (1988) transferred Р. carinatus Hammer, 1961 from Peru and P. flagellatus Balogh & Mahunka, 1969 from Amazonia to Solenozetes on the basis that they had 6 pairs of genital setae and no aggenital setac (Plasmobates has 7 pairs and | pairrespec- tively), 130 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 1. Solenozetes gallonae sp. nov. A,C,D,F, frontal. A, whole body; C, prodorsum; D, lateral tube with cerotegument; F, rostral area. B, whole body, lateral; E, notogaster without scalps, dorsal; С, detail lateral tube area without cerotegument and scalps (bo, bothridium; gla, lateral tube of notogastral gland; ia, fissura ia; in, interlamellar seta; ro, rostral seta; ss, sensillus). Scale bars: A,B,E, 100рт; C, 50um; D,F,G, 201m. FIRST AUSTRALIAN PLASMOBATIDAE P. hyalinus Hammer, 1971 from Fiji, Р. acutirosirum Hammer, 1973 from Western Samoa and Р. asiaticus Aoki, 1973 from Japan have 6 pairs of genital and no aggenital setae. Hammer (1979) describes P. javensis from Java às having 7 pairs of long genital setae but no aggenital setae. I have examined the type and it appears to have 6 genital setae on the right side and a doubtful alveolus of a seventh on the left. However, formal placement of some or all of these species in Solenozetes should await a thorough revision of the family including reap- praisal of characters and a re-examination of the type of S. cribratus. - schubarti Perez-Inigo & Baggio, 1988 from Brazil has 7 pairs of genital setae and | pair of aggenital setae and would presumably remain in Plasmobates together with the type species, P. pagoda Grandjean, 1929 from Martinique Shape of bothridium. Except perhaps for О. transvectus (Grandjean, 1929), descnptions of species with 6 pairs of genital setae (and P_javen- siz), seem to indicate that the bothridial wall forms a partial hood over the bothridial cavity but is deeply invaginate anterolaterally (Fig. 1C). In Р, pageda and Р. asiaticus (7 pairs), the bothridium is not hooded and has a much more open structure. It is invaginate in the mesad as well as the laterad wall. A “hooded” bothridium may be a shared derived character for Solenozetes and Orbiculobates, as suggested by its absence in Hermaniellidae and Liodidae, outgroups which have a low, open bothridium. The more open bothridium seems to be correlated with a shorter sensillus. Notogastral sculpturing. Most Plasmobates and Solenozetes have a pitted (alveolate) notogaster. The two Orbiculobates species, O. orbiculus (Grandjean, 1929) and O. transvectus, both from Martinique, have a smooth notogaster with scalp retention assisted by an anterior tuft of filaments. Orbiculobates australis Balogh & Csiszar, 1963 from Argentina, however, has a smooth notogaster without filaments. It has sub- sequently been placed in Solenozeres by Balogh & Balogh (1988). Accessory tooth on movable finger of chelicera (as in Fig.2C). Grandjean (1929: pl.3F; 1961) does not record it but R.A. Norton (pers. comm.) reports it in a new species of Orbiculobates and several probably undescribed Solenozeres spp.and Plasmobates spp. It is present in S. gal- lonae and on the types of S. carinatus and Р. javensis. The structure appears to be a shared 131 denved character at the family level. Its function is unknown but it may assist in breaking food, SYSTEMATICS Solenozetes Grandjean, 1932 Salenozetes Grandjean, 1932: 653; 1961: 127; Balogh, 1972: 57; Balogh & Balogh, 1988: 87; 1992: 42, TYPE SPECIES | Plasmobates cribratus Grandjean,1929; һу monotypy. DIAGNOSIS Plasmobatidae with 6 pairs of genital setae bill no ageenital setae, Anterior margin of notogaster without mesial tuft of filaments and correlated invagination of tritonymphal scalp. Notogaster usually alveolate or foveolate; lateral tubes of variable shape. Sensillus very long, filiform or sometimes flagellate; posterior wall of bothridium forms partial hood over bothridial cavity, anterolateral wall deeply excavate allow- ing sensillus greater movement in laterad direc- tion. Chelicera of at least some species with strong accessory tooth on movable finger. Solenozetes gallonae sp. nov. (Figs 1-3) ETYMOLOGY For Ms Julie Gallon who collected the material. TYPE MATERIAL HoLoTYPk: adult, OM, Queensland, foot of Blackbutt Range, 5km. E. of Benarkin, rainforest, leaf litter, QM berlesate 522, J. Gallon, 30 Mar 1983. PARATYPES: OM, same data, 2 adults; AM, same data, 1 adult; ANIC, same data, | adult. OTHER MATERIAL QMS20116 (SEM Stub No. 142), foot of Blackbutt Range, 5km. E. of Benarkin, rainforest, leaf litter, ОМ berlesate 522, J, Gallon, 30 Mar 1983, 2 adults; QMS20117 (SEM Stub No. 100), same data, 5 adults; QM (SEM Stub No. 129), same data, adult notogaster without scalps. DIAGNOSIS Sensillus much longer than distance between interlamellar setae, filiform, not flagellate, and not expanding subdistally; lateral tubes directed only slightly forward and distally expanded into 132 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 2. Solenozetes gallonae sp. nov. A-G, ventral aspect. A, gnathosoma; B, epimeral region; C, right chelicera; D, whole animal; E, genital plates; F, pedipalp; С, anal plates. a,m,h, gnathosomal setae; ad3, adanal seta; at, accessory tooth; b, lateral boss between legs І and Il; sp, sword-like process. Scale bars: A,B,E, 50um; D, 100um; C, 10um; F,G, 20jm. FIRST AUSTRALIAN PLASMOBATIDAE à knob-like structure; rostral setae robust, short and curved strongly inwards. DESCRIPTION Adults. Grey; body small, 7 specimens 355, 376, 402, 406, 420, 422, 423um long. Pradorsum. Rostrum separated from remainder of prodorsum by depressed area and distinct break in cerotegument pattern (Fig. 1C) but not hy deep narrow groove. Rostral tecta converging to V-shaped point, separated by mesal split; rostral setae robust, short, arising from apophysis and curved strongly inwards (Fig. 1F). Lamellar setae on margin of prodorsum, extremely minute. Posterior to rostrum cerotegument strongly folded into irregular reticulate pattern. Bothridium long; posterior wall forming partial hood over cavity (Fig. 1C), anterolateral wall deeply excavate; sensillus long (Fig. 1A,B), about 40% longer than interbothridial distance, filiform but not flagellate, more or less even in diameter, tapering only at end and curving mesad distally, coveted with widely spaced granules (Fig. 1D) but not ciliate. Interlamellar seta baculiform, unevenly bifid, mostly covered with cerotegument, reaching to about level of bothridial rim when viewed anteriorly, arising from strong tubercle slightly less than seta in height; seta separated by about width of its tubercle from bothridium (Fig. 1С). Notogaster. Scalps with raised, crenellate mar- gins (Fig. 1B), and mesal tongue-shaped anterior extensions (Fig. 1A), that of tritonymph consid- erably overhanging prodorsum (Fig.1C). Notogaster with scalps removed almost circular (Fig.1E), length (nz1) 290, width (excluding lateral tubes) 250; convex except for intramar- ріпа] horseshoe-shaped depression anterior to ateral tubes; alveolate with some pores more marginally (Fig. 1G), alveoli less pronounced in centre; lateral tubes directed only slightly for- ward, narrowest subdistally and distally ex- panded inta knob-like structure (Fig. 1E), covered with granular cerotegument (Fig. 1D); only 5 pairs of notogastral setae seen, arising from short tubercles, 4 on posterior margin (Fig. ЗА), I just anterior to fissura ja (Fig. 1G). Ventral morphology. Gnathosoma (Fig. 2A). Seta a long and strong, seta m much less so; seta h short. Chelicera elongate ("pelopsiform"); movable finger with long recurved accessory tooth (at in Fig. 2C); fixed finger with flat sword- like terminally bifid process, probably Tragardh organ, lying in dorsal half of paraxial surface (sp in Fig, 2C). Pedipalp appears similar to P. pagoda 133 d 4, . ж, „7 у» e ру) MT — FIG, 3. Solenozeres gallonae sp. noy. A, setac ах posterior of body (from SEM); B, Jeg 1, terminal part, using Grandjean's notation, Scale bars: 50pm, (Fig. 2F). Rutella forming, a tube around chelicerae. Mentum subanteriorly with a strong transverse carina (Fig. 2A,D). Epimeres І-Ш with strong elevated carinae interrupted mesially (Fig. 2B); epimere | with a more mesial carina separated from more lateral carina; epimere ГУ with carinae weakly developed: epimeral chaetotaxy 3-?0-3-2. Sharp pedotectal tooth not present but a strong boss (“une forte saille ronde" of Grandjean, 1961: 102) present anterior to leg П. Genitoanal region alveolate adjacent to posterior area of genital plates (Fig. 2D,E); gem- tal vestibule subcircular (Fig. 2E); genitoanal chaetotaxy 6-O-2-3, ad3 preanal (Fig. 2E); anal plates gradually broadening posteriad (Fig. 2G). Leg 1. Femur with strong crests of cerotegu- ment (Fig. 1С). Solenidion sigma of genu globose terminally bul shorter and stouter than in F. pagoda, seta d short and expanded subterminally. Seta d on tibia vestigial, lying against and sharing alveolus with piliform solenidion phi 1; phi 2 baculiform. Tarsus with strong proximodorsal crest of cerotegument; solenidion omega | ceratiform, omega 2 baculiform; setae tc, u, and a barbed; tc longer than claw. Claw with ventral accessory tooth. COMMENTS Setae labelled (Fig. 3B] hy positional cor- respondence to setae in P, pagoda (Grandjean, 1961: fig, 3B); solenidia were confirmed optical- 134 ly, but eupathidic nature of setae p and s not resolved. Ontogeny of setae not studied. Size order of subcapitular setae seems to reflect anteriad hypertrophy of the subcapitulum. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This research is supported by an Australian Biological Resources Survey grant. I thank Dan Bickel, Australian Museum, Bruce Halliday, C.S.LR.O. and Roy Norton, State University of New York, for commenting on the manuscript, and Henrik Enghoff of the University Zoological Museum, Copenhagen for the loan of Hammer's Plasmobates types. Suzanne Lindsay took the SEMs, Ross Pogson assisted with polarising microscopy and Roger Springthorpe did the camera ready layouts. LITERATURE CITED AOKI, J. 1973. Oribatid mites from Iriomote-jima, the southernmost island of Japan. Memoirs of the National Museum of Tokyo 6;85-101. BALOGH, J. 1972. ‘The oribatid genera of the world’. (Akademiai Kaido; Budapest), BALOGH, J. & BALOGH, P. 1988. Oribatid mites of the neotropical region I. In Balogh, Р. (ed.), ‘The soil mites of the world 2’. (Elsevier: Amsterdam). 1992, "The oribatid mites genera of the world’, Val. I. (Hungarian Natural History Museum; Budapest). BALOGH, J. & CSISZAR, J. 1963. The zoological resulis of Gy. Topal's collectings in Argentina. 5. Oribatei (Acarina). Annales Historico-Naturales Musei Nationalis Hungarici 55: 463-485. BALOGH, J. & MAHUNKA, S. 1969. The zoological results of the Hungarian Soil Zoological Expedi- tions to South America 11. Acari: oribatids from the material of the Second Expedition, 11. Opus- cula Zoologica 9(1): 31-68. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM GRANDJEAN, F. 1929. Quelques nonveaux genres d'Oribatei du Venezuela et de la Martinique. Bulletin de la Societe Zoologique de France 54: 400-423. 1932, Observations sur les oribates (2e serie). Bul- letin Museum National d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris, 2nd series, 1931, 3(7): 651-665. 1961, Les Plasmobatidae n. fam. (Oribates). Acarologia 3(1): 96-129. 1962. Au sujet des Hermanniellidae (Oribates). Premiere Partie. Acarologia 4(2): 237-273. HAMMER, M. 1961, Investigations on the oribatid fauna of the Andes Mountains II. Peru. Biologiske Skrifter udgivet af det Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskab 13(1): 1-150. 1971. On some oribatids from Viti Levu, the Fiji Islands. Biologiske Skrifter udgivet af det Kon- gelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskab 16(6): 1-56. 1973. Oribatids from Tongatapu and Eva, the Tonga Islands, and from Upolu, Western Samoa. Biologiske Skrifter udgivet af det Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskab 20(3): 4-70. 1979. Investigations on the oribatid fauna of Java. Biologiske Skrifter udgivet af det Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskab 22(9): 1-78. MAHUNKA, S. 1983. Neue und interessante Milben aus dem Genfer Museum XLV. Oribatida Americana 6: Mexico II (Acari), Revue Suisse Zoologie 90(2): 269-298, MAHUNKA, S. & ZOMBORI, L. 1985. The variability of some morphological features in oribatid mites, Folia Entomologica Hungarica 46(1): 115-128. NORTON, R.A. 1977. A review of Grandjean's system of leg chaetotaxy in the Oribatei and its applica- tion to the Damaeidae. Pp. 33-62. In Dindal, D.L. (ed.), ‘Biology of Oribatid Mites’. (State Univer- sity New York College of Environmental Science and Forestry: Syracuse, New York), PEREZ-INIGO,C. & BAGGIO, D, 1988, Onbates edaphiques du Bresil (IV). Oribates de l'Etat dé Sao Paulo (Premiere Partic). Acarologia 29(2): 189-204. NEW SYNONYMY OF THREE AUSTRALIAN ANTS (FORMICIDAE: FORMICINAE: POLYRHACHIS) RUDOLF J. KOHOUT Kohout, R.J. 1994 06 01: New synonymy of three Australian ants (Formicidae: Formicinae: Polyrhachis), Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1): 135-136. Brisbane. ISSN 0079- 8835. Synonymy of three Australian Polyrhachis species is proposed (senior names cited first): P. ammonoetdes Roger = P. chalchas Forel; P. delicata Crawley = Р. lysistrata Santschi and P. hookeri Lowne = P. cataulacoidea Stilz. A lectotype is designated for P. ammonoeides. (Fermicidae, Polyrhachis, synonymy. Rudolf J. Kohour, Queensland Museum, PO Box 3300, South Brisbane, Queensland 4101, Australia; 20 December 1993. The species synonymies listed below were recognised during two visits to European and British museums to examine Polyrhachis types. Institutional abbreviations (with the names of co-operating curators) are: BMNH - Natural His- tory Museum, London (Dr B. Bolton); MHNG - Muséum d'Histoire Naturelle, Geneva (Dr C. Besuchet); MNHN - Muséum National d'- Histoire Naturelle, Paris (Dr J,Casevitz Weulersse); MNHU - Museum fiir Naturkunde, Humboldt- Universität, Berlin (Dr Е. Koch); NHMB - Naturhistorisches Museum, Basel (Dr M. Brancucci); NHMW - Naturhistorisches Museum, Vienna (Dr M. Fischer); QMBA - Queensland Museum, Brisbane (Mr E.C. Dahms, Dr G.B. Monteith). Distribution records are given as 'short' coor- dinates using 1° grid cell system of Taylor (1987). SYSTEMATICS Polyrhachis ammonoeides Roger,1853 Polyrhachis ammonoeides Roger.1863:157. Syntype workers. Type locality: ‘New Holland’. MNHN (2), NHMW (1). Palyrhachis chalchas Forel,1907:307. Syntype workers. female, Original localities: Western Australia, Denham (25/113), Geraldton (28/114), Dongarra (29/114). MHNG (5 syntype workers ex- amined). LECTOTYPE Three syntypes of P. ammonoeides are similar- ly pinned and bear identical labels. The MNHN specimens have labels in Roger's handwriting: one with ‘Polyrhachis amonoeides (sic) Roger * Type’, the other with ‘Р, amonoides (sic). The NHMW specimen has two additional labels (1) *Polych. amonoides (sic) det. С. Mayr', and (2) “МР. (? Museum Paris). The specimen labelled Туре” is here selected as lectotype. Other Roger types (e.g. Polyrhachis latifrons, Hemioptica scissa) suggest that he used asterisks to mark holotype-equivalent specimens. The specimen labels imply that Sydney (=Port Jackson) is the type locality, but the known distribution of P. ammonoeides does not support this conclusion, REMARKS P. ammonoeides is à ground-nesting ant in- habiting open forests and woodlands; it occurs in Western Australia and adjacent islands: Barrow 1. (20/115), Dampier (20/116), Yardie Ck, (22/113), Minderoo (22/115), Kalbarri (27/114), Easter Group Is, Abrolhos 1. (28/113), Geraldton (28/114), Dongara (29/114). Polyrhachis delicata Crawley,1915 Polyrhachis delicata Crawley, 1915:238, Syntype workers. Type locality: Northern Territory , Darwin (Hill) (12/130). BMNH, QMBA (2 syntypes ёх: amined). Polyrhachis (Myrmothrinax) Iysisirata Santschi, 1920:569. Syntype workers. Type locality: Queensland, Townsville (F.P. Dodd) (19/146). NHMB (1 syntype examined), REMARKS Syntypes of delicata, lysistrata and queenslan- dica, together with a substantial number of specimens from Queensland and Northern Ter- ntory indicate that delicata is not a synonym of queenslandica Emery,1895 as proposed by Crawley (1921) and that /ysistrata is a synonym of delicata. The most obvious difference between delicata and queenslandica is the direction of 136 propodeal spines which, in the former, are strong- ly raised upwards, while in the latter are oblique to the main axis of the body. The body of queenslandica is uniformly black, while in delicata the head and gaster are mostly dark reddish-brown, with the mesosoma a shade lighter. These characters also distinguish the females of both species. In addition, the median petiolar spine in the female of queenslandica is simply pointed, while in female of delicata the apex of the spine is emarginate. Both species are arboreal, using silk to build their nests by joining leaves of various lowland rainforest trees and shrubs, P. delicata is known from Northem Territory around Darwin (12/130) and in north Queensland from Mt Finlay (15/145), Cape Tribulation, Kamerunga, Yar- rabah (16/145), Mission Beach (17/146) as far south as Townsville (19/146). P. queenslandica is apparently confined to the lowland rainforests of north Queensland, ranging from Lockerbie Scrub, Bamaga (10/142) and Iron Range (12/143) on Cape York Peninsula, Cape Tribulation, Kamerunga, Yarrabah (16/145), Bellenden Ker (17/145), Innisfail and Mission Beach (17/146). Polyrhachis hookeri Lowne,1865 Polyrhachis hookeri Lowne, 1865:334. Syntype workers. Type locality: Sydney, New South Wales; (33/151). 7BMNH (types presumed lost). Polyrhachis hookeri var. aerea Forel,1902:521. Syn- type workers, females, males. Type locality: Queensland, Mackay (G. Turner) (21/149). MHNG (2 syntype workers, | syntype female examined). Kohout & Taylor,1990. Polyrhachis cataulacoidea Stitz,1911:377. Holotype worker. Type locality: Sydney, New South Wales (33/151) (Diimel). MNHU (holotype examined), REMARKS Stitz was obviously unaware of hookeri when describing cataulacoidea. The bright green metallic coloration makes them easy to identify and they are straightforward synonyms. Distribution of hookeri was given by Kohout & Taylor (1990). MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I thank the responsible curators, listed above, for access to collections. I also thank the Australian Entomological Society for a Re- search/Travel Grant. My thanks also go to Kevin Lambkin, Queensland Museum, for reading and commenting on the draft manuscript. LITERATURE CITED CRAWLEY, W.C. 1915. Ants from north and south- west Australia (G.F. Hill, Rowland Turner) and Christmas Island, Straits Settlements, Part II, An- nals and Magazine of Natural History ser.8, 15: 232-239, 1921. New and little-known species of ants from various localities. Annals and Magazine of Natural History ser.9, 7: 87-97. FOREL, А, 1902. Fourmis nouvelles d'Australie, Revue Suisse Zoologie 10; 405-548. 1907. Formicidae. In Michaelsen, W. & Hartmeyer, R. (eds), “Die Fauna Südwest- Australiens’ 1:263-310. KOHOUT, R.J. 1988. Nomenclatural changes and new Australian records in the genus Polyrhachis Fr.Smith (Hymenoptera: Formicidae: For- micinae). Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 25: 429-438. KOHOUT, RJ. & TAYLOR, R.W, 1990. Notes on Australian ants of the genus Polyrhachis Fr.Smith, with a synonymic list of the species (Hymenoptera; Formicidae: Formicinae), Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 28: 509- 522. LOWNE, B.T. 1865. Contributions to the natural his- tory of Australian ants, Entomologist 2; 275-280, 331-336, ROGER, J. 1863. Die nen Augeführten Gattungen und Arlen meines Formiciden- Verzeichnisses. Ber- liner entomologische Zeitschrift 7: 131-214, SANTSCHI, F. 1920. Quelques nouveaux Cam- ponotinae d' Indochine et Australie. Bulletin de la Société Vaudoise des Sciences Naturelles 52; 565-569, STITZ, H. 1911. Australische Ameisen (Neu-Guinea und Salomons-Inseln, Festland, Neu-Secland). Gesellschaft der naturforschende Freunde zu Berlin 1911: 351-381. TAYLOR, R.W. 1987. A checklist of ihe ants of Australia, New Caledonia and New Zealand (Hym.:Formicidae). CSIRO Australia, Division of Entomology Report 41: 1-92. POLYRHACHIS LAMA, A NEW ANT FROM THE TIBETAN PLATEAU (FORMICIDAE: FORMICINAE) RUDOLF J, KOHOUT Kohout, R.J. 1994 06 01: Polyrhachis lama, a new ant from the Tibetan plateau (Formicidae: Formicinae). Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1):137-138. Brisbane. ISSN 0079- 8835. Polyrhachis lama sp.nov. is described from the Tibetan plateau of Central Asia as the first species of the P. viehmeyeri-group recorded north of the equator. It is suggested that species of the group were in the past more widely distributed and that P. lama is a relict surviving in isolation on the high plateau of Tibet. Formicidae, Polyrhachis, viehmeyeri species- group, new species, distribution. Rudolf J. Kohout, Queensland Museum, PO Box 3300, South Brisbane, Queensland 4101, Australia; 20 December 1993. This new member of the P. viehmeyeri species- group is characterised by the absence of pronotal spines, and abundance of distinctly shaggy pubescence beneath the bristle-like pilosity. Measurements (mm) and indices follow Kohout (1990): TL, total length; HL, maximum head length; HW, head width immediately in front of eyes; CI, cephalic index (HWx100/HL); SL, scape length excluding condyla; SI, scape index (SLx 100/HW); PW, pronotal width across humeri; MTL, metathoracic tibial length. SYSTEMATICS Polyrhachis lama sp.nov. (Fig.1) MATERIAL EXAMINED HoLoryee: Tibet (=Xizang Zizhiqu, China). “Deutsche Tibet-Expedit. 1938-39 (E. Schüfer) (worker). PARATYPES: data as for holotype (4 workers, 1 dealate female). All in the Forschungsinstitut Senckenberg; paratype worker in Queensland Museum. DESCRIPTION Worker. Dimensions (holotype cited first): TL €. 8.11, 8.32-8,72; HL 1.93, 1.87-2.03; HW 1.50. 1.47—1.56; СІ 78, 75—79; SL 2.31, 2.21-2.40; SI 153, 150-155; PW 1.03, 0.97-1.06; MTL 2.97, 2,87—3.07 (5 measured). Clypeus with deeply impressed basal margin; median longitudinal carina distinct anteriorly, in- distinct postertorly; median portion of anterior margin dentate laterally. Median ocellus rudimentary, lateral ocelli lacking. Pronotum un- armed; humeri produced into distinct, forward converging dorso-lateral carinae almost reaching the anterior pronotal margin. Promesonotal su- ture well impressed, metanotal groove rather ill defined. Propodeal spines well elevated, only slightly divergent. Dorsum of petiole convex, anterior and posterior margins obsolete; spines well elevated, divergent. Clypeus, frontal and lateral areas of head, lateral branches of mesosoma and petiole moderately rugose; rugosity increasing dorsally and posteriorly with dorsa of head and mesosoma fairly coarsely vermiculate-rugose. Gastral dor- sum opaque, striate-rugose, with sculpture progressively less distinct posteriorly. Moderately long, yellowish and reddish bristle- like hairs fairly dense on all body surfaces, in- cluding appendages. Silvery pubescence, of distinctly shaggy appearance, rather dense, ex- cept on promesonotal dorsum where it is some- what less abundant. Generally dark reddish brown with head, meso- soma and petiole on dorsal aspect piceous. Man- dibles, appendages and gaster a shade lighter. Female. Dimensions: TL е, 9.07; HL 1.96; 1.53; C178: SL 2.28; SI 149; PW 1.71; MTL 2.97 (1 measured). Besides the usual characters identifying full sexuality, the general appearance of the available single female resembles the worker very closely. Pronotal humeri with short, ill-defined carinae. Propodeal and petiolar spines shorter, the former slightly, the latter rather more divergent, Sculpturation similar to that of worker, with den- sity increasing from moderately rugose to fairly coarsely vermiculate-rugose, namely on the head and mesoscutum, contrasting sharply with that on mesoscutellum where it is distinctly less coarse with somewhat granular appearance. Bristle-like 138 FIG. 1. Scanning electron micrograph of the uncoated holotype of P. lama in dorsal view. pilosity is definitely more dense than in worker MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM and abundant shaggy pubescence almost obscures the underlying sculpturation. Male and immature stages unknown. REMARKS Known distribution of the viehmeyeri-group is from the Moluccas through Papua New Guinea to the Solomon Islands and northern Australia (Kohout, 1990) but this could be underestimated. With the description of P. lama it appears that the group was in the past more widely distributed and, perhaps, lama is an isolated relict. The un- deniable similarity between P. lama and the vieh- meyeri-group prototype shows that both probably derived from the same ancestral stock. As noted earlier (Kohout,1990:506), most of this group exhibit variability in the length of pronotal spines even within the same population. Their complete absence and replacement by forward produced carinae, as seen in lama, demonstrates their variability to the extreme and can be interpreted as a product of an independent development of the species in isolation. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Dr J.-P. Kopelke and Wolfgang H.O. Dorow generously provided access to the Forschung- sinstitut Senckenberg collection. My gratitude is expressed to the Australian Entomological Society, for a Research/Travel Grant. I thank Dr Kevin J. Lambkin, Queensland Museum, for reading the draft manuscript. LITERATURE CITED KOHOUT, R.J. 1990. A review of the Polyrhachis viehmeyeri species-group. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 28: 499—508. THE GREEN TURTLE, CHELONIA MYDAS, IN QUEENSLAND: POPULATION STRUCTURE IN A WARM TEMPERATE FEEDING AREA. COLIN J. LIMPUS, PATRICK J. COUPER AND MARK А. READ Limpus, C.J.. Couper, P.J, & Read, M.A. 1994 06 01: The Green Turtle, Chelonia mydas, in Queensland: population structure in à warm temperate feeding area. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1); 139-154. Brisbane. ISSN 0079-8835. Chelonia mydas resident in the Morcton Banks within eastern Moreton Bay. southeastern Queensland, encompass all size classes from immature turtles with a curved carapace length of 39cm to mature adults of both sexes. The population sex ratio is strongly biased to females (66%) and to immature size classes (89% of females, 96% of males). Sexual maturity does not usually occur at the minimum breeding size for ihe species. Tag recoveries indicate that most of the adult females migrate to breed at the southern Great Barrier Reef rookeries. Individual females do not breed annually. Approximately 10% of the population shows signs of anthropogenic impacts which range fram fibropapillomas to propeller damage. Regression equations for converting between the various measurement methodologies for marine turtles are presented for this population. [ |Chelonia mydas, Moreton Bay, sex ratio, sexual maturiry, migration. C.J. Limpus, Queensland Department of Environment and Heritage, Р.О, Box 155 Brisbane Albert Street, Queensland 4002, Australia. P.J. Couper, Queensland Museum, Р.О. Box 3300, South Brisbane, Queensland 4107, Australia; M.A. Read, Departnent of Zoology, University of Queensland, St. Lucia, Queensland 4072. Australia; 11 November 1993. Feeding area studies of Clielonia mydas in Queensland began in 1974 at Heron Island Reef (Limpus & Walter, 1980; Limpus & Reed, 19852; Limpus, 19922). In 1986, the study expanded to include other study sites in eastern Queensland to investigate the regional population dynamics of the species. The most recent and most southerly study site incorporated into this regional study ts in Moreton Bay in southeastern Queensland, This study provides the first systematic assessment of the demography of C. mydas іп a non-tropical Australian feeding area. The initial phase of this study has been to establish a tagged population of measured turtles for continuing long-term studies. The first results from the Moreton Bay study site are reported here. METHODS Turtles were captured using the turtle rodeo capture method (Limpus and Reed, 198 а) in the intertidal flats and the adjacent margins of the Moreton Banks between July 1990 to June 1992. Each turtle was tagged with one or more tags applied in the front flipper axillary tagging posi- tions (Limpus, 19923). The tags were either large size, 125 CPT titanium turtle tàgs (Stockbrands Pty. Ltd.. Perth. Western Australia. Limpus, 19923) or incone] 625 turtle tags (National band and Tag Co. New Port, Kentucky; Balazs, 1983). Curved carapace measurements were taken using a flexible fibreglass tape measure (+ 0.5стп) laid over the curve of the carapace. These meas- urements are the standard measurements used for C. mydas in eastem Australia by Bustard (1972) and Limpus et al. (1984). The calibration of fibreglass tape measures was checked regularly against steel rules, A tape measure was rejected for use when length changes exceeded + 0.22cm at опе metre. Any large barnacles on the carapace likely to interfere with a measurement were removed. Curved carapace length (CCL) was measured along the midline from the junction of the skin and carapace above the neck to the posterior margin of the carapace at the midline junction of the supracaudal scutes. Curved carapace width (CCW) was measured perpendicularly to the midline axis of the carapace between the outer extremities of the marginal scutes. This measure- ment Was repeated at several positions to obtain the greatest value. Straight carapace Jength (SCL) and straight carapace width (SCW) were taken between the same points as the corresponding curved measurements (CCL, CCW) but using a large pair of wooden callipers (Hughes, 1974; Limpus et al., 1983). The width between the tips of the callipers was measured with a steel tape measure (X (Іст). Carr's straight carapace length (CSCL) was measured às a straight line 140 TABLE I, Frequency distribution af all recoveries of tagged adult female Chelonia mydas from Moreton Bay which had been previously tagged while nesting at rookeries throughout the Great Barrier Reef (Lim- pus et al, 1992; and unpublished records of the Queensland Turtle Research Project). These data in- ciude the three recaptures (*) of migrant females from the Moreton Banks of the present study. Rookery 177/78 181/82 | 84/85|87/88 | 88/89 | 89/90] 90/91 | Southern Greal Barrier Reef rookery region LM m | | hh [ j| yx м | bh g fr | ] j| | Iw | | bh e | pn || Northern Great Barrier Reef rookery region Eh te ИЙ ES gei. (n=16) | _ LM = Lady Musgrave Is. (23°54'S, 152?23'E) HI =Heron Is. (23°26'S, 151"55' E); WI = Wreck 15 (23°20°S, 151°57' Б); NW = North West fs. (23°18'S 151?42'E); ВІ = Raine Is, (11°36"S, 144"01' E). length from the most anterior to the most posterior projections of the carapace (Carr & Ogren, 1960). This is not a midline measurement. Head measurements were taken using stainless steel vernier slide callipers (+ 0.01ст). Head length (HL) was measured from the anterior tip of the maxillary sheath (upper beak) to the posterior margin of the supracecipital process, keeping the arm of the callipers parallel to the dorsal surface of the skull. Head width (HW) was measured as the maximum width across the skull measured at the quadrate bone. Plastron length (PL) was measured using a flexible tape measure (+ O.5em) along the midline from the anterior junction of the skin and plastron scutes to the posterior margin of the cartilaginous/bony plate. Tails were measured (+ 0,5стп) with either a steel or a fibreglass tape measure from the posterior edge of the midline junction of the supracaudal scutes to the tip of the extended straightened tail (TLC). A negative sign for this measurement indicates a distance short of the carapace marpin. Tunles were weighed using 10, 100 or 200kg Salter spring balances (+ 0.1, = 0.5, + LOkg respectively). All turtles were measured for CCL except those with damage to the posterior carapace, An ap- proximately random series of turtles were MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM weighed and TLC measured. A group of imma- ture turtles (31 females and 25 males) was selected from the turtles captured on 25 May and 21 September 1991 so that there were ap- proximately five turtles of each sex represented in each 10cm increment of CCL in the range of 40-90cm and all measurements were taken on these turtles. Each turtle within this two year study has been analysed for only one set of meas- urements, usually those taken at the time of first capture. The number of turtle barnacles. Chelonibia testudinaria, with diameter »1cm on the carapace were counted. Where turtles were recaptured at greater than a one year interval, a second count of these barnacles for the turtle was included. The gonads and associated reproductive ducts were examined using laparoscopy to assess sex, maturity and reproductive status of the turtle (Limpus & Reed, 1985a). The developmental features of the reproductive organs of marine turtles that can be used for assessment of sex, maturity and breeding status have been described : C. mydas (Limpus & Reed, 1985a,b), Caretta caretta (Limpus, 1983) and Eretmochelys im- bricata (Limpus, 1992b). These developmental features were applied in assessment of sex and maturity. The year of breeding was determined as follows: a female was scored as breeding in the current breeding season if she was observed on a nesting beach, or if she was in advanced vitel- logenesis in the months preceding a breeding season; she was scored as having bred in the previous breeding season if she had healing cor- pora lutea (— corpora albicantia) 23mm in diameter during the months following a breeding season; she was scored as having bred in the penultimate breeding season if she had corpora albicantia -3mm in diameter. Not all turtles were sexed via laparoscopy. For those turtles not sexed via laparoscopy: when TLC >30cm, the turtle was arbitrarily rated as adult male; when CCL «90cm and the tail was not differentiated, the maturity status was rated as immature on the basis that the smallest recorded breeding adult female at the southern Great Barrier Reef (GBR) rookeries had CCL = 90cm (Limpus et al., 1984). Data were obtained from the unpublished records of the Queensland Turtle Research Project for turtles recaptured in this study which had been tagged at other locations, These recap- tures occurred for turtles from three study types. 1. Feeding area studies. Ina continuing series of studies since. 1974, many thousands of C. mydas have been captured, tagged and released CHELONIA MYDAS IN QUEENSLAND sandflats LLL—————À 10 km FIG. 1. Moreton Bay and the turtle research study sites, see text for details. 1, Moreton Island; 2, North Stradbroke Island; 3, Peel Island; 4, Raby Bay; 5, Moreton Banks; 5a, Browns Gutter, 5b; Days Gutter; 6, Maroom Banks; 7 , Pelican Banks; 8, Rous Channel. at Heron Reef and other reefs of the Capricorn- Bunker Groups, Shoalwater Bay, Repulse Bay, Green Island Reef and Clack Reef. 2. Nesting studies. Since 1971, tens of thousands of nesting female C. mydas have been tagged on nesting beaches in eastern Australia. 3. Hatchling marking studies, During the period January 1976 - March 1983, 108940 hatc- hling C. mydas were marked by mutilation tag- ging at Mon Repos and Heron Island (Limpus, 1985). These latter turtles can be identified to year and rookery of birth by the distinctive pattern of damage to a pair of marginal scutes (one scute on either side of the posterior carapace with sym- metrically placed damage within each scute; Limpus, 1985). An arbitrary birth date of 1 February was assigned to these marked hatc- hlings within each breeding seasori. Rainfall and air temperature data were obtained from the Bureau of Meteorology weather station at the Brisbane airport (27°26’S, 153?06' E). Sur- face water temperature data from the vicinity of the Moreton Banks during June 1988 to January 1990 was supplied by Dr. A. Preen. Water depths were obtained from local marine charts (Anon, 1987). STUDY SITE | Moreton Bay (27°30°5, 153°18’E) is a large, wedge-shaped, semi-enclosed bay in south east- ern Queensland adjacent to Brisbane (Fig. 1). It is approximately 100km long with a maximum width of 30km at its northern limit. It extends from the mouth of the Nerang River at 27°54’S in the south to the opening between Bribie Island and Moreton Island at 27.03°S in the north. Six 142 = 20 зон A | 24 250 ! r 7 zw Ë с | ' А | 1 m | p del ' wo 0 е | : Н | а & A - h | r і * H D : I $p ma Ме | Gaia, an Feu Mab А Moy dun dui Ang Hep Oct thoy Hee Manth m Imum emos ier ~ aen фе аш mmm. Hmm abe 99 rene aai FIG. 2. The mean monthly air temperature and rainfall recorded at the Brisbane Airport for the years 1949 - 1992. Data obtained from the Bureau of Meteorology. rivers discharge into Moreton Bay: Caboolture, Pine, Brisbane, Logan, Coomera, and Nerang Rivers. The southern, narrow, part of Moreton Bay consists of many small islands and narrow channels less than 6m deep (Young & Kirkman, 1975) while the northem portion is relatively open and reaches a maximum depth of 60m (Mil- ford & Church, 1976). The eastern side of Moreton Bay is dominated by a large fan-shaped delta situated between Peel, Moreton and North Stradbroke Islands which is formed by the tidal movement of oceanic waters into Moreton Bay via the Rous Channel. The Moreton Banks form the northern portion of this fan-shaped delta. The sediments of the Moreton Banks are mostly quartz sand in contrast to the southern and western regions of Moreton Bay which are mud (Maxwell, 1970). The open areas of Moreton Bay have salinities close to full-strength seawater (34- 35°/oo), while salinity decreases along the western side of Moreton Bay adjacent to the mainland coast where it approaches 33°/oo, or lower during floods (Milford & Church, 1976). Mean air temperatures in Moreton Bay can vary between a maximum of 24.3°C in January to a minimum of 15.9°C in July (Newell, 1971). The TABLE 2. Immature Chelonia mydas captured on the Moreton Banks that had been marked by mntilation tagging when they were hatchlings at the Heron Is- land Rookery, See Fig. 4 for the marking pattern by which these turtles were identified to the year and rookery of birth after Limpus (1985) Tag — [Sex — [Date — [CCLiem) |Agetyo. | (151184 |Femate 13 Осг90 [s44 |875 | 92 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM ao Mean "m Маз mum Dnm Dn:?-7:-5—5€9-43— 36079823 Әф ас ОУ . t iJ ASUND IPM AMS JR SORE ' Мат (Мау WABA - February 1290 = FIG. 3. Surface water temperatures recorded on the Moreton Banks. Data supplied by Dr. A, Preen, range of the air temperature over the bay is nar- rower than the air temperature range over the adjacent mainland (Fig. 2). The mean monthly surface water temperatures follow approximately the fluctuations of the ambient air temperatures but are generally slightly higher. Mean monthly surface water temperatures in the vicinity of the Moreton Banks range approximately 16-28°С with usually <2°C variation between minimum and maximum temperature within a month (Fig, 3). The Moreton Bay area has a summer wet season during December to March and minimum monthly rainfall during August and September (Fig. 2). This part of the Queensland coast is charac- terised by two tidal cycles per day with a tidal range of ~2.5m at highest spring tides to ~0.9m at neap tides (Anon, 1990), The Moreton Banks are covered in most areas by 2-6m of waterat high tide and varying proportions of the banks are exposed at each low tide. The depth of these banks drops sharply to 10m along the southern edge which is delimited by the Rous Channel and to 15m along the western edge. The Moreton Banks cover an area of approximately 6290ha, with some 2513ha of seagrass meadow and another 3777ha of sparse or patchy seagrass (Hylandetal., 1989). The dominant vegetation of the Moreton Banks included: seagrasses (Halophila ovalis, Н, spinulosa, Halodule uninervis, Zostera capricorni, Syringodium isoetifolium, Hyland et al., 1989), macroalgae (Sargassum sp., Hypnea cervicornis, Gracilaria edulis, Hydroclathrus clathratus, Codium fragile) and the grey mangrove (Avicennia marina; Dowling, 1986). The latter fringed the castern margin of these banks and the adjacent small un-named island (27°20 S, 153?24" E). CHELONIA MYDAS IN QUEENSLAND " PES d WS mud ix - - 3 -— a и бү ү Уа SUN — 4 FIG. 4. Immature Chelonia mydas (tag number T51184) originally marked by mutilation tagging as a hatchling at Heron Island in February 1982, Sce Table 2 for details. To identify capture sites within the Moreton Banks, the banks were divided into sectors which were defined hy the boundaries of the low tide drainage areas (Fig. 1). RESULTS In the course of establishing tagged study populations, an attempt has been made to capture all turtles seen in shallow water habitats ex- amined in Moreton Bay. Total captures (includ- ing recaptures) during this initial two years of study were: 1068 captures of 826 C. mydas, 447 captures of 320 Caretta caretta and 4 captures of 4 Eretmochelys imbricata. This report sum- marises the data recorded from the C, mydas. A total of 1025 captures of 784 individual C. mydas were recorded on the Moreton Banks FIG. 5. Portion of a days catch of Chelonia mydas Irons the Moreton Banks onboard the Research Vessel “Sea World IU. 143 during this two year study. Numerous turtles were seen and captured on all occasions that the Moreton Banks were visited. No comparable concentration of С. mydas has yet been identified in other areas of Moreton Bay during our boat based transects or from discussions with local fishermen. During the last 18 months of the study an additional 42 С mydas were captured else- where in Moreton Bay: 10 оп the Maroom Banks, immediately south of the Rous Channel; 23 on the northern seagrass flats of Peel Island; 9 on the Pelican Banks. Of the 826 C. mydas examined in this study, only 6 were recaptures of turtles that had been tagged in studics elsewhere: 1 from other fecding area studies, 3 from nesting studies, 2 from hatchling marking studies. The ex-feeding arca recapture (tag number 36994) was of an immature female that had been tagged while feeding at Heron Island Reef on 31 March 1990 (CCL = 77cm). It was recaptured 490km to the south at the Moreton Banks on 7 September 1991 (CCL = 78.5em), with 525d between captures. The three adult females from nesting studies that were recaptured on the Moreton Banks originated from tagging studies in the southern Great Barrier Reef (Lady Musgrave Island, Heron Island and North West Island - tag numbers: X14662, T43877, T35025 respectively; Table 1). The two immature C. mydas that were consistent with having been marked by mutilation tagging when they were hatchlings had been marked at the Heron Island rookery (Table 2; Fig. 4), These latter turtles have recruited to live at a feeding urea that is approximately 490km from their natal гоокегу. Because most of the Moreton Bay turtles cap- tured at sites away from the Moreton Banks were not sexed, and given their small sample sizes, only the turtles caplured on the Moreton Banks will be analysed for population structure. A typi- cal catch of turtles within this study site is il- lustrated in Fig. 5. The size class distribution and sex of the 784 C. mydas captured on the Moreton Banks is summarised in Fig. 6A, They included turtles over a wide range of sizes from small immature turtles with CCL = 38.8cm up to adults with CCL = 119.1cm. There were no turtles cap- tured in the size range between that of hatchlings (approximate CCL = Sem; Limpus et al.. 1984) and small immatures with CCL —38cm. The most frequently captured turtles were small immatures in the CCL range of 40-65cm. The population structure by sex, size and maturity is summarised in Fig. GB,C and Table 3. Of the 393 females examined for sex and maturity, there were 10,9% ! Ма | | ! Гетта, =... AImesasn 60| | | = y E I. Hilal. - = 100 gq NM pet Tom) 40 = Adult 70 M 7 Pubsstea! 80 B® ecooorceni F r 50 є ü ц 40 n" с 30 y 20 10 ! в H о - H a ae m ә 4n 40 pu эп D wo NM CCL (ст) ba — АЯШ: 79 Pobescon! Бр Bl Preculresnent F = f 50 M г) u 40 е 10 c шт р! LET "CL n 00 100 WO NM prt fem) FIG. 6. Size class distribution of Chelonia mydas cap- tured on the Moreton Banks, NM denotes that turtles were not measured, A, all turtles by sex (n = 784); B, females by maturity status (n — 393); C, males by maturity status (n = 206). adult, 2.5% pubescent immature and 86.556 prepubescent immature. The mean size (CCL) of the adult females was 107.9cm (Table 4). This mean adult female size is not significantly dif- ferent from the. mean size of nesting female C. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM mydas from the southern GBR (CCL — 107.0cm, s.d. = 5.318, range = 91-124, n = 1942; Fj 1981 = 1.07, p 0.5; Limpus et al., 1984). Of the 57 females in the adult size range (CCL 2 90cm) that were assessed for maturity, 28% were still imma- ture (8 prepubescent, 8 pubescent), The size (CCL) of the largest prepubescent immature female was 100.5cm while the largest pubescent immature female was 108.1cm, slightly larger than average breeding size for this population. This latter immature turtle was assessed as being several years away from sexual maturity. The mean size (CCL) of pubescent immature females was 96.7cm (Table 4). Of the 206 males identified in this study, there were 3.9% adult, 1.0% pubescent immature and 95.1% prepubescent immature (Table 3). The mean size (CCL) of the adult males was 102.1cm (Table 4). These adult males were not significant- ly different to the size of the breeding male C. mydas recorded in courtship aggregations in the southern GBR (mean CCL = 100.6cm, s.d. = 4.609, range = 89.5-114.5, n = 361, Fias7 = 0.84, p 0.5; Limpus, 1993.). The largest immature male measured (CCL) —98.8cm. The mean size (CCL) of pubescent immature males was 93.6cm (Table The results of analysis of covariance, by sex, of the various measurements taken on these turtles are summarised in Table 5. No differences be- tween the sexes, indicated by coincidental regres- sion for males and females, were identified when CCL was compared with each of CCW, SCL, CSCL, SCW, HL or PL and TLC for immature turtles having CCL «80cm. The regressions for this suite of characters were recalculated, pooling the values for both sexes (Table 5; Fig. 7). With each of these pooled regressions, except for CCL:TLC there was little scatter about the relationship as indicated by the high r^ values. Thus, except for tail length, any one of these measurement methods could be used as a stand- ard measure for this species, and the others could be derived from it. Given the low cost of fibreglass tape measures and the ease with which CCL can be measured in a variety of field condi- tions, both in and out of water, CCL is recom- mended as the basic standard length measure for С. mydas. C. mydas was sexually dimorphic with respect to analysis of covariance comparison of regression analyses of CCL:HW, HL:HW and logCCL:logWT. The results of these analyses by sex are summarised in Table 5. However, the degree of sexual dimorphism is small, as can be seen by inspection of the data (Fig. 7C,D,F), and CHELONIA MYDAS IN QUEENSLAND TABLE 3. Frequency distribution by size class, sex and maturity for Chelonia mydas captured on the Moreton Banks.” Maturit "e — rotat cm) т 265.0 kr Еш шш (Female з [10 — [a — 94 |эзв [393 | LL neni sius e ari [Toa |62 а — [14 — [230 [авв 1784 | little confidence can be placed in sexing turtles based on these relationships. While immature turtle with CCL <80cm were not significantly sexually dimorphic with respect to tail length (TLC), adult turtles were markedly dimorphic with respect to this character (Fig. 7E). However, even with this character there is over- lap in measurements with some immature males and small adult females. There were 58 adult- sized, short-tailed turtles that externally resembled "adult female" C. mydas that were examined using a laparoscope to determine their sex and maturity. One (2%) was found to be a prepubescent immature male (CCL = 92.0cm, TLC = 7.0ст). Among the 57 females, there were 8 pubescent and 8 prepubescent immatures and 41 adults. Thus if there had been no gonad ex- amination and only the measurement of carapace and tail had been used to determine sex and maturity, the adult female component of the population could have been over estimated by 42%. These data demonstrate that for both female and male C. mydas, most do not reach maturity at a minimum breeding size but at a size approach- ing the average breeding size for the population. (Sex rys TABLE 4, Curved carapace length (em) of adult and pubescent Chelonia mydas captured on the Moreton Banks. o T [mem [sb шш — | 107.9 [^ 4l 98.5- 119.1 108.1 98.6 - 105.1 The 11 turtles scored with "uncertain maturity status" (Table 3) include those turtles with undif- ferentiated tails that were adult sized CCL>90cm but whose reproductive systems were nol ex- amined to assess maturity. These turtles, whilc they were probably females, have not been as- signed a maturity status, The sex ratio of immature turtles, considered in Sem CCL size class increments from 40-90cm, was significantly different to 1:1 (X^ = 51,02, 9d.f., p < 0.001). Stepwise unweighted logistic regression showed that sex ratio was variahle within the population, being significantly corre- lated with maturity status, size class of the turtle and a cross product interaction of size with maturity status for adult turtles (Table 6). When these data are pooled across all size classes and maturity status classes, it resulted in a sex ratio for C. mydas on the Moreton Banks of male - female = 1 : 1.91, i,e,65.6% of the population was female. The proportion of adult females that bred in each of four breeding seasons (bred/total number examined) were: 1988-1989 = 1/13; 1989-1990 = 6/15; 1990-1991 = 1/16; 1991-1992 = 2/12, A chi squared test for heterogeneily did not detect sig- nificant interscasonal variability in annual breed- ing rates for these adult females (X^ = 7.4, 3d.f., p=0.06). This result was influenced by the smail annual sample sizes. Averaged over these four years, the annual breeding rate = 18% of the adult females that feed in this area. The adult males were not identified to the season in Which they bred. Four immature C. mydas were recorded with deformed spines (3 with scoliosis: males, CCL = 70.0, 98. lecmi;female, ССІ, = 50.5em. 1 with kyphosis:malc, CCL — 81.3cem). Fibropapillomas (Fig. 8) were recorded on 62 (7,996) of the 784 C, mydas examined in this study. The frequency distribution by size class of turtles with fibropapillomas is shown in Fig, 9. This disease appears to be extemally recognisable most fre- quently with large immature turtles: average size of turtles with fibropapillomus was CCL = 74. lem (s.d.= 11,51, п= 62, range =48.0-102.1), Three other obviously sick turtles that did not swim vigorously and were emaciated and with extremely sunken plastrons (females, CCL = 99.]1cm, 41.8cm; male, CCL = 78.4cm) were captured, The turtle barnacle, Chelonibia testudinaria, was the most obyious barnacle on these turtles und was restricted to the more ngid surfaces of the turtles. carapace. plastron and head and oc 146 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM go} ' Female + Male no0c2cO e o My опооо ешп ' 2-a-£$ 3 | 4 o 10 20 30 40 50 50 70 80 80 100 Curved carapace length (cm) 180; 460 = Female Male 140 - ж Hatchling (Heron 18) о 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 tO 120 Curved carapace length (em) 2.25 Female . F Male H Az eor ' 1.5 16 17 1.8 1.9 20 24 Log CCL 25: а —— HL: Females HL: Males +. н be e 201 4 MW. Females "e 1 HW: Males = 4^ . + m 15) | + Д, К 2 ink j^ М 5 se _ Бе Г" и ` ч r 10 Lig de E : gr m aigu р we n 1 5 (ст) р о: 1 — —— — —- a 20 40 60 80 100 Curved carapace length (cm) T 85; = — a | | zl Female Male I | e 25) n а t 20; h + 18: r о m 10 Я а 5 Phy 4 f dt te +" а 0 fafa = р А U Б = m "T — І е (em) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 30 100 110 120 Curved carapace length (cm) 14 — Female 4 121 | Male ple? H 10 E e T d s ‚М " nz w | и i в а | 1 LE" (ст) f F y p А | 0 5 10 15 20 25 Head length (ст) FIG. 7. Scatter plots of morphometric data recorded from Chelonia mydas from the Moreton Banks. A, curved carapace length / width (п = 56); B, curved carapace length / weight (n = 198); C, log / log regression of curved carapace length / weight (n = 198); D, curved carapace length / head measurements for the separate sexes ( female = 31, male = 25); E, curved carapace length / tail length from the carapace (n = 103); F, head length / head width (female = 31, male = 25). curred rarely on the flippers. C. testudinaria >1ст diameter on the carapace were counted on 814 turtles: this barnacle was recorded on 52.9% of the turtles (mean count of 2.6 barnacles per turtle, s.d. = 5.584, range = 0-93; Fig. 10). There was no obvious correlation between the size of the turtles and the number of C. testudinaria >Icm diameter that they carried on the carapace. Two adult female С. mydas (CCL = 104.8, 116.6 cm) had large infestations of the burrowing bar- CHELONIA MYDAS IN QUEENSLAND FIG. 8, Fibropapillomas at the base of the front flipper of an immature Chelonia mydas. Upper scale in in- ches, lower scale in centimetres. necle, Tubicinella cheloniae, in the carapace. Neither of these turtles appeared to be debilitated by these bamacles. Isolated individuals of this barnacle were found on few other turtles. Other commensal barnacles included Platylepas decorata which occurred in appreciable numbers on the skin rather than the rigid surfaces of almost every turtle; the small burrowing barnacle Sromatolepas transversa which were found in the plastronal grooves of the larger turtles; Srephanolepas muricata, another small burrow- ing barnacle, occurred in small numbers bur- rowed through and between scales on the leading edge of the front flippers. Ozobranchid leeches, Ozobranchus margoi, and/or their eggs occurred on almost every turtle and were very numerous on turtles with enlarged fibropapillomas. Thir- teen turtles displayed evidence of having been impacted by anthropogenic activities (Fig. 9). Four (0.5%) of the turtles had been tangled in rope or fishing line: one (CCL = 89.5cm) had a rope and another (CCL = 94.5cm) had a large length of fishing line tightly tangled around a front flip- per (In each case the affected flipper was func- tional but partly debilitated); two (CCL = 77.2, 85.8cm) were tangled in float lines to crab-pots and would have drowned had they not been released. Nine (1.19%) of the turtles examined had damage to the carapace, in varying stages of healing, that was consistent with the turtle having been struck by a boat or propeller (This value does not include any C. mydas that have died following a boat-strike). These turtles with boat- strike injuries (Fig. 9) include almost the entire size range of turtles occurring on the Moreton Banks (Fig. 6A). None of the C. mydas examined had unhealed wounds that would have been con- 147 langg ! Wuni bka | WEB ЖАТК б + Ы | а } | | а | m li e | '| n f£ c у 4| "e | 3 "i | L | |] 1 x 40 50 bo 70 BO ой 109 к Cur vod edrapece !еппїһ (cm) FIG, 9, Frequency distribution by size of sick and injured Chelonia mydas from the Moreton Banks sistent with their having been attacked recently by sharks or other predators. Many of the turtles were observed actively feeding and they often had food items still in their mouths as they were lifted on board the catch boat. The common mouth contents, in order of frequency of occurrence, were pieces of seagrass (Halophila ovalis, Halodule uninervis, Zostera capricorni, Halophila spinulosa) and algae (H'yp- nea cervicornis). These turtles were also ix- casionally observed feeding on jellyfish (Carosrylus mosaicus). A detailed study of the diet of these turtles has been the subject of а separate study (Read, 1991) and will be reported on separately, The turtles foraged into the inter- tidal areas, moving in with the rising tide and back to permanent water with the falling tide. The turtles had two choices in leaving the intertidal areas with the falling tide; they could move into small gutters within the inner drainage area of these extensive banks or they could swim to the outer edge of the banks. The former was more accessible to turtles that foraged towards the mid- dle of the Moreton Banks. A total of 598 measured C. mydas had their location within the Moreton Banks recorded when captured and large and small turtles were found to have dif- ferent distributions on these banks. Large turtles, CCL = 80cm, were rarely encountered on the inner drainage areas (0.596 of captures, n — 192) while they were regularly captured within the outer drainage areas (31.3% of captures, n 2 406). There were 241 recaptures on the Moreton Banks of turtles previously tagged on the Moreton Banks during this study. Of these, there were 141 recaptures for which the location within the Moreton Banks was recorded for the consecutive captures of the same turtle. Of thesc latter recap- 148 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM TABLE 5. Analysis of covariance comparison of regression analysis of CCL against other measurements by sex of Chelonia mydas resident on the Moreton Banks in eastern Moreton Bay. If there was no significant difference between the sexes when tested for coincidental regression, the measurements for all turtles (male, females and unsexed) were pooled for establishing the final regression in the form : Y — aX +b. [sin "hw regression "үз зех DF |ѕатрје |P en (signifeance. са, [ecw |013 |252 18123 jpost- (ссі. |scL [ова |2,52 |(31.25) |р>025(05) | fect. [cser [пз [2.52 |13125) 1202503) са. sew ша ese nas fene |сс1*[тїс [0.12 [2.68 |(3834 [P0259 | (ns) 0 2152 2,52 |31,25) log кр?! 2,259| (176, CEL | 0.005>р>0,0 9 Linear reg For pooled sexes э лов fsg [uaren Hel M рез | post [о 1072 (as риз (кти. зї роо | 09080 11.5816 |56 |09855 e imm 0977 тарт атан ера аа е FT For separate sexes (31,25) |0.0025»p»0] ? pns 1.5804 H 001 ШШ 12369 |25 05073 00 | 1670 ssion equation Yt «0.0005 |-4.2958 | [04501 157 [i in [00005 | 0005 UNE 9788 - 0005 |p<0.0005_| m Ye p<0.0005 30h 175 0.9860 [3.0274 |. asms|er [09792 [ззат |nss |р<блю5 | * CCL/TLC correlaction was tested only for immature turtles with CCL«80cm tures, 77.3% occurred in the same sector, 18.4% occurred 1n adjacent sectors within the outer drainage areas, 2.8% involved a shift from the inner drainage to the outer drainage and 1.4% involved a shift from the outer to the inner drainage. There was only one recapture on the Moreton Banks of the 42 turtles tagged elsewhere in Moreton Bay: one of the ten turtles tagged on the Maroom Banks was recaptured on the southern edge of the Moreton Banks, having crossed the Rous Channel. In addition, one of the 23 turtles tagged on the Peel Island seagrass flats was recaptured on the Peel Island seagrass flats. Twenty four immature C. mydas were removed from the Moreton Banks and relocated to other areas of Moreton Bay: 9 released at Peel Island with 4 recaptured back at the Moreton Banks; 14 released at Raby Bay with 7 recaptured back at the Moreton Banks; 1 released on the Maroom Banks. The remainder of these relocated turtles have not been recaptured. While none of the C. mydas tagged at the Moreton Banks and released there has been sub- sequently recaptured at any other feeding area, six of the turtles captured in this study have been found beachwashed elsewhere in the Moreton Bay region. Four apparently have been swept to the east through the Rous Channel (three were found beachwashed and dead on the south castern end of Moreton Island and one was found beach- washed and dead on the north eastern end of North Stradbroke Island). None of these turtles had external injuries and they were beachwashed along with other similar sized but untagged C. mydas. The remaining two were found beach- washed and alive on the western side of Moreton Bay- one displaying disoriented swimming, al Ormiston; the other with four recent propeller cuts to the left shoulder and head, at Victoria Point. This latter turtle was kyphotic and had grown 3.7cm and developed 12 small fibropapil- lomas in the 1.7yr since it had been first captured. CHELONIA MYDAS IN QUEENSLAND 400 ———— › 97162 ¥ © eeeaerce cs o @ zn 30 40 50 50 то аб 20 too лайт шотан Irnrqueney FIG. 10, Frequency distribution of Chelonibia des- tudinaria on Chelonia mydas inhabiting the Moreton Banks (n= 814). In addition, three turtles from the Moreton Banks were killed and used in other studies. DISCUSSION The three migrant recaptures of adult females within the present study, when considered in con- junction with other recaptures from elsewhere in Mereton Bay of migrant adult females originat- ing from distant nesting studies (Table 1), demonstrate that the С. mydas of Moreton Bay migrate to breed at the rookeries of the Great Barrier Reef. Most of the adult females tagged at nesting beaches and recaptured in Moreton Bay (Table 1) were from the southern GBR rookeries 428-515km disiant (94%) while one female had been breeding at Raine Island, 2072km distant in the northern GBR. That the turtles living in Moreton Bay are part of the populations that breed within the GBR 1s further supported by the recruitment of two small immature turtles 10 reside on the Moreton Banks that had been originally marked as hatchlings on Heron Island (Table 2). It is within the normal distribution pultern for cheloniid turtles for them lo reside at feeding areas that are great distances from their natal rookeries (Limpus et al., 1992), The capture of T36994 in Moreton Bay during the present study (immature female originally tagged at Heron Island Reef) is the first recapture of a turtle, out of the thousands of C. mydas that have been tagged in feeding areas elsewhere in castern Australia, which has made a major shift in feeding area. However, the results of past mark-recapture studies within the GBR and the Hawaiian Archipelago imply that individual С, mydas remain associated with specific feeding 149 sites for extended periods of time (Balazs, 1980; Limpus & Walter, 1980; Limpus et al., 1992). While the isolated instance of movement between feeding sites by T3699 is interesting, it contrasts with the strong site fidelity in evidence in the present study and the local homing to the Moreton Banks of turtles relocated to other parts of Moreton Bay (Similar short range homing has been recorded for С, mydas in Bermuda; Ireland, 1979). Until there are additional data to prove otherwise, it is presumed that the majority of individual С. mydas remain associated with specific feeding sites. The oldest museum record of C. mydas from Moreton Bay is a skull (Queensland Museum J3841) registered 17 July 1923. Marine turtles were well known to the early aboriginal in- habitants of Moreton Bay who at times hunted them for food (Petrie, 1983), Backhouse (1843), in describing Moreton Bay soon after first European settlement of the area, reported "three species of turtle are met with here, one of which is black and unwholesome”. The latter probably was the Leatherback Turtle, Dermochelys coriacea. Turtles, especially C. mydas, would have been hunted for food for the young colony. Ashton (1941) described a Brisbane scenc in about 1880: “In front of one or two of the leading hotels there were enormous turtles chained to the doorpost, with the legend, ‘Turtle Soup to- night". At the turn of the century in Moreton Bay, “,.. turtles are sufficiently plentiful to айтас! a little attention. The green turtle, of soup fame, may be found all about the Bay, ...." (Welsby, 1905). A commercial harvest of turtles, presumably C. mydas, was occurring in Moreton Bay from al least 1896 (Table 7) and continued until 1950 when C. туйау was totally protected in Queensland waters (Limpus, 1980). The Chief Inspector of Fisheries, in eleven of his annual reports to the Queensland Government during the period 1896 - 1924, indicates that there was nu shortage of turtles in Moreton Bay (Table 7}, However, because of a limited market, the com- mercial turtle harvest was not great, with the largest recorded annual take probably exceeding 70 turtles in 1900 (Stevens, 1901). During 1924- 1929, turtle soup factories operated on North West Island and Heron Island in the southern GBR nd at least 8472 female C. mydas were taken from the nesting beaches to supply this industry (Anon, 1893-1928; Anon, 1929-1951). Given that C. mydas that reside in Moreton Bay are part of the population thal nests on these southem GBR rookeries (Table 1: Limpus et al.. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM TABLE 6. Results of stepwise unweighted logistic regression of sex гапо by size and maturity of Chelonia mydas resident on the Moreton Banks. Г ойый» ____ S O ква а Бє Тиш эт л O StA+PutPr+SxA+SxPud [8.28 у | 5+А+Ри+Рг+5хА. 8.28 18 S+A+Pu+Pr 14.41 i o — [i [poss 12.3 1 p< A+Pu+Pr+SxA 13.53 10.5 [1 10.005>р>0.001* 5+Ри+Рг+8хА i — — p — Ih — a ЕНИ 5+А+Рг+5хА S+A+PutSxA 8278 S+A+SxA4C COS 24.65 15 р<0 (01+ p«0.001* р=0.95 0.005>р>0.001+ 0.005»p20.001* __|pc0.001* 12.7 1 Pr 1 * sxpr dropped from model because jt was too highly correllated with other variables. Dummy variables: A, adult: Pu, pubescent; Pr, prepubescent and cross-products between each of these variables and S. *, source makes a significant contribution to sex ratio; C, constant. S, CCL in Sem increments. 1992), and given that the southern GBR C. mydas population has a mean nesting remigration inter- val of 6 yr (Limpus et al., in press), the six years of operation of the turtle soup factories on these islands would have reduced the numbers of adult female C. mydas in all feeding areas, including Moreton Bay, which supplied females to the southern GBR rookeries. Fallowing an unsuccessful attempt to produce canned turtle soup on Heron Island, Fogget Jones moved their turtle processing operation to Bris- bane in 1927 (W. Golding & Dr. О. Jones, pers, comm.). This Brisbane based turtle soup produc- tion continued to utilise female C. mydas from the southern GBR rookeries in the ycars that fol- lowed (Anon, 1929-51). It is presumed that this food processing company would have used local- ly caught turtles from Moreton Bay if they were availablebut the company's records of turtles and their origins are unavailable. In his 1944 Annual Report the Chief Inspector of Fisheries suggests that only small turtles were captured and brought to the Brisbane market that year, presumably from local sources (Anon, 1929-51). This may reflect a shortage of large turtles at that time. All of the older fishermen working on the Moreton Banks who have been interviewed during the current study indicated that Green Turtles were much less abundant on the Moreton Banks after World War 11, i.e. in the late 1940s - 1950s, than they ате at the present time. Although not quantified, there appears to have been some substantial changes in abundance of С. mydas in Moreton Bay over the years. The anecdotal information from local fishermen sug- gests that the С. mydas population in Moreton Bay was depleted by the end of World War JI and has increased since the introduction of total protection of C. mydas for southem Queensland in 1950. if these turtles require in excess of 30 years to reach sexual maturity (Limpus & Walter, 1980), the population resident on the Moreton Banks may represent the result of one generation time of recovery from a depleted state. The small proportion of adults in the Moreton Banks population in the 1990s would be consistent with a population recovering following depletion of adult and large immature turtles resident on the banks in the 1950s. For this interpretation to apply it would require that new turtles recruit to this population at the smaller size ranges and that the turtles do not shift to other distant feeding areas before reaching maturity. In a depleted population of C. mydas resident in the Hawaiian Islands, Balazs (1980) described a size structure skewed towards small turtles, The Moreton Banks and Hawaiian populations contrast with the population living on Heron Reef in the southem GBR (Limpus & Reed, 1985a) where CHELONIA MYDAS IN QUEENSLAND 151 TABLE 7. References to turtles and the turtle fishery of Moreton Bay that are contained in the Annual Reports id the Маше Department (later called the Department of Harbours and Marine) to the Queensland Government, 1893 - 192 Year e| Comments on the Moreton Bay fisheries 893-1894 |no reference to turtles 894-95 no reference to turtles 895-96 report not examined 1896-97 “The turtle fisheries, prosecuted by Mr. Peter Tuska in the Central-Moreton districts, have been found sufficient for the moderate demand of the Brisbane Preserving Works." 897-98 |norfeenetommles | 898-99 899-1900 |“А good supply of turtle can nearly always be obtained when required.” | “A very promising trade in turtle has been opened up during the year, several fair consignments having been placed in London and Vancouver by the Brisbane Fish Agency Company, and if regular supplies сап be maintained this compay anticipates securing regular orders." The Brisbane Fish Agency Company received "For the year ending 30 June:- .... turtle 70 value £70..." (The total catch for Moreton Bay was not documented. “Turtling which gave promise of developing to a good business last year, has not come up to expectations, ihe demand being so small, orders for only fifty-three having been received. These orders were soon rocured,” 1902-03 “Turtle have been plentiful, and the several men following this occupation have been able lo supply the demand for turtle." 1903-04 “Turtle-fishing remains an unprofitable occupation, there being next to no demand, a few dozen only meeting all Brisbane requirements. The export trade also appears io be nil, and much to be regretted, à splendid supply being obtainable in our waters could a suitable and steady market be found." "Turtle have also been plentiful in the Bay, but the demand being trifling, only one boat engaged in this trade." “there 15 a large field for enterprise in the work of development on the coast of this State, which I fervently hope to see eventually undertaken. Fishing for dugong, turtle, trawling, fish-linning, fish-curing ае eS salting (especially the curing and salting of eugaree) for export, are all open possibilities." [1906-07 | no reference to turtles 1907-08 no reference to turtles no reference to turtles “Turtle fishing has not improved, the demand remaining very limited. A fairly plentiful supply is however, obtainable on our coast if required." =й . 1900-01 “Nothing of any note was done with turtle, there being apparently no demand beyond the call for an odd one or so for the Sydney market." 1911-12 912-13 “The demand for turtle has been Very limited, although plenty are obtainable, if required." 913-14 no reference to turtles 914-15 no reference to turtles 915-16 no reference to turtles 916-17 “Turtles have been plentiful, but the demand уе 1917-18 “Turtle fishing has not improved. The demand 15 still very limited, but a good supply 1s obtainable on the coast if required.” 1918-19 "Turtles were obtainable on the coast in any quantity, but there being no demand only a few for odd requirements were secured." m — a = | — К 0 D 17 $ © 1919-20 “Turtling has been almost a dead letter. Only a few were caught, there being no demand.” 1921-22 no reference to turtles 1922-23 |по reference to turtles the Heron Reef population contained a higher proportion of large immature and adult turtles of both sexes. Given that the resident turtles of Heron Reef have not been subjected to any sig- nificant harvest since European colonisation (ex- cept for the few females that would have nested locally an Heron and North West Islands during the short period of soup factory operations), the structure of the population on Heron Reef in present times should more closely approximate a natural population. The Moreton Bay study site has à lower proportion of adult C. mydas in the population than any other study site examined in caster Australia (CJL, unpubl. data). Given these considerations, there is the strong pos- sibility that the resident C. mydas population in Moreton Bay is presently in à state of recovery from past overharvesting. Moreton Bay is approximately 400km south of the southern limit for successful annual nesting for C. mydas in eastern Australia (Limpus, 1980) and the large numbers of C. mydas present in Morcton Bay arc not aggregations for courtship or nesting. There is only one confirmed nesting record for the species from Moreton Bay: clutch of 126 eggs laid at Scarborough (27"12'S, 153"07'E), hatchling emerged 21 February 1992 (egg in Queensland Museum, J54440). Asis char- acteristic of C. mydas populations studied else- where in inshore Australian continental shelf waters (soulhern Gulf of Carpentaria, Limpus & Reed 1985b; Torres Strait, Parmenter 1980; sourhem GBR, Limpus & Reed, 19852) posthatc- hling turtles (CCL «35em) are not resident on the Moreton Banks, Posthatchling С, mydas are believed to drift past Moreton Bay on the East Australian Current and occasionally occur as beachwashed sick or dead individuals on the ocean beaches outside of Moreton Вау following sirong onshore winds (Walker, 1994; Limpus et 4l, 1994), Once the young turtles recruit to Moreton Bay they remain as residents and all size classes occur from the small immatures (CCL = 39cm) up to large adults of both sexes. These С. mydus occur in Moreton Bay all year round. The present study has not attempted to sample the entire range of habitats within Moreton Bay bul has focused оп shallow water habitats. Given that Jarger turtles are more likely to be found at the edges of these shallow banks than in the inner drainage areas, the present study may not describe the size class distribution, sex ratio and possibly other characteristics of С, mydas in- habiting the deep water habitats of Moreton Bay. Within the shallow subtidal and intertidal feeding MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM areas of the Moreton Banks these C. mydas аге primarily herbivorous. The population of the Moreton Banks is strongly biased to females (669%) and to immature size classes (89% of females, 96% of males). Sexual maturity for both sexes docs not usually occur at the minimum breeding size but at some larger size. Individual females do not breed annually: averaged over the four breeding scasons, 1988 - 1992, only 18% of the adult females were recorded as breeding in any one year, The turtles of the Moreton Banks, living ad- jacent to a city of approximately one million inhabitants, show signs of a range of negative anthropogenic impacts: 0.3% tangled in rope or fishing line, 1% with healing boat/propeller damage, 8% with fibropapillomas (fibropapil- lomas are presumed to be the result of anthropogenic changes in the marine environ- ment (Balazs & Pooley, 1991), These impacts are absent from the C. mydas populations feeding on the coral reefs of the southern GBR (Limpus & Reed, 19852). ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This study was conducted as part of the Queensland Turtle Research Project of the Queensland Department of Environment and Heritage. Computing equipment was donated by Epsom Australia and 3M Australia, The use of the vessel 'Sea World П", skippered by Trevor Long, was provided by Sea World for six days. Partial support of the project was provided by the Queensland Museum to PJC and by a University of Qucensland Research grant to MAR. Numerous volunteers, particularly Kate Couper, Suzie Geermans, Anita Gordon, Duncan Limpus and Steve Wagner, and Sea World staff assisted in capturing and measuring the turtles. Dr. A. Preen made available the use of his water temperature data from Moreton Bay. Judith Rutherford prepared the map. Jeff Wright prepared the photographic prints. This assistance is gratefully acknowledged. LITERATURE CITED ANON. 1893-1928. “Report of the Marine Department for the year’. Annual reports to the Queensland Government. ANON, 1929-5]. “Report of the Department of Har- bours and Marine for the year ended 30th June". Annual reports to the Queensland Government, CHELONIA MYDAS IN QUEENSLAND 15 ANON. 1987. ‘Wellington Point to the Blue Hole small craft chart’. (Queensland Department of Har- bours and Marine: Brisbane.) ANON. 1990. *1990 Queensland tide tables’, (Queensland Department of Transport: Bris- bane.) ASHTON, J. 1941. ‘Now came still evening on'. (Angus and Robertson: Sydney). BACKHOUSE, J. 1843. ‘A narrative of a visit to the Australian colonies’. (Hamilton Adams and Co.: London). BALAZS, G. H. 1980. Synopsis of biological data on the green turtle in the Hawaiian Islands, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration Tech- nical Memorandum National Marine Fisheries Service Southwest Fisheries Cenler 7; 1-141. 1983, Recovery records of adult green turtles ob- served or originally tagged at French Frigate Shoals, Northwestern Hawaiian Islands. National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration Tech- nica] Memorandum National Marine Fisheries Service Southwest Fisheries Center 36; 1-42 BALAZS.G.H.& POOLEY, S.G. 1991. Research plan for marine turtle f'ibropapilloma. National Oceanic ahd Atmospheric Administration Tech- nical Memorandum National Marine. Fisheries Service Southwest Fisheries Center 156: 1-113, BUSTARD, R, 1972, ‘Sea turiles: natural history and conservation’, (Collins; London), CARR, A, & OGREN, L. 1960. The ecology and migration of sea turtles. 4. The green turtle in the Caribbean Sea. Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History 121; 1-48, DOWLING, R.M. 1986. The mangrove vegetation of Moreton Bay. Queensland Botany Bulletin 6: 1-45. HUGHES, С.К. 1974. The sea turtles of south-east Africa. 1. Status, morphology and distribution. Oceanographic Research Insutute Investigation- al Report 35: 1-144. HYLAND, S.J., COURTNEY, AJ. & BUTLER, С.Т. 1989. Distribution of scagrass in the Moreton Region trom Coolangatta to Noosa. Queensland Department of Primary Industries: Information Series. 1-42. IRELAND, L.C. 1979. Homing bchaviour of juvenile reen turtles, Chelonia mydas, Pp. 761-764. In mlaner, C.J, & McDonald, D, (eds), ‘Handbook оп biotelemetry and radio tracking’. (Pergamon Press: New York). LIMPUS, C.J, 1980, The green turtle, Chelonia mydas (L.) in eastern Australia. James Cook University of North Queensland Research Monograph 1. 1-22, 1985. A study of the loggerhead sea turtle, Coreta caretta, in eastern Australia. Ph.D. thesis, Zool- ogy Department, University of Queensland. 19924. Estimation of tag loss in marine turtle re- search, Wildlife Research 19: 457-469. 1992b, The hawksbill turtle, Eretmochelys im- bricata, in Queensland: population. siructure we within а southern Great Bamer Reef Feeding ground. Wildlife Research 19; 489-506. 1993. The green turtle, Chelonia mydas, \i\ Queensland: breeding males їп the southern Great Barrier Reef. Wildlife Research 20: 313- 523, LIMPUS, C. J, EGGLER, Р & MILLER, J, D. IN PRESS. Long interval remigration in eastern Australian Chelonia. Proceedings of the Thir- teenth Annual Workshop on Sea Turtle Biology and Conservation. LIMPUS, C.J., FLEAY, A. & GUINEA, M. 1984. Sea turtles of the Capricornia Section, Great Barrier Reef. Pp. 61-78, In Ward, W.T, & Sanger, P. leds), "The Capncornia section of the Great Bar- rier Reef: past, present und future’. (Royal Society of Queensland and Australian Coral Reef Society: Brisbane), LIMPUS, CJ., MILLER, J.D., PARMENTER, CJ., REIMER, О, McLACHLAN, N, & WEBB, R. 1992, Migration of green (Chelonia mydas) and loggerhead (Caretta caretta) turtles to and from easlern Australian rookeries. Wildlife Research 19: 347-358. LIMPUS, CJ., PARMENTER, C.J., BAKER, V. & FLBAY, A. 1983, The Crab Island sea turtle rookery in north casterm Gulf of Carpentaria, Australian Wildlife Researeh 10: 173-184. LIMPUS, C.J, & REED, Р, 1985a. The green шп, Chelonia wydas, in Queensland: a preliminary description of the population structure in а coral recf feeding ground. Pp. 47-52, In Grigg, GC.. Shine, R. & Ehmanno, Н. (eds), 'Biologv of Australasian frogs and reptiles’. (Royal Zonlagi- cal Society of New South Wales: Sydney). 1985b, Green sea turtles stranded by cyclone Kathy on the south western coast of the Gulf of Carpentaria Australian Wildlife Research 12- 523-533 LIMPUS, C.J., WALKER, Т.А. & WEST, J, 1994, Post-hatchling sca turtle specimens and records from the Australian region. Pp. 86-92. In ‘Proceedings of the Australian Marine Turtle Conservation Workshop, Sea World Nara Resort, Gold Coast, 14-17 November, 1990". (Queensland. Department of Environment and Heritage and Australian. Nature Conservation Agency: Australian Nature Conservation Agen- су; Cunberra). LIMPUS, C,J. & WALTER, D.G. 1980. The growth of immature green turtles (Chelonia mydas) under natural conditions. Herpetologica 36(2): 162- 165 MAXWELL, W.G.H, 1970. The sedimentary framework of Moreton Bay, Queensland. Australian Journal of Marine and Freshwaler Re- search 21: 71-88. MILFORD, S.N. & CHURCH, 1A. 1976. ‘Physical aceapngraphy of Moreton Bay, Queensland’. (Environmental Physics, Department ul Physics Lniversily of Queensland). 154 NEWELL, B.S. 1971. The hydrological environment of Moreton Bay, Queensland, 1967-68. CSIRO Australia Division of Fisheries and Oceanog- raphy Technical Paper 30: 1-35. PARMENTER, C.J. 1980. Environmental factors in turtle farming. James Cook University of North Queensland Research Monograph 1: 23-31. PETRIE, C.C. 1983. ‘Tom Petrie’s reminiscences of early Queensland’. 3rd Edition. (Angus and Robertson: Sydney), READ, M.A. 1991. Observations on the feeding ecol- ogy of immature green turtles, Chelonia mydas, in the Moreton Banks region of Moreton Bay, south east Queensland. B.Sc.Hon. Thesis, Zool- ogy Department, University of Queensland. STEVENS, J.H. 1901. Pp. 15-19. In ‘Report on the Marine Department for the year 1900-1901’. (Queensland Government: Brisbane), MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM WALKER, T.A. 1994. Post-hatchling dispersal of sea turtles. Pp. 72-86. In ‘Proceedings of the Australian Marine Turtle Conservation Workshop. Sea World Nara Resort, Gold Coast, 14-17 November, 1990’. (Queensland Depart- ment of Environment and Heritage and Australian Nature Conservation Agency: Australian Nature Conservation Agency, Can- berra). WELSBY, T. 1905. ‘Schnappering and fishing in the Brisbane River and Moreton Bay waters’. (Out- ridge Printing Co.: Brisbane). YOUNG, P.C. & KIRKMAN, H. 1975. The seagrass communities of Moreton Bay, Queensland. Aquatic Botany 1: 191-202. JOHN GILBERT'S MISSING MONTHS IAN A.W. MCALLAN McAllan, 1.A.W. 1994 06 01; John Gilbert s missing months. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35 (1): 155-179, Brisbane. ISSN 0079-8835. The activities of John Gilbert, the natural history collector, are examined for the months January - September 1844. Major sources used are his letters, unpublished notebooks and diaries. During this period he spent aver a month in Sydney, some of the time writing up his notes. Hethen travelled overland via the Hunter, Namoi, Gwydir and Dumarcsq River valleys to the Darling Downs, collecting specimens both en route and at the Downs. Also examined are the details of several type specimens of mammals, birds and fish collected during this period. [ ] John Gilbert, John Gould, Frederick Strange, nineteenth century, natural history collectors, type specimens, Darling Downs, Namoi River, Gwydir River. Ian A.W. McAllan, 46 Yeramba St, Turramurra, New South Wales 2074, Australia; 29 July 1993, The life of John Gilbert (1812-1845). the natural history collector, is of more than passing interest to modern Australian biologists. He first travelled to Australia in 1838 under the employ of the noted ornithologist John Gould (Sauer, 1982). Gilbert had Formerly worked with Gould at the Museum of the Zoological Society of Lon- don from 1828 to 1836 (Torrens, 1987). By 1838, Gould was no longer working for the Zoological Society and was compiling information for his folio monograph, ‘The Birds of Australia‘ (Sauer, 1982). He began publishing a folio work on Australian birds the previous year but soon recog- nised he needed more information to make it complete (Sauer, 1982; McRvey, 1979), Gould, perhaps realising that he was not in a position to visit and collect specimens in all the accessible parts of the continent himself (Chisholm, 1941), employed John Gilbert some time before April 1838 (Torrens, 1987) Gould and Gilbert separated 1n early February | 839, just over a month after reaching Tasmania. Gould collected specimens in the eastern colonies while Gilbert travelled on to Perth in Western Australia and eventually to Port Essington, now in the Northern Territory. As these areas were never visited by Gould himself, Gilbert s obser- vations were often quoted in Gould’s works, while many of the specimens Gilbert collected were designated type material by both Gould and later authors (e.g. Stone & Mathews, 1913; Thomas, 1921; de Schauensee, 1957; Warren, 1966; Warren & Harrison, 1971). Indeed Gilbert was the first to collect as many as cight percent е the higher vertebrates of Australia (Fisher. 92). Gilbert returned to England in September 1841 and less than five months later was again sailing for Australia. On his second visit to Australia, he spent eighteen months in Western Australia before coming to the eastern States in early 1844 (Whittell, 1942b). Laterin the year, while visiting the Darling Downs, he joined Ludwig Leichhardt’s private expedition to Port Es- sington. On the evening of 28 June 1845, the Expedition was camped near the base of Cape York Peninsula (Leichhardt, 1847), They were attacked by a group of Abongines, possibly he- cause they were intruding on an Aboriginal ceremonial ground then in use (Roderick, 1988). Gilbert was speared as he was leaving his tent and died almost immediately. Grven the interest in Gilbert's activities and collections, it is surprising that there 15 а penud of his second visit to Australia, from 30 January to 18 September 1344, that has been both misinterpreted and largely ignured hy his biog- raphers. The first to discuss this period was А.Н. Chisholm, who in 1940 noted that from February to August 1844, Gilbert ‘worked north through New South Wales up te the Darling Downs of the present Queensland” The following year he modified this to "worked north overland’ (Chisholm, 1941}, Later, Whittell (19542) did not know whether Gilbert travelled to the Darling Downs by sea or land, while Sauer (1982) modified Chisholm's version slightly to say that Gilbert collected, but omitted to state that he had travelled overland. Webster (1980) suggested that Gilbert travelled by coach and dray from Newcastle to the Darling Downs via Cassilis when ‘horses had not been kept for him at an inn’, Finally Albrecht & Albrecht (1992) noted that he spent a short time with Stephen Coxen in the Hunter region collecting spectmens and then travelled north 10 the Darling Downs. Chisholm (1941) and Webster (1980) at- tempted to use Gilbert's dianes of the Port Es- sington Expedition to trace his movements for this period, Chisholm recovered these two volumes from Gould’s decendants in 1938 and lodged them in the Mitchell Library, State Library of New South Wales (hereafter ML). Gilbert's account of the Port Essington Expedi- tion was largely written in ink and take up most of the contents of the volumes. His notes for the earlier period in the castern states takes up part of the first volume, but are in pencil and are now difficult to read. Close examination of the con- tents Of these diaries reveals a number of errors made by both Chisholm and Webster. These er- rors have been compounded by those who have used these publications as secondary sources. Therefore this paper is an attempt toclanfy some of Gilbert’s movements during the period con- cerned, and to give some details of the animals he encountered. GILBERT'S SECOND VISIT TO AUSTRALIA PRIOR TO MARCH 1844, Gilbert arrived back in Lundon from his first шр to Australia in mid-September 1841, (letter from Gilbert to Gould 17 September 1841 іп ML), ми Gould was obviously anxious for morc material as Gilbert left London for Australia on 2 February 1842. He arrived in Western Australia on 17 July 1842 and remained collecting specimens until 20 December 1843, when he left lor Sydney via Launceston, He arrived in Sydney on 30 January 1844 on the 155 ton brig ‘Union’ (Anon, 1844a; Chisholm, 1940; Whittell, 1941, 1942a,b, 1951). Little is known of Gilbert's movements during his extended stay in Sydney. At some stage be- tween 13 January and 27 March he met the naturalist John MacGillivray (Whittell, 1945). It was stated by Loch (1989) that Gould, Gilbert, and MacGillivray had all stayed in Sydney at the hoarding house kept by the wife of another naturalist, Frederick Strange. Loch obtained this information from an undated note written by the tae Tom Iredale in the Australian Museum (1, Loch, pers. comin, ), Iredale had been informed of this by the conchologist John Brazier who was related to a later associate of Strange, J.C. Ros- впег (Whittell, 1947), However Brazier's story 15 not entirely correct for Gould stayed at George MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Bennett's house on his first two visits ta Sydney (Hindwood, 1938; Sauer, 1982). It is also doubt- ful whether Strange had even visited the city before Gould left in early April 1840, though he was certainly in Sydney later in the year (Whit- tell, 1947; Sauer, 1982). Strange's wife took in boarders, as shown by the theft of a jacket and a pocket-book containing some money from 'a young man named Laurence Carearnan, residing at Mr. Sirange's, Princes- street’ in January 1845. (Anon, 1845). Princes Street no longer exists, having made way for the southern approaches to the Sydney Harbour Bridge. Gilbert did meet Strange and his wife while in Sydney and stayed at least part of his time at Strange's house. On 22 February 1844 Strange wrote to Gould: “Mr Gilbert is naw stopping with me in Sydney’ (Fisher, 1992; letter in British Museum (Natural History) [hereafter BMNH] General Library, London). MacGillivray was ap- parently also present at the time, for on 4 June 1844 Strange wrote to Gould: ‘H.M. ship Fly have now been away about three menths and Mr Mac- Gillivray is gone in her he used to stope with me when he was in Sydney and Mr Gilbert have been gone about the same rime Beyong New England and I have not heard of him since he left’ (Fisher, 1992; letter in BMNH), MacGillivray himself later recorded that he, 'saw much of him [Gilbert] a few months before his departure on his last and fetal journey’ (MacGillivray, 1846). Gilbert was evidently on friendly terms with Strange and his wife. Gilbert wrote to Strange from the Darling Downs on 16 September 1844, and amongst other matters left his 'Best respects to Mrs. S.' (Whit- tell, 1947). Gilbert wrote at least one letter to Gould during March (his letter No. 16; Chisholm, 1940), He was still in Sydney оп 4 March 1844, for on this date J.B. Jukes wrote from Sydney to his aunt, '/ go with him |George Bennett] and Gilbert (Gould's agent and collector) to look at some gigantic bones from New Zealand this evening’, (Jukes, 1871). Gould and Bennett were close colleagues, Gould had stayed at Bennett's house in April and September 1839 (Hindwood, 1938; Sauer, 1982) while Bennett later became Gould’s agentin Syd- ney (letter from Gould to Bennett dated 18 December 1844 in ML). Gilbert also received ‘assistance and udvice’ from Bennett in May 1840, on his earlier visit to Sydney (letter from Gilbert to Gould dated 4 May 1840 in ML). He wrote to Bennett on 10 September 1844 giving JOHN GILBERT'S MISSING MONTHS details of Ludwig Leichhardt’s forthcoming ex- pedition to Port Essington (letter in Leichhardt papers ML; Whitley, 1938). In this letter he asked Bennett to forward his mail from Sydney to Port Essington. This suggests that Bennett's house had been used as a forwarding address by Gilbert. In the same letter is the information that Strange told him that Gould had not written, so either Strange had spoken to Bennett or Strange's house was also a forwarding address. Before Gilbert departed for Australia, Gould gave him instructions to collect specimens àt the Tilawarra, the lower Hunter and near “Yarrundi” in the Upper Hunter, the property of Stephen Coxen, Gould's brother-in-law (Longman, 1922). Accordingly, Chafer (1992, pers. comm.) inferred that Gilbert visited the Mawarra at some stage, but there is no proof of this. The only indication that Gilbert may have done any fieldwork is a postscript in Strange's letter to Gould of 22 February 1844 that: ‘and Mr Gilbert are going 10 Brooken Bay [=Broken Bay] after some Wallarroo [Common Wallaroo, Macro- pus rabustus]' (Fisher, 1992: letter in BMNH). Whether Gilbert and Strange actually went te Broken Bay is not known, as there is no written account of such a visit, nor can any specimens from this fieldwork be identified (С.Т. Fisher, pers. comm. ). Examination of Gilbert's notebooks held by the Queensland Museum and the pencilled notes in his diary, suggests that Gilbert was probably oc- cupied for most of his stay in Sydney, appending information into his notebooks from recently published works on Australian animals. These notchooks were used by Gilbert as a field guide to the species he was likely to encounter, They were discussed by Whittell (1951, 1954) who also concluded that they were used 1o record information on the species already observed by Gilbert. In 1839 on his firs! visit to Western Australia Gilbert had a copy of Gould's "Synopsis of the Birds of Australia’ (Whittell, 1941), This ap- parently was insufficient for Gilbert's fieldwork, for on 4 May 1840 he wrote |o Gould from Sydney; ‘You have left me а very long list of desiderata, but here again your haste has caused you to commit an oversight, in leaving me so long а list of scientific names without anything in rhe least explanatory, you must be aware that a very great number of these Birds 1 have never seen & unfortunately for the want of Knowledge of Latin Г must remain tn uller ignorance of à great тапу of them, but such af them as are to be seen in rhe Миѕеит J will endeavour to make myself ac- quainted with ‘(letter in ML). Shortly after Gil- bert visited the Australian Museum, which at the time had Bennett as Secretary and Curator (Strahan, 1979; Whittel), 19423; letter from Gil- bert to Gould dated 15 May 1840 in ML). On Gilbert's second visit to Australia he needed a better guide for use in the field, and the ndtebooks now held by the Queensland Museum appear to have been compiled by Gilbert for this purpose. His notebook on birds runs to 681 pages. Tn addition at the beginning there is an 18 page index to the names in the book and a table of distribution, This index, iñ conjunction with the details of the plates included in the notebook proper, gives some idea of when it was written. The size of the pages of these notebooks is 185 x 275mm, which is the size of the plates in Gould's ‘Synopsis of the Birds of Australia’. The index 15 smaller at 180x 260mm. The larger pages were trimmed at least once during binding as the page numbers handwritten m the top corners were cut off in the binding process. The plates inter- leaved with the text in the notebook are largely derived from Gould's "Synopsis", and Whittell (1951) was incarrect when he said that most of the remainder ate from Gould's ‘Birds of Australiaand the Adjacent Islands’. Eleven plates come from this work. those of the Spine-tailed Swift Hirundapus caudacutus [plate letterpress as Chetura macroptera), Rufous Whistler Pachycephala rufiventris [as Pachycephala pec- 1oralis]. Elegant Pitta Pitta elegans vigorsii [as Pitta vigorsii], Variegated Fairywren Malurus assimilis lamberti [as Malurus lamberti], Red- winged Fairywren Malurus eleguns, Zebra Finch Taeniopygia guttata [as Amadina castanotis], Star Finch Neochmia ruficauda [as Amadina ruficawia], Spotted Bowerbird Chlamydera maculata [as Calodera maculata], Blue Bonnet Psephotus haematogaster [as — Plarycereus haematogusier], Budgerygah Melopsittacus an- dulajus {аз Nanodes undulatus] and Black Honeyeater Certhyonix niger [as Myzomela nigra]. The bulk of the remainder actually come from Gould's “Birds of Australia’, although they were cut from their folio size to that of the Syrtep- sis plates. As a consequence, some birds pictured on the folio plates have been removed, For ex- ample, in Gilbert’s notebook the plate of the Rainbow Bee-eater Merops ornatus has only one bird pictured, that of the lower bird in the folio late. P These plates serve as a useful illustration of Gould’s procedure in publishing is monographs since Gilbert was probably given copies of all availahle plates of Australian bird taxa during the few months he was in London, Of these plates, there are: 8) seven coloured and six uncoloured plates fram Parts V-V which were published before Gil- bert left London [note the plates of the Rufous Whistler, Elegant Pitta and Black Honeyeater are nnt counted here as they are identical in Gould's "Birds of Australia and the Adjacent Islands’ and his "Birds of Australia’, evidence of Gould re- using his lithographic stones Бүбү 1979). For the publication dates of Gould's folio works see Waterhouse (1885), Sauer (1982) and Sauer & Evans (1989]]; b) 12 uncoloured plates and one partly coloured plate which were scheduled to be published 10 Part VI on | March 1842, one month after Gilbert left for Australia, The partly coloured plate is the Scrubfow! from Port Essington, Megapodius tumulus, which has only the bird painted: c) three uncoloured plates and one partly coloured plate (the Rose-crowned Fruit-dove from Port Essington, Prilinopus ewingii} which were scheduled to be published on | June 1842 in Part VII; and d) an uncoloured plate of Estrelda bella, IStagenopleura bella, Beautiful Firetail] from Part XVIII which was scheduled to be published us late as 1 March 1845. The plate itself lacks the letterpress and has the scientific name inscribed in Gilbert's hand. Gould had most of the plates at hand for the next Part to be published (most Parts had 17 plates), as well as some that were to be published many months and even years later. The Rose-crowned Fruit-doye was formally described after Gilbert left for Australia, The partly coloured plate of this bird is signed in paint 'HCR', that is Henry Con- stantine Richter, who was the principal artist first employed by Gould in 184] after the death of Gould's wife. Indeed, the first plates drawn by Richter were those in Part VI ( letter from Е.С. Prince. Gould's secretary, to Rev, Ewing, 30 December 1842 in ML; Sauer, 1982). In the index ‘Ptilinopas ewingii’ is written in thicker pen, suggesting that Gilbert added the name later, having overlooked the letterpress when onginally creating the index. Most of the layout of the notebooks and insertion of the plates, was probably done by Gilbert in London between Scptember 1841 and February 1842. An indica- tion that this was the case is the description of Meliphaga langirosiris, ће Western Australian subspecics of New Holland Honeyeater MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Phylidonyris novaehollandiae longirostris, which was included in the notebook and men- tioned in Gilbert's list of specimens sent back to England from Western Australia in early 1844 (Whillell, 1942b). This subspecies was nol described until November 1846 (Gould, 1846b), and the fact that Gilbert had listed it, but did not include a plate, suggests that Gould had personal- ly told Gilbert his intention of naming the bird when Gilbert was in London, The index itself was written at different times, though it is entirely in Gilbert's hand. Most of the contents were writlen with a fine pen, though some parts, notably corrections and additions, were written with a thicker pen. The fine writing in the index and table of distribution must have been written after mid-March 1843 as the locality "Abralhos [=Houtman’s Abrolhos]’ is included in fine ink. Gilbert visited these islands off Westem Australia between 6 January and 20 March 1843 (Whittell, 19424,5). The changes in thicker pen in the index are not great in number, They are often alterations to the genera or new names given to descriptions originally referred to only by genus. Each of the changes can be traced to the Gould publications appearing after Gilbert's departure For his second visit to Australia. Most of these changes are found in the various Parts of Gould's ‘Birds of Australia’, however five are found in three papers in the ‘Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London’ (Gould, 1842f, i, 18:333), The last of the changes are those that occurred ih Part XI of Gould's *Birds of Australia’, This was scheduled to be published in London on | June 1843 thus the index must have been corrected some months after this date. When discussing the notebooks, Whiuell (1951) only gave information concerning those species recorded from Western Australia, Gilbert's notes from the second trip are almost entirely confined to observations from this State. In all cases references to Observations are made in the раз! tense. There are some notes on the hirds from the Port Essington area, but these refer to his previous visit to Australia. Forthose species restricted to the east coast there are no additional notes beyond the descriptions of the animals. So it appears that Gilbert wrote these notebooks prior to collecting on the east coast. New names and descriptions, as well as Gilbert's observations on the species recorded in Western Australia (including mammals, cf, màm- mal notebook; Whittell, 1954b), were added later. Whether he wrote any of this in Western Australia JOHN GILBERT'S MISSING MONTHS is unclear. Apart from the Governor, John Hutt, there were no subscribers to any of Gould's works in Western Australia at the time, nor had Gilbert been able to interest any additional subscribers (see letter from Gilbert to Gould dated */5 December 1842 [21843]' in ML; reprinted in Whittell, 1942b). Gilbert was unlikely to have had access to the new parts of Gould's folio editions in Western Australia, let alone the ‘Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London’, The changes to the index were probably written in Sydney from Bennett's copies of the relevant parts of the publications concerned, Ben- nett was a subscriber to all of Gould’s folio works (Sauer, 1980) and he also had an extensive library of scientific literature, Bennett's bookplate being found in many volumes in libraries around Syd- ney (pers, obs.). Given the quantity of material that Gilbert wrote, he may have spent a large part nf his time in Sydney transcribing notes from George Bennett's capies of Gould's publications. This would have left him little time to collect specimens, As noted by Whittell (1951, 19546), there is another index in the Queensland Museum Library to a notebook on kangaroos, similar to the bird index, also written in Gilbert's hand, The whereabouts of the kangaroo notebook is not known, but it was probably a similar layout to the bird notebook. Part 1 of Gould’s ‘Monograph of the Macropodidae’ was scheduled (o be publish- ed in August 1841, though it may have been delayed until late September (Sauer, 1982), while Part II appeared in carly May 1842. As Gilbert was given copies of bird plates scheduled to he published in June 1842, и can be assumed the kangaroo notebook compiled by Gilbert included most of the plates from the macropodid monograph, This may mean that the kangaroo notebook was the size of the onginal folio plates and may have been cut for its lithographs ata later stage. GILBERT'S PENCILLED NOTES IN HIS DIARIES OF THE PORT ESSINGTON EXPEDITION. Gilbert's diary of Leichhardt's Port Essington Expedition was written in two volumes. Tn the first there are a number of pages written in pencil with the bulk of the diaries written in ink. Chisholm (1941) referred to the pencil section as merely ‘pencilled notes of various kinds’. These pencilled notes are extremely difficult to read and a large proportion of them are illegible. When the 159 diaries came to the Mitchell Library in 1938 a typescript copy Was made, However the transcriber obviously had difficulty reading the pencilled section and this was never typed. In deciphering the Gilbert diary T have used both microfilm and photocopies of the relevant volume. This particular volume has been missing since at least 1985, By using microfilm on the reader under varying intensities of light and degrees of magnification, it has been possible to read a fair proportion of the pencilled notes. When quoting from a passage 1 have followed the convention of citing an illegible word as; [blank]. Words that are inferred, or probable, are inserted in square parentheses and followed by a question mark. All punctuation and spelling is as close as possible to Gilbert's original. Chisholm also had difficulty reading the pen- cilled notes in the diaries. He mentioned in a footnote to his 1944 paper: ‘For my own part, I read much of the diary in the original in England, bur have worked upon it subsequently from @ typed version copy supplied by the authorities of the Mitchell Library, Sydney, to whom the docu ment was presented’. In the same paper Chisholm discussed Gilbert's notes on a Flock Bronzewing Phaps histrionica collected on Leichhardt's Port Essington Expedi- tion. Chisholm referred to it as: ‘a beautiful species certainly, but one that he [Gilbert] had seen previously on the Namoi Plains’. Gilbert's diary for the day in question (23 April 1845) notes in ink: ‘ir ix a beautiful species certainly, and 1 have seen it before on the Namoi plains’. Chisholm's almost verbatim quote of Gilbert's diary inadvertently shows that Chisholm did not read the relevant section in the pencilled notes. Chisholm went on to discuss Gould's records of the species from the Namoi in 1839-40 and gave no further details of Gilbert's sightings from the same area, Gilbert recorded Flock Bronzewings a number of times in his pencilled notes (see below) and this deserved more than a passing mention, The first part of the pencilled notes consists of a senes of descriptions of mammals, birds and fish, largely from the cast coast and Port Es- sington areas, which originally ran to 59 pages of text. These mammals and birds are all identified by scientific name, and some of them had been described by Gould from material sent to London by Gilbert on his first trip to Australia. The ac- counts that can be read are of species described in Parts VI to IX of Gould's ‘Birds of Australia’ and Part 11 of his ‘Monograph of Lhe Macropodidae’, as well as mammals and birds described in Gould's papers given at the meetings of the Zoological Society of London during the first len months of 1842 (Gould, 1842c,d,f,2,h,i, 1843a) and Gould's paper describing Macropus ocydromus [M. fuliginosus, Western Grey Kan- garoo] and Lagorchestes albipilis |L. fasciatus, Banded Hare-wallaby] in the "Annals and Magazine of Natural History” (Gould, 1842). Gilbert also listed Perameles harveyi [Bettongia lesueur, Burrowing Bettong] and Phascogale al- bipes [Sminthopsis murina, Common Dunnart] described by G.R. Waterhouse al lhe meeting of the Zoological Society of London on 8 March 1842 (Waterhouse, 1842), and Phascogale leucopus [Sminthopsis leucopus, White-footed Dunnartt] and P[hascogale] apicalis [Paran- techinus apicalis, Dibbler] described by J.E. Gray in the ‘Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ during 1842 (Gray, 1842a,b). In most cases the species are listed exactly in the order the species were published in these works (comparisons made with unbound ML sets of the folio works). Amongst the notes there is also a page and à half of brief list of fish names, both scientific and Aboriginal. These names are numbered and cor- respond with numbered specimens collected by Gilbert at Port Essington and Timor in 1840 and 1841. These fish were described in a series of papers published by John Richardson in 1842 (Richardson, 18422,b,c). Richardson published five further papers in the ‘Annals and Magazine of Natural History” based on the fish collected by Gilbert from Port Essington, Later in the list of descriptions Gilbert wrote the first name from the next of Richardson's papers, Gerres filamen- tosus, (Richardson, 18424), but crossed it out. The fact that Gilbert does not list the later fish names suggests that he decided that there was little value in listing them without descriptions, The order of Gilbert's notes imply that he was systematically extracting the descriptions of Australian species of mammals, birds and fish from the available scientific literature and Parts of Gould's folio works that were published after he left for Australia. Given the volume of material extracted from journals, il appears that these noles were also written while he was in Sydney. Another indica- Qon that this was the case is that there 15 the ndle:‘Andrew Carr.) Cumberland Street’ amongst the descriptions. There is no Cumber- land Street in Perth. Cumberland Street, Sydney, still exists and in 1844 was the street parallel to Princes Street. Although I have been unable to MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM find any mention of an Andrew Carr of Cumber- land Street from thus period, there is à Richard Carr listed in the clectoral roll for this address in 1844 (Anon, 18441) Given the constraints for voting at the time, Richard Carr must have owned property here, while Andrew Carr may have lived at the same address, The descriptions in the diary would have been written by Gilbert for identification purposes, much like the notebook on birds in the Qucensland Museum (as previously discussed). The fact that they were transcribed into the diary could suggest that when Gilbert left Sydney for the Darling Downs he may have decided to leave the Queensland Museum notebooks with Bennett or Strange, though he could have equally taken them as far as the Darling Downs and left them with the Coxens. Some of the pencilled descriptions in the diary have been covered by ink. When Gilbert ran out of space in the second volume he started writing in ink over the top of the descriptions in the first volume. Consequently the first ten of the 59 pages have been covered with diary notes from June 1845, Three pencilled bird names can be read amongst the ink notes, Petrophassa albipennis, Grallina australis and Phalacrocorax leucogaster, which were pictured in Parts X and XI of Gould's ‘Birds of Australia’. There were undoubtedly further descriptions of birds from this work, though the original notes are no longer legible. Gilbert’s untimely death prevented him from obliterating all the pencilled notes. After these descriptions the diary entries begin in pencil and amount to 21 pages of text before Gilbert's account of the Port Essington Expedi- tion begins in ink. То addition, there are a few pages of pencilled notes at the end of the volume. These refer to the collection of specimens, both before and during the Port Essington Expedition; Gilbert's diary notes for exploratory excursions away from the main party during the Expedition; and his initial attempt at a diary of the Port Essington expedition before he used pen and ink. Unfortunately many of these notes are illegible, with some of them out of chronological sequence. GILBERT'S JOURNEY TO THE DARLING DOWNS Gilbert's diary begins on 18 March 1344, when he noted that he left Sydney at 10 at night on the steamer ‘Rose’. The following morning it travelled along the lower Hunter River (Fig. 1). Gilbert recorded in a footnote: 'The banks were JOHN GILBERT’S MISSING MONTHS 161 lso E Gundemaine Burburgate \\ Pilliga Scrub Gunnedah (Station) A Mooki River " N sa ж w wie 12 (0 h N gst? wil a Fý Ye, CTT P ad ай, "Poo, and ЧУ АЫ Pages River Aw, T yr rolls A e 3 Ж И шунун NV * ""Cressfield | ү, > ? Hunter River -— 32's arrun! b: Scone 4 Muswellbrook 1 \ Nu N x : x Singleton HUNTER RIVER 3 q tes ! NY ү = 1 ¢ EN Black Creek 1S Great North Road \ Ji Newcastle N } j \ / [| ГА J / СА ГА tl M РА Л / rd / L4 ГА T ГА Y^ ra ГА "d 1 Á € - overnight stops on Gilbert's journey. 7 / o / 40km Z 1— — — m——À SYDNEY | Zi r FIG. 1. Gilbert’ s journey north to the Darling Downs in 1844. Sydney to Gundemaine. 162 generally low, with Mangroves or reeds lining the edges of the water but the most striking feature along the banks of the Hunter, as we passed rapidly in the steamer, was the almost exclusive cultivation of Indian Maize, so much so that on many of the located parts, this appeared the only grain attended to’, He wrote that he arrived at Maitland the same morning, however he crossed out Maitland and replaced it with Morpeth. The Sydney Morning Herald (SMH) for 19 March (Anon. , 1844b) scheduled the coastal steamer ‘Rose’ to arrive in Sydney and leave for 'Pattison |=Patterson]’ and Morpeth on 18 March. In another footnote Gilbert added: ‘Here 1 ex- pected lo find a horse in readiness for me ro ride fe Dartbrook [the creek at Yarrundi, Stephen Coxen's property], having by some unaccounr- able meàns supposed the distance 1 had to ride was about 12 miles [19km], bul to my astonishment found it was 80 [128km] und to add to my chagrin no horse had been left for me, 1 therefore took a place by the mail’. In the notes there is no mention of Newcastle nor of an inn at this point as suggested by Webster (1980). The'mail' left al noon, and passed through Lochinvar ‘litte resembling its namesake іп Britain counting only about a dozen houses’, to Black Creek ‘79 miles [24 km] from Maitland", This would be near the town of Branxton, Gilbert complained bitterly about the roads: ‘eccasienal- ly on the road where the ground is soft you came to a road of heavy logs laid down, which very strongly reminds one of Ihe log roads we read of in America, but this was not the worst part, for the majar portion of the road is in very deep ruts, and the shaking | received in avery crazy vehicle, would have perhaps have had a beneficial effect had І been of a nervous temperament. However as it was I was tired and felt as if 1 had taken as much exercise as 1 could have done had I walked the distance!’, The roads between Maitland and Black Creek were notorious for being extremely boggy (Wood, 1972). The diary at this point is very descriptive, giving details of topography and listing vanous genera of plants, then comparing and contrasting these with those of ‘the Swan River colony’. The fact that he compared them with the Perth area and not Sydney, again suggests that he did nat do mach fieldwork near Sydney. This is emphasised by his comments that he: ‘saw талу familiär forms, although for a first time allve in a srare of nature the several species vf Trichoglossi [zLorikeets]'. This is a surprising comment given thal Lorikeets were probably in some numbers in MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM ihe Sydney area, while it 15 known that Gilbert had already sent Gould specimens of the Purple- crowned Lorikeet Glossopsitta por- phyrocephala, Varied Lorikeet Psitteuteles versicalorand Red-collared Lorikeet Trichoglos- sus rubritorguis (Whittell, 1942a,b; also letter from Gilbert to Gould written in Port Essington 19 September 1840 in ML). The mail crossed the Hunter River at a ford seven miles [11 km] further on, and crossed it again before reaching Patrick's Plains or Singleton, ‘a scattered village on the left bank af the river’, This route is no longer followed by the New England Highway as there arc no crossings of the river between Newcastle and Singleton. After he arrived ‘at the principal Inn’, Gilbert received a note explaining: ‘the cause of not finding a horse left for me’, but did not give the cause in the diary. At this point he gives the footnotes previously mentioned and this is the source of Webster's error. At four o'clock the following morning (20 March) he left for Muswellbrook and Yarrundi near Scone, His diary indicates he went by coach as far as Scone but it was not possible for him to have visited Cassilis, over 100Кт further west (contra Webster, 1980). The entry notes: ‘ar [blank] miles we arrived ar Dartbraok'. This is the first mention that Gilbert was travelling in company with another person, as the coach would not have driven to Coxen's private property. Most of the next two days’ writing js illegible but he did not stay at Yarrundi long. In the pen- cilled section at the end of the fist volume of the diary is a list of numbers that correspond with the distances (in miles) that Gilbert travelled each day going north. The first measurement is 'S0 From M’. the distance from Morpeth to Y arrundi, The nex! measurement is '7' and this appears to be the distance travelled on 21 March. His entry for 22 March begins with him, ‘leaving Cresfield crossed over Walden's Range ... to the Pages [River] from where we crossed the Liverpool Range for Loders where we remained for the night' The property of "Cressfield" is some seven miles (11km) north of Scone and the New England Highway now runs past here over "Walden's Range’ |= Warland's Range, see Wood. 1972] to the Pages River and the Liver- pool Range (Royal Australian Survey Corps — RASC, 1970). This wus, and still is, the major road north, "Loders" was the Loder brothers" property, near the present town of Quirindi (Wood, 1972; Goodwin et al,, 1977). JOHN GILBERT'S MISSING MONTHS Much as Chafer (1992) did, Albrecht & Albrecht (1992) inferred from Gould's instruc- tions, that while at Yarrundi Gilbert was, ‘wn- doubtedly collecting the specimens Gould had requested him to find'. However, given the period of Gilbert's stay (one day) it is unlikely that Gilbert collected any of Gould's desired specimens al all. The following day he travelled 42 miles (66kin) over the Liverpool Plains and passed a bend of the 'Mokai' [2 Mooki] River known as Long Point. This bend is 7km north west of the town of Breeza (RASC, 1969). Gilbert noted that: ‘fram Long Point we moved on over the Plain to a Station on the Mokai apposite Gunbunde’ . In the 1840s, Gunnedah Station had two homesteads, one to the north and the other to the south of the property, Gilbert was apparently referring to the southern homestead, then owned by members of the Johnston family (Longmuir, 1956). The northern homestead, then known as "The Wool- shed", was located at a ford of the Namoi River, now the site of the town of Gunnedah, The route travelled by Gilbert over the latter part of the day was that of the main road as mapped by the surveyor H. Gorman some cight years later (Gor- man, 1852). On 24 March he notes: [After]* Four miles (6km) we crossed River Namoi and in about 8 miles [13 km] came again upon the river at Mr WenrworiRh's саше station there being a good feed we broughr up for the day’. In the 1840s William Wentworth owned "Burburgate" some 10km northwest of Gunnedah (Campbell, 1931; Longmuir, 1956), On 25 March they travelled a further 30 miles [48 km] down the Namoi through ‘moderately timbered forest’. Gilbert noted that: ‘the principal incident of the day was the immense numbers of the migratory grasshoppers, the whole of the last 15 miles [24 km] we were fairly riding through them, ... the whole scene as far as the eye could reach is greatly resembling a fall of snow while in many parts of the road they have collected in such masses as fairly to discolour the ground].] about half way in this distance of [107] miles [16 km] we stopped a short time at a house[.] we were informed they had been passing three whole days excessively, in along the grassy land|.] as they proceed the grass is completely eaten offl.] there ww observed in the road and on bare pieces of ground were employed in scraching [sic] little round holes, and so numerous were these that the ground appeared completely honeycombed. | ap- prehend they are employed depositing their eggs ... in some places they were so thick that trees two 163 hundred yards [200m] distant can scarcely be seen through the cloud and when the wind is blowing they are constantly striking the face with their sharp claws till it becomes quite painful’. Thai evening, ‘we had a siorm of thunder & lightning with a little rain’. The following day, "not a grasshopper was to be seen on the wing the rain of last night apparantly [sic] having checked their progress for a time’, What Gilbert was describing was the breeding and movement of plague locusts Chortoicetes terminifera before a cold front (Woodruff, 1974, 1976). On this day (26 March) they travelled a further 30 miles [48 km] to 'Gundamain'. “Gun- demaine" (for spelling see Campbell, 1931) was some likm northwest of the present town of Narrabri on the north bank of the Namoi just below the mouth of Brigalow or Bohena Creck (McLean, 1847; Hunt, 1980). It was also visited by Gould in 1839 (Gould, 1865; McAllan, 1987) and 15 immediately upstream of the Parish of Gommel, Gould's Gummel-Gummel where he had observed Little Woodswallows Artamus minor breeding (Gould, 1865). At this point Gilbert gives a list of birds ob- served on his journey ‘thus far": 'Grallina Australis [G. cyanoleuca, Magpie- lark] - Artamus albovittatus (А. cyanopterus, Dusky Woodswallow] - Oreoica gunuralis [Crested Bellbird] - Hirunde neoxena [Welcome Swallow] - Cellecalia arborea (Hirundo nigricans, Tree Martin] - Collocalia ariel [H. ariel, Fairy Martin] - Haliastur sphenura (H. sphenurus, Whistling Kite] - Ichthyaetus leucogaster [Haliaeetus leucogaster, White-bel- lied Sea Eagle] - Pandion leucocephalus (Р. haliaetus, Osprey] - Milvus isurus [Lophoictinia isura, Square-tailed Kite] - Falco frontatus (Е. lunulatus, Australian Hobby] - Accipiter tor- quaus [A, cirrocephalus, Collared Spar- rowhawk] - Aguila fucosa [A, gudaz, Wedgc-tuiled Eagle] - Corvus coronoides {Australian Raven] [blank] - Halcyon sanctus [Todirhamphus sanctus, Sacred Kingfisher} - Perdix australis [Corurnix ypsilophora, Brown Quail] - Anthus australis [Australasian Pipit] - Phaps chalcopiera [Common Bronzewing] - Columba spilonota [Geopelia cuneata, Diamond Dove] - Mycteria Australis (Ephippiorhynchus asiaticus, Black-necked Stork] - Wood Duck [Chenonetta jubata] - Black Swan [Cygnus atratus) - Rhipidura Motacilloides [R leucophrys, Willie Wagtail] - Seisura volitans (Myiagra inquieta, Restless Flycatcher] = Ardea Novae-Hollandiae [A. novaehollandiae, While- 164 faced Heron] - Ardea pacifica [White-necked Heron] - AEgiatilis nigrifrons [Elseyornis melanops, Black-fronted Dotterel] - Oris Australis [Ardeotis australis, Australian Bustard] - Amadina castanoils [Taeniopygia guuata, Zebra Finch] - Fulica australis (Е. atra, Coot] - Petroica bicolor [Melanodryas cucullata, Hooded Robin] - Melopsittacus undulatus [Budgerygah] - Graucalus melanotis [Coracina novaehollandiae, Black-faced Cuckoo-shrike], The nest and [eggs of?] Peristeri [Phaps histrionica, Flock Bronzewing]'. Some of these birds, such as the Black-necked Stork, Osprey and the White-bellied Sea Eagle were probably scen on the lower Hunter River, though most could have been seen further inland (Morris et al., 1981). Gilbert's record of Squarc- tailed Kite, however is open to question given his difficulty in identifying this species during the Port Essington Expedition the following year (Debus et al., 1993). The order of species in the above list 15 similar to the first part of a list that Gilbert sent in a letter to Gould from the Darling Downs dated 8 June 1844 (Fisher, 1985). This suggests that Gilbert was either using the list in the diary to jog his memory, or that a number of species in the letter written on the Darling Downs were nol seen on the Downs at all. Gundemaine was obviously an intended stop- ping place as they did not leave until 3 April. While here Gilbert collected and observed a num- ber of animals, On 30 March he recorded in his pencilled collection notes; ‘A nest of A. [madina] modesta |Neochmia modesta, Plum-headed Finch]. The nest formed of dry wiry grass, but not [blank] so feng a spout as the Swan River species, lined with feathers, the nest placed in a thick bush on the banks of the river, und so near rhe ground the bortom of the nest was almost touching. coan- tained five eggs. another nest I saw yesterday had two young and two eggs. this was built in a small bush about two feet from the ground. This is the second breeding of these birds, attributable in a great measure from the long continuance of sum- mer weather, Gundamain, River Namoi'. Onc of hese nests was obviously collected, as Gould mentioned Gilbert providing him one (Gould, 1865). He also noted a ‘Lepidestias Long Mouth'd Fish’, which he presumably collected, though its identity at present remains unknown (T. Tmski, pers. comm.). The following day he recorded: ‘eggs of C[olumba] spilonota [Geopelia cuneata, Diamond Dove] taken / April 1844 banks of the Namoi. small loose nest made MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM of sticks', While he also noted: ‘Teen=burn Aborig. of Namoi Podiceps — [= Grebe sp.]'. On 3 April they travelled to ‘Goolathra at a distance of 11 miles’ [18km]. “Galathra” was а property acquired by William Wentworth some time before 1848 (Campbell, 1931; Fig. 2) and was on Galathera Creek to the north of Gun- demaine (RASC, 1988). Gilbert collected a Let- ter-winged Kite Elanus scriptus at this locality and gave it the Aboriginal name of "Tilzyeer-gar-bul' (pencilled collection notes), During the day Gilbert: ‘saw Peristera histrionica | Phaps histrionica, Flock Bronzew- ing]. she species I obtained the eggs of a few days ago. they were very abundant. breed on the ground lay two white eggs’. Gilbert's sightings of this species near Gundemaine and collection of eggs seem to have gone largely unnoticed in the literature. for example Frith (1982) noted: ‘Gould encountered large groups on the Namoi but ap- parently they have not been seen again in the district". Gould himself never mentioned receiving the eggs that Gilbert collected and in his Handbook account only gave the details of eggs collected by Sturt north of the Barrier Range (Gould, 1865). This is surprising as Gould had looked at the diaries when he referred to Gilbert's records of Flock Bronzewings from “Mie plains in latitude 19°$°, that is, on the Port Essington Expedition. Moreover Gilbert had also told Gould in his leter of 8 June 1844 that he had collected the eggs. This letter did reach England as Gould himself ac- knowledged this (Fisher, 1985; draft of letter from Gould to Gilbert dated 20 December 1844 in National Library of Australia, Canberra, hereafter NLA). As noted bv Chisholm (1944) Gould was erratic with his reference to Gilbert's diary, occasionally quoting minor incidents in great detail while ignoring others altogether. On 4 April 1844 Gilbert's party travelled, '/0 miles [16 km] in continuance of Peristera Creek’, presumably referring to the creek now known as Ten Mile Creek. Gilbert noted: ‘during Ihe morn- ing immense flocks of Peristera_ histrionica started found two of them breeding|,) 2 eggs on Ihe bare ground, 4 miles [6km] to e second creek like all the former running across the plain, from this 6 miles [10km] to a small creek tracing а branch of the Waterloo Creek where we stopped the night at a Sheep Station’, The second creek passed would have been the creck now called Boggy Creck while the creek at which they stopped would have been Gehan Creek, the creek to the south of Millie Creek, In 1844 Millie Creek JOHN GILBERT'S MISSING MONTHS was known as Waterloo Creck, presumably after the property of the same name which is on this creek near the Newell Highway (Gardiner, 1844; RASC, 1982). Gilbert also recorded thar he “saw the Artamus cinereus [Black-faced боса. low] On 5 April, Gilbert, ‘Travelled over plains[.] at one mile | 1.6km] erossed a creek 4 miles [6km] on crossed a second’, Hc records the presence of grasshoppers again while he also noted: ‘shot a Bustard [Austrahan Bustard, Ardeotis australis] Peristera very abundant, Peregrine Falcon [Falco peregrinus] and Milvus |= Kite sp.] fn great numbers the birds feeding freely upon gras- shoppers. A further distance of IO miles [16km] brought us to Bambell|,] a Station en Myall Creek'. From the distances quoted it appears the first creek crossed in the day was Waterloo Creek, the second being Little Bumble Creck and Gilbert's ‘Myall Creek’ was the creek now known as Gurley Creek (RASC, 1982, 1987), At the nme there was a property on Gurley Creek known as “Bumble” (Galloway, 1854), Gilbert's specimen collection notes also record him col- lecting a ‘Mus’ at Myall Creek which is con- firmed in the diary On 6 April they, ‘remained stationary all day. In a ramble up and down the creek | saw many birds for the first time in a state of nature among the most remarkable Chlamydera maculata [Spotted Bowerbird] and the Crested Bronzewing [Ocyphaps lophotes, Crested Pigeon]. Оп 7 April they travelled eight miles [13km] to ‘Bowman's Creek’, This was the name of the creck that passed through George Bowman's property, "Terry Hie Hie" and is now known as Tycannah Creek (Wiedemann, 1981; Division of National Mapping, 1975: RASC, 1987). This dis- lance is the same as thal from Gurley Creek to Tycannah Creek at the town of Tycannah when coming from the south west, The main road at the time veered to the west from Gundemaine north 10 Tycannah while the present Newell Highway goes straight north from Narrabri (Gardiner, 1844; McLean, 1847; RASC, 1987). While at Tycannah Creek, Gilbert noted: ‘water in small pools in which I caught a fish very like the Com- mon Roach, This was no doubt a species of fish he referred to in his pencilled descriptions as "Peerznga '. They then travelled, '7 miles [11km] further on in distance [several illegible words] Halls Station on rhe Big River |2Gwydir River], апа then on], ] on fo the plains o. Here 1 saw the Graucalus phasianellus |Pteropodoeys makina, Ground Cuckoo-shrike] feeding on the ground. Park like open country [.] Bivouaced on [blank] creek run- ning parallel with the river’. The distance given by Gilbert does not actually reach the Gwydir River but falls some three miles (Skm) short at a creek now known as Halls Creek south of the present town of Moree. From his pencilled description referring to the collection of a fish known as 'Pobzbe' on ‘Mr Hall's [station]... Big River’, it can be seen that Gilbert was at the property of George Hall who owned "Webol- labolla" east of Moree which is itself two miles [3km] south of the Gwydr (McLean, 1847; Campbell, 1931). There was probably no settle- men! at Moree at the time às James Cox obtained his licence for this station some four months later (Jervis, 1963). This disparity in distances is ad- dressed by Gilbert when he noted in his list of mileages at the end of the volume an unaccounted five miles [8km], the distance from Halls Creek to the Gwydir River via Webollabolla. The following day they were again stationary. His diary refers to, “@ new fi fish’, undoubtedly the "Pobzhe'" recorded as coming from, "Mr Hall's stalion. Gilbert gave counts of the spines of the fish that, by themselves, do not identify the species (S. Reader & T, Tmski, Australian Museum, pers. comm.). A description of the fish is also partly legihle and jt reads: ‘colour of the upper part light [several illegible words] body and had bright red spots'. The '"Pob-be' is probably the fish now known as the Spangled Perch Leioporherapon unicolor. Described as Therapon unicolor by Günther m 1859, из Lype senes in the BMNH was collected at 'Gwyuir River" and ' Head af Mosquito Creek, near Dar- ling Dewns' and appears to have been collected by Gilbert (Fisher, 1992). Furthermore this species docs indeed have bright red spots on its body. On 9 Арпі they went '8 miles [13km] up river to Mokizbranch [=Mehi Branch]', Gilbert ac- tually noted the reverse of the present names. At present Moree is considered on the Mehi Branch of the Gwydir with the main branch flowing іо the north- west, At the point where they stopped for the night Gilbert noted: ‘Here met with the greatest encampment of Natives we have hitherto seen and at night every one [spending some?] considerable time with their noisy corrobori, or what might be termed vociferous screaming On 10 April they were again Stationary and Gilbert noted: ‘Natives ali day', On the 11th they travelled ten miles [16km] up river to ‘Eytan Station З further to Eales’. According to 166 Uus ic F MOONI RIVER J J Тл RIVER 29's GWYDIR RIVER Webaliqholla wee vagone ES Bannockburn m Bukkülla Ao à » rd LNG ет Creek I la M бш — es vm i \Galathera Creek \ МАМО! RIVER Н Gundemalne 1 | А муа Creek (Dalby) an Оз Jandaryan. f i Plains " Crog у f- Ged 1 М А A Helidon Aia , ^ DARLING DOWNS Woeslbraok ^ “де a, 1 1 Ж pe |, е MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM \ 5 BRISBANE | я \ лут | cuanence RIVER L E În € ic" e- avemght stopa en Gilbsn'e joumey. g AQ — FIG, 2. Gilbert s journey north to the Darling Downs in 1844. Gundemaine to the Darling Downs. Campbell (1931) Daniel Eaton held "Binnigy" [now = Biniguy] while John Eales was the licen- see of "Yagobi" [= Yagobe] (Barker, 1987). On 12 April they travelled 12 miles [19km] cutting off some bends of the river. They stopped for two hours and then went a further eight miles [11km] finishing the day at the station owned by 'Gally'. This was George Gally, who lived at "Gingeroi" (Barker, 1987). However Gilbert, 'did not meet with the usual hospitality at Gally and went to bed on a midshipmans supper’. The area covered in this last stage was, according to Gilbert, dominated by an ironbark with a very dark trunk and branches ànd contrasting glaucous leaves, possibly Eucalyprus caleyi. From this point on large parts of the pencilled diary are illegible, and in many instances little more than Gilbert's movements can be discerned. They travelled for 12 miles [19km] on 13 April and the following day a further nine miles [14km], ‘leaving the Big River’. It would appear they were travelling up Myall Creek which Gar- diner (1844) again noted as a major route. The account for 15 April is totally illegible, while they were stationary on 16 April. On 17 April they travelled 23 miles [36km] and reached a Mr Waterford’s station. In 1844 William Waterford owned “Bannockburn” some 19km north west of Inverell (Wiedemann, 1981). This would suggest that on 15 April they passed near the locality of the present town of Delungra. On 18 April they reached ‘Wyndham’s Station on the MacIntyre’, which was "Bukkulla", owned by George Wyndham. The entry for 19 April is largely il- legible and the following day they were 'station- ary all day to rest the cattle, see no Natives at all now, '. This is a suggestion that they were moving stock and that Gilbert may have been concerned about Aborigines, though their intent was not indicated. On 21 April they moved, ' 9 miles [14km] down the Fraser [= Frazers Creek] to Blaxland's Station’. Gregory Blaxland owned “Frazer’s Creek" at this time, some 11km north of the JOHN GILBERT'S MISSING MONTHS present town of Ashford (Wiedemann, 1991) Thus on the 19th they had moved to three km south of Ashford, On 22 April they travelled 14 miles [22km] to ‘Hatherington’s Station’, this was "Bonshaw" which was owned by the Reverend Irving Heatherington at the present town of the same name. Bonshaw is on the Dumaresq River, now the border between New South Wales and Queensland. On the 23rd they moved, '72 miles [19km] down the Severn over a hilly country to Cox's Station. here we have to wail for the rest follow- ing us with sheep and ш cart with Provisions so that we can travel farther’. William Cox held *“Gunyan" station at about this time, to the south- cast of the present town of Texas (Wiedemann, 1981). Gilben’s collecting notes record that he collected a ‘small Antechinus’ оп 23 April and gave It the Aboriginul name of 'Ne-imnoo-ga'. Не also collected a ‘Circus’ (harrier) species, ‘on the Severn April 27rd 1844', Hc had actually travelled along the Severn River as il is now known, two days before when passing the loca- tion of Ashford. This was a consistent mistake in Gilbert's notes and corresponds with occasional use of the name Severn for the Dumaresq River (Hamilton, 1960; Division of National Mapping. 1976), From here on the diary is particularly difficult to read. In the period from 24 - 28 April Gilbert comments at length about Fighting between the Aboriginals and Europeans in what is now north- ern New South Wales and southem Queensland. He began by refering to the large. number of Aborigines that had been killed in ‘the New England district... one instance 1 heard ofa party going out with the [expressed?] purpose of hunt- ing Natives. He also noted that one group had indiscriminately slaughtered their women & ehildren', In short, Gilbert described it as, 'eruel warfare’, The fighting had not been all one way. for Gilbert mentioned problems that the Europeans had had with Abongines in the Barwon and Mooni river areas, Jervis (1962) points out that a number of the stations on the Moont River were abandoned dunng 1843 because of Aboriginal attacks, while there were numerous incidents on ihe Barwon River where both Blacks and Whites were killed, So preat had been the animosity that according to Gilbert, the Europeans, ‘came fo rhe determination of exterminating the whole af the Natives on the Mooney", and that this had come, "into effect within Ihe last 18 months", He also recounted a specific incident where the 167 Aborigines attacked a group of Europeans: ‘Several af the modes of attack were certainly very daring, at one station, they came down a hill at the back. several hundred en masse, well armed with spears and boomerarngs, all the fighi- ing men surrounded the hut and stockyard and then cut off all chances of the people obtaining their horses, they then chose from a number of саше in the yard the fattest which was [at once?] deliberately speared’. The fragments that can be read of the remainder of this incident include the burning of fences and, ‘the people who were in the hut... were obliged to attempt to save ther- selves, some only succeeding in this, the hut was then burnt down'. Gilbert suspected that ‘he lower classes of Society' were: ‘in league with the Barwon Blacks for many of their plans of attack have been as new and dif- ferent from the Aborigines usual plans such as driving away a herd of cattle and making tem- porary yards each night, and after getting them го an uninhabited part of the country, regularly herding them and killing a beast as they required a fresh supply of food, this ! understand has been done, which is far too systematic a proceeding for any savages to follow out without some tutoring fram whites although it is not proved that any af our own countrymen are really guilty of such a crime still it is well known there are hundreds of men quite capable af such things. Generally speaking the working classes, that ix to say the labourers of New South Wales entertain a thorough dislike to the Natives being on an establishment, considering that where а native is employed, it isto the exclusion of one of their oven class, this jealousy caused them to show them dislike in various ways and itis through outrages upon the Blacks by this class of persons, thet account of the ourbursts may be attributed’. Gilbert's opinion of the cause for enmity be- Tween the Aborigines and Europeans ignored the fact that the Europeans had invaded the Aborigines land less than ten years before (French, 1989). Yet the tensions would hardly have eased as a result of the character of the people who were likely 10 be the shepherds and stockmen of the time. In 1843, James Demarr described his fellow shepherds on the Darling Downsas ‘the vilest scoundrels and ruffiany, whe thought по more of shooting a stray blackfellow than they would a mad dog’ (French, 1989). It has been suggested that Gilbert greatly feared Aborigines (Webster, 1980), though any prident European would at thal time. As noled ahove 158 there had becn a number of altacks on Europeans on the Barwon, MacIntyre and Darling Downs areas at around this time (Jervis, 1962; Wiedemann, 1981; French, 1989). Indeed in early 1843 Charles Coxen, Gould’s brother-in-law, was attacked by Aborigines near the present city of Toowoomba while one of his employees was also attacked on his property "Jondaryan" (French, 1989; Anon, 1843). While at the ‘Severn’ Gilbert recorded in his collecting notes ‘Moo=ling=ga Spolted-throated Finch. Irides reddish yellow". The only finch with spots on the throat and reddish yellow eyes that could have been in the area 18 the Star Finch Neochmia ruficauda, a species now extremely rare in eastern Australia. Gilbert then collected, ‘Amadina lathami [Stagonopleura guttata, Diamond Firetail]', again giving the bare-pari colours, the Aboriginal name 'Ngeo=re moo=ga ra’, and noting thal it was "Killed on the Severn. April 24°. He also recorded that: ‘On she Severn 1 saw a pair of the banded Red-knee (presumably the Red-kneed Dottercl, Erythrogonys cinctus), Ardea pacifica [White-necked Heron)’. On 29 April Gilbert noted: ‘The party with the sheep came ир го day's preparation for tomor- rows stage’. The following day, 30 April, they had barely started for the day, ‘when about 3 miles |5km] the wheel would not turn ... being Mair's patent axletie її was tao complicated too get off very easily and night coming on we gave it up as hopeless’. That day and the next night it rained and on the following day they were again stationarv while they took the wheel off, On 2 May they started again but, ‘moved about mile & half [2km] to McDougalis Sranon where we pitched our tents. the day still raining". John McDougall occupied “Collebelaa” in 1 840 оп the site of the present town of Texas (Wiedemann, 1981). As this was only in the next valley from Cox's Station it appears that the period from 24 tu 29 April was spent at the latter locality, The following weck Gilbert regularly com- mented on the boggy roads, presumably caused by the rain from 30 April to 2 May. On 7 May for example, Gilbert noted that with. 'each step sink- ing up to the knees, added to this we were can- stautly breaking our better set of harness’. On & May Gilbert noted: ‘here some blackfellows came up the first we have seen here Much of the remainder of the pencilled notes are illegible though on 9 and 10 Мау he was at Mosquito Creek where he presumably collected further specimens of the Spangled Perch. On 13 May he noted that they ‘were following Ihe Canal MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Creek we arrived at Pltt & Bonaparts', no doubt the same Pitt that Leichhardt had visited the year before ( Aurousseau, 1968). In the next few days the diary mentions reaching the Condamine River. This suggests that the route followed since leaving the McDougall's property was the stack route pioneered by Patrick Leslie in 1840 (see French, 1989), The brief final entries for the journey can be read in full. They are as follows: "Fri 17 [May] Te Gores New Parrot Sat 18 [May] From Gores head Station to Sheep Station 16 Miles [26km] Sun 19 [May] To Russells & Brookes 9 Miles jl4km] Mon 20 [May] To Old Station 5 Miles [Bkm] Tues 21 [May] To Coxens 10 Miles [16 km]. St George and Ralph Gore's Station was “Yan- dilla” on the Condamine River (French, 1989; RASC, 1978). The “New Parrot’ concerned was the Paradise Parrot Psephotus pulcherrimus. This date corresponds with that given on the tag of specimen D789a in the National Museums and Galleries on Merseyside [hereafter LIVCM], Liverpool, United Kingdom, considered à paratype by Fisher (1986). This specimen has the original label written in Gilbert's hand, “Male. May 17 1844, Condamine River, Darling Downs, New South Wales’, and reverse, ‘Jridex Dark Brown’, It is the first specimen of this species that Gilbert collected, though his comments in a letter to Gould indicate that it was not the only specimen of the Paradise Parrot that he collected (Fisher, 1985, 1986). Given that the party was travelling between tive and sixteen miles [8 and 26km] each day for the last few days of the journey to Coxen’s station it would appear that the specimen was collected between "Yandilla" and the previous station upstream on the Condamine River, “Tune maville", owned by Dr John Rolland and Dom- ville Taylor, As to the remainder of the joumey, Henry Stuart Russell and Gerald Brooks occupied "Cecil Plains" further downstream from Y andilla in 184] and it was this station Gilbert reached on 19 May. Gilbert's distances for the last two days appear to be incorrect. The distance from "Cecil Plains" to Charles Coxen's “Jondaryan” эз 25 miles [40km] and not 15 miles, while it was even further to the other Coxen property, "Myall Creck". Although Gould's nephew, Henry W. Coxen, had occupied “Myall Creek" 1n 1842, it was then considered to be the northern part of Jondaryan., The first house on "Myall Creck" was JOHN GILBERT'S MISSING MONTHS not built until 1846 (French, 1989; Challinor, 1919; Russell, 1888). The question remains as to the identity of the people who were travelling with Gilbert. He can- not havc travelled with either Stephen or Charles Coxen as they were both m Sydney signing insol- vency papers at the time Gilbert was at the Dumaresq River (C. Coxen, 1844; S. Coxen, 1844). Some clues to his companions are found in a newspaper article which concerns the Coxen family (Challinor, 1919). This article is hased on a senes of notes dictated by Henry W. Coxen to his son Н.С. Coxen on 14 September 1888 (letter and notes now in ML). Challinor noted that in 1842 H,W, Coxen took "two drays, 300 cattle, three men unda black boy" to the Darling Downs. One of the men was a Licutenant Irving. but the names of the others were not given, The article further recounts: “On the way and between the Severa River and Canal Creek one af the drays broke dewn - a serious incident in those far off days. Irving took on the other dray, the саше, and the broken axle which he gal repaired by Arthur Hodgson's blacksmith at Eton Vale [south-west of Toowoomba]. А month elapsed before the mended axle was returned to Coxen, and during the interval among other dif- ficulties encountered were attacks ру wild aboriginals and a very severe illness. Here it was that S. and Н. Russell, Brookes and Glover passed on their way North’. In the original notes there is the further infor- mation that in around 1843 or 1844 H.W. Coxen, ‘undertook іо overland 3000 sheep from Homebush |in Sydney] to the Downs via Wiseman's Ferry and the Wallambi Mountains [= Wollombi] over which progressed one mile a day the journey occupied six months camping oul all the time’, The route that H.W. Coxen described through to the Hunter Valley is thc Great North Road which went from Wisemans Ferry to Wollombi and then to Singleton. There are a number of errors in both the newspaper and manuscript versions, for example the sequence of events relating to the Leichhardt expedition are incorrect, Thus it is possible that parts of H.W. Coxen's account may be confused, with the axle breaking on his second delivery of stock and not the first. Gilbert appears to have been involved with thc overlanding of stock, both cattle and sheep, al- though. apparently not before reaching Gun- demaine. Tt is hot surprising that HW. Coxen had Gundemuine as а major stop, for apart from being 169 about half way to the Darling Downs he had Worked on the station in either 1841 or 1842 {Chalhnor, 1919). Indeed, as noted before, his uncle, John Gould, had also visited this station, Before teaching this locality Gilbert was regularly travelling 48km each day. After leaving Gundemaine, where he stayed at least six days, the furthest travelled in a day was about 36km, though it was usually less than 20km. Even so, these distances are surprisingly long for stock to travelina day, which was usually about 14km per day for cattle and 10km per day for sheep (see for example Crawford. 1993: 177). We krow fron Gilberts comment on 20 April that he was travelling with a party with cattle. From the num- ber of stationary days, five days in the three weeks between Gundemaine and Cox's station, it ap- pears the strategy was to drive the cattle hard for a number of days and then let them rest for a duy. The longer stop at Cox's station allowed for the party with the sheep 1o arrive before they travelled east over the sparsely Occupied country to the Condamine River. This strategy may have been used to reduce contact with Aborigines and, fortuitously, allowed Gilbert time to collect specimens. GILBERT ON THE DARLING DOWNS: HIS COLLECTIONS Again, virtually nothing is known of Gilbert's activities between 21 May and 18 September 1844 when the Port Essington Expedition left John Campbell's property “Westbrook”. He wrote a number of letters. Three survive, one each to Gould, Bennett and Strange on 8 June, 10 September and 16 September respectively (reprinied in Fisher, 1985: Whitley, 1938; Whit- tell, 1947). The first letter refers to the collection of the type specimen of the Paradise Parrot and a list of species seen, but as noted, itis possible a number of these may not have been seen in the area at all. The other two letters reveal that Gilbert did not do much travelling or collecting. Tn his letter to Bennett he wrote: ‘During the short time I have been in this dis- trict I have been able to do but little, the weather has been so unpropitious, the whole time, as to prevent me moving about the country, | have à new Parrakeet nearly allied to Platycercus haematogaster [Psephorus haematogaster, Bluc Bonnet], but a much more beautiful bird, and 1 have several new spectes of Mus, and four new species of Grays genus Antechinus, and many 170 other novelties particularly fresh water shells & Fish. .,. 1 have collected many interesting seeds for Mrs. B. which I shall send down with my collection to Mr. Strange to repack, at the same time giving him directions to take oul a package of the most interesting’ , In his letter to Strange he gave the further information: 'l have packed up а small collection for Mr. Gould, and you would oblige me very much by sending them off by the first, and post rhe enclosed letter by the same vessel, the reason of my sending so small a collection is that 1 have determined an joining Dr. Leichhardt's overland expedition; would you пої like to go? ...' ‘I only received your letter of the 17th July а few days ago, and of course have not yet received my boxes you have been kind enough to send, and the letter you sent from Mr. Lefroy 1 cannot hear anything of, although repeated enquiries have been made for me at the Post Office. ... You can unpack the box and look at the specimens, and if not giving you too much trouble, perhaps you will get d tin top soldered on to make it more secure; the only thing new in the collection is the parrot I mentioned to you in a former letter, and the smaller Quadrupeds, which I think are nearly all new, | am sorry | have not been able to ger you a few beetles, bur the weather has been 80 cold and cheerless that scarcely any insects are to be found’. Gilbert wrote that he had not moved far in the four months һе spent in the area. In the pencilled notes immediately before the Port Essington Ex- pedition diary begins is the annotation: ‘Wallaby killed at Pearces about the size of manicatus [Macropus іғта Western Brush Wallaby] general [blank blank] having a white stripe on the cheek. red patch [illegible to end)". This suggests that he may have al some stage visited Ј.С, Pearce who lived at Helidon east of Toowoomba (French, 1989), The identity of the Wallaby remains a mystery, though Gould (1849) noted that Gilbert found that the Bridled Nailtail Wallaby, Onychogalea frenata, ‘was соттоп in the thick patches of scrub which dre dispersed over all parts of the Darling Downs. There are two Gilbert specimens of this species in the collections of the Bnttsh Musuem (BMNH 53.10.22.28, BMNH $3, 10.22.29), The first was ‘No 9' collected at ‘Oakey Creek, Darling Downs! with no other information, while the second was collected on ‘Aug, 19 1844' with the locality given as тле MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM brushes of Oakey Creek (C.T. Fisher, pers. comm.)'. It is not known whether Gould received any specimens from Gilbert beyond the ‘small collection’ that was sent via Strange. From these Specimens, Gould named two birds, four mice and one dasyurid (Gould, 1845а,Ь, 18462, 18582). Gilbert sent a number of mice in his ‘small collection’. The pencilled collection notes refer to a number of possible ‘Mus’ species and other taxa that were collected while he was near the Namoi and Gwydir Rivers, The notes in part read- ‘Til=yeer=gar=bul Elanus scripta. Irides bright reddish brown. bill black. Legs & feet yellowish white. claws black killed at Goolathra April 4 1844, Mus —- Воо=і=Ы Aborig. of Муай Creek. [crossed out name] Aborig. of Матої Inhabits the fissures on the open plains north of Gundamain. first specimen caught 5 April (844. Small Mus - Dil=pea Aborig. Myall Creek Seen=be Freshwater Muscle Peer=nga Small Freshwater Roach caught in small pools of Bowman's Creek. Fish caught in a creek near Mr Hall's [blank blank] Big River. Pobzbe of the Natives of the Big River [count of spines, plus partly legible description] Small Mouse like House Mouse. Tar=Ii of the Natives. very abundant ou the plains Peer=nyga [count of spines, plus description]. This sequence of entries creates a number of problems. First the account is mot strictly in chronological order as the ‘Peer=nga” descrip- tion was written after Gilbert had arnved al ‘the Big River [=Gwydir River]', though it was col- lected at Bowman's Creek further south the day before the collection of the 'Pob-be', Another problem is the use of the locality ‘Myall Creek’, From the chronological sequence the 'Myall Creek' concerned is the first that Gilbert crossed which is now known às Gurley Creek. He later passed a Myall Creek near Delungra, another creek of the same name near Bonshaw and finally the Coxen's unoccupied northerly station had the same name. However it must be assumed that all the specimens with the locality so named were from Gurley Creek. One of the first 'Mus' supposedly collected by Gilbert from this period was the New Holland Mouse, Pseudomys novaehollandiae. In 1856 Gould noted, ‘Mus Novae - Hollandiae ... 1 have now before ine additional specimens .,. collected JOHN GILBERT'S MISSING MONTHS on the banks of the Gwydir, where they were procured by Mr, Gilbert, ... Mr. Gilbert states that, when travelling among the high grass in the neighbourhood of the Gwydir, he constantly started it from out of the fissures in the dry ground’. However this species is now unknown from inland Australia, and rather than being found in grassland it tends to be found in regenerating heath (Strahan, 1983), Records of this species from the Pilliga Scrub were later found to be of a distinct species P. pilligaensis Fox & Briscoe, 1980, the Pilliga Mouse (Watts & Aslin, 1981; Strahan, 1983), So either Gould misidentified the specimen, or misread Gilbert's notes or Gilbert's original label was placed on the wrong specimen. Several possibilities arise from these alterna- tives. The New Holland Mouse referred to by Gould may have been a Plains Rat, Pseudomys australis, In 1853, under Hapalotis murinus, à synonym of the Plains Rat, Gould noted: ‘The original specimen from which my description was taken was procured by Mr. Gilbert on the plains bordering the rivers Namoi and Gwydyr [sic]. where the natives informed him it was very abundant’. There is a specimen in the BMNH, number 53,10.22.4, apparently collected by Gil- bert on the “Plains near the Namoi River’, with the tag ‘No. 2.' (1.А. Mahoney’s unpublished catalogue of Australian Muridae in the BMNH, in the Australian Museum). The habits suggested by Gould for the New Holland Mouse actually match the habits known for the Plains Rat and also correspond with Gilbert's comments for the ‘Mus — Boozi-bi' he collected on 5 April at ‘Myall Creek [2Gurley Creek]'. The BMNH also holds a specimen (BMNH 56.10.28.4) of the now extinct Pseudomys goul- dij, Gould's Mouse. This is labelled ‘No. 4. Gwyder River Plains, New South Wales’ in Gilbert's бапа. Gould's account for this species in the “Mammals of Australia’ makes no mention of any collection of this species from the Gwydir River by Gilbert (Gould, 1855). The size range of the Gould's Mouse matches Gilbert's reference to the collection of a "Small Mouse like House Mouse. Tar-li of the Natives’, and is also similar in size lo the New Holland Mouse. Thus Gould's Mouse could also be the species with which Gould confused the New Holland Mouse. Gilbert's 'Tar=li of the Natives’, also recalls another taxa described by Gould, In 1857 Gould wrote of Mus lineolatus Gould, 1845 [another synonym of Pseudomys australis, Plains Rat]: "This species ef Mus wes discovered by Mr. Gil- 171 bert on the Darling Downs, where it appears to be abundant. ... Mr. Gilbert states that ir is called the Yar-lie by the Natives of the Darling Downs; that it is common in all the open parts of the grassy plains, and thet пе believes it іх confined to the interior of the country., ' Gilbert's “Т' in the pencilled notes here looks like a 'Y' and so is undoubtedly referring to the same animal. Gould's error suggests that he was looking at this section of Gilbert's diaries when writing his account in 1857, Howeyer the animal referred 10 by Gould may not correspond with Gilbert's 'Tar=li', as the Plains Rat is much larger than a House Mouse, Mus domesticus, The lectotype of Mus lineolatus [= Р. australis lineolatus|, BMNH 58.11.24.4, is labelled ‘July 1844" and ‘Ne. 6° as is а paralectotype із the LIVCM (Fisher, 1984; Mahoney Catalogue), ere are another two undated specimens fron) the Darling Downs tn these Museums which are considered paralectotypes. Gilbert only visited the Darling Downs in May to September 1844, so the Plains Rat may have been collected al both the Darling Downs and the Namo:-Gwydir area, and Gould incorrectly referred to the Darling Downs Aborigines as the source of the name "Tarzii'. The Plains Rat has never again been reported alive from New South Wales nor south east Queensland. It is now rarely reported else- where and could be close to extinction iñ the wild (Breed & Head, 1991). From the above it can be seen that Gould inay have made several errors with information con- ceming these mice: 1, he used Gilbert's notes on the habits of the Plains Rat (as Hupaloris murinus) for the New Holland Mouse; 2, he may have referred 1o Gilbert's specimens of Gould's Mouse Pseudomys gouldii, under his account of the New Holland Mouse; 3, he incorrectly referred the name '"Tar-li' as used by the Aborigines of the Namoi-Gwydir area to the Aborigines of the Darling Downs; and, 4, "Tarzii' may have actually referred to Gould's Mouse and not the Plains Rat (as Mus lineolatus). The third species of mouse desenbed by Gould trom the collections sent from the Darling Downs Was Mus gracilicaudalus |= Pseudomys gracilicaudatus, Eastern Chestnut Mouse] which was collected at ‘Oakley Creek ‘|= Oakey Creek] (Gould, |845b), This is the creek on which Jon- daryan is situated. Gould later considered this name a junior synonym of his Miis lineolatus, and so did not discuss it further, bul it is now thought (о be a separate species (Gould, 1863; Mahoncy & Posamentier, 1975; Watts & Aslin, 1981), A 172 single specimen, BMNH 58.11.24.3, considered the holotype, was collected fram ‘Oakey Creek - Darling Downs’ and labelled by Gilbert as ‘No. 15" (Mahoney catalogue; С.Т. Fisher, pers. comm. ). The fourth species of Mus’ was described by Gould much later in 1858 as Mus sordidus [= Rattus sordidus, Canefield Rat]. There are four specimens of this form that may have been col- lected by Gilbert. One LIVCM D407, has the label “Darling Downs’ in Gould's hand (C.T. Fisher, pers. comm.). The other three, including the Jectotype and paralectotype designated hy Thomas in 1921 are in the BMNH and are all labelled ‘No. 7”, One of these, the paralectotype, BMNH 58.1 1.24.5, has an original Gilbert label "No. 7. July 1844, Open Plains, Darling Downs, New South Wales". The Canefield Rat was said by Gould (1858b) to be the: ‘Dil=pea of the Aborigines of New South Wales ... Very fine examples of this robust and compact Rat were procured by the late Mr, Gilbert on the Darling Downs in New South Wales. At present these specimens are in my own collection, but when this work is completed, they will form part of the rich stores of the British Museum. Me Gilbert states that ir ix common on the plains, and is occasionally found on the banks of the creeks, und adds, that it mainly feeds on the roots of stunted shrubs’. From Gilbert's pencilled notes it can be seen that the mouse that he referred to as 'Dil=pea’ was actually a ‘Small Mus’ which he collected at Gurley Creek. Far from being small, the Caneficld Rat is one of the largest of the native rats in the genus Rattus (Watts & Astin, 1981; Strahan, 1983), and indeed Gould considered it ‘robust’. In this instance there may have been an error with labelling and Gilbert's label is now on the wrong specimen. The Canefield Rat has never been recorded again from south east Queensland, nor has it beeri recorded from inland New South Wales, though it has been recorded from coastal north cast New South Wales, Similarly Watts & Aslin (1981) thought that Gilbert’s habitat and feeding obser- vations did not correspond with information known for this species. The problem thus arises as to where these specimens of the Canefield Rat and the New Holland Mice were collected. One possibility is that they were collected closer to the coast, per- haps near Helidon. However Gilbert made no mention of specimens collected there other than his wallaby. while it is not суеп certain that he MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM went there. In any case the New Holland Mouse has not been recorded from Queensland (Watts & Aslin, 1981; Strahan, 1983). The most likely ex- planation is that the specimens of the Cancficld Rat were not collected by Gilbert at all, but by another collector, Frederick Strange. During 1844 Frederick Strange travelled wide- ly along the north coast of New South Wales acquiring many specimens. In mid-April he col- lected specimens on the lower Hunter (Anon, 1844c). Later in August, Strange visited Port Macquarie and returned to Sydney on the the coastal steamer, the Maitland on 22 August (Anon, 1844d). On 6 September [written as 6 August in error] ‘J box specimens natural history' was shipped in his name on the barque 'Haidee' bound for London (Anon, 1844f), presumably those he had just collected, H.M. Whittell's unpublished material concern: ing Strange (now held by the Royal Australasian Ornithologists Union Library, Melbourne) notes that Strange recorded collecting a Sooty Owl Tyre tenebricosa on ‘4 Sept. 1845' and a Plumed Frogmouth Podargus ocellatus plumiferus on ‘14 Sept, 1845’, on the Clarence River. As Gould described the Sooty Ow) in July 1845, the dates given by Strange must be in error for 1844. The carliest steamer to leave Sydney and arrive at the: Clarence in time for Strange to collect the specimens was the "William the Fourth' which left Sydney on 23 August at 7 p.m. (Anon., 1844e). Strange apparently did not return to Syd- ney to receive Gilbert's box until 29 November (Anon, 1844h). Gilbert had suggested Strange, "unpack rhe box and look at the specimens! while also removing the sceds for Mrs. Bennett. Strange obviously did this, but at the same time may have added the specimens that he collected on the Clarence River. From these Gould named the Sooty Owl, the eastern subspecies of the Little Shrike-thrush Colluricincla megarhyncha rufogaster and the Plumed Frogmouth (Gould, 1845c, 1846a; Ford, 1979). These species were all described at much the same time as Gilbert's material from the Dar- ling Downs, and in the case of the Frogmouth, in the same paper as Gilbert's hybrid Rosella, Plarycercus splendidus. From the notes that were taken by Whittell, and comments in Gould (1865), it ts evident that Stringe collected several other bird species at the Clarence River, though it is not clear whether һе did this on the same visit. He also collected some rats and mice on the Clarence. In the same paper as he named the Cancfield Rat, Gould named Mus JOHN GILBERT'S MISSING MONTHS assimilis |= Rattus fuscipes assimilis, the south east Australian population of the Bush Rat] from two specimens sent by Strange from the Clarence River. In 1968 the Canefield Rat was discovered in New South Wales near Evans Head, less than 30km north of the mouth of the Clarence River (Keith, 1976). The habitat in the area, swamp forest with grassy understory, heath and eucalypt wondland is continuous between the two areas. Although it cannot be proved, it is possible that Strange also collected the specimens of the Canefield Rat and the New Holland Mouse to which Gould referred. Also compounding this problem is the tncer- tain taxonomy of the Canefield Rat and its sibling species, the Pale Field-rat, Rartus tunneyi. The Pale Field-rat is similar in size and characters 10 the Canefield Rat and is still found on both the Darling Downs and the North Coast of New South Wales (Van Dyck & Longmore, 1991; Strahan, 1983), It may be that a revision of these laxa is required lo resolve the problem of the identity of these specimens. Another ‘Mus' was described from material sent to Gould from the ‘Darling Downs’. In 1922 Oldfield Thomas described Notomys mordax, the Darling Downs Hopping-mouse, from a skull in the BMNH registered in April 1846 (Thomas, 1922). This specimen had been purchased from Gould and was registered at the same time as the carliest of the BMNH specimens of Rasmus sòr- didus and Pseudomys lineolatus purchased from Gould (Mahoney catalogue). Notomys mordax was apparently a distinct species, but at present it remains biologically unknown (Mahoney, 1977). It has never been found again, either as subfossil material or alive, and is believed to be extinct (Strahan, 1983). Although it cannot be stated forcertain, it appears that Gilbert collected this single specimen as well. The locality of collection is again unknown. although the original label says 'Darling Downs' Given the problems with the labelling of the other mice it is just as likely to have come from the Namoi and Gwydir valleys as the Darling Downs, though it is unlikely to have come from the Clarence River as there are no Notomys species known from coastal southern Australia. In 1845 Gould described the dasyurid Podabrus macrourus |= Sminthopsis macroura, the Stripe-faced Dunnart] fram Gilbert's specimens from the Darling Downs. Gould later wrote that Gilbert had said that all the specimens of this species Were collected in "the Darling Downs district" (Gould, 1849). Gilbert had given 173 him the Aboriginal name used for the species on the Namoi. This name, 'Toon-moo-ra-la-ga', does not appear anywhere in Gilbert's diary. Gil- bert either obtained this name from his ‘natives of the Namoi’ when he was actually on the Dar- ling Downs, or he also collected И near the Namoi. There are three surviving specimens, BMNH 46.4.4.62 (skull only) and BMNH 87,5.4.1 (9) (formerly LIVCM D275a), both from the Darling Downs; and the lectotype LIVCM D275 (5) which still has its onginal label ‘No. 70, open plains, Darling Dawns' (Fisher, 1984, pers, comm.), As noted carlier Gilbert collected а ‘small Antechinus’ near Cox's station on the Dumaresg River, Gould (1852) referred to this as a specimen Òf Antechinus marinus [=Sminthopsis murina. Common Dunnart]. Mr. Gilbert, who, when writ- ing from the Darling Downs in New South Wales, . Says: `/ caught this species on the banks of the river Severn; the male is much larger in all its proportions than the female, and has a darker mark around and before the eye’. There are two specimens of this species (BMNH 53.10.22.26. BMNH 53.10.22.27), the latter has an original Gilbert label, 'No. 1.? Severa River, New South Wales '. Gilbert collected further specimens of this species on the Darling Downs which Gould later described as Amechinus albipes [= Sminthopsis murina, Common Dunnart] (Gould, 1852), There are two specimens surviving of this species from this locality, BMNH 53.10.2223, which has an original Gilbert label and LIVCM 1981.35, also probably collected by Gilbert (C.T, Fisher, pers, comm.). Gilbert's pencilled notes also record the collec- tion of a bat species, Unfortunately he gaye no details beyond a dental formula, which by itself is not sufficient to identify the species (T. Flan- nery & C.T, Fisher, pers, eomm.). In Gould's published works there are few ref- erences to birds eollected by Gilbert on the Dar- ling Downs. Gould received specimens of the Paradise Parrot collected by Gilbert from this area, Apart from the Liverpool paratype, there is also а specimen of a young male collected by Gilbert on 13 July 1844. 3n rhe LIVCM (Fisher, 1986), Gould also described ‘Platycercus splendidus’, how known to be a hybrid hetween the Pale- headed Rosella P. eximius palliceps and the East- ern Rosella P. eximius eximius (see Gould, 18463; McAllan & Bruce, 1989: Schodde, 1989). Gould gave the (уре Iocality of P. splendidus as 128 NOTES ON BEHAVIOUR AND DIET OF VARANUS TERIAE SPRACKLAND, 1991. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1): 128. 1994:- Varanus teriae is ‘a species with a very restricted distribution in Australia ... with a maximum geographic distribution of less than 100km ... represented by a relatively large population in a relatively restricted area ... within a national park ...' McDonald et al. (1991). It is known from only three museum specimens and four live specimens in captivity at the Beerwah Reptile Park, SEQ. V. teriae occurs only in the upland and lowland rain- forests in the Iron and MclIlwraith Ranges, of Cape York Peninsula. In November, 1993 I observed four specimens of V. teriae near the Claudie R., Iron Range. (Three of these were captured for breeding studies). V. teriae is superbly adapted to life in the high canopy of the rainforest. It is dark (almost black), lightly built, and small; has an elongate body and long prehen- sile tail; and its feet bear sticky pads and long digits and claws. The four specimens were observed at 8.00am, 11.10am, 2.05pm and 4.30pm either on the ground (three) ‘raking’ leaf litter or searching (?for food) in a rotting log or in a hollow tree limb (one) about 7m above the ground. The three specimens captured passed faeces which con- tained insect remains. These have been identified by Dr G.B. Monteith as a tree cricket (family Gryllacrididae) from MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM specimen 1; a single medium sized insect, probably a cock- roach (specimen 2); and a 3-4cm longicorn beetle, Dihammus (family Cerambycidae), and a mandible possibly from a cock- roach (specimen 3). From these remains and from observa- tions in the wild it seems reasonable to suggest that specimens of V. teriae forage on the ground amongst leaf litter and rotting logs and that they use their forelimbs to scratch into litter and detritus, to find insect prey. Acknowledgements Dr Geoff Monteith of the Queensland Museum, identified the insect remains. Jeanette Covacevich suggested we report these findings and assisted us to do so. Literature Cited McDonald, K.R., Covacevich, J.A., Ingram, G.J. & Couper, P.J. 1991. The status of frogs and reptiles. Pp.338-345. In Ingram, G.J. & Raven, R.J. (eds), ‘An atlas of Queenslands frogs, reptiles, birds and mammals’. (Board of Trustees, Queensland Museum: Brisbane). Stephen Irwin, Beerwah Reptile Park, Beerwah, Queensland 4519, Australia, 26 February 1994, 174 ‘Darling Downs, New South Wales’ but later modified this to ‘the newly located district to the northward of the Darling Downs’ (Gould, 1847). When Gould described the bird m October 1845 he had not received any specimens from the Port Essington Expedition, but by the time he changed the locality he had received Gilbert's last collec- tion from Leichhardt. It is likely that Gould al- tered his account by mistake. The hybrid zone of these taxa is, if anything, to the south of the Darling Downs. In fact hybrids are common in the Texas/Ashford area (pers. obs.) where Gilbert spent over a week while travelling north. Gilbert himself did not consider ‘P. splendidus new, and he mentioned both the Eastern and Pale-headed Rosellas in his letter to Gould. written in June (Fisher, 1985). On the Port Essington Expedition. Gilbert referred a number of times to an Elanus sp. which he first recorded пп the Darling Downs. Chisholm (1944) suggested that Gilbert did not know the scientific name of the Letter-winged Kite and was referring to this species. Yet the name E, scriptus was appended by Gilbert in the Queensland Museum notebook, listed in the pencilled descriptions in the diary and used in Gilbert's letter to Gould from the Darling Downs. It may be that Gilbert saw the related, and more common species, the Black-shouldered Kite E. axillaris, while on the Darling Downs. CONCLUSIONS Gilbert’s apparent inactivity їп the few months spent on the Downs is in stark contrast to his earlier trips to Western Australia and Port Es- sington, On these trips he collected many hundreds of specimens representing numerous new species. In contrast it took him more than nine months after coming ashore at Sydney to record his first Yellow-faced Honcyeater, Lichenostomus chrysops (Diary for 17 October 1844). This species is still an abundant species in the forests and woodlands of eastern Australia and Was à surprising oversight on Gilbert's рап. This is not to imply that Gilbert was an inade- quate field naturalist, merely that he did not ac- tively seck specimens during this period. As hinoculars did fot then exist, collection of a specimen was the only way he could have be- come familiar with the smaller birds, He certainly found time to collect specimens while travelling with the stock from Gundemaine. Yethe gave the fairly lame excuse of the weather being "un- propitious” for his lack of collections from the MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Downs (letter ta Bennett 10 September 1844, in Leichhardt papers ML). It may be that he was avoiding field work for other reasons, perhaps due to the tensions between Aboriginals and Europeans in the area at the time, or conceivably he was filling his time helping the Coxens work their stations. The Coxens' fortunes were on the wane at this stage, Stephen Coxen commited suicide in September 1844, ostensibly over his insolvency, while Charles Coxen's property Jon- daryan was sold later the same year (Anon, 18440; French, 1990). Rodenck (1988) suggested Gilbert was limited 1o only one field of natural history, that of or- nithology, However Gilbert's notes reveal that apart from birds, he collected reptiles, fish and shells while he remains extremely important in the history of mammalogy in Australia (Whittell, 1942a,b: “Contents of box by Shepherd’ envelope to Prince dated 2 May 1840 in NLA; letters from Gilbert 10 Gould written in Perth 20 May 1839 and in Port Essington dated 19 September 1840 in ML). He also took an interest m plants, possib- ly to help him describe the habitats in which he found particular animals. Yet he had no way to further his botanical knowledge, given the schedule he kept from 1839 onwards, Gould's instructions for Gilbert's second visit to Australia indicate that Gilbert was 10 collect everything from shells, sponges and plants, to seals and "emus from every locality’ (Langman, 1922), Thus Gilbert’s inability to provide beyond merely a ‘small collection’ should be viewed in perspective. Gould had an enormous appetite for knowledge and the glory that could be gained fram discovery (Tree, 1991). After five years of collecting, perhaps Gilbert had realised that Gould, half а world away, would never be satis- fied. He may have felt that he did not necd to go beyond the course of duty. Despite him feeling ‘a little jealous of a for- eigner being the first to make known the hidden treasures of this vast and Interesting country’ Gilbert's decision to join the Leichhardt Expedi- tion may have been prompted more by a desire to redress the balance (Jetter to Bennett 10 Septem- ber 1844 in ML). He had collected few animals. in the previous nine months and indeed had found little new on the east coast, though this should not he considered [аҳ on his рап, This was an ares where naturalists had been collecting specimens for over SO years. The east coast was neither Western Australia nor Port Essington, where only 2 limited amount of collecting had occurred prior to his visits. JOHN GILBERT'S MISSING MONTHS Gould had instructed Gilbert not to join any Government expedition unless he had it in writ- ing that Gould had rights to any specimens col- lected and notes taken (draft of letter from Gould to Gilbert dated 14 July 1842 in NLA), In his rush to join an expedition of any sort Gilbert forgot to make such an agreement, a factor which later led to animosity with Leichhardt. Gilbert's place in the history of Australian biol- ogy remains secure. Gilbert's Australian collec- lions and notes, even when limited, give insights into the fauna that existed prior to the full onslaught of pastoralism and introduced her- bivores. In this instance, for example, it can be seen that certain species such as the Flock Bron- zewing and the Plains Rat were apparently com- mon between the Namoi and Gwydir Rivers where they are no longer found, while thé now endangered Paradise Parrot and Bridled Nail-tail Wallaby were found on the Darling Downs. The most unusual animal that may have been col- lected by Gilbert in this period, Noromys mordax, remains as enigmatic as ever, That Gilbert apparently recorded so little of the Darling Downs fauna may be due in part to trust- ing his observations to memory. He did this on his second trip to Western Australia, only record- ing the details in his ‘notebook’ once he arrived in Sydney, Gilbert's death, Gould's editing of Gilbert's letters, and the mislabelling of his specimens probably guaranteed that there 1s little known of Gilbert's activities in these months. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This paper has taken many years to evolve and owes much to the helpful staff of the Mitchell and General Reference Libraries of the State Library of New South Wales. Of particular help in the later stages of compilation was the discerning eye of Clemency Fisher, Others who have helped in yanous Ways include; John Calaby, Chris Chafer, Tim Flannery, Maurice French, Linda Gibson, Dariel Larkins, lan Loch, Wayne Longmore, Marie McAllan, Allan McEvey, Graeme Phipps, Sally Reader and Tom Trnski, Thanks must also be given to the staff of the Queensland Museum Library, the John Oxley Library (Brisbane) and the National Library of Australia. LITERATURE CITED ALBRECHT, б. & ALBRECHT, J, 1992, The Goulds in the Hunter Region ol N.S.W. 1839- 1840. Naturae No, 2. [Complete] ANON. |= Dowse, T., sec Brisbane History Group, 1989] 1843. News from the Interior, Moretati Bay, Sydney Morning Herald for 17 June 1843, Vol. XV. No. 1,897: |2]. ANON, 184423. Shipping intelligence, Sydney Mom- ing Herald for 31 January 1844, Vol. ХУП, No, 2,094: [2]. 1844b, Shipping intelligence, Sydney Morning Herald for 19 March 1844. Vol. XVII. No. 2,135: 121. 1844c. Natural history. Sydney Morning Herald For 20 April 1844, Vol, ХУП, No, 2,163; [4], 1844d. Shipping intelligence. Sydney Morning Herald for 23 August 1844. Vol. ХУШ. No. 2,270: [2]. 1844е, Clarence River steamer [Advertisement] Sydney Moming Herald for 28 August 1844. Vol, ХУШ. No, 2,274; [1]. 1844f, Shipping intelligence. Sydney Mormng Herald for 7 September 1844, Vol, ХУП. No 2,283: [2]. 1844g. Inquest оп Mr. Coxen, Sydney Morning Herald for 7 September 1844, Val. XVIII, No. 2,283: [3]. 1844h. Shipping Intelligence. Sydney Morning Herald for 30 November 1844. Vol. XVIII. No. 2,355: 12]. 18441. List of electors for the the electoral district ol Sydney, in Gipps Ward for the year 1844-5. (Kemp & Fairfax: Sydney), 1845. Sneaking. Sydney Moning Herald for 7 January 1845, Vol. XIX. No. 2.387: |2]. AUROUSSEAU, M. (сф), 1968. The letlers of FW Ludwig Leichhardt. 3 Vols. Second Ser, No CXXXV. (The Hakluyt Society, Cambridge Universily Press: Cambridge LLE.) BARKER, T. 1987. "The Government Кип. A history of Warialda 1827-1930', (Warialda Historical Society; Warialda N.S.W.) BREED, W.G. & HEAD, W, 1991, Conservation status of the Plains Rat Pseudomys australis (Rodentia; Muridae), Australian Mammalogy 14:125-128. BRISBANE HISTORY GROUP. 1989, ‘Brisbane Town News from the Sydney Morning Herald’, Sources No. 3. (Authors, Brisbane). CAMPBELL, J.F. 1931. "Squatting" on Crown Lands in New South Wales, Journal and Proceedings nf the Royal Australian Historical Society 17: 43- RG, CHAFER, C.J. 1902. Notes on the distribution of and insectivory in the Figbird Sphecotheres viridis in the Nlawarra and Shoalhaven regions of New South Wales. Australian Bird Watcher 14: 282- 285. 176 CHALLINOR, H.M. 1919, Pioneer Queenslanders. Early squatters and their homes. УШ. The Coxen Family. The Daily Mail. (Brisbane), for 17 May 1919, No. 5,164: 10. CHISHOLM, А.Н. 1940. The story of John Gilbert. Emu 39: 156-176. 1941, 'Strange new world. The adventures of John Gilbert and Ludwig Leichhardt’. (Angus & Robertson Ltd: Sydney). [Also 1955 Second edi- tion; 1973 Third Edition titled ‘Strange journey '.] 1944. Birds of the Gilbert Diary, part 1, Emu 44: 131-150. 1945. Birds of the Gilbert Diary, part 2. Emu 44: 183-200. [These articles were later republished as. a bookletentitled 'An explorer and his birds. John Gilbert's discoveries in 1844-45,"] COXEN, C. 1844, Untitled [Notice of insolvency]. Sydney Morning Herald for 26 April 1844. Vol, XVII. No. 2,168: [3]. COXEN, 5. 1844, Untitled [Notice of insolvency], Sydney Morning Herald for 26 April 1844. Vol, XVII. No. 2,168: [3]. CRAWFORD, E. (as told to Chris Walsh). 1993, ‘Over my tracks’. (Penguin Books: Ringwood, Vic.) DESCHAUENSEE, R.M. 1957, On some avian types, principally Gould's, in the collection of the Academy, Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia 109: 123-246. DEBUS, S,5, MCALLAN, LAW, & MORRIS. А.К. 1993, The Square-tailed Kite Lophoicrinia isura in New South Wales. Australian Birds 26; 104-118. DIVISION OF NATIONAL MAPPING. 1975. Australia. 1:250,000 Map series gazetteer. (Australian Government Publishing Service: Canberra), 1976, Texas, 1:100,000 Topographic Map. FISHER, С.Т, 1984. Australasian mammal specimens in the collections of Merseyside County Museums. Australian Mammalogy 7: 205-213. 1985. Two previously unpublished letters with the correct version of a third, From John Gilbert to John Gould. Australian Zoologist 22(1): 5-14. 1986. A type specimen of the Paradise. Parrot Psepholus pulcherrimus (Gould, 1845) in the Merseyside County Muscums, Liverpool, England. Australian Zoologist 22(3): 10-12. 1992, The importance of early Victorian natural historians in the discovery and interpretation ol the Australian fauna, with special reference to John Gilbert. Ph.D, Thesis, Liverpool Polytech- nic/National Museums and Galleries on Mer- seyside. FORD, J. 1979. Speciation, hybridization and relation- ships sn the Little Shrike-thrush Colluricincla MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM megarhyncha of Australia and New Guinea. Emu 79: 195-210. FOX, B.J. & BRISCOE, D.A, 1980, Pseudomys pil- ligaensis, a new species of murid rodent from the Pilliga Scrub, northern New South Wales. Australian Mammalogy 3: 109-126. FRENCH, M. 1989, ‘Conflict on the Condamine. Aborigines and the European invasion’. (Darling Downs Institute Press; Toowoomba, Qld.). 1990. ‘A Pastoral Romance. The tribulation and triumph of squatterdom'. (University of Southern Queensland Press: Toowoomba, Qid.). FRITH, HJ, 1982. Pigeons and doves of Australia. (Rigby Ltd: Adelaide). GALLOWAY, J.J. 1854. Map of the New England and Gwydir Districts, showing the reserves, “Trans- mitted to the Surveyor General with my letter of Jan, 21 1854", [Copy examined Archives Office of New South Wales.] GARDINER, W. 1844, Map of the districts beyond the Boundary of Location in New South Wales. Author, Armadale New England [= Armidale, Armadale was the original name for the town. Unpublished copies held in the Archives Office of New South Wales and the Mitchell Library). GOODWIN, K., COPELAND, J.M. & LATHAM, T. (eds), 1977, ‘A history of Quirindi’ (The Quirindi Centenary Celebrations Committee: Quirindi N.S.W.) GORMAN, Н, 1852, Trace of the Connadilly or Mooki River, transmitted to the Surveyor General with my letter of 10 January 1852. [Copy examined Archives Office of New South Wales.] GOULD, J. 1837-1838. ‘A Synopsis of the birds of Australia and adjacent islands’. (Author: Lon- den). 1842a. ‘The birds of Australia’. Parts V] - IX. (Author: London), [These parts were published between 1 March 1842 and 1 December 1842, see Sauer, 1982; Sauer & Evans, 1987], 1842b. ‘A monograph of the Macropodidae, or family of Kangaroos’. Part И, (Author: London), 1842c. "Mr. Gould exhibited a new species of Petrogale, ,,, Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London 1842: 5-6, 18424. “Mr. Gould exhibited several Australian mammals, from his own collection, which he considered new to science", Proecedings of the Zoological Society of London 1842; 10-14, 1Я42е. Description of two new species of Kan- züroos from Western Australia, Annals and Magazine of Natural History 10: 1-3. 1842f. "Mr Gould then brought before the notice of the Meeting some additional ornithological JOHN GILBERT’S MISSING MONTHS novelties from Australia”. Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London 1842: 17-21. 1842р. “Mr. Gould then proceeded to characterize а new species of Perameles from Port Essington, -+ > Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London 1842: 41-42. 1842h. '" Mr. Gould exhibited and pointed out the characters of two new species of Kangaroo". Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London 1842; 57-58. 1842i. "Mr Gould exhibited to the meeting an ex- tensive collection of Australian Halcyonide, ...". Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London 1842; 72, 1843a. "Mr. Gould exhibited and characterized the following thirty new species of Australian birds". Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London 1842: 131-140, 1843b. “Тһе Birds of Australia’, Parts X - XI. (Author: London). 1845a, On anew species of Platycercus. Annals and Magazine of Natural History 15: 114-115. 1845b. "Mr. Gould exhibited to the Mecting fivc new species of Mammals". Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London 1845: 77-79. 1845c. “Mr. Gould exhibited to the Meeting three new species of Birds from Australia". Proceed- ings of the Zoological Society of London 1845: 80. 18463, "Mr. Gould then exhibited two new birds from New South Wales". Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London 1845: 104-105. 1846b, "Mr. Gould then exhibited to the mecting two new Australian birds, which he characterized as follows". Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London 1846; 83-84, 1847. ‘The Birds of Australia’. Part XXVII. (Author: London). 1849. "The Mammals of Australia’. Pari TL. (Author: London), 1852. "The Mammals of Australia’. Part IV. (Author: London). 1853. " The Mammals ol Australia’. Part V, (Author: London). 1855. ‘The Mammals of Australia’. Part VH. (Author: London), 1856. ‘The Mammals of Australia’, Part УШ. (Author: London), 1857. ‘The Mammals of Australia’. Part ІХ. (Author: London). 1858a. On four new species of Mus and one of Hapaloris from Australia. Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London 1857: 241-143. 1858b. ‘The Mammals of Australia’, Part X. (Author: Londen), 1863. "The Mammals of Australia’. Part ХІН. Intro- duction (esp. p. xxxvi). (Author: London). 1865. 'Handbook to the Birds of Australia’. (Author: London), GRAY, ЈЕ. 1842a. A new species of Tapering-tailed Phascagale in the collection of the British Museum. Annals and Magazine of Natural His- tory 9: 518. 1842h. Descriptions of some new genera and fifty unrecorded species of Mammalia. Annals and Magazine of Natural History 10: 255-267, GUNTHER, A, 1859. ‘Catalogue of the fishes in the British Museum’. Vol. 1. (Trustees of the British Museum: London). HAMILTON, R.L. 1960, Allan Cunningham - with special reference to his work in what is now Queensland. Journal and Proceedings of the Royal Australian Historical Society 46; 323-342, HINDWOOD, K.A, 1938. Mrs. John Gould, Emu 38: 131-138. [Includes excerpts from Elizabeth Gauld's diary notes held in ML dated 21 August - 30 September 1839). HUNT, G.L. 1980. "When Narrabri was young. A story of Narrabri from 1818 to 1900'. (Narrabri Municipal Council: Narrabri, N.S.W.). JERVIS, J. 1962. Exploration and settlement of the north-western Plains [Part 1). Journal and Proceedings of the Royal Australian Historical Society 48: 377-394, 1963. Exploration and settlement of the North- westem Plains [Part 2]. Journal and Proceedings of the Royal Australian Historical Society 48; 436-457. JUKES, J.B. (ed. by “his sister”). 1871. ‘Letters and extracts from the addresses and occasional writ- ings of J. Beete Jukes, M.A., F.R.S., F.G.S, Late local Director of the Geological Survey of Ireland, ctc. etc. etc.’ (Chapman & Hall: London). KEITH, К. 1976, The occurrence of the Dusky Field- rat, Rattus sordidus (Rodentia: Muridae), in New South Wales. Australian Wildlife Researcl: 3: 149-15], LEICHHARDT, L. 1847. Journal of an overland сх- pedition in Australia, from Moreton Bay to Port Essington, à distance of upwards of 3000 miles, during the years 1844-1845", (Т. & W. Boone: London). LOCH, I. 1989, A Strange tale, Australian Natural History 23: 194-195. LONGMAN, H.A. 1922, John Gould's notes for John Gilbert. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 7: 291-294. LONGMUIR, J. (ed.). 1956, “Gunnedah Centenary 1856-1956". (Gunnedah Centenary Committee: Gunnedah N.S.W.) 178 MCALLAN, LA,W. 1987. Early records of the Thick- billed Grasswren Amylornis rextilis and Striated Grasswren Amytornis striatus from New South Wales. Australian Birds 21: 33-43. MCALLAN, LA.W. & BRUCE, M.D, 1988 [21989]. "The birds of New South Wales. A working list’. (Biocon Research Group: Turramurra N,S,W,) MCEVEY, A. 1979, Appendices to ‘The Birds of Australia and Adjacent Islands’, Facsimile Edi- lion. (Lansdowne Editions: Melbourne). MCLEAN, [А.]. 1847. Plan shewing the Squatting Districts of Gwyder & Liverpool Plains with parts of New England, Darling Downs, Bligh, Wellington & Lower Darling. (presumahly pub- lished New South Wales Surveyor General: Syd- ney), [Copy examined Archives Office of New South Wales. | MACGILLIVRAY, J. 1846, An account of Капс = Islet, on the N.E. coast of New Holland, The Zoologist 46; 1473-1481, MAHONEY, J.A. 1977. Skull characters and relation- ships of Noromvs mordax Thomas (Rodentia; Mundac), a poorly known Queensland Hopping- mouse, Australian Journal of Zoology 25; 749- 754. MAHONEY, J.A. & POSAMENTIER, Н. 1975. The occurrence of the native rodent. Pseudomys gracilicaudatus (Gould 1845) (Roden- tia:Muridac) in New South Wales, Australian Mammalogy 1: 333-346. MORRIS, A.K., MCGILL, A.R. & HOLMES, G. 1981. 'Handlist of the birds of New South Wales’, (New South Wales Field Ornithologists Club: Sydney). RICHARDSON, J, 1842a. Contributions to the Ich- thyology of Australia, Part 1. Annals and Magazine of Natural History 9: 15-31, 1842b, Contributions to the Ichthyology of Australia, Part И. Annals and Magazine of Natural History 9: 120-131, 18426. Contributions to the Ichthyology of Australia, Рап IV, Annals and Magazine of Natural History 9: 384-393, 18424. Contributions to the Ichthyology of Australia, Part V. Annals and Magazine of Natural History 10; 25-34, RODERICK, C. 1988. ‘Leichhardt the dauntless explorer’, (Angus & Robertson: Sydney), ROYAL AUSTRALIAN SURVEY CORPS. 1969, Corlewis, 1,100,000 Topographic Map. 1970, Murrurundi, 1:100,000 Topographic Map. 1982. Bellata. 1: 100,000 Topographic Map. 1987. Moree. 1: 250,000 Topographic Map. 1988. Narrabri, 1:250,000 Topographic Map. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM RUSSELL, H.S. 1888, "The genesis of Queensland’, (Turner & Henderson: Sydney). SAUER, С.С. 1980. ‘John Gould's prospectuses. and lists of subscribers to his works on natural history: with an 1866 facsimile’. (Author: United States of America). 1982. ‘John Gould, the Bird Man. A chronology and bibliography’. (Lansdowne Editions: Mel- bourne). SAUER, С.С. & EVANS, D. 1989. John Gould's Birds of Australia in the original 36 Parts, with notes on the cancelled plates and text. Bulletin of the Bibliographical Society of Australia апа New Zealand 11: 67-69, SCHODDE, R. 1988 [21989]. New subspecies of Australian birds. Canberra Bird Notes 13: 119- 122, STONE, W. & MATHEWS, G.M. 1913. A list ol the species of Australian birds described by John Gould, with the location of the type-specimens. Austral Avian Record 1: 129-180, STRAHAN, R, 1979, ‘Rare and curious specimens. An illustrated history of the Australian Museum 1827-1979". (The Australian Museum: Sydney). (ed,), 1983, The Australian Museum Complete Book of Australian Mammals. (Angus & Robertson: Sydney). THOMAS, O. 1921. Notes on Australasian rats, with a selection of lectotypes of Australasian Muridae. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Serics 9, В: 425.433, 1922, Two new Jerboa-rats (Notomys), Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Series 9, 9: 315- 317. TORRENS, H.S. 1987. John Gilbert (1812-1845) the Australian naturalist and explorer. New light on his work in England, Archives of Natural History 14: 211-219. TREE, 1. 199].* The ruling passion ol John Gould. A biography of the bird man’, (Barrie & Jenkins; London). VAN DYCK, S.M. & LONGMORE, N.W, 1991. 1.4 The mammal records, Pp. 284-336. In Ingram, G.J. & Raven, R.J. (eds.), ‘An Atlas of Queensland's frogs, reptiles, birds & mammals. (Queensland Museum; Brisbane). WARREN, R.L.M. 1966. "Type-specimens of birds in the British Museum (Natural History). Vol. 1. Non-Passerines'. (British Museum Natural His- tory: London), WARREN, R.L.M. & HARRISON, CJ.O. 1971. "Type-specimens of birds in the British Museum (Natural History), Vol, 2. Passerines', (British Museum Natural History: London). WATERHOUSE, F.H. 1885, 'The dates of publication JOHN GILBERT’S MISSING MONTHS of some of the zoological works of the late John Gould F.R.S.' (К.Н. Porter: London). WATERHOUSE, G.R. 1842. “Mr. Waterhouse called the attention of the Members to two new species of Marsupial animals from South Australia, ...". Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London 1842: 47-48. WATTS, C.H.S. & ASLIN, H.J. 1981. The rodents of Australia. (Angus & Robertson: Sydney). WEBSTER, E.M. 1980. ‘Whirlwinds in the Plain. Lud- wig Leichhardt - friends foes and history’. (Mel- bourne University Press: Melbourne). WHITLEY, G.P. 1938. John Gould's associates. Emu 38: 141-167. WHITTELL, H.M. 1941. A review of the work of John Gilbert in Western Australia. Emu 41: 112-129. 1942a. A review of the work of John Gilbert in Western Australia. Part II. Emu 41: 216-242. 1942b. A review of the work of John Gilbert in Western Australia. Part III. Emu 41: 289-305. 179 1945. Gilbert, Grey, and Macgillivray. Emu 45: 175-176. 1947. Frederick Strange. A biography. Australian Zoologist 11: 96-114. 1951. A review of the work of John Gilbert in Western Australia. Part IV. Emu 51: 17-29. 1954a. "The Literature of Australian Birds: a history and bibliography of Australian ornithology’. (Paterson Brokensha: Perth). 1954b. John Gilbert's notebook on marsupials. Western Australian Naturalist 4: 104-114. WIEDEMANN, E. 1981. ‘World of its Own. Inverell's early years 1827-1920'. (Devill Publicity: In- verell, N.S.W.) WOOD, W.A. 1972. ‘Dawn in the Valley. The story of settlement in the Hunter River Valley to 1833'. (Wentworth Books: Sydney). WOODRUFF, B. (ed.). 1974. On the track of the locust. Rural Research 83: 2-6. (ed.). 1976. The locust plague that vanished. Rural Research 92: 25-26. 180 NORTHERN RANGE LIMITS OF THE LONG NOSED POTOROO, POTOROUS TRIDACTYLUS. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1): 180. 1994:- The Long nosed Potoroo (Potorous tridactylus) is one of several members of the Potoroidae (Potoroinae) (Seebeck et al., 1991). The known distribution of the species extends from southern Tasmania (Heinsohn,1968), through eastern Australia, to SE Queensland (Johnson, 1986). The Queensland Museum mam- mal database indicates that the northern-most, specimen- backed record of P.tridactylus is Kiamba (near Yandina) (26734' S, 152°54'E). Here, we record a sighting of P.tridac- tylus from a forested area approximately 300km NW of Kiam- ba near where a sighting of the same species has been recorded (Amos, 1982). During October and November, 1993, we completed sur- veys for the Mountain Brushtail Possum, Trichosuruscaninus in SE and central Queensland (Lindenmayer & Viggers, un- publ. data). Opportunistic records of other species of mam- mals were gathered as part of these studies. One of the areas targeted was the Bulburin State Forest (24?33'S, 151^28'E), which is c.25km SW of Miriam Vale. There have been few surveys of the fauna in the area (D. Rolfe, Queensland Forest Service, pers. comm.). During spotlighting transects con- ducted as part of our surveys of T.caninus, an adult P.tridac- tylus was sighted on a roadside verge at the ecotone between rainforest and a plantation of Hoop Pine, Araucaria cunnin- ghamii. Attempts to locate P.tridactylus during subsequent nights of spotlighting were unsuccessful. Our study indicates that further surveys of the mammalian fauna in the Bulburin State Forest should assess the status of the species. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Acknowledgements The significance of our sighting of P.tridactylus was high- lighted during discussions with Mr A.M, Gilmore. Mr S. Van Dyck provided information from the Queensland Museum mammal database. We thank Mr D. Rolfe for allowing access to the Bulburin State Forest, providing accommodation whilst we were working in the area, and supplying unpublished data derived from various studies in the region, We are most grateful to Dr A. Watt for her support of our studies in Queensland. DBL is funded by an Australian Research Coun- cil Postdoctoral Award. Literature Cited Amos, P.J. 1982. The potoroo in Queensland. Queensland Agricultural Journal 108: 57, Heinsohn, G. 1968. Habitat requirements of the macropod marsupial Potorous tridactylus in Tasmania. Mam- malia 32: 30-43. Johnson, Р.С. 1986. Longnosed Potoroo. P. 181. In Strahan, R. (ed.), "The complete book of Australian mammals'. (Angus & Robertson: Sydney). Seebeck, J.H., Bennett, A.F. & Scott, D.S. 1991. Ecology of the Potoroidae a review. Pp. 67-88. In Grigg, G., Jar- man, P. & Hume, I. (eds), 'Kangaroos, Wallabies and Rat Kangaroos'. (Surrey Beatty: Chipping Norton). D.B. Lindenmayer, Centre for Resource & Environmental Studies, The Australian National University, Canberra, Australian Capital Territory 0200, Australia; K.L. Viggers, Division of Biochemistry & Molecular Biology, The Australian National University, Canberra, Australian Сарі- tal Territory 0200, Australia; 15 December 1993. THE FIRST UNDERGROUND MAINS FOR ELECTRICITY SUPPLY IN BRISBANE E. DONALD MCKENZIE AND SYDNEY A. PRENTICE McKenzie, Е.Ю. & Prentice, S.A. 1994 06 01: The first underground mains for electricity supply in Brisbane. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1): 181-192. Brisbane. ISSN 0079-8835. The first Brisbane underground installation for supplying electricity for lighting is described. The original installation in 1884 used rigid two-core (No. 3 size) Edison street tubes, made in New York, U.S.A. It ran from the Queensland Government powerstation, adjacent to the Government Printing Office, along William Street for about 410m to the Queensland Parliamentary buildings. Various problems caused a two year delay before reliable supply was achieved in 1886. In 1892, when Parliament House was extended, three-core Edison street tubes (No.2 size) were added to the system with each core supplying a separate area of the building. The conductors of the older mains were bonded as a single return circuit to the powerstation. Artifacts from these systems have been collected on three separate occasions, including a planned excavation in January. 1992. Problems with voltage drop in the supply are discussed, [Edison street tubes, underground eleetrie mains early electricity supply, Qld Parliament House. ED. McKenzie & S.A. Prentice, Queensland Museum, PO Box 3300, South Brisbane, Queenstand 4101, Australia; 15 December 1993, Rigid underground mains, invented by Edison and known as Edison street tubes, were installed in William St, Brisbane to supply electricity for lighting purposes from the Government power- station (adjacent to the Queensland Government Printing Office) to the Parliamentary buildings. The first installation, in 1884, was the two-core type and the second, m 1892, was the three-core type which provided for additions to the lighting. These mains were the first and only such instal- lations in Queensland and possibly the only in- stallation of the two-core type in the Southern Hemisphere. Broken parts of these mains installations were recovered by the Queensland Museum from the powerstation site in 1986, and, in 1989, short lengths of the mains were recovered from the Parliament House grounds during an excavation for plumbing repairs. The work on these materials led to planned excavation and removal of a part of the mains, including complete junction boxes and elbow joint boxes in January 1992. Materials are held in the Queensland Museum. Over the twenly years of service there was difficulty in selecting lamp voltages in the Par- liamentary buildings to suit the variation in the available supply voltage with lighting load. This problem occurred initially with the voltage drop in the two-core mains and later with that for the two and three-core combination. Unrrs USED As this paper refers ta a time before adoption of the metric and decimal systems in Australia, the following conversions apply: 1 inch- 25.4mm; | foot=0.305m; 1 yard= 0.914m; 1 chain-20.1m; 1 sq. inch=645sq. mm; 1 pound (weight)20.454kg; 1 cwt=50.7kg; 1 pound =2.0 dollars (in 1966); 1 shilling (12 pence)=10 cents. FIRST STEPS The first major step taken to introduce electric lighting in Queensland was the decision tn April 1883 hy the Queensland Government to have incandescent lighting in the House of Assembly and the Government Printing Office in Bris- bane.(1) A small trial installation had just been completed in the latter building. A very brief tender, dated 1] April 1883, by a visiting repre- sentative of ‘The Edison's Indian and Colonial Electric Co. Lid (Major S. Flood Page) was ic- cepted by the Queensland Government on 13 April. As far as is known, there was no specifica: tion. Many details were undecided and no doubt on this account and due to lack of experienced personnel, there was one difficulty after another -asituation which lasted until July 1886 when the installation was nominally complete.(2,3) The overall plan was for the powerstation to be built adjacent to the Government Printing Office in William St, whence it could conveniently supply direct current at 110 volts (nominal) to the Printing Office and, via underground mains, to the nearby House of Assembly (Fig. 1А), In December 1884 lighting uf the Legislative Coun- 182 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM -] PARLIAMENTARY BUILDINGS PARLIAMENTARY BUILDINGS [1989] p a OF mà: ALICE STREET Б d Canea JLT 1 иш 1989] gocce "ЫЫ TR Pe ~ (E ALICE STREET Ма. MARGARET STREET MARGARET STREET STREET = һу = Ny ФФ 7 = = 5 & I a oe [1 -J | g g g d [е] > ^ = m POWER | c 9 STATION |’ & eor ж ж s o9 E F2 ov * +4. ot m o m | 59 ' o PRINTING ы PRINTING = OFFICE OF FICE STEPHENS LANE STEPHENS LANE FEET @ г T — | 0 50 100 К FIG. 1. A, route of the Edison two-core underground mains from the powerstation to the central tower of the Parliamentary buildings, 1884. (Approx. 1350ft). B, route of the Edison two and three-core underground mains from the powerstation to the cellar underneath the extension of the Parliamentary buildings, 1892 and later (approx. 1280ft). (Legend: — Route indicated by cable locater, SEQEB drawing 12261 A1, 1993; = Site of excavations 1989, 1992; -.- Route shown on D.A.S, drawing (Fig. 8); ..... Route otherwise assumed). cil Chamber was added to the contract. The agents, Messrs Alfred Shaw and Co. The steam electrical part of the installation was to be the plant and the sets of belt drives to the dynamos responsibility of the Edison Co.'s Queensland меге їо be supplied by Messrs William Adams of FIRST UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL MAINS IN BRISBANE FIG. 2. Components of the Edison underground mains (street tube) two-core system. A, the ends of two street tubes (A) joined by a junction box (B); B, an clbow joint box (C) used for turning the mains at 90°, The Street tubes were supplied in 15 and 20ft lengths, In the three-core system, the internal connections are similar to those for В. Brisbane with the Government Printer respon- sible for the administration of the contract.(1,3) The statement by Morwood(4) that the mains were locally made and laid in 1886 is incorrect as is that by L'Estrange(5) that the second installa- tion in 1892 was designed by E.G.C. Barton the part-time Government Electrician. At least until 1894, Barton was responsible for the installation and use of the three-core mains and the main- tenance and use of the two-core mains, Both mains (Fig. 2) were designed and manufactured by the Edison Co. in the United States. They were bought from Edison's agents in London with one exception - Barton did apparently manufacture one length of cable in 1892, A memo(6) of 3 June 1892 records a voucher for the payment to Bar- ton, White & Co. of £5-11-10 for *Parliamentary Buildings New Wing, making 20ft new main’. It is probable that this length of cable was used at one of the terminations of the mains; that i1 was the only length of three-core cable seen by Mor- wood or L'Estrange or both; and that this led to the belief that the whole of the three-core mains installation was of local manufacture, DESCRIPTION OF MAINS Two-CORE MAINS The first mains were of the two-core type and were laid tn 1884 from the powerstation site, along William St, across Alice St to the tower 183 block of the Parliamentary building.(2,3) The estimated route length is 1350ft. based on the assumed change in direction (Fig. | A) at Margaret St, and clearance from future Parliamentary Buildings. The mains were not used regularly until 1886. Nocopy of the order for these has been found but an invoice(7) dated 15 August 1884 from the Edison Co. in London gives details (Fig. 3). Thus there was provision for over 1500ft of mains. Contemporary publications give details of these Edison tubes; the U.S.A. patent for the two-core mains was applied for(8) in 1881 (Fig. 4); Wormell(9) in 1893 listed 10 different sizes. including the ‘No. 3° used in the Brisbane instal- lation; and sections of all ten sizes are given in an 1882 engineering publication.(10) The No. 3 size used copper conductors, each with a cross-section 0.206 sq. inches and tube diameter (probably external) of 2 1/4 inches.(9) It seems likely that the two-core mains supplied to Brisbane were made by the Edison Electric Tube Co., 65 Washington St, New York, the manager being John Kruesi who had been responsible for developing underground mains for Едіѕоп.(1 1) The Edison tube works was moved from Washington St to Bridge St, Brooklyn, N.Y. in the northern spring of 1884(12). Thus the Bris- bane material must have been manufactured at the Washington St factory. Although no direct documentary evidence has been sighted, wc presume that the material was shipped from Lon- don in 1883. The street tubes were mentioned but not included in the original tender but presumably ordered later. There is documentary evidence that the installation of the cable was to be completed by mid-June 1884. Hyson(13) referred to early installations of two-core Edison mains in “Lon- don, Milan, Brisbane, New York and other U.S. cities’. If this is taken literally, the Brisbane in- stallation was the only one in the Southern Hemi- sphere. It 25 likely that material used in Brisbane was surplus to requirements in London, perhaps having been sent there i 1882, It was the year(14) that the Holborn Viaduct installation was completed in London using the same two- core system. This was soon followed by their first Electricity Lighting Act, which effectively halted any further such developments until it was repealed in 1888. The Act had empowered municipalities to take over such installations without compensation after 21 years. Under soch conditions, the Edison Co. in London would have Ue Conanin of С Areeaad leno uel enit of «Mest ditor Braye HOP MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM LHO Uregnreittow Avenue now August He ABEL Y ети Рибата ООА ГУ? дому Дне 43 JU 2) ДУ, boxed T M throu! " ‚ пи ОШ ed fore v © а! Санде ths Chad brait tala 96 x 1 fefto Abs UT ling forjowt tel Л ма ата Da hing ee S э = „ „уг 20 227 sahi IWA Utes Brix 170 Э ва эги» couse Jr m FIG. 3. The 1884 invoice for the supply of the two-core mains and accessories. been pleased to fill the order from Brisbane with material that it may have had in stock since 1882. The excavation for the mains in William St and restoration of the road surface were arranged by the Chief Engineer’s Office of the Brisbane Municipal Council following approval by the Council in April 1884. Tenders were called and the contract awarded to J. Devenish for the sum of 17 shillings and 9 pence per chain. Work was to commence on 22 May 1884 and to be com- pleted in 20 working days. The excavation, *near- ly 18 chains of trench’, was to be 12 inches wide and deep and at every 15 or 20 feet a space 18 inches by 18 inches by 18 inches deep’ was to be excavated for junction boxes.(15) From this and instructions for refilling the trench after the mains were laid, it is clear that trenching, installation and testing work must have been coordinated. Presumably J.W. Snow, an American electrician, who had been nominated as the Edison Co. rep- resentative and, who was resident in Brisbane at the time, would have been responsible for defin- ing the route, giving the locations of the junction boxes and finally installing the mains. Snow died in Brisbane in September 1884 before the powerstation was completed. No plan of the route has been found other than the Department of Public Works drawing for part of the Parliamen- tary building. The specification refers only to William St and there is no reference to changes FIRST UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL MAINS IN BRISBANE T, A, EDISON, UNDEROBOVND CONDUTOR: Patented Dao, 27, 1881. No. 261,562. FIG. 4. Part of a diagram of the two-core mains taken from Edison's U.S, Patent. in direction. A penalty for delay in completing the road work was to be met by Devenish at 5 pounds per week so it is probable that the contract was completed 1n the 20 days allowed, viz. in June 1884. The mains had been selected to meet the in- tended lighting of the House of Assembly with 150 lamps and the calculated voltage drop in the mains (neglecting joints) is about 10 volts. The lighting of the Legislative Council Chamber added 50 lamps giving a calculated drop of about 13 volts. A report on the installation by a consult- ant in 1886 stated that ‘the street mains conduc- tors are of too small a cross-section for their purpose' and that for a generated voltage of 115 the received voltage was 92. The report stated that the lamps were for the latter voltage;also that the cost of adding another street main so as to reduce this drop would be 350 to 400 pounds.(2) There is a conflict between this value of voltage drop and the above calculated value. Further, a report by E.G.C. Barton in 1890, after about 100 lamps had been added to the 1886 installation gave a voltage drop of 25 for a current of 200 amps. (16) Inconsistencies may be due to the resistance of unsoldered connections in the system and/or er- rors in measurements, However, the few joints in the mains which we have seen to date appear to have been well soldered. THREE-CORE MAINS Because of the voltage drop problem, the Government Printer had been requesting an addi- tional set of mains for some years when in July 185 1891, with the extensions to the Parliamentary buildings in progress, a specification was prepared by the Department of Works on a basis of doubling the cross-section of the mains and thus halving the voltage drop for the same cur- rent. The specification reads as follows: ‘The contractor is required to provide 420 yards of Edison's three-wire street tubing in 15ft or 20ft lengths. Resistance of 420yds to be with all wires bunched in parallel, about 0. 03 ohms, so that a current of 280 amperes will experience a drop of about 8 volts. The tubing is to be provided with the required number of couplings and junction FIG, 5. Some of the material from the two-core mains, as found in Brisbane, A, a section of the Edison cable, showing how the copper conductors, with pasteboard separators held in place by a thin cord, were contained in an iron tube, filled with insulating compound; B, the junction box showing the method of joining the conductors to allow for thermal expansion or contrac- tion of them; C, the elbow joint box - conductors here are atypical with a single-core multistrand cable joined to the older two-core system after the latter was used as the return circuit of the upgraded system in 1892. Scale is given by the 2 inch iron tubes, IHG FIG. 6, Some of the material from the Edison three-core mains. A, а sectioned length of cable showing the use ot spiral rope, both to insulate and separate the con- ductors; B, the various parts of a junction Бох show- ing the use of flexible multistrand cable to join the conductors; C, the various parts of an elbow joint box, Scale is given by the 2 inch iron tubes. boxes, including threc right-angle junction boxes, also sufficient bitumen (for tropical climate) to fill all junction boxes. An extra amount of 2cwt required above that sufficient for the new main'.(17) The indent was placed in London by the Agent General for Queensland with the Brush Electrical Engineering Co, who held the Edison patents for the Colony, for one pound per yard. The mains were delivered in Brisbane in Novem- ber 1891.(18) Each conductor is now known to be 0.12 sq. inch which agrees reasonably with that implied by the specification, Hence the three-core mains had a total area of 0.36sq,inch compared with that of the two-core mains of 0.41sq. inch. The usc of thrce-core mains by the Edison Co. in New York in late 1882 followed the introduc- tion by Dr John Hopkinson in that year in England of the three-wire d.c. system.(11) It was a means MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM of decreasing the voltage drop in the distribution system while still supplying approximately 110 volts to consumers. Thus the two-core system became nbsolete. On 8 December 1891, approval was given by the Department of Public Works for the laying of the new mains between the Printing Office and the Parliamentary buildings by day work 'under the personal supervision of the Government Electrician [E.G.C. Barton], as it ts of the first importance that this work should be most satis- factorily carried out. Prices might be obtained for opening and closing of the trench along the streets at per chain’ (17) The new mains were to be laid alongside the old mains.(19) There is an intrigu- ing request(20) by the Colonial Secretary for ‘the return of the excess of 31ft supplied over that ordered’, This is apparently in conflict with the evidence already given that Barton built another length of cable for the system. However, it seems more probable that both documents indicate changing ideas about the detail of the installation as work progressed. Whereas the extra cable may have been in excess of requirements initially, the later decision to extend the underground mains around the powerstation would probably have been based on the availability of this material. The work was completed by May 1892 after some delays for lack of components and materials needed for the completion of the three-core mains between the powerstation and the cellar in the Parliamentary grounds adjacent to the Alice St gates, Also, rerouting of the two-core mains both at the powerstation and near the Alice Stentrance to the new building was needed.(21) Details of the extra material needed are seen in some of the archival material sighted. In early March, 1892, a request(21) was made for authority to cover some of the expenditure. "The 6 sets of small junction boxes and 5 sets of Ends, where (sic!) required for the extension of the old Electric Light Main and to make good broken parts. The 3 sets of Large Junction Boxes where (sic!) required for extending the New Main round the Engine Room... An added note by the supervising ar- chitect says that “The fittings referred to were necessary and urgently required to complete the connection of the old and new electric mains with the dynamo at the printing office’. The estimated route Jength is 1280ft (Fig. 1B) based on the assumed transition at Margaret St, Considerable work must have been done on the old mains, for as well as the extra (wo hundred- weight (224165) of insulating compound ordered with the new material(17) another request(22) FIRST UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL MAINS IN BRISBANE was made in February 1892 for a further supply - ‘the supply of Asphaltum will need replenishing às the supply sent with the mains has been used up and another cask will have to be obtained from Sydney where the Callender Bitumen Company would I believe be the proper people to apply to.' An added note says that the cost of this would not exceed 40 shillings. No doubt ij was Barton's decision that, when installed. the three cores should be used as one pole and the two cores of the first mains bonded to provide the other pole of the new arrangement. It was reported that one of the cores of the new mains would supply the new wing of the Parliamentary buildings, another the Assembly and the third the Council Cham- ber.(23) There was a complaint that turning off the Council lamps caused a general flickering of the Assembly lamps for some minutes. The proposed remedy was to turn off the Council lamps from the powerstation switchboard by means of the available separate circuit; presumably the station voltage could then be quickly adjusted.(24) The first trial of the new lighting in the extended buildings in June 1892 showed that the station voltage of 115 was reduced to 94 volts. Thc recorded current was 240 amps corresponding 10 about 400 lamps.(23) The calculated value of the feceived voltage based on conductor sizes is ap- proximately 100 so the result must have been disappointing particularly to Barton in his dual role as part-time Government Electrician and contractor for the lighting of the new wing. Throughout the many years of operation of the lighting system, the only solution to acceptable lighting in the many rooms of these buildings was to select Jamps of lower yoltage for the Par- liamentary buildings than for the Printing Office. Deciding what voltage lamp should be put in what part of the building and what combination of lights should be turned on at a given time must have been a constantly recurring problem, To illustrate this it is relevant to note that in June 1892 Barton requested replenishment of lamps used in the Parliamentary buildings quoting ex- isting stocks of lamps of voltages 92, 96, 98 and 110, In the previous year there was an indent to ‘provide 100 Edison lamps with screw sockets, 16 candle power, 110 volts, also 150 Edison lamps, screwed sockets, 16 candle power, as- sorted 93, up to 98 volts" (17) MATERIAL RECOVERED Prior to the publication by onc of us (S.A.P.) (3) 187 FIG. 7, The 1992 excavation of part of the mains in Willram Street in progress. The elbow joint boxes are seen in the foreground. The straight junction boxes are not yet exposed at the further end of the trench. The tall building in the background is the modem (1980s) extension to the Parliamentary Buildings. The sharply pitched roof of part of the 1892 exten- sions is just visible above the tree-Tinc. of a history of Edward Barton - the engineer whose name is most closely associated with this installation - we had not sighted intact samples of the underground mains or joints. The constnuc- tion details were assumed to have been those . given in а paper by the late F.R. L'Estrange, Consumers' Engineer, Southern Electric Authority of Queensland, who had presumably examined the disused mains.(5) The construction due to L` Estrange was reproduced on the assump- tion that it was correctly represented.(3) In November 1986 а short damaged length of the two-core mains and a damaged three-core junction box with part of à three-core mains were discovered by the Queensland Museum at the old powerstation site (adjacent to the Government Printing Office). This showed that the conductor arrangements illustrated in the above two refer- ences were approximately correct. However, details of the insulation were not clear. Details of 188 ADOTION TI PASHAMEITT HOUSE «seo. WINECELLAR "imer SECTHIC US ig tavit | үт! [чуку ТЛ ЇЧ IA МЕЕ? Бити TD goueno иам ST SLORY TIC ТО FARUAMENT REAME (es ti Е „ә FIG, 8. Detail from part of a drawing (Dept. of Admin, Services, No. SH727, undated) showing the route of the two and three-core mains in the vicinity of the Alice Street entry to Parliament House and the entry to the wine cellar (see Fig. 9). the three-core junction box and the internal flexible connectors were in agreement with those in a contemporary publication.(25) Tn June 1989 two short lengths, one of cach type of mains and evidently from the original installa- tions, Were uncovered and removed during an excavation by the Department of Works several feet inside the Alice St gateway to the Parliamen- tary buildings. The two mains were found at the same depth about 10 inches apart, but circumstances did not permit the recording of full details. Four foot lengths were sawn off, and it was clear that both cables had been previously roughly severed many years before at the Parliament House end - only a few feet from the steps up to the passageway, which has replaced a previous carriageway at this point, (Thus any remaining cable within the building area (Fig. 8) is now a further few feet under the fill used here.) The conductor details were in agreement with the pieces recovered earlier but the insulation details differed considerably from those con- cluded by L'Estrange.(5) Possibly the sections described by him related to terminations but not to the general run of the mains. As noted pre- viously, he may have seen only the one piece of three-core mains that had heen manufactured by Barton, The construction of the two-core mains agrees with that described in a patent application by Edison in 1881 (Fig. 4).(8) A contemporary textbook summarises details of the mains and junction boxes as follows: '.... the conductors were copper rods whose cross- MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM sections were segments of circles. These were placed in wrought-iron tubes filled with insulat- ing material and having on the outside tarred nbbons wrapped around them to prevent the oxidation of the iron. To hold the copper in posi- tion, perforated paste-boards were arranged at intervals. These conducting tubes were manufac- tured in lengths of 20ft and connected to cach other [by junction boxes]. The copper bars protruded about 2in. from every tube and were connected by means of U shaped pieces so as to allow of the expansion and contraction of the metal;the whole was covered up by a cast iron box filled with insulating matter. (9) The construction of the two-core mains, revealed by our further study of them, agrees with this description (Fig. 5) except for one detail;we have looked for, but not found, evidence of the wrapping of the outside surface of the tubes with tarred ribbons. The three-core mains are also described in a contemporary periodical.(26) ‘The conductors or core of the tube are copper rods which are drawn into convenient lengths so that in the first instance each can have a layer of thin rope twisted around, and afterwards the three rods are similarly treated and placed in the wrought iron tube which resembles a gas pipe. The outer windings of the spiral come into contact with the inside of thc tube and a liquid insulating material is then poured in which flows along the spiral convolutions of the cord thoroughly saturating them, and insulates the conductors from each other and from thc tube... A pair of clamps are fixed on the end of the length of pipe, and furnishes it with a ball end, which rests into a hollow in the coupling hox with the double object of making the joint and allow- ing a certain amount of elasticity, which is check- ed hy the rib of the coupling box. To allow for expansion, the connections in the box are of stranded coppercd (sic!) wire preferably of higher resistance than the copper in the mains so that the heat developed will cause the insulating material with which the box is filled to be softened.' Another contemporary descriprion states that the flexible connections are screwed to the mains by means of sel screws running through copper cast- ings on their ends, ‘After the connectors are in place they are thoroughly soldered to the ends of the mains thus making the electrical joint. The covering of the egg-shaped casting is screwed down upon the lower half;and by means of a small hole in the top of the casting, the whole of the box is filled full of melted insulating compound, thus forming an absolutely watertight joint.(25) FIRST UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL MAINS IN BRISBANE FIG, 9. A computer-enhanced photograph, taken from ап original held by SEQEB, of the remains of both the two- core and the three-core systems emerging from the wall of the cellar of Parliament House (cf, Fig. 8). These were destroyed during the 1980s renovations of this building. Details of the recovered tubes and fittings are in agreement with the foregoing descriptions. They are illustrated in (Fig. 6). Missing from the earlier discoveries were a two-core junction box, a complete three-core junction box and two and three-core elbows. In- terest in completing the array of components led to agreement by the South East Queensland Electricity Board (SEQEB) to undertake a search for the original mains in William St using a locat- ing device which detects underground metal pipes. In January 1992 a likely site for the mains and elbows was discovered adjacent to the site of the original powerstation. An excavation exposed lengths of both types of mains, both types of junction boxes and both types of elbows, all vir- tually undamaged (Fig. 7).(27) Although there are some corrosion problems with the cast iron material, it is in surprisingly good condition after spending a century in such a shallow location underground. Undoubtedly we. have been fortunate that this street was never chosen as a route for Brisbane's extensive electric tramways system. One unexpected result of the 1992 excavation was the discovery that the cable running from the two-core elbow joint box, where the mains turned at 90° towards the powerstation, was not a two- core cable bul a lead-sheathed, paper insulated 189 stranded copper conductor com- prising 37 strands of 12SWG wire to form a single return circuit. This was proof of the bonding of the two-core cable conductors to form a single return line. The archival material reveals (28) that one 20ft length of cable was replaced in 1894. It ts reasonable to assume that the length replaced was this onc. The insulating compound used in these mains is said(12) to have been a mixture of refined Trinidad lake pitch, oxidised (with lead oxide) linseed oil, beeswax and paraffin wax - a combination that was decided upon after an exhaus- tive search for the best available insulating compound by Edison's team in 1881. Chemical details of insulating materials will be reported elsewhere but the main points are: firstly, a confirmation of the documentary source of most of the materials used; secondly, there is a consistent difference in viscosity of the compound between the earlier and the later systems - the two-core tubes contain a significantly more viscous compound than the three-core tubes; and finally, there are differences in the compound used in the several junction boxes studied. The latter differences are consis- tent with the compound used to fill the junction boxes having come from different sources, as already noted. ROUTE OF MAINS No complete record of the route of the mains has been found. Known and assumed details (Fig, 1А.В) have been obtained from documentary evidence, the 1989 and 1992 excavations and the SEQEB field survey(27). For much of the route the three-core installarion apparently paralleled that of the original two-core mains. However, both at the powerstation end, and al the Parliament House end, the two-core system had different terminations, most of the details of which are now Jost. For the Parliament House end we have some details of the 1892 terminations in a drawing and т a photograph. A Department of Public Works (now Administrative Services) drawing No, 59727 (undated) shows the roule of the twò types 190 FIG. H0. A "Harper's Weekly” illustration of the laying of the original Edison underground mains in New York, U.S.A. These supplied electricily over à square mile of Manhattan from the Pearl Street generating station in 1882. of mains near the point of recovery of short lengths in 1989 and also the entry into a cellar within the Parliamentary buildings area, adjacent to the Alice St gates (Fig. 8). The entry is shown in a 1936 photograph (Fig.9), held by the SEQEB Historical Records. Nothing remains of these ter- minations: they were taken out and discarded when the walls of this cellar were relined during MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM the major re-furbishment of Parliament House in 1982. Neither the foreman-in-charge . nor the supervising architect ` has been able to supply any useful details of these cables. , However, it seems likely that elbow joints for both the two- core and three-core system | remain behind the cellar wall, The ground outside the cellar (the original carriageway) was not disturbed during the build- ing work. Interpretation of the com- puter enhanced photograph (Fig. 9) appears to add little of substance. The termination of ihe three-core system was completely lost by the time of , the photograph - the ropes used for insulating the separate con- ductors can clearly be seen. | However, for the two-core sys- > tem something of the terminal т arrangement appears to remain. The structure clamped or soldered to the ends of the two-core mains appears to rep- resent part of the fitting used to bond these mains to the inter- o nal wiring. But the detail is too ~ unclear for further speculation. ^. The original route of the two-core mains evidently passed in the immediate vicinity of the site of the cellar у (part of the additions to the 4^ Parliamentary buildings) as there is a reference to rerouting the mains in 1892 to avoid this.(21) This is the only detail we have of the route of the original two-core mains in the grounds of Parliament House. The position of the original termination has not been iden- tified but there is a reference (2) to the main leads from these ‘street tubes’ as running ‘up the reporter's gallery stairs’, The latter are adjacent to the central tower of the building which then consisted only of the George St frontage. The positions of the excavations made in 1989 and 1992 (Fig. 1A,B) help to define the route, FIRST UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL MAINS IN BRISBANE much of which is based on a SEQEB survey using ап electronic locating device. It seems probable that the underground two-core mains originally terminated immediately inside the SW wall of the powerstation building and were continued to the dynamo room in surfacc wiring.(21) There appears to be no obvious reason for the route of the original mains changing from onc side of William St to the other. The discontinuity at Margaret St as shown by the locater and the indicated change in the route to the opposite side of William St there suggests that either elbows were inserted at Margaret St and some 24ft of the mains were thus transverse to the general run or else the mains may have been set to curves to suit the two changes of direction as indicated, The fact that only two elbows were listed in the invoice for the whole installation of the two-core mains sug- gests that the mains were set in the latter way. An artists impression of the laying of the street mains in New York in 1892 is given in Harper's Weckly (Fig. 10).(29) The specification for the excavation in William St for the two-core mains required an excavation depth of 12in, W.M.E. L'Estrange commented on the heat of the sun melting the bitumen out of the mains and on the ingress of moisture attributable to the depth of laying being too shallow.(3) A contemporary description of practice in New York gave the depth of laying as 2ft to 2ft бїп. and this is also suggested by Fig. 10. In confirma- поп of L'Estrange's comments, archival records indicate problems in the first several years of use of the two-core mains as it was stated in 1891 that advantage should be taken of the opening up of William St for the installation of the second mains to overhaul the earlier mains.(19) Location of faults due to breakdown of insulation or a defect in any of the several hundred conductor joints would have required extensive trenching. DISUSE OF MAINS AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENTS The mains were disused by March 1907 by which time the Parliamentary buildings were receiving supply from the Ann St powerstation of the City Electric Light Co. Ltd.(30) The company had replaced its original 110 volts direct current distribution system with a 220/110 volt three- wire direct current system some ten years ear- lier.(3) The type of mains discussed in this paper be- came оне as lead sheathing was substituted for iron pipes and long lengths were thus avail- 191 able by an extrusion process. Lead sheathed mains were jn use jn 1891,(31) In central Brisbane, in 1899, the first such mains were laid hy the Brisbane Electric Supply Со. Lid along footpaths in hardwood troughs and covered with bitumen. This company's succes- sor, the City Electric Light Co. Ltd. used 220/110 volt underground mains, installed in George Street, to supply the Parliamentary buildings (as mentioned above) and later the Printing Office. This advance in technology brings into sharp contrast the relative installation and maintenance costs as well as the improved reliability of the later as compared with the earlier types. Two years after the initial lighting of the Par- lramentary Buildings the first commercial supply of clectricity in Brisbane was given by a small newly-formed firm of electricians, Messrs Bar- ton, White and Со, (later Brisbane Electric Supp- ly Co. Ltd).(3,32, 33) They provided electric light for the General Post Office on 20 August 1883. Overhead lines were used to connect the generat- ing plant with consumers over the next eleven years, without formal approval. Thereafter the company was obliged to conform with the Queensland Electric Light and Power Act of 1896 which required all mains to be underground. It was not until 1917 that overhead distribution mains were accepted, thus hringing electric light- ing to the streets of Brisbane thirty five years after the first demonstration m Queen St.(3) CONCLUDING COMMENTS The Queensland Government must be credited with the initiative and foresight which resulted in the Edison Co—s representative in Brisbane ob- taining an order to light partially the Government Printing Office in April 1883, using the Edison system. This was followed immediately by the representative securing an order to light Parlta- ment House using Edison equipment, except for the steam plant driving the dynamos. Edison had succeeded in factory production of both dynamos and incandescent lamps hy 1879. To complete the development, a system of dis- tribution, to connect the powerstation with the consumers, was necessary. The first patent for the two-core Edison street tubes was filed in 1881; and in 1882 working systems using these street tubes were installed and operating in both New York and London. Brisbane was not far behind: considering the slower communications nf thc period, itis reasonable to argue that Brisbane was in the forefront of electric lighting, 192 This early Brisbane installation helped indirect- ly to promote electric lighting as a community need rather than a novelty and thus created a demand for public supply, the name of Barton being linked with all but the earliest phases. The high cost and inferior reliability of electric light- ing compared with gas lighting at this stage was offset against the absence of heat and fumes. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS We thank the State Department of Administra- tive Services for providing early drawings of the relevant buildings and services and for their as- sistance with the initial recovery of the mains. We are also indebted to the The South East Queensland Electricity Board for undertaking in 1992 the identification of the route of the mains in William St, for recovering complete sections of these and for providing photographs, Permis- sion from the Victorian State Library for reproduction of the illustration from Harper’s Weekly is gratefully acknowledged, LITERATURE CITED 1. Queensland Parliamentary Papers, (V&P, LA). 1884, Report on the electric lighting of the par- liamentary buildings. 2. Queensland Parliamentary Papers, (V&P,LA). 1886. Report on accident to the electric light. 3, Prentice, S.A. 1988, Edward Barton, 1858-1942, pioneer electrical engineer. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 27(1): 1-110. 4. Morwood, J.E. 1968. History of electricity supply in Brisbane. Institution of Engineers, Australia, рер Division Technical Papers 9(9):1- 5. L'Estrange, F.R. 1954. Brisbane's early electricity supply. Post Office Historical Society, Australian гой Institute, Queensland Division, 8 July 1954, 6. Queensland State Archives, WOR A Bundle 356, 1449, 1892. 7, Queensland State Archives, COL A 4651, 1886. 8. T.A. Edison USA patent for underground mains, No 251552, 27 Dec 1881. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 9, Wormell, R. 1893, “Electricity in the service of man’. (Cassell and Co.: London). 10. The Engineer, 20 Jan. 1882. 11. Friedel R. & Israel, P. 1986. ‘Edison's electric light’, (Rutgers University Press: New Jersey). 12. Tselos, G.D, 1992, (Archivist, National Parks Ser- vice, United States Dept. of the Interior), pers. comm. 1992. 13. Hyson, С. 1974. Power cables: Ancient and DACH electronics and power, June 1974: 450- 453. 14, Black, В.М. 1972. ‘Electric cables in Victorian times’, A Science Muséum Booklet. (Н.М, Stationery Office: London). 15. Queensland State Archives, Brisbane Municipal Council Contracts, 1883/4, BR1/T2. 16. Queensland State Archives, WOR A Bundle 356, Report 15 Dec. 1890. 17. Queensland State Archives, 5108, 1891. 18. Queensland State Archives, 3822, 1891, 19, Queensland State Archives, 4155, 1891. 20. Queensland State Archives, 3977, 1891, 21. Queensland State Archives, 717 and 1409, 1892. 22. Queensland State Archives, 516G, 1892. 23. Brisbane Courier, 7 June 1892. 24. Queensland State Archives, WOR A Bundle 356, 92/302, 1892. 25. Abbott, A.V. 1898. ‘The electrical transmission of energy’ (D.Van Nostrand Co.: London). 26. The Engineer, 21 Nov. 1884. 27. Simmers, J.M. 1992, Edison tubes down under. Electrical Engineer, Sept. 1992. 28. Queensland State Archives, WOR A Bundle 356, 1715, 1894, 29. Harper's Weekly, 24 June 1882: pp. 393—394. 30. Letter from City Electric Light Co. Ltd to Treasury dated 5 March 1907. Queensland State Archives, WOR A 6999, 1910. 31. Callender, J.O.189]. Underground electric mains. Proceedings of the Electrical Association of New South Wales 7. 32. Becconsall, B.J, 1992. Electric lighting in Brisbane - the first decade, 1882—1892. Institution of En- gineers, Australia, Queensland Division Techni- cal Papers 33(4): 1-12. 33. Simmers, J.M. 1992, Electric lighting in Brisbane - the first decade 1882-1892. Institution of En- gineers, Australia, Queensland Division Techni- cal Papers 33(5): 13-24, NOTES ON SOME INDO-PACIFIC UPOGEBIIDAE WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF FOUR NEW SPECIES (CRUSTACEA : THALASSINIDEA). NGUYEN NGOC-HO Ngoc-Ho, М. 1994.06 01: Notes on some Indo-Pacific Upogebiidae with descriptions of four new species (Crustacea: Thalassinidea). Memoirs ef the Queensland Museum 35(1): 193- 216. Brisbane. ISSN 0079-8835 Eleven species of Upogebiidae from New Guinea, New Caledonia, Kenya, Madagascar, Japan, Taiwan, Singapore and Vietnam have been studied. Four are new: Gebiacantha multispinosa, G. lifuensis, Upogebia sakaii and U. spinimanus. The seven additional species include: Gebiacantha laurentae Ngoc-Ho, Upogebia narutensis Sakai, U. pugnax de Man, U. savignyi (Strahl), U. wuhsienweni Yu, Wolffogebia inermis Sakai, W. phukerensis Sakai.[_]Crustacea, Thalassinidea, Upogebiidae, new species, Indo-Pacific, taxonomy. Nguyen Ngoc-Ho, Muséum national d'Histoire naturelle, Laboratoire de Zoologie- Arthropodes, 61 rue de Buffon, 75005 Paris, France; 10 February 1993, This work provides further information about the rich upogebiid fauna of the Indo-Pacific (de Man,1927,1928; Poore & Griffin,1979; Sakai,1982; Ngoc-Ho,1990). Collections ex- amined come from: New Guinea (Gebiacantha laurentae Ngoc-Ho); New Caledonia (G. multi- spinosa sp.nov., G. lifuensis sp. nov., Upogebia pugnax de Man); Kenya (U. savignyi (Strahl); Madagascar (U. spinimanus sp. nov.); Japan (U. sakaii sp. nov.). Singapore (Wolffogebia phuketensis Sakai); Taiwan (U. narutensis Sakai, U. wuhsienweni Yu), and Vietnam (W. inermis Sakai) The latter species was previously known only from the holotype which cannot be located. Its examination, together with that of W. phuketensis, adds generic features of Wolffogebia unmentioned by Sakai (1982). New material of Upogebia savignyi confirms its synonymy with U. rhadames Nobili (Sakai, 1982). The first available adult female of U. pug- nax described in this work gives further informa- tion about this species. U. narutensis and U. wuhsienweni, both reported for the first time from Taiwan, are very similar to each other and also to Taiwanese U. edulis Ngoc-Ho & Chan,1992. Measurements given (mm) in the descriptions are: carapace length (cl.) = tip of the rostrum to the posterior border of the carapace; total length (0.)= tip of the rostrum to the posterior border of the telson. Terminology of descriptions follows Ngoc-Ho (1981). ABBREVIATIONS USED: BMNH, British Museum (Natural History), London; MNHN, Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris; NNML, Nationaal Natuurhistorisch Museum, Leiden; NTOU, National Taiwan Ocean Univer- sity; ОМ, Queensland Museum, Brisbane; UMK, Universitetets Zoologiske Museum, Kobenhavn; USNM, U.S. National Museum, Washington, D.C.; ZSM, Zoologische Staatssammlung, Miinchen. SYSTEMATICS Family UPOGEBIDAE Borradaile, 1903 Gebiacantha Ngoc-Ho, 1989 Gebiacantha laurentae Ngoc-Ho, 1989 (Fig. 1) Gebiacantha laurentae Ngoc-Ho, 1989: 140, fig. 9. MATERIAL EXAMINED Sek Harbour, New Guinea, St. 62, 37m, mud with a little sand, W. Stephenson coll., 17.10.1969: 9, cl. 7.5mm, tl. 18. 5mm (QMW3317). DISTRIBUTION Indonesia (Makassar Detroit) and now Papua New Guinea. This record marks an easterly range extension. REMARKS The specimen examined agrees well with the female paratype of the species though it is slightly larger and has all spines comparatively more prominent. It also has 2 ventral spines on the 4th article of the antenna while the type has only one. The specimen is covered with mud and sediments although the area is dominated by soft corals and sponges (P. Davie, pers. comm.). Nothing is known of its ecology. 194 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM | / ў FIG 1. Gebiacantha laurentae Ngoc-Ho, female, QMW3317. А, anterior part of carapace, lateral view; В, first pereopod, mesial view. Scale line: 1mm. Gebiacantha multispinosa sp. nov. (Fig. 2) MATERIAL EXAMINED HOLOTYPE: New Caledonia: Loyalty Islands (Ouvéa), J.P. Menou coll., 16.11.1991, depth 6-10m: ovigerous 9 ,cl. 11.5mm, tl. 32.5mm (MNHNTh1255). PARATYPE: same data as holotype, ovigerous 9 : cl. 10.5mm, tl. 28.5mm (MNHNTh1256). ETYMOLOGY Referring to the numerous spines present on the body and pereopod 1. DESCRIPTION Rostrum triangular, projecting far beyond eyes, with 6-7 spiniform dorsal teeth on each lateral border; 3 large ventral spines. Fine and faint medio-dorsal groove (slightly dilated anteriorly) on rostrum and anterior part of gastric region, followed posteriorly by bare, unarmed, lon- gitudinal, low elevation. Lateral groove moderately broad, lateral ridge with 9-10 spiniform teeth or tubercles. Linea thalassinica distinct, extending to posterior border of carapace. Anterolateral border of carapace with 5-6 spinules. Anterolateral region of carapace (limited anteriorly and dorsally by anterolateral border and lateral ridge, posteriorly by linea INDO-PACIFIC UPOGEBIIDAE 195 FIG. 2. Gebiacantha multispinosa sp. nov., holotype, ovig. female, MNHNTh1255. A,B, anterior part of carapace, dorsal and lateral view; C, pereopod 1, external view; D, distal part of pereopod 1, mesial view; E,F, pereopods 2 and 3 respectively; С, telson and uropod. Scale line: 1mm. 196 thalassinica) with 2-4 spines and spinules. Cervi- cal groove deep, bearing 5 proximal spines and 2 distal spinules on either side. Epistome ter- minates dorsally in spinule. Telson approximately 1.4 times as broad as long, lateral borders convex, postero-lateral angles rounded, posterior border concave medial- ly, very faint inverted U-shaped carina on dorsal surface. Antennule, (Fig. 2B). First peduncular article with large ventro-distal spine. Antenna. (Fig. 2B). First, third and fourth peduncular articles with 1, 3 and 3 ventral spines respectively; second article with dorsal spine, scale terminating in 2 spinules. Pereopod і. Subcheliform. Ischium with ventral spine. Merus over 3.5 times as long as broad, bearing dorsal subdistal spine and 11-12 ventral spines. Carpus with finc longitudinal groove on upper part of external surface, ventral subdistal spine, 2 large mesial subdistal spincs, and 11-13 spines ar spinules along or near dorsal border. Propodus over twice as long as broad with spinules on proximal two-thirds of ventral mar- gin; external surface with small ventro-distal spinule between base of fixed finger and dac- tylus; mesial surface bearing roughly 6 lon- gitudinal rows of 8-10 spines, 4 lower rows distinct, upper 2 with spines more or less mixed up; large lower spine behind fixed finger, smaller upper one near base of dactylus; fixed finger about half as long as dactylus, hearing 2-3 small proximal teeth. Dactylus over half as long as propodus, with tubercles along upper border; cut- ting edge with small triangular flat tooth near mid-length; corneous tip. Pereopod 2. Merus over 5 times as long as broad, dorsal distal spine, 4-5 ventral spines and spinules. Carpus with ventral subdistal spinule and 6 spines along dorsal margin. Propodus ap- proximately rectangular, over twice as long as broad. 1-2 proximal dorsal spines. Pereopod 3. Metus over 5 times as long as broad, 5-6 ventral spines. Carpus with ventral distal spine. Propodus with faint longitudinal carina on lower half. Dactylus with comb-like setae on distal half of ventral border. Uropod. Exopod a little longer than telson, pesterior border nearly straight, not continuous with lateral external border; endopod ap- proximately triangular, protopod with spinule, TYPE LOCALITY New Caledonia (Loyalty Islands), 6- 10m. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM REMARKS This species is similar to G. lifuensis sp. nov. described below and both are similar to С. acan- thochela (Sakai, 1967) from Japan. The com- parison is made under G. lifuensis. Gebiacantha lifuensis sp. nov. (Fig. 3) MATERIAL EXAMINED HoLorvPE:New Caledonia: Loyalty Islands (Ouvéa), J.P, Menou coll., 16.11.1991, depth 6-10rn: ovigerous 9 .cl. 11.5тт. tl. 33mm (MNHNTh1257). ETYMOLOGY From the type locality, Loyalty Islands. DESCRIPTION Rostrum approximately oval, projecting far beyond eyes, bearing 6-8 spiniform teeth on cach convex lateral border; 4 large ventral spines, Short and faint medio-dorsal groove on rostrum; rounded tubercles in longitudinal rows on posterior part of rostrum, gastric region, and alongside lateral groove. Gastric ridge with 9-10 spiniform teeth, Anterolateral border of carapace with 5 spinules. Cervical groove distinct, shoulder lateral to it bearing spine near іпісгѕес- tion with linea thalassinica, latter extending to posterior border of carapace. Telson about 1.4 times as broad as long, lateral border convex, posterolateral angles rounded, posterior border concave medially, very faint in- verted U-shaped carina on dorsal surface. Antennule (Fig. 3B). First peduncular article with 1-2 ventral spines. Antenna (Fig. 3B), First, third and fourth peduncular articles carrying 1, 3 and 3 spines respectively; scale terminating in 2 spinules. Pereopod 1. Subcheliform. Ischium with ven- tral spine. Merus nearly 4 times as long as broad, with single upper subdistal spine: 6 spines and 2 spinules on lower border. Carpus with shallow longitudinal groove on external surface; ventral distal spine; 3 large subdistal spines (1 dorsal and 2 mesial); 8-9 smaller spines along, or near, dor- sal border. Propodus about 2.5 times as long as broad, with a few proximal tubercles on ventral border and large spine on distal third near base of fixed finger; dorsal border with row of 9 spines; mesial surface provided in addilion with 3 lon- gitudinal rows of 8, 4, 3 spines respectively from upper to lower, and subdistal spine near articule- tion with dactylus; fixed finger about half as long as dactylus, unarmed. Dactylus slightly over half INDO-PACIFIC UPOGEBIIDAE 197 FIG. 3. Gebiacantha lifuensis sp. nov., holotype, ovig. female, MNHNTh1257. A,B, anterior part of carapace, dorsal and lateral view; C, pereopod 1, external view; D, distal part of pereopod 1, mesial view; E, telson and uropod. Scale line: Imm. as long as propodus with smalltubercles on dorsal Порой approximately trapezoidal; protopod with | spinule. border, cutting edge unarmed. Uropod. Exopod a little longer than telson, posterior border almost straight, meeting nearly TYPE LOCALITY at right angle with external lateral border; en- New Caledonia (Loyalty Islands), 6- 10m. 198 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM TABLE 1. Differentiating characters between С. acanthochela Sakai, С. multispinosa sp.nov. and G. lifuensis sp.nov. Spines on antero-lateral region of carapace border of carapace Spines on lateral shouler of cervical groove Peduncle of a2: -spinules on 2nd article -ventral spines on 3rd article Pereopod 1 propod: -ext. spines btn base of fixed finger & dactyl -mesial spines -cutting edge of fixed finge Pereopod 1 dactylus: -cutting edge -upper border long - REMARKS This species is closely related to G. multi- spinosa captured at the same locality. It differs from the latter by: 1, shape of rostrum; 2, anterolateral region of carapace unarmed; 3, presence of single spine only on each lateral shoulder of cervical groove; 4, absence of small external distal spine on pereopod 1, between base of fixed finger and dactylus; 5, mesial surface of pereopod 1 with fewer spines; 6, fixed finger of pereopod 1 unarmed; 7, no tooth on cutting edge of pereopod 1 dactylus. Both G. multispinosa and G. lifuensis are similar to G. acanthochela (Sakai) from Japan in the length and shape of their uropods, the slight median concavity of their telson, the numerous mesial spines on pereopod 1 propod. Their dif- ferences are listed in Table 1. Upogebia Leach, 1814. Upogebia narutensis Sakai, 1986 (Figs 4; 5A-D) Upogebia spinifrons (Haswell, 1882): Sakai, 1984: 209, figs 1-3. Upogebia narutensis Sakai, 1986: 25, pl, 1. [ — — — [G&aeanthochella Кот jov — jwangwar oval = [Infrarostral spines — 2-3, small EN eee 3 convex convex straight 3 proximal tubercles tubercles along whole length [tubercles along whole length 1.5 times as broad as long 1.5 times as broad as long absent 4 rows, 3-9 spines each narmed MATERIAL EXAMINED HoLOTYPE: Naruto, Japan, M. Shimoizumi coll., date unknown: d , cl. 26mm, tl. 96mm (NNML36777). OTHER MATERIAL: Peng-Hu Island (West of Taiwan), T-Y- Chan coll., 1 October 1992: 1 d , cl. 19.5mm, tl. 60mm (MNHNTh1258); 1 d , cl. 19mm, tl. 59mm, 1 9 , cl. 18mm, tl. 58mm (MNHNTh1259); 1 З , cl. 19mm, 11. 58mm, 1 9? , cl. 18mm, tl. 57mm (MNHNTh1260); 2 d „сі. 18mm and 19mm, 11. 52mm and 58mm; 2 9 „сі. 17mm and 17.5mm, tl. 52mm and 53.5mm (NTOU). DESCRIPTION Rostrum egg-shaped, projecting far beyond eye, with 1-3 small proximal tubercles on either lateral margin and the rest unarmed; 5 small ventral spines. Deep medio-dorsal groove on rostrum and anterior part of gastric region. Few small tubercles on gastric region most of them alongside moderately broad lateral groove. Lateral ridge divided by weak mid-dorsal notch: anterior half very setose dorsally with proximal tubercle and 2 spines at tip; posterior half with 3-4 spiniform or tuberculiform teeth. Anterolateral border of carapace bearing 4 spines. Linea thalas- sinica distinct. Cervical groove deep and con- tinuous, shoulders lateral to it armed with INDO-PACIFIC UPOGEBIIDAE 199 FIG. 4. Upogebia narutensis Sakai, male, MNHNTh1258. A,B, anterior part of carapace, lateral and dorsal view; C, pereopod 1, external view; D, distal part of pereopod 1, mesial view, E, telson and uropod; F, pleopod 2. Scale line: 2mm. 200 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 5. А-О, Upogebia narutensis Sakai. A,B, female; C,D, male, MNHNTh1258, MNHNTh1259; E-H, Upogebia wuhsienweni Sakai. E,G,H, male; F, female, MNHNTh1265. A,F,G, pereopod 1, external view; B, H, distal part of pereopod 1, mesial view; C,D, pereopods 2 and 3 respectively; E, anterior part of carapace, lateral view. Scale line: 2mm. INDO-PACIPIC UPOGEBIIDAE spinules and tubercles. Arthrobranchs with а series of Jarge lamellae on either side of rachis. Telson approximately 1.3 times as broad as long, posterior margin slightly convex, very faint inverted U-shaped carina dorsally. Antennule (Fig. 4A). Peduncle unarmed. Anienna (Fig. 4A). Third peduncular article with small ventral subdistal spine, scale terminat- ing in blunt tip. Mandible. Without mesio-anterior tooth. Maxillipeds. | and 3 both with epipod. Pereopod 1. Subcheliform, sexually dimor- phic, much stouter in males. Ischium with 2-3 ventral spines. Merus with dorsal subdistal spine and 5-7 ventral spines. Carpus with large ventral spine; lower half of outer surface with lon- giludinal crest of more or less conspicuous spinules terminating with largest one; upper half with fine longitudinal groove; carpal dorsal mar- gin carrying 5-6 spines or spinules, and large dorsal subdistal spine at tip; 3-4 dorsal subdistal spinules external to the latter and large distal spine on upper half of mesial svrface, In males (Fig. 4C;D), palm of propodus about 1.5 times as long as broad at mid-length, broader distally; row of 12-20 spinules on dorsal margin; outer surface with ventral longitudinal row of strong round tubercles on distal half and large acute distal spine near lower base of dactylus; mesial surface bearing spinules on distal border with large distal spine near lower base of dac- tylus; fixed finger distal, nearly two-thirds as long as dactylus, cutting edge bearing large round tooth on external surface. Dactylus two-thirds as long as propodus with 2 proximal tubercles on dorsal border and shallow longitudinal dorsal groove on external surface; mesial surface with curved tuberculate dorsal crest and proximal round tubercles underneath; cutting edge with large proximal tooth and corneous tip. In females (Fig. 5A,B), palm of propodus ap- proximately 3.5 times as long as broad at mid- length and about as broad proximally as distally, unarmed except for row of 7 spinules on dorsal margin and external ventral distal spine between base of dactylus and fixed finger; fixed finger about one-fourth as long as dactylus, unarmed. Dactylus with corneous tip and shallow ton- gitudinal dorsal groove on external surface, cut- ting edge with 2 minute flat teeth. Pereopod 2, Merus with dorsal distal spine and 4-5 ventral spines, the 2 proximal of iin are large. Carpus bearing ventral and dorsal ви їзїї spine Pereopod 3, Merus camying 3 ventral spines and | or 2 transversal proximal rows of short setac. Males with genital openings on coxae of both Ы: and P5. Females with genital opening on соха of P3. Pleopod 2-5 (Fig. AF). Endopod approximately quadrate with weak longitudinal carina. Uroped. Latero-external and posterior margin of exopod, both slightly convex, meeting nearly ataright angle exteriorly, Latero-external margin of endopod with proximal shoulder terminating in large blunt tooth. Protopod with spinule hang- ing over base of endopod, DISTRIBUTION Naruto (Japan), Taiwan. REMARKS This. material fits very well with the description and figures given hy Sakai (1984, 1986) and also with the holotype examined, except for the mesial proximal tubercles of РІ dactylus that are mure prominent and numerous. The holotype of U, narutensis was once as signed to U. spinifrons (Haswell) (Sakai, 1984). Differences between the lwo were given by Sakai (1986). U. narulensis is also very similar to L. edulis Ngoc-Ho & Chan, 1992 as well as to U. wulisienwent Yu, 1931, all three reported from Taiwan. They all have the endopod of pleopods 2-5 in an unusual quadrate shape (Fig. 4F) which may exist in other species but have been over- looked by authors; it was not reported in the original description of U. edulis (Ngoc-Ho & Chan, 1992). U. narurensis resembles U. edulis by the un- armed anterior part of the gastric ridges, the stout- hess of the male pereopod | and the large tooth on the cutting edge of the dactylus. Itis similar to U. wuhsienweni inthe shape of the rostrum, in the male pereopod 1 bearing a large round tooth on the cutting edge of the distal fixed finger. It differs from both U. edulis and U. wulisienweni by the following features: 1, anterior half of the rostrum unarmed; 2, absence of a stridulating ridge on the propodus of the male pereopod 1; 3, latero-exter- nal margin of the uropod endopod with a large blunt tooth on the proximal shoulder. In these three species of Upogebia, female pereopeads 1 аге hardly distinguishable, That of L. narutensis can be differentiated by the shape of us popod which is as broad distally as proximally while 1 is narrower distally in D. edulis айа D. wuksienwert. Upogebia wuhsienweni Yu, 1931 (Fig. SE-H) Upogebia Wultsienweni Yu, 1931. 89, fig. 2, Upogebia wuhsienweni: Liu, 1955: 68, figs 7-12; Ngoc-Ho & Chan, 1992: 38, fig. 4; not Sakai, 1993: 92. figs 1. 2 (= U. edulis Ngoc-Ho & Chan). Upogebia (Upogebia) wuhsienweni: Sakai, 1982: 59 (in part, not figs 114, 12f-g, 13g-h, pls С1-2 and material USNM59070, 59071, 59072, 59073 {= Upogebia edulis Ngoc-Ho & Chan). MATERIAL EXAMINED How-Long, Northwestern Taiwan! 1 2 ,cl. 17mm, tl. 52mm; 9 , сі. 19.5mm, tl. 60mm (MNHNTh1265). DESCRIPTION Rostrum rounded anteriorly, projecting beyond eyes, bearing 5-6 spiniform teeth on cach lateral border, ventral surface with 3 spines. Gastric ridge divided by weak mid-dorsal notch: anterior half with 5-7 round teeth and spine at tip; posterior half with 4-5 teeth. Anterolateral border of carapace bearing 6-7 spines or spinules. Cer- vical groove deep, shoulders lateral to it armed with spinules and tubercles. Epistome terminat- ing in 2 spinules. Arthrobranchs with large lamel- lae on either side of rachis. Antennule (Fig.5E). Peduncle unarmed. Antenna (Fig. 5E). Third peduncular article with small ventral subdistal spine, scale terminat- ing in blunt tooth. Mandible. Without mesio-anterior tooth. Maxillipeds. 1-3 with epipod. Pereopod !. Subcheliform. Basis with sharp ventral spine. Ischium carrying 2-3 ventral spines. Dorsal subdistal spine and 6-7 ventral spines on merus. Carpus bearing longitudinal crest. on external lower half with more or less conspicuous spimules and terminating in spine; large ventral distal spine, large dorsal distal spine along with 3-4 dorsal external spinules, large distal spine near middle of mesial surface; dorsal margin with 1-2 spines, In males, propodus slightly broader disially than proximally with dorsal row of 8-9 spines and 8 spinules; external distal spines between base of dactylus and fixed finger; mesial surface bearing 2 proximal dorsal spines below dorsal row and slender elliptic stridulating ridge on ventral distal half; fixed finger distal, about one-third as long as dactylus, carrying large rounded extemal tooth near middle of cutting edge. Dactylus with cor- neous tip . shallow longitudinal dorsal groove on external surface; longitudinal oblique carina on MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM mesial surface alongside fine corneous one and a few round proximal tubercles. In female, propodus narower distally than proximally with dorsal row of 9 spines, external distal spine be- tween base of dactylus and fixed finger, fixed finger short, hardly one-fourth length of dactylus, unarmed. Dactylus with corneous tip and shallow longitudinal dorsal groove on external surface. DISTRIBUTION North China, Western Taiwan. This record marks a southerly range extension. REMARKS The present specimens from Taiwan agree closely with the material of U. wuhsienweni from China examined previously (Ngoc-Ho & Chan, 1992) with the following exceptions: the male pereopod | is more slender, being about twice as long as broad at mid-length and the female percopod | carries a distal external spine between the base of the dactylus and fixed finger, that is usually missing on Chinese specimens. U. wuhsienweni differs from U. edulis Ngoc- Ho & Chan by many characters (Ngoc-Ho & Chan, 1992) especially by the anterior half of its gastric ridges armed with spines, and these are clearly shown on the original figure given by Yu (1931: fig. 11A): in U. edulis, the same part of the gastric ridges is unarmed. All material assigned to U. wuhsienweni by Sakai (1982, 1993) but having an unarmed anterior half of the gastric ridges is likely to belong to U. edulis. Female pereapods 1 of U. wulisienweni and U. edulis are hardly distinguishable except for a sharp spine on the basis in the former species that is replaced by a blunt tooth in the latter. Upogebia pugnax de Man, 1905 (Fig. 6) Upogebia (Upogebia) pugnax de Man, 1905: 600: de Man, 1928:66, fig. B-8e, 8f; Sakai, 1982: 52 (in part, not fig. 11b, pl E4, Еб); not Sakai, 1984: 161 (= U. fallax de Man) and 1987: 302 (-Upogebia sakaii sp. nov.). Upogebia pugnax; Ngoc-Ho, 1990: 987, fig. 7; 1991: 305, fig. 10. MATERIAL EXAMINED New Caledonia: Loyalty Islands (Ouvéa), J.P. Menou coll., 18.11.1991, 9-1] m: 1 ovigerous © , cl, 10.5mm, tl. 31.5mm (MNHNTh1261). INDO-PACIFIC UPOGEBIIDAE 203 FIG. 6. Upogebia pugnax de Man., ovig. female, MNHNTh1261. A, anterior part of carapace, dorsal view; В, pereopod 1, external view; C, distal part of pereopod 1, mesial view. Scale line: Imm. DESCRIPTION Rostrum about as long as broad at base, over- reaching eyes, with 6 small teeth on either lateral border and slight median groove; proximal part of rostrum and anterior part of gastric region carrying round tubercles. Lateral groove moderately wide, lateral ridge with 10 teeth. Cer- vical groove deep, anterolateral border of carapace with spinule. Pereopod 1. Subcheliform. Ischium with 2 ventral spines. Merus over 3 times as long as broad with dorsal subdistal spine and 8 ventral spines. Carpus with ventral spine and spine near middle of dorsal margin; external surface with dorsal distal spine and spinule, mesial surface with large dorsal distal spine and another near middle of distal margin. Propodus over 3 times as long as broad, carrying spine near proximal third and large spine near middle of ventral margin, with smaller one beside the latter on external surface; upper border with 5 large spines; fixed finger approximately triangular, bearing small rounded teeth on cutting edge. Dactylus about two-third as long as propodus with corneous tip, upper border and cutting edge finely denticu- lated, faint longitudinal groove near upper border of external surface. Genital openings on coxae of both pereopods 3 and 5. Pleopod 1 present. DISTRIBUTION Indonesia (Sumbawa), New Caledonia (St Marie Island, Loyalty Islands) (significant southerly range extension). 204 REMARKS This is the first female reported for the species and tt agrees well with other described material (de Мап, 1928; Ngoc-Ho, 1990, 1991). It con- firms that the two specimens from New Caledonia described by Ngoc-Ho (1991) are malc. With male and female adults now known, the following characteristics of U. pugnax can be noted: |, Male pereopod 1 is dimorphic and can be “stout” or "slender ', the latter type being very similar to that of the female. The same has been reported in U, edulis Ngoc-Ho & Chan (1992); 2, Males and females possess genital openings on coxae of both pereopods 3 and 5; only females possess pleopod 1; 3, The holotype (see de Man. 1928; Ngoc-Ho, 1990) is а young male of 18.5mm total length and has a "slender" 1ype pereopod 1, Upogebia sakaii sp. nov. (Fig. 7) MATERIAL EXAMINED HoLorYPE: Japan (Usa - Іпоѕімиз, Kochi), K- Sakai coll., 20.5.1990, coarse sand, tidal zone: d ,cl.9.5mm, tl. 24.5mm (MNHNTh1262). PARATYPES: 1 d ,cl. 10mm tl. 22mm, 1 9? , cl. 9mm tl, 21,5mm (MNHNTRhI263); 3 с , cl. 9-11 mm, tl. 23-28mm; 4 2 , cl. 8,5-9.5mm, 11. 21-25mm (MNHNTh1264). ETYMOLOGY For Dr. К, Sakai who collected and donated this material. DESCRIPTION Rostrum sub-triangular, c. 1.2 times as long as broad at base, with 6 or 7 lateral spiniform teeth, slight longitudinal median groove; round tubercles on rostrum and anterior part of gastric region. Lateral groove moderately broad, lateral ridge with 9 or 10 teeth. Antero-lateral border of carapace with spinule. Cervical groove deep, linea thalassinica distinct, extending to posterior margin of carapace. Telson slightly shorter than 6th abdominal seg- ment, lateral border convex at proximal third, posterior border concave medially and about 2/3 as broad as proximal; very faint inverted U- shaped carina on dorsal surface. Arthrobranchs with one series of large tubular lamellae on either side of rachis, Antennule (Fig. 7B). First peduncular article with large ventral subdistal spine MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Antenna (Fig. 7B). Third peduncular article with large ventral subdistal spine; scale not demarcated from peduncle. terminating in spinule, | Mandible, With large antero-mesial tooth, Maxillipeds. 3 with small epipod. Pereopod l. Subcheliform, sexvally dimor- phic, stouter in males. Ischium with ventral spine. Merus 2.5 times as long as broad, bearing spine near distal quarter of dorsal margin, 7-10 ventral spines. Carpus with large ventral subdistal spine and spine near middle of dorsal margin; 3 dorsal distal (2 external, ] mesial) spines and large spine near middle of mesial distal margin. Propodus over Lwice as long as broad, with 5 large dorsal spines and large ventral spine behind fixed finger; external surface with tubercles on lower third and one or 2 spinules near large ventral spine; mesial surface bearing 1-2 dorsal subdistal spines, near upper part of articulation with dactylus; fixed finger, broad and short, cutting edge with rounded teeth over proximal two-thirds, Dactylus about two-thirds length of propodus carrying faint longitudinal dorsal groove on external sur- face, cutting edge dentate on proximal half, with low triangular tooth near middle; tip comeous. Female pereopod 1 with same spinulation as in males but more slender, merus and propodus about 3 and 2.5 times as long as broad respective- ly. Pereopod 2. Merus with subdistal dorsal spine; 2 proximal spines on ventral border. Carpus bear- ing subdistal dorsal and subdistal ventral spine. Dactylus with faint longitudinal dorsal groove. Pereopod 3. Merus with 3 ventral spines and a few tubercles on ventral margin. Subdistal ventral spine оп carpus. Dactylus with comb-like setae on ventral margin. Pereopod 4. Merus with 4-5 spiniform tubercles on ventral margin. Males are provided with genital opening on coxae of pereopod 5, females have openings on coxae of both pereopods 3 and 5. Large coxal spine on pereopod 1, smaller ones on percopods 2 and 3, TvPE LOCALITY Japan (Usa - Inoshiri, Kochi). REMARKS These specimens as well as others from Japan have been previously assigned to U. pugnax de Man (Sakai, 1982, 1987). This is probably be- cause de Man (1928) stated that the holotype of the latter species was a female but it is actually a INDO-PACIFIC UPOGEBIIDAE 205 A-B,D-G FIG. 7. Upogebia sakaii sp. nov. A-C, F, G, holotype, male, MNHNTh1262; D,E, female paratype, MNHNTh1263. A,B, anterior part of carapace, dorsal and lateral view; C, telson and uropod; D,F, pereopod 1, external view; E,G, distal part of pereopod 1, mesial view. Scale line: Imm. 206 male. In the present new species, the females are similar to the holotype of U. pugnax but males differ by many features. Two males of U. pugnax were described by Ngoc-Ho (1991) and an ovigerous female reported earlier in the present paper. U. sakaii and U. pugnax are very similar in the shape of the rostrum and the morphology and spinulation of all cephalic appendages. They differ hy the fol- lowing features: 1, epistome unarmed in U. sakaii but with a terminal spine in U. pugnax; 2, male pereopod 1 dimorphic in U. pugnax, 3, propod of male pereopod 1 distinctly broadened distally in U. айап; 4, in U. sakai, the fixed finger of pereopod 1 is very short and the cutting edge level with the propod-dactylus articulation; in U. pug- пах, the fixed finger is longer and the cutting edge projects beyond the propod-dactylus articulation; 5, U. sakaii has the dactylus of pereopod 1 with upper border unarmed or rarely denticulated proximally and with a low triangular tooth near the middle of the cutting edge; U. pugnax has the upper border completely denticulated and the cutting edge smooth; 6, telson with proximal border about 1.5 times broader than distal in U. sakaii but approximately the same in U. pugnax; 7, exopod of uropod with posterior margin slight- ly convex and postero-lateral corner rounded in U. sakaii; posterior margin more or less straight and mecting nearly at right angle with lateral margin in U. pugnax. Upogebia savignyi (Strahl, 1862). (Fig. 8) Gebia sp. Savigny, 1817: р1.9, figs 3/2-2°. Calliadne savignii Strahl, 1862: 1064. Upogebia ( Gebiopsis) rhadames Nobili, 1904: 235, Upogebia (Calliadne) savignyi. Nobili, 1906; 98; de Man, 1927: 5, fig. 1; 1928: 47 (key). Upogebia (Calliadne) rhadames: Nobili, 1906: 100; de Man, 1927: 6, pl.l, fig. 1; 1928: 47 (key), Sakai, 1975; 23, figs 6-8. Upogebia (Upogebia) savignyi: Sakai, 1982: 14.; 1984: 154. Upogebia (Upogebia) cargadensis: Sakat, 1982; 12 (in part, matenal from Kenya only, ZSM 1233/1 and ZSM 1233/2). MATERIAL EXAMINED North Kenya Banks, “Dr, Fridtjor Nansen" Cruise N° 1, Stn. 04, 16.2.1975, 02?30'8-40^56'E, 77m, in "green sponges": 1 д , cl. 12mm, il. 30mm; 4 2 (1 ovigerous, 1 without abdomen), cl, 11.5-13mm, tl. 29-30mm (BMNH1993: 31.5); 10 d , cl. 5-7.5mm; 2 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 9 , cl. 5.5-7mm (syntypes of U. rhadames Nobili, MNHNTh45)}, DESCRIPTION Rostrum sub-triangular. as long as broad al base, overreaching eye-stalk in male, shorter in female, with 6-8 small rounded tubercles on either lateral margin. Small round tubercles ori rostrum and раѕіпс region, with 23-25 on either gastric ridge; lateral groove long and narrow, Antero-lateral border of carapace unarmed; epis- tome rounded distally. Telson sub-quadrate, c. 1.5 times as long us sixth abdominal segment, posterior border and lateral posterior angles rounded. faint and fine inverted U-shaped carina on dorsal surface. Antennule and Antenna (Fig. SC). With un- armed peduncle; antennal scale very small. Maxillipeds. 1 (Fig. ВЕ), with exopod flattened distally bearing short and long setae, longer ex- ternally; 2 (Fig. 8G) with very small upright exopod; 3 without epipod. Pereopod 1. Cheliform. Merus about 2.5 times as long as broad, 11-13 ventral spinules, Carpus unarmed; propodus unarmed except for 7-8 small teeth on proximal half of cutting edge of fixed finger. Dactylus slightly more than half length of propodus, bearing two dorsal proximal spinifonn tubercles; mesial surface with longitudinal row of small round tubercles at mid-level and large, round proximal tooth near cutting edge, Pereopod 2. Carpus with ventral subdistal spinule. Uropod. Exopod slightly shorter than telson; posterior margin weakly convex; lateral angle rounded; proximal spine. Endopod trapezoidal. Basipod with posterior spine. DISTRIBUTION Sucz, Red Sea, Gulf of Aden, Persium Gulf, Kenya. REMARKS Examination of the present material and the syntypes of U. rhadames Nobili (MNHNTh45) agree with Sakai (1982) that these two species are synonymous. Also belonging to U. savignyi are specimens from Kenya (ZSM1233/1, 1233/2), assigned by Sakai first to I, rhadames (1975) and later to U. cargadensis Borradaile (Sakai, 1982 with selection of a neotype). This neotype selected from sample ZSM1233/2 was refuted by Ngoc-Ho (1991) as not fitting Borradaile's (1910) original description. INDO-PACIFIC UPOGEBIIDAE 207 233 o e n ^ ©, n a 0. FIG. 8. Upogebia savignyi (Strahl). A,C-E,H, male, tl. 30mm; B,F,G, female without abdomen, cl. 13mm, BMNH1993:31.5; A-C, anterior part of carapace, dorsal and lateral view; D, pereopod 1, external view; E, distal part of pereopod 1, mesial view; F, maxilliped 1; G, maxilliped 2; Н, telson and uropod. Scale line: Imm. There is some variation in U. savignyi: A, the triangular rostrum can be longer, equal, or shorter than the eye-stalk and is usually longer in males.; its tip can also be more or less pointed; B, in pereopod 1: ventral border of merus unarmed or with granules or denticles; carpus unarmed or with a ventral spinule; ventral border of propodus unarmed or with proximal denticles, dorsal bor- der (rarely) with a distal spinule; C, posterior border of telson more or less rounded. Diagnostic characters for the species are: 1, rostrum, gastric Tegion and gastric ndges with numerous small tubercles; 2, linea thalassinica hardly visible posterior to cervical groove; 3, peduncle of both antennule and antenna unarmed, 4, maxilliped 1 without epipod, with exopod flat- tened distally, bearing setae of two lengths (Fig. ВР); maxilliped 2 with small upright epipod (Fig, RG); maxilliped 3 without epipod; 5, Pereopod 1 cheliform; palm of propodus unarmed (with few exceptions), fixed finger with small teeth on proximal half of cutting edge; dactylus with a round mesial proximal tooth on cutting edge; 6, telson approximately quadrate, posterior border rounded; exopod of urapods with a proximal spine and basipod with a spinc. The morphology of the exopod of maxilliped 1 and the epipod of maxilliped 2 is unusual in the Upogebiidae: It has been reported in two other species: U. tractabilis (Hale) from Southern Australia (Ngoc-Ho, in press) and U. stenar- hynchus Ngoc-Ho, 1991 from New Caledonia. Differences between the later species and U. savignyi were given (Ngoc-Ho. 1991). Com- parison of U. savignyi with U. tractabilis show certaim similarities: 1, triangular shape of the rostrum; 2, peduncle of both antennule and anten- na unarmed; 3, proximal spinule on exopod of uropod and another on basipod. Distinguishing characters are: 1, rostrum and gastric ridges bear- ing tubercles in savignyi but spinules or spiniform tubercles m tractabilis; 2, pereopod 1: merus unarmed or with a few spinules in savignyi, with spines in rracrabilis; carpus unarmed in savignyi, with a ventro-distal spine in fractabilis, fixed finger cutting edge with small proximal teeth in savignyi, unarmed in tractabilis, dactylus with a proximal rounded tooth on cutting edge in savig- nyt but with 3-4 teeth medially in tractabilis; 3, telson with pasterior border rounded in adults savignyi, with straight posterior border in adults rractabilis MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Upogebia spinimanus sp. nov. (Fig. 9) TYPE MATERIAL HororvrE Madagascar (Bambétoké Bay), Bastard coll.(no date): 1 d , cl. 5.3mm, tl. 14mm (MNHNTh790). ETYMOLOGY Referring to the large dorsal spine on the palm of pereopod 1, DESCRIPTION Rostrum sub-oval, projecting far beyond eyes; 6 small rounded teeth on either lateral margin; faint longitudinal median groove. Rounded tubercles postero-dorsally on rostrum, and on gastric region alongside lateral groove; lateral groove moderately broad, Gastric ridge with 10- 12 small spiniform tubercles. Antero-lateral bor- der of carapace with spinule. Cervical groove deep, bearing spine on either side near intersec- tion with linea thalassinica, the latter extending 10 posterior margin of carapace. Epistome ter- minates dorsally in minute spinule. Telson slightly broader than long, lateral border convex, postero-lateral angles rounded, posterior border nearly straight; very faint and small in- verted U-shaped carina on dorsal surface. Single pleurobranch on 5th thoracic segment in addition to arthrobranchs on maxilliped 3 and pereopods 1-4. Arthrobranchs with 2 tubular lamellae on either side of the rachis. Antennule (Fig. 9B). First peduncular article with ventral distal spinule. Antenna (Fig. 9B). Third peduncular article with ventral distal spinule; scale terminating in small flap extending to base of fourth article. Maxillipeds. 1-3 with epipod, that of maxilliped 1 very small. Pereopod 1. Subcheliform. Ischium with ven- tral spine, Merus about 3 times as long as broad, bearing dorsal subdistal spine and 3-4 ventral spines. Carpus with ventral distal spine, fine lon- gitudinal groove on upper part of external sur- face; mesial surface with dorsal distal spine and spine near middle of distal margin. Propodus over 2.5 times as long as hroad, carrying large spinc near distal third of dorsal margin; fixed finger slender, about 1/3 as long as dactylus, cutting edge denticulated. Dactylus approximately 2/3 аз long as propodus, with small corneous tip, un- armed. INDO-PACIFIC UPOGEBIIDAE 209 FIG. 9. Upogebia spinimanus sp. nov., holotype, male, MNHNTh790, A,B, anterior part of carapace, dorsal and lateral view; C, pereopod 1, external view; D, distal part of pereopod 1, mesial view; E,F, pereopods 2 and 3 respectively; С, telson and uropod. Scale line: 1mm. Pereopod 2. Merus with dorsal subdistal, and Pereopod 3. Merus with 2 spines on ventral margin. Uropod. Exopod hardly longer than telson, and ventral subdistal spine. posterior border and lateral external angle ventral proximal spine. Carpus bearing dorsal, rounded, with spinule proximally; endopod ap- proximately trapezoidal, protopod with spinule. TYPE LOCALITY Madagascar (Bombétoké Bay). REMARKS The possession of a pleurobranch on the 5th thoracic segment places U. spinimanus sp. nov. within 2 special group of Upogebia which ts dealt with in detail in another work (Ngoc-Ho, in press). Included are: U. africana (Ortmann, 1894); U, aliobranchus Ngoc-Ho, 1991; U. capensis (Krauss, 1843); U. grralia Poore & Grif- fin, 1979; U; lenzrichtersi Sakai. 1982: U. stellata (Montagu, 1808). U, sptnintanus is most similar to U, lenzrichrer- 51 also from Madagascar, and was compared with paratypes of the latter species in the Paris Museum (MNHNTh519, 520). The two have similar rostrums, telsons and uropods; both have a dorsal spine on the propodus of pereopod 1; both have coxal spines on pereopods 1-3. They cun be separated by: 1, lateral shoulder of cervical groove with spine near intersection with linea thalassinica in U. spinimanus (spine absent in U. lenzrichtersi); 2, antennular and antennal peduncle with a ventral spine on first and third article in U. spinimanus (unarmed in U. lenzrich- tersi); 3, male pereopod 1: LU, spinimanus: merus with 3-4 ventral spines; propodus without dorsal carina behind dorsal spine, ventral margin un- armed; dactylus unarmed (17. lenzrichtersi: merus unarmed ventrally, or with tubercles; propodus with dorsal carina on proximal two-thirds and large mesial ventral spine near base of fixed finger; dactylus with dorsal tubercles and small round teeth on cuting edge), 4, pereopods 2 and 3 with 1-2 ventral spines in C. spinimanus but unarmed ventrally in U. lerizrichtersi, Wolffogebia Sakai, 1982 REMARKS Wolffogebia Sakai, 1982 was established for 4 species: W. phuketensts Sakai, 1982 (type species); W. Jnermis Sakai, 1982; W. obtifrons Sakai, 1982; and Gebicula exigua Alcock, 1901. Sakai gave the following diagnosis: “Dorsal sur- face of anterior region with a median carina. Lateral frontal process of carapace developed. Lateral longitudinal groove definable. Antero- lateral margin of carapace armed or unarmed- First pereopod subchelate." MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM It is quesuonable whether Gebicula exigua (also the type species of Gebicula Alcock, 1901) really belongs to Wolffogebia. This species was consulered by Sakai (1982) to be a senior synonym of Upogetia monoceros de Man but his action was thought doubtful by Ngoc-Ho (1989) who assigned U. monoceros to the genus Gebiacantha. The holotype (a female of 13mm in total length), and only existing specimen of Gebicula exigua, is deposited in the Indian Museum and unavailable for examination at present. The onginal figure in Alcock (1901) is in lateral view and the dorsal surface of the rostrum and anterior region of the carapace arc not shown. It is impossible to confirm whether the specimen possesses the first three characters given by Sakai (1982) in the diagnosis of Wollfogebia, However, the figure shows the antero-lateral margin of the carapace bearing at least 2 spines, which is in contradiction with the type-species of Wolffogebia, W. phuketensis, which has this border unarmed (Sakai, 1982; fig. 18c). The two characters “unarmed antero-lateral border of the carapace” together with “pl sub- cheliform" displayed by W. phuketensis are un- common in the Upogebtidae. Until the holotype of Gebicula exigua can be examined, it is not possible to know whether this deep-sea species (captured at 485m depth) belongs to Wolffogebia. If it does, Wolffogebia would become a junior synonym of Gebicula. Wolffogebia ànd Gebicula are here provisionally retained as separated genera pending a future study of Gebicula exigua. Characters given as diagnostic of Wolffogebia by Sakai (1982), are cited above. Those relating 1o the lateral frontal process of the carapace, the lateral longitudinal groove and the antero-lateral margin of the carapace are not precise enough to be useful as they belong to the great majority of upogebids, and roughly half of them actually possess a subchelate pereopod 1. Wolffogebia species form a distinctive group within the Upogebiidae. Examination of the type species, as well as W. inermis reveals a number of morphological features which help to beiter define it. They are: absence of a median lon- gitudinal groove on rostrum; dorsal surface of anterior region with a slight median carina; antero-lateral border of carapace unarmed; arthrobranchs with a single series of large lamel- lae on either side of the rachis; maxilliped 1 with a large epipod; maxilliped 2 with exopod of one article, without flagellum; maxilliped 3 without epipod, exopod without flagellum: pereopod 1 subcheliform. INDO-PACIFIC UPOGEBIIDAE 211 FIG. 10. Wolffogebia inermis Sakai. A-C, male, tl. 27mm, BMNH1993:30.2; D-F, female, tl. 27mm, MNHNTh 1279. A, anterior part of carapace, lateral view; B, pereopod 1, external view; C, distal part of pereopod 1, mesial view; D-F, maxillipeds 1, 2 and 3 respectively. Scale line: Imm. 212 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 11. Wolffogebia inermis Sakai. A,B, male, tl.21mm, MNHNTh1279; C-E, female, tl.27mm, MNHNTh1279. A,C, pereopod 1, external view; B,D, distal part of pereopod 1, mesial view; E, pereopod 2, external view. Scale line: Imm. INDO-PACIFIC UPOGEBIIDAE In combination with the characters "anterolateral border of carapace unarmed" and "pereopod ! subcheliform", the morphology of maxillipeds, especially exopods without à flagel- lum in maxillipeds 2 and 3, is uncommon in the Upogebiidae. Wolffogebia inermis Sakai, 1982 (Fig. 10) Wollfogebia inermis Sakai, 1982: 81, ligs 17e, 18g, 19a-b, pl. G6; 1993: 109, figs. 12-14. MATERIAL EXAMINED Сап-ріс (Ho-chi-Minh city), Vietnam, Tran phi Hung coll., 1.5.1993, mangrove area, in mud: 5 d (4 juv.), el. 4.5-7mm, tl. 14,5-22mm, 3 9 (2 ovig.). cl. 7.5- Sen, tl. 27-28mm (NMHNTh1279); no locality data: 2 g ,cl, 8mm and | I, 5mm, tl, 21,5mm and 27mm; 1 d ‚1 9 damaged, 1 male РІ (BMNH1993:30.2). DESCRIPTION Rostrum elongate, with rounded tip projecting far beyond eye, setose but unarmed, as are gastric region and gastric ridge. Lateral groove narrow; antero-lateral border of carapace unarmed, Cer- vical groove moderately deep, linea thalassinica faint posterior to it. Epistome terminating in spinule. Arthrobranchs with single series of large tamellae on either side of rachis. Antennule and Antenna (Fig. 10A). Both peduncles unarmed, antennal scale minute. Maxillipeds 1 (Fig. 10D), with large ерірой; 2 (Fig, LOE), with simple exopod, without flagel- lum; 3 (Fig. 10F), without epipod, exopod simple in large specimens, with short indifferentiated flagellum in juveniles. Pereopod 1. Subcheliform, sexually dimor- phic. Ischium with ventral spine. Merus with dorsal subdistal, and ventral proximal spine. Car- pus bearing large ventral distal spine; external surface with faint longitudinal groove on upper half; mesial surface carrying dorsal distal spine and another near middle of distal border. Propodus in males over twice as long as broad at mid-length, more slender in females, mesial sur- face with fine longitudinal dorsal carina in adult males, smooth in juveniles and females, all with large dorsal subdistal spine; fixed finger subdis- tal, unarmed. Dactylus in adult males three- quarters as long às propodus, with corneous tip and denticles on dorsal margin, external surface with 0-6 round tubercles near cutting edge, mesial surface with longitudinal row of 2-6 teeth or tubercles on upper half; dactylus unarmed in juveniles and females except for 1-3 small mesial tubercles. Pereopod 2, Mers with dorsal subdistal and ventral proximal spine; carpus with dorsal sub- distal spine. DISTRIBUTION Indonesia (Java, Mocara Tangerang), Vietnam (Can-gio). REMARKS Sakai (1982) stated that the holotype (d , 34mm tl., from Java, Mocara, Tangerang) and sole specimen was deposited in the Zoólogisch Museum-Universitat van Amsterdam, but there is no record of it there, nor in the Zoologisches Institut-Universitat Hamburg (D. Platvoct & С. Hartmann, pers. comm.). The present material agrees well with the description and figures of the holotype especially in the absence of all spines or tubercles from the carapace. Регеорокі 1 is slightly more slender in this material; in adult males, the dactylus bears denticles on the dorsal margin, external tubercles near the cutting edge, and a row of 2-6 teeth or tubercles on the mesial surface. The dactylus of PI on the holotype has both the dorsal margin and the cutting edge unarmed and only a single mesial tooth is present (Sakai, 1982: fig. 20Е). Another variation concerns the right РІ of a male from Vietnam of 22mm tl. which is larger than the left and armed with an external subdistal spine near the base of the fixed finger, and a mesial subdistal spine near the base of the dactylus (Fig. 11A, В). These spines are not reported in the holotype and absent in the rest of the material examined. Females studied also agree well with the specimen recently described hy Sakai (1993: fig. 13b.c) (ovig. 9 , 30mm tL, from Darwin, Australia) except that in the Australian specimen, the exopods of both maxillipeds 2 and 3 are provided with a flagellum. 1t is questionable Whether there was a mistake. Wolffogebia phuketensis Sakai, 1982 (Fig. 12) Wolffoxebia phuketersis Sakai, 1982: 75, 18c-d, 20b figs 17a, MATERIAL EXAMINED HOLOTYPR: Phuket, Thailand, d, tl. 39m (ОМК type collection), OTHER MATERIAL: Northwestern Singapore, in mangrove, in burrows of Thalassina anomala mound, 214 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 12. Wolffogebia phuketensis Sakai, QMW14854. A-D, ovig. female, tl. 34mm; E, male; Е, female tl. 25.5mm. A, anterior part of carapace, dorsal view; B, maxilliped 1; C, maxilliped 2; D, maxilliped 3; E,F, pereopod 1, mesial view. Scale line: Imm. INDO-PACIFIC UPOGERIIDAE P. Davie & P. Ng colL, 6.9.1987: 2 9 (1 ovig.), cl. &.5mm and 10mm, tl. 25.55 m and 34mm; 1 without abdomen, cl. 13mm (QMW14854). DESCRIPTION Rostrum low, triangular, about half as long as wide at basein females, longer in male, projecting slightly beyond eyes, with 4 round teeth laterally; dorsal surface without median longitudinal groove, very setose, Gastric region setose lateral- ly with 8-9 round tubercles alongside either lateral groove; medially with а поп setose area the anterior part of which slightly elevated in the shape of a weak carina pointing forwards, Lateral groove moderately deep; lateral ridge with small median notch, carrying 12-13 and 4-5 round tubercles on anterior and posterior half respec- lively. Anterolateral border of carapace unarmed. Cervical groove deep, linca thalasinica invisible posterior to it. Arthrobranchs with single series of large lamellae on either side of the rachis. Antennule and Antenna. Peduncle unarmed. Mandible. Without antero-mesial tooth. Maxillipeds, 1 (Fig. 12B) with large epipod; 2 (Fig. 12C) with single article on exopod, without flagellum; 3 (Fig, 12D) without epipod, exopod without flagellum. Pereopod 1. Subcheliform, stouter in male than in female. Merus with dorsal subdistal spine. Carpus with a ventral subdistal, and 2 large mesio-distal spines. Propodus about twice as long as broad at mid-length in male, over 3.5 times in female, palm unarmed, fixed finger with small teeth on proximal two-thirds of cutting edge. Dactylus with weak longitudinal mesial tubercu- late crest and a few tubercles in male, unarmed in female; cutting edge bearing 2-4 minute teeth. Pereopod 2. Merus with dorsal subdistal and ventral proximal spine. DISTRIBUTION Thailand (Phuket Island); Singapore. REMARKS The specimens examined agree closely with Sakar's description and figures and with the holotype of Wolffogebia phuketensis. The tx- opods of both maxillipeds 2 and 3 are clearly simple (Fig. 12C,D) The external view of male pereopod } was given by Sakai (1982), the mesial view of the same appendage in both male and female is provided (Fig. 12E,F). ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The author wishes to thank the Natural History Museum, London (Paul Clark), the National Taiwan Ocean University (Tin-Yam Chan), The Nationaal Natuurhistonsch Museum, Leiden (Charles H.J.M. Fransen), the Queensland Museum, Brisbane (Peter Davie), the Univer- sitetets Zoologiske Museum, Kobenhavn (Dr Torben Wolff), the Zoologische Staatssam- miung, München (Dr L. Tiefenbacher) for kindly making material available for examination, Peter Davie and Michéle de Saint Lavrent for their helpful comments on the manuscript. LITERATURE CITED BORRADAILE, L.A. 1910. Penaeidea, Stenopidea, and Reptantia from the western Indian Ocean. Transactions of the Linnean Society of London. Zoology 13 (2): 257-264. LIU, J.Y. 1955. "Economic shrimps and prawns of northem China’. (Marine Biological Institute. Academy of Sciences: Peking). MAN, J.G. de. 1905. Diagnoses, of new species ol macrurous decapod Crustacea from the “Sibova Expedition". Rijdschrift der Nederlandsche Dierkundige Vereeniging 9 (2): 587-614, 1927, A contribution to the knowledge of twenly- one species of the genus Upogebia Leach, Capita Zoologica 2(5): 1-58. 1928. The Decapoda of the Siboga Expedition. Part VII. The Thalassinidae and Callianassidae col- lected by the Siboga-Expedition with some remarks on the Laomediidae. Siboga Expedition, Monograph 39(6): 1-187. NGOC-HO, N. 1981, A taxonomic study of larvae of four thalassinid species (Decapoda, Thalas- sinidea) From the Gulf of Mexico. Bulletin of the British Museum of Natural History, Zoology 40 (5): 237-273. 1989. Sur le genre Gebiacantha gen. nov. avec la description de cing espéces nouvelles (Crustacea, Thalassinidea, Upogebiidae). Bulletin du Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelle (Paris). Serie 4, 1 1A(CI): 117-145. 1990, Nine Indo-Pacific species of Upogebia Leach (Crustaceu * Thalassinidea : Upogebiidae). Jour» nal of Natural History 24; 965-985, 1991. Sur quelques Callianassidae et Upogebiidac de Nouvelle Calédome (Crustacea, Thalas- sinidea). Рр, 281-311. In Richer de Forges, B. (ed.), “Le benthos des fonds meubles des lagons de Nouvelle Calédonie’. Vol. 1, (Orstom Edi- tions: Paris). IN PRESS, Some Callianassidae and Upogebiidae from Australia with descriptions of four new epecies Crustacea: Decapoda, Thalassinidea). Memoirs of the Museum of Victoria 54, 216 NGOC-HO, N. & CHAN, T-Y. 1992. Upogebia edulis, new species, a mud-shrimp (Crustacea : Thalas- sinidea : Upogebiidae) from Taiwan and Viet- nam, with a note on polymorphism in the male first pereiopod. Raffles Bulletin of Zoology 40(1): 33-43. NOBILI, G. 1904. Diagnoses préliminaires de vingt- huit espéces nouvelles de Stomatopodes et de Décapodes Macroures de la Mer Rouge. Bulletin du Muséum d’ Histoire Naturelle 5: 228-237. 1906. Faune carcinologique de la Mer Rouge, Décapodes et Stomatopodes. Annales des Scien- ces Naturelle (Zoologie) 4(1-3): 1-347. SAKAI, K. 1975. Thalassinids of Kenya collected by Dr. A.J. Bruce. Veróffentlichungen der Zoologis- chen Staatssamlung München 18: 1-44. 1982. Revision of Upogebiidae (Decapoda, Thalas- sinidea) in the Indo-west Pacific region. Re- searches on Crustacea, Special No. 1: 1-106. 1984. Some Upogebiidae (Crustacea, Decapoda) in the collection of the Rijksmuseum van Natuur- lijke Historie, Leiden. Zoologische Mededelin- gen 58(10): 149-162. 1984. A new record of Upogebia spinifrons (Has- well, 1882) (Decapoda, Thalassinidea) from Naruto, Japan, showing possible her- maphroditism. Crustaceana 47(2): 209-214. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 1986. On Upogebia narutensis, a new thalassinid (Decapoda, Crustacea) from Japan. Researches on Crustacea 15: 23-28. 1987. Two new Thalassinidea (Crustacea: Decapoda) from Japan, with biogeographical dis- tribution of the Japanese Thalassinidea. Bulletin of Marine Science 41 (2): 296-308. 1993. On a collection of Upogebiidae (Crustacea, Thalassinidea) from the Northern Territory Museum, Australia, with the description of two new species. The Beagle 10(1): 87-113. SAVIGNY, J. C. 1817. Crustacés. In 'Description de l'Egypte ou recueil des observations et des recherches qui ont été faites en Egypte pendant l'expédition de l'armée francaise, publié par les ordres de Sa Majesté l'Empereur Napoléon le Grand: Histoire naturelle, Crustacés’. 13 plates. STRAHL, C. 1862. Uber einige neue von Hrn. F. Jagor eingesandte Thalassinen und die systematische Stellung dieser Familie. Monatsberichte der Deutschen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin 1861: 1055-1072. YU, S.C. 1931. On some species of shrimp-shaped Anomura from north China. Bulletin of the Fan Memorial Institute of Biology 2(6): 85-97. AN ANNOTATED LIST OF RECENT ADDITIONS TO THE CETACEAN COLLECTION IN THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Е.А. PATERSON Paterson, R.A. 1994 06 01: An annotated list of recent additions to the cetacean collection in the Queensland Museum. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1): 217-223. Brisbane. ISSN 0079-8835. Recent additions to the cetacean collection in the Queensland Museum, including the Museum of Tropical Queensland at Townsville, represent 4 mysticete and 13 odontocete species, Two of the odontocetes, Stenella longirosiris and 5. attenuata, have not been previously recorded from Queensland. The collection is dominated by species which frequent or migrate to tropical and sub-tropical coastal waters. [ lCetaceans, Queensland Museum collection, recent addilions. R.A. Paterson, Queensland Museum, PO Box 3300, South Brisbane, Queensland 410], Australia; 10 December 1993, Important material has been added to the Queensland Museum (QM) cetacean collection inthe past decade. Registration number, location, collector or donor, method of discovery, date of collection or discovery and material held as well as the order of classification. follow Paterson (1986). Specimens identified by Dr Peter Amold of the Museum's Townsville branch (the Museum of Tropical Queensland) and held there or at the Department of Zoology, James Cook University are indicated by an asterisk. Many of those specimens were obtained from animals drowned in protective shark nets set in the Townsville/Magnetic Island region. Mysticete and odontocete larynges are il- lustrated here as part of a continuing study of the cetacean larynx at the QM. Mammals registered in the QM collection are prefixed with the letters J or JM and QBFP and QDEH are acronyms for the Queensland Boating and Fisheries Patrol and Queensland Department of Environment and Heritage. SYSTEMATICS Suborder MYSTICETI Family BALAENOPTERIDAE Balaenoptera musculus Linnaeus,1758 (Blue whale) MATERIAL JM10415, St Lawrence (22*19'S. 149*38'E), В.А. Paterson, S. Van Dyck, and P. Cross, K. Fowler (QBFP), beachcast, 24,11,94: skull (with the exceplion of nasals and premaxillae), mandible, majority of post- cranial skeleton, partial baleen. Balaenoptera acutorostrata Lacépéde, 1804 (Minke whale) MATERIAL *JM3861, Hook Reef (19°50'S, 149713'E), James Cook University staff, died after ‘entrapment’ in Hook Reef lagoon, 28.xi.82: complete skeleton and baleen, 1M5434, Granite Bay, Noosa (26°23"S, 153°06'E), RAP, SVD; beachcast, 5.viii,86: complete skeleton, partial baleen: JM7301, Big Sand Hill, Moreton Js, (27°13'S, 153°23'Е), RAP, P. Paterson, beachcast, 11.vi.87: complete skeleton, partial baleen; JM8513, Woralie Creek, Fraser Is. (25°08"S, 153°06°E), RAP, SVD, P. Gillespie, stranded, 16.xi.90: complete skeleton and baleen, larynx (Fig.1); JM8808, Wathum ba Creek, Fraser Is. (24°59'5, 153°13°E), RAP, SVD, beachcast, 15.у111.91: skull and mandible, partial baleen, JM9029, Marooin, Great Sandy Strait (25°37'S, 152752 E), RAP, SVD, beachcast, 26.x.91: skull and mandible, partial baleen; JM9453, Tan- galooma Wrecks, Moreton 15. (27711 S, 153722" E), QDEH, drowned in hold of former whale chaser: man- dible, partial skull, post-cranial skeleton and baleen. REMARKS With the exception of JM3861 the specimens were those of juvenile or recently born animals Horwood (1990) noted that most series of minke whale strandings contained a high proportion uf immatures. Best (1985) detailed the external characters of Southern Hemisphere minke whales and described a diminutive (Type 3) form. Arnold, Marsh & Heinsohn (1987) discussed the occur- rence of minke whales in east Australian waters and described JM3861 in detail. Tt 15 a Type 3 specimen and they termed it a dwarf minke 218 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 1. Balaenoptera acutorostrata, JM8513. Larynx from dorsal aspect (left) and ventral aspect (right), A, pharynx; B-B paired arytenoid cartilages; C, epiglottic cartilage; D, ventral diverticulum, opened after splitting thyro- arytenoid muscle (E-E); F, oesophagus; G, trachea; H, eparterial bronchus; I, right main bronchus; J, left main bronchus. whale. The reproductive status of JM3861 was described by Marsh (1985). The external colour patterns and cranial appearances of Type 1 and 3 specimens in the collection at Brisbane are il- lustrated in Figs 2,3. Balaenoptera borealis Lesson,1828 (Sei whale) MATERIAL JM4918, ‘Whale Beach’, Tuan (25^40' S, 152° 54' E), RAP, P. Paterson, stranded in 1940s, 21.iv.84: partial basi-cranium, tympanic bulla. REMARKS J21713 was listed as B. borealis by Paterson (1986) but correctly identified as B. edeni (Bryde's whale) by Paterson & Van Dyck (1988). Megaptera novaeangliae Borowski,1781 (Humpback whale) MATERIAL JM5252, Spitfire Creek, Moreton Is, (27°04'S, 153°27'E), V.C. Bushing, RAP, beachcast, 2.xi.84: partial skull and post-cranial skeleton. Described by Bushing (1991); JM7302, Brown’s Rocks, Fraser Is. (24°47'S, 153°16'Е), RAP, SVD, stranded, 3.у11.89: skull, mandible and partial post-cranial skeleton, baleen. Described by Paterson & Van Dyck (1991); JM7303, Moon Point, Fraser Is. (25°13'S, 152*59' E), V. Hislop, stranded, 17.x.89: complete skeleton, baleen and larynx. Described by Paterson & Van Dyck (1991), Quayle (1991); JM8318, Tangalooma, Moreton Is, (27^11'S, 153°22'E), D. Lovey, whaling operations: dried penis; JM8658, Eager’s Creek, Moreton Is. (27°07'S, 153°27'E), B. McLarty (ОРЕН), RAP, SVD, stranded, 19.vii.91: skull, mandible, baleen and larynx. Described by Paterson et al. (1993). CETACEAN COLLECTION, QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Sen a A P ns ~- > + e - FIG. 2 Balaenoptera acutorostrata. Upper, JM8513, flipper and body colouration of Type 1 form; Lower, JM7301, flipper and body colouration of Type 3 form. Suborder ODONTOCETI Family ZIPHIIDAE Ziphius cavirostris Cuvier, 1823 (Cuvier's beaked whale) MATERIAL JM5264, Agnes Water (24^10'S, 151°33’E), RAP, SYD, beachcast, 30.1.86: damaged skull, Described by Paterson & Van Dyck (1990); JM7677, Cape Hillsborough (20°56’S, 149*03' E), P. Arnold, К. Saal- feld, beachcast, 8.vi.89: skull and mandible. REMARKS Radiographs demonstrate paired anterior man- dibular teeth and numerous needle-shaped rudimentary teeth in both jaws (Fig.4). Mesoplodon densirostris de Blainville,1817 (Dense-beaked whale) MATERIAL JM6460, Noosa River mouth (26°23’S, 153?06' E), SVD, beachcast, 4.vi.86: complete skeleton. Described by Paterson & Van Dyck (1990); JM8807, Point Lookout, North Stradbroke Is. (27°26’S, 153?33' E), RAP, SVD, beachcast, 22.x.91: complete skeleton and larynx; JM9640, Cathedral Beach, Fraser Is. (25^10' 8, 153?13' E), J. Ford (ОРЕН), Р. Stumkat, K. Williams, beachcast, 21.vi.92: complete skeleton and larynx. REMARKS JM8807 апа JM9640 were described by Pater- son et al. (1993). Mesoplodon layardii Gray,1865 (Straptooth beaked whale) MATERIAL JM6198, Whitsunday Passage (20720'S, 148°50"E), K. Saalfeld, R. Hughes, A. Smith, beachcast, 18.viii.86: complete skeleton. Described by Paterson & Van Dyck (1990); JM8498, Lady Elliott Is. (24°07'S, 152°43’E), D. Lee (ОРЕН), beachcast, 19,iv.90: skull and mandible. Family PHYSETERIDAE Physeter macrocephalus Linnaeus, 1758 (Sperm whale) MATERIAL JM7307, Dundowran (25^18'S, 152°46'E), RAP, SVD, stranded, 30.1v.84: squid beaks from JM4420. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 3. Balaenoptera acutorostrata. Left, JM8513 (Type 1); Right, JM8808 (Type 3). Dorsal cranial structures in immature specimens. Described by Paterson (1986); JM9920, Main Beach, North Stradbroke Is. (27°27'S, 153?32'E), RAP, SVD, С. Jaques, beachcast, 6.vii.93: skull, partial post- cranial skeleton and larynx (Fig.5). Kogia breviceps de Blainville, 1838 (Pygmy sperm whale) MATERIAL JM5698, Moore Park, Bundaberg (24°52’S, 152°21'Е), C. Limpus (ОРЕН), SVD, stranded, 15.1.87: complete skeleton, reproductive tract (in spirit); ЈМ5699 (calf of JM5698, in spirit); ЈМ8796, Yellow Patch, Moreton Is. (27°02’S, 153?26' E), RAP, stranded, 6.vii.88: skull; JM10000, Mudjimba Beach (26°37'S, 153*06'E), QBFP, C. Cowell, beachcast, 8.ix.93: complete skeleton and viscera; JM10001 (foetus of JM10000, in spirit). Family STENIDAE Sousa chinensis Osbeck, 1757 (Indopacific humpback dolphin) MATERIAL *JM4701, Picnic Bay, Magnetic Is. (19°11'S, CETACEAN COLLECTION, QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 221 FIG. 4 Ziphius cavirostris, JM7677. Radiographs of mandible (left) and maxilla (right) demonstrating paired anterior mandibular teeth and numerous needle-like rudimentary teeth in both jaws of this female specimen. There were at least 34 rudimentary teeth in each jaw. Some were lost before the radiographs were taken. 146°50°E), 9.x.69; *JM4703, Horseshoe Bay, Mag- netic Is. (19°07°S, 146°51°E), 411.70; *JM4710, Horseshoe Bay, Magnetic Is. (19°07'S, 146°51'Е), 4.11.71; *JM4711, Kissing Point, Townsville (19°14’S, 146°48'Е); *JM4717, Horseshoe Bay, Magnetic Is. (19°07’S, 146°51’E), 24.x.71; *JM4728, Florence Bay, Magnetic Is. (19?07'S, 146°53’E), 16.viii.75; *JM4731, Horseshoe Bay, Magnetic Is. (19*07'S, 146°51°E), 19.1.76; *JM4737, Rowe's Bay, Townsville (19°13’S, 146?47' E), 5.vii.78; *JM4738, Rowe's Bay, Townsville (19°13°S, 146°47'Е), 30.vii.84; JM5333, Adder Rock, North Stradbroke Is. (27°26'5, 153?32" E), RAP, beachcast, 27.ix.85: skull and mandible; JM5355, M.M. Bryden: complete skeleton; JM6434, M.M. Bryden: skull; *JM7678, Rowe’s Bay, Townsville (19°13’S, 146°47’E), 22.1.90; JM10416, Ayr (19°34’S, 147?24' E), Sea World Staff, stranded, 1.iii.94: juvenile (in spirit). Family GLOBICEPHALIDAE Globicephala macrorhyncus Gray,1846 (Shortfin pilot whale) MATERIAL *JM4732, *JM4733, Conway Beach, Proserpine (20?29'S, 148"45' E), 25.1.86. Peponocephala electra Nishiwaki & Norris,1966 (Melonhead whale) MATERIAL *JM4702, Mission Beach (17°56’S, 146?06'E), 22.x.69; *JM4730, Crystal Beach, Mt Spec (18*56'S, 146°19°E), 3.xii.75; JM5573, Eager' s Creek, Moreton Is. (27707' S, 153?27" E), ОРЕН, beachcast, 19.xii.86: MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 5 Physeter macrocephalus, JM9920. Larynx in longitudinal section, medial aspect, with thyroid cartilage removed. A, epiglottic cartilage; B, arytenoid cartilage-corpus; C, arytenoid cartilage-rostral end; D, cricoid cartilage; E, tracheal lumen. skull and mandible; JM6464, Moreton Is, (27^11'S, 153?24'E), QDEH, beachcast, 24.vii.77: complete skeleton; JM6577, Dunwich, North Stradbroke Is. (27°30'S, 153?24'E), Sea World staff, stranded, 6.vii.88; complete skeleton; JM10112, Rainbow Beach (25°50'S, 153°%04'Е), P. Stumkat, К. Williams, l.vii.93, beachcast: complete skeleton; JM10113, Dept. of Veterinary Anatomy, University of Queensland: complete skeleton, Family DELPHINIDAE Grampus griseus Cuvier, 1812 (Risso's dolphin) MATERIAL JM9452, Amity Point; North Stradbroke Is. (277248, 153*26' E), SVD, J. Conrad, beachcast, 10.11.92: com- plete skeleton. Orcaella brevirostris Gray, 1866 (Irrawaddy River dolphin) MATERIAL *JM4700, Pallarenda, Townsville (19^12'S, 14646" E), 23.ix.69; *JM4704, Horseshoe Bay, Mag- netic Is. (19°07°5, 146°51°E), 23.iv.71; *JM4705, *JM4706, Horseshoe Bay, Magnetic Is. (19°07’S, 146°5 1’ EB), 23,iv.70; *7M4707, Pallarenda, Townsville (19°12'S, 146°46'E), 3.x.70; *JM4708, Horseshoe Bay, Magnetic Is. (19°07'S, 146°51’E), 13.x1i.70; *JM4709, Horseshoe Bay, Magnetic Is (19707'S, 146° 1'Е), 23.1.71; *JM4720, Kissing Point, Townsville (19°14'S, 146"48'E), 18.11.72; *)M4721, Horseshoe Bay, Magnetic Is. (19°07’S, 146°51°E), 21v. 72; *JM4722, *1M4723, Pallarenda, Townsville (19*12'S, 146°46'B), 18.viii.74; *]M4727, The Strand, Townsville (19*16' S, 146?48' E), 28.11.75; *JM4729, Kissing Point, Townsville (19°14'5, 146748' E), 27.viii.75; *JM4734, Pallarenda, Townsville (19°12'5, 146°46'E), 30.у11.76; *JM4735, Rowe's Bay, Townsville (19^13'S, 146°47'E), 10.ix.76; *1М4736, Rowe's Bay, Townsville (19°13°5, 146°47’B), 4.х.76; *1M4739, Ross River mouth, Townsville (19°16'S, 146°50 E), 9.viii.84; *JM4740, Tolakea, Townsville (197?09'S, 146735 E), 30.1x.84; *JM4741, Pallarenda, Townsville (19°12'S, 146^46'E), 10.vi.71; JM4937, Main Beach, Cape Hillsborough (20°55’S, |49*00' E), P. Thompson (QDEH), beachcast, 22.1.85: skull and mandible. Stenella longirostris Gray,1828 (Spinner dolphin) MATERIAL *JM4719, Michaelmas Reef (16°35'S, 146° 02'E), 1971; JM7300, Tangalooma, Moreton Is. (27°11°S, 153°22°E), Sea World staff, stranded, 7.iv.88: com- plete skeleton. CETACEAN COLLECTION, QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 22 Stenella attenuata Gray, 1846 (Spotted dolphin) MATERIAL 1M5356, Main Beach, Gold Coast (28"00'S, 153?26' E), Sea World staff, stranded, 1986: complete skeleton; JM6433, Eager's Creek, Moreton Is. (27°07'S, 153?27' E), RAP, SVD, beachcast, 5.xii.86: skull and mandible; JM6459 (foetus of JM6433, in spirit). Tursiops truncatus Montagu,1821 (Bottlenose dolphin) MATERIAL *1M4713, Horseshoe Вау, Magnetic Is. (19°07'S, L46°S1'B), 17.vii.71; "JM4715, Horseshoe Bay, Mag- netic Is. (19°O7'S, 146°51'Б), 10.1х.71; *)М4724, Horseshoe Bay. Magnetic Is. (19°07'S, 146°51'Е), 7.х.72; IM5241, One Mile, North Stradbroke Is. (27°30°S, 153°24’E), A. Schelechoff: skull and man- dible; JM5411, Elcho 1s. via Darwin (11*58'S, 135°43'E), S. Wilson: skull; JM5574, Moreton Is. (27"]2'S, 153°22'Е), ОРЕН, 19.xii.86: damaged skull; M6428, Ocean Beach, Moreton Is. (27^11'S, 153725 E), М. Hawkins, beachcast, 22.11.87: skull and mandible; 1M6436, JM6439, M.M. Bryden: skull and mandible; JM6568, Yellow Patch, Moreton Is. (27°02'S, 153°26'Е), T. Ward, J. Kahabka (QDEH), beachcast, 8.v. 88: skull and mandible; JM7308, Noosa (26°35°S, 153*08'E), К. Parker, С. McDermott, drowned in shark net, l.vii.86: head (in spirit); JM8831, Amity Point, North Stradbroke Is. (27°24'S, 15326 E), E. Durbidge, beachcast, 16.1.92: calf (in spirit); JM8859, Maroochydore (26"40'S, 153"06' E), R. Parker, drowned in shark net, 5.vi.86: skull and mandible; JM 10043, Chiggl Chiggl, North Stradbroke Is. (27°25'S, 153726 E), SVD, 10.11.92: damaged skull and mandible; JM10114, Point Lookout, North Stradbroke Is. (27°26'5, 153°33'E), RAP, beachcast, 14.viti.93: skull and mandible. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Stephen Van Dyck helped collect many spec- imens. Bruce and Carolyn Cowell photographed and prepared many specimens. Sally Elmer il- lustrated the minke whale larynx. Stephen Marmo, X-ray Department, Royal Brisbane Hos- t pital took the radiographs. 1 am most appreciative of their assistance. Officers of the QDEH notified à number of strandings and assisted with retrieval of specimens as did officers of the QBFP. LITERATURE CITED ARNOLD, P., MARSH, Н, & HEINSOHN, С. 1987. The occurrence of two forms of minke whales in east Australian waters with a description of exter- nal characters and skeleton of the diminutive or dwarf form. Scientific Reports of the Whales Re- search Institute, Tokyo 38: 1—46, BEST, Р.В. 1985, External characters of southern minke whales and the existence of a diminutive form. Scientific Reports of the Whales Research In- stitute, Tokyo 36: 1-33. BUSHING, У.С, 1991. A humpback whale, Megaptera novaeangliae, skeleton discovered at an unusual location on Moreton Island, Queensland, eres of the Queensland Museum 30(2): 271- HORWOOD, J. 1990. Biology and exploitation of the minke whale. (CRC Press: Boca Raton, Florida), MARSH, Н. 1985. Observations on the ovaries of an isolated minke whale: Evidence for spontaneous sterile ovulation and structure of the resultant cor- pus. Scientific Reports of the Whales Research Institute, Tokyo 36: 35-39, PATERSON, R.A. 1986. A list of specimens of thc Order Cetacea in the Queensland Museum, Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 22(2): 309- 311. PATERSON, R.A. & VAN DYCK, S. 1988. Bryde's whale in the coastal waters of eastern Austratia, Scientific Reports of the Whales Research In- stitute, Tokyo 39: 21-29, 1990, Records of beaked whales in Queensland. Scientific Reports of Cetacean Research 1: 63- 77. 1991. Studies of two humpback whales, Megaptera novaeangliae, stranded at Fraser Island, Queensland. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 30(2): 343-350. PATERSON, R.A., QUAYLE, C.J. & VAN DYCK, S.M. 1993. A humpback whale calf and two sub- adult dense-beaked whales recently stranded in southern Queensland. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 33(1): 291—297. QUAYLE, C.J. 1991, A dissection of the larynx of a humpback whale calf with a review of its function- al morphology. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 3042): 351-354. UNUSUAL HUMPBACK WHALE SIGHTINGS AT CAPE MORETON. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum J5(1): 224. 1994:- The waters adjacent to Cape Moreton (27°12'5, 1§3°28'B) in southern Queensland are in the migra- Bon route of Arca V (130°E-170°W) humpback whales (Paterson, 1991), The sightings reported here occurred during the 1993 northern migration. On 4 July 1993 during the night of full moon RAP saw migrating humpback whales having been alerted by presumed "social" sound. A camp had been established on the SE aspect of Cape Moreton 65m above sea level, 100m back from the shore. A 15m walk was required to view the sea, At 1935h when atmospheric and sea conditions were perfect а ‘subdued fog- hom’ sound was heard, The sea was scanned within a few seconds. No ships were present bul blows typical of a humpback Whale pair were seen close inshore approximately 150m ENE, north of the moonlit area of sea, The whales blew twice again before passing ouLof sight in a northerly direction. Within minutes another pair of blows was seen approximately 800m ESE. The whales were south of the moonlit area, did not surface as they traversed it, but were seen north of it 5 minutes later, In each case the transit time was consistent with that of similarly positioned humpback whales seen there during daylight. Humpback whale population estimates in east Australia in the post-whaling period have been based on observations from elevated shore positions (Bryden et al., 1990; Paterson & Paterson, 1989) and those authors assumed that migration rates are similar during day and night. This fortuitous sighting, although of limited duration, supports that assumption, It is likely that the alerting sound was produced by one of the inshore pair, Humpback whales produce complex under- water sounds or songs (Payne & McVay, 1971). The sound reported above is not included in those underwater sounds described by Cato (1991) for the east Australian stock bir may have been a ‘social’ sound (D.H. Cato, pers. comm.). Оп 4 Septemher 1992 numerous 'social' sounds were heard by RAP when watching four humpback whales «400m from the headland at Point Lookout (27^26' S, 153°33' B) between 0715 and Q730h. The group was southbound and moving slowly while remaining at the surface. Atmospheric and sea state conditions were favourable and the sounds were similar to those made by lowing cattle. On 12 October 1980 one of à group of three southbound humpback whales «100m from the same headland raised its head from the sea on a number of occasions and made a barking noise. Caro (1991) refers to thar sound as a ‘уар’ and notes thal it occurs when singing whales surface to breathe. On 27 July 1993 MRK witnessed probable humpback whale parturition during a whale watch cruise. The captain of the "Tangalooma Flyer’ had been informed by the lighthouse keeper at Cape Moreton at 1145h that à solitary humpback whale was stationary at the surface 2km WSW oP the Cape. Viewing conditions were perfect and the whale was readily located 15 minutes later. Tt remained sta- tionary for a further 30 minutes before rising horizontally as MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM il being inflated, Approximately 1/3 of its body was above the water and its head and flukes were visible, It then ‘subsided’ and soon after a small grey coloured calf approximately 3—4m long appeared at its side close to the pectoral region. The pair then slowly moved away and were not followed. Paterson & Paterson (1989) reported three accounts of probable humpback whale partuntion witnessed by others in Great Barrier Reef waters between lat. 18-20°S in the months of Augustand September. Simmons & Marsh (1986) consider ihar the central section of the Great Barrier Reef is an impor- lant breeding ground for the east Australian stock. However, occasional parturition occurs at latitudes higher than Cape Moreton as northbound mothers and calves have been seen in thal region (Paterson & Paterson, 1989) and Paterson et al. 11993) reported the stranding of a recently bom calf on Moreton Island on 19 July 1991. The events described above are not conclusive proof of parturition and absolute proof is usually lacking in such reports of free-ranging cetaceans. However, the observation of а solitary animal, stationary for aconsiderable period, with the subsequent sudden appearance: of a small lightly pigmented calf supports the possibilily of parturilion; Literature Cited Bryden, M.M,, Kirkwood, G.P. & Slade, R.W., 1990, Humpback whales Area V. An increase in numbers off Ausiralia's east coast. Pp, 271-277. In Kerry, К.К. & Hempel, G. (eds), ‘Antarctic Ecosystems. Ecological change and conservation’. (Springer-Verlag: Berlin & Heidelberg), Cato. DH, 1991, Songs of humpback whales. the Australian perspective. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 302): 277-290. Paterson, К.А. 1991, The migration of humpback whales Megaptera novaeangliae in east Australian waters. Memoirs of ihe Queensland Museum 29(2): 333-341. Paterson, К, & Paterson, P. 1989. The status of the recovering stock of humpback whales Megaptera novaeangliae in east Australian waters. Biological Conservation 47: 33-48, Paterson, R.A., Quayle, CJ, & Уап Dyck, S.M. 1993, A humpback whale calf and Iwo subadult dense-beaked whales recently stranded in southern Queensland. Memoirs of ihe Queensland Museum 33(1): 291-297. Payne, RS. & McVay, S. 1971. Songs of humpback whales. Science 173: 585-597. Simmons, M.L. & Marsh, Н. 1986, Sightings of humpback whales in Great Barrier Reef walters, Scientific Reports of the Whales Research Institute, Tokyo 37; 31-46. К.А. Paterson, Queensland Museum, PO Box 3300, South Brisbane, Queensland 4101, Australia; M.R. Keeley, Tan- galooma Moreron Island Resort, РО Box 1102, Eagle Farm, Queensland 4009, Australia (present address 20 Murphy's Creek Road, Mr Kynoch, Queensland 4350, Australia), 15 October 1993, NEW QUEENSLAND COCKROACHES OF MACROCERCA HANITSCH AND PERIPLANETA BURMEISTER (BLATTIDAE) LOUIS M. ROTH Roth, L.M. 1994 06 01: New Queensland cockroaches of Macrocerca Hanitsch and Periplaneta Burmeister (Blattidae). Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1): 225-233. Brisbane. ISSN 0079-8835. The New Guinean cockroach genusMacrocerca Hanitsch is reported from Australia for the first time. M. hopensis sp.nov., M. shiptona sp.nov., and M. shelfordi Princis occurin northern Queensland. Periplaneta aboriginea sp.nov, is described from Cape York Peninsula. [ ] Blattidae, Macrocerca, Periplaneta, new spectes, taxonomy, north Queensland, Louis M. Roth, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University, Cambridge, MA, 02138, USA; correspondence: P.O. Box 540, Sherborn, MA, 01770, USA; 15 November 1993. I recently redescribed the 2 known species of Macrocerca Hanitsch, described 7 new taxa, and placed the genus in the Blattidae, and new sub- family Macrocercinae. All of the species are found in New Guinea and one also occurs on Key Island. While my revision of the genus (Roth, 1993) was in press, I received a number of specimens of Macrocerca from the Australian National Insect Collection (ANIC), Canberra, ACT, and the Queensland Museum (QMBA), Brisbane, Queensland. The material contained 3 species of which one was M. shelfordi Princis whose previously unknown female is described below. The other 2 species are new and are here described. SYSTEMATICS KEY TO MALES OF AUSTRALIAN МАСКОСЕКСА (А key to New Guinea species is given in Roth, 1993) 1. Head whitish with a medial, reddish brown longitudinal stripe surrounded by small dots on the face (Fig. 2А) ............ .shiptona Head not as above .,.......,.. eeteea taba 2 2.Head black or black with a reddish tinge from the occiput to the clypeus with a Jarge white macula on the upper half of the face be- tween the eyes and antennal sockets (Fig. 3A) hopensis Head with occiput light brown becoming darker on vertex and continuing as a lon- gitudinal dark brown stripe to the clypeus (dark specimens, as in 9, Fig. 1A); in light specimens the stripe is variably reduced and may be absent (as in 9,Fig. 1B, С) . shelfordi Macrocerca shelfordi Princis (Fig. 1) Macrocerca shelfordi Princis,1965: 143, fig.6 (5); Roth,1993; 350, fig. 4A-D (d ). MATERIAL EXAMINED Queensland, ANIC: Coll. D.C.F. Rentz: 3km ENE of Mt Tozer, nr Iron Range Nat. Park, 12°44 S 143^ 14E, 2 d d, 28,vi.4.vii.1986 (1 collected as nymph, ma- tured 23.х11.1987), 2 9 9, Stop 1-3; 9km ENE of Mt Tozer, Iron Range Nat. Park, 12°43'5 143717" E, rain- forest margin, 3 9 9, 10.vii.1986, Stop 1-12; 11km ENE of Mt Tozer, nr Iron Range Nat. Park, rainforest margin, 12°44'5 143718'E, rainforest margin, 1 d, 11.vii.1986, Stop 1-20; 13km ЕМЕ of Mt Tozer nr Iron Range Nat. Park, low open forest, 12°42'5 143°20°E, 4 9 9 (1 carrying an ootheca in the vertical position), 13.vii. 1986, Stop 1-21. Three specimens retained in the MCZ. QMBA: Coll. С.В. Monteith: 3km E of Locker- bie, Cape York, NQ, 1 9, 30.i-4.11.1975; Gordon's mine area, Iron Range, NQ, rainforest, 1 d, 12- 19.11.1976; 1 9. 12-18.11.1976; Iron Range, Cape York Pen., NQ, 1 9 (carrying partially complete ootheca), 27-30.iv.1973. The following were collected by G.B. Monteith & D. Cook: Eet Hill Vicinity, Moa (Banks) Is., Torres Strait, NQ, 1 9, 9-13.vii,1977; St. Pauls, Moa (Banks) Is., Torres Strait, NQ, 19, 14- 17.vii.1977; 5km WSW of St, Paul's, Moa (Banks) Is.. Torres Strait, NQ, 1 G, 16.vii.1977; West Claudie R., Iron Range, NQ, rainforest, 50m, 1 9 , 3- IO.xii. 1985, DESCRIPTION Female (previously unknown). Head with in- terocular space less than distance between anten- 226 1 mm MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 2mm 1 mm FIG. 1. Macrocerca shelfordi Princis, 9 2 from Queensland, A-C, heads; D, pronotum; E, subgenital plate (ventral; lateral margins of the supraanal plate аге visible); F, lateral (left) and dorsal (right) views of an ootheca protruding from the female's vestibulum [arrow indicates a minute serration or tooth (respiratory opening for an egg) in the keel]. Localities: All specimens were collected various distances ENE of Mt Tozer, as follows: A, B,9 km; C, 3km; D-F, 13km. nal sockets (Fig. 1A-C). Tegmina and wings fully developed extending beyond end of abdomen, the former with longitudinal and oblique discoidal sectors. Hind wing with simple or branched media vein, cubitus with 3 or 4 complete (some with 1 or more branches) and 2 incomplete rami. Anteroventral margin of front femur without piliform spinules although there may be a few minute, stout, widely spaced spines, with 2 large terminal spines; large pulvilli on 4 proximal tar- someres, tarsal claws strongly asymmetrical, simple, arolia well developed, as large as the MACROCERCA AND PERIPLANETA IN N. QLD smallest claw, Abdominal terga unspecialized, supraanal plate subtrigonal, apex shallowly in- dented (Fig. IF, right). Subgenital plate with a strongly curved distal division well from the lateral margin, forming a pair of con- tiguous valvular lobes (Fig. 1E). Colour. Variable. Dark specimens: Occiput light brown becoming darker on the vertex and continuing as a broad longitudinal dark brown band to the clypeus, background color whitish, labrum brown, its distal region whitish (Fig. LA). Pronotal disk reddish brown without markings, lateral areas hyaline, lateral margins narrowly yellowish (Fig. 1D). Tegmina yellowish brown, hyaline, with the subcostal region and the area of simple costal veins white, radial vein dark brown for a little more than half its length. Hind wing with subcostal and large part of the costal vein region white, distal part of the anterior field yel- lowish, posterior field practically colourless. Abdominal terga blackish with a narrow brown stripe mesad on the proximal segments, supraanal plate mostly brown, Abdominal sterna black, or some with irregular lateral maculae laterally and with the subgenital plate or subgenital plate and preceding segment reddish brown. Cerci reddish brown dorsad, darker brown ventrally. Coxae black, femora dark brown, tibiae light brown their outer margins dark brown, tarsomeres light brown with dark ventral margins. The amount of black is often variably reduced and most specimens are lighter than the above, Dark areas on the head are variably reduced (Fig. 1B,C) and may be absent completely. The lateral borders of the pronotum may be partly or com- pletely white or whitish. The abdomen may have some reddish hrown or brown, with some yel- lowish areas. Cerci and legs may be light brown, Measurements(d measurements include those from Roth, 1993; © in parentheses). Length, 16.5- 19.5 (16.5-21.0); pronotum length x width, 4.2- 4.7 x 4.4-5.0 (4.3-5.4 x 4.2-5.6); tegmen length, 16.7-18.9 (14.7-19.2); interocular width, 0.6-0.8 (0.8-0.9). Ootheca. The oothecae of the Blattidae (Blat- tinae and Polyzosteriinae) are remarkably uniform. The eggs are arranged vertically two by two and covered by a thick darkly sclerotized wall with a characteristic serrated keel, each tooth representing the position of a respiratory tubule connecting an egg chamber with the atmosphere (Roth,1968: figs 5-36). Only one partly formed notheca, that of Macrocerca strazanaci Roth, was previously known (Roth,1993: fig.5G). It differs strongly from the oothecae of other blat- 227 tids. Unfortunately the present 2 oothecae of Macrocerca shelfordi also are incompletely formed even though the amount protruding from the abdomen measures 5 mm in the largest specimen, Like thatof strazanaci, the keel region lacks serrations except for one minute tooth near the apex of the subgenital plate (Fig.1F, left, arrow). Whether or not the exposed part of the ootheca contains eggs was not determined. It 15 possible that this exposed region does not contain eggs and that the small tooth may be the region where the first egg is deposited, and the rest of lhe eggs are deposited (with minute serrations in- dicating their positions) in that part of the egg case hidden in the female's vestibulum. REMARKS This species was previously known only fram Key Island Macrocerca shiptona sp.nov. (Fig. 2) MATERIAL EXAMINED HoLorYPE. g, Shiptons Flat, nr Cooktown, Queensland, 15*47'S 145? 14" E, 19.x.1980, Т.А. Weir & К.А. Barrett, ANIC. ETYMOLOGY From Shiptons Flat, the type locality. DESCRIPTION Male. Head with interocular space less than distance between antennal sockets (Fig. 2A); an- tennae filamentous, about twice as long as the body. Pronotum suboval, slightly wider thàn long (Fig. 2B). Tegmina and wings fully developed extending beyond end of abdomen, the former with longitudinal and oblique discoidal sectors. Hind wing with branched media vein, cubitus vein with 6-8 complete (some of them with | or more branches) and 1-3 incomplete rami, apical triangle. subobsolete. Anteroventral margin of front femur with very fine setae (but not spinules), terminating in 2 large spines, ventral margins of mid and hind femora with few small, stout, widely spaced spines; 4 proximal tar- someres with large pulvilli, tarsal claws simple, strongly asymmetrical, arolia well developed, is large as the smallest claw. First abdominal ter- gum with a dense, longitudinal group of setac, and a pair of large groups on either side of it (Fig. 2D). Lateral corners of abdominal segment 7 acutely produced, the corners of the sixth tergum much less produced (Fig, 2C); supraanal plate 228 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 2. Macrocerca shiptona sp.nov., 3 holotype. A, head; B, pronotum; C, abdominal terga 7 to 10 (supraanal plate); D, setal modification on first abdominal tergum; E, subgenital plate (ventral). convexly rounded (Fig. 2C). Subgenital plate weakly asymmetrical, the left lateral margin more convex, styles similar, slender, sclerotized, inter- stylar margin almost straight (Fig. 2E), reaching apex of the supraanal plate. Genitalia completely hidden. Cerci about 4 times longer than the supraanal plate. Female. Unknown. Colour. Head with occiput pale yellowish, ver- tex with a dark brown transverse band, rest of face whitish (particularly between the eyes) with a mediolongitudinal reddish brown stripe and 6 small, distinct dots of the same colour, labrum reddish brown and whitish (Fig. 2A); maxillary palpomeres pale; antennae brown. Pronotal disk reddish brown, lateral border regions subhyaline with some opaque white areas (Fig. 2B). Tegmina with subcostal and most of the costal vein zones white, remainder uniformly brownish yellow, hyaline. Hind wing with the subcostal area and a MACROCERCA AND PERIPLANETA IN N. QLD FIG. 3. Macrocerca hopensis sp.nov., 3 holotype. A, head; B, pronotum; C, abdominal terga 7-10 (supraanal plate); D, setal gland on first abdominal tergum; E, hind wing; F, subgenital plate (ventral; left style broken). small distal region of the proximal costal veins white,, distal part of the anterior field brownish yellow, posterior field colourless. Abdominal terga brown with wide lateral regions slightly darker. Abdominal sterna with the last three seg- ments brown, the more anterior segments mostly black with some small lighter brown lateral spots. Cerci brown, dorsal surface somewhat lighter. Legs brown. Measurements. Length, 18.2; pronotum length x width, 4.7 x 5.0; tegmen length, 19.0; inter- ocular width, 0,8, Macrocerca hopensis sp.nov. (Fig. 3) MATERIAL EXAMINED HOLOTYPE: d, 14km W by N of Hope Vale mission, 230 nr Cooktown, Queensland, 15°16°S 144° 59'E, 7- 10.v.1981, D.C.F. Rentz, Stop 34, ANIC, ETYMOLOGY For the Hope Vale mission- DESCRIPTION Male.Interocular space less than the distance between antennal sockets (Fig. 3A). Pronotum suboval slightly wider than long (Fig. 3B). Teg- mina and wings fully developed extending beyond the abdomen, the former with lon- gitudinal and oblique discoidal sectors. Hind wing with branched media vein, cubitus vein with 6 or 7 complete {some of thern forked 1 or more times), and | incomplete branches, apical triangle absent (Fig. ЗЕ). Front femur with a row of minute setae, some of them of the same length but shorter and finer than spinules, with 2 large ter- minal spines; very few or no large spines on the ventral surfaces of the mid and hind femora: large pulvilli on 4 proximal tarsomeres, tarsal claws simple, strongly asymmetrical, arolia well developed, as large as the smaller claw. First abdominal tergum specialized with a dense lon- gitudinal group of setae medially and 4 setal groups of various sizes on either side of the mid- dle one (Fig. 3D). Posterolateral comer of the seventh abdominal tergum acutely produced, supraanal plate trigonal, apex rounded (Fig. 3C), Cerci about 4 times longer the the supraanal plate. Subgenital plate almost symmetrical, styles elon- gated, slender, sclerotized (the left one is missing but probably is similar to the intact one), inter- stylar margin straight (Fig. 3F). Genital phal- lomeres protrude from under the supraanal plate and the hook curves from the left side with its blunt apex reaching the right phallomere. Female. Unknown. Colour. Occiput and vertex of head black, with a white inverted trigonal macula between the eyes and upper half of the antennal sockets, the face down to the clypeus and mandibles blackish with some reddish tint, mandibles mostly pale vel- lowish, clypeus light reddish, labrum reddish brown, the distal region yellowish (Fig. ЗА}. Pronotal disk reddish brown with 4 small, weak dots on the distal half, lateral border regions subhyaline, the margin area white (Fig. 3B). Teg- mina reddish brown, the subcostal and most of the costa] vein regions white, radial vein dark. Hind wing with subcostal region and distal parts of some of the proximal costal veins white, the distal region of the anterior field dark brown, the remainder with a yellowish tinge. posterior field MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM pale (Fig. 3E). Abdominal terga with a brown medial longitudinal stripe, lighter brown on either side of it and with broader dark brown in the lateral zones (Fig. 3C), Abdominal sterna com- pletely black. Cerci reddish dorsally, dark brown ventrally. Legs with coxae and tibiae dark brown, femora blackish brown, tarsi lighter brown. Measurements. Length, 21.0; pronotum length x width, 4.8 x 5.0; tegmen length, 20.5; inter- ocular width, 0.6. Periplaneta Burmeister Princis (1966: 405; 1971: 1145) catalogued 47 species of Periplaneta world wide and Asahina (1980: 103) added 2 new species and 3 new combinations, Princis (1966: 446) included Periplaneta basedowi Tepper from South Australia but that species belongs in Ataxigamia (Rentz & Cameron,1983:7). Mackerras (1968: 560) listed the following 5 species of Blattinae, all introduced into Australia and circumtropical domiciliary pests, although some may be found outdoors: P. americana (Linnaeus), P. australasiae (Fabricius) (both widespread in towns in tropical and subtropical parts of Queensland), P. brunnea (Burmeister) (= P. ig- nota Shaw) (Queensland), Blatta orientalis Lin- naeus (South Australia), Neostylopyga rhombifolia (Stoll) (Northem Territory). Mack- erras (1968: 560) provided a key to distinguish these species, and Peck & Roth (1992: 2204, fig. 2A-L) did the same for 3 species of Periplaneta. I have also examined a specimen of another cir- cumtropical domiciliary pest, Periplaneta fuliginosa (Serville) from Iron Range, Dr G. B. Monteith sent me 5 specimens of a Periplaneta that occurs in a natural rainforest at Iron Range in northern Queensland, and which 1 describe below as new. I am also including some Australian records of 4 other domiciliary species of Periplaneta. Periplaneta americana (Linnaeus) MATERIAL EXAMINED Queensland, ANIC; Green 1s., 28kms NE of Cairns, Qld, 18, 1, 1.iv.1988, D.C,F. Rentz, Stop A-38, Periplaneta brunnea (Burmeister) MATERIAL EXAMINED Northern Territory, ANIC: Flying Boat Bast, Groote Eylandt, L2 , ix.1940. Queensland, ANIC: Roma Dis- trict, 19. MACROCERCA AND PERIPLANETA IN N. QLD 231 B 2mm 2mm FIG. 4. Periplaneta aboriginea sp.nov. A-E, d holotype; F, 9 paratype from Gordon's Mine Area. A, head; B, setal gland on first abdominal tergum; C, pronotum; D, terminal abdominal segments (dorsal); E, subgenital plate (ventral); F, terminal abdominal terga. REMARKS Periplaneta fuliginosa (Serville) Both females have slightly reduced tegmina А MATERIAL EXAMINED and wings that only reach to the end of the ab- — New South Wales, ANIC: Sydney (Greenacre), 1 d, Н.М. Cameron, (Revesby), 1 9, х.1984-1.1985, L.V. domen. Barnet. 232 Periplaneta australasiae (Fabricius) MATERIAL EXAMINED Queensland, ANIC: Mt Carbine, 2 d, 19, 5.v,1945, T.W. Gamble; Foleyvale, Aboriginal Res., 4 3 <, 10- 254.1988, 2 d с, 20- 25.1.1968, G. Hangay; Atherton (CSIRO Labs), 17°17'S 145°29°E, 1 d, 3.4. 1988, 1 9, 20.1.1988, 1 9, 221i1.1988, D.C.F. Rentz, Stop А-1; Green Island, 28km NE of Cairns, Qd, 16°46°$ 145°59°E, 1 5, 1.1у.1988, D.C.F, Rentz, Stop A-38; Heron I., 84km SW by W of Gladstone, 23°26°S 151°5S°E, 1 d, 1 9, 15- 19.vii.1983, D.C.F. & B.G F. Rentz, Stop 32. New South Wales. ANIC: Durras North, nr Batemans Bay, 1 9 , iv.1981, Н.М. Cameron. Periplaneta aboriginea sp.nov. (Fig. 4) MATERIAL BXAMINED HOLOTYPE: д, ABRS area 2, 142745 E 11°40'S, Dividing Range, Cape York Pen, NQ [Queensland]. 5-12.1i.1976, О.В. Monteith, ОМВ А. PARATYPES: Queensland. ОМВА: Coll. С.В. Mon- teith: Gordon's Mine Area, Iron Range, NQ, rainforest, 1 ©, 12-18.1,1976; Dividing Range. 1Skm W of Cap- tain Billy Creek, Cape York Pen., МО, 142°45'Е, 18°40°S, 1 ® (in very poor condition), 4-9.vii,1975; Mt Tozer, Iron Range, МО, 1-1500°, 1 ©, 30,iv,1973; fron Range, Cape York, Pen., NQ, 1 с, 30.vi.-4.vil.1977 (retained in MCZ). DESCRIPTION Male. Head with interocular space less than the distance between antennal sockets (Fig. 4A). Pronotum suboval, widest near the middle (Fig. 4C). Tegmina and wings fully developed extend- ing beyond end of abdomen. Anteroventral mar- gin of front femur with 15-18 stout spines that decrease slightly in length distad, the 2 or 3 terminal spines longer; posteroventral margin with 4 spines; ventral margins of mid and hind legs with 6-8 large spines; small apical pulvilli on 4 proximal tarsomeres, tarsal claws simple, sym- metrical, arolia small. First abdominal tergum with a large, dense group of setae anteromedially (Fig. 4B). Supraanal plate not membranous, hind mergin with a broad, shallow, V-shaped excava- пол forming a pair of apically rounded lobes that rezch the hind margin of the supraanal plate, their distal halves with long slender setae (Fig. 4D); subgenital plate transverse, styles slender, similar, almost equal to the length of the plate, interstylar margin truncate (Fig. 4E). Cerci slender, dorsally flattened, almost 3 times the length of the supraanal plate (Fig. 4D). MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Colour. Head yellowish brown, labrum, maxi- llary and labial palpi reddish brown; antennae brown. Pronotum with a reddish brown blotch, lighter mediolongitudinally, and surrounded by ellowish (Fig. 4C). Tegmina dark reddish wn. Hind wing with anterior field yellowish brown, darker along the costal vein area. Proximal 4 abdominal tergà yellowish brown, the remaining segments dark brown, with the distal region of the supraanal plate lighter brown (Fig. 4D). Abdominal sterna uniformly reddish brown. or with some segments darker on their distal halves. Cerci and legs reddish brown. Female. Supraanal plate not membranous, hind margin with a narrow V-shaped excision (Fig. AF), the rounded apexes of the lobes reach the tips of the subgenital plate valves which can be seen 1n dorsal view between the exciston. Colour es- sentially similar to that of the male. Measurements (9 in parentheses). Length, 31.5-35.2 (34.0- 40.0); pronotum length x width, 8.1-9.0x 10.4-11,6(9.0- 9,5 x 12.2-12.6); tegmen length, 33.1-36.4 (34.5-?); interocular width, 1.1- 1.3 (1.5-1.6). REMARKS The habitus of this species resembles that of P. americana but the male has a large tergal gland on the first abdominal segment and its supraanal plate differs; the male American cockroach lacks a tergal gland, its supraanal plate is membranous and differently shaped (cf. Fig. 4D with fig. 2E in Peck & Roth, 1992). Tncertae sedis ?Periplaneta australis (MacLeay, 1827) Blattà australis MacLeay, 1827: 454 (male). ?Periplaneta australiy (MacLeay): Kirby, 1904: 142; Shelford, 1910: 19; Princis, 1966: 456. HOLOTYPE d, №. Australia (not examined). REMARKS According to the Curator of the MacLeay Museum, the type of Blatta australis is not in that museum (G. B. Monteith, pers.comm.). As earlier workers have indicated, it is impos- sible to place this species based on the description given by Macleay (1827) which did not even suggest its size. MACROCERCA AND PERIPLANETA IN М, QLD ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I thank Dr D.C.F. Rentz of CSIRO and Dr С.В. Monteith of the Queensland Museum for sending me specimens. I am grateful to the Australian Biological Resources Study (ABRS) for partial support. LITERATURE CITED ASAHINA, S. 1980. Taxonomic notes on non- domiciliary Periplaneta species from the Ryukyus, Taiwan, Hong Kong and Thailand. Japanese Journal of Sanitary Zoology 31: 103- 115. KIRBY, W. 1904. ‘A synonymic catalogue of Orthoptera'. Vol. I. (British Museum (Natural History): London). MACKERRAS, M.J. 1968. Australian Blattidae (Blat- todea). IX. Revision of Polyzosteriinae, and Blattinae. Australian Journal of Zoology 16: 511- 575. MACLEAY, W.S. 1827. Catalogue of insects, col- lected by Captain King, R.N. Pp. 438-469. In King, P.P. (ed.), ‘Narrative of a survey of the intertropical and western coasts of Australia. Per- 233 formed between the years 1818 and 1822’. Vol. П. (John Murray: London). PECK, S. & ROTH, L.M. 1992. Cockroaches of the Galápagos Islands, Ecuador, with descriptions of three new species (Insecta: Blattodea). Canadian Journal of Zoology 70: 2202- 2217. PRINCIS, K. 1966. Blattariae, Suborder Blattoidea, Fam.: Blattidae, Nocticolidae. Pp. 403-614. In Beier, M. (ed.), *Orthopterorum catalogus'. Pt. 8. (W. Junk: s'- Gravenhage). 1971. Blattariae, Suborder Epilamproidea, Fam.: Ectobiidae. Pp. 1041-1224. In Beier, M. (ed.), *Orthopterorum catalogus’. Pt. 14. (W. Junk: s’- Gravenhage). RENTZ, D.C.F. & CAMERON, H.M. 1983. Catalogue of Australian cockroaches. CSIRO, Division of Entomology Technical Papers 21: 1-37. ROTH, L.M. 1968. Oothecae of the Blattaria. Annals of the Entomological Society of America 61: 83-111. 1993. The genus Macrocerca Hanitsch with descriptions of new species (Blattidae: Macrocer- cinae, subfam. n.). Entomologica Scandinavica 24: 343-360. SHELFORD, R. 1910. Orthoptera. Fam. Blattidae, Subfamily Blattinae (=Periplanetinae). Genera Insectorum 109: 1- 27. 234 NEW DATA ON CRYPTOBLEPHARUS FUHNI, A POORLY KNOWN SKINK FROM QUEENSLAND. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1) 234.1994:- Cryp- tablepharus fuhni Covacevich & Ingram, 1978 is known only from its type locality, the Melville Range (14°16'S, 144°30"E) on Cape York Peninsula, This range is composed entirely of granite boulders. C. fuhni is recognised as warranting special status in management plans by McDonald et al. (1991), as ‘2RC’ ie.’ with a very restricted distribution ... with a maximum geographic distribution of less than 100km .., rare г but not currently considered endangered or vulnerable ... within a national park... ". Description of C. fuhni was based solely on museum specimens (8), all of which had been damaged by dust shot. A photograph of living С. fukni was not available for the description, and none has been published in any of the major identification guides to Australia reptiles. (e.g. Wilson & Knowles, 1988; Ehmann, 1992; Cogger, 1992). No additional specimens of C. fuhni have been collected, and it remains poorly known, presumably because of the remoteness of the Melville Range. In September, 1992, 1 visited the type locality of C. fudint from Bathurst Вау (14°13'S, 144?22' E) to Cape Melville (14*10' S, 144?30' E) and was able to photograph (Figs 1-3), and examine closely specimens of C. fuhni from different parts of the range. The colour and pattern description of C. fuhni of Covacevich & Ingram (1978) is accurate. The type specimens are young adults. All were collected on black boulders remote FIG.1, C. fuhni juvenile, from black boulders near Bathurst Bay. E Eos 7 i FIG. 2. C. fuhni old adult, from black boulders near Bathurst Bay. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 3. C. fuhni typical pale-coloured specimen, from pale sea-washed boulders, Cape Melville. from the sea, near Bathurst Bay (J, Covacevich, pers. comm.). Juveniles from this arca are similar, but more distinctly pat- terned. Large, apparently old adult specimens have the same pattern às juveniles and young adults, but it is poorly defined and on a dull brown-black background (vs black). At Cape Melville the boulders of the range enter the sea, and are wave-washed to a pale grey. Неге the skinks retain the distinct pattern, but have a pale greyish background colour. Individuals of C. fuhni are very common on the Melville Range. They are extremely agile, fast-moving skinks which spend the day foraging on the boulder faces. During the hottest part of the day, they retreat to crevices and cracks in the boulders or into the deep shade between them. Acknowledgements Jeanette Covacevich alerted me to the value of these photographs and assisted me to present this note. Literature Cited Cogger, H.G. 1992. ‘Reptiles & amphibians of Australia’. (Reed Books: Chatswood). Covacevich, J. & Ingram, G.J. 1978. An undescribed species of rock dwelling Cryptoblepharus (Lacertilia: Scin- FAL Сш of the Queensland Museum 18(2): 151-154. Ehmann, Н. 1992, ‘Encyclopedia of Australian animals. Reptiles’. (Collins Angus & Robertson Pty Ltd; Pymble). McDonald, K.R, Covacevich, J.A., Ingram, GJ. & Couper, P.J. 1991, The status of frogs and reptiles. Pp.338-345. In Ingram, С.) & Raven, RJ. (eds), "An atlas of Queensland's frogs, reptiles, birds & mammals’, (Board of Trustees, Queensland Museum: Brisbane). Wilson, S.K. & Knowles, D.G. 1988. “Australia's reptiles. A photographic reference to the terrestrial reptiles of Australia’, (W. Collins Pty Lid; Sydney). Lewis Roberts, Shipton's Flat, via Cookrown, Queensland 4072, Australia; 26 February 1994. A NEW SPECIES OF FRESHWATER CRAB (SUNDATHELPHUSIDAE) FROM CAPE YORK PENINSULA JOHN W. SHORT SHORT, J.W. 1994 06 01: A new species of freshwater crab (Sundathelphusidae) from Cape York Peninsula. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35 (1): 235-240. Brisbane, ISSN 0079-8835. А new species of freshwater sundathelphusid crab, Holthuisana (Austrothelphusa) tigrina, from a single locality on Cape York Peninsula, northern Queensland is described. It resembles H. (A.) transversa (Martens, 1869) from which it is distinguished by its distinctive striped colour, carapace proportions, relatively large eyes, and features on the telson, third maxilliped and inferior orbital margin. [ ] Crustacea, Sundathelphusidae, Holthuisana, new species, Queensland, freshwater, taxonomy, biology. Jahn W. Short, Queensland Museum, PO Box 3300, Sourh Brisbane, Queensland 4101, Ausrralia; 27 November 1993. Australian sundathelphusid crabs have been revised by Riek (1951), Bishop(1963) and briefly reviewed by Bott (1970). Bishop (1963) recog- nised H. (А.) agassizi (Rathbun, 1905), H. (A.) angustifrons (A, Milne Edwards,1869), H. (А.) raceki (Bishop,1963), H. (A.) transversa (Mar- tens, 1869), H. (A,) valeniula (Riek, 1951), and H, (A.) wasselli (Bishop,1963). Bott (1970) con- sidered only two of these valid, H. (А.) angus- tifrons and Н. (A.) transversa. He suggested that the other four fall within the range of variation of Н. (A.) angustifrans but formally synonymised only Н. (A.) agassizi. Furthermore his findings were based on only 25 specimens from a very restricted range of localities. Presumably on the basis of Bott’s work, Williams (1980) and Hor- witz (1990) listed only two Australian species. I have examined the Queensland Museum's exten- sive collection of ssundathelphusids and support Bishop (1963) in recognising six species. Holthuisana (А.) tigrina sp.nov. was first brought to my attention by Mr Leigh Bulley in 1991. Two live specimens were sent to the Queensland Museum for identification and were immediately recognisable as new to science on jhe basis of their distinctive striped colouration and external morphology. Mr Gordon Staples provided further specimens, including females and small males, from the type locality. MATERIAL AND METHODS All material examined is housed in the Queensland Museum. The description is based primarily on the male holotype with paratypic variation included as comments within. paren- theses. Measurements were made using vernier calipers and line drawings with the aid of a camera lucida. The first pereiopods are referred to as chelipeds. Abbreviations used in text: CB, carapace breadth; QM, Queensland Museum; SWQ, southwest Queensland. SYSTEMATICS Holthuisana (Austrothelphusa) tigrina sp.nov. (Pigs 1-6) MATERIAL EXAMINED HOLOTYPE: QMW18822, & (35.4mm CB), head- waters of One Mile Ck, a tributary of the Alice River, 15°27'S, 143°16'E, Apr 1991, L. Bulley. PARATYPES: QMW 17162, д (36.0mm CB), same col- lection data as holotype; QMW19027, 78 d. (21.5 - 29.7mm CB), 5? 9 (21.8 -25.1mm CB), same locality data as holotype, Apr 1990, G. Staples. DESCRIPTION Cephalotherax. Dorsal carapace strongly con- vex longitudinally, moderately convex transver- sely; breadth c.1.25 x length, с.2.1 x depth; dorsum punctate, glabrous; front slightly con- cave; anterolateral regions lacking striae, mar- gins feebly carinate, with V-shaped notch between exorbital angle and epibranchial margin; supraorbital and exorbital angles entire, inferior orbital angle distinctly crenulate; posterolateral regions converging, straight, with distinct obli- que striae; posterior margin more or less straight; epigastric regions poorly defined; cervical grooves poorly defined; gastric groove distinct, H-shaped; posterior metagastric region rugose: urogastric region well defined; cardiac and intes- 236 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG.1. Holthuisana (Austrothelphusa) tigrina sp.nov., holotype d, QMW 18822. Dorsal and ventral views. Scale divisions in mm. tinal regions poorly defined; branchial regions uninflated; subhepatic regions smooth; suborbital regions slightly rugose; pterygostomial regions rugose anteriorly with anterior mesial margin crenulate; posterior margin of epistome smooth, median triangle distinct, tuberculate. Eyes large, eyestalks distally expanded to accommodate large cornea. Third maxillipeds of typical shape NEW FRESHWATER CRAB 237 for genus; punctate; ischial suture well defined along length, deep, narrow. Sternum glabrous except for sparse setae on somites 2—3; well developed concentric striae across somites 2—4 (poorly developed or absent in smaller paratypes), somites 5—8 distinctly punctate; sulcus between somites 2—3 obsolete medially and laterally, formed into broad sub- medial depressions (sulcus variable in small paratypes); sulcus between somites 3—4 also ob- solete medially and laterally, formed into deep broad submedial depressions (poorly developed in small paratypes), well separated from ab- dominal cavity. Chelipeds. Smooth; dimorphic (isomorphic in female and small male paratypes). Major cheliped with fingers gaping, pollex dentate along opposing edge, teeth short, blunt, one tooth larger than rest, positioned с. halfway along op- posing edge, dactylus similarly dentate with large —— ине FIG.2. Holthuisana (Austrothelphusa) tigrina sp.nov., holotype d (35.4mm CB), QMW18822. Carapace frontal view. tooth slightly proximal to that of pollex, pollex strongly tapering in distal half, ventral manus FIG.3. A, Holthuisana (Austrothelphusa) tigrina sp.nov., paratype d, QMW17162; B, Holthuisana (Austrothel- phusa) transversa (Martens, 1869), QMW11331, Mt Leonard Stn, SWQ. Third maxilliped. Scale divisions in millimetres. 238 FIG.4. Holthuisana (Ausirothelphusa) tigrina sp.nov., holotype d, QMW18822. Chelipeds. longer than pollex, dactylus slightly arched, car- pus with large dorsomesial spine and smaller ventromesial spine, merus with subterminal transverse groove dorsally and subterminal transverse carina ventrally, Minor cheliped with fingers slender, touching on distal half, both fingers bearing small teeth, pollex length equal to length of ventral manus, carpus and merus similar to major cheliped Abdomen. Abdomen punctate; tapering abrupt- ly from third to fifth segments; first three seg- ments very broad; abdomen length c.1.2 x basal breadth (1.0 - 1,2 in paratypes); telson damaged (bell-shaped, length about equal to breadth in male paratypes); penultimate segment damaged (breadth c.1.3-1.5 x length in male paratypes). Pleopods without unique features for subgenus, COLOUR Carapace tan with conspicuous black markings persistent after alcohol preservation; transverse FIG,5. Holthuisana (Austrothelphusa) tigrina sp.nov., holotype d, QMW18822. A, ventral left first pleopod; B, ventral left second pleopod. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG.6. Holthuisana (Austrothelphusa) tigrina sp.nov., paratype d (36.0mm CB), QMW17162. Sternum and abdomen. epigastric band, pair of anterolateral bands, metagastric band (occasionally interconnects with anterolateral bands), two pairs of posterolateral blotches, and an intestinal blotch. Chelipeds cream with black distal band on merus, carpus, and superior palm; superior carpus. and fingers tinged with purple. Merus of ambulatory legs yellow, distal segments purple. Eyestalks with mesial, longitudinal, black stripe, BIOLOGY The new species was collected from a small seasonal creek, c.200km from the sea- This creek only flows during the wet season (November to April), at which time the crabs number in their thousands in shallow water (L. Bulley, pers.comm.). Gordon Staples has observed that during the wet season the crabs are relatively docile when handled and are very active during the day. Aquatic predators are absent and they are often very conspicuous on clean sandy substrates where their colour pattern is of little value for camouflage. In the dry season they occupy sandy burrows amongst the roots of fringing paperbark trees (Melaleuca sp.), Other freshwater crabs occur in the same area but are much rarer and are seen in the order of one specimen for every 100 specimens of the new species (one small specimen of Н. (A.) agassizi was collected with paratypes of the new species by G. Staples). H. (A.) tigrina was first introduced to the Syd- ney aquarium trade in 1991. It has since sold steadily under the market name ‘tiger crab’ along with another freshwater crab marketed as the NEW FRESHWATER CRAB 143" E 143*30"E ]44^00'E One Mile Ch Dickies Ck ` ioyos Kimba Li 143° МЕ L400 E FIG.7. Location of One Mile Ck, the type locality of Holthutsana (Austrothelphusa) tigrina sp.nov, ‘porcelain crab’ (N, Haliwell, pers.comm). The ‘porcelain crab’ from the Reedy St George River north of Mt Carbine is an interesting variant of H. (A.) agassizi (Rathbun,1905) in which the broad, centrally-constricted, median carapace band, often seen in the species, is very clearly defined and unmottled. DISTRIBUTION Known from the type locality, One Mile Creek, a tributary of the upper Alice River, Mitchell River catchment (Fig.7). ETYMOLOGY Latin tigrinus, spotted like a tiger, and referring to the conspicuous black markings on the carapace and chelipeds. SYSTEMATIC POSITION The new species is most similar to H. (A.) transversa (Martens,1869), and differs from other Australian species in the following com- bination of characters: anterolateral regions of the carapace lacking distinct striations, not inflated, and without a distinct anterolateral tooth; frontal margin of carapace slightly concave or straight; carapace moderately deep, depth about half max- imum carapace breadth, Н. (A.) tigrina can be distinguished from Н. (A.) transversa by: the telson being as long as broad 239 whereas іп Ё. (A.) transversa it is distinctly broader than long; the median suture on the 18- chium of the third maxillipeds much narrower and more sharply defined; the inferior orbital angle distinctly crenulate whereas in H. (A.) transversa it is entire; the carapace much nar- rower, breadth c.1.25 x CL as opposed to c.1.40 in H. (A.) rransversa, and less strongly convex longitudinally; posterolateral carapace margins converging much more strongly in H. (A,) transversa; the eyes much larger with the cyes- talks distally expanded to accommodate the large cornea in the new species. The distinctive striped colouration of H. (A.) tigrina sp.nov. also readily distinguishes it from Н. (A.) transversa, and other Australian species. SURVIVAL STATUS Vulnerable, due to its apparently restricted dis- tribution, Although reportedly abundant during, the wet season in One Mile Ck, the area is cur- rently leasehold pastoral land and lies largely within the Alice River Mining Field (T. Pratt, Cook Shire Council, pers.comm.). Gold mining is a foreseeable threat to the habitat of the species. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I am indebted to Leigh Bulley for bringing this interesting crab to my attention and donating live specimens to the OM. Mr G. Staples provided biological information and additional specimens from the type locality, as well as material of the ‘porcelain crab’. Mr Norm Haliwell, Riverside Aquariums gave details on the marketing of the species in Sydney. Peter Davie of the Queensland Museum is thanked for his constructive com- ments on the manuscript. Tina Pratt, Cook Shire Council, provided information on current land zoning of One Mile Ck. Jeff Wright and Gary Cranitch printed the photographs. LITERATURE CITED BISHOP, Ј,А. 1963. The Australian freshwater crabs of the family Potamonidae (Crustacea: Decapoda). Australian Journal of Marine and Freshwater Research 14:218-238. BOTT. R. 1970. Die süsswasserkrabben von Europa, Asien, Australien und ihre stammesgeschichte. Eine revision der Potamoidea und der Parathel- phusoidea (Crustacea, Decapoda), Abhandlun- gen hrsg. von der Senckenbergischen Naturforschenden Gesellschaft, Frankfurt 526:1- 338. 240 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM HORWITZ, P. 1990. The conservation status of RATHBUN, M.J. 1905. Les crabes d’eau douce Australian freshwater Crustacea with а (Potamonide). Nouvelles Archives du Muséum provisional list of threatened species, habitats and EA | potentially threatening processes. Australian Na- d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris (4)7:159-323. tional Parks and Wildlife Service Report Series RIEK, E.F. 1951. The Australian freshwater crabs No.14:1-121, (Potamonidae). Records of the Australian MARTENS, H. von. 1869. Uber einige neue Crus- taceen. Monatsberichte der Kóniglichen Preus- Museum 22:358-367. | sischen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin WILLIAMS, W.D. 1980. ‘Australian freshwater life. M EE A fa ЕЕ, , isl The invertebrates of Australian inland waters'. ILNE A ‚А. . Revision du genre Thel- ў l phusa. Nouvelles Archives du AT Rin d'- (The Macmillan Company of Australia Pty Ltd: Histoire Naturelle, Paris 5:161-191. South Melbourne). AN ECOLOGIC AND BIOGEOGRAPHIC STUDY OF A NEW ГЕКТТАКҮ LAND SNAIL FROM MIDEASTERN QUEENSLAND (PULMONATA: CARYODIDAE) JOHN STANISIC Stanisic, J, 1994 06 01: An ecologic and biogeographic study of a new Tertiary land snail from mideastem Queensland. (Pulmonata: Caryodidae). Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1); 241-247, Brisbane, ISSN 0079-8835, A new fossil land snail, Praecaryodes antiquata genel sp.nov, is described from the Middle to Late Eocene deposits of the Rundle Formation, near Rockhampton, midesstern Queensland, The species is assigned to the Caryodidae. The phyletic, biogeographic and ecological implications of this discovery are discussed. The new species suggests early diversification of the Caryodidae, [ ]Mollnsca, Caryodidae, Praecaryodes antiquala sR nov., ecology, blogeography, Eocene, land snail. John Stanisic; Queensland Museum, PO Box 3300, South Brisbane, Queensland 4101, Australia; 14 February 1994. Few Australian fossil land snails are known and most are from Pliocene-Pleistocene sedi- ments of southern Australia (e.g.Strzelecki, 1845; Johnston, 1880; Ludbrook, 1978, 1984). Mc- Michael (1968) recorded Meracomelon lloydi from the Carl Creck limestones of north-west Queensland and the Northern Territory; Kershaw (1988a) discussed several fossil land snails of problematic affinity from Pleistocene deposits in the Kent Group of islands, Bass Strait; and Hill et al. (1970) recorded Pedinogyra sp. (family Caryodidae) from a limestone quarry at Marmor, south of Rockhampton, mideastern Queensland (hereafter MEQ). The discovery of Praecaryodes antiquata gen.et sp.nov, in Middle to Late Eocene deposits of MEQ is a significant addition to the Australian fossil land snail fauna, The age of the fossil and its relationships to the extant Gondwanan family Caryodidae provide a basis for biogeographic speculation about the evolution of land snails in eastern Australia, The climatic and habitat shifts which have occurred in eastern Queensland since the early Tertiary have favoured the development of dry-adapted species, This provides an ecological framework for discussing caryodid history in the region, All material studied is in the collections of the Queensland Museum (hereafter prefixed QMF). STRATIGRAPHY, AGE AND PALAEOENVIRONMENT The Narrows Reds (Fig. 1), NW of Gladstone, MEQ, which include the Curlew and Rundle For- mations and Worthington Beds (Henstridge and Missen, 1982} are a Tertiary non-marine se- quence containing oil shale seams. These richly fossiliferous beds contain ostracods (Beasicy, 1945), fish (Hills, 1943), reptile fragments (crocodile and turtle) and flora (Foster, 1979. Foster & Harris, 1981; Rowett, 1988). Freshwater gastropods ("Planorbidae) are common in some units (Coshell, 1983). The land snail remains were contained in the Claystone Unit of the Ram- say Crossing Seam within the Rundle Formation, Little data are available to independently cor- relate the Tertiary Basins of central and northem Queensland and most age determinations are based on long distance correlation with Tertiary sequences in Southern Australia. It has yet to be demonstrated that the northern Australian Ter- tiary floras can be conveniently reconciled with known sporc-pollen ranges from southeastern Australia. Given these shortcomings, the mast recent age estimate of the Rundle Formation is Middle to Late Eocene (Day et al., 1983). Thc depositional environment of the Ramsay Cross- ing Seam was interpreted as shallow lacustrime with lacustrine and pedogenic phases (Coshell, 1983), Occurrence of land snails among the predominantly freshwater fossil remains suggests that they are drift material which has been washed into the lagoon from surrounding arcas. Henstridge & Missen (1982) postulated a similar mechanism to explain the high levels of car- bonaceous maller among the oil shale. Information on the contemporancous vegeta- tion present in the area surrounding the Rundle Formation depositional environment is not avail- able, However, the presence of large amounts of carbonaceous material in the oil shales and the 242 e ^ Curtis Island ч \ EM M \ pd ^ Ea Ta {2 ah) = ganas! CURELSW FOBMATEUON = RUNDLE. FORMET ТОМ а WORTHINGTON PORMATTON LI FIG, 1.Locality map showing the Rundle Deposit and the Tertiary stratigraphic units in the Narrows Group, Map adapted from Henstridge & Missen (1982). Scale line = 1km. inference of high rainfall and humidity (Henstridge & Missen, 1982) suggest a tropical to subtropical closed forest. Fossil flora of the younger Curlew Formation indicates deposition in a low energy, freshwater swamp in an area of marginal tropical/subtropical closed forest. These interpretations correlate with a broader perspective of vegetational change in eastern Australia during the Eocene (Kemp, 1981) point- ing to a widespread closed-canopy rainforest early in the epoch, becoming more restricted (i.e. replaced by sclerophyllous elements) in the Mid- dle to Late Eocene when climate hegan to fluc- tuate. SYSTEMATIC PALAEONTOLOGY Family CARYODIDAE Thiele, 1926 Australian acavoid land snails have been tradi- tionally associated with the mesurethran family Acavidae which also included a number of species from Africa, India and South America (Zilch, 1959-60). Solem (19782) separated the Australian genera as à separate family, the Caryodidae, and placed it and the Acavidae near MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM the more advanced sigmurethran pulmonates. Tillier (1989) rejected this arrangement in favour of a single family. Smith (1984, 1992) also preferred to consider the Australian species as a distinct family and this system is followed here. The Caryodidae includes an unusual mix of shell types ranging from the depressedly conoidal Anoglypta Martens, 1860 and giant bulimoid Hedleyella Iredale, 1914 to the lenticular. thin- shelled Pandofella Iredale, 1933 and the flat- coiled, heavy-shelled Pedinogyra Albers, 1860, This led Iredale (1937) to place these genera in several different family units. Only thirteen ex- tant species are known (Smith, 1992). АП live in the moist forests of eastern Australia. Praecaryodes gen.nov. DIAGNOSIS Shell large and subglobose with a flattened spire. Shell sculpture predominantly radial with weak spiral grooves on the body whorl. Um- bilicus absent. Aperture ovate; lip thickened and reflected. TYPE SPECIES Praecaryodes antiquata sp.nov. ETYMOLOGY A combination of the Latin prae meaning early and the nominate genus of the family Caryodidae. Praecaryodes antiquata sp.nov. (Figs 2-5) MATERIAL EXAMINED HOLOTYPE: QMF13905, Rundle, MEQ, Collected by Southern Pacific Petroleum, August, 1985. PARATYPES: QMF13451, QMF17642, 2 specimens. Unit T claystone, Ramsay Crossing Seam, Rundle Formation, MEQ, open cut, L. Coshell. ETYMOLOGY Referring to the antiquity of the specimen. DESCRIPTION Shell large (damaged and distorted), sub- globose, diameter 41.94mm with 434 normally coiled whorls, the last greatly expanded and not descending in front. Spire and apex flat. Height 28.30mm, Height of body whorl 21.62mm. Protoconch 2 whorls, sculptured with fine, crowded, weakly protractively sinuated radial ribs. Post nuclear sculpture of numerous, fine, protractively sinuated radial ribs, becoming. A NEW TERTIARY LAND SNAIL 243 FIG. 2.Praecaryodes амдипа sp.nov., QMF13905, holotype. Drawing to show depressed shape and thickened lip (arrowed).|Drawimg by Alison Hill]. slightly less conspicuous on the body whorl, and irregularly spaced spiral grooves which are раг- ticularly noticeable on the body whorl. Umbilicus absent. Sutures weakly impressed. Whorls flat- tened above and below a weakly keeled periphery. Aperture ovate. Lip strongly thickened and reflected. Columella inserted obliquely. Parictal callus obscured. REMARKS In spite of the small amount of the material available for study, sufficient features are present to make familial placement possible. The flat- lened spire, sculpture, coiling pattern, whorl ex- pansion rate and reflected lip relate P, antiquata 1o the Caryodidae, in particular the flat-coiled Pedinogyra. However, the absence of an um- bilicus is a major departure from this genus and indicates à possible connection with the bulimoid earyodid genera. In Tasmania а few examples of the bulimoid form do have an umbilicus and occasionally, juveniles have an umbilicus which is lost with growth. This may indicate that an umbilicus was more common in ancestral forms of these species and that the non-umbilical lineage of Praecaryodes is distinct from these. Sphaerospira Mórch, 1867 (+Figuladra Iredale, 1933, Varohudru Iredale, 1933 and Ben- tosites Iredale, 1933) (family Camaenidae) have numerous species living in the rainforests of southeastern Queensland (һегеайег SEQ) and MEQ (Smith, 1992). These genera also have globose to subglobose shells which ofien lack an umbilicus. However they have almost obsolete adult sculpture, smooth protoconch, less ex- panded body whorl and weakly reflected lip. Хал- thomelon Martens, 1861 (family Camaenidae), fram the drier vine thickets of easlern Queensland, has a large, globose shell without an umbilicus and with conspicuous cancellate sculp- ture on the body whorl. However the protoconch is smooth and most importantly, the lip is nol reflected. Biogeographically. these eastern Australian camaenids are considered to be post-Miocene northern immigrants (Bishop, 1981), hence ap- pearing їп the region much later than Р. gnti- quata, DISCUSSION The Middle to Late Eocene age of Р, antiquata represents a marked chronological extension of the fossil record of Jand snails in Australia and significantly predates previous recards (Pliocene/Pleistocene). The presence of à reflected lip, a probable derived character within the Caryodidae, has important implications fur the timing of the first appearance of the family on the Australian land mass. A brief reappraisal of the relationships of extant caryodid genera is а necessary preamble to biogeographic considerations. CarRYODID RELATIONSHIPS Caryodids have an unusually diverse array of shell form yet Dartnall & Dartnall (1972) con- cluded that the genera were closely related on the basis of karyotype and reproductive anatomy. Their results segregated the Tasmanian Anog!yp- ta and Caryodes Albers, 1850 from the mainland Pygmipanda lredale, 1933, Hedleyella and Pedinogyra. Two remaining mainland genera - Brazieresia Iredale, 1933 and Pandofella -were not included in their study. Kershaw (1988a,b), utilising fundamental features. of shell morphol- ogy, substantially agreed with this interpretation. The separation of Anoglypta and Caryodes from mainland caryodids is supported by protoconch features. The nuclear sculpture of the Tasmanian. genera is characterised by distinct spiral cords which are irregularly and weakly cut into long segments by radial grooves (Kershaw, 1988 a,b). Mainland caryodids have more regular decussate apical sculpture. In Brazieresta and Pandofella this decussate nuclear sculpture is almost granular. These genera have thin, reduced shells and anatomical features consistent with an evolutionary move to slugdom. This may indicate a close relationship between them even though Pandofella has a genital diverticulum positioned similarly to that of Anoglypta (Stanisic, unpubl.). 244 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 3.Praecaryedes antiquata sp.nov. A-B, QMF13905, Rundle, MEQ, holotype; C-D, QMF17642, Rundle Formation, MEQ, paratype (internal cast). Scale units in mm. Solem (1978a) showed that arrangement of inter- nal structures in slug-like taxa were often related to spatial readjustments resulting from a reduc- tion in the visceral hump rather than representing primary phylogenetic changes. Brazieresta and Pandofella survive in cool moist, upland refugia in northern NSW (Brazieresta) and MEQ respec- tively and possibly represent highly specialised, temperate relicts of a single (monophyletic) lineage within the family. Pygmipanda, Hedleyella and Pedinogyra, dis- play shell features which indicate a long period of development by each under different ecologi- calregimes. Pygmipanda lives in the moist, warm to cool, temperate forests of central and southern New South Wales (NSW) and Victoria; Hed- leyella in the warm temperate and warm humid subtropical forests of northeastern NSW and SEQ; and Pedinogyra in the drier araucarian microphyll vine forests and semi-evergreen vine thickets of northeastern NSW, SEQ and MEQ. Shell form indicates specialisation to different adaptive zones. The reduced sculpture, low whorl numbers, inflated body whorls and large aper- tures of Hedleyella and Pygmipanda are adapta- tions consistent with life in humid, moist forest, In contrast the heavy and flat shell of Pedinogyra, with small, downwardly directed aperture and higher whorl numbers is adapted for life in a dry-forest habitat. Conchologically the position of Pedinogyra 15 the most difficult to reconcile within the caryodids. The discoid shape, wide umbilicus, heavy shell with thickened lip and strong radial apical sculpture are features which stand at odds with those of the other genera. Nonetheless, Ker- shaw (1988b) emphasised that Pedinogyra was a derived bulimoid taxon, citing the transition series within Hedleyella i.e. imperforate bulimiform [H. maconelli (Reeve, 1853)] to um- bilicate, globose, sub-auriform [H. falconeri (Gray, 1834)] as a means of deriving a flat-coiled A NEW TERTIARY LAND SNAIL 24 TETTE ` Im |1111, FIG. 4,Praecaryodes aniiquata sp.nov, QMF13451, Rundle Formation, MEQ, paratype (internal cast), A, top view; B, bottom view. Scale units in mm. shell from the more generalised bulimoid form. However, one feature of Pedinogyra which is not easily explained in the context of general caryodid patterns is the thickened reflected lip. Р, antiquata possesses features which are tran- sitional between the bulimoid caryodid forms and Pedinogyra - a depressedly globose bulimoid shell with small aperture and thickened, reflected lip. The latter character, rare within extant forms, indicates а possible close relationship with Pedinogyra. P. antiquata may be the moist forest ancestor of these modern-day, flat-coiled caryodids. CARYODID FOSSIL HISTORY Comparatively little information is available on other caryodid fossils. Hill et al. (1970) recorded a species of Pedinogyra from Pleistocene lime- stone deposits at Marmor, south of Rock- un hampton, MEQ. Subfossil Pedinogyra, possibly Pleistocene in age are also known from the Cam- moo and Olsen Caves, north of Rockhampton, MEQ (Stanisic, unpubl.). These are all con- sidered to be conspecific with an extant species, Pedinogyra minor (Mousson, 1869) (=nanna Iredale, 1937), which lives in the region. Kershaw (19882) discussed a fossil land snail from the calcareous beds (?Pleistocene) of the Kent Group of islands, Bass Strait, which may be related to Pedinogyra. Inspection of the shell (Queen Victoria Museum, Launceston - QVM:87.G.163) reveals an overall resemblance to Pedinogyra. However, compared with that genus, it has fewer whorls, smaller umbilicus and vague traces of regularly spaced incised spiral lines cutting across fine radial ribs on the last 1⁄4 whorl. The resulting cancellate pattern 1s not equivalent to that seen in extant caryodids but is more commonly associated with the shells of camivorous Rhytididae. Although the peripheral keel of the Tasmanian fossil is not present in any living Austrahan rhytidid, it is possessed by several New Zealand species of that family. BIOGEOGRAPHIC IMPLICATIONS The presence of a number of derived caryodid features (pronounced radial sculpture and thick- ened, reflected lip) in P. antiquata indicates that the adaptive radiation of the Caryodidae in central eastern Australia was probably completed much earlier i.c. beginning of the Tertiary or possibly Late Cretaceous. This would place familial origins contemporaneously with the emergence of the advanced, sigmurethran camaenids in northern land masses (Solem, 1978b). Hence rather than being ancestral to the helicoid sigmurethrans, the caryodids (and probably acavoids of Africa and India and South FIG. 5.Praecaryodes antiquata sp.nov., QMFI3451, paratype. Sectioned to show internal structure. Scale units in mm, America) may represent an equivalent and paral- lel level of snail evolution in southern land mas- ses. ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS The impetus for the initial radiation of the caryodids on the Australian land mass would have been enhanced hy the significant change in the nature of the flora from one dominated by conifers to one with a significant angiosperm component at the Cretaceous/Tertiary boundary. (Kershaw et al., 1991). The switch to a broad- leaved, closed-forest with a propensity for greater leaf fall would have favoured ‘moisture-loving’ snails by providing a new adaptive zone of leaf litter with moist to humid micro-environments and shelter.Subsequent distribution of the family in eastern Australia would have been greatly in- fluenced by {һе climatic and vegetational changes that took place in the latter part of the Tertiary and Quatemary (Kemp, 1981; Kershaw, 1981), The diversification of eastern. Australian rainforest into temperate, tropical and subtropical forms had its beginning in the Mid-Eocene (Kershaw etal., 1991), With the onset of the Miocene aridity phases “drier! subtropical rainforest developed where edaphic profiles were suitable and in the late Tertiary and Quaternary, mesorhermcele- ments in the north were confined ta montane refugia. P, antiguata lived in conditions which were wetler and cooler than MEQ today. Vegetation was dominated by Nothofagus forest types (Kemp, 1981), a conclusion supported by palynological evidence from the Rundle deposits (Foster, 1979). Significantly P. antiquata dis- plays some shell characters (comparatively thin shell, more conspicuous sculpture) which today are found in Pedinegyra rorabilis (Reeve, 1852) and P, effossa. These species live in marginally wetter areas (Border Ranges, Conway and Clarke Ranges respectively) at the periphery of the main mass of Pedinogyre. Creation of the Fitzroy dry corridor would have considerably changed conditions in the Rock- hampton - St Lawrence region and although refugia in MEQ (Sarina - Proserpine) enabled caryodids to survive [Pedinogyra effossa Iredale, 1937: Pandofella whitei (Hedley, 1912)) this drastic local change in environment probably Jed to the extinction of P, anriquata. Subsequent con- ditions would have favoured the development and dispersal of the comparatively dry-adapted, thicker, smoother shelled Pedinogyra hayii (Grif- fth & Pidgeon, 1933) - P. allani Iredale, 1937 - MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM P. minor in the araucarian vine forests of southeastern Queensland (with P. minor replac- ing Р. antiquata in the drier areas of the Gladstone - Rockhampton region). The colonising wave of northern camaenids (Sphaerospira s.l.) would have been able to take advantage of occasional later climatic shifts to wetter conditions and now occupy the microhabitats most probably favoured by P. an- tiguata in the past. CONCLUSIONS The discovery of Praecaryodes antiquata in the sediments ofthe Rundle Formation has important implications for understanding the evolution of the Caryodidae in eastern Australia. Shell fea- lures of this taxon indicate early diversification nf thc family on the Australian land mass which rivals the appearance of the camaenids in Laurasia, Climatic change since the Miocene not only led to the extinction of P. antiguata but also profoundly affected the evolution of the family which displays a preference for moist forests. The colonisation of the eastern Australian rainforests by camaenids from the Papua New Guinean region most likely usurped the adaptive zone (microhabitat) previously held by Praecaryodes. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Thanks are due to ESSO (Australia) and their joint venture partners Southern Pacific Petroleum and Central Pacific Minerals for making the matenal available for study. Lee Coshell (ESSO) provided stratigraphic data for the paratype material, The assistance of Ron Kershaw, Queen Victoria Museum, Tasmania m providing com- parative fossil material is gratefully acknow- ledged. The author is especially indebted to Andrew Rozetelds for bringing the material to his attention and for providing data and figures on the stratigraphic elements of the paper. The Queensland Museum Photography Section processed photographic illustrations. Finally thanks are due to Jennifer Mahoney for typing the manuscript, LITERATURE CITED BEASLEY, A.W. 1945, Ostracods of some Tertiary Basins, their bearing on the correlation of strata, Proceedings of the Royal Society of Queensland 56: 95-124. BISHOP. M.J. 1981. The biogeography and evolution of Australian land snails, Pp, 924-954, In Keast, A NEW TERTIARY LAND SNAIL. A. (ed.), ‘Ecological biogeography of Australia’. (W. Junk Publ.: The Hague, Netherlands). COSHELL, L. 1983. Cyclic depositional sequences in the Rundle oil-shale deposit. Proceedings of the First Australian Workshop on Oil-Shale: 25-30, DARTNALL, A.J. & DARTNALL, J.A. 1972. Notes on the reproductive anatomy and cytogenetics of some Australian acavacean molluscs. Australian Journal of Zoology 20: 79-81. DAY, R.W., WHITAKER, W.G., MURRAY, G.G., WILSON, I.H,, & GRIMES, K.G. 1983, Queensland geology. A companion volume to the 1:250,000 scale geological map (1975). Geologi- Tina of Queensland Publication 383; 1- 194, POSTER, С.В. 1979. Report on the Tertiary miospores from the Rundle oil-shale deposit. Queensland Govemment Mining Journal 80: 442-442. FOSTER, C.B. & HARRIS, W.K. 1981. Azolla capricornia sp.nav. First Tertiary record of Azol- la Lamarck (Salvinaceae) in Australia. Transac- tions of the Royal Society of South Australia 105: 195-204. HENSTRIDGE, D.A. & MISSEN, D.D. 1982. Geol- ogy of the oil-shale deposits within the Narrows Graben, Queensland, Australia. The American Association of Petroleum Geologists Bulletin 66: 719-731. HILL, D., PLAYFORD, G. & WOODS, J.T. 1970, Cainozoic fossils of Queensland. Pp. cz1-36. In Hill, D., Playford, С. & Woods, 1J. (eds), 'll- lustrations of fossil faunas and floras of Queensland’, (Queensland Palacontographical Society: Brisbane). HILLS, E.S. 1943. Tertiary freshwater fishes and crocodilian remains from Gladstone and Duarin- ga, Queensland. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 12: 96-100. IREDALE, Т. 1937. A basic list of the Jand Mollusca of Australia. Part П. Australian Zoologist 9(1): 1-39. JOHNSTON, R.M. 1880. Notes on the relations of the yellow limestone (travertin) of Geilston Bay. with other fluviatile and lacustrine deposits in Tasmania and Australia, together with the descriptions of two new fossil helices. Papers and Proceedings of the Royal Society of Tasmania 1879; 81-90 KEMP, E.M, 1981. Tertiary palaéogeography and the evolution of the Australian climate. Pp. 33-49. In Keast, A. (cd.), Ecological biogeography of Australia. (W. Junk Publ.: The Hague, Nether- lands). KERSHAW, A. 1981. Quaternary vegetation and en- vironments. Pp, 81-101. In Keast, A. (ed,), ‘Ecological biogeography of Australia’. (W. Junk Publ.: The Hague Netherlands). KERSHAW, A., SLUITER, LR. McEWAN MASON, 247 J.. WAGSTAFF. B.E, & WHITELAW, M. 1991. The history of rainforest in Australia - evidence from pollen. Pp. 1-16. In Werren, G. & Kershaw, А.Р. (eds,), "The rainforest legacy, Volume 3°. (Australian Government Publishing Service: Canberra). KERSHAW, К.С, 1988a, A study of the Caryodidae (Pulmonata) Part 1, Anoglypta launcestonensis (Reeve. 1853). Records of the Queen Victoria Museum 93: 1-24. 1988h. A study of the Caryodidae (Pulmonata) Part 11. Carvodes dufresnii (Leach, 1815). Records of the Queen Victoria Museum 94; 1-27, LUDBROOK, N.H, 1978, Quaternary molluscs af the western part of the Eucla Basin. Bulletin of the Geological Survey of Western Australia 125; 1- 286 1984, ‘Quaternary molluscs of South Australia. ' Department of Mines and Energy, South Australia, Handbook No.9. McMICHABL, D.F. 1968. Non-marine Mollusca from Tertiary rocks in northern Australia, Bureau of Mineral Resources, Geology and Geophysics Bulletin 80: 133-158. ROWLETT, A. 1988. Megafossil and microfossil floras of the Curlew Formation, Queensland, Un- ublished Ph.D. thesis, Department of Botany, niversity of Adelaide. SMITH, B.J. 1984. Regional endemism of the south- eastern Australian land molluse fauna, Pp. 178- 188. In Solem, A, & Van Bruggen, A.C. (eds), ‘World-wide snails. Biogcographical studies on non-marine Mollusca’, (E.J. Brill/Dr W. Back- buys: Leiden). 1992, Non-manne Mollusca. Pp. 1-405. In Houston, W.W.K. (ed.), “Zoological catalogue of Australia, Уо1.8`. (Australian Government Print- ing Service: Canberra), SOLEM, A. 19783. Classification of the land Mollus- ca, Pp. 49-97, In Fretter, V. and Peake, J. (eds), 'Pulimonates Vol, 2А. Systematics, evolution and ecology’ (Academic Press: London). 1978b, Cretaceous and early Tertiary camaenid land snails from western North America (Mollusca: Pumonaus). Journal of Paleontology 52; 581- 589. STRZELECKI, Р.Е. 1845. ‘Physical description of New South Wales and Van Diemens Land”. (Longman, Brown, Green and Longmans: Lon» don}. TILLIER, S. 1989. Comparative morphology, phylogeny and classification of land snails and slugs (Gastropoda: Pulmonata: Stylom- matophora). Malacologia 30: 1-303. ZILCH, A. 1959-60. Gastropoda Euthyneura. Рр. L- 834. In Schindewolf, О.Н, (ed,), ‘Handbuch der Palüzoologie'. (Borntrüger: Berlin - Zehlendorf}. зав THE IMPORTANCE OF RIPARIAN HABITATS TO VERTEBRATE ASSEMBLAGES IN NORTH QUEENSLAND WOODLANDS. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1):248, 1994. -– Northern Australia is characterised by [агре areas of seasonally dry eucalypt wood- land with праг systems forming a network af патам strips of relatively mesic habitat within the diner forests I is generally accepted that riparian habitats ore vital to these ecosystems. Riparian vegetation 1s generally more strüeturadt- ly arl floristically diverse than the surrounding woodland and could he expected ro conram a more diverse and abundant Fauna. The Australian wet/dry tropics has high seasonal variability in resource abundance as a result of the climalic differences hermeen the hot wet summers and dry winters. Riparian systerns within this ecosystem are likely to be vitally important in providing water, sheller and food for fauna, especially during the dry season: This paper is meant to be suggestive, not conclusive, in an attempt to promote research on riparian systems. "The observations discussed here were made during à Ver- Icbrate fauna survey of Dotswood Station to provide baseline information for an environmental impact assessment (Wil- liams et al., 1993). 2 The study area af 2220 km" { Datswood Statson) is situated approximately 50 km south-west of Townsville. Four major sites were chosen (A,B,C de Т>), each wilh up te four sub-sites. Sile E had no separe sub-sites and was only sampled once. Major babitat types and associated intensive sample sub sites were as follows:open woodland, А2, A3, B1, B3; open forest, B4, СІ, C4, 04; tall open foresv'closed forest, DI, D2, D3; riparian, Al, B2, C2, E; rocky outeraps, СЗ. The riparian sub-sites Al, B2, and C2 are characterised by dense stands of Метео fewcndendra olten with à mixed shrub laver, while site E consisted of patches of closed Tris- tartiopsis exiliflara gallery forest and more open Melalewer leucadendra / Callisteman spp. Forest. Woodland sub-sites were all much more open, drier and less floristically diverse than adjacent npanan swh-sites. The transition From the dense прапап vegetation fo reopen eucalypt woodland was usually abrupt (approximately 20 metres). The first faunal survey was conducted berween 8 A pril-3 May 199] (Jate wet/carly dry season) and the second between 7 Auigust-25 October (late dry season), Bach sub-site was sampled by small manimal trapping, pit trapping, observation- al transects (for birds), spotlighting, active searching and mist netting (bats). For details of site selection, sampling design, techniques and results see Williams cial, (1993) Mostobservations indicated a clear difference between the vertehrate species assemblages of riparian sub-sites and suis- sites in the adjacent dner forest. Birds exhibiled the пм obvious. difference between habitats, Riparian sub-sites recorded, on average, 73% of the bird species recorded for the site (excluding water birds), as compared toan average of 35% for dry-sub-sites. The average bird species richness of riparian sub-sites (34 species) was significantly greater than at dry sub-sites (17 species) (F=13.5, df=1, p=0.0023). There were 31 species (17% of total) of birds (includes waterbirds) which were exclusively recorded along watercourses, and an addi- tional 26 species (14%) occurred in greater abundance ай riparian sub-sites than woodland sub-sites, giving a lotal of 57 species (31%) of the birds which were ai least partly depend- ent оп riparian systems. In conwasi, ihere were only Two species of bird observed exclusively at woodland sub-sites. Differences between sub-sites in the mammal assemblages were less clear, However, Water Rats (Hydromys chrysogaster) were observed опу at ripanan sub-sites, while Greater Gliders (Peraurotdes volans), Brushtail Possums (Trichosurus vulpecula), Agile Wallabies (Macropus agilis) and Brown Bandicoots (Isoodon macrourus) all appeared to MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM be more abundant in riparian vegetation. Fishing Bats (Myotis adversus), à species restricted by the availability of free water, wero recorded only at two riparian sub-sites, Five species of reptiles which are restricled lo riparian habitats were observed, including one snake (Tropidonophis mairi), wwo lizards (Physignathus lesueurii & Sphenamor- phus queyii) and two tortoises (Elseya latisteztium & Emydura kreftit). Al of the 16 species of frogs were recorded in riparian vegetation while only five species were recorded away from the riparian zone. Most species of frogs were clearly more abundam within the riparian zone, ‘The results discussed here suggest thar vertebrare faunal diversity and abundance is considerably greater in riparian vegetation than in the surrounding habitat. It may seem inane to include exclusively aquatic species, tor example fresh waler turtles and waterbirds, in this discussion, however these species make а significant contribution to local and regional biodiversity and, as such, highlight the great importance of riparian habitat within this ecosystem. ‘The conservation and protection of riparian habstats 15 ot paramount importance in preserving the biodiversity of me eucalypt woodlands of northern Australia, The protection ol riparian vegetation is also an essential part of any land саге program. Woodlands and foresis are one of the must widespread and important habitats in Australia, therefore an understanding of riparian systems is necessary to enahle the efficient preservation and management of this ecosy sten. lt would be interesting to closely examine riparian systems in Australia to investigate whether: 1.трагіап habitats contain a higher diversity and abun- dance of fauna than the adjacent woodlands/forests and there- by make a large contribution to local and regional diversity: Zahere are à significant number ot species Which are wholly or partly dependent on riparian systems for al least part of the year. 3 higher diversity and abundance is düc To à Combiretton of mare available niches and more abundant resources, result- jeg fron} higher structural complexity and floristie diversity of ihe rrpanian vegetation, and a higher and more seasonally stable productivity; 4.nparian systems act as refuges during the dry season and а source of dispersal at the commencement of the wet season the value as à refuge could be due to shelter, Food, water, e breeding/nesting sites; S,ripurian habitats provide seasonally abundant sources such as nectar, insects, waterand breeding sites which nre vital To much of the biodiversity of these Grosy seme: Guriparien strips can act as corridors for species which [nil open, dry habitats a barrier to dispersal; and 3 the roles of riparian habitats merease jn importancia will the general aridity of the area. Acknowledgements Twish lo thank Prof. Неве Marsh and Dr Richard Pearson for commenting оп an early draft pf this paper and Scott Bureen lor assisting in the field work. The stedy was Гин hy the De of Defence through a contract with the Australian Centre for Freshwater Кериге Literature Cited Williams S.E Pearson B.G. & Burnett 5 Б 1993. Survey of the vertebrate fauna of the Dotsweed area, North Queensland. Memoirs af the Queensland Myseum SU 1):361-378 Steve Williams, Deparment af Zoology, James Cook Univer sey, Townsville, Quevisland 4511, Aurmalia; IE October Ivo THE SUMMER WHITING FISHERY IN SOUTHEAST QUEENSLAND. A.J. THWAITES AND L.E. WILLIAMS Thwaites, AJ. & Williams, L.E, 1994 06 01: The summer whiting fishery in southeast Queensland. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1): 249-254, Brisbane ISSN 0079- 8835. The summer whiting (Sillago ciliata and 5. analis) catch from 12 recreational fishing clubs in SE Queensland and the whiting (all species) catch of the commercial fisheries between Caloundra and Southport is assessed, Five popular summer whiting fishing locations (Inskip Point, Bribie and Moreton Islands, Jumpinpin and Southport) were chosen іо determine if changes in the yearly mean weight (Y MW ) and yearly mean catch per person per day (YMC) of summer whiting caught by club recreational fishers had occurred from August io February, 1959 to 1991. It is hypothesised that the summer whiting fisheries are stable at these locations except at Bribe Island where it is declining. [ ] Sillago ciliata, S; analis, whiting, catchrates, southeast Queensland. Andrew Thwaites & Lew Williams, Fisheries Services, Department of Primary industries, GPO Box 46, Brisbane, Queensland 4001, Australia; | December 1993. Sillago ciliata (Sand whiting) and S. analis (Golden-lined whiting) (Sillaginidae) both have the common name ‘summer whiting’. S. ciliata is found along the east coast from Cape York to castern Victoria and along the east coast of Tas- mania (McKay,1985). S. analis occurs across northem Australia from Shark Bay, W.A. to Moreton Bay and along the east coast of New Guinea (McKay, 1985). S. ciliata grows to a maximum length of 51cm, while S. analis grows to а maximum length of 4Scm (McKay,1992), Anecdotal evidence (Grant, 1987; Davis, pers. comm.; Tebbutt, pers. comm.) suggests that S. cifiara grows to a larger mean size and weight than 5. undalis in SE Queensland. The minimum legal size of summer whiting for all fishers is 23cm total length, Southeast Queensland has many popular recreational fishing locations for summer whit- ing. Club anglers and others targeting summer whiting commonly fish from Inskip Point to the south of Tin Can Bay, Bribie Island in the NW part of Moreton Bay, Moreton Island to the E of Brisbane, Jumpinpin to the S of North Stradbroke Island and Southport to the S of South Stradbroke Island. Inskip Point and Bribie Island are соп- sidered to be primarily summer whiting fisheries while Moreton Island, Jumpinpin and Southport have mixed fisheries with catches of bream (Sparidae), summer whiting and flathead (Platycephalidae). A tag and release study by Morton (1982) showed that spawning 5. ciliata rarely move more than Skm from the initial point of capture during August to February. Pollock & Williams (1983) in a study of the recreational summer whiting fishery at the southern end of Bribie Island and Moreton Island, hypothesised that this lack of movement continued throughout the year with the population on Bribic Island remaining separate from the population on Moreton Island. Their study concluded that at both locations yearly CPUE (fish per person per day) had increased. They concluded that this rise was probably due to improvements in angling equipment and techniques. The study found no evidence of change in mean weight of summer whiting at Moreton Island. They found that the mean weight of summer whiting had declined at Bribie Island concluding that the decline was due to à rise in fishing pressure. In 1992, commercial fishermen, netting from ocean and inside beaches between Bribie Island and Southport (Queensland), caught c. 30 tonnes of whiting (all species) between August 1992 and February 1993 (Queensland Fisheries Informa- tion System (SUNFISH)). A creel survey of recreational angler catches by Morton (1982) showed that 5, ciliata account for c.97% and 5. analis c, 190 of the catch on Bribie Island. Pollock & Williams (1993) stated that S. ciliata was the only whiting caught on Moreton Island. No study has determined the species composition of the recreational catch at Inskip Point, Jumpinpin or Southport or the commercial catch in the study area, But as the commercial net and recreational fishers fish the same arcas, their catches should be similar. Morton's (1982) creel survey suggests therefore that the bulk of the net fishers whiting catch will be summer whiting. Only а few studies acknowledge that recreu- tional fisheries have just as important an effect on a population of fish as the commercial fishery L ! i ! ! П | П i Ц П 1 D loratan m" FIG. 1. Locality map. (e.g. Pollock, 1979; Quinn & Pollock,1992). This study will utilise the summer whiting catch records of 12 recreational clubs and historical catches of all whiting species by the commercial fisheries in an attempt to gauge the *health' of the summer whiting fisheries in SE Queensland. Recreational fishing data allow determination of the mean weight of summer whiting. Commercial whiting catches from Caloundra to Southport will be analysed with emphasis on the net fishery from 1988-1991. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM METHODS SOURCES OF DATA Recreational fishing clubs provided individual fisher catch records from competitions. Data were entered into a database where for each fisher the date, location, numbers of each species caught (e.g. whiting, bream, flathead - catch records do not differentiate between the individual species of whiting) and total weight of catch were recorded. Commercial fishing records came from: The Fish Board (1959-1972), Queensland Fish Board (1973-1981) and the SUNFISH database (1988— 1991). No data were available for 1982—1987. Fish Board and Queensland Fish Board data have been criticised for their reliability (Grey & Spen- cer,1986), However they are the only data avail- able for this period and should be viewed as indicative of the level of catch. STUDY LOCATIONS Five popular recreational fishing locations chosen were: Inskip Point, southern Bribie Is- land, Moreton Island, Jumpinpin and Southport (Fig.1). Commercial fisheries data were for whit- ing (all species) between Caloundra and South- port (Fig.1). Commercial trawl data for 1988-1991 were limited to Moreton Bay to remove data collected about the stout whiting бе {жени ж а. Don А P кар wight ot шү (uo 5 g в + zt : EITTIIIILIIIDIDDIIDDPTIIPIDLLDLDDTDIIEIDPEITIILIEELILLITIILDEPÉEIELELELLEEEEILEIE Se Rae $ Tees тет yeas Moreton Island veer Inskip Point veer Bribie Island A ? UE [mates пг. d Facere] 3 n è t " uam. SE SLE SPOTS SEE SHOTS SSIES AS SEES Fr PET AT PSP SEPP IES HE PPT офот AO IPP OLS HFA LL HH IPOH SOHO SS Yaar Ye Inskip Point Bribie Island B Moreton Island vr Jumpinpin Yaar Southport Yaar Yaar ter Jumpinpin Southport FIG. 2. A, Yearly mean weight (YMW); B, Yearly mean catch (YMC), at each location. SUMMER WHITING FISHERY IN SE QLD ‘TABLE 1. Results of the linear regression analysis on the YMW of summer whiting, | | Period (ny | R” |Signitlevel | | Bribiels | 59-91(33) | 0.6844 | ооо | | Moreton is | 59-91(33) | -00210 | 05625 | | Jumpinpin | 60-91(19) | 0.1327 | 00695 | fishery which started operations in the early nineties and operates outside the areas tradition- ally trawled for prawns. LENGTH OF CLUB COMPETITIONS Recreational fishing competitions lasted for less than 24 hours in all cases. Competitions were held at night for all locations except Bribie Island and Inskip Point where the competitions were held during the day. Night time competitions last 12-15 hours, daylight competitions 8-10 hours. CALCULATION OF YEARLY MEAN WEIGHT AND YEARLY MEAN CATCH Yearly mean weight (Y MW) of fish caught at each location was calculated by dividing the total weight of summer whiting caught by fishers in each year by the total number of summer whiting caught by fishers that year. The only whiting records used in the YMW calculation were those where both the number of fish and weight of whiting caught were recorded. The yearly mean catch (YMC) at each of the locations was calcu- lated as the mean of the number of fish caught per fisher per day (CPUE). TIME FOR THE STUDY August to February,1959-199]; total yearly commercial catch of whiting (all species) for 1959-1991, except for 1982-1987 where no data were available, was analysed as total monthly catches were not available for most years. TABLE 2. YMW at each location. | Av. St. dev, | Min. Max. YMW weight | weight B g (kg) | Inskip | 80-91 | 0.128 | +0.006| 0.120 | 0.139 | | Bribie | 70-91 | 0146 | «0.008 | 0.134 | 0.161 | Moreton | 59-9) | 0.160 | +0.016| 0.137 | [Jmp'pin | 59-91 | 0.174 | +0.015| 0.113 | 0.250 | 0.187 SAMPLE SIZES Sample sizes in each year for the calculation of YMW at Inskip Point, Bribie Island and Moreton Island were above 1000 fish. At Jumpinpin and Southport the sample sizes in cach year averaged 60 and 600 fish per year respectively with the lowest sample size being 17 fish at Jumpinpin in 1964. Sample sizes for the calculation of YMC averaged above 150 angler days per year at Bribie Island and Moreton Island. Sample sizes at the other 3 locations averaged 40—75 angler days per year with the minimum sample size being 10 angler days at Jumpinpin in 1980. STATISTICAL ANALYSIS Linear regressions on YMW and Y MC at cach location and on commercial whiting catch used Statistix, version 4, by Analytical Software (1992), RESULTS YEARLY MEAN WEIGHT (YMW) OF SUMMER WHITING CAUGHT BY RECREATIONAL ANGLERS (Fig.2A) There is no significant trend in Y MW at South- port, Jumpinpin, Moreton Island or Inskip Point whereas it has declined significantly at Bribie Island (Table 1). However there has been no significant trend in YMW at Bribie Island sinve the early 1970s (Table 1) from which time YMW has averaged c.0.146+0.008kg/fish (Table 2). YEARLY MEAN CATCH (Y MC) OF SUMMER WurriNG CAUGHT BY RECREATIONAL ANGLERS (Fig.2B) There 1s no recognisable trend in YMC at In- skip Point (Table 3). At Bribie Island YMC im- creased from 1959-1974 then decreased 1975—1091 (Table 3) by c.10 fish/person/duy. At TABLE 3. Results of the linear regression analysis on the YMC of summer whiting. | | Penodín) | R? | Signif level | | Bribie | 59:74016) | 05255 | 00009 | | Moreton | 59-9133) | 05842 | 00000 | Moreton 70-91 (22 0.1238 | Jmppin | 59-91 (30) | 0.4118 ‘pi 0.9720 | Spot | 61-91018) | 03934 | [ spon | 77-9105) | оф» | ол% | 70-91 (20 | 0.0979 252 | LEAD PEREAT 4 И ^ М os Ly +7 р 5 ^ + 4 4 ab pa PSHM P eS Sees | ЕЗ All fisheries Bi Traw! fishery С Net fishery FIG. 3. Yearly commercial catch of whiting (all species) fram Caloundra to Southport. i Moreton Island and Jumpinpin there was an over- all increase (Table 3) up to 1970 after which it has been stable. At Southport there was an increase (Table 3) from 1959-1991 with no change from 1977-1991. Data are not available for catches at Southport from 1965-1976. YEARLY COMMERCIAL WHITING CATCHES The total whiting catch for the commercial fisheries (Fig. 3) shows a significant rise in yearly whiting (all species) catch from 1959-1991 (R- squared 0.4633, Significance level 0.000). How- ever since the early 1970s there has been no significant change in total commercial catch. The commercial catch (1971-1991) averaged c.150 tonnes (min. 142 tonnes in 1980, max. 277 tonnes in 1973). Catch data for the net fishery 1988—1991 (Table 5) show no significant change in number of days fished or CPUE (kg/day/boat). A decline in the total catch of whiting in the net fishery occurred between 1988-1991 with a yearly decline in catch of around 6%. TABLE 4. YMC al each location. ЗЕ ҮМС YMC | YMC 104 [Moreton] 7091 | 179 | +47 | 96 | Lmppim| 70-91 | 62 | +23 | 3 | ив | MEMOIRS DF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM DISCUSSION SIZE OF SUMMER WHITING The decline in YMW at Bribie Island from 1959-1972 was observed by Pollock & Williams (1983) butour analysis shows this ceased in 1972. The YMW of summer whiting on Bribie Island stabilised in 1972 at 0.146--0.008kg/fish. Pos- sible causes for the decline from 1959-1972 are : 1, increased fishing pressure due to increased number of anglers; 2, increased fishing pressure due to improvements in angling techniques and equipment; 3, population decline of summer whiting due to loss or modification of habitat; 4, natural decline in the population of summer whit- ing due to weather effects such as fresh water runoff; 5, higher percentage of S. analis in the catch, which has a smaller mean weight than S. ciliata (Grant, 1987; Davis, pers. comm.; Tebbutt pers. comm.). Possibility (1) is supported by the opening of the Bribie Island bridge in October 1963. Pollock & Williams (1983) reported improvements tn angling techniques and equipment with fishing TABLES. Catch data of the net fishery from Caloundra to Southport. | (kg catch (Кр) da 1988 6591 133266 19 | 199 | ens | 19 | 127980 | 629 | w | 121609 | | 1990 6219 | 112354 |. 199) | 6887 trips corresponding to favourable tides and the standardisation of light angling gear and bait. This supports (2). (3) is supported by Hyland & Butler (1989) and Hyland et al. (1989) who show natural and human modification to habitats around Bribie Island over the study period. There is no evidence to prove or disprove (4). (5) is unlikely because a creel survey in November 1980 at Bribie Island by Morton (1982) indicated that 5, ciliata made up 97% of the catch and for the same year the YMW at Bribie Island was one of the lowest for 33 years at 0. 135kg/fish. It is hypothesised that this decline is an actual decline in the mean weight of legally sized S. ciliata caused by a combination of 1-5. YMW at Jumpinpin from 1971—1991 showed no statistical change. However, graph of YMW at Jumpinpin (Fig.2) suggests a decline over that period. As data are available for only 13 of the 21 years this is inconclusive. SUMMER WHITING FISHERY IN SE QLD 25 Average YMW at Inskip Point is lower than at other locations. 11 is hypothesised that this is due to a higher proportion of S. analis in the catch (Grant.1982). The YMW at Inskip Point, Moreton Island and Southport have remained stable over the study period with variations caused by yearly fluctuations such as weather and tides at the time of club competitions. YMC oF SUMMER WHITING Morton's (1982) creel survey in 1980 of everyday anglers on Bribie Island found that the average catch per angler was 13 fishin November of that year. We calculate YMC al Bnbic Island during 1980 as 25 per angler- Therefore YMC's in this study are larger than the actual CPUE's at each location due to: 1, calculation of YMC from recreational fishing chib anglers included only those who caught one or more summer whiting, those who caught none were excluded from the calculation; 2, club anglers possibly having higher CPUE's than non club anglers due to experience. CPUE is commonly used as an indicator of stock abundance by fisheries biologists (Gul- land, 1964; Bannerot & Austin,1983). Any chan- ges in YMC may therefore indicate changes in summer whiting abundance. In the present study YMC has increased from 1959 to the early seven- tics at 4 of the 5 study locations (Bribie Island, Moreton Island, Jumpinpin and Southport). It is possible the rise in YMC js due 10 an increase in stock size but this is unlikely as the YMC has not be standardised for improvements in angling techniques and equipment. No data are available for YMC at Inskip Point until 1980. YMC increased at Bribie and Moreton Islands, Jumpinpin and Southport from 1959 to the early seventies due to an improvement in angling tech- niques and equipment, such as the introduction of hollow fibreglass rods and the availability of lighter gear. The YMC at Bribie Island declined from 1975— 1991 due to: 1, a decline in the total number of summer whiting or 2. a decline in the number of legally sized summer whiting with a correspond- ing increase in the number of undersized summer whiting. There is no evidence of a decline in YMC at any of the other study locations from the early seventies, As there have been no significant ad- vances in angling techniques and equipment during this time, which would require stand- ardisation of the data, it is likely that the stock levels of summer whiting have remained stable at te these locations over the 20 year period. Because Inskip Point and Bribie Island are considered 10 be summer whiting fisheries their Y MCs should be higher than others. YMC is highest at Inskip Point. The YMC’s at Bribie Island, Moreton Is- land and Southport are similar but lower than the YMC at Inskip Point, The YMC at Jumpinpin is much tower than at any of the other four locations (Table 4). The YMC at Bribie Isiand is the same as at Moreton Island and Southport because: 1, the population of legally sized summer whiting al Bnibie Island has declined; or 2, the length of the club competitions were longer at Moreton Island and Southport (12—15hrs) than at Bribie Island (8—10hrs). COMMERCIAL CATCH OF WHITING Reliability of commercial catch data prior to 1981 has been validly questioned (Gray & Spen- сег,1986) but they remain the only available in- formation and are indicative of the level of catch. Catches for the commerctal net and trawl fisheries cannot be separated prior to 1981 so it is not certain why a significant increase occurred up to 1973, although the most likely reasons are the expansion of the commercial fisheries in terms of number of commercial fishers and the areas fished and advances in the types of gear used. After L988 they are separated into net and trawl catches. The whiting catch of the net fishery 15 considered to consist of summer whiting as this 15 the most common whiting caught by recrea- tional fishers who fish the same areas as the commercial fishers. A significant decrease of the total whiting catch in the net fishery of c.6% per year has occurred from 1988-1991. This decline can be explained to a degree by a decline in the total number of days on which net fishers caught whiting (Table 5). However this does not explain the drop in total catch in 1991 when almost 6,900 days of fishing were reported, the greatest num- ber of days fished in the four year period. As the CPUE of whiting has remained fairly constant from 1988-1991 (Table 5) those whiting stocks utilised by net fishers in the Moreton Bay region are probably stable. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Thanks must be extended 10 the Amateur Fish- ing Clubs who made their club records available and to all the reviewers who offered constructive criticism on this paper. The paper however remains the sole responsibility of the authors. A 254 special thanks must also be extended to Graeme Duckworth for creation of the recreational fisheries database and Ken Davis and Fred Teb- butt who estimated the mean weights and lengths of the two species of summer whiting. LITERATURE CITED BANNEROT, S. & AUSTIN, С, 1983. Using frequency distributions of catch per unit effort to measure fish-stock abundance, Transactions of the American Fisheries Society 112: 608-617. DREDGE, M. 1976, Aspects of the ecology of three estuarine dwelling fish in south east Queensland. MSc Thesis, University of Queensland (Unpubl.). GRANT, E. 1982. ‘Guide to fishes’. (Department of Harbours and Marine: Brisbane). 1987. ‘Grants fishes of Australia’. (Wilke: Bris- bane). GRAY, M. & SPENCER, S. 1986. The structure and economics of fish and seafood marketing in Queensland. Pp. 68—92. In Hundloe, TJ. (ed.), ‘Fisheries management’. (Griffith University Press: Brisbane). GULLAND, J. 1964. Catch per unit effort as a measure of abundance. Rapports et Proces-Verbaux des Reunions Conseil International pour I- Exploration de la Mer 155: 8-14. HYLAND, S.J. & BUTLER, C,T. 1989. The distribu- tion and modification of mangroves and saltmarsh - claypans in southern Queensland. Queensland MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Department of Primary Industries information series QI89004. (QDPI: Brisbane). HYLAND, S.J. COURTNEY, AJ. BUTLER, C,T. 1989. Distribution of seagrass in the Moreton region from Coolangatta to Noosa. Queensland Department of Primary Industries information series 0189010, (QDPI: Brisbane). MCKAY, R.J. 1985. A revision of the fishes of the Family Sillaginidae. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 22: 1-73. 1992, Sillaginid fishes of the world. FAO Fisheries Synopsis 125. 14: 1-87. MORTON, R. 1982. Reproductive biology and tagging studies of summer whiting, Sillago ciliata (C.&V.), at Bribie Island, Queensland. MSc. Thesis, University of Queensland. 1991. Fish communities in saltmarsh, mangrove and tidal residential canal developments in the Moreton region, Queensland. PhD Thesis, University of Queensland. POLLOCK, B. 1979. Anglers probably take the bulk of Queensland tailor catch. Australian Fisheries (September) 31:32. POLLOCK, B. & WILLIAMS, M. 1983. An assess- ment of the angling fishery for summer whiting, Sillago ciliata and S. analis, in Moreton Bay, Queensland from 1959 to 1980. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Queensland 94: 85—90. QUINN, R. & POLLOCK, B. 1992. Long term varia- tions in angler- catches for a tropical inshore fishery. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Queensland 102: 65-77. CATALOGUE OF METEORITES, TEKTITES AND ASSOCIATED MATERIAL IN THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM PETER VOLK Volk, Р. 1994 06 01: Catalogue of meteorites, tektites and asssociated material in the Queensland Museum. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1): 255-262. Brisbane. ISSN 0079-8835. Catalogue of meteorite and related material held by the Queensland Museum lists 144 meteorites, 162 tektites and tektite bulk samples, 10 casts and 10 specimens of related material. [ ] Meteorites, tektites, catalogue, Tenham, Glenormiston, Thunda, Gladstone #2, Queensland Museum. Peter Volk, Queensland Museum, PO Box 3300, South Brisbane, Queensland 4101, Australia; 2 November 1993. Geology collections of the Queensland Museum (QM) were initiated in 1871 (Mather, 1986). However, the first meteorite accessioned was a slice of the Gibeon meteorite (D864) in 1916, and the first Queensland (Qld) meteorite the Glenormiston (D1291) in 1926. Major con- tributions of meteoritic material were made by the Geological Survey of Queensland (G.S.Q.) in 1979 and Mr. F.S. (Stan) Colliver in 1985. Collection auditing by the author in 1993 has revealed a total holding of 144 meteorites, 162 1 Glenormiston 2 Tenham 3 Това 4 Gladstone 5 Calwarro & Pulchera Waterhole 7 Sandnngham 3 Bedour« 8 Мосгасина Station 10 Glangyte 1! Stratnetbiss 12 Durte 13 Haddon Car 14 Answer Mina 15 King Solomon Mine 18 Rosenlli Station + meleorite * laktite x cast only FIG. 1 Provenance of Queensland meteoric material held by the Queensland Museum. tektites or bulk tektite fragment samples, 12 casts and 10 specimens of related material, QUEENSLAND MATERIAL (Fig. 1) METEORITES D1291 Glenormiston Meteorite TYPE Medium octahedrite. MATERIAL Finp: Glenormiston, пг Boulia, Qld (22^54'S,138*43' E): main mass, 38.8kgs; four small pieces cut from main mass, 2.5g. 1.3g, 0.9g, 0.6g; shavings, heavily oxidised, 18.9g. REFERENCE Richards, (1930: 65-72, pls 3-8). REMARKS Purchased in 1926 from Mr. F. H. Story; sec- tioned for analysis; present location of the smaller part thus produced unknown. D1592 , D4465 Tenham Meteorites TYPE Brecciated, olivine - hypersthene chondrite. MATERIAL FALL: Tenham Station, nr Ingella, Queensland (25?44'S 142*57'E), 1879. [Prior (1953) recorded “Spring” but QM records suggest that the fall took place earlier in 1879. Prior may have been referring to the boreal spring]. 256 Weights of individual stones are given below, sec- tioned stones (S) are noted and the weight is the remain- ing piece. Missing stones (M) are indicated, Numbers refer to those given by Hodge-Smith (1939, pls. 10, 11). Letters refer to a set of ten stones, registered as D4465, donated to the Queensland Museum hy the Geological Survey of Queensland in 1979 which are probably part of the set of fourteen stones loaned to the Geological Survey by Miss O. A. Hammond in 1940 and recorded as unlocatablé (Brooks, Simmonds & Houston, 1964). 1:2115.6; 2:1931.7; 3:639,5, S; 4:1768.8; 5:1671.0; 6:1272.8; 7:1258,6; 8:996,3; 9: M; 10: M; 11: 865.7; 12: 861,0; 13:831.2; 14:807.9; 1577622; 16:752.7; 17:724.8; 18:660.4; 19:612.2; 20:606.4; 21:612,0; 22: 582,3; 23:572.1; 24:603.1; 25:482.2; 26:473.7; 27:608.8; 28:316.8, S; 29:576.4; 30:491.6; 31:449.6; 32:433.9; 33:444.6; 34:407.8; 35:404.9; 36;399.1; 37:390,2; 38:375.0; 39:304.0; 40: M; 41: M; 42:353.7: 43:379.8; 44:354.2; 45:348.1; 46:352.0; 47:353.2; 48: M; 49;338,6; 50:306,9; 51;281.8; 52:262.1; 53:264.9; 54:256.7; 55:273.2; 56:276.8) 57:54.4, 5; 58:243.9; 59:262.3; 60:252.6; 61:242.0; 62:235.3; 63:205.0; 64:219.4; 65:212.3; 66;217.4; 68:195.9; 69:217.3; 70:200.2; 71:200.4; 72:189,6; 73:184.2; 74:191.5; 75:196; 76:199,7; 77:198.8; 78:192.3; 79:180.4; 80:180,5; 81:184.7; 82:172,6; 83:162.0; 84:167.5; 85:159.4; 86:157.3; 87:157.8; 88:143.0; 89:163,6; 90:145.8; 91:149.8; 92:134.2; 93:132.5; 94:141.1; 95:121.6; 96:125.3; 97:122.9; 98:101.8; 99: M; 100:81,1; 101:84.4; 102:79.0; 103:88.0; 104:81.8; 105:79,8; 106:80,7; 107:87.5; 108:70.2; 109:69.2; 110:69.7; 111:74.1; 112:59.8; 113:54.8; 114:55.4; 115:59,7; 116;56.5; 117:54.9; 118:37.8; 119:48.6; 120:43.8; 121:37.2; 122:44.8; 123:24.3, 124:30.3; 125:21,9; 126:22.6; 127:14,5, “Hammond” Stones ~ 'b':476.7; 'с':416.4; 'D':252.2; 'в':169.5; "hh: 129.45 104.8; 7:892; "L':81.1; "m':55,5, "N':56.D, REFERENCES Brooks, Simmonds and Houston (1964); Hodge-Smith (1939) p. 25, pls X, XI; Spencer (1937), REMARKS Of 127 specimens illustrated by Hodge-Smith (1939, pls 10, 11), 121 are in the QM collection. Stones 9, 10, 40, 41, 48 and 99 are missing; stones 57, 28 and 3 have each been sectioned and half of each 1s missing; stone 57 was sectioned by Lover- ing, one piece retained by him; stone 28 was sectioned and one piece sent to Н.Н. Nininger; no record exists of the fate of half of stone 3. Of the six missing stones, 10 and 99 were transferred tà are Australian Museum, Sydney, MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM the Geological Survey of Queensland; stones 40 and 41 were sent to either the University of Queensland or the G.S.Q. but records confuse each stone's destination; stones 48 and 9 are unaccounted for. One stone was sent to the American Museum of Natural History in ex- change for a fragment of the Selma meteorite. Other holdings of Tenham stones are in the British Museum, University of Queensland, and the Australian Museum. Total Tenham Stones in the QM collections: 131, D1606 Gladstone Meteorite #1 TYPE Coarsest octahedrite. MATERIAL. FiNp: Toondon Ck, 4 miles south of Gladstone, (23*54' S, 151°15'30"B), in 1912 or 1913: 42.40 slice, heavily varnished. REFERENCES Richards (1930: 66-67);Hodge-Smith (1939: 18); Prior (1953: 134); Simmonds (1964: 3, pl. 3, fig.1). REMARKS The main mass is in the Field Museum of Natural History, Chicago. An analysis appears in Richards (1930) and a description and a picture of this slice 1n Simmonds (1964). Other holdings American Museum of Natural History Museum, New York, United States National Museum, Washington (Prior, 1953). D5834 Thunda Meteorite TYPE Medium octahedrite. MATERIAL Finn: Thunda, Windorah, Old (25°42'S, 143*3 E), pre 1881; 43,2g slice, REFERENCES Dunstan (1913: 178); Liversidge (1886: 73); Hodge-Smith (1939: 25); Prior (1953; 371). REMARKS Donated to the Queensland Museum by T. CATALOGUE OF METEORITES, QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Davis of London in 1981. Other holdings see Hodge-Smith (1939) and Prior (1953). D13519 Gladstone Meteorite #2 TYPE Coarsest octahedrite. MATERIAL FIND: 4.5 miles S. of Gladstone, QLD (23*54'30"S, 151?15'30"E): 1 piece, 17.6kg with cut and polished face; 1 box shavings, approx. 4.7kg. REFERENCE Simmonds (1964: 3-5 pls 1-3). REMARKS Simmonds (1964) suggested that Gladstone #1 and #2 were part of a multiple fall. The specimens were acquired from the G.S.Q. QUEENSLAND TEKTITES (AUSTRALITES) D2078 Australite MATERTAL Paroo River, Caiwarro, nr Eulo, Qld (28?42'S, 144?47' E): 2.5g, lens shape. REMARKS Donated by Mrs E.A. Morley, 14.3.1956. Found in gravel bed of river. D3697, D3698, D3699, D3700 Australites MATERIAL Pulchera Waterhole, Mulligan River, Qld (23*56'S, 138°38'Е): 5.7g, 0.5g (fragment), 6.6g, 1.8g respec- tively. REMARKS Donated by Mr R. Suter 28.10.1971. D3701, D3702 Australites MATERIAL 12 Mile Waterhole, Sandringham, Qld (approx. 29°03’ S, 139?04' E): 1.8g, 4.3g respectively. REMARKS Donated by Mr R. Suter, 29.10.1971. D3703 Australite MATERIAL Sandhills, Bedowrie, Qld (25?00' S, 149°03'Е): 4.6g. REMARKS Donated by Mr R. Suter, 29.10.1991. D3704 Australite MATERIAL Moorabulla Waterhole, Sandringham, Qld (24°16’S, 140*5T' E): 7.9g. REMARKS Donated by Mr R. Suter, 29.10.1971. D3705 Australite MATERIAL Georgina River, Glengyle, Qld (24?47'S, 139° 35'E): 5.8g. REMARKS Donated by Mr R. Suter, 29.10.1971. D3706 Australite MATERIAL Duck Ck Claypan, Bedowrie, Qld (approx. 25*00'S, 149?3' E): 13.3g. REMARKS Donated by Mr R. Suter, 29.10.1971. D3707 Australite MATERIAL Sandhill, Strathelbiss, Qld (22°48°5, 140°01'E): 10.4g. REMARKS Donated by Mr R. Suter, 29.10.1971. D3708 , D3709 , D3710, D3711, D3712, D3713, D3714, D3715, D3716, D3717, D3718, D3719 Australites MATERIAL Durrie Stn, between dune ridges SW Qld (25*57'S, 140°13° E): 03708, 14 round buttons, part flanged; 2.1, 2.8, 1.1, 2.4, 4.1, 2.2, 2.4, 3.5, 2.7, 1.5, 1.7, 1.7, 1.6, 0.6g; 03709, 24 round lenses: 1.1, 1.0, 1.1, 1.0, 1.5, 2.3, 1.9, 1.4, 3.5, 1.5, 1.3, 1.7, 1.9, 1.8, 2.8, 3.2, 3.3, 1.1, 0.9, 1.1, 1.1, 1.0, 1.2, 1,2g; 03710, 12 elongate 1.2, 0.8, 1.3, 1.5g; 03711, 27 cores: 2.8, 6.0, 2.2, 7.6, 7.3, 3.8, 3.5, 2.8, 2.2, 1.9, 5.3, 7.4, 9.1, 8.7, 5.3, 4.6, 3.1, 3.5, 3.9, 5.3, 2.3, 3.0, 2.8, 5.8, 4.6g (1 specimen missing); D3712, 12 flanged fragments: 1.4, 0.7, 0.9, 1.0, 0.8, 0.5, 0.8, 1.6, 1.2, 1.5, 0.5, 0.4g; 03713, 4 elongate tears; 3.5, 3.7, 4.8, 2.0g;D3714, 5 broken cores: 1.8, 3.2, 2.7, 1.9, 1.8g;D3715, 1 blown out lens: 2.1g;D3716, 7 micro forms, part Hanged: 0.3, 0.7, 0.6, 0.4, 0.4, 0.3, 0.9g; 03717, 10 forms spalling: 2.2, 1.3, 5.2, 3.3, 2,5, 2.3, 1.9, 4.7, 3,3, 3.1 g; D3718, 7 elongate forms: 10.1, 6.2, 10.2, 3.2, 10.7, 1.7, 6.7g;D3719, 12 nondescript forms: 2.3, 0.9, 1,1, 1.2, 1,9, 0,5, 0,6, 0,3, 1.0, 1.9, 1.2, 1.2g. REMARKS Donated by Mr G. Hume, 29.10.1971. D3720 Australites MATERIAL Haddon Cnr, SW Qld (26*02'S, 141*0L'E): bulk sample - over 317.1g, [A small amount of this material is on loan ànd was not available for weighing]. REMARKS Aboriginal artefacts and flakes chipped from Australites from Aboriginal site. Donated by G. Hume, 29.10.1971. QUEENSLAND MATERIAL CASTS 03729 "Answer" meteorite MATERIAL ORIGINAL FIND: Old Camp, nr Answer Mine, S. of Selwyn, Qld, Mr. J. Finch, 16 .6.1970. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM REFERENCE Houston (1971:484, pls 2,3.). REMARKS This cast is in poor condition, damaged and chipped. Houston (1971) stated that the original meteorite was returned to the owner after analysis. D3730 "King Solomon" meteorite MATERIAL ORIGINAL FIND: 100 yards from King Solomon Mine, N of Mary Kathleen, NW Old. REFERENCE Houston (1971:482, pl. 1.). REMARKS This specimen is slightly chipped and show- ing shrinkage cracks. Houston (1971) stated that the original meteorite was returned to the owner after analysis. D13520, D13549 Gladstone meteorite #2 REMARKS These casts were taken before sectioning of the original. D13520 is massively damaged on one face; D13549 is in reasonable condition, having only minor damage. D13520 was donated by the G.S.Q. No record of donor of D13549 exists, though it almost certainly from the same source. D13053 “Siderite” MATERIAL ORIGINAL FIND: Rosehill Station, about 11% mls E of Retreat Hmstd, 3 mls 5 of Barcoo River, nr Cheviott Range, SW Qld; 2 casts, in good condition. REMARKS Original meteorite is recorded as being in the possession of Mr Jack Arden of "Akary" on Neave River, Charleville. There appear to be no references to this specimen. Considering the proximity of this site to Thunda, it is possible that the Thunda fall was multiple and that this meteorite was part of that fall. CATALOGUE OF METEORITES, QUEENSLAND MUSEUM NON- QUEENSLAND MATERIAL METEORITES D864 Gibeon Meteorite TYPE Fine octahedrite. MATERIAL Find: Amalia Farm, nr Gibeon, SW Africa (25.5°S, 18°E): 1 slice, 818g (10x19x0.5cm). REFERENCE Prior (1953:131,132). REMARKS Shows Widmanstatten figures, troilite nodules and flow structure. D2185 Aerolite TYPE Chondrite. MATERIAL FIND: Dimmitt, Texas, U.S.A. (34° 10'N, 102?10" W): 3 slices, 33.5g, 20.7g, 11.1g. REFERENCE Prior (1953:104). REMARKS Acquired by exchange with H.H. Ninninger, American Meteorite Museum, 23.7.1959. D2186, D2296 Toluca Meteorite TYPE Medium octahedrite. MATERIAL FIND: Xiquipilco, Mexico (19?34'N, 99?34'W): D2186, 37g; D2296, 385g. REFERENCE Prior (1953:374). REMARKS Shows schriebersite inclusion and Wid- manstatten figures. Sectioned in three directions. D2186 acquired by exchange with H.H. Nin- ninger, American Meteorite Museum,23.7.1959. 259 D2272 Selma Meteorite TYPE Olivine - bronzite spherical chondrite. MATERIAL Ер; Dallas County, Alabama, U.S.A, (32?24'N, 87?0'W):852.7g. REFERENCE Prior (1953:340,341). REMARKS Slab section, showing cracking and fracturing, with edges starting to break off main mass. It is recorded that this specimen was obtained from the American Museum of Natural History (AMNH3856) in exchange for one ofthe Tenham meteorites. D8550 Meteoric Iron MATERIAL Unrecorded: two pieces, 18.7g, 1.6g. D13040 Henbury Meteorite TYPE Medium octahedrite. MATERIAL FIND: About 100 mls S of Alice Springs on Henbury Station.(24?34' S, 133° 10'E): two pieces, 11.0, 5.5g. REFERENCE Prior (1953:151,152). REMARKS Donated by Mr R.B. Brown. D1522 Henbury Meteorite #7 TYPE Medium octahedrite. MATERIAL Ер: Henbury, Finke River, Central Australia. (24?34' S, 133?10' E): 43.5kg. REFERENCE Prior (1953:151,152). 260 REMARKS Donated by R. Bedford, Kyancutta. D1527 Meteorite “Schrapnel” MATERIAL Henbury, Central Australia (24?34'S, 133°10°E). REFERENCE Prior (1953:151-152). REMARKS Seven fragments torn from crater meteorite. D17060 Metallic Meteorite MATERIAL Unknown location: 339.1g. REMARKS ‘The specimen shows similar characteristics to other pieces of the Henbury meteorite in our collection and may be from that location. This piece was donated by Mr. F. S. Colliver. TEKTITES AND AUSTRALITES D1649 Australites MATERIAL Nullabor Plain, W.A.: six specimens. REMARKS Collected(?) by Mr A.E. Baker. D2187 Tektite MATERIAL South Vietnam: 13.2g. REMARKS Obtained by exchange with H.H. Ninninger, American Meteorite Museum. D3690 Australite MATERIAL Myrtle Springs, nr Maree, South Australia: 15.3g. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM REMARKS Donated by D.F. Roder. D13041 Australite MATERIAL 60 miles S.W. of Finke Siding, N.T.: 12.9g. D13518 Australites MATERIAL Boulder, W.A.: five specimens, 6.5, 5.5, 6.1, 5.7, 3.0g. REMARKS Three lenses, two elongate. CASTS D20 Cowra Siderite MATERIAL ORIGINAL FIND: Junction of Burrowa and Lachlan Rivers, Cowra District (Hodge-Smith, 1939), REMARKS Obtained through exchange with the Australian Museum, Sydney. Specimen in good condition. D21 Bingera Siderite (Bingera No. 1) MATERIAL ORIGINAL FIND: Bingera, N.S.W, REMARKS Obtained through exchange with the Australian Museum, Sydney. Specimen in good condition. D22 Barraba Siderite (Bingera No. 3) MATERIAL FIND: Between Barraba and Bingera, N.S.W, REMARKS Obtained through exchange with the Australian Museum, Sydney. The Barraba meteorite is a known synonym of Bingera No. 3 (Hodge-Smith, 1939). CATALOGUE OF METEORITES, QUEENSLAND MUSEUM D24 Mt Browne Aerolite MATERIAL FALL: 9.30 a.m. 17.07.1902; Mt. Browne, Co. Evelyn, N.S.W. REMARKS Obtained through exchange with the Australian Museum, Sydney. Showing significant paint loss on one face; otherwise in good condition. D133 Roebourne Meteorite MATERIAL FIND: Alluvial plains 200 miles S.E. of Roebourne, W.A. REMARKS Donated by the West Australian Museum. D433 Barratta Aerolite (Barrata No. 1) MATERIAL FIND: Barratta Station, via Denilquin, N.S.W. REMARKS Obtained through exchange with the Australian Museum, Sydney. D434 Narraburra Siderite MATERIAL FIND; Narraburra Ck (= Yeo Yeo Ck) nr Temora, N.S.W. REMARKS Obtained through exchange with the Australian Museum, Sydney. RELATED MATERIAL D1524 MATERIAL Outside of west rim of main crater, Henbury, Central Australia. (24?34'S, 133*10'E): five bombs of melted country rock. REFERENCE Prior (1953: 151, 152). 261 REMARKS Obtained through exchange with the Kyancutta Museum, South Australia. D1525 MATERIAL 1/2 mile E of Main Crater, Henbury, Central Australia (24°34’S, 133? I0' E): silica glass, impregnated with Fe and Ni. REFERENCE Prior (1953: 151, 152). REMARKS In drops and coating pebbles. Obtained through exchange with the Kyancutta Museum, South Australia. D1526 MATERIAL Henbury, Central Australia. (24^34' S, 133*10' B): six shale balls and associated fragments. REFERENCE Prior (1953: 151, 152). REMARKS Produced by subsurface weathering of iron fragments. D2167, D2168, D2181 MATERIAL Arizona Meteorite Crater, U.S.A.(35 *3'N, 111°2’W): meteorite condensation sphereoids. REFERENCE Prior (1953: 62, 63). REMARKS Obtained through exchange with H.H. Nin- ninger. D2167 and D2181 are each one small bottle of the spheroids. D1268 has some spheroids displayed on a microscope slide against a white background. D2182, D2183, D2184 Impactite MATERIAL Arizona Meteorite Crater, U.S.A. (35 ^3'N, 111°2’W): three specimens. 262 REFERENCE Prior (1953: 62, 63). REMARKS Formed from dolomitic, arenaceous, Kaibab limestone. D13042 MATERIAL Wabar (or Wabur) Meteor Crater, Rub ‘al Khali, Saudi Arabia (21°29’N, 50°40’E): black and white glass, 1.9g. REFERENCE Prior (1953: 396). LITERATURE CITED BROOKS, J.H., SIMMONDS, N.A.H. & HOUSTON, B.R. 1964. Recent investigations of the Tenham meteorite shower. Queensland Geological Sur- vey Publication 320: 7-12. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM DUNSTAN, B. 1913. ‘Queensland mineral index and guide'. Queensland Geolgical Survey Publica- tion 241. (Department of Mines: Brisbane). HODGE-SMITH, T. 1939. Australian meteorites. Memoirs of the Australian Museum 7: 1-84. HOUSTON, B.R. 1971. Two meteorites from Northwest Queensland. Queensland Government Mining Journal, December 1971: 482-486. LIVERSIDGE, A. 1886. Metallic meteorite, Queensland. Proceedings of the Royal Society of New South Wales 20: 73. MATHER, P. 1986. (ed.), ‘A time for a museum. The history of the Queensland Museum 1862-1986'. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 24: 1-365. PRIOR, G. T. 1953. ‘Catalogue of meteorites’. (British Museum of Natural History: London). RICHARDS, H.C. 1930. The Glenormiston Meteorite. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 10: 65-72, SIMMONDS, N. A. H, 1964. A new meteorite from the Gladstone district. Publications of the Geological Survey of Queensland 320: plate 3 #1. SPENCER, L. J. 1937. The Tenham (Queensland) meteoritic shower of 1879. Mineralogical Magazine 24 (156): 437-452. NINE NEW SPECIES OF GEOSCAPHEINAE (BLATTODEA: BLABERIDAE) FROM AUSTRALIA ЈА. WALKER, D. RUGG AND Н.А. ROSE Walker, J.A., Rugg, D. & Rose, H.A. 1994 06 01: Nine new species of Geoscapheinae (Blattodea: Blaberidae) from Australia. Memoirs of the Queensland 35(1): 263-284, Bris- bane, ISSN 0079-8835, Nine new species of soil burrowing Geoscapheinae cockroaches are described from Queensland; Geoscapheus rugulosus, G. woodwardi, Macropanesthia heppleorum, M.kinkuna, M.lithgowae, M. rothi, M. saxicola, Neogeoscapheus barbarae, and Parapanes- thia pearsoni. Keys to the genera and species of Geoscapheinae are provided. The male of M. monteithi Roth and the male genitalia of M. kraussiana (Saussure) are described. O Blartodea, Geoscapheinae, new species, taxonomy, keys, Australia. J.A. Walker & Н.А. Rose, Department of Crop Sciences, University of Sydney, New South Wales 2006, Australia; D. Rugg, Merck Sharp and Dohme Veterinary Research and Development Laboratories, PO Box 135, Ingleburn, New Sourh Wales 2565, Ausrralia; 15 November 1993. The Geoscapheinae contains soil burrowing species which feed on dry leaf litter. Biology of à representative, Macropanesthia rhinoceros Saussure, was described by Rugg & Rose (1991). Geoscapheus Tepper, Macropanesthia Saussure, Neogeoscapheus Roth and Parapanesthia Roth are endemic to Australia. Roth (1977) placed the 4 genera іп the Panesthiinae. Rugg & Rose (1984) reinstated the Geoscapheinae with these 4 genera on differences in reproductive biology, morphol- ogy and ecology. We describe 9 new species of Geoscapheinae from various areas of Queensland (Fig.1). Roth (1977) described M. monteithi Roth from female specimens only and M. kraussiana (Saussure) from a damaged male lacking genitalia. He described all other Geoscapheinae and Australian Panesthiinae from males. McKittrick (1964) showed that male genitalia are important specific features in cockroaches so we describe the male of M. monteithi and the male genitalia of M.kraussiana, Measurements are in millimetres unless stated. Scale bars represent 2mm unless stated. In descriptions of males, measurements of the holotype are given and those of the paratypes are in brackets, Measurements of females refer to the paratypes. Terminology used for the male genital phallomeres is that of McKittrick (1964) and Roth (1977), Keys are for adults only but can often be applied to nymphs, ABBREVIATIONS USED COLLECTORS: BRR, B.R. Rose; HAR, Н.А. Rose; DR, D. Rugg; JAW, J.A. Walker; JRW, J.-R. Woodward. MUSEUMS: ANIC, Australian National Insect Collec- tion, CSIRO, Canberra; MMUS, Macleay Museum, The University of Sydney, Sydney; QM, Queensland Museum, Brisbane; UQIC, University of Queensland Insect Collection, Brisbane; SAM, South Australian Museum, Adelaide; USIC, The University of Sydney Insect Collection (Department of Crop Sciences), Syd- ney. SYSTEMATICS Family BLABERIDAE Subfamily PANESTHIINAE Wings and tegmina present (though may he vestigial or reduced through mutilation); if wings and tegmina totally absent then laterocaudal angle of tergite 6 is not produced into a spine. Subfamily GEOSCAPHEINAE Wings and tegmina totally absent and laterocaudal angle of tergite 7 produced and directed laterally or dorsally; if directed ventrocaudally or obliquely posteriorly then Jaterocaudal angle of tergite 6 produced into а short spine. KEY TO GENERA OF GEOSCAPHEINAE 1. Posterior margin of tergite 6 without spines or tubercles (exclusive of the laterocaudal angle), but may be thickened and weakly un- dulate. or with a raised ridge Posterior margin of tergite 6 with one or 264 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM more raised spines or tubercles, exclusive of the laterocaudal апр!е..,..,..,......,... 3 2. Laterocaudal angle of tergites 6 and 7 produced into large spines, that on 6 curved dorsad, that on 7 directed obliquely upwards . . AL fin А ra nun. Geoscapheus Laterocaudal angle of 6 not produced or if produced then not curved dorsad, that on 7 directed slightly or strongly dorsad, or ventrocaudally or obliquely and posteriorly . . . „Е, резот ет Macropanesthia 3, Posterior margin of tergite 6 with a single large, upturned acute spine, or a broadly rounded tubercle lateral to a small or non- produced caudalangle ..... Neogeoscapheus Posterior margin of tergite 6 with several erect rounded tubercles laterally ............ KEY TO SPECIES OF GEOSCAPHEUS 1. Hind margin of supraanal plate crenulate ..... JG lepras Же ре eim eie G. crenulatus (Shaw) Hind margin of supraanal plate smooth... ... 2 2. Thoracic пота cream to castaneous laterally, pronotum black anteromedially .....-...... Ad V aja je" dor «jd isla tjs ach G. woodwardi sp, nov. Thoracic nota black or ferragineous ........3 3, Dorsal surface matt; anterior pronotal margin with à single tubercle (@)................. база аага. G. rugulosus sp. nav. Dorsal surface shiny; anterior pronotal mar- gin without, or with two, tubercles (d) ..... 4 4. Abdominal tergites sparsely punctate, mostly laterally; lateral angles of supraanal plate rounded, shallow, but usually distinct; hind margin of last sternite deeply concave (d) ... "TEMOR р ег» а М» G. robustus (Tepper) Abdominal tergites usually densely punctate, lateral punctations larger; lateral angles of supraanal plate hardly produced; hind mar- gin of last sternite shallowly concave (d) .... wa dea qi ee eia il lag da G. dilatatus (Saussure) KEY TO SPECIES OF NEOGEOSCAPHEUS 1. Hind margin of tergite 6 with a large spine separate from the laterocaudal angle .......2 Hind margin cf tergite 6 with a rounded tubercle separate from the laterocaudal angle . түнүн Зу РЕҮЯТ: М. hirsutus (Shaw) 2. Laterocaudal angle of tergite 6 produced into a small spine, directed posteriorly; tergites finely punctate medially ..... N. dahmsi Roth Laterocaudal angle of tergite 6 not produced into a spine; tergites smooth to sparsely and weakly punctate medially ................. KEY TO SPECIES OF PARAPANESTHIA Laterocaudal angle of tergite 6 produced into a small spine; posterior margin of tergite 5 without tubercles ...... P. pearsoni sp. nov. Laterocandal angle of tergite 6 not produced into a spine; postenor margin of tergite 5 often with several tubercles laterally ........ Аа У УҺ P. gigantea (Tepper) KEY TO SPECIES OF MACROPANESTHIA 1. Thoracic nota with a cream 10 orange border laterally .......... М. kraussiana (Saussure) Thoracic nota ferrugineous, brown or black, laterally . "Cy .2 2. Cerci bulbous, apex broadly rounded, “Варне, ly setose dorsally and ventrally ........... 3 Cerci tapered, apex acutely rounded, dorsal surface not setose and with a medial ridge . ..5 3, Latérocaudal angle of tergite 6 produced into a small spine; spine on laterocaudal angle of tergite 7 directed ventrocaudally ........... oe Paap oe eee ot ey tae M. rathi sp. nov. Laterocaudal angle of tergité 6 not produced; spine on laterocaudal angle of tergite 7 directed dorsally „а.а... 4 4, Pronotal length less than 15mm; total length less than 55mm; males with weakly developed disc tubercles on pronotum ....... . M. heppleorum sp, nov, Pronotal length préater than 15mm; total length usually greater than 60mm; males with clearly developed pronotal disc tubercles .......... M. rhinoceros Saussure 5. Anterolateral corners of tergites 6 and 7, and often tergite 5, with round holes ........... 6 Anterolateral corners of tergites without holes 6. Posterior margin of supraanal plate smooth, lateral corners (posterior to cerci) rounded . _. SERE v L5: M. mackerassae Roth Posterior margin of supraanal plate crenulate, lateral corners (posterior to cerci) produced into acute spines ........ M. kinkuna sp. nov. 7. Laterocaudal angle of tergite 6 produced into a very small spine; laterocaudal angle of ter- gite 7 with a spine directed ventrocaudally, males with weak premarginal disc tubercles . , - M. saxicola sp. nov. Laterocaudal angle of tergite 6 not produced; AUSTRALIAN GEOSCAPHEINAE laterocaudal angle of tergite 7 directed laterally or dorsally; males with strongly recurved premarginal disc tubercles ........ 8 8. Posterior margin of tergite 6 with a broadly rounded peak 3-5mm from lateral margin; margin of supraanal plate smooth... 6,20... „дуку Жз ae dre: M. lithgowae sp, nov. Tergite 6 with lateral two thirds of posterior margin thickened evenly; margin of supraanal plate smooth or weakly crenulate -~ , sss M, montelthi Roth petat teg p itae Geoscapheus rugulosus sp. nov. (Fig. 2) MATERIAL EXAMINED НО1ОТҮРЕ: d, Blackdown Tableland, Expedition Range, 23^48.5' S 149"03.5'E, dug up. 16.xii. 1986, HAR, DR, L. Sanchez, JRW, ОМ. PARATYPES: 2 d, same data as holotype, QM; 1 9, Blackdown Tableland, Blackdown Base, 23°33'S 149739" E, dug up, 5.iv.1988, HAR, QM; I $,1 9, Blackdown Tableland, Expedition Range, 23°49°S 149*04' E, dug up, 25,vi, 1992, BRR, HAR, JAW, IRW, ANIC, OTHER MATERIAL; 5 d, 3 ?, 3 d nymphs, 2 9 nymphs, Blackdown Tableland, Expedition Range, 23*"48.5' S 149"03.5" E, dug up, 16.xii.1986, HAR, DR, L. Sanchez, JRW, USIC; 5 d, | 9, Blackdown Tableland, Blackdown Base, 23*33'8 149739'E, dug up, 5.iv.1988, HAR, USIC; 3 9, 7 d nymphs, 6 9 nymphs, Blackdown Tableland, Expedition Range, 23749'8 149704'E, dug up, 25.v1.1992, BRR, HAR, JAW, JRW, LISIC. DESCRIPTION Male Colour. Head ferrugineous, basal half of clypeus labrum genae and mandibles black; pronotum ferrugineous laterally, darker to black medially and anteriorly; meso- and metanotum ferrugineous laterally, dark brown to black medially; legs ferrugincous, tibia and spines black; abdominal tergites very dark brown to black; supraanal plate black; 52—6 black laterally, ferrugineous medially; 87 dark brown to black laterally and posteriorly, ferrugineous antero- medially; subgenital plate dark brown; cerci dark brown; dorsal surface matt; yentral surfaces shiny, Measurements. Total length 52.7 (51.0—55.8), pronotal length x width 16.3 x 27.7 (15.2-17.5 x 26.0—28 9). Head. Densely punctate, hidden under 265 pronotum. frons sculptured with irregular fine grooves. Thorax. Pronotum convex, subsemicircular, with a medial premarginal thickening forming a broad transverse tubercle (Fig.2D); disc depressed posterior to tubercle to 2-3mm fram posterior margin which is thickened medially, floor of depression roughened and granular be- hind anterior tubercle and anterior to a pair of ohlique anterior grooves, posterior portion of depression relatively smooth; pronotum strongly and densely punctate; meso-and metanotum punctate and finely grooved, punctations larger and denser laterally; anteroventral margin of front femur with 2 or 3 large spines basally and a smal] distal spine, postenor margin with a large distal spine. Abdomen. Tl—6 punctate and with fine ir- regular grooving, punctations larger and denser laterally, grooved sculpturing more pronounced medially; laterocaudal angle of T6 produced into a large dorsally reflexed spine (Fig. 2C); T7 strongly and densely punctate. lateral margins concave, laterocaudal angle produced into a short slightly uptumed oblique spine; supraanal plate strongly and densely punctate, laterocaudal angle slightly produced obtusely, posterior margin slightly upturned and weakly undulate; sternites punctate, punctations stronger and denser lateral- ly; S7 broadly rounded, concavely truncated posteriorly exposing subgenital plate; subgenital plate punctate; cerci bulbous, tapering to an ob- tusely rounded tip, proximal half with a dorsal medial ridge, densely setaceous ventrally except on anterior margin, dorsal surface nonsetose anteriorly, setaccous on posterior margin and sparsely setaceous posterior to medial ridge; genitalia developed but variable, L2d absent, L2vm present, Ll present but often weakly sclerotised, R2 varies from a short weakly sclerotised mound to a strong hook (Fig. 2B.E). Female Differs from male as follows: pronotum without premarginal thickening, disc hardly if at all depressed, posterior margin hardly thickened; body more dorsoventrally compressed; S7 not truncated posteriorly; subgenital plate absent. Measurements. Total length 50.4—51.9, prono- tal length x width 13.8-15.0 x 24.9-27,5, Nymph | Similar to adult but without adult pronotal char- acters, Usually lighter in colour than adults par- ticularly ventrally, 266 Key. to numbers: G- rugulosus P. pearsani ‚ G, waadwardi 3 M.hsrpleornim M. &inkuna ‚ M. насмеа > M. rothi ‚ M, axicota ‚ M, hgrharae \ ny > Longreach Rooknamptan | T ` FIG, 1, Distribution of the 9 new species. DISTRIBUTION AND BIOLOGY This species occurs at two locations on the Blackdown Tableland. Blackdown Base has a loose grey sandy soil with Eucalyptus, Expedi- tion Range has open Eucalyptus forest with an under cover of mostly quinine bushes on a fine orange loam. REMARKS In the subfamily, this species has the most matt texture and is most dorsoventrally compressed. Males are easily distinguished from the other Geoscapheus by their single pronotal tubercle. ETYMOLOGY Latin rugulosus, minutely wrinkled. Geoscapheus woodwardi sp. nov. (Figs 3A,B; 4A,B) MATERIAL EXAMINED HOLOTYPE: д, Mt Cornish, 7km NE of Muttaburra, 22°34°8 144°35°Б, dug up, 23.vi.1992, BRR, HAR, JAW, IRW, QM. PARATYPES:2 5, | 2, same data as holotype, QM; 1 3.1 9 ‚вате data as holotype, ANIC, OTHER MATERIAL: Queensland: 2 9, 4 d nymphs, 5 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 9 nymphs, same data as holotype, USIC; 4 nymphs, Muttaburra, 13-16.X.1968, С.В. Monteith. DESCRIPTION Male Colour. Head and antennae black; pronotum black anteriorly and medially, cream ta cas- taneous posterolaterally, posterolateral puncta- tions often brown or black, lateral and posterior margins black; meso- and metanotum cream to light tan, castaneous flecks and patches medially, a short castaneous to black longitudinal bar on anterior margin between midline and lateral mar- gin, lateral and posterior margins black, ventral surfaces cream to light tan laterally, ventral sur- face of pronotum black, legs black, trochanters and anterior femoral margin light brown basally; tergites castaneous, anterior margins darker, supraanal plate castaneous; S2—6 castaneous laterally, dark brown to black medially; S7 cas- taneous, dark brown to black posteromedially; subgenital plate dark brown to black postero- medially; subgenital plate dark brown, anterior margin black; cerci black basally, castaneous to brown apically; dorsal and ventral surfaces shiny. Measurements. Total length 37.5 (33.5—42.6), pronotal length x width 10.9 x 16.8 (9.9-11.1 x 15,5-18.4). Head. Hidden under pronotum, finely punctate. Thorax. Pronotum convex, subsemicircular, anterior margin curved obliquely upwards medially; disc depressed 2—3mm from anterior margin to 3-4mm from posterior margin, floor of depression granular and with a pair of oblique anterior grooves, posterior portion of depression less granular and with a pair of blunt disc tubercles (Fig.4B): pronotum finely punctate; meso- and metanotum finely and sparsely punctate, punctations denser laterally, lateral margins often with fine hairs; anteroventral mar- gin of front femur with 3—4 large spines basally and usually a very small spine distally, posterior margin with a large distal spine. Abdomen. T1—7 smooth to very weakly and sparsely punctate medially, weakly punctate laterally; laterocaudal angles of T2—5 broadly rounded and projecting slightly beyond lateral margin of previous tergite; laterocaudal angle of T6 produced into a short blunt spine directed obliquely and slightly dorsad (Fig.4A); latero- caudal angle of T7 produced into a short blunt spine directed obliquely and laterally (Fig. 4A); supraanal plate punctate, punctations denser posteriorly, laterocaudal angle hardly produced, posterior margin smooth; $2—5 punctate laterally, AUSTRALIAN GEOSCAPHEINAE 267 FIG. 2. Geoscapheus rugulosus sp. nov. A-D, holotype d ; E, paratype $. A, habitus, dorsal view; B, genitalia, R2-L2vm-L1; C, laterocaudal angle of T6, lateral margin of T7, laterocaudal angle of supraanal plate, dorsal view; D, pronotum, lateral view; E, genitalia, R2-L2vm-L1. sparsely punctate medially; S7 broadly rounded, concavely truncated posteriorly, punctate lateral- ly and posteriorly, sparsely punctate antero- medially; subgenital plate punctate; cerci acutely triangular, tapering to a rounded point apically, dorsal surface smooth to finely and sparsely punctate, concave basally either side of a weak dorsal ridge, ventral surface slightly bulbous and densely setaceous medially; genitalia not fully developed, L2d absent, L2vm present, L1 absent or very weakly developed and hardly sclerotised, R2ranges from an unsclerotised mound to a short sclerotised spur (Fig. 3B). Female Differs from male as follows: anterior margin of pronotum less curved dorsally, disc less depressed, disc tubercles absent; lateral areas of pro-, meso- and metanotum tending towards yel- lowish brown or orange rather than cream; brown longitudinal bars on anterior margin of meso- and metanotum not as defined as in males; posterior margin of S7 convexly truncated posteriorly; no subgenital plate; larger than male. Measurements. Total length 47,9-43,3, prona- tal length x width 11.1—12.2 x 16.6-19.0, Nymph Similar to adult but without adult pronotal char- acters: cream on thoracic nota does not extend so far medially as in adults, DISTRIBUTION AND BIOLOGY Known only from the type locality in mixed open forest in sandy soil in overflow channels of the Thomson River. Most burrows were found below overhanging branches of Acacia spp. REMARKS This is the second species known which 1% bicoloured. Nymphs of this species are very similar to nymphs of M. kraussiana., possessing paleedged nota. ETYMOLOGY For Jim Woodward who assisted in the field. Macropanesthia heppleorum sp. nov. (Figs 3C,D; 4C,D) MATERIAL EXAMINED HOLOTYPE; d , Pine Trees Pony Stud, 10% E of Innot Hot Springs, Queensland, 17°40'$ 145*14' E, dug up, 23.11.1991, B. Hepple, OM. PARATYPES: 1 d, 1 9, same location as holotype, dug up, 17.xi.1987, HAR, QM; 1 d, same location as holotype, dug up, 17.х1.1987, HAR, ANIC; | 2, same data as holotype, ANIC. OTHER MATERIAL: 2 d, 2 9, same data as holotype, USIC; 9 d, 10 2, 1 d nymph, same. location as holotype, dug up, 17.xi.1987, HAR, USIC; 2 9.1 d nymph, same location as holotype, dug up, 7.11.1989, B. Hepple, USIC; | 5, 2 d nymphs, | ? nymph, same location as holotype, dug up, 27.1x.1992, HAR, JAW, USIC; 5 3, 2 9, 1 nymph, 2 9 nymphs, ‘Yara’ 20km NE of Duaringa, dug up, 2.1.1989, G. Smith, USIC; 7 d, 1 2, ‘Yarra’ 20km NE of Duaringa, dug up, 1.11.1989, G. Smith, USIC; 2 4,1 9.1 9 nymph, ‘Yarra’ 20km NE of Duaringa, dug up, 1.iii.1989, С. Smith, USIC; 1 4, Gogango, via Rockhampton, 12.vi1.1967, C. Chopping, UQIC. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM DESCRIPTION Male Colour. Head dark brown to black, clypeus pale brown apically; pronotum ferrugineous laterally and posteromedially, dark brown to black antenorly and medially; meso- and metanotum ferrugineous, dark brown posterolaterally; legs tan to ferrugineous, tibià spines and tarsi dark brown to black; abdominal tergites ferrugincous to dark brown; supraanal plate dark brown to black: S2—6 tan to ferrugineous medially, dark brown to black laterally, $7 ferrugineous anteromedially, dark brown to black laterally and posteriorly; subgenital plate ferrugineous 10 dark brown; cerci dark brown basally, light brown apically; dorsal and ventral surfaces shiny. Measurements. Total length 48.9 (49.9-51.9), pronotal length x width 13.5 x 21.0 (14.4-14.5 x 20.4—20.8). Head. Finely and sparsely punctate, hidden under pronotum, frons slightly depressed above clypeus. Thorax, Pronotum convex, subsemicircular, anter;ur margin slightly thickened and upturned (Fig. 4D), disc depressed weakly anteriorto a pair of oblique anterior grooves arising from the centre of the pronotum, floor of depression roughened and granular, à pair of feeble separated disc tuhercles present posterior to oblique grooves, finely and sparsely punctate posteriorly and laterally; meso- and metanotum finely and sparsely punctate. punctations stronger latcrally; anteroventral margin of front femur with 2-3 large spines basally and a small spine distally, posterior margin with a large distal spine. Abdomen. T1-6 smooth to very finely and spar- sely punctate medially; T2-6 punctate laterally with stronger punctations in anterior comers, 2 row of punctations extending along anterior mar- gin but not medially, punctations becoming slightly stronger and denser in posterior tergites: lateral margins of T7 concave, laterocaudal angle produced into a large acute spine strongly reflexed dorsally (Fig.4C); supraanal plate punctate, anterior margin smooth, laterocaudal angle slightly produced obtusely, posterior mar- gin slightly upturned and entire or weakly undu- late; 52—6 punctate laterally, smooth medially; 57 punctate laterally and posteriorly, smooth anteromedially, broadly rounded and concavely truncated posteriorly exposing subgenital plate; subgenital plate punctate; cerci bulbous, with a broadly rounded tip, densely setaceous ventrally, dorsal surface nonsetose except apical margins AUSTRALIAN GEOSCAPHEINAE 269 FIG. 3. A,B, Geoscapheus woodwardi sp. nov., holotype d ; C,D, Macropanesthia heppleorum sp. nov., holotype б. A-C, habitus, dorsal view; B, genitalia, L1-L2vm-R2; D, genitalia, L2vm. and with a weak medial ridge; genitalia reduced, — cavely truncated posteriorly; subgenital plate ab- L2d, L1 and R2 absent, L2vm present (Fig. 3D). sent. Measurements. Total length 45.7—48.2, prono- Female tal length x width 12.2-12.8 x 18.8—20.1. Differs from male as follows: pronotum without disc tubercles, anterior margin only slightly thickened and upturned, disc only slight- Nymph ly depressed; S7 broadly rounded but not con- Similar to adults but without adult pronotal 270 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 4, d. A, characters; laterocaudal angle of T7 not as produced or reflexed, DISTRIBUTION AND BIOLOGY M. heppleorum is known from two widely separated areas; the population near Mt Garnet is 800km N of those around Duaringa. Specimens have been dug from grey sandy loams to hard packed red soil amongst brigalow roots. Vegeta- tion is usually Callitris—Eucalyptus forest. REMARKS In both areas where M.heppleorum is found, M. rhinoceros is nearby but not sympatric. This species is similar to M. rhinoceros but smaller. The Gogango specimen (C. Chopping, 1967, UQIC) was identified by L.M. Roth in 1974 as a male nymph of M. rhinoceros. It is, however, an adult and similar to those specimens from ‘Yarra’, 20km NE of Duaringa. Adult males can be distinguished from small specimens of M. rhinoceros by having less prono- tal development, disc tubercles are smaller and the anterior margin less dorsally curved. A further distinction of M. rhinoceros 15 its adult pronotal A,B, Geoscapheus woodwardi sp. nov., holotype d ; C,D, Macropanesthia heppleorum sp. nov., holotype C, lateral margins of T6-T7 supraanal plate, dorsal view; B, D, pronotum, lateral view. length of greater than 15mm versus less than 15mm for M. heppleorum. ETYMOLOGY For Don and Betty Hepple on whose former property this species is abundant. Macropanesthia kinkuna sp. nov. (Figs 5A-D; 6A,B) MATERIAL EXAMINED HOLOTYPE: 4 , Kinkuna National Park 15km SE of Bundaberg, Queensland, 25?00'S 152729'E, dug up, 21.1v.1992, D. Cook, С. B. Monteith, OM. PARATYPES: 1 d, same data as holotype, ANIC; 1 d, 10km S of Gotlow, 25°00'S 152°23'Е, dug up. 5.vii.1992, HAR, JAW, JRW, ОМ; 1 d, 10km S of Gotlow, 25°00'S 152°23'Е, dug up, 5.vii.1992, HAR, JAW, JRW, ANIC; 1 5, 1 9, Coonarr Beach, 10km S of Bundaberg, 25755'S 152729 E, dug up, 6.vii.1992, HAR, JAW, JRW, QM. OTHER MATERIAL: | д, 1 9, 2 d nymphs, same data as holotype, USIC; 5 d, 1 9. 3 & nymphs, 5 ? nymphs, same data as Coonarr Beach paratypes, USIC; 3 d nymphs, same data as Gotlow paratypes, USIC. AUSTRALIAN GEOSCAPHEINAE DESCRIPTION Male Colour. Head fernigineous, frons genae and mandibles black, clypeus tan apically; pronotum ferrugineous laterally, dark brown to black medially: meso- and metanotum ferrugineous; legs dark tan to ferrugineous, tibia darker, ab- dominal Т1 ferrugineous, T2—7 dark brown ta black: supraanal plate black; S2—6 dark tan medially, black laterally; S7 dark brown to black, brown anteromedially; subgenital plate dark brown; cerci ferrugineous apically and on dorsal medial ndge, dark brown to black dorsobasally cither side of medial ridge, light brown ventro- basally; pro-, meso- and metanotum shiny; Т1—6 shiny; T7 and supraanal plate matt; ventral sur- face shiny. Measurements. Total length 41.2 (32.2—11.8), pronotal length x width 11.0 x 18.5 (8,9-1 1.6 x 14.9-18.7). Head. Projecting slightly beyond pronotum, smooth, frons slightly depressed above clypeus. Thorax. Pronotum very finely and sparsely punctate laterally, convex subsemicircular, with a medial premarginal thickening forming a rounded tubercle (Fig. 5D); disc depressed postenor to tubercle to 2-3mm from posterior margin which is thickened medially, floor of depression finely granular posterior to premar- ginal tubercle and anterior to a pair of oblique anterior grooves, slightly roughened posterior to oblique anterior grooves; meso- and metanotum with very fine sparse punctations: anteroventral margin of front femur with 2—4 large spines basal- ly, a very small and often absent spine distally; posterior margin of front femur with a large distal spine, Abdomen. Т1 smooth; T2-6 with punctations laterally, punctations becoming stronger from T2 to Тб, medial punctations becoming stronger and denser from T2-6 with T2 being very finely and sparsely punctate and T6 strongly and densely punctate; laterocaudal angle of T6 slightly produced forming a small caudally directed spine; T7 strongly and densely punctate, laterocaudal angle produced into an acute oblique spine curved dorsally (Fig. 5C); T6 and T7 (sometimes TS) with anterolateral holes (Fig. 5B); supraanal plate strongly and densely punctate over all but anterior margin which is smooth; laterocaudal angle of supraanal plate produced acutely, rounded apically, with convex Outer margins and concave inner margins, posterior margin strongly crenulate (Fig. 6A); 52-6 punctate laterally, smooth to very weakly zl and sparsely punctate medially; S7 broadly rounded, punctate laterally and posteromedially, smooth anteromedially. transversely to weakly concavely truncated posteriorly exposing sub- genital plate: subgenital plate finely punctate; cerci bulbous and densely; setaceous ventrally (Fig. SC), tapering to an acute tip apically, dorsal surface smooth to sparsely and very finely punctate, concave basally either side of a strong dorsal medial ridge; genitalia developed, L2d absent, L2vm and 1.1 present, R2 developed into a full hook (Fig. SB). Female Differs from male as follows: pronotum, anterior margin only slightly thickened, tubercle weak, disc depression posterior to oblique grooves less pronounced, posterior margin not thickened; S7 not concavely truncated posterior- ly; no subgenital plate. Measurements. Total length 36.4—39.0, prono- tal length x width 9.5—10.2 x 15.8- 18.0. Nymph Similar to adult but without adult pronotal char- acters. DISTRIBUTION AND BIOLOGY From 3 locations within a few km in or near Kinkuna National Park. It is found in grey sandy loam amongst Eucalyptus/Banksia forest, Casuarina stands, Callitris, and thick heath, REMARKS Although superficially similar to Mf. mackeras- sae this species is distinguished on its crenulate supraanal plate margins ETYMOLOGY For Kinkuna National Park. Macropanesthia kraussiana (Saussure) (Fig. 5E) MATERIAL EXAMINED LECTOTYPE; З. Melbourne, Victoria, in the Geneva Museum (not examined). OTHER MATERIAL: Qucensland: | d, 1 9,1 d nymph, Isisford, sand ridge on road to "Mons' homestead, dug up, 20,1х.1990, С, Lithgow, USIC; 3 d, 39, 4 d nymphs, В © nymphs, ‘Mons’ Skm S of Isisford, 24°18'S 144726' E, dug up, 21.v1.1992, BRR, HAR, IAW, JRW, USIC. New South Wales: 1 9 nymph, MMUS; 1 9, Calugeena Creek, dug up, ix. 1988, HAR, USIC; 1 9, 77km W of Cobar, 6.xi.1990, HAR, USIC; 272 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 5. A-D, Macropanesthia kinkuna sp. nov., holotype d ; E, Macropanesthia kraussiana (Saussure), $ Mons, Queensland. A, habitus, dorsal view; B,E, genitalia, R2-L2vm-L 1; C, laterocaudal angle of T7, lateral margin of supraanal plate, dorsal view; D, pronotum, lateral view. 2 9,3 d nymphs, 3 9 nymphs, NW edge of Lake weakly sclerotised spur or may be absent (Fig. Popiltah, 33?08'S 141*43'E, dug up, 8.xi.1990, HAR, 5E). USIC. REMARKS MALE GENITALIA When the Panesthiinae were revised by Roth Much reduced. L2d is absent and L2vm (1977) heexamined three specimens, from Rock- present. L1 is weakly developed and is present hampton, New South Wales and Melbourne. He only as a weakly sclerotised line. R2 is a short concluded M. kraussiana had a wide distribution. AUSTRALIAN GEOSCAPHEINAE FIG. 6. Macropanesthia kinkuna sp. nov., holotype d , dorsal view. A, T7 and supraanal plate; B, lateral portion of anterior margin of T6. Melbourne seems an unlikely habitat for this species since all other known records are in semi- arid areas. Nevertheless, it ranges over wide areas in Queensland and New South Wales. Macropanesthia lithgowae sp. nov. (Figs 7A,B; 8A-C) MATERIAL EXAMINED HOLOTYPE: d, Nudley State Forest, 20km N of Jan- dowae, 267328 151700" E, dug up, 18.xii.1986, HAR, JRW, QM. PARATYPES: 1 9, ‘Allinga’ Homestead, 8km N of Chinchilla, 26741' S 150°38°E, dug up, 11.iv.1988, С. Lithgow, ANIC; 1 d, same location as holotype, dug up, 3.у11.1992, BRR, HAR, JAW, JRW, ANIC; 1 9. same location as holotype, dug up, 3.11.1992, BRR, HAR, JAW, JRW, ОМ; 1 5, 1 2, Jinghi Valley Road, 9km N of Jandowae, 26°41°5 151°05'E, dug up, 4.у11.1992, BRR, HAR, JAW, JRW, QM. OTHER MATERIAL: 1 d. 2 9, 1 ð nymph, same location as holotype, dug up, 20.х11.1987, HAR, USIC; 1 d, Chinchilla, dug up, xii.1987, HAR, USIC; 1 6,4 2, same location as holotype, dug up, 12-13.v.1988, HAR, USIC; | d, 2 $, 5 d nymphs, 5 9 nymphs, laboratory born from adults collected al holotype loca- tion, HAR, USIC; 3 d , 5 9, same location as holotype, dug up, 26.11.1988, HAR, JRW, USIC; 1 d, 1 9, same location as holotype, dug up, 18.xii.1986, HAR, JRW, USIC; 24,5 9 ,3 d nymphs, | 9 nymph, same location as holotype, dug up.. 3.vii.1992, BRR, HAR, JAW, JRW, USIC; 1 d nymph, 'Gilgunya' Nudley State Forest, dug up, 3.vii.1992, JAW, USIC: 1 d, | 9.4 d nymphs, 4 9 nymphs, Jinghi Valley Road, 9km N of Jandowae, 26°41°$ 151°05”Е, dug up, 4.vii.1992, BRR, HAR, JAW, ЈЕУ, USIC; | 4,1 9, Jinghi Valley Road, 9km N of Jandowae, 26°41°5 151?05'E, dug up, 14.у.1988, HAR, USIC; 2 9, 2 & nymphs, 2 9 nymphs, Monmouth, 4km NE of Chinchilla, dug up, 23.1у.1988. HAR, USIC; 3 d, 2 9. 1 d nymph, ‘Allinga’ Homestead, 8km N of Chinchilla, 26°41'S 150*38' E, dug up, 13.v.1988, HAR, USIC. DESCRIPTION Male Colour. Head dark brown to black, vertex slightly ferrugineous; pronotum ferrugineous laterally and along posterior margin, dark brown anteromedially and around disc; meso- and metanotum ferrugineous; coxae, tibia, profemora and tarsi dark brown; trochanters meso- and metafemurs light brown; tergites and supraanal plate ferrugineous to dark brown; 82-6 dark brown to black laterally, ferrugineous to brown medially; S7 dark brown to black, brown anteromedially; subgenital plate dark brown; cerci ferrugineous; dorsal and ventral surfaces shiny. Measurements, Total length 46.0 (41.2—42.3). pronotal length x width 11.9 x 18.1 (11.0 x 16.8— 18.3). Head. Weakly and very finely punctate, hidden under pronotum, depressed above clypeus. Thorax. Pronotum convex, subsemicircular; anterior margin often slightly indented medially, with a premarginal thickening forming a pair of slightly recurved rounded tubercles (Fig.8B): disc depressed posterior to tubercles to 2-3mm from posterior margin: floor of depression roughened and slightly transversely striate imme- diately posterior to tubercles, with a pair of obli- que anterior grooves meeting in centre of disc depression, often with two very weak tubercles immediately anterior to junction of oblique grooves; finely punctate anteriorly adjacent to premarginal tubercles and laterally, smooth 274 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 7. A,B, Macropanesthia lithgowae sp. nov., holotype d; C,D, Macropanesthia monteithi Roth, б Hivesville, Queensland. A,C, habitus, dorsal view; B,D, genitalia, R2-L2vm-L 1. posteromedially; meso— and metanotum smooth to very weakly and sparsely punctate laterally; anteroventral margin of front femur with 2—4 (usually 3) large spines basally and a small spine distally, posterior margin with a large distal spine. Abdomen. T2-5 punctate laterally, T2—4 being weaker, smooth to very finely and sparsely punctate medially; T6 punctate laterally becom- ing sparse and fine medially, posterior margin thickened laterally producing a broadly rounded ridge ending before lateral margin (Fig. 8C); T7 punctate except on anteromedial margin, laterocaudal angle produced into an acute spine directed obliquely and curved dorsally (Fig. 8A); supraanal plate punctate except anteromedially, laterocaudal angle slightly produced forming a broadly rounded obtuse spine directed caudally, posterior margin smooth; 82-6 strongly and den- AUSTRALIAN GEOSCAPHEINAE sely punctate laterally, 53-6 very finely and spar- sely punctate to smooth medially; S7 strongly punctate laterally, weakly punctate postenorly. smooth anteromedially, broadly rounded, con- cavely truncated posteriorly exposing subgenital plate; subgenital plate smooth; cerci broadly tri- angular with a rounded tip, dorsal surface non- setose and with a medial ridge basally, setaceous ventrally except on apical margins; genitalia well developed, L2d absent, L2vm and L1 present, R2 соса into a strong sclerotised hook (Fig. Female Differs from male as follows: pronotum without premarginal tubercles, dise less depressed; $7 broadly rounded but not concavely truncated posteriorly; subgenital plate absent. Measurements. Total length 37.0-42,1, prono- tal length x width 9,6-10,9 x 16.1-17.3. Nymph Similar to adults but without adult pronotal characters (disc depression and tubercles). DISTRIBUTION AND BIOLOGY Common in the Chinchilla and Jandowae areas; М. hirsutus occurs at Burra Вигп, only a few km from M, lithgowae in Nudley State Forest, Some areas have high population densities with more than one burrow/mr. It occurs in sandy loamy soil in open sclerophyll forests with Eucalyptus and Callitris. REMARKS Although similar to N. hirsutus it lacks the rounded tubercle. ETYMOLOGY For Grace Lithgow, a naturalist, on whose property the species occurs. Macropanesthia monteithi Roth (Figs 7С,0; 8D-F) MATERIAL EXAMINED HOLOTYPE: © , Stonelands, Qld., 1.111.1964, B. Genn, MT.7212. PARATYPE: d , Sydney, A. & F. R. Zietz, SAM. OTHER MATERIAL: Queensland: 3 4, Hivesville, dug up, 25.1.1992, HAR, USIC; 2 d, 1 д nymph, Ar chookoora St. For. 23km S of Kingaroy. dug ир, 26.viii.1986, HAR, USIC; 13 5, 7 9,5 d nymphs, 4 nymphs, Archookoora St. For. 23km S of Kingaroy, 275 dug up, 26.1.1992, HAR, USIC; 1 d, 3.5km NE of Proston, on surface, iv. 1992, С, Kilgour, USIC. DESCRIPTION Male Colour. Head ferruginous to black, frons and clypeus black; pronotum dark brown to black, disc black, meso- and metanotum ferrugineous to dark brown medially, dark brown to black lateral- ly; legs black, femurs ferrugineous basally; ter- gites dark brown to black; sternites black laterally, ferrugineous to dark brown medially; subgenital plate dark brown to black; cerci dark brown to black; ventral and dorsal surfaces shiny. Measurements. (all males examined), total length 40.2-51.6, pronotal length x width 12,3. 14.4 x 18.6-23.0. Head. Hidden under pronotum, finely punctate. Thorax. Pronotum convex, anterior margin in- dented medially, with a premarginal thickening forming a pair of rounded tubercles which are often recurved (Fig. BE), disc depressed posterior to tubercles to 2-3mm from posterior margin, floor of depression roughened and granular and with a pair of transverse curved grooves becom- ing oblique then meeting in centre of disc depres- sion, with two distinct disc tubercles on the posterolateral margin of the disc depression, remainder of pronotum smooth to finely and weakly punctate; meso- and metanotum smooth to weakly and sparsely punctate; anteroventral margin of front femur with 3—4 (rarely 5) large spines basally and a very small spine distally, posterior margin with a small distal spine. Abdomen. ТІ smooth; T2-6 smooth to finely and weakly punctate medially and weakly punctate Jaterally, posterior margin of T6 thick- ened and raised laterally forming a ridge which tapers to the lateral margin (Fig. SF); T7 weakly punctate, lateral margin concave, laterocaudal angle produced into an acute spine directed laterally (Fig. 8D); supraanal plate punctate ex- cept medially on anterior and posterior margins, posterior margin often slightly curved upwards and may be smooth or weakly crenulate, laterocaudal angle weakly produced and broadly rounded; 52-6 smooth medially, punctate lateral- ly: S7 smooth medially, punctate laterally, often weakly punctate posteromedially, weakly con- cavely truncated posteriorly exposing subgenital plate; subgenital plate smooth; cerci broadly tri- angular, rounded apically, with a strong dorsal medial ridge, bulbous and densely setose ventral- ly, setose on posterior margin, nonsetose dorsul- ly: genitalia well developed, L2d absent, L2vm 276 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 8. A-C, Macropanesthia lithgowae sp. nov., holotype d; D-F, Macropanesthia monteithi Roth, d Hivesville, Queensland. A,D, laterocaudal angle of T6, lateral margin of T7, dorsal view; B,E, pronotum, lateral view; C,F, lateral portion of posterior margin of T6, posterior view, and LI present, R2 developed into a strong sclerotised hook (Fig. 7D). DISTRIBUTION AND BIOLOGY Two populations in SE Queensland. Ar- chookoora State Forest and Hivesville both have softwood scrub with scattered evergreen vine thickets on a brown to red loam, however, Ar- chookoora is slightly wetter. REMARKS The original description of M. monteithi Roth (1977) was from an adult female collected at Stonelands, near Hivesville, and a female from Sydney. The specimens on which the male description is based are from two populations around. Kingaroy. The specimen from Sydney, designated by Roth (1977) as a paratype, is not an adult and differs from nymphs collected at the holotype location. Nymphs are extremely hard to identify as the pronotal and tergal features, which disünguish the various species, are not fully developed. The 'Sydney' nymph remains un- determined, however, it keys closest to M. kinkuna sp. nov. Macropanesthia rothi sp. nov. (Figs 9B-D; 10A) MATERIAL EXAMINED HOLOTYPE: d , Wreck Rock, 12km S of Agnes Water, 24^19'S, 151°58'Е, dug up, 19-26-viii, 1985, A. Kotze, HAR, DR, L. Sanchez, JRW, QM. PARATYPES: | d, data as for holotype, QM; І d, 1 9, Wreck Rock, 12km S of Agnes Water, 24°19°S 151*58'E, dug up, 4.v.1989, HAR, DR, JRW, ANIC; І d, Wreck Rock, 12km S of Agnes Water, 24°19'S 151*58' E, dug up, 4. v.1989, HAR, DR, JRW, QM. AUSTRALIAN GEOSCAPHEINAE OTHER MATERIAL: Queensland: 1 ¢, 1 2, Rainforest Pitfall 71, Rocky Point, 10km 5 of Round Hill Head, 1976-1977, 60m, С.В. & S.R. Monteith, ОМ; 1 9. 10.8km S of Agnes Water, dug up, 9.xii.1986, HAR, DR, L. Sanchez, JRW, USIC; 7 d,3 9,4 d nymphs, ] ? nymph, data as for holotype, USIC; 1 9,2 d nymphs, 1 9 nymph, 10.8km S of Agnes Water, dug up, 9-12.xii.1986, HAR, DR, L. Sanchez, JRW, USIC: 3 d, 10.8km 5 of Agnes Water, dug up. 14.11.1988, HAR, DR, JRW, USIC; 1 ?, Wreck Rock, 12km S of Agnes Water, 24^19'S 151%8'Е, dug up, 4.v,1989, HAR. DR, JRW, USIC; 3 5,6 9,2 d nymphs, 3 9 nymphs, Wreck Rock, I2km S of Agnes Water. 24°19°5 151^58'"E. dug up, 3-5.iv.1991, A. C. Kotze, J, D. Redfern, HAR, IRW, USIC. DESCRIPTION Male Colour. Head ferrugineous, frons gena and mandibles dark brown; pronotum ferrugineous laterally, dark brown to hlack medially: meso and metanotum ferrugineous laterally and posterior- ly, dark brown anteromedially; legs ferrugineous, spines black apically; tergites progressing from ferrugineous to black from T1-7, T7 almost hlack; supraanal plate almost black, posterior margin ferrugineous; 51-6 lightly ferrugineous medially, dark brown laterally; $7 ferrugineous anteromedially, dark brown laterally and post- eriorly; subgenital plate ferrugineous; cerci dark brown; ventral surfaces shiny; dorsal surfaces shiny anteriorly tending to matt posteriorly. Measurements. Total length 68.3 (61.8—63.6), pronotal length x width 22.2 x 35.2 (17.5-20.0 x 28.9—32.5). Head. Hidden under pronotum, sparsely and finely punctate, frons slightly depressed above clypeus. Thorax. Pronotum convex, subsemicircular, with a medial premarginal thickening forming a pair of broadly rounded tubercles which are fused medially (Fig. 9C); disc depressed posterior to tubercles to 2-3mm from posterior margin which is thickened medially, floor of depression roughened and granular behind anterior tubercle and anterior to a pair of oblique anterior grooves, posterior portion of depression relatively smooth; pronotum sparsely and finely punctate, finely grooved laterally; meso- and metanotum with sparse fine punctations and fine irregular groov- ing; anteroventral margin of front femur with 2 or 3 (rarely 1 or 4) large spines basally, à small spine distally, hind margin with a large distal spine. Abdomen. T1-4 sparsely punctate laterally, posterior margin of T2-3 (often T4) strongly 277 concave laterally (Fig. 10A), T5 and T6 with stronger denser punctations extending medially; laterocaudal angle of T6 produced into a short acute blunt spine directed posteriorly (Fig. 9D); T7 with punctations larger and denser than on anterior tergites, laterocaudal angle produced into an acute spine directed ventrocaudally (Fig. 9D): supraanal plate punctate over all except anterior margin, laterocaudal angles produced obtusely, posterior margin smooth to weakly crenulate and weakly upturned; S7 punctate laterally and medially, broadly rounded, con- cavely truncated posteriorly exposing subgenital plate; cerei bulbous, broadly rounded, densely setaceous (Fig.9D); genitalia well developed but variable, L2d absent, L2vm and L1] present but often weak, R2 ranging from a weak unscler- otised spur to a fully developed hook (Fig.9B). Female Differs from male as follows: pronotum with antenor margin only slightly thickened, tubercles absent, disc only slightly depressed, posterior margin not thickened, 87 with posterior margin not truncated concavely, no subgenital plate. Measurements. Total length 63.4—64.4, prono- tal length x width 18.1 x 30,7-30.8. Nymph Similar to adult but without adult pronotal char- acters, body more dorsoventrally compressed than adult. Colour, pale tan to brown for carly instars, becoming darker towards final instar, final instar with sternite and legs pale brown medially. DISTRIBUTION AND BIOLOGY Known from within and close to Deepwater National Park in sandy, open forest to rainforest, with palms and Casuarina predominating, and with some Eucalyptus. REMARKS | This species is similar in size ta M. rhinoceros but more robust 1n the thorax and legs. ETYMOLOGY For Dr L. M. Roth. Macropanesthia saxicola sp. nov. (Figs 9A,E-G; IOR) MATERIAL EXAMINED HoLorYPE: d Pikedale, 28°39°S |5]"37'E, dug wp, T.xii.1991, HAR, QM. 278 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 9. A,E-G, Macropanesthia saxicola sp. nov., holotype d; B-D, Macropanesthia rothi sp. nov., holotype 3. A,B, genitalia, R2-L2vm-L1; С,Е, pronotum, lateral view; D,E, laterocaudal angles of Тб and supraanal plate, lateral margin of T7, dorsal view. PARATYPES: 1 d, 1 2, same data as holotype, ANIC; brown to black laterally and posteriorly; meso- 1 d, same data as holotype, QM; 1 9, Pikedale nr and metanotum black laterally, dark brown Texas, in grass beside road, 20.x.1990, С. Grigg, QM. medially; legs black, meso- and metafemur OTHER MATERIAL: Queensland: 3 ?, 3 d nymphs,2 brown posteroventrally; T1—7 dark brown to ? nymphs, same data as holotype, USIC. black tending darker from Т1—7; supraanal plate dark brown to black; 852—6 black laterally, 53-6 DESCRIPTION brown medially; S7 black laterally, dark brown Male to black posteriorly, brown to black Colour. Head black; pronotum black, dark anteromedially; subgenital plate dark brown to AUSTRALIAN GEOSCAPHEINAE black; cerci black, usually ferrugineous on apical tip; dorsal and ventral surfaces shiny. Measurements. Total length 38.5 (38.2—40.6), pronotal length x width 10.3 x 15.3 (10.3-10.5 x 16.0—16.4). Head. Hidden under pronotum, finely and spar- sely punctate, slightly depressed above clypeus. Thorax. Pronotum convex, subsemicircular, finely punctate, anterior margin indented medial- ly and thickened producing a pair of weak broad- ly rounded tubercles (Fig. 9F); dise depressed posterior to tubercles and 2—3mm anterior of slightly thickened posterior margin, floor of depression roughened and finely punctate, with a pair of oblique anterior grooves meeting centrally in disc depression, meso- and metanotum finely punctate; anteroventral margin of front femur with 2—3 (rarely 4) large spines basally and very small almost obsolete spine distally, posterior margin with a large distal spine. Abdomen. T2—6 weakly punctate to punctate laterally, very finely punctate medially, posterior margin of T6 thickened laterally producing а very broadly rounded ridge continuing to lateral mar- gin (Fig. 9G), laterocaudal angle slightly produced into a very small caudally directed spine (Fig. 9E); T7 punctate, laterocaudal angle produced into an acute oblique spine directed ventrocaudally (Fig. 9E); supraanal plate punctate, anteromedial margin smooth, laterocaudal angle slightly produced forming a broadly rounded obtuse spine directed caudally, posterior margin weakly crenulate; S2-6 punctate laterally, S3-6 sparsely and finely punctate posteriorly and anteromedially, hroadly rounded and concavely truncated posteriorly ex- posing subgenital plate; subgenital plate finely punctate; cerci bulbous and densely setaceous ventrally except on apical tip, dorsal surface non- setose and with a medial ridge basally, posterior margin concave (Fig. 9E); genitalia well developed. L2d absent, L2vm and L1 present, R2 developed into a strong sclerotised hook (Fig. 9A). Female Differs from male as follows: pronotum with weaker premarginal tubercles, disc less depressed; S7 broadly rounded but not concavely truncated posteriorly; subgenital plate absent; slightly larger than male. Measurements. Total length 41.3—42.4, prono- tal length x width 10.0-10.5 x 15.5—16.5. Nymph Similar to adults but without adult pronotal characters. DISTRIBUTION AND BIOLOGY Known only from the type locality in fairly heavy loam with Eucalyptus and Callitris forest; not abundant, The soil is usually hard and the burrows shallow. REMARKS Shaped like P. gigantea it is darker and lacks the row of spines on the sixth tergite. ETYMOLOGY Latin saxunr, rock and -cola. dweller. Neogeoscapheus barbarae sp. nov. (Fig. 11) MATERIAL EXAMINED HOLOTYPE: d ikm S of Brigooda, 26°15'5 151°25°E, dug up, 25.1.1992, HAR, QM. PARATYPES: 1 d, 1 9, ‘Marshlands’ 12km N of Hives- ville, dug up, 25.11.1988, HAR, DR, JRW, ANIC; 1 d, 1 9 same data as holotype, ОМ; 1 d, "Marshlands 12km N of Hivesville, dag up, 25.11.1988, HAR, DR, JRW, QM. OTHER MATERIAL: Queensland: 13 9 , 10 9, 3 d nymphs, 3 ? nymphs, same data as 'Marshlands' paratypes, USIC; | 8,2 9,2 c nymphs, 3 ? nymphs, same data as holotype, USIC. DESCRIPTION Male Colour. Head and thorax very dark brown to black; pro-, meso- and metanotum slightly fer- rugimeous posteriorly; tuberculate areas of pronotum black; legs black, tarsi and ventral sur- face of meso-and metafemurs ferrugineous; ter- gites black; S1—6 shiny black laterally, ferrugineous medially; S7 black, ferrugineous anteromedially; subgenital plate black, posterior margin often ferrugineous; cerci dark brown, light brown apically; dorsal and ventral surfaces shiny. Measurements. Total length 44.6 (42.7—53.6), pronotal length x width 12.2 x 19.5 (11 7-15.3 x 17.3-22.2). Head. Punctate. hidden under pronotum, frons slightly depressed between antennal sockets. Thorax. Pronotum convex, subsemicircular, anterior margin slightly indented medially, with a medial premarginal thickening forming à pair of broad transverse tubercles which are slightly 280 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 10. A, Macropanesthia rothi sp. nov., holotype д; habitus, dorsal view. recurved (Fig. 11D); disc depressed posterior to tubercles to 2-3mm from posterior margin, floor of depression transversely striate behind anterior tubercles and anterior to a pair of oblique anterior grooves, a pair of feeble separated disc tubercles present posterior to oblique grooves, remainder of pronotum punctate, punctations slightly stronger and denser anterolaterally; meso- and metanotum finely and sparsely punctate; anteroventral margin of front femur with 2—3 (rarely 4) large spines basally and small distal spine, posterior margin with a large distal spine. Abdomen. Tergites weakly punctate, puncta- tions denser laterally; laterocaudal angle of T6 not produced, posterior margin with a large acute spine 3mm from the lateral margin (Fig. 116), spine often blunt; T7 punctate, punctations larger and denser medially, laterocaudal angle produced into a spine directed laterally and slightly reflexed dorsally (Fig. 11C); supraanal plate punctate, laterocaudal angles produced obtusely, posterior margin smooth and slightly upturned; sternites punctate, punctations weak B, Macropanesthia saxicola sp. nov., holotype д. A,B, anteromedially, stronger and denser laterally: 57 broadly rounded, with a shallow concave trunca- tion exposing subgenital plate; subgenital plate weakly punctate posteriorly; cerci bulbous taper- ing to an acute rounded up, proximal half with a dorsal medial ridge, densely setaceous ventrally except along apical margins, dorsal surface non- setose; genitalia well developed, L2d absent, L2vm and L1 present, R2 developed into a strong sclerotised hook (Fig. 1 1B). Female Differs from male as follows: pronotum with premarginal thickening greatly reduced, tubercles absent, disc slightly depressed in anterior half only; subgenital plate absent; ster- nite 7 broadly rounded but not concavely trun- caled posteriorly. Measurements. Total length 40.7—51.7, prono- tal length x width 11.0-12.9 x 17.5-19.9. Nymph Similar to adults but without adult pronotal AUSTRALIAN GEOSCAPHEINAE 281 FIG. 11. Neogeoscapheus barbarae sp. nov., holotype d. A, habitus, dorsal view; B, genitalia, K2-L2vm-L 1; C, lateral margins of T7 and supraanal plate, dorsal view; D, pronotum, lateral view; E, lateral portion of posterior margin of T6, posterior view. characters (anterior tubercles and depressed disc). DISTRIBUTION AND BIOLOGY Two populations of this species are known from SE Queensland. The type locality near Brigooda is in softwood scrub with scattered evergreen vine thickets on a brown to red loam. The ‘Marshlands’ population lives in a similar habitat. REMARKS Siaular to N. hirsutus (Shaw) but distin- guished by a well produced spine on the posterior margin of T6, rather than a rounded tubercle. It is also darker in colour than N. hirsutus. ETYMOLOGY For Barbara Rose, wife of H. A. Rose, and who has been involved with research into soil burrow- ing cockroaches since 1975. 282 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG. 12. Parapanesthia pearsoni sp. nov. A-E, holotype 5; Е, paratype d. A, habitus, dorsal view; B, genitalia, L2vm-L]; C, laterocaudal angle of T6, lateral margins of T7 and supraanal plate; D, pronotum, lateral view; E, lateral portion of posterior margin of T6, posterior view; Е, genitalia, L1-L2vm-R2. Parapanesthia pearsoni sp. nov. (Fig. 12) MATERIAL EXAMINED HOLOTYPE. d , Blackdown Tableland, Dawson Range, 23?49'S 149"06'E, dug up, 15.xii.1986, HAR, DR, JRW, QM. PARATYPES: 1 5,1 2, Blackdown Tableland, Dawson Range, 23749'S 149°06'E, dug up, iv.1988, HAR, ANIC; 1 d, 1 9, Blackdown Tableland, Dawson Range, 23°49’S 149°06’E, dug up, 26.iv.1992, BRR, HAR, JAW, JRW, QM. OTHER MATERIAL: | 9,1 9 nymph, Blackdown Tbld, Oct. 1985, S. C. Pearson, QM; 2 5,3 9,1 d nymph, Blackdown Tableland, Dawson Range, 23°49’°S 149°06'E, dug up, iv.1988, HAR, USIC; 2 8,2 9,1 d nymph, 4 9 nymphs, data as for holotype, USIC; 3 d, 2 9, 8 d nymphs, 9 9? nymphs, Blackdown Tableland, Dawson Range, 23?49'S 149°06’E, dug up, 26.vi.1992, BRR, HAR, JAW, JRW, USIC. AUSTRALIAN GEOSCAPHEINAE DESCRIPTION Male Colour. Head black, clypeus brown; pronotum black, ferrugineous laterally; meso- and metanotum ferrugineous to black: legs very dark brown to black, spines black apically, pot surface of meso- and metafemur errugineous to tan; T1—6 very dark brown to black; T7 and supraanal plate black; 51—65 black, ferrugineous anteromedially, subgenital plate black; cerci dark brown to black; dorsal and ventral surfaces shiny. Measurements. Total length 54.4 (51.4—52.4), ronotal length x width 16.7 x 24.4 (15,2-15,9 x 3,0—23.8). Head. Punctate, hidden under pronotum, frons weakly striate transversely and slightly depressed between antennal sockets. Thorax. Pronotum convex, subsemicircular, anterior margin with a medial premarginal thick- ening forming a pair of broad transverse tubercles which are slightly recurved (Fig. 12D), anterior margin may be feebly indented medially; dise depressed postenor to tubercles to 23mm from the medially thickened posterior margin, floor of depression transversely striate behind anterior tubercles and anterior to a pair of oblique grooves, pronotum with fine sparse punctations; meso-and metanotum finely and sparsely punctate; anteroventral margin of front femur with 3-4 (rarely 2) large spines basally and a small distal spine, posterior margin with а Jarge distal spine. Abdomen. Tergites punctate, punctations stronger and denser laterally; laterocaudal angle of T6 produced laterally into an acute oblique spine, slightly reflexed dorsally; posterior margin of T6 with 4—6 (rarely 3 or 7) irregular erect teeth laterally (Fig. 12E); T7 strongly punctate, laterocaudal angle produced into a short slightly upturned oblique spine (Fig. 12C), posterior mar- gin may or may not possess 2 or 3 small teeth laterally in a similar position to those on Тб; supraanal plate strongly and densely punctate, laterocaudal angles slightly produced obtusely. posterior margin smooth or weakly undulate and slightly upturned; $1—6 weakly punctate medial- ly, punctations stronger and denser laterally, 57 broadly triangular, concavely truncated posteriorly exposing subgenital plate; cerci bul- bous, tapering to a broadly rounded tip, proximal half with a dorsal medial ridge, setaceous ventral- ly except apically and on anterior margin, dorsal surface nonsetose: genitalia slightly reduced, L2d absent, L2vm present, L] weak, R2 reduced to a 283 mound (Fig. 12B.F). Female Differs from male as follows: pronotum with premarginal thickening reduced, tubercles almost obsolete, disc depressed for anterior half only, posterior margin hardly thickened; subgenital plate absent; S7 not concavely truncated posteriorly. Measurements. Total length 46.2—51.4, prono- tal length x width 12.4—13.4 x 20.2—20.6. Nymph Similar to adults but without adult pronotal characters (anterior tubercles and depressed disc). Tubercles on posterior margin of T6 less produced than in adults. DISTRIBUTION AND BIOLOGY Known only from type locality in Eucalyptiex forest on a fine grey to black loam. REMARKS The holotype has the R2 genital phallomere missing (Fig. 12B). Desiccation and hardening of the specimen made dissection of genitalia dif- ficult. It is likely that the R2 phallomere was lost during dissection as all other male specimens examined possessed this sclerite. Р. gigantea is much smaller than this species and not as dark. ETYMOLOGY For Steve Pearson, a ranger at Blackdown Tableland National Park, who discovered the species. DISCUSSION Genscapheinae are concentrated in SE Queensland (10 of 19 species are found only in SEQ). Some live within a few km of each other but are not sympatric. Populations of G. dilat- atus and G. robustus from some semi-arid regions of Queensland, New South Wales and South Australia are known to be sympatric. M. kraussiana and G. dilataius also occur in sym- patry near Cobar and south of Broken Hill. Generic assignment was difficult in some cases. P. pearson? sp. nov. and №. barbarae sp. nov., for example, fit into existing genera easily but others have features of more than one genus. This i5 also reflected hy the wide differences in male genitalia, in contrast to the rest of the Blaberidae. Genitalia are generally considered to be conservative with respect to evolution and show little diversification (McKittrick, 1964). 284 However, the Geoscapheinae are a clearly defined group, all being similar in gross morphol- ogy, ecology and behaviour. Perhaps genera may not reflect phylogeny? Further studies of inter- generic relationships are needed. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS We thank museum curators for loan of specimens, in particular Dr Geoff Monteith, Queensland Museum, whose keen interest led to discovery of several new species. We also thank Malcolm Ricketts for help and advice with photography, and Andrew Kotze, Barbara and Matthew Rose, Laurie Sanchez and Jim Wood- ward, who assisted in collection of specimens. Funding from the Australian Research Council to H. A. Rose is gratefully acknowledged. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM LITERATURE CITED MCKITTRICK, Е.А, 1964. Evoutionary studies of cockroaches. Cornell University Agricultural Ex- periment Station Memoirs 389: 1-197. ROTH, L. M. 1977. A taxonomic revision of the Panes- thiinae of the world. I. The Panesthiinae of Australia (Dictyoptera: Blattaria: Blaberidae). Australian Journal of Zoology Supplementary Series 48: 1-112. RUGG, D. & ROSE, H.A. 1984. The taxonomic sig- nificance of reproductive behaviour in some Australian cockroaches (Blattodea: Blaberidae). Journal of the Australian Entomological Society 23: 118. 1991. Biology of Macropanesthia rhinoceros Saus- sure (Dictyoptera: Blaberidae). Annals of the En- tomological Society of America 84: 575—582. HIMANTURA FAI JORDAN & SEALE (MYLIOBATIFORMES: DASY ATIDIDAE), FROM HERON ISLAND AND ITS MONOGENEAN PARASITE FAUNA IAN D. WHITTINGTON AND PETER R. LAST Whittington, I.D. & Last, Р.К. 1994 0601: Himantura fai Jordan & Seale (Myliobatiformes: Dasyatididae) from Heron Island and its monogenean parasite fauna. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 35(1): 285-289. Brisbane. ISSN 0079-8835. Close examination of a host stingray identified formerly as Himantura матак (Forsskál) from Heron Island, Queensland, Australia reveals it instead to be H. fai Jordan & Seale, à Карун not previously recorded from Australian waters. A diagnosis is given for this гау, along with information on ils distribution and features which distinguish M. fai from other Himantura species found in the Great Barrier Reef. Previous records of its monogenean parasite fauna are clarified to avoid further confusion. Himantura warnak, H. fai, elas- mobranch ray, Myliobariformes, Dasyatididae, Heron Island, Monogenea, parasites. lan D, Whittington; Department of Parasitology, University of Queensland, St Lucia. Brisbane, Queensland 4072, Australia; Peter R. Last, C.S.LR.O., Division of Fisheries, Castray Esplanade, Hobart, Tasmania 7001, Australia; address correspondence 10 IDW; 12 May 1993, A checklist of parasites from Heron Island (23°27'S, 151°55°Б) in the Greal Barrier Reef, Qucensland, Australia (Lester & Sewell, 1989) included data on parasites from 122 species of fish, Their manuscript was compiled largely by parasite taxonomists participating ina week-long workshop in 1986 at the Heron Island Research Station of the University of Queensland (see Lester & Sewell, 1989), Subsequently, the island was visited by one of us (IDW) five times be- 1ween. 1987 and 1991 to collect material for parasite studies. During this period, 30 specimens were dissected and additional photographs were taken or acquired of a stingray (Dasyatididae) listed by Lester & Sewell (1989) as Himantura warnak (Forsskál,V775). Most of these specimens were caught using a beach seine at Shark Bay, Heron Island, on a rising tide in the afternoon and in water no deeper than 1.5m. After initially examining colour transparencies of specimens, one of us (PRL) concluded that the host species had been misidentified. Later, two frozen intact females (disc widths approximately 63 and 76cm) and the claspers and tail of a mature male (disc width approximately 78cm) were sent to Hobart to be positively identified. The dasyatidid genus Himantura Muller & Henle is widely distributed in the Indo-Pacific region with two additional species in the western Atlantic and eastern Pacific. In the absence of a recent revision, group members are frequently misidentified. Compagno & Roberts (1982), in describing a new species of Himantura, recog- nised 18 valid species. However, a revision in progress by one of us (PRL, unpubl. data), hs found that the taxon is polyphyletic and consists of several species complexes. The synonymy scheme proposed by Compagno & Roberts ир- pears to be conservative. Members of a complex of species with prominent dorsal colour patterns of spots and/or reticulations are frequently misidentified as Himantura uarnak. In. addition, some plainly coloured species, such as Himantura fai Jordan & Seale, 1906 also appear to have been confused with H. uarnak. Although specimens of H. fai are known from Australian waters, these reports have not been documented. H. матак and H. fai are widely distributed in the tropical Indo-Pacific, and both species are likely to occur off Heron Island. Among other characters, their dorsal colorations are diagnostic and, if taken together, they are highly unlikely to be regarded as con: specific even by non-taxonomists. The frozen specimens and photographs of the hosts from which parasites were taken at Heron Island are H. fai rather than Н. uarnak. Data on the Heron Island specimens are provided herein along with distinguishing features from other local Himan- tura species. In addition, the records of its monogenean parasite fauna are clarified to avoid further confusion. MATERIALS AND METHODS Standard morphometric data were obtained from two female specimens of Himantura fai from Heron Island (registration numbers of 286 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM FIG, 1. A, Himantura fai (disc width, approximately 76cm) from Heron Island; B, Himantura uarnak (disc width, approximately 1.8 m) from north-western Australia, a species with which H. fai has been confused at Heron Island. Н. FAI JORDON & SEALE AT HERON ISLAND 287 TABLE ] - The known species of monogenean parasites from Himantura fai (formerly identificd as H. uarnak) at Heron Island, Queensland, Australia — EL Gill. G21005 1-78 (28 [Beg detis or of opha M. multiparous Gills E E 9] (13 B&W = Beverley-Burton mt hes | M = Measures etal. (1990) specimens: CSIRO H2753-01 & H2754-01; 629- 764 mm disc width, 23?27'S, 151?55^ E, Shark Bay, Heron Island, Great Barrier Reef, collected by LD. Whittington using bcach seine, depth: L.Sm, February 1991) which are now held in the LS.R. Munro Ichthyological Collection, Hoban, Australia. SYSTEMATICS Himantura fai Jordan & Seale, 1906 DIAGNOSIS Disc quadrangular, robust centrally, slightly wider than long, apices broadly rounded; snout very broad, tip feebly pointed; eyes small, length of eye and spiracle about 2.6-3.0 in preorbital snout length; interorbital space broad. Mouth rather small, 4 papillae on floor (central pair enlarged, lateral pair minute). Head and trunk entirely smooth in juveniles, mostly smooth in adults apart from band of low, flat, widely spaced, heart-shaped denticles extending from interorbi- tal region posteriorly over centre of disc and onto midline of tail; no enlarged thorns on body or tail. Tail very long, whip-like, almost cylindrical anteriorly, lacking cutaneous folds, Uniformly brownish pink on dorsal surface, whitish ventral- ly, tail black beyond stinging spine, Attaining a large size (disc width exceeding 1.5m, greater than Sm total length). MORPHOMETRICS The following measurements are expressed as a percentage of disc width. Total length 277.1- 298.3, disc length 84,3-88.1, snout to maximum width 34.0-36.4, distance snout to axil of pectoral fin 74.0-77.1, disc thickness 11.3-12.1, snout preorbital 21.1, snout preoral 19.1-19.5, snout prenasal 14,9-15.3, head length 38.6-39.3, snout lo origin of cloaca 71.5-73.6, cloaca to sting 30.5-31.3, cloaca ta tail tip 200,1-220.7, orbit diameter 4.1-4.2, eye diameter 2.6, interorbital width 12.0- 13.5. orbit and spiracle length 7.1-7.7, spiracle length 4,8-5,5, distance between spiracles 14.8-15.4, mouth width 6.5-7.5, dis- tance between nostrils 8.4, nostril length 4.2-4.3, nasal сипаш length 4.9-5.1, width Ist gill slit 2.6-2.7, width Sth gill slit 2.2-2.3, distance be- tween Ist gill slits 17.1-18.0, distance between Sth gill slits 11.4-12.1, length pelvic fin 130- 14.8, width across pelvic-fin base 8.0-8.9, tail width at axil of pelvic fins 4.9-5.0, tail height at ахи of pelvic fins 4.3-4.7, tail width at base of sting 1.8-1.9, tail height at base of sting 2.1. DISTRIBUTION Indian Ocean from South Africa to the Caroline Islands. In Australian waters, known from the inner continental shelf off tropical Australia from Shark Bay, Western Australia to Bundaberg, Queensland, OTHER HIMANTURA SPECIES OCCURRING NEAR HERON ISLAND Misidentification of /7imantura fai trom Heron Island has undoubtedly resulted from the poor state of published information on the group. Woodland & Slack-Smith (1963) reported the occurrence of H, granulata (Macleay, 1883) (as Dasyatis. granulatus) from Heron Island. Gocden (1974), in a revised list of fishes of the Heron Wistari Marine National Park, listed only a single species of Himantura (H. uarnak as Hymantena патак). In а more recent checklist of fishes of the Capricom-Bunker Group, Russell (1983) reinstated H, granulatu, Wis likely, based on unpublished catch information from nearby, that Н. undulata (Bleeker, 1852) and H. roshi Whitley, 1939, may also occur within the park boundary. Н. fai differs from H. uarnak, Н. un- dulatu and Н, toshi in being plain coloured with a black tail (rather than being covered in a pattern of black spots, ocelli or reticulations and having a banded tail). Fig. 1 shows à specimen of H. fai from Heron Island and a specimen of H. uarnak from north-western Australia to show the dif- ferences in dorsal markings. Н, granulata is usually covered in fine white flecks and spots (rarely plain coloured) and has a whitish tail. 288 PARASITE FAUNA OF HIMANTURA FAI Lester & Sewell (1989) listed three species of monogencans from ‘Himantura uarnak' at Heron Island but only onc of these was identified to species level, namely Thaumatocoryle australen- sis Beverley-Burton & Williams, 1989 from the nasal cavities. The other monogeneans listed were given as Heterocotyle sp. and Monocotyle sp., each from the gills, and are records ascribed to Dr M. Beverley-Burton (University of Guelph, Canada). The record for Monocotyle sp. has since been presented as three separate species by Measures et al. (1990), namely M. helicophallus, M. multiparous and M. spiremae. From Novem- ber 1987 to February 1991, a total of 30 specimens (23 females, 7 males; disc widths 53- 89cm} of the stingray in question Were examined by IDW for monogeneans and specimens of most (and often all) of the parasite species listed above were found on 26 of the stingray specimens ex- amined. Voucher specimens of each of these monogenean species from H. fai have been deposited at the Queensland Museum (Brisbane, Australia) and the registration details are presented in Table 1. The checklist of Lester & Sewell (1989) should be amended to attribute Himantara fai Jordan & Seale, 1906 as the host species for the monogeneans listed in Table 1. A Heterocotyle sp. from the gills recorded in Lester & Sewell (1989) is thought to be a new species and will be described in a later publication. Two other undescribed species of capsalid monogeneans belonging to the subfamily Benedeniinae have also been found from the skin of H. fai and these will be described by the senior author. The checklist of Lester & Sewell (1989) also lists several cestodes from the intestine of 'H. пати based on identifications by Professor Н.Н. Williams (Open University, Wales). These parasite records were not verified in the present study but, as they were probably collected along with the monogeneans described by Measures et al. (1990), it seems likely that the cestodes listed in Lester & Sewell (1989) from 'H. warnak’ belong to H. fai. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Grants to IDW from the Australian Research Council (grant nos. A18716336 for 1988-1989 and 419194] for 1991) arc gratefully acknow- ledged as is an ARC Queen Elizabeth Il Fellow- ship awarded to IDW. Our thanks are due to the MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Director and staff of the Heron Island Research Station, the University of Queensland, for their hospitality and facilities. The stingrays were caught with the assistance of the following per- sons: Rob Adlard, Diane Barton, Mary Beverley- Burton, Tom Cribb, Margaret Kearn, Sylvie Pichelin, Ray & Sally Roth, Kathleen Torrko. We wish to thank John Salini of the C.S.LR.O. Division of Fisheries at Cleveland, Queensland for organizing the shipment of frozen stingrays from Queensland to Tasmania. Sven Meyer helped with the collection of morphometric data. The photographs were provided Kindly by the CSIRO Division of Fisheries. LITERATURE CITED BEVERLEY-BURTON, M. & WILLIAMS А, 1989, Merizocotyle ісорае sp. nov., and Thaumatocotyle australensis sp. nov., (Monogenea: Monocotylidae) from the пака! cavities of rajiform elasmobranchs of the Great Barrier Reef. Australian Journal of Zoology 37: 25-35. BLEEKER, P. 1852. Bijdrage tot de kennis der plagios- tomen van den Indischen Archipel. Verhandelin- gen van het Bataviaasch genootschap van Kunsten en Wetenschappen 24: 1-92. COMPAGNO, ЈУ, & ROBERTS, Т.К. 1982, Fresh- waler stingrays (Dasyatidae) of Southeast Asia and New Guinea, with description of a new species of Himantura and reports of unidentified species. Environmental Biology of Fishes 7: 321- 339. FORSSKAL, P. 1775. ‘Descriptiones animalium, avium, amphibiorum, iscium, insectorum, ver- mum; quae in itirene orientali observavit', (Molleri: Hauniae.) GOEDEN, G.B. 1974, Revised list of fishes of Heron Wistari Marine National Park, Queensland Department of Forestry Technical Paper 2: 1-19. JORDAN, D. S. & SEALE, A. 1906. The lishes of Samoa, Description of the species found in the archipelago, with a provisional check-list of the fishesof Oceania. U.S. Department of Commerce and Labor. Bulletin of the Bureau of Fisheries 25 (1905): 173-455. LESTER, R.J.G. & SEWELL, K.B. 1989. Checklist of parasites from Heron Island, Great Barrier Reef, Australian Journal of Zoology 37: 101-28. MACLEAY, W.J. 1883. Notes on acollection of fishes {rom the Burdekin and Mary Rivers, Queensland. Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales 8 (2): 199-213. H. FAI JORDON & SEALE AT HERON ISLAND 289 MEASURES, L.N., BEVERLEY-BURTON, M. & WILLIAMS, A. 1990. Three new species of Monocotyle (Monogenea: Monocotylidae) from the stingray, Himantura uarnak (Rajiformes: Dasyatidae) from the Great Barrier Reef: phylogenetic reconstruction, systematics and amended diagnoses. International Journal for Parasitology 20: 755-767. MÜLLER, J. & HENLE, F.G.J. 1837. Gattung der Halifische und Rochen, nach ihrer Arbeit: “Uber die Naturgeschichte der Knorpelfische". Sit- zungsberichte der Deutschen Akademie der Wis- senschaften zu Berlin 1836: 111-118. RUSSELL, B.C. 1983. ‘Annotated checklist of the coral reef fishes in the Capricorn-Bunker Group, Great Barrier Reef Australia’. (Great Barrier Reef Marine Parks Authority: Townsville.) WHITLEY, G. P. 1939. Taxonomic notes on sharks and rays. Australian Zoologist 9: 227-262. WOODLAND, D.J. AND SLACK-SMITH, R.J. 1963. Fishes of Heron Island, Capricorn Group, Great Barrier Reef. Papers of the Department of Zool- ogy, The University of Queensland 2: 15-69. CONTENTS (continued) NOTES COOK, А.С. & TURNER, S. Middle Devonian scolecodonts from north Queensland ........................................ 22 COUPER, P.J., COVACEVICH, J.A. & MORITZ, C. Designation of the type species of Saltuarius, and other data on the genus ......................... 26 INGRAM, GJ. The holotype of Mocoa spectabilis De Vis, 1988 2.0.2.2... 06 cc ccc ee ee ett зз +з. 34 IRWIN, S. Notes on behaviour and diet of Varanus teriae Sprackland, 1991 ........ АРТРИТ Е 128 LINDENMAYER, D.B. & VIGGERS, K.L. Northern range limits of the long nosed potoroo, Potorous tridactylus .. 0.0.00 cee 180 PATERSON, R.A. Unusual humpback whale sightings at Cape Moreton ........... 2.0.02 cece cece nee teens 224 ROBERTS, L. : New data on Cryptoblepharus fuhni, a poorly known skink from Queensland ..................... 234 WILLIAMS, S. The importance of riparian habitats to vertebrate assemblages in north Queensland woodlands ........ 248 CONTENTS BABA, K. Deep -Sea galatheid crustaceans (Anomura: Galatheidae) collected by the ‘Cidaris l’ Expedition off central Queensland, Australia ......... ecciesie Rh hme 1 CLIFFORD, H.T. & CARNEY, L.G, A non-destructive technique for determining the shapes in situ of permineralized seeds .............. 23 COOK, A.G. A septate gastropod from the Silurian Bungonia Limstone, New South Wales ..................... 27 COUPER, P.J., COVACEVICH, J.A. & LETHBRIDGE, P.J. Carlia parrhasius, a new Queensland skink ........,........... ИА n nece SES oh 31 DAVIE, P J.F. Revision of Neosarmatium Serene and Soh (Crustacea: Brachyura: Sesarminae) with descriptions of S OA Eins i M M LATET WES AMT RTT NT 35 DAVIES, V.T. The huntsman spiders Heteropoda Latreille and Yiinthi gen.nov. (Araneae: Heteropodidae) in Australia 75 GUO, Z. & CHOY, S.C. Caridina pedicultrata, a new freshwater atyid shrimp (Caridea: Atyidae) from Hunan Province, China . 123 HUNT, G.S. Solenozetes gallonae sp.nov., first record of the family Plasmobatidae in Australia (Acari: Oribatida) . 129 KOHOUT, RJ. New synonymy of three Australian ants (Formicidae: Formicinae: Polyrhachis) .................. 135 KOHOUT, KJ. Polyrhachis lama, a new ant from the Tibetan plateau (Formicidae: Formicinae) .................. 137 LIMPUS, C.J., COUPER, P.J. & READ, M.A. The Green Turtle, Chelonia mydas, in Queensland: population structure in a warm temperate Decline ames ceria ce, fae See E E Ite os TM А Duo ed RESPIRARE cap weve also ЕТАР С. 139 McALLAN, LA.W. John Gilbert's missing monlBié аен naan sé meta Hees ad eres gk aan MAI C S 155 McKENZIE, E.D. & PRENTICE, S.A. The first underground mains for electricity supply in Brisbane ................................ 181 NGOC-HO, N. Notes on some Indo-Pacific Upogebiidae with descriptions of four new species (Crustacea: Thalassinidea) ......... TIO POUR, Е OL Dees EMG те пее соза а Сее 193 PATERSON, К.А. An annotated list of recent additions to the cetacean collection in the Queensland Museum .......... 217 ROTH, L.M. New Queensland cockroaches of Macrocerca Hanitsch and Periplaneta Burmeister (Blattidae) ...... 225 SHORT, J.W. A new species of freshwater crab (Sundathelphusidae ) from Cape York Peninsula ................ 235 STANISIC, J. An ecologic and biogeographic study of a new Tertiary land snail from mideastern Queensland (Pulmonata: Сагуойїйае)....................... E AM RM T XE n ER 241 THWAITES, A.J. & WILLIAMS, L.E. The summer whiting fishery in southeast Queensland ...........................++..++.3ә.. 249 VOLK, P. Catalogue of meteorites, tektites and associated material іп the Queensland Museum ,.............. 255 WALKER, J.A., RUGG, D. & ROSE, Н.А. Nine new species of Geoscapheinae (Blattodea: Blaberidae) from Australia ...................... 263 WHITTINGTON I.D. & LAST, Р.К. Hinmantura fai Jordan & Seale (Myliobatiformes: Dasyatididae) from Heron Island and its PHONE PENA parasite FAUNA. а аан ое рине ж Bee кь LEA AA DEG Se ra нера 285 (continued inside cover)